Anda di halaman 1dari 468

J...

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION,JAPAN

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OF

230/115 kV 44/63 MVA TIE TRANSFORMER

APPROVED WITH CONDi7IO\\i" I


OUT Leil.., No, 5;2;14 jCY·Ai'()!\·r,

~-
O"j"d:

'~:~'i~"M~"
<\->~/" ,r: A -"<,••••....
~'-'\::'_

; !)/Illil""l;!ii
-ii,:
.", r -
t _\ ' 'J '(
1/,(/ "~
'1/~~'
'I,.' j fi
i j' ,', f.\;
NOv 02bJ2:!'.""M~~~~."~"

",~l ;.~ ,""ON" ""


!',,!
'.<"""

i
j
.1' ... " '.~ .,
,
li!-,

V\'
I,

~ £c•• "

'", r.
.x" t't'/
''l.J; ~

I P \ i , 1I
f!iop T ION]
" Jl\, . '~ --_......;(.\" i ~" (n,::,,, i7fJL Ii n
~ REPUBLic OF VIET NAM
~-n
~-l "
~""",y
,V,\
C",\ lll~ L $/1
~"~dwi
ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM(EVN)
------------- HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5

BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT


If;,y~ 1:1'i.cTRiG Ca9PO", LOT No, 27

S§j>~~
~ $9- ~ Sumitomo Corporation
1:( OCT. 17. 2007 I
~1ID;~f!J1lWll~
~ A~~' )... MITSUBISHI
~~ ' "., ) t',·,Nt~:~ ,,;;:/
¢~ • ,~~,
lOo a7dD
,I IstnLUW)\
"?
\.t>~
ELECTRIC 'OO£~J ••.•
._._-,,<~-

CORRESPONDING SECTION 06020


PROJECT FILE NUMBER BK-6020-750
DRAWN

A.lii1.UlY"J
UJ CHECKED

(j 51 ~o--"v~"-'
DESIGNED
Z
/'-4, V~>
<{ APPROVED

I H. P.
DRAWING LIST NO.
0
SDT-L.1946

(1/7 )
CONTENTS
1. MAINTENANCE
2. INSTALLATION
3. OPERATION
4. DRAWINGS
5. CATALOGUES

SDT-L.1946
(2/7 )
1. MAINTENANCE
1.1 MAINTENANCE MANUAL SSN-91779

SDT-L.1946
(3/7 )
SOCIAL REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
Customer: ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM

SUbject HYDROPOWER.PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5


BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT LOT NO.2?

MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS


TITLE .. (For Main Transformer & Tie Transformer)

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS CENTER(AKO)

REVISION QUALITY CONTROL SECTION

No. DESCRIPTION DATE


0 FIRST ISSUE 26 Aug.,2007

c2f~$
M. SAKAMOTO
Manager of Quality Management Section

a.~:%"~' M. Takahashi
Prepared by

SHEET REFERENCE No. REV.


SSN-91779 0
EGAT-SSN91779. doc
CONTENTS
Page
1 . FOF(E:V\lOF(El ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

2. F(E:QUIF(E:ME:NTS FOF( INSPE:CTION MAINTE:NANCE: ------------------------------------------ 1

2.1 General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1


2.2 In sp ecti 0 n records -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
2.3 Action for safety ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

3. INSPE:CTION ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

3. 1 F(outi ne insp ecti 0 n --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3


3.2 Pe ri odi cal inspecti 0 n -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
3.3 Additi 0 nal inspecti 0 n ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

4. MAl NTE:NANC E: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

5. TF( 0 UBLE: SHOOTI NG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13


Eliagnosis of protective relays in operation
Action for Oil leakage

[F(eference]
1) Allowable value of transformer insulation resistance ( Fig.1) ----------------------------- 15
2) F(elation between dielectric strength and amount of water ----------------------------------- 15
in insulating oil( Fig.2)
3) Criteria of breakdown voltage for insulation oil (Table 5) --------------------------------- 16
4) Criteria of power factor for insulating oil (Table 6) ------------------------------------------ 16
5) Criteria of resistivity for insulating oil (Table 7 ) ------------------------------------------- 16
6) Criteria of acid value for insulating oil (Table 8 ) ------------------------------------------ 16
7) Permissible value of tan tJ of Bushing(oil-impregnated type) Table 9 ----------------- 17
8) Gas analysis(Table 10) Combustible gas and type of fault with ElGA --------------------17

6. APPE:NElIX
7.

APPE:NElIX I Action for safety quality --------------------------------------------------- 1 8


APPE:NElIX II Technical information to be sent to the manufacture ---------------- 19
APPE:NElIX ill V\lelding method for oil leak ---------------------------------------------- 2 0
APPE:NElIX N Main transformer outline drawing(SA36350)------------------- --------2 1 /22
APPE:NElIX V Tie Transformer outline drawing(SV19275)-------------- -------------- 2 2 /22

S S N -91779

EGAT-SSN91779. doc
1. FOREWORD

Power transformers are getting larger in their capacity to meet increasing power demand.
So emergency or unexpected power outages due to transformer trouble cause much loss of
production as well as inconvenience.

Therefore it is essential to assure trouble-free performance by a well planned maintenance program.


Daily or periodical inspections will result in detecting abnormal conditions of a transformer and parts
before they cause any more serious troubles.
A regular program of inspection should be established and rigidly carried out for preventive
maintenance of power transformers.

This instruction book describes inspection and maintenance methods to keep transformers in good
condition. As for construction, functions and handling of accessories, the corresponding instruction
book should be referred to for more detailed information.

2. REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

2.1 General

(lJ The inspection items are classified into three categories in this instruction book.

(a) Routine inspection items ( Table 1 )


The routine inspection should be made, preferably daily, on every transformer in service.
Especially, oil leak, oil temperature and/or winding temperature, load current, ambient temperature
and oil level in transformer should be daily checked and recorded on a check-sheet that is prepared
by customer based on this maintenance manual.

(b) Periodical inspection items ( Table 2 )


The periodical inspection should be made at least once every six months to once every three
years in order to ascertain the good performance of a transformer and its parts. Most of the
periodical inspection should be made in detail when the transformer is de-energized.

(c) Additional inspection items ( Table 3 )


Some additional inspection or measurements of electrical characteristics of a transformer are
recommended as preventive maintenance actions and when any transformer trouble should be
investigated thoroughly.

(2) Repainting of radiators and transformer tanks, and exchange of parts, gaskets and bearings of
motors should be planned and prepared previously for preventive maintenance, which will result in
continuous good performance of transformer. ( Refer to Table 4 )

-1 /22- SSN-91779
(3) If any protective relays give alarm, investigate the trouble causes according to Table 5.
It is essential in investigating the right causes to check whether differential relay, over current relay
and/or ground fault relay have operated or not, in combination with other relays such as Buchholz
relay, and pressure relief device, which have physically operating mechanisms.

(4) Transformers should be inspected internally whenever they have been subjected to unusually severe
operating conditions such as overloads and frequent short circuits of outer bus or transmission line.

(5) Any symptoms such as unusual noises, high or low oil levels, operating of pressure relief device, etc..
should be investigated thoroughly.

2.2 Inspection records.

(1) The establishment of the report and recording of the condition and repair of the transformers is
required for a good maintenance program.

<ill A preventive maintenance system will operate satisfactorily with the following records.

(a) An equipment record


This may be simply a card which contains the basic information of a transformer itself such as
the serial number, the location, size, etc.

(b) A repair record card


This may keep a running record as to costs of maintaining a transformer. It is the essential
diagnostic record for avoiding future difficulties.

(c) An inspection check list or inspector's record.


This may be simply a listing of the points to be checked on a transformer and the establishment
of the time that these checks should be made.

(3) Without these records it would be very difficult for a preventive maintenance program to work,
because the knowledge gained from regular inspections would be quickly lost.

2.3 Actions for safety

Always inspection and maintenance works are to be done very carefylly so that their schedule
should be planned in detail in view of safekeeping of human life and equipment according to
APPENDIX I.

-2/22- SSN-91779
3. INSPECTION

3.1 Routine inspection


Item 1 should be checked daily and recorded.
Table 1 ( Check items 1 to 5 with transformer in service)

No. Items Method Action

Oil temperature Read indications of oil and winding Check if indication of each indicator
and winding temperature temperature indicator. is correct or not.
Compare them with the data If the thermometer is not correct,
previously obtained. exchange with a new one.
When oil and/or winding If oil temperature is too high due to
temperature are much higher or dust and other foreign materials on
lower considering the finned area of radiators, clean
load current and ambient them up.
temperature, thermometers sh auld [f indication of thermometer is not
be inspected. correct, check oil level in the sensor
f - - - - - - - - - - - - j - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - { pocket and adjust to correct the
Load current Load current and ambient level.
Ambient temperature temperature should be recorded at
the same time.

2 Oil level When the indicated oil level is


Read indication of the dial oil level
(1) Main transformer: DTC gauge on the conservator with constant with the changing oil
a telescope. temperature, inspect the dial gauge
Tie transformer: OLTC Compare it with the oil level and check the actual oil level.
temperature curve. If the oil level is abnormal, adjust it
Oil level is deemed to be normal according to instructions. [f the oil
when its difference is within one level shows low, in case of rubber
graduation of the gauge on the bag or diaphragm type, damage of
curve. rubber bag or diaphragm is
1------------+------------------1 suspected.
(2) c) in bushing Check for oil leakage on all oil-filled If oil level of OLTC is abnormal,
bushings. breaking of seal between OLTC and
transformer is suspected.

3 Oil-leaks Check oil-leaks visually from If oil leaks are due to gasket tighten
radiators, flanges, pipes. transformer bolts or exchange gasket.
tank and so on. In case of oil leaks from welded
parts, apply adhesive material or
weld again on the leaking part.
The welding method is shown in
APPENDIX m.

4 Filter breath er Check the breathing action in oil pot If the breathing action is not
(For TR and OLTC ) and discoloration of silicagel satisfactory, check choking such as
visually. filter in oil pot.
If the color of silicagel became to
Check the oil level and color of oil pink from upper side check air leaks
in oil pot. and fix it up.
If the oil color in oil pot blackened,
replace with new silicon oil.

-3 /22- SSN-91779
No. Items Method Action

5 Unusual sound and Unusual noise. especially from When cooling fan or is getting
vibration cooling fan should be carefully noisier, exchange the with new ones.
listened to.

Abnormal vibration can be checked When any supporters, pipes and


comparatively easily by hand. other parts are vibrating due to
loose bolts, tighten them.

6 Check for corrected gas Visual inspection with telescope. If any gas trapped in the relay, the
in Buchholz relay transformer should be stopped for
investigation including gas analysis.

7 Appearance Check any looseness of bolt When any loose bolts are found,
(1 ) Bolt connection connection visually, tighten them.

(2) Discoloration Check visually that the transformer When any connections show sings of.
tank and connections are normal having been hot, clean and tighten
without any discoloration due to bolts and nuts after investigation.
local heating.

(3) Dust Inspect visually for dust, especially Clean up dust if it may reduce
on radiators. cooling capacity of coolers.

(4) Rust Inspect visually for rust, especially Re-painting is recommendable once
on radiators. every five years.
Anti-rust and final paint should be
applied after rubbing off rust and old
paint.

(5) Dew Inspect visually for dew in the If any dew is found, dry it out, and
terminal box, transformer control ensure space heaters are in use if
cubicle and protective relays. they are provided.

-4/22- SSN-91779
3.2 Periodical inspection

The recommended inspection frequency is described in parenthesis under each inspection item.

Table 2

No. Items Method Action

1 Dehydrating filter Check the discoloration of silicagel in If the color of silicagel has turned to
breather breather due to moisture in breathed pink by more than two thirds of total
(As to replacement of air. quantity. dry out or exchange it.
sillcagel and oil in oil Check choking condition of filter in
pot, every six months oil pot, them make cleaning or
approximately) Exchanging.

2 Insulating oil
(1) Gas analysis According to IEC pub.60567 or other Study in accordance with Table 10.
dissolved in oil analysis methods.

(2) Dielectric strength Measure dielectric strength by oil If any measured values are not
B.D.V( Breakdown tester (sphere electrode of Satisfactory, filtering and/or
voltage) 2.5mm gap). Refer to Fig.2. degassing of insulating oil are
( Every one year) recommended.
Criteria ofOLTC oil is shown in As for criteria of transformer oil,
Table 3.2-a. refer to Table 5.

(3) Moisture content in oil Measure moisture content in oil with Ditto
(In case of taking in Automatic Goulometric Karl-Fischer ( Criteria of Tran sformer oil )
and Titration method and confirm that it I TR. Voltage I ~275kV I >275kV I
out of insulating oil) is less than criteria. Refer to Fig.2. I M. Content I :5 30ppm I :5 20ppm I

Criteria of OLTC oil is shown in


Table 3.2-a.

(4) Power factor(tan a ) This property shall be measured in When the measured tan a and/or
and resistivity accordance with the method resistivity of oil are not satisfactory
(at 80°C and 40Hz to described in JIS C2101 or IEC to criteria, it is recommended
60Hz) Pub.247(at 80°C). Reclaiming of oil by fuller's earth or
(Everyone or two replacement of oil.
years) Each criterion is shown in (For reference:
Table 6 and 7. tan a for Bushing; Table 9 )

(5) Acid value Measure acid value and judge it with 1n case of unsatisfactory, it is
(Every two years) the criteria of Table 8. desirable to exchange with new oil.

-5 /22- SSN-91779
No. Items Method Action

3 Cooling fan motors (1)Measure insulation resistance of If insulation resistance is


fan with a 500V megger. less than 2M Q, check a balancing of
( Usually it is measured with 500V load current of three phase. In case
(Every two years or megger. ) of fan, dry out the interior of fan
the motor.
time of periodical (2)Measure load current at each If it is more than the rated current,
inspection at the phase, and compare them with check three phase balancing of load
transformer stop rated current. current.
operation) (max value - min value)
average is
Refer to the to be within 10 percent.
instruction of cooling
fan motor.

4 Cooler control cabinet (1)Check the water~tightness of a If the rubber gasket is worn out,
and terminal box and control cabinet and a terminal exchange it with a new one.
cables. include power box.
feeders coFlnections
megger test ,etc. (2)Ascertain the tightness of all Tighten the loose bolts.
. control wiring connections.
(The time of periodical
inspection at the
(3)Operate all switches, If any part mal-operates, adjust or
transformer stop
announciators and lamps to exchange them with new one.
operation)
observe proper functions according
to schematic diagrams.

(4)Measure insulation resistance of If such defect is found. put


cable with 500V megger. insulation tape on it or exchange it
Check any crack or abrading on with n~w one.
cable insulation.

-6 /22- SSN-91779
Table 3.2-a: Permissible vales for OLTC diverter oil

Permissible value
Location of OLTC
Breakdown voltage Water content

Installed to line side including


~ 40kV/2.5mm gap ;;; 30ppm
delta winding

Installed neutral side ~ 30kV/2.5mm gap ;;; 40ppm

No. Items Method Action


I
5 Protective relays Insulation resistance and operation test should be checked at the time of
transformer stop operation of periodic inspection or at least once every two
years.
(1) Dial type winding temperature indicator
(2) Dial type oil temperature indicator
(3) Dial type oil level gauge
(4) Buchholz relay
(5) Self reset type Pressure relief device
(6) Conservator shutter valve for oil leak from tank
(7) OLTC protective relay(Only Tie transformer)

(1) Insulation resistance Measure insulation resistance of When the insulation resistance is less
protective relays including their than 2M Q, check dews in the
wiring with a 500V TT)egger. terminal box.

(2) Operation check or Operation tests should be made only The cause of mal:-operation should
contact check when protective relays operated even be investigated by operation tests
if no troubles of a transformer according to instruction books for
occurred. protective relays.

6 Corrosion check on Check and record the condition of In order to prevent a serious
coolers and corrosion on coolers. corrosion, repainting shall be made at
connections The appearance of a transformer least once every five years.
should be inspected to see whether Any connection that shows signs of
( At the time of they are in good conditions without having been hot should be thoroughly
periodical inspection) any discoloration, which indicates cleaned and bolted together tightly.
"hot" connection.

-7 /22- SSN-91779
3.3 Additional inspection

The following inspections and measurements are recommended for a preventive maintenance and in
investigating a transformer trouble.
For preventive maintenance, following item 1 and 2 are recommended.
F or investigation at a time of transformer trouble, all items are recommended.

Table 3

No. Items Method Action or remarks

1 Insulating oil After a transformer is put into Whet) the amount of combustible
service, a periodic analysis of gas gases are obtained, evaluations
Analysis of dissolved dissolved in oil is recommended at can be made to a probable location
gas in oil. least every six months. and type of trouble which may be
Using an appropriate air tight present in a transformer.
container, oil should be taken from ( Refer to Table 10 )
the transformer.
The dissolved gas should be
extracted from an oil and analyzed.

2 Insulation resistance of Measure the insulation resistance The insulation resistance is subject
transformer windings between a pair of windings, to wide variation with temperature,
and between each windings and humidity and cleanness of bushing
ground by a 1,000 or 2,000 volt porcelains.
megger at the periodical inspection.
The megger test should be made to It may be low due to the leakage
check if the transformer is in suitable current through the weakest point of
condition for operation or application inferior insulation, in which case
of the dielectric test. gases dissolved in oil should be
Refer to Fig.1 . analyzed.

3 Ratio test Measure the ratio of a transformer by Compare the test results with those
two voltmeter meth ad or with a ratio in the test report.
tester. If it is difficult to measure because of
If the transformer has taps, the turn fluctuation of voltmeter pointer or
ratio should be measured for all taps because of unbalance of a bridge
as well as for the full winding. The circuit, other electric characteristic
test voltage may be between 100 and such as winding resistance shall be
200 at the rated frequency. measured.

-8 /22~ SSN-91779
No. Items Method Action or remarks

4 Winding resistance Measure the winding resistance by [f the winding resistance, corrected
bridge method or by drop of potential to a specified temperature, is
method. If oil pumps are provided, different from the data obtained
they should be operated in measuring previously, measure exciting current
winding resistance. The oil tempera- in order to check the difference.
ture should be also recorded at the
same time.
In case of low voltage and large
capacity delta winding (Ex. generator
transformer ), there is a very
difficulty to measure the winding
resistance precisely.
And needs to pay careful
co~sideration for judgement.

5 Excitation current at Measure the excitation current at low [f the measured excitation current is
low voltage . voltage(100-200volts) applied on the much larger than the original data at
lower voltage winding with other installation, measure impedance
winding being open-circuited. voltage in order to check the cause.
The voltage wave shape should be
sinusoidal. Note 1.2
Note 1.1

6 Impedance voltage Measure the impedance voltage at If the measured impedance voltage is
low current(5 - 10 amperes) applied much different from the original data
on the higher voltage winding with at installation. check again and
lower voltage winding being include other characteristics.
short-circuited. Note 3
Note 2

7 Bushing current Excitation current and winding Same as above 4 and 5.


Transformer resistance should be measured in the
same way as items 4 and 5 .

-9/22- SSN-91779
Note: 1. Excitation current at low voltage
1.1 The ammeter should be connected inside of voltmeter as shown below to avoid error due to
high
Impedance measurement.

Connection

TR
Fig.Cl)

1.2 If the measured values satisfy the expression below, the transformer may not have a serious
Injury such as layer shorting

See Fig.Cll
Measured voltage
VM/IM Rated voltage
;;;; 10
VR/[R Measured current
Rated cu rrent

Note: 2. The shorting cable should be more than 100mm' in its section and be as shorter as possible in
its length to avoid measuring error.

Cable connection

r------{A

TR

Note: 3. If those characteristic values from the item 2 to 6 are abnormally different compared the data
with original data. it is recommended to carry out a internal inspection. In this case, you are
kindly request to tell us know the information as appendix II.

-10/22- SSN-91779
4. MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of parts and materials should be planned according to the table 4.
Table 4
No. Materials and parts Maintenance frequency Remarks
Bushing: The frequency of maintenance is only When a test tap of bushing is used,
Test tap of bushing when the lid(cap) of test tap is be careful not to damage a screw
opened for measuring and/or any part of a bushing test tap. The
investigations.. test tap cap should be made
certainly after using..

Damaged screw part photo


due to insufficient tightness
of screw

2 Porcelain insulator Cleaning should be done periodically. According to each instruction book.
such as bushing, Interval depends on actual
surge arrester, circumstance condition at site.
supporting insulator

3 Cooler Dust and other foreign materials, With compressed air and/or water.
(Radiator type) accumulated on the finned area
should be blown out to maintain the Recommended cleaning frequency is
efficiency of the cooler. once every two years.

4 Paint for main body Repainting should be done once After cleaning the painted surface.
and connections every five years. Cleaning shall be made with solvent
for removal of fat.

5 Bearing of cooling fan Expected life of cooling fan motors of If a motor becomes noisy due to
motors the sealed type bearing is deterioration of bearings, replace it

approx. 3 years.
with new ones.
Replacement of this bearing shall be
In this case, grease up work is not
made according to the instruction
required.
book

6 Protective relays Each expected life is approx. ten Exchange with new ones, if the
( thermometer, years. contact is not operated in normal
pressure relay, Check the contact operation at the functions.
oil level gauge) periodical inspection including
insulation resistance.

7 Gasket for connection Expected life is approx. ten years. If oil leaks from gasket are serious,
( cork & neoprene) exchange with new ones at the time
of inspection.

8 Rubber bag of Expected life is 15 years. If any damage of rubber bag is


Conservator suspected, exchange with new one.

-11 /22- SSN-91779


·

No. Materials and parts Maintenance frequency Remarks


9 De-energized tap Operate the DTC position manually [nternal inspection is recommendable
Changer more than three both-way changes before DTC contact operation. if the
(For Main transformer) every several years when transformer tap position is not operated more
is out of service. than 3 years.
Experience shows that up to 25
switching operations on each contact
is necessary for removing tarnish on
the contacts.
10 On-load tap Lifting inspection of the diverter Each inspection item shall be done in
tap changer( OLTC ) insert shall be planned by the accordance with the applied OLTC
(For Tie transformer) operation number and passing years instruction book.
in accordance with the OLTC
instruction book when the
transformer is out of service.

-12 /22- SSN-91779


5. TROUBLE SHOOTING

1). Diagnosis of protective relays in operation


If any protective relay gives an alarm, investigate its causes in accordance with the following table.
Table 5
No. Relay Function Probable cause

Pressure relief This pressure relief device is to 1. Transformer internal fault.


device protect the transformer in case if Fault can be confirmed by gas
internal fault or short circuit were analysis in oil.
occurred in the transformer. 2. Mal-operation of its own defects
due to deterioration.
3. Pressure rise due to choking of
filter in dehydrating breather.
Check the filter whether it is
choking or noL
The first stage of this relay detects 1) Transformer internal fault
2 Buchholz
the gas formation due to minor
relay If any gases are accumulated in
trouble in transformer.
the relay, stop operation of
The second stage detects rushing
oil due to serious trouble. transformer immediately and
carry out of analysis of
accumulated gas and dissolved
gas in oil.

2) Mal-operation of its own defects


due to deterioration.
3 Dial type Oil The dial type thermometer indicates 1) Overloading
temperature indicator the top oil temperature and highest 2) Insufficient efficiency of radiator
oil temperature experienced. units due to dust and other foreign
It gives an alarm when oil materials accumulated on the
temperature gets to the alarm finned
setting( BO°C for example ). area or due to a heavy scale in the
water cooling coils.
4 Winding temperature The winding temperature indicator 3) Mal-operation of thermometer
monitor detects indicates maximum winding or thermal contact due to their own
temperature of a transformer. defects.
It also has protective functions to If indication of thermometer is not
give an alarm, and automatic correct, check oil level in the
functions to control cooling system. sensor pocket and adjust to
correct level.

5 Oil level gauge Dial type oil level gauge indicates the 1. Shortage of oil
( Dial type) oil level in a conservator of an 2. Abnormally low ambient
oil-immersed transformer. temperature in winter season.
When the oil level comes down to the 3. Oil leakage
bottom of a conservator, its pointer 4. Deterioration of its contact
indicates zero and give an alarm.

-13 /22- SSN-91779


No. Relay Function Probable cause
OLTC protective An OLTC protective relay detects 1) Fault of diverter insert.
6
Relay some faults in a diverter of on-load 2) Fault of whole OLTC.
tap changer. 3) Malfunction of OLTC protective
(Only Tie transformer) relay due to normal deterioration.

7 Other relay This relay detects the difference between the input current and the output
1)Differential relay current of a transformer converted by current transformer. It also operates
sometimes with the inrush current when a transformer is excited.

2) Over current relay These relays detect faults in the el ectrical system including transformer.
and ground fault relay

2. Oil leakage

1) Oil leakage from welding portion


a) Temporary action
Apply effective adhesive materials after cleaning a oil leak portion.
b) Permanent action
Take action by welding repair.

2) Oil leakage from gasket portion


As for a temporary repair, apply adhesive materials. At time of stop operation of transformer,
wrong gasket should be replaced with new one as the permanent action.

-14/22- SSN-91779
Fig 1. Allowable value of transformer insulation resistance

1000
System v Itage:
More tha 66kV
~

E '" 500
..t:
From 2 kV to 66k
0
bJ)
~ F om 6.6kV o 22kV
-5
~
200
"t:
+'
"
'.'"" Good
~
L

t: 100
0
:;::; Poor
'"
"S
'"
.5 50

20 L -_ _----L -'- ..L-_ _- - ' - ' -_ _--"-~___'_<--

o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Transformer oil temperature(OC)

Fig 2. Relation between dielectric strength and amount of water insulating oil

50
\
~ ~
40 .......

~ '\
30

~
20 "-
~ I'------
10

.
o
o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Water-,:arts mllion 1'I ""iltrt (FfM)

-15/22- SSN-91779
Table 5: MELCO Criteria of Dielectric strength (Breakdown voltage) for Transformer oil
( With sphere electrode of 2 5mm gap)
No, Transformer voltage Dielectric strength Judgement Action

Periodical measurement
1. More than 40kV Good Everyone year.
~ 230kV
After reinvestigation, oil
2. Less than 30kV Precaution
Treatment with filtering or
degassing

Table 6' MELCO Criteria of Power factor (tan () at 80°C for Transformer oil
No. Transformer voltage Power factor(%) Judgement Action

Periodical·measlJrernent
1. Less than 1.0 Good Every one year.
~
230kV

Exchange to new oil is


2. More than 3.0 Precaution Recommendable. .

Remarks: New oil shall be added BTA(Benzotriazole : 30mg/U in oil.

Table 7: MELCO Criteria of Resistivity at 80°C for Transformer oil

No. Transformer voltage Resistivity( Q 'cm) Judgement Action

Periodical measurement
1. More than 5E" Good
Everyone year.
I--
230kV Exchange to new oil is
2. Less than 1E" Precaution Recommendable.

Remarks: New oil shall be added BTA(Benzotriazole : 30mg/U in oil.

Table 8: MELCO Criteria of acid value

No. Acid value( mg KOH/g ) Action

1 Less than 0.1 Good

Filtering or exchange in earlier stage


2 Over 0.3
with new oil

-16 /22- SSN-91779


Table 9: Permissible value of Bushing tan 6" applied oiHmpregnated paper type
( Refer to IEC 137 )

No. Bushing Insulation tan 6" (%) Judgement Action

Periodical measuremept every

-
1

Oil-impregnated paper
;;; O. 7 Good
1 - 2 years.

After reinvestigation,
2 > 1. a Precaution exchange to new bushing is
recommendable.

Table 10-1: Combustible gas and type of fault with dissolved gas analysis of insulating oil

No. Decomposed gases Type of fault

1 H,. CH 4• Q.,tl4. C,H,. !;btl,. C3 H, Local heating in the oil

Local heating in the oil impregnated solid


2 -CO. CO,. H,. CH,. Q.,tl4. C,H,.
!;btl,. C 3 H, insulaticm. ..
3 Ji,. CH 4. Q.,Ji,. C,H,. C3 H, Discharge in the oil.
.
4 CO. CO,. Ji,. CH 4. Q.,Ji,. C,H,. C3 H, Discharge in the oil impregnated solid insulation.

5 CO. CO,. C,H,. C3 H, Degradation of insulation materials

Note: Underline means a significant gas.

Table 10-2: Maintenance level for important gases on dissolved gas analysis in oil
No. Name of gases Maintenance level
H2 (Hydrogen) Less than 400 ppm
C2H2 (Acetylene) Less than 0.5 ppm
C2H4 (Ethylene) Less than 100 ppm
CO(Carbon monoxide) It should be evaluate by necessary and sufficient conditions at the
same time as below.
That is both CO < 300 ppm and ratio of C02/CO > 3

-17 /22- SSN-91779


APPENDIX I Action for safety and quality

No. working condition Action for safety

1 Exterior check (1) Be careful not the approach live parts.

2 Exterior test and (1) De-energize the concerned transformer by circuit breakers and
remedial work line switches.
(2) Ground the line terminal of the transformer.
(3) Attach caution tags not to operate switches for circuit breakers
and line switch es. See note.
(4) De-energize the control cabinets for coolers and tap changer by
AC and DC switches.
(5) Attach caution tags on switch boxes.

3 When an internal Same as above except the following additional items.


inspection is to be (1) Replace nitrogen gas completely with dry fresh air, if it was
made filled
in the transformer for safety work.
(2) Make sure there is 18% or more oxygen to sustain life in
a transformer tank.
(3) Make sure your pockets are empty to avoid entering any foreign
material into the transformer.
(4) Take off a wrist watch and accessories on your body.
(5) List up name and quantity of all tools to be brought into
a transformer tank.
(6) Spread out clean cloth on coil groups when repairing.
(7) Protect lamps with guards not to break them in a tank.
(8) Be careful not to drop any tool and foreign material into
a transformer. Secure all tools with hand lines.
Any metallic item dropped into a transformer must be removed
to prevent serious trouble in future.

4 Confirmation before (1) Make sure all foreign materials are clear before closing manhole
energization and energizing.
(2) Check the quantity of all tools brought out from a tank.
(3) Remove the grounding wires on the line terminals of the
transformer.

Note When test and remedial work must be carried out under the live conditions for any
Special reasons, pay attention to live parts to protect yourself against
electrical shock.

-18 /22- SSN-91779


APPENDIX II Technical information to be sent to the manufacturer

Whenever you need technical advice for any trouble of parts andlor a transformer itself from
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, you are kindly requested to let us know the following technical
Information.

1 Name of power station or substation where the transformer is in service.

2 Serial number and ratings of the transformer in trouble.

3 Name, type and serial number of the parts in trouble.

4 Detailed explanation in case of severe troubles


a. Duration and amperes ofove,r current.
b. Over voltage andlor surge applied on the transformer.
c. Protective relays in operation.
d. Load condition( voltage, current and power factor)
e. Copies of PIS or SiS layout drawings which show location of the transformer
and other electrical equipment such as circuit-breakers, lightning arresters and
line switches.
f. Copies of skeleton sequence drawings for control panels.

When a transformer is suspected transformer internal fault, we recommend


5 dissolved gas analysis as soon as possible.

6 Any other information available about the trouble

Your quick and detailed information are being expected, which would result in quick and more
appropriate actions for its recovery.

-19 122- SSN-91779


APPENDIX ill Welding Method for oil leak

1. Location of the leak

.. ,
r-!
. ..,..,~
I>
/'

- ~
~

2. Repairing method

(1) Preparation
(1-1) Take off the paint completely from the welded portion of the oil leak with wire brush,
portable grinder or emery cloth etc.
(1-2) Confirm the point of oil leak.
If the point of oil leak is too small for normal visual check, use the penetrant
developing liquid to help to detect the point.

(2) Welding
(/22) Weld around the leak point as shown in Fig-2.
(2-2) The welding electrode is recommend to use the following type
*JIS D 5016 JIS : Japanese Industrial Standard
Mitsubishi's recomending brand : LBM-52 ( Kobe Steel Co. )
*AWS E 7016 AWS: American Welding Standard

(3) Checking
(3-1) Take off the slugs and spatters completely from the welded portion with brush,
portable
grinder or emery cloth etc.
(3-2) Spray the penetrant developing liquid to the repaired portion let for 12 hours and
confirm
that there is no oil leak.

(4) Painting
(4-1) Clean the welded portion again.
(4-2) Paint the anticorrosive paint one layer.
(4-3) After 12 hours from undercoating, paint the finish coat paint.

-20/22- SSN-91779
I 2 I
3 4 I
5 I
6 I
7 I
8 I
9 .·.L_
lD I
11 I
12 13 I
14 15 16

SLG6TIIS k~~1 FHOU] SIDE ITEM FITTING & DISCRIPTIO~ TOTAL


I I AlJT{) IllANSFOflHER 1 HV LINE BUSHING TYPE'Or (300kV-630AI SR2ton 3
00 2650 2650
A
II Ii
55
WITH mrlCWl TAP CHANGER 1--~2-j_"~V~':c;:MY~N~E~UlRAl;;;:;~0~U~,"~I~"e..:::wr~THc::;GRIl~UN~Dl~"::-;;TE~",,~I~NAlc:::~TY~P~'~'~PO~'~'~2~'~"~-~3~I~"~A~'_SR=2~IO~73,--+--:1_~
3 MV LINE BUSH!1l> TYPE' OT· 1123kV-!i30Al SR21D74 3
A

{I.
440001630DOkVA THREE PflASE SOHl CORE FOOM
Q)NTINlDUS RATU-«3 TYPE OF COOLING ONAfVONAF 4 TV BUSHING TYPE' PO' t2HV-1600AJ SR21075 3
5 COOLER alNTROL O\BINET 1
IN 2~OkV +lOX TO ·lOX YNalltn
- 6 ON lllAD TAP CHo\NGER rTYPE M11MS Il 3
MY llSkV YNautn
7 "OTOll DRIVE UNIT 1
t TV 23kV 13/SM/AI DELTA
a PROTECTIVE RELAY FOR III Ie 3

""~
OIL OUANTITY
1--~9:-'f-';;CO~NSI':::RV~A~TO~R~F~OR:-:;TRAN:::,:5FORMER=:;;;,- -I,-~I_~ B
B TfI.A1ISFORMER 40500 L 10 COilSERVATOR FOR TAP CHANGER 1
TAP CHAI«>ER 700 L
11 PRESSlJlf REliEF DEVICE 1
11m
12 6LCHKQLZ RELAY FOR ~JN TANK 1
_~_

M'.SS
ifIASS Fl.!:llG
CORE AM) COllS 43000 KG 13 DIAL TYPE OlL GAUGE FOR TJIA1.J5FDRMER 18-00027 1
- DElAIL OF EARTHING TERMINAL
OF ITEM 22 [!SD-25lJSIMolI TANK AND FITTlNGS 25000 kG 14 DIAl TYPE OIL GAUGE FOR TN' CHAIIGER 18-00027 1

400
OIL 3'JIOO kG 15 OIL TBiPEAATURE INOll:ATOR 1
TOTAL 105100 kG 16 WHlDING TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 1
c SO 224 80
17 DEHVDflATJIlG FILTER BREATHER FOR lW>JlSFOJIMER 1 c
I I
If! llElfYllRATlIIG FILTER BflEATHER FOR TAP CHANGER 1
'"I - ------1---- - 1 SAMPLI NG PLUG 19 RIlDIATOR 1 SET
~ 0

-
~T ~a T m .r~-KIO SCREW
_T_ /ll/2 THO
20
21
IWHATOR VALVE
COOLING FAN
1 SET
4 SETS

DETAILS OF CABLE OUTlET OPENNI~


~CAP 22
23
EAATHIIIB TEllMIIW. U50~250SIJ1iI

FLANI>EO'IIHEELWlTHFOUNOATlON BOLT SR21071


2
4
o OF HJTOA DRIVE IJNIT lITEM 1)
/ DETAIL· OF SAMPLING PLUG lITEM 37. 41)
24 RATING PLATE SV1927B 1 o

"I-- 1--.-1t1o
25 LIFTING Loo a JACKING BOSS 4
14HOlES-I2DIA 26 HAllLABE EYE 4
27 HA!IDHDl.E 1 SET
350
-.--41 28 CONNECTING VALVE lTIlANSF. ~II'SEIt I SIZE 50 I

83
29 00. ITAP CHAAGER- 00. I SIZE 50 1

E Oll--~ --1--- f ° --- 30 Al!TlJKl;T!C StUTTER VAlVE


r-~3~IT~0~IL~F~IL~TE~RC'CVAL~V~E":;'TR=RNSF=~.~T~ANK=-'----------:S~IZ=E~S=O-----+--',-~ E
50 1

- tit:
'-- :·-t-:+ ~ 32 00. [CONSER. FOR TlWI5. 1 SIZE 50 1

!100 1100 [iOO l1O0 I, 33


34
00. lCONSER. FOR TAP CHANGERl
OIL Olm.ET VAlVE FOR OIL FIlTER UNIT
SIZE 25
SIZE 25
1
3
-
lOETAIlS ~LE OUTLET OPENNHlG
DF
35 OIL DRAIN VALVE [CONSER. FOR TRANSF.1 SIZE 25 1
/ ~F COOLER COtlTROL CABINET !ITEM 5) 36 00. lTRANSF. TAM<I SIZE 50 1
37 OIL SAMPLlNG VAlVE WITH PUll ffilANSF. ·TANKl SIZE IS 1
F 3B OIL IIIlET VALVE FOR Oll FILTER lINIT sm 25 3 F
<l-- WELDING
COVER 1-~3;-9-t:~AI~R-;R:a~OO':,::~V::AL~VE=,'~CO~NSE=RV:A::T"=F~OR~"""'==' --;:S~I1E;-;l;-S +---:-I-;~
40 OIL DRAIN VAlVE IOLTe O'1PAAiMENTl SIZE 50 1
H OIL S*lPLING VAlVE WIn! PUX; lCOflSER, FOR TANIO SIZE 15 1
42 GAS COLLECTOR FOR BUCHHOLZ RELAY 1
43 VAO.AIM VAlVE FOIl TRANs. SIZE 50 1
44 CONNECTING VAlVE [BUCflHl)LZ RELAY· CONSER. I SIZE 50 I

G 45 CONNECTING VAl..VE lBUCHHOLZ RELAY - GIIS COLLECTORJ SIZE IS ( G


o 46 AIR RELEASE PLLG FOR RADIATOR 1 SET

'" 47
48
OIL DRAIN PLIJ3 FOR RADIATOR
OIL film UNIT FOR OLTC
1 SET
3

r-~'~9T~0I=L~0=RA=I=N=VAL:,;VE=FO=R~0='~L =F=IL=Trn:,:-:U=Nl=T=-===:::-=-=:::-::::=S~IZ~E~2~S-_-_-+-,3--l1-
50 I RESISTANCE ElEMENT FOR REMlTE WINDING TEMPERATURE {PtlllIlO ATtrc I 1
51 I RES [STANCE ELEMENT FOR REMlTE OIL TEMPERATURE [ punOO ATO'C I 1
S2 1 W>.NHOLE FOR OlTC 3
H H
NOTE:
I. H~ transfnrlll~r lank is cnnstr~ded as top COVel weldin9 type, not a bell cnnstrHtion.
2.0LTC cnmpartment is separately cnnslructad Irom main tan~,
as sh.cwn fnl Inwing sketch..
-

I
V it SELECTOR

1350

DETAILS OF NEUTRAl GROUNDING


I /1 Ol it COHPERTMENT

TERMiNAl / r -=-;;-;;;-;",",,;o;-;-;e;;,--;=c=---1-
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
1RMSFOOIiER COIL ELECTRICITY OF YHT HAM
COMPARTMENT IlISlDE TAI;K HYDROPOWER PROHn MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5

J BlION KUDP HYDROPOWER PROJECT


LOT N•• 21 J

MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
~KottH5UIA
r'~"~",~E~"~O~"~01~"~'~'~E~"~I~O~"t-_;::C-~"~"'~""7C-:--_-l-
PROJECT FILE NO· 8K-502G-300
K.l s.IPRlllTloup. OIST.
~ :oloup -IFI3Iol I I lid lEI I I
~
:;~

--
"
0;.:.;";'
... H!TSUBI5HI ELECTRIC CORPORATIOH
iii iii 9; -$--a ~~gJEA~r5~ gRA'~
DIN.lN •• .II: aEn
S.hmi
F.Millli
TITlE

DUH INE FOR


TIE TRANSFORMER
K

§~
!'<l REMARKS ,.: ,.: ,.: :.: ,.: ,.: ,.: ,.: =-= ,.: ,.: "'" ,.: ~ ~Alf 1:4U I~SI~~ED II.Ua/1

I I
======;:;======"""
I I I I I
gfflll m6-IO-!3 l\.PR~VED S.lllmll '''SYI92150
2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10

L
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION MANUAL SBA-F60703

SDT-L.1946
(4/7 )
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
CUSTOMER ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5

LOCATION BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT


LOT NO.27

TITLE :INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER


(44/63MVA. 230kVTRANSFORMER)

REVISION SECTION MANAGER


NO. DATE
1 First issue Aug.20,2007

S.HATTORI
PLANNED CHECKED

f1Y;!c~
M.TAKAGI
MFR'S ORDER NO. REFER NO. REV.

NO 0-13-L67321 SBA-F60703 o

MITUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


1141
CONTENTS
Page

1 Preparation of installation 3 - 5

2 Receiving inspection 6 7

3 General caution for installation 8 - 9

4 Positioning of tra;nsformer main body 10- 11

5 Receiving of insulating oil 12- 13

6 Filtering of oil & replacement ofN2 gas with oil 14

7 Mounting the bushing turret 15

8 Assembling the cooling plant(Around the main body) """"'"'" 16- 17

9 Mounting the conservator for main hody and OLTC """""'" 18-19

10 Mounting the bushing 20- 22

11 Assembly of the On-Load Tap Changer (OLTC) ."" ..... ".. ".. ".. " 23- 25

12 Internal lead connection 26- 27

13 Mounting miscellaneous parts 28- 31

14 Wiring of protective circuit 32- 33

15 Oil leakage test 34

16 Final oil filling under vacuum 35- 37

17 Test and general inspection 38

18 Touch-up painting 39

19 Adjustment of oil level 40

20 Installation criteria 41

2/41
1.Preparation of installation.

1. Determining location for installation of transformers


The location for the transformer installation must be accurately determined and preparations of
the concrete foundation, base, anchor and so on should be completed prior to the arrival of the
transformers.

(1) The foundation must be laid as to maintain a correct horizontal level. The deviation ofless
than 3 mm from the standard level is required for the flat level.
(2) It is necessary to secure the storage space of the parts and the installation equipment.

2. Equipment, tools and parts needed for installation


The followings are required to satis~ the specification described below.

(1) Mobile crane


A mobile crane is used to lift up the external parts. It is necessary to use about 45 ton crane for
lifting general parts such as the connecting pipes, pressure relief device, pressure relief vent etc.
For the heavy parts such as the cooler,
conservator and bushing, the lifting capacity
of the mobile crane, and the setting position
of the mobile crane should be decided by the
weight of the parts and the setting height of
the parts.
A skilled operator of the mobile crane should Fig-AI Mobile crane
be engaged.

(2) Oil storage tank


It is necessary to provide the oil storage
tank which has the capacity with enough oil
volume for one transformer. The oil storage
tank should be equipped with a filter valve, Manhole Air release valve
an oil sampling valve, an air release valve, a ~ Breather
manhole, a breather and an oil level gauge Oil
Oil level gauge sampling
and the inside is painted with the oil-proof ValVe
paint.
The inside of the oil storage tank should be
j Filter
/valve
cleaned with insulating oil and waste rugs
before using. Fig-A2 Oil storage tank

3/41
(3) Oil filter
The oil filter is used for filling oil into the oil storage tank from drums or tank lorry and pulling oil
infout between the oil storage tank and the transformer. The oil filter must be capable of
removing dirt and moisture from the oiL A filte! of press type or cartridge type is generally used.
If a filter press type is used, filter paper dryer is required.

Filtering capacity 200 L/min.

Filtering accuracy Less than 5 micron

Fig-A3 Oil filter Table-AI Oil filter

(4) Oil treatment equipment (oil purifier) Treating capacity E;;;6,000 Lib
The oil treatment equipment is Oil characteristic Moisture content ;;;; 10 ppm
used for removing the gases and after treatment Gas content ;;;; 0.5%
moisture from the oil while feeding Filling oil temp. 40°C-60°C
the oil into the transformer. It is
Table-A2 Oil treatment equipment
desirable for the equipment

(5) Vacuum pump


The vacuum pump is used for
filling the transformer with oil under Ultimate vacuum degree ;:;;0.65Pa(;:;;5 X 10-3TorrJ
vacuum at the final stage. Pull vacuum capacity E;;; 6000 L/min
It is desirable for the vacuum Table-A3 Vacuum pump
pump with a mechanical booster to
meet the specifications shown in
Table-A3.

(6) Dry gas


The dew point of dry gas should be below --50°C. The cylinder is equipped with a regulator and a
pressure gauge. As the cylinder is a highly pressurized vessel, special care must be taken in
handling.

(7) Pressure gauge


The pressure gauge is used usually for measuring the gas pressure while an oil leakage test being
carried out. Measuring range: 0 - 0.1 MPa (0 - 1.0 kg·f/cm2 ).

(8) Vacuum gauge


The vacuum gauge is used for measuring the vacuum degree at the final oil filling.
A vacuum gauge ofPirani type is required. The lowest measuring range should be less than
1.33 Pa (0.01 Torr).

4/41
(9) Electric power supply
The electric power supply should have sufficient capacity for using the oil treatment equipment,
vacuum pump, oil fIlter etc. Each power cable should have enough capacity and length for each
equipment.

(10) Oil tester


The oil tester should be prepared during installation at site because the oil tester is used to
measure the breakdown voltage (dielectric strength) of the insulating oil when oil receiving and oil
filling to main tank, and before final oil filling to main tank.
Requirement of oil tester: the measuring range should be 0 - 80 kV/2.5mm· Gap.

(11) Hoses
The hoses should have enough length for using. (See Table-A4.)

Caliber Remarks
Oil hose 40/50mm Oil proof and Vacuum proof
Vacuum hose More than 40 mm Oil proof and Vacuum proof
Vinyl hose 10/18mm For dry gas supply, oil level gauge, pressure valance etc.

Table-A4

5/41
2.Receiving inspection
1. Inspection
0.03
(1). Main body
When the transformer has arrived at site,
0.025 /
Ol
V
inspect the appearance of the main body, and ~ 0.02
,/
J

also check the dry (or nitrogen) gas pressure in


~ 0.015 ./
m
the transformer by the pressure gauge
mounted on the main body.
00
~

'"
il; 0.01 V
Ifthere are any damages and rust on the main 0.005
/'
body, you shouIdeliminate or repair them as
V
soon as possible. I'n case that the damage is -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 TEMP
(OC)
Fig-B1
serious and the effective treatment can not be Relationship between dry gas
made by you, please inform the detailed pressure and temperature
damage condition to MELCO immediately.
The transformer is generally filled with the dry gas according to the above Fig-B1 at the factory.
(In case of the transformer for cold district, this filling pressure is changed in accordance with
their conditions.). The internal pressure of the main body changes according to the ambient
temperature, so the relation between the temperature and the pressure is shown in the above
Fig-B1. If the pressure has gone down to less than 0.005 MPa under the ambient temperature,
the dry gas should be filled up according to Fig-B1 as soon as possible. (If the pressure is positive,
dry gas filling is not necessary.)
If the pressure is decreasing, the leakage portion must be checked and repaired as soon as
possible, and the dry gas must be filled up according to the above Fig-B1.
Please inform the detailed condition to MELCO immediately if the dry gas is decreasing in spite of
the above treatment.
(2) Parts
Check the part names and quantities in the packages according to the packing list. If there are
any shortage of parts, please inform their case No. and item No. to MELCO immediately.
Check the damage of the parts. If there are any damages on the parts, please try to repair them
and report the damage condition to MELCO immediately.
2.8torage
After the transformer has arrived at site, the transformer should be stored on the transformer
foundation pad until the installation work will be started. The transformer main body and its
- n n c---
parts should be stored as follows. Package
(1) Main body
The transformer main body should be stored after filled
with dry gas. Periodically check the dry gas pressure with
V Blo ck
the pressure gauge mounted on the transformer main body
and inspect the leak of dry gas.
AB for dry gas inspection method, refer to the item of
m LI LI
Q<;Y,)<

"Inspection". Fig-B2 How to store


6/41
(2) Parts
Put an wooden blocks under the package in order to prevent to enter rain-water as shown in
Fig-B2.
Lay all the drums down in order to prevent to enter rain-water into drum as shown in Fig-B3.
.-------- Drum
o Air release hole
Oil filter hole
Stopper
Wooden plate

~~~~~
Fig-B3 How to store oil drum
Ai< the parts to be printed the mark of" KEEP DRY" (see Table-Bl.) on the package are
influenced by wind and rain, it is necessary to make a storage at indoor or to cover with a suitable
water-proof sheet.
Care marks (symbols) for handling have been printed on the packing cases as follows:
Parts should be stored in accordance with the care marks, which are shown in Table-Bl.
FRAGILE
THIS SIDE UP
DON'T SHOCK
MARKS KEEP DAY DON'T LAY THIS GRAVITY POINT SLING POINT
AVOID
PART DOWN
SHOCK

~ ifDSJ
TOP UP

DD ~
PRE-
CAU-
TION
ITEM
C.G
Table-BI Care marks (Symbols)
NOTE 1: On handling the parts, pay careful attentions as follows:
" BY CRANE"
(1) Put guide rope on the package to prevent swing of the package.
(2) Observe sling point mark on the package when hanging up the lifting rope.
(3) Don't give any shock to the porcelain of the bushing.

" BY FREIGHT CAR, TRUCK AND FORKLIFT "


(1) Fix the package on them by lashing rope to prevent to let fall.
(2) Observe care mark on the package when handling.
(3) Don't give any shock to the porcelains of the bushings.
(4) When the fork offorklift is inserted under the package,
pay a careful attention to prevent any damage to the package.

NOTE 2: The order for storage of packages should be decided in consideration of the assembling
procedure of transformer in order to facilitate the assembly of transformer.

7/41
3.General caution for installation

1. Preparation
(1) Construct the foundation correctly in accordance with the foundation drawing or the outline
drawing before the arrival of the main body.
(2) Prepare necessary equipment, tools and parts before starting the installation work.
(3) After arrival of the transformer main body and accessories at site, check the packages with the
packing list and also investigate damages of the components (parts).
(4) Internal pressure is positive value by reading the pressure gauge mounted on the main body.
(5) It is preferable to store the accessories indoors. However where they are stored outdoors, cover
them with suitable sheets. Don't expose them to the weather.

2 Installation
(1) General
CDDon't give excessive forces or heavy shock to main tank and accessories.
(g)Avoid outdoor installation work under raining conditions.
@Take care so that dust, dirt and moisture will not enter the main tank and accessories.
@Cover the openings with vinyl sheets before the installation work starts in order to prevent
entrance of dust.
<§) Handle gaskets with care so as not to give damages.
® Don't remove the cover plates of main tank and pipes before the installation work starts.
(J) Fasten bolts with adequate fastening torque.
(Refer to following item "Application and torque of tightening bolts".)

(2) Precaution against moisture absorption


Opening place Clean sheet
This item "Precaution against moisture absorption"
applies to the following jobs are carried out; Gasket Connecting
OMounting the conservator and pressure relief vent. -'~_T_L._-J::..flange
/

CD After opening and cleaning the surface of the


connecting flange and attaching the gasket, cover the
opening place with a clean sheet to prevent other
things from entering the main tank before mounting
Fig-C1 Covering
the fitting parts as shown in Fig-Cl.

8/41
(3) Application and torque of tightening bolt
<D Steel to steel fastening (See Fig-C2.)
Plain washer
Bolt Bolt Bolt

Tapered
Nu washer
Nut

Double-end bolt
Gaskret..,-_".;::.-Bolt

Nut Nut '--",=-::i'-' \pring


Female screw
Fig-C2 How to fasten steel to steel
®Steel to non-ferrous material fastening (See Fig-C3.)

Plain washer (It is necessary to insert Plain washer


between Bolts and Non-ferrous materials.)

Non-ferrous material

Fig-C3 How to fasten steel to non-ferrous material

(4) The gas pipes should be connected according to the matching numbers (identical numbers) and
aligning marks as shown in Fig-C4.

Aligning
mark _--==r--t-These numbers are
Gas
r-----npipe / ® shown tightening
@ 0 order

Flange of
gas pipe
®OOO~ Bolt
& nut

Matching o .....(l) Flange of


number @ ~gaspipe

Fig-C4 Pipe connection Fig-C5 Bolt tightening

(5) Tighten the bolts gradually and uniformly as shown in Fig-C5. When tightening, make sure that
the gasket is not slipped from the gasket groove and not damaged.
9/41
4. Positioning of transformer main body
1. When the main body has been arrived site, check the appearance for any damage caused during
transportation.
(1) Before arrival of the main body, following checks should be made.
Checking offoundation and rail.
(2) Check the level of the foundation-rail. The horizontal level of the foundation-rail should be
within the allowance of 3 mm.
(3) Clean the floor of the foundation-rail and draw base lines on the foundation in accordance with
the "FOUNDATION DRAWING" (SR21071 A) supplied byMELCO.

2. Mounting the wheel


(1) The jack up of the main body of the transformer is carried out on a rail.
(2) Perform wheel attachment in the procedure of the following figure.(See Fig-Dl)
CD Jack-up of the transformer main body.

·1 Ir ~
~

I r"T' 1i Ii 1°
~
0
I
I
L_~
I
I
Ie] 10 0 ~~

T ansfi ,m ermain bod; I


tf~
[ ~
II
!~_./
1\

, - ""
[
~
'rl p
~
:- '- '- - ~
-= /Rail ::::::::;::
~
Jack

Hard timber or steel plate


-- " ~r . '"
(2)Mount the center-bolt to the main body bottom. ~Insertion of the two partition plate.
/Main body bottom

~
! , iii
-8~· f 8
/
" Wheel-pedestal
Center-bolt with spring & washer
Two partition plate.

@After confirming the mounting direction of the wheel, insert the wheel under the main body.

c==:=:>
urn-set bolts.
Fixing bolts.

Wheel.

@Mount the Turn-set bolts


@Mount the wheel
Fig-Dl How to mount the wheel
10/41
(3) The jack down and fixing of the transformer ..

RAIN BIllY tm!IlJ)IOO WIRE 3660


(150-25~1

~
8M<. lINE OF
RAIL _TIOO
I 1200 'i ,,---...,
...-----19.:;HI~ ,- I '1
,---·_-LHHf-
I
-+-+------.
0 I ..,.H:-l.~.-~
t
OOTlEf OF COOLER
OJNT!lOL CMlHET
8M< LINE OF
flIIDATION
I ~ i i
i
o i I
--~:J-'-tl--·---I!t----t----r------ ------j,-+++--.-
, i l l
I
I
L-----,+'I*"--+---!--.----.lM-+T""1
~ i I II
JAIl(llIi !'OINT
(35TDNxUOTALl
1900
i RAIN BOIIY .ROUNOI,," WIRE
<15D-250llltll
~ WI~I\O TlEf ." rmJoo: iRE
OF " 'T.e

DmlATING _l~

TIT .,.1
ICJ ILll liil I
L--'
I

T ansf rn er main' bod'

~[~-~~Jfij~~::E--:t:::'::E~=t;~" '~.~'~~r'~ ~ 11 M_,

~ ~ t:e:~u~e294~ ~~?ZJ:;:?ZJ:;:?ZJ:;:T%
"'" Foundation bolts ~I Pit for foundation bolts(4 totaD
- '-

....- .-"-"- . ....


/ , /
....-'
/ I
/ \ "\ /
/
, /

/ Foun~tion bolts<Mao x 70) ""


",
/ I'

I \ I'
""\~{
I
-
i

~
\
I I
\

\:i
/ _NLbolts \
(Mao x 710) /
\
"-
, 0-::. ../
\
"-
I- _ 1,//
....
-"-"-' .....-'
....-
/'
"- -w-........ /
'.'
.. .. _.. -"
Fig'D2 Jack down and fixing of the transformer
ll/41
5.Receiving of insulating oil.

1. Oil receiving and storage


The quality of the insulating oil should be checked before receiving from the oil drums.

(1)Measure the breakdown voltage of the oil from the drums, and confIrm the breakdown
voltage is over 40kV/2.5mm Gap (standard "JIS C 2320(1973)" and "IEC 296(1969)").
Iffrom the drums, check in accordance with following procedure.

<D Check and confIrm the trade-marks of all drums are same. Then separate the damaged drums
from the good drums.

W\
Thumb Sampling

Air

'----> '---->
Oil

(~
Air

Sampling
/Oil

Fig-E1 How to take oil sample


~ Regarding drums in good conditions, samples should be taken from the bottom of 1/20 drums.
And a composite sample can be made from 5 different oil drums. But regarding damaged
drums, samples should be taken from the bottom of all drums. How to take the sample is
shown in Fig-E1 for example.

12/41
(2) Clean all of the oil storage tanks and oil hoses.

(DConnect all of the oil hoses and clean the insides of all of the oil hoses with 100 litters of the
clean insulating oil as shown in Fig-E2.

Drum O'lh ose 0'1


1 fl ow O'lh
o~
1 1
./
\ <!
Oil filter
Oil hose ( Oil
~
---.....
Oil hose ~
;/
Emptydrnm
Flg-E2 Hose cleanmg

@Wipe off dirt and moisture from the inner surface of the oil storage tank with clean waste rugs.

(3)lf the breakdown voltage of oil is more than 40KV/2.5mm GAP (standard "JI8"), store the oil in
the storage tank through the oil filter as shown in Fig-E3 after cleaning all of the storage tanks
and hoses.

Air~t
Drums Oil hose Breather
Manhole
Oil flow

Oil storage tank

Oil filter

Fig-E3 Oil receiving

(4)Oil treatment (oil receiving) should be avoided on a rainy day.


As the insulating oil is inflammable, prepare the fIre extinguishers at hand.

13141
6.Filtering of oil & replacement ofN2 gas with oil.
After installing the transformer main body on
the foundation, the dry gas in th13 tank should be
replaced with the treated oiL And before starting Oil hose --""'J;:;=====~;:;==i1

this job, confirm that the break down voltage of the r'l.----"==-"; Flow directio~
stored oil is more than 40kV/2.5mm GAP. Oil storage tank Oil
Purifier

If the breakdown voltage value is not satisfactory,


circulate the oil in th13 oil storage tank using oil purifier Fig-F1 Oil circulation
as shown in Fig-Flo

loPreparation.
(1) After confirming the interiors of the hoses, pipes and valves are cleaned by insulating oil in advance
connect the main body and the oil storage tank with the hoses and the filter press as shown in
Fig-F2.
(2) Make the oil level gauge using transparent vinyl hose as shown in Fig-F2 temporarily.
(3) Take an oil sample from the oil sampling-valve of the oil storage tank, and confirm the break down
voltage of the oil is more than 50kV/2.5mm Gap by testing.

Oil level gauge


(Transparent vinyl hose)
Oil
Insulation
hose
washer
Air-----l
Oil
hose
Main
body
Oil storage tank Filter press
or oil purifier
'--------'V1 V2 V3 V4'--------'
Fig-F2 Oil filling

2.0il filling (See Fig-F2.)


(1) After closing the valve V5, open the valve V7 for releasing dry gas (Dry airlNitrogen gas).
Then open the lower filter valve V4 for oil filling.
(2) The oil should be filled in up to above the top of insulation washer in the main body leaving a
small space for gas above (about 100mm lower than the attaching position of the valve V7).
The oil level of the main body is monitored by the oil level gauge.
(3) After finishing the replacement of dry gas with oil, keep this condition for more than 24 hours.

14/41
7.Mounting the bushing turret.

1. Mounting the bushing turret of the HV and MV bushing.


(1) Remove the transportation covers of bottom side, and take out the gasket and silica-gel.
(2) Lift the bushing turret, and carry out the check and cleaning of inside.
(3) After removing the transportation covers and gaskets from the bushing turret flange of
transformer main body, confirm that the gaskets are not injured during transportation.
And set the gaskets to the gasket grooves ofthe bushing turret flange after applying the red
varnish. (Use again the gasket which are used for transportation)
(4) Mount the bushing turret on the transformer main body with bolts and gaskets.

r-=
1"'1\1 ,...,.1 Ir .\2 TTl '11°
==v
0
I
"_0 I
[J 10 0
I
-....J

.']' ans£< 1l'l1 er main: bod'


I 1 .. 1
L......-.J
I
L~J
I

I
.~
[
a ,
/I
!~-}
11

.!':!!
1i
~
i'(

j,-
~ ,..... ~ ~
j,- j,- j,-

,~ ~
V-

Fig-G1 Before mounting turrets


(DMount the bushing turrets of HVL.
HVL

~Mount the bushing turret ofMVL.

..............................................................
....... ..............

(./ """"""-f~' G~" '" )

•..••.. ~ ••.....
•••. Main body side ,0'

................................................................... ·····F~;:G2 Mount the bushing turrets


15/41
8. Assembling the cooling unit.(Around the main body)
1. Mounting the lower oil pipes and lower header. (See Fig-HI)
(1)Draining oil all from transformer main body.
(2)Attaching the lower oil pipes on the lower mounting flange of main body by bolts and gasket.
(3)Attaching the supports for lower header to the main body side portion.
(4)Attaching the lower header on the lower oil pipes and the supports by bolts and gasket.
(5)Fill the oil to the transformer main body, above 300mm from insulation top .
.Note~ .i: Carry'o;;:i the-cle'm;r';'/i'the-inside';;[ ~il'pipes -and mo~ntii1g- fla~ge- ileforeatta-;;iiing:" _.,.-'_.
2. Using the gaskets by adhesives.
3.Never put foreign materials into the main body and oil pipes.

Air release pipes

Upper header MV bushing turrets

'4t'''-'-_'''F4'/ Upper header


Radiator valve ---.j~I='t=::=~

supports ofthe heade Upper oil pipes

Supports of the header Main body

Radiator valve '--... ' / Lower header


_Radiator valve
Lower header~i~[l
Lower oil pipes
Lower oil pipes ----..\li'E~~±::r:::r:::c:::f~
_t
Fig-HI Assembling the cooling unit
2. Mounting the upper oil pipes and upper header.(See Fig-Hl)
(1) Attaching the upper supports for the upper header to the main body side.
(2) Attaching the upper oil pipe to the mounting flange of the transformer main body by crane.
(3) Attaching the upper header on the upper oil pipes by crane.
.Not;,f(';arryout 'thecleanIng fhemslde or oifiii.pes 'iindmoiiillmgflange before-aHaclllni'_. _. -.-. _.-:
2. Using the gaskets by adhesives.
3.Never put foreign materials into the main body and oil pipes.
4.Use a safety belt at the time of height work. .
_.-._.-._._.-._.~._._.-._.-._.-.-._.-._.-.-._.-._._.-. -'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'_.-.-._._._._.-}
3.Connecting the air release pipes.(See Fig,Hl)
(I)Connecting the air release pipes between bushing turrets and upper header.
(2)Connecting the air release pipes between HV bushing turrets and MV bushing turrets.
4.Mountingthe radiator.
(1) After unpacking the radiator package carefully, lift the radiator out from the package and place
it in a convenient place for mounting.
(2) Remove the blanking iron plate, gaskets and silica-gel(only one side) from the mounting flanges
16141
of the radiator.
(3) Set lifting wire rope to the upper hanger and lower hanger. And lift upright the radiator after
putting timber underneath the lower header of radiator.

Shackle and wire rope

Residual oil

About 1 meter

(4) Lift the radiator np carefully about one meter from ground and incline the radiator to drain the
residual insulating oil in the radiator.
(5) After removing the blanking iron plates and gaskets from the upper and lower radiator valves,
confirm that the gaskets are not injured during transportation. And set the gaskets to the gasket
groove ofthe radiator valves after applying the red varnish.
(Use again the gasket which are used transportation.)
(6) Mount the radiator on the upper and lower radiator valves with bolts and gaskets.
5.Mounting the cooling fan.
(l)Mount the cooling fans underneath the radiators as shown in Fig-H3.
(2)Attaching the cooling fans to the radiator bottom side with U-bolts.
. - - - - -
--m- --if
"
- ,, 1
I ~ 11-;;01 - 'l=;
,, - -'!~1
~'
,, ~' , "
1 i iii'
,' rDr
t, (;:~ " ,'j.,j I ! t~it , -- "
' -' jRadiator Valve
U-bolts
I I I
I
m
I I
1nllO
I I
m
I I .-'-'-'-'-
, F=1==$'1$- /

r ,i I tI T i,
\ / "-
,
i I ,I Radiator / '-='1 "
I, Ii
II I, I I
\
I I
I, I
I, II,
,I I \
,I \

I,
! !
! I, I I
I I
,I I
,I I ! ,I
\ I

I, II, ! I,I I! ! I \
\ I
I

L, I, I
\
I ,
'---!:ft"'
II ,I I ,
I L.!:fh" Cooling fan
\I
"
Cd~mgfan / /
1560 I ...... ,/

Fig-H3 Attaching the cooling f~s-· __ . _ ..- . .--


-._.-'

17141
9.Mounting the conservator for main body and OLTC.
·~otE!·_·_·_·_·_·_·-·-·_·_·_·_·_·-·-·-·-·_·_·_·_·_·_·_·_._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._.-.-._._._._._.-.-.-.-._._._._.-.-.-.~

(l)As the transportation covers are attached to the ends of the oil pipes, the transportation covers
must be removed and the inside ofthem must be cleaned with clean cloth before mounting.
(2)As it is our standard to use the gasket which is used for transportation, check the gasket before
using. If spoiled, replace to new one which is supplied separately.
(3)Never put foreign materials into the main tank and oil pipes. ,
-'-'-'-'-'-'_._._-_._._.-.-._._._._-_.-.-._._._._._'-'-'-'-'---'-'-'---'-'-'-'---'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'_._.-._--._.-.---.
l.Mounting the conservator for main body.
(1) Mounting the supports of the conservator for the main body
(2) Mount the conservator by the crane on the supports of conservator. And connect the conservator
and the oil pipes(air release pipes) from the bushing turrets and upper header using the gasket
and bolts.
(3) First fasten the bolts between the conservator and oil pipes, and next fasten the bolts between
the conservator and the conservator supports.
(4) After finishing the conservator mounting, loosen the crane.

""'~-'irt--.!I'-~\,--_,~conservatorfor main body

Yl':::~~Conservator
for OLTC

Fig-J1 Mounting the conservator

Conservator
Vacuum valve

'" B........u.,:lOIz relay


Connecting valve

rnnectmg v~L-
. ._==.-----'

10 ~
~ Buchholz relay
Fig-J2 Detail of connecting pipes
18141
2.Mounting the conservator for OLTC.
(1) Mounting oil level gauge.(See Fig-J3)
CD Confirm that the contact operations, ON/OFF of the oil level gauge are correct.
~ Confirm that the insulation resistance is more than 100M Q by 500V megger.
® Mount the assembled oil level gauge on the conservator with a-ring and bolts on the floor.

lOcknuts

Float

______ O-ring
Conservator for OLTC 10=::=============,--_
Fig-J3 Mounting oil level gauge

(2)Mounting conservator for OLTC.(See Fig-Jl,J2 and J4)


CDMount the conservator on the main body temporarily. And mount the oil pipes from the OLTC
protective relay using the bolts and gaskets.
® Connect the conservator and OLTC protective relay using the oil pipe, bolts and gasket.
®Fasten the bolts between the main body and conservator.

Conservator for OLTC

Oil pipes

jProtective relay
Fixing bolts
--....,..~=llll-
OLTC(C) U OLTC (B) W OLTC (A) V

Fig-J4 Mounting the conservator for OLTC

19/41
lO.Mounting the bushing.
As the bushing is made of porcelain, care should be taken when handling. And there are many lifting
methods of the bushing by different of the upper porcelain length and mounting condition of the
bushing.

1 Precautions of bushing mounting


(l)For storage, transportation and handling of the bushing, the oil level gauge must be situated in
low position. (See Fig-Kl.)
(2)For storage, transportation and handling of the bushing, the bushing must be put into a horizontal
level, and the upper porcelain of the bushing must be kept higher than the lower porcelain.
(See Fig-Kl.)

I Good situation I Bad situation

Gil level gauge


Upper porcelain Upper porcelain
Lower porcelain

Fig-Kl Handling of HV bushing Timber


Gil level gauge

2. Mounting of bushing.
(l)Arrange mobile cranes and the bushings so that the bushings can be easily mounted.
(2)Unpack the bushing packages on the assembling floor.
(3)Before mounting clean the surface of the bushing with dry and clean cloth.
(4)Measure the insulation resistance of the bushing with more than 1000V Megger as shown in
Fig-K2. And make sure the result of the insulation resistance is more than 2000 Meg-ohms.

Upper terminal [IJ\<4l---- Megger

\ . :::.--":-.::::.-:....::::::::::::
ounting flange

Timber
Fig-K2 Measurement of insulation resistance

(5) After removal of the transportation cover from the bushing mounting flange (bushing flange),
clean the bushing flange with dry and clean cloth. And cover with clean sheet until just before
the bushing mounting as shown in Fig-K3.

20141
Bushing
mounting
Clean sheet flange

ushing
turret

Fig-K3 Covering
(6) Before lifting the bushing up, confirm the direction of the bushing oil level gauge in accordance
with the "OUTLINE DRAWING"(SV19275-C) supplied by MELCO.
(7) When the bushing is lifted up, remove the sheet on the bushing flange. And set the varnish
applied gasket in the gasket groove on the bushing flange.
(8)The bushing is lowered gradually and take care not to hit the lower porcelain against the bushing
flange and E.C.T. (See Fig-K4.)
(9)After the lower porcelain is inserted inside the bushing flange, the mounting portion shall be
accurately fixed. Never spoil the gasket when the bolts are tightened.
Bushing

Gasket ~
Bushing
,IIIIIII,-..,.o"-mounting
flange
Bushing
turret

9
I " "
~ Lower porcelain
U of bushing

Fig-K4 Inserting bushing

3. How to lift HV line bushing.


(l)Protect the upper porcelain to avoid direct contact with the main rope with cushion as shown in
Fig-K5. To
Timber
crane

Sling
Upper porcelain length
hook
: <4m - ;;:;2m

Fig-K5 How to lift bushing up


21141
4. How to lift MV, TV and HV neutral bushing.
(l)Bind the bushing with nylon sling or hemp rope. And connect the bushing and crane with nylon
sling or hemp rope. (see Fig-K6)
Nylon
To crane Upper porcelain sling

Timber

Fig-K6 How to lift bushing up

(2)Raise the bushing up gradually with crane. And insert and mount the bushing to the main body
firmly.
.-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-
'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'~
I
! Note: Take care not to slip the gasket out from the gasket groove.
I
1.-._._-_._-_._-_._._._._._.-._._._._--.-._-_._._-_.-._._._._._._._._._)
5. Protecting the upper porcelain of bushing.
(l)After mounting the bushing, cover all ofthe upper porcelain of bushing using protector (Ex. wooden
plates and / or cushion) and binding tapes as shown in Fig-K7.

o 0 Upper porcelain
00

"'f-Protector (Wooden plates and/or cushion)

Binding Tape/string

@:@@---Protector(Wooden plates andlor cushion)

J;;;;;(~Bindingtape/string
Bushing turret

Fig-K7 Protector of bushing

22141
l1.Assembly of On-Load Tap Changer. (OLTC)
l.Mount the hot-line oil purifier.
(1).Mount the hot-line oil purifier on the position temporarily. And connect the OLTC and hot-line
oil purifier using the oil pipes, gaskets and bolts as shown in Fig-Ll.

Outlet "",]~~OLTC
To conservator

Iulet
Hot-line oil purifier

ipes
OLTCtank
In et

Fig-Ll Hot-line oil purifier

NOTE: The outlet of the hot-line oil purifier and the Inlet of the OLTC should be connected.
Never connect the outlet of the hot-line oil purifier and the outlet of the OLTC.

(1) Fix the hot-line oil purifier on the position finally.

2. Connection and adjustment of OLTC and OLTC operating mechanism


(l)Mount the OLTC operating mechanism on the position and connect the OLTC and OLTC
operating mechanism in accordance with following procedure. (See Fig-L2 and 1,3.)

(2) Mount the bevel gear box and bearing on the


positions temporarily.

(3) Mount the OLTC operating mechanism on the


position temporarily.
Fearing I
. (4) Attach the aluminum ring on a bearing top and
OLTC operating mechanism.(See Fig-L2 )

(5) Connect the OLTC and the Bevel gear box with
the horizontal driving shaft using the coupling
bracket. IOLTC operating mechanism Fig-L2

(6) Connect the bevel gear box and bearing, and the bearing box and OLTC operating mechanism
with the vertical driving shafts using the coupling bracket.

(7) After confirming 3 mID gaps between the coupling pins and the coupling bracket.
Mount the bevel gear box, bearing and OLTC operating mechanism finally.

23141
Driving S~haft
.//_._._.,.,.,
/ .
,/ '.
\
Coupling.l "
bracket!
I . ,
'\
, I
o I
Vertical i
'.
/
U::}O---Bearing
':W--=--=-7~
;
I
I
i
/-" Coupllng /
.I , Washer pin
OLTCtank .rr.'=-I+( ~ +-tBolt, Nut &
I
Lock nut Tightening bolt
Support for \ ./
·'.,._._.~rJ."-_ Support for OLTC
OLTC operating:D:;1echanism
operating
mechanism ....1I+-'''"'\;--Washer
i '\
OLTC \ .I ubber cushion
operating
mechanism
'-. ~/
"._._.-' Bolt, Nut & Lock nut

Fig-L3 Assembly ofOLTC

3. Adjust the OLTC and OLTC operating mechanism in accordance with following procedure.
(I)Oil filling to the OLTC by the hot-line oil purifier, till the oil level "6" ofTC conservator,
(2)Confirm that the tap position numbers of the OLTC and OLTC operating mechanism are same.
(3)Operate the OLTC by the manual handle of the OLTC operating mechanism. And adjust the
intervals between the operating point of the OLTC and "0" point of the OLTC operating
mechanism.
Tap Tap Tap
position position position
N N+ 1 N+2

"0" point of
Rl R2 OLTC
Operating
"0 point of mechanism
OLTC
Operating
mechanism
Ll k-
Fig-L4 Adjustment ofOLTC

,.-.-.-.---.-.-.-.-._------.-----.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
_.-.-._._._._._.-.~

NOTE: In any position of any direction, the OLTC operation should precede the "0" point of I

the OLTC operating mechanism.

*Adjustment OLTCG), OLTC(g) and OLTC@: Adjust within half turn of horizontal shaft.

I The difference in frequency: RI-Ll .. ·Less than 10 degrees, R2-L2· ..Less than 10 degrees
. I
-'-'-'--'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'

24141
4. Assembly of cover

(l)Assemble the cover of the vertical driving shafts and assemble the cover of the horizontal driving
shafts as shown in Fig-L5.

Cover L ._ _---.
On-load ta changer
(OLTC) Tightening belt

Bearing

Cover
Tightening belt

+---Aluminum ring

OLTC operating mechanism

Fig-L5 Cover of horizontal and vertical driving shafts.

'-'-'-'-'-'---'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'_._--.-.-.-.-.-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'---'-'_.- _.-._._._._._._.-.-.-._._._._.-._.-._.,
,
Note: In case of putting vacuum and pressurizing the main body, the coupling pins should be ,
removed.
And the coupling pins should be re-assembled after finishing the work.
(The coupling pins are shown in Fig-L3)

25141
12.Internallead connection

1 Preparation and precautions for internal leads connection


(l)During internal job the insulation materials are exposed to open air. Therefore it is essential to
do this work on NON-rainy day. Spanner(Tools)
TOOL LIST
Name Q'ty
\ I
Before job After job .-./
Spanner 4 Record /"
Hammer .
2 Record / Cotton tape
FlasWight 1 Record / Or string
Knife 1 Record.--'""'"
Sheet 10 ../'
Fig-M2 Tool for internal job
Fig-M1 Tool List
Bushing
turret
(2)Oillevel is lowered till bottom of the main body.
(3)Clean around the manholelhand hole before
opening the hand hole, and before starting the Bushin~
and hole
internal job.
Internal
lead
(4)Never allow anyone to do the internal job
before measuring the oxygen density of the 14---:Sheets

main tank. The internal job should be


+--Main
carried out after confirming that the hody
oxygen density is shown more than 18%.

Fig-M3 Covering
(5)Only nominated workers from the MELCO's
supervisor can work the internal job. And they
should carry out the internal job under
supervision of the MELCO's supervisor.

(6)Narne and quantity of tools used internal job should be recorded before starting the job and
checked after finishing the job as shown in Fig-Ml.

(7)The tools used internal job should be attached to line made of clean cotton tape or string so that
they can not be lost. (See Fig-M2.)

(8)Clothes must be clean. Before starting the job, brush work clothes off and empty all pockets.
And the worker should take wrist watch off and confirm that screws of glasses is not loosened.

(9)The top of the coil group should be covered completely with clean cotton/vinyl sheet as shown in
Fig-M3, so that foreign materials does not enter the coil group.

26141
2 Connect all of the internal leads and the bushings according to the instructions of the MELOO's
supervisor.
(l)In case of that the corona shield is attached (See Fig-M4.) ;
[)Insert the corona shield through the internal lead.
~Connect the internal lead and the bushing with the bolts.
@Mount the corona shield to the bushing. And confirm that the outside ring of the corona shield
is not contacted with the porcelain of the bushing.

!Inserting corona shield ILead connection Mounting corona shield


'B .
ushmg

y c=) __
Bushing
Bushing'"

Corona
shield
Corona
shield

Sheets

I
Fig-M4 Mounting coron shield

(2)Incase of lower terminal type bushings are used.


[)Connect the internal lead and the lower terminal of the bushing with the bolts and nuts.

(3)Mer fmishing all of the internal lead connections, confirm that all of the fastening points are
tightened correctly.

(4)Wrap the internal lead and the connection point according to the instruction of the MELCO's
supervisor.
(5JBring all of the tools out and take all of the sheets out from the main body. And inspect following
items;
[)Insulation distances between the internal lead and the other internal lead, the internal lead and
the main body and the internal lead and core are maintained.
~Damaged point and dirty point is nothing.
(6)Close the hand hole and fill the main body with oil till the level that the coil group is immersed.

27141
13.Mounting miscellaneous parts.

l.Filter breather for OLTC or main tank and flexible tube between the conservator and filter breather.
(Filter breather is called as Dehydrating filter breather or Silica-gel breather)
(1) Mount the fIlter breather for the OLTC or main body and
the filter breather on the positions according to the Conservator
forOLTC or
"OUTLINE DRAWING". main body

i Note; The filte~ breather should be removed when


I pressurizing to the OLTC and main body. Flexible
tube

(2)Connect the conservators and the top of the filter breather Snpport
htF---:>----(welded)
with the flexible tube along the supports and according to
Fig-N1, N2, N3 and N4.
Main
body
Connection flange

tt Cap nut
.'-'.'-'.'.' ~F "

--~/1J- Filter
breather or
N2gas
Stainless flexible tube Teflon gasket filling valve
Fig-N2 Detail of flexible tube
I~_ _ Main body

Tube Flexible
support tube Fig-N1

Bolt&nut ~
Main r-::----_ Flexible
rl---'----'---h tube
Support body
(welded)
, Inlet of
silica-gel
Fig-N3
(3)Connect the flexible tube and filter breather
Filter
with the gasket and bolts. breather
(4)Insert the silica-gel to the filter breather for the OLTC
and main body.. Oil
(5) Remove the oil pot from the filter breather of the OLTC pot

and main tank and after inserting the silicon oil,


L
re-attach the oil pot to the filter breather. -1;;;ZiiiE:::~~Silicon
oil

Fig-N4

28141
2. Dial type temperature indicator for oil and winding
Capillary
tube
(l) Mount the temperature indicator on the position
Tube
according to the "OUTLINE DRAWING". support
(2) Lay the conduit and conduit protector
along the supports temporarily. Bolt
(The supports are attached by welding in the Support
factory.) (welded)
(3) Fix the conduit and conduit protector on all ,
of the supports using the cushions, tube Fig-N5
supports and bolts as shown in Fig-N5.
.

Note; Conduit and conduit protector should not be bent less than the radius of lOOmm.

Conduit and conduit protector

Radius :

~ I
More than
lOOmm

oo I I
Indication
compartment

Sensor
Wire
\...J
Fig-N6 Temperature indicator

(4)Mount the sensor port on the mounting position. (Some sensor ports were mounted in the factory.
Refer to Fig-N7.)
[OIL TEMP. INDICATOR] [WINDING TEMP. INDICATOR]
Conduit and Conduit and
conduit _ _conduit
protector protector

Sensor
Gasket port
asket Gasket

I
Dillevel
(3ccJMTD)
Sensor
Sensor port

Sensor
Dillevel
(llOccIMTH)

Fig-N7 Sensor and sensor port

(5) Pour the insulating oil into sensor port. (See Fig-N7.) And fix the sensor on the position.

29141
3 Resistance element for oil and winding temperature.
(1) Mount the sensor port on the position with the gasket and tightening nut according to the
"OUTLINE DRAWING" and Fig-N8. (Some sensor ports were mounted in the factory.)
(2) Pour the insulating oil into sensor port. (See Fig-N8.) And fix the resistance element on the
position with the gasket.
[ FOR OIL TEMP. ] [ FOR WINDING TEMP. ]
Resistant
element
Gasket
r--=ol Tightening nut
for sensor port
===--m~===
Gasket

SeIlsor/ Sensor
port

Fig-N8 Sensor and sensor port

(3)Mount the resist/lilt element for the winding temperature according to the "OUTLINE
DRAWING" and Fig-N8. (This type resistance element is unnecessary insulating oil.)
~.-.-.-.-._._._.-.-.-.-._._._._.-.-._._._._._.-.-.-._._._-_._._._._._._.,

! Note: Don't apply more than 10 rnA of electric current to the resistance element because this ;
I resistance element is used very thin wire for sensor. I
1._._._--.-._._._._--.-.-._._._-_._._._._---_.-._._._.-._._._._._._._._._"

4Attaching & assembling the gas collection box for Buchholz relay..
(l)Mounting the gas collection box for Buchholz relay
(2)Connecting the copper pipe between Buchholz relay and gas collection box.
Copper pipe

~' ~7
~~
/
.'
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
'\ ..
r
rrr-n.._Joint
r
I
r
I
'1 r
r I ,

Flange

Gas collection box ~ f


Fig-N9 Gas collection box and connecting pipe
30/41
5.Connection of grounding wire. Common base beam
(l)Adjust the grounding wire to the grounding pad
attached the main tank
(2)Cut the grounding wire about lOmm longer than the
Grounding pad
::f:I
top of the grounding wire. -_~I

(3)Clamp the grounding wire with the grounding pad and bolts. .
Bolt & spnng ::~::I
!
~

Grounding wire

Fig-NIO Grounding wire

31/41
14. Wiring ofproteetive circuit.
I Preparation
(I)Mount the cooler control cabinet on the position with cushions and bolts after mounting the
supports.
(2)See the following drawings supplied by MELCO separately. (j)AUX. CIRCUIT WIRING
DIAGRAM (SVI9279) (2)WIRING SCKETCH(SV20072) ITEMLIST(SW36389)
(3)Confirm the quantity and quality of all the parts referring the ITEM LIST.
2 Cutting and laying the cable
(I)As all of the cables are guided with the supports from the cooler control cabinet to the each
cooling and protective devices, measure the length of the wire for the each devices on the main body.
(2)Cut the cables about one(l) meter longer than the measured length after confirming the details
according to the drawings. And attach the cable mark as shown in Fig-PI.
(3)F'ix all of the cable ends to the cabinet using the Cable gland
according to the drawings.

Fig-PI
(4)Lay the cables from the cabinet side to the each devices (ex. BCT, cooling fan, oil temp. indicator,
oil level gauge etc.) side along the cable supports. And fix the cables to the cable supporters using
binder.
3 Wiring
(I)Treat the cabinet side end of the cable according to following procedure. See Fig-P2.
(j)Cut only the Protector of the Cable as shown in Fig-P2 and fix the cable to the cabinet with
Cable grand(Cable connector).

Attachment of a grounding wire is only a cable for PT.

'----~:~-=--"C"~-[\'.[Ie"".,",,'
Protector
''''' ?\,;,,_ ''''''~Y;;C,"~,_",)(Ch''0~$,'';-'''''i',-+Cl-3,,,,"?~?'''' ~'.Dl!' 'H
"'''';:;;"'d''''''''''''''.,.·".",.",::(.,"",·-~~y;,,,,,,,,,,,-,,
"·.,~,,",,,,,,,,~,,,,~,,,,,,,,,,,'I

Taping of this range by adhesive tape

Fig-P2

32141
~After confirming the cable marks, Connect all of the wires to the terminals in the cabinet after
attaching the crimp terminals in accordance with the drawings.
@ Wires should be fixed and bound as nice looking.

(2)Treat the device side end of the cable according to following procedure. (See Fig-P3.)
CDAfter adjusting the cable length, Cut only the Protector and metal sheath of the cable as shown
in Fig-P3.

Fig-P3

~Wrap the protector, inner protector and wire with adhesive tape as shown in Fig-P3.

@After confirming the wire using multi tester or buzzer in accordance with the drawings, Connect
the wires to the terminals of the device with the crimp terminals.

4. Inspection

NOTE : CD Resistant element should not be sent an electric current because it is used very
thin wire.
~ Insulation resistance: more than 10 M Q

(I)After finishing the connection of all of the wires, Confirm that all of the wire connections are
correct using multi tester or buzzer.

(2)Measure and confirm the insulation resistance of all wires including the devices by 500Vmegger

33141
15.0illeakage test.
1 Carry out the oil leakage test in accordance with following procedure; (See Fig-Q1.)
(1) Fill the main body with the oil till level "2" of the conservator of the main body after opening V4.

~ypassHose liter breather


(Transparent vinyl hose) pipe for main body
Filter breather VB
pipe for OLTC Pressure
V17 regulator
Oil level (Rubber bag)
24
:::::-::::::::::;::::::::::::-:::::::.:..8:::;:::::;::-::;::::::.

Conservator V2 V5
Compound
y for main body gauge

1 Conservator
forOLTC
Fig-Q1
Nitroge
gas cylinder

(2) Remove the filter breather from the filter breather pipe for main body. And attach the
valveV17, 22, 23 and V24. (V17, 22, 23 and V24 is used for installation work only.)
(3) Arrange the nitrogen gas cylinder, pressure regulator, compound gauge and the hoses.
(4) Apply pressure to the main body at 0.01-0.02MPa (0.1-0.2 kg/cm2 ) with the nitrogen gas and
release the air from the conservator through the V4 till the oil is discharged from the V4.

o Valve situations : Opened valve --+V2,V4,Y17, V22, V23 and V24.


Closed valve --+V5 ,V6.
NOTE: Attend watchmen by the compound gauge and the V4 because the injection speed
of the nitrogen gas should be controlled by the pressure of the compound gauge.
And the V4 should be closed immediately when the oil is discharged.

(5)After removing the hose from the nitrogen gas cylinder and opening the V24, fill again the main
body with the oil till the oil level is "6".
(6)Apply pressure to the main body at 0.05MPa(0.5kg/cm2 ) with the nitrogen gas and after closing
the V24, jot down the pressure and the oil temperature. And sit the main body this condition for
24Hours.
(7) Check the transformer for air leaks with Pressure relief
soapy water and oil leaks after 24hours from device

the time when the pressure was applied.


Main body
And then put all of the oil out from the main body.
. Gasket
2 Mount the pressure relief devices on the positions as followings. (See Fig-Q2.)
(1) Mount the pressure relief device on the position with the gasket.

NOTE; Don't put the foreign materials into the main body. Fig-Q2

(2)Mount the cover and the pressure relief vent.


34141
16.Final oil filling under vacuum.
1. Carry out the final oil filling according to following procedure; (See Fig-R1.)
(1) Arrange the oil purifier, oil storage tank, vacuum pump, vacuum gauge, pipe adapter, oil hoses,
vinyl hoses and valves(Vll - V20 are valves for only installation) as shown in Fig-R1.)

NOTE: It should be used that the vacuum hoses should be as short and large in diameter
as possible.
Oil level gauge for conservator
(Temporally) Pressure regulator
\
Bypass hose
VI

Vacuum gauge
(Compound gauge)
V2
'Hose Nitrogen
Oil gas cylinder
.5"" V2I hose
VI6 (Vacuum

1 pump) VI4 VI5

=: (Oil storage tank)


(Maio body) (Oil purifier)

Fig-R1
(2)Check the "VACUUM OIL" of the vacuum pumps for the vacuum pump set and oil purifier.
(DVacuum oil level of the vacuum pump.
®No water in the vacuum oil.
(3)After confirming the following valve situations, pull vacuum the main body till following criteria.

Valve situations Opened valve V1,V6,V7,V8,V16,V17,V18,V19,V20,v21.


Closed valve V2, V3,v4, V5, Vll,v12,V13,V14,V15.
Criteria Vacuum degree Less than 1.0 Torr.(133Pa)
Vacuum hold time More than 4.0 Hours

(4) After closing the V16, VB and V19, carry out the vacuum leakage test for 30 minutes and confirm
the result is satisfactory the criterion. Again pull vacuum after finishing the vacuum leakage test.

Criterion: V(Leakage value) ...... Less than 19kPa·L!min(140 L·TorrlMin.)


V = (Pz - Pl)/30 X Vl
P l : Vacuum degree at 5 minutes later from the valves closing (Torr.)
Pz : Vacuum degree at 30 minutes later from the Pl measured time (Torr.)
Vl : Oil volume of main body (Litters)

35141
(5) Confirm the breakdown voltage of oil is more than 50 kV/2.5mm· Gap. This testing oil sample
should be taken from the outlet of the oil purifier.
mg: more t . mm· ap.
In case of that the breakdown voltage of oil is not satisfactory, circulate the oil till the
criterion is satisfactory.

VI5 should be
Main
body
Fw direction
VI4 VI5
opened during
circulation.

(Oil (Oil storage


VI VII purifier) V12 V13 tank)

Fig-R2
(6)After confirming the breakdown voltage of oil, fill the main body with the oil through the VI till
the temporary oil level under vacuum. (Temporary oil level is 300mm up the main body top as
shown in Fig-R3.) Bushing turret
Valve situations (See Fig-Rl.) \
Oil level
Opened valve -> VI, V6, V7, V8,Vll, V12, V13, VIS,
Main body top 'Fi' j.JJ
V16, V17.V18, V19 V20, V21.
Closed valve V2, V3,V4, V5. ~ ~

w.
->

Criteria:
Vacuum degree -> Less than 1.0 Torr.
Oil temperature -> 40 - 60°C(Oil purifier outlet)
7,
Fig-R3
(7)After closing the V16, stop the vacuum pump. And after closing the V18, replace the vacuum
gauge to the compound gauge and again open the V18.(See Fig-RI.)
(8) Fill the main body with the oil again till the pressure of the compound gauge hecomes
o- 0.005MPa (0 - 0.05 kg/cm 2 )
(9)Close the V8 and V19. And open the V2.
(lO)After closing the V6 and opening the V4, fill the conservator with the oil till level "2" of the main
body conservator.(See Fig-Rl.)
*It checks that temporally oil level gauge and dial oil level gauge are seen simultaneously and
there are no abnormalities in dial oil level gauge.
Valve situations(See Fig-R1.) ;
Opened valve -> V4, V2, VI, Vll, V12, V13, VIS, V17.
Closed valve -> V6, V3, V5, V7,V8, V14,V16, V18, V19, V20.
Criteria; Oil temperature -> 40 - 60°C(Oil purifier outlet)
(ll)Replace the compound gauge from the V18 to the filter breather pipe of the conservator. (From
Fig-RI to Fig-R4.)
(12)Arrange the nitrogen gas cylinder, pressure regulator, compound gauge and the hoses as shown
in Fig-R4.
36/41
(13)Apply pressure to the main body at 0.01 - 0.02MPa (0.1-0.2 kg/cm 2 ) with the nitrogen gas and
release the air from the conservator through the V4 till the oil is discharged from the V4
(Fig-R4 shows the oil level situation after finishing this procedure.)
Filter breather Pressure
pipe for main body regulator
Filter breather
pipe for OLTC

\~ Oil

V23
Conservator V2
Nitrogen
for main body
..."J gas cylinder

1 Conservator
forOLTC
Fig-R4
r'-'-'-'-'-'-'-----'---'---'-'---'-----'---'-'-----'--,
_NOTE: Attend watchmen by the compound gauge and the V4 because the injection speed of the .
! nitrogen gas should be controlled by the pressure of the compound gauge and the V4 ~
~ should be closed immediately when the oil is discharged_
~._._._._._._~.-._._~~._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._.-.~
. I

(l4)After closing the V24, removing the hose from the nitrogen gas cylinder and opening the V17, fill
again the main body conservator with the oil till the oil level is "6"
Valve situations(See Fig-Rl) ;
Opened valve ->VI, V2, Vll, V12, V13, V15, V17, V23.
Closed valve ->V3, V4, V5,V6, V7,V8, V16, VI8, V19, V20 ..
Criteria: Oil temperature -+ 40 - 60°C(OiI purifier outlet)

(15)Remove the valve(V17) and re-attach the filter breather from to the filter breather pipe for main
body conservator, also OLTC too. (See Fig-Rl.)

(16) The final measurement of insulated oil resistance.


Measurement of at oil sampling from main body bottom valve.

r'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'~

i Criteria: More than 50kV/2.5mmGap !


I. I_
'_._._._._._._._._._._._._._._.J

37/41
17.Test and general inspection.
1 Electrical test
Field test is carried out according to the "site test procedure" supplied by MELCO.
~Site test procedure for Unit Transformer······SSN-C1734~

(l)Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of each winding to ground and the other windings are measured by
1000V megger.

(2)Winding ratio test

(3)Polarity, phase relation test

(4) Checking protective circuit


<DMeasure the insulation resistance of the protective circuits and their devices. And be sure that
the insulation resistance is more than 10 M (.I.
~Check the protective devices operations are correct in accordance with the sequence diagram.

2 General inspection Check following items ;


G) Oil leakage. ~Bolt connection. @Discoloration. @Abnormalnoise and vibration offans
@Reading and setting value of protective relays. @Rotary direction of fans
(VAll valves situations. (Opened or closed.)

3. Laboratory test. (Analysis of Insulating oil)


(l)Moisture content.
(2)Breakdown voltage

38141
18.Touch-up painting.

This item applies to the external surface painting of the main tank or the parts which are damaged
or welded during transportation and erection.

1 Treatment for under coating


(I)Damaged portion
(j)Wash away the oil, grease, dirt and dust using the organic solvent for removing fat and wipe out
by the waste rags, then dry it up.
(g)Polish the surface to be painted using emery cloth #200 - #320, and then clean the surface again.
@After cleaning, mix and stir the wash primer base and additives (Weight ratio 8 VS 2), add the
thinner of 10-20% (Weight percent) for arrangement of the viscosity of necessary.
@Paint the materials by the brush uniformly.
@Drying time ;Summer season (20°C or more) Natural drying more than 2-3 hours.
Winter season (Less than 20°C) Natural drying more than 4-5 hours.

(2) Welding portion


(j)Remove the paint film burned by the welding using the wire brush and steel chisel.
(g)Remove the scale and rust on the welded portion using the wire brush and steel chisel.
@Wash away the oil, grease, dirt and dust using the organic solvent for removing fat and wipe out
by the waste rags, then dry it up.
@Polish the surface to be painted using emery cloth #200 - #320, and then clean the surface again.
@After cleaning, mix and stir the wash primer base and additives (Weight ratio 8 VS 2), add the
thinner of 10-20% (Weight percent) for arrangement of the viscosity of necessary.
@Paint the materials by the brush uniformly.
([)Drying time ;Summer season (20"C or more) Natural drying more than 2-3 hours.
Winter season (Less than 20°C) Natural drying more than 4-5 hours.

2 Finish painting (General, acidity and oceanic environment.)


(1) Pain the material with the brush using the. phthalic acid resin enamel which is arranged the
viscosity.
(2) Drying time;
Summer season (20°C or more) Natural drying more than 3-4 hours.
Winter season (Less than 20°C) Natural drying more than 6-8 hours.

3 Inspection
Check the painted condition of the surface.
(1) Lack of uniformity of paint
(2) Beauty of paint surface
(3) Paint drops
(4) Unpainted parts and section

39/41
19.Adjustment of oil level.

This "OIL LEVEL ADJUSTMENT" work should be carried out more than 24 hours later from the
time when final oil filling is finished. And also this work should be carried out morning time
because the oil temperature relay doesn't show the average oil temperature after the main body is
exposed to the direct rays of the sun.

(l)Remove the oil pot from the filter breather bottom.


Filter breather
r;=============;;r*" pipe
Conservator
for OLTC Conservator
for transformer
Oil (Rubber bag)

Filter
breather

Hose
Dru
o r--../

Fig-Sl
From phase U only

(2) Drain the oil from the main body and OLTC gradually as shown in Fig-Sl in accordance with the
drawing "OIL TEMP. - OIL LEVEL CURVE".(For Main body & OLTC: SG67962)
f"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-
: NOTE: Don't use any oil pump(filter press and oil purifier) for oil draining. ~
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. .-..:
(3) Re-mount the oil pot on the position.
'-

40/41
20.Installtion criteria.

Item The contents of management Criteria

1 On base of main body

I
1) Leveling of foundation Within3mm
i -
2) I Adjusting center lines of 3 point Within +3mm
! -- -----
2 Insulated oil relation

I
1) Breakdown voltage (At the acceptance of insulation oil) i More than 40kV/2.5mm Gap
i
!
2) Breakdown voltage (At the oil filling to the main body)
!,
I , More than 40kV/2.5mm Gap
I -
I
3) Breakdown voltage (At the final oil filling) IMore than 50kV/2.5mm Gap
---
i -1
4) I Moisture content (Final) ! Less than 15 ppm
! !

3 Insulation resistance relation

1----
I,
1) Insulation resistance of bushing
: More than 2000MQ/1000V
I megger
I
2) i- Insulation resistance of protective relay & device
!i More than 100MQ/500V megger
! .. __.
!
3) [ Insulation resistance of protective circuit I- More than 10M Q/500V megger
I
4 Oil leakage test relation
I
I
1) Pressurization value 10.5kg/cm 2

2) Pressurization time IMore than 24 Hours


5 Vacuum relation

I
i
1) Vacuum degree ILess than 133Pa(1.0 Torr)
!

--
I
2) Vacuum hold time
II More than 4 Hours
:
I
3) Sitting time for the ~nergize II More than 48 Hours
6 The shock under transportation

I
1) Impact recorder
I
Less than 29.4m/S2 (3G)

41/41
3. OPERATION
3.1 FIRST START-UP AND START-UP AFTER INTERVENTION SDT-L.1947
3.2 EMERGENCYOPERAllON SDT-L.1948

SDT-L.1946
(5/7 )
FIRST START-UP AND START-UP AFTER INTERVENTION
The recommended check items are as follows.

(1 )Check visually the transformer appearance


<D Temperature indication(oil, winding)
~ Oil level

@ Breathing condition(breather)
@ tap position
® Oil leakage
® Condition of valves(open or close)
(2)Check that the cooler control cubicle is switched-on
<DCheck recommended settings of protective device.
~Check no alamn indication on the local and central control cubicle.

@Check nomnal function of switches, annunciates and lamps.


@Check that the transfomner actually trips when a trip protective relay
Contacts are bridged.

SDY-L.1947
-1/1-
EMERGENCY OPERATION

Table1 shows relation between operating fans and permissible load. (continuous service)
This table is adopted under assumption that all radiators are normal condition.

Table 1

4 63
3 59
2 55
1 50
a 44

SDT-L.1948 (1/1)
4. DRAWINGS
4. 1 OUTLINE FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-300 SV19275
4. 2 FOUNDATION DRAWING FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-301 SR21071
4.3 SHIPPING SKETCH FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-302 SR21070
4.4 RATING PLATE FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-303 SV19278
4.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF COOLER CONTROL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-304 SZ02389
4.6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF OLTC CONTROL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-305 SZ02403
4. 7 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF LTC MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUIT BK-6020-306 SZ70049
4.8 ASSEMBLY DRAWING OF COOLER CONTROL CABINET FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-307 SK08047
4.9 ASSEMBLY DRAWING OF OLTC CONTROL PANEL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-308 SK08063
4.10 INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF MOTOR DRIVE CABINET BK-6020-309 SH94610
4. 11 WI RING DIAGRAM OF COOLER CONTROL CAB INET FOR TIE TRANSFORMER (1/3) SK60361
4. 12 WI RING DIAGRAM OF COOLER CONTROL CAB INET FOR TIE TRANSFORMER (2/3) SK60362
4.13 WIRING DIAGRAM OF COOLER CONTROL CABINET FOR TIE TRANSFORMER (3/3) SK60363
4.14 WIRING DIAGRAM OF OLTC CONTROL PANEL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER (1/3) SK60364
4. 15 WIRING DIAGRAM OF OLTC CONTROL PANEL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER (2/3) SK60365
4,16 WIRING DIAGRAM OF OLTC CONTROL PANEL FOR TIE TRANSFORMER (3/3) SL60112
4.17 AUX. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-314 SV19279
4. 18 HV LINE BUSHING OUTLINE FOR TIE TRANSFOMER BK-6020-315 SR21 072
4. 19 HV 8< MV NEUTRAL BUSHING OUTLINE FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-316 SR21073
4.20 MV LINE BUSHING OUTLINE FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-317 SR21 074
4. 21 TV BUSHING OUTLINE FOR TIE TRANSFORMER BK-6020-318 SR21075
4.22 ASSEMBLY DRAWING OF OLTC MOTOR DRIVE CABINET BK-6020-320 SW91056
4.23 WIRING SKETCH SV20072
4. 24 ITEM LIST SW36389
4.25 OIL TEMP. OIL LEVEL CURVE SG67962

SDT-L.1946
(6/7 )
2
I
3
I
4 I
5 I
6 I
7 I 8 , 9 I
10 , 11 , 12 13 , 14 , 15 , 16
SLC:61/1S ~~I ITEM FITTING .1 DISCRIPTION roTA!..

AUTO JRANSfORlEll 1 IN LINE BUSHING TYPE' OT' (SUOkV-pSOAI 5R2H112 3


ao 26S11
A
II 55 !I
W!TI-l ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER
«00()l53000kVA TIIlEE PHASE 50H! CORE FORM
f---'-'-+_,lIV::...:'c.""::...:HEOOUlllAL=,-"BlJSH=I::",-W"I"TH,-"""=::",,I::",-TERM=::IOOL=-,T,:,YP,,,,-',-PO:..'..:'.:.",-':.:'_-:..31::5.:.0:.:A',-::5R:=,::",,13:....t--:-1--l A
s MV LINE BUSHltI> TYPE" OT" £1Z3KV-630A) SR21074 3

{f~
TV BUSHING TYPE' PO' C24kV-lEiOOAI SR211175 3
aJNTINIIIUS RATI'" TYPE OF COOLING ONANlOIW"


COOLER CONTROL CABINET
lIV 230kV +10~ TO -10" YNautD
011 L.OPJJ TAP CIWml (TYPE tofllMS Il 3
MY 115kV YNautD
I(ImR OOIVE UNIT 1
TV 23kV WSMVAI DELTA
PlUfECTiVE RELAY FOR OLTC 3

""~.=
OIL ClJANIITY
B 1--,,54-:111=NSER=",'A=ro=R,-,FlJR==-=1RAN6FlIRMER~== -+_-,-l-l B
1llANSfDIHll 40500 L
10 CONSERVATQll FOR TAP 0WI3ER 1
TAP ctW<El 700 L
11 PRES9JRE RELIEF DEVICE 1
toSS 12 BUCHIDLZ RElAY FOR W.lN TANK 1
!!lASS FKlI6
- DETAlL OF EARTHING TERMINAL CORE AND aJIL5 43000 kG 13 DIAl.. TYPE OIL GAUGE FOR TRANSfORMER IB--()002? 1
OF ITEM 221150·ZSIISlltfotJ TANK AND FITIINGS 25000 kG 14 DIAl.. TYPE OIL 6"11XiE FOR TAP CIWlGER IS-D002? 1
400 \ BASt LINE OF FOUNDATIO~' OIL 37H10 kG 15 OIL TElf'EflATURE INDU'ATOR 1
roTAL 105100 kG
c 80 224 80 1-:::~,-+-,:'-::"'=I""TC.::"'-"::~::L;"'::ER:='BR-'I: : :;'-' 'HER''lIlR: ' ' =,--11lANS---='' '.=---------------t--:-:
.. --I C
II
IB IlEHYmA.TING FILTER BREATHER FOR 1M' CHANGER 1
gJJ -j----+-- f- 1 19 IWJIATOR 1 SET
o
SAMPLl NG PLUG
- ';1 ~ 1 ~ l
ro

ll-m SCREW
_T_ / Rl/2 THO
20
21
RADIATOR VALVE
COOLING FAN
1 SET
.4 SETS

DETAILS OF CABLE OlITLET OPENNING


~C{l.P 22
23
EARTHING TEm-lHW.
FLANGED \\liEEL WITH FOUNDATION OOLT
tl5(l~25ll51J+l1

5R21071
2
4
o OFKJTOR OOlVE UNIT lITEM 7) 1--O"'-+-:RA:':T=I=""cPC:LA"T='E'-'"""-'-"'''''"'''-'''''--------~--~--='''=19=2=7B'--+-....::.l-l 0
/ DETAIL OF SOMPLING PLUG (ITEM 37. 41l
25 LIFTING LLG & JAI)(ING ross 4

~
2S flAl.JLAGE EYE 4
27 IW(}lIlLE 1 SET

~ ~
,-.~ti
+:
28
29
aJNNECTIMG VAlVE ITRANSF. -CONSER.)
00. ITA? CHANGER- ro i
SIZE 50
SIZE 50
I
1

~lll ; ,J;--
o i 30 PmtMI\TIC SlRITTER VALVE 50 1
E f--'=--+=="=~='c-:c=--------=~'-----+-=--jE
I 31 OIL FILTER Vf.J...VE lTRANSF. TANIO
32 _llJ.
SIZE 50 1
{CONSER. FCR JRAtlS.l SIZE 50 1
33 00. [CONSER. FOR TAP CftAHGERl SIZE 25 1
11001100110011001 I!ID 282S 34 OIL OUTLET VN...VE FOR OIL FIlTEfl UNIT SIZE 2.5 3
fDETAILS OF ~L£ OOlLET OPENNING
-
35 OIL DRAIN VALVE [CONSER. FOR TIWlSF.l SIZE 2.5 1
/ ~ rollER CIlNTROL CABINET lITEM 5) 3S 00. rmANSF. TANK) SIZE 50 1
37 OIL 5A!'FLING VALVE WITH PlUG ITRANSF. TANIO SIZE 15 1
F f-""',--+_,O"",-"""LET"-,V::;AL:cVE:c.::FlJR,,-,O,,lL,,,,Fl,,LT::'"R,,"',,',-' ;:5IOZO E'-"":.... -t-....::.3--I F
- WELDING
COVER f-"39'--+_'A"I'=RE::LEA5E""'~V::AL"VE"-'IClJ=NSER='::AT::O"R,:,",,R..:1RAN=;:.,:,' ;:Sl"ZE'-"15:.... -t-~I--1-
4(1 OIL [lWN VALVE rolTe Of'ARMNT) SIZE 50 1
41 OIL SAlf'LlNG VALVE WITH PlUG {CONSER. FOR TANK) SIZE 15 1
-
f--"",+"GAS::::""CO"l"lE"C::.TO",,-,:,o"''c' a=uc,,H,,HO,,l=Z..:'=E;:lA:c'~ ~-==-=-~ ,+_l'--j-
43 VACUUM Vf4...VE FOR TRANS. SIZE 50 1
44 aJNNECTING VN..VE IBlJCHl(JLZ RELAY - CONSER-) SIZE SO I
G 1-"",-+-,Ill",V"VEC=T1:="'::"'AL"VE"'-:IBIOl=,,,HO,,,l,,'=RELA,:,,,"-'c.-6AS""-"CO"l"'lECT=:c:0""C- 5,,',,ZE~1,,5 +-_I'.::::_j G
46 AIR RELEASE PlIE FOR RADIAlUIl 1 SET
47 OIL OOAIN PL03 FOR RADIATOR 1 SET
46 OIL FILTER UNIT FOR OLle 3
- f--::"'-+-:O::"~""=I"V_'V:::ALc:VE'-"""::-:O"'ll:..'-'Fl"-lT"ER"--""'"n:.... 5,,1"c1£~'oo5'-- __--1--3'--1~
5(1 RESISTNlCE ELEMENT FOR REMJTE WINDING TEMPERATURE (PUO(ll! ATtl" e l l
51 RESISTANCE ELEMENT FOR REI-mE OIL TEK'ERATURE ( PU(I(ll! AN C ) 1
H '-="'--'-c."""="'-=',:,""R"O,,lTC:.:... -"-_=3--I H
NOTE: :
I. The transformer tank is constracted as tco ccver welding type, not a bell COllstraction.
2.0LTC compartment is separately constructed IrOIll main tank.
as Shown following sketCh.
-

I--~
r'===u====;r=="-. j: 1C SELEC1lllI

~,

/ I_..JL_'I;-' ~':OH
y--L.,L om COHPERTloIEliT
DETAILS OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING
- TERMlOOL / SOCIALlS1 REPUBLIC OF YIE1 NAH
lRA/lSFl»lMl:R COIL ELECTRIC!TY OF V!E1 NAM
COMl'ARUlEll1 INSlOE TANK HYDROPOWER PROJEC1 MAN.AGEHENT UIlI1 NO.5
J BUOII KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT J
f- -=-SUI!tOlU
"LO"'T-""'' -,.c21'-
CDrPDratiDn
--~-i

• MTTSUBISHI rtl. __
. . . ELECTRIC \@!j
- SHDlEs-mIA "eOO":::';;':::",cO"NO"I"":'O:"C:e;;-n;;';;'t----='::,:',,;;.==--if-
PROJECT FILE NO. BK-6l1Z0 300
K.\s.IPIl1MT DUp. DI5T.
stlpiDUF~Fl3lo1 I I lid I lei I I K
IIlTSUBISHI ELEC1RIC CDRPIlRA1l0H TiTLE
iii III t
It III t -$-E3 ~~gJ fflh~ ~ SoYim, OUTLI NE FOR
~ SHOP ORDER DIll. 1M ft ••
CHEaEO TIE TRANSFORMER
~f 1:4D ••
'itI REMARKS

, 2
, 3
,
=C:C:===C:===C:==""'
4 5
, I 6 7 I B
, 9 I 10
, ~ 2nn6-ltl-l3
nESISKEO
fpPRL o
M. Ueil
So liillan '''sv 19275 D
I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9

~
1 L.O 1G""~'8MO
M'.IN BODY GROUNDING WIRE 1 3B60 ,I
A mO-250S01+1) I' fA2l A

~
,~

~
BASE LINE OF GROUNDING WIRE
RAIL FOUNDATION 1 710 I t150-250SOMM
1000 )
1200' r+, r----""'.
'iT "
~.-----0<~ -,--~ ~..(
1
- I i I-

BASE LINE OF
,-------
i
----- ---+------~ : -~ OUTLET OF COOLER
,CONTROL CABINET
I~
f
_

~_ T
0

I II
0 1 0 •.

FOUNDATION i ~ i ~ , ! I r;
B , i ! 1 I~ 8
---~ -
~ i
t::9

:----------- ----- ----t------- --


!
----t--------t- + I
-! ~I -~.--
z.
~a;DI---;; ---~I---
LUfD:5
~SN N -
"'I '"
- 0 i I
o
;::;~ f-
iiJ I '1' j§i~

!l-r--' -'"
o

c
JACKING POINT

(35mNxHOTAU
I r- -:;:"~~- ~'
=
LMJ 1900 '
- i

1
I

NEUTRAl GROUNOrNG WIRE


q
\
I~

I'I<-.---"='"
1000
I f-~ItJ1

NOTE
[£ill
1. TRANSFORMER TOTAL MASS: IDS, lOOk,
2. LEVELING OF RAIL SHOULD BE ACCURATEo WITHIN 3mm.
c

<J - 3. SCOPE OF SUPPLY BY MANUFACTURER IN THIS DRAWING i- I>


M'.IN BODY GROUNDING WIRE \OUTLETOF o.L.T. C
11) FLANGED WHEELS
1 mO-250501+1) OPERATING MECHANISM (2) ANCHOR BOLTS
i, 4. CONTROL AND POWER CABLES FOR COOLER CONTROL CABINET &

~
3BOO OLTC DRIVING MECHANISM WILL NOT BE SUPPLIED BY
D M'.NUFACTURER. THEY SHOULD BE RESPECTIVELY SUPPLIED D
BY OTERS.
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
, ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
-
aJrJ!V I ~ HYOROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5
BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
I-

I III ~I ~
1 LOT No,27
RAIL GAUGE 29 45 Sumltnmo Corporation
33'45
E
~I.
1
32 45
!
~ J... MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
CORRESPONDING SECTION
<i=:mG020
E

PROJECT FILE NO. BK-G020-aoI


C;J t=. R'I
F OF R. DATE
IND. I'DWG. SEC. 12SYM. K.I S.IPRINTIDUP. DIST.
'T .;; >:
UJ.......-l
C!) C\J =
• <=:>
<=:>
=
LU
<.r;J
.~
SKIP I D U P - l FI31 0 1131 I Ie I I I
zCQ.:;:;;:;::~:;;;;~~~ : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION TITLE
«e-- _=e:-===
F I ::r:CJ:I -==
= =
.e-e ~~gJE~m~
C'oJ

U-J
occ:
C'-' --< --<

tr.l=et:>c.nc.n<n
C"-' C"-' en
en <...>
=-
• wu ·w u ~RAt, S.Y,m, FOUNDATION DRAWING F
I <occ:-==<occ:occ:<= <

~MEC~EO F.ilts"; FOR TI E TRANSFORMER


C'fJ;;oc"';3C;lIC:3:::O;:::~< a:>
.. - R INlI<"l f"'ll"'l"," R ~,.: ~ DIM. I " .
I t.:::Jt:::.Il::::Jt:::.It.:::Jt:::.I t::J =!= ---' ,,;..... RIi . . ~ ... &.
'kif c:l •••••• en -=.--
'-' - - I
SCALE 1:4U DESIGNED M.U2da DWG.ND.
o
;:2
====%:=c
;;; ;;;: ;,; ; ; ;;; ;;;

I
en
~
UJ-=;=
~ 0... ; :

I T
:r~M 2006-l0-13 ~PPR~VED 5.Taken,u SR2 10 7 1 A
2 3 4
"V
2 3 4 !
5 ! ! ! !

oL 016 e-'S ~~~~I .

I8ZJ
A SHIPPING MASS 58000 kg A
NITROGEN GAS SEALED WITHOUT OIL
- l-
I

B B
I
!

- ~7300 36'00 -
[@3350 , I
@PRESSURE GAUGE

-
! !

I I
Iri~ -TI O ..,., !
II'
C
1" \1 ...,.'1 I I I q
C

~
0
I
L__J
I
IC] IL _~
I
ILJI
CENTER OF
0
I
L__J
I I
!

I I
I
<I
-
Il~AVITY !

!
I- [)
11'-"",
~-~'
Q

b co
~
!
[ 250 ::'= <=J
tJ.....__I)
/
<0
"' q \ .._-~ IV LIFTING LUG &
.~ I~ ! JACKING BOSS

~~
0 co
.

[ i l.!- ! I-

~ "-
! !.O
I ~
~ I CENTER OF .

r' , i GRAVITY IT'


!
~ ~ 'q .1cGI SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
-
"- - '-- i- ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5 ‫ן‬-
!
1Ml3080 2d25 HAURAGE BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
I I LOT No. 27
I
I: 1M] 5370 ! .1 !
~BASE LINE OF FOUNDATION
Sumitomo CorporatIon

E I
,""-BASE LINE OF FOUNDATION J.. MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Ci:m
CORRESPONDING SECTION 6020
PROJEcT FILE NO. BK-6020-a02
C) 1:= E F R.
NO. OF R. DATE 2
DWG. SEC. SYM. K. S. PRINT DUP.DIST.
,C) ~

- II
~

I CI
-.,;==
.. ..
UJ~ = ~ .,; SKIP
D U P - FI3101
I 1 3
'" "" ~ ~

F
z('Q~::;;:;:=~=~~~
«t-- =C'.JC'O=== .... ....:c
::Cc.D
U --I
~=C'.J~

<.n = r;n en = ~
U;I en
~
=;:;____ ""=
=
-
e
- = e

~
MITSUBISMI ELEcTRIC CORPORATION
~ -$--E3 3RD ANGLE fi' S. Yama
. PROJECTION DRAWN *
TITLE

SHIPPING SKETCH I
I.....::"",.o:t:««=

'" ~I §§]~~~~~~,..:
""
=> =
Cf);;c:ao:::]1;"':ao:::~~<

~ ~
<c<c<c<c<c<c<c=....w';'"
~ ~

! .~ '- DIM.. IN III


• f
CHECKED F.Mitsui FOR TIE TRANSFORMER
S'R 2 1 0 7 0
=~ ~
&
~CALf 1:50
It
*i=
a
-
~.;:: ~
::z:=======U;l
=
. . . . . '-"" ':='6; ,
~ ~ ~ ~~ :;; ==~~
;::
=~=
~ . M8M
DATE 1006-[0-[3
DESIGNED
11 I
M.Ue~~

APPROVED S. jakenm
DWG
B
1 I ? 3 4
'V
" I
y
I I
I I G1 ! I"TJ I m I 0 ! n I ClJ I »
it t CHANf m
NO 0-13-L6732,_00 e-
SCT RATING WAS ~DDED. N
Oil 01 HASS WAS CHANGED" m
...... I 20Q7-2-28 R. Kinta A..JLJ1 ..-j

IMPEDANCE. SERIAL ~UMBER, >


[J)
rEAR OF MANUfACTURE

~~
WERE AnIlED.
l'.gpll1:1.:lLJ.Un!lL!)'~

~
~

- r

w w

~
L ~~l~l~~~Sf~~~~~
50 --"fh
WITH ON LOAO TAP CHANGER
IEC-60076120001 'fYPi'·CRll-MR HiS Ii
TYPE OF COOLING ONAN 10NAF
OJ r

THREE PHASE CORE FORM


collTINTITIUs RATTNG IMPEDANCE VOLTAGE OIL
V 44000 I 63000 kVA HV-MV 63000kVA 12.71 % TRANSFORMER 40500 L
- 230000 V HV-TV 5000kVA 2.24 % TAP CHANGER 700 L r
110/158 A MV-TV 5000kVA 1.10 % MASS
M V 44000 I 63000 kVA 8ASIC IMPULSE LEVEL CORE' WINDINGS 43000 kg
115000 V HV LINE 1050 kV TANK' FITTINGS 25000 kg
~
~
2211316 A MV LINE 550 kV OIL 37100 kg
T V 3000 I 5000 kVA HV , MV MEUTRAL .95 kV TOTAL 105100 kg I
23000 V TV 1'5 kV TEMPERATURE RISE
75.3/126 A SERIAL NUM8ER 0 L6732101 OIL 55 K
- DESlGWNUMBER H862713 YEAR _DE MANUEAC.IURE _ _2007 _ WI NOJllG 60 K I---
lW 2W IV 2V lU 2U N 3W 3V 3U

m
0 151
200tlA
5P20
(111) []ISlIZYI
HO/IA
ClASS 0.5
[gIS11311'1
1501lA
5P20
0 181
(311
ISO/IA
SP20
lHI3Vl
(]lBI (SUI
Is011A
5P20
152'i'iU1
m

1521IWI IS21m 152laWI

- []2S1 ClIIl ~251(2V) 02S1lSWJ 0251lSVl 0251lSUI r


lill!t'j
5P20
2521111'1
(COilA
SP20
25212Vl
150llA
SP20
25213\\'1
ISOIIA
5P20
25213Vl
15011A
5P20
252 mil

C~WlH!lr!fl
~
INDI(',o\IM
...-I
I I rl
~
r--

- r

m m

- r
~ t>

~
~

l-- l--

- r
AMp· S CONNECT! ON lU
VOLT 3U
oNAN ONAF PO IlION TAP SELECTOR TRANSFER SWITCH
12U
<;1 1 I 1I
253iiOD
1,250100
247300
100
102
103 147
144
145 I
1
2
3
I
I
1

3
2
lW
~v
IV
~3V -"
ffi40ij 104 I 149 I 4 I 4 3W
241500 105 I 151 I 5 I 5 YNlldU
238600 106 6 I---
235800 108 7

lWI~ f
ill900 109 B
HVr--

-
A 9

ffi
[I
230000 110 158 98 K

~
3urn~ ~. ~@l 0
9C 1
227100
224300
112
113
160
162
10
11
I
I
2
3 3W.
3V.
'Vi.
0
0 • N
221400 115 164 12 I 4 r
218500 116 166 13 I 5
215600 118 169 14 I 6
15 ,. 7
DD
-
212800 119 171
209900 121 173 16 I 8
207000 123 176 i"7T----s TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT ~

---
---

• 1

I: §[ g;1 0
& [;JmlDruo~mo rnOill1JffiO® ®®ffim®ffilA\'ffi]®~
J~~~rn .,
I---

I
b:l;j:jj;:8-
\~I~>
!!I:...,!It );_
• ili •
~ ~
""
%

_

m
-l
SV1927B
-
w

TIlE Bt
, • .II: Or/CES
•.. _ FO: HfPED;
._ liCE
""........
~,:..:" :=."
ttl
c
~~~. ,."'~~h

~;~!.I.~ ~~~~~s::-.:E:':~~~~
,,~._

I, " .....
MATERIAL THICKNESS LENGTH WIDTH STYlE
! ~~~oo~ "f"II+Iftii
,~~~~
COL "iEE OE E'bil"
.~ ... ~~ .... _.... ~.~,.~~~
~ SUS304CP 1; 0 500 315 TH r
STAINLESS STEEL
~ ~~§o~
l l I" I Ie U"I x Ii L l IOU ""

-W1·l:F-DE GOT; !11ft!


f.::±=i:::::t"Oj'" -
~"rn"'Q·i'ill' ~ ~
-
(1]'"

~. i" ~~l!_ ~ ~

i~i.~ ~
··
lr~
<

... -
~I~=-;=
o
~ '--I
;!S ;:g
z rr13: o ••
• r_ •• n ~
:z m",-
= 2 ~ ~~ "" ,.,~;!
m -<~ c: ""n-
o :ll-lUl
~ ::tltxl

.
:z " I:l::tl-l
<> ..............
~
'-
~~ r
• ~ ("")CfJ m <> '"
- m
::<:
-<; n_
JCD - ~ C -1-1""

~ ~:~
I~ ;S~ .
." Z"Tl-

--.. ~~ -, ~ ~~;
~".
CD =-;
='"
0<:
rn
-d
n ~~~
•o "0
~
II .;:; 5:~
....
m"
~::;
.m
0:;::1:--1
"
~
-
m

1m I= ·
, 0

~ "
~
-,
"
y I I
'"
I
'"
I
! -n
I rn I D
-I
co OJ I
»
ENGlHEERh.._ ORO NO 0-36-L67323
07L6732301
~ MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
SERIAL NUIIBER

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF
COOLER CONTROL FOR SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
TIE TRANSFORMER ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM (EVN)
PURCHASER HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5

COOLER CONTROL CABINET


PROJECT FOR TIE TRANSFORMER

S I TE BUON KUOP HYDRO pis


~ SHEET No. PAGE No. REV; T I T L E
>- TTOl 001 C SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST
I- TT02 002 A DEVICE LIST
(] >-
f-
M

~
I- TTll 003 C MAIN CiRCUIT
>- TT12 004 A CONTROL CIROU IT (1)
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
TT13 005 C CONTROL CrRCU rT (2)
ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM(EVN)
>- TT14 006 A FAULT INDICATOR CIRCUIT (1)
f- TT15 007 FAULT INDiCATOR CIRCUJT (2)
HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5
>- TT16 008 B FAULT INDICATOR CIRCUIT (3) BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
I- TT17 009 RTD AND BeT CIRCUIT (1) LOT No. 27
>- TT18 010 RIO ANO BOT CIRCUIT (2) Sumitomo Corporation


f- TT19 011 A AlARM INDIGATION CONTACTS CiRCUIT

~~
>- TT20 012 A AlARM AND TR IP CONTACTS CIROU IT
MITSUBISHI
== DIlIDIf&
f- TT21 013 LI GHT! HG AND HEATER CIRCU rT
l- . .EI.ECTRJC .
f-
CORRESPONDING SECTION
l- TT31 014 A TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT OF COOLER CONTROL CABINET (1)
1;0 TT32 015 A TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT OF COOLER CONTROL cAs INET (2) PROJECT FILE NUMBER BK-6020-304
~
I'::"
I~ "~
§;~
~
.
~
<
~
•<
~

~
Ifj!!j!/f; DAIT
DRAIlH
OCr. 23. 2006
H.ATAGI
TInE

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST


strEET NO.
nOl

~
CHE_ H. TANAKA
~'"
r. Ii
@
~
~
~
~
~
~ APPROVED S. NAITO
ow. Nil. S Z 0 2 3 8 9 -IREV~NO. PAGE NO.

001
'V
~
I - -
2 -
I -3 4 I _._- -- 5 - -
I -6 _ I... _-- -
7 -- -
I- - - - - -
• - -
9

---
ITBI DEVICE Nil. DESCR IPT ION TYPE SPECIFICATION O'rY MANUFACTURER

1 'A MOlDEV-CASE CIRCU IT BREAKER NF63-SW 600V 2 POLES 15A INTERRUPTING CAPACllY:15kA{230V I.e) 1 lIELCO
• <; 2 8AE BAN MOLDED-GASE CI ROO IT BREAKER NF63-S1V 600v 2. POLES 15A INTERRUPTING CAPACITY: 15kA(230V· I.e) 2 MELCO
,
'-'-
=
-
3 'D MOLDEP-CASE GI RCU rT BREAKER NF63-SW 250V 2 POLES 15A INTERRUPTING CAPACITY:7.5kA{220V DC) 1 MELCO
- 4 23G THERMOSTAT VRS-G134 SETfING RANGE:fO ...: 35"C 1 SAGINOMIYA '

-
-
'-
-
5

6
27G

27GT
UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY

TIMER
SRE-Kl'

SR11>-IO<
23DY I.e
220V DC
SffilNG RANGE:l60 -,230V AC
TIME ADJUSTABLE:O. 1 - 60SEC
CONTAGT:lc (latb)

INSjANTANEOUS CONTACT:2a2b &', TJIlE-LIIiIT CONTACT:lalb Off-DElAY


1

1
IlELCO

IlELCO
f--

l-
f- 7 27E 27N lIIDER VOLTAGE RElAY SRE-Kl' 2aDV AC sm ING RANGE: 160 -' 230V I.e CONTACT:lc(lalb) 2 MELCO
b ,-
,-
, 27ET 27NT TIMER SRT-NN 230V AC TIME ADJUSTABLE:O. 1 - &OSEe
INST.l'""ANEnll!:: COHTACT:.2.a2b &. 'TIME-lIMlr CONTACT: latb lJ1HlELAY I 2 MELCO
-
f-
i-
• 30Fl 30f2, 3OF4 - 3OF16 FAULT INDICATOR TRf-23 220V DC CONTACT~2a TARGET TYPE ' 15 KOyO

'0 3OF3 FAULT INDICATOR TRf-23 250V 1.0 50Hz GONTACT:2a TARGEr TYPE . 1 KOYO
l-
i- 11 43G CONTROL SW ITCH 'H "MANU - OFF- AUTO" HANDLE:FlOWER (NON-SPR I NG RETURN) 1 AlJI
f-
f--- 12 52E 52N MOlDED--CASE CIRCUiT BREAKER NF6J-SYr' 600V 4 POLES 20A INTERRUPTING' GAPACITY:7. 5kA(400V I.e) 2 MELCO
I- 690V 3 POLES 1 1. 6~
i- 13 52Fl - 52Fo4 THERMAL-MAGNET IC MOTOR CI RCU JT BREAKER GY2-ME06 WITH AUXILIARY CONTACT:1b fTVJ>I:':GV-AI=1\
4 SCHNEIDER
l-
i- 14 630X AUXILIARY RaAY SRD-N4 220V DC CONTACT :2a2b 1 MELCO
c Iu; BOC lImER VOLTAGE RELAY SRE-AAU 230V Ae 50Hz SETTING RANGE:5Q - 250V DC CONTACT:1c(lalb) 1 MaCO
Fu; '5
r.= 16 80GT TIMER SRT-NN
230V AC TiME ADJUSTABLE:O. 1 60SEC
1 MELCO

I
INsTANTANEOUS COHTACT:2a2b & TIME-LIMIT GONTACT:lalb llII-DFI .y
17 83E 83N CHANGE-DVER CONTACTOR S-2xN21 230V AC 501iz CONTACT:5a2b 1 MELCO
- f-
'" §;
f9-
18 BBF MOTOR STARTER S-«21 230V Ae 50Hz AUX I L IMY COtrrACT: 5a2b 1 YELCO

cE 19 OS DOOR STtITCH Z-15GQ--6 230V AC corcrACT:lc(la1b) 1 0IlRllII

20 HL SIGNAL lAMP M--LEO 230V AG LED; TYPE LENS COLOR: GREEN WITII RESISTOR 1 MELCO

dI 21 HS HEATER SW ITCH SF115-2 230V AC 2POlES 1511. 1 JINBD d

22 IL , INCANDESCENT lAMP . .4400 AC230V 40W 1 MATSUSHITA

23 HL SIGNAL l..AitP M--LED 230V Ae lED; TYPE LENS COLOR: RED I'lITH RESISTOR 1 MELCO
.
- 2' SH SPACE HEATER SH2950 AC230V 20QW 1 OKUTANl

25

26

, 27 •
28

2.

30

&MITSUBISHI
ELECTR·I C
"" DEV ICE LI 8T
SHEET NO.

H02
f

-...
"" OCT. 23. 2006
~
DWG. MD. p"GE lID .
H. ATAGl

, -
A OCT. 16. 2007 H. A H. T
, -
H. TANAKA S. NA ITO
,S Z 0- 2 3 8 9 -
002
\l
1 2 1 3 4 1
5 1 6 I 7 1 B 1 9

CMCCIHl 1) (CD" );
, (MCe&-<l2) ( LOOl);
I NORMAL SUPPLY ! I BlERGENGY SUPP~Y !
I AC 400V 50HZ I I AC 400V 50HZ I
",
,L_ ---lUL _--.J' 3PHASE 4W IRES

L_---lUL_~
3PHASE 4WIRES
la

--------------------------------.
I-----]<~{~{~~------------------------- "!~l"'~
-------~
COOLER CONTROL CAB INET I
, ~ ~
- ~;;;;:;; ;;;1 ... w
.... :u
r-
I
~1. **
~
52tl

"'~B"
T,
HF 6:MiIr'" - -- - 8M1

~
I M
52E - -- - "NF"63-SII'"
I 41' 20A -NFOa-Sll""
'",...,...
4P 201< -'i ""
E2M ](rm:)
_+-.,J-=i-+------~2P 16,1, N2Al
- ,
L. ~'"
,.... "'" ]c m.) ;z=~~
iZ ;Z /' b

83' 83E~d~d~
·S-2xN2,"
(TTl,) ~IlF~
"
- ~ '" ~ ,~ 'M I I II :C ::: }T13)
,
f-
I
, ~
"""
Id_,d_ d 8BF
II' c
,_...l "S-t/21"
I
~ , 2 4 8 (rna) ,
>-
1 !
1 I ! Ult !
~ I 1' I
d I
I
"ld l
I{ 2.
3J .~,,,,.
• 6 31' 1.4,1,
"Ul_i~~ .~
1~ 2. 4 6 31' 1.4Ii
"Id'_i~~ .::!,.",.
I i 2. 4 6 31' 1.411
"Idl_i~~ .:;'..;.,..
li-. Z 4 .6 31' 1.4,1,
I
i
d

,~~~t: .s~f2ti: E.fEEE SiEi2t: ,


I -E:'_ 2_1-- 4_ 5_ 'f!..----------.-- 1_ 8_ ~--------_- 1~, 1~ ~---------------------------------.J r-
-
~. ~ ~ J ~ ~ ~ Z Z2 I ~t ----I
i :: :~ ~ ~: ~:~ i
I Fl F2 F3 F4 I e
e , "---.../0. $5kli "---' O. 55kW O. S5"kW '-----" O. 55kfl' I

I No.1 COOLING FAN No.2 COOLING FAN Mo.3 COOLING FAN No.4 COOLING FAN I
, . '
I , '
Tl E TRANSFORMER
(REFER TO DWG. No, SV19Z79)
I
'-----------------------------~------------------------------------------------------~

r-
() MJTSUB1SHl In.' SHEET NO.

~ELECTRIC
MAIN CIRCUIT TT11
f I------+-i CIOCT.16.2007 H.AH.T DATE
f
OCT. 23. 2006
- ,--- -- ';1007 H.A H. T PABE NO.
DRAWN I H. ATABI
11 IIUJt OB. 2007 H. A tl. T S Z0 2 3 8 9 003
I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 -I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9
\l
I 2 I 3 4 5 I 6 7 8 I 9

a
a
'"'

~-----------------------------------------------------------------------------,

r COOLER CONTROL GAB INET '


! (TT11) N2Al 230V 50Hz (ml) E2Al nov 50Hz !
b i
,
,I
~
2" ~I
18
27NT '27E
4
J,
U
2JET :
,
b

I ~ I
i ~ S tJ2?NT i
j _ _; i
I ttl 22
83E
u:l 22
S3H
I
=i " " i
c c

=
>- i
, " " i '

11 ~
,

I I., l> 1.1 5


I
1.1
I I
Al
I
I'
g;
I.e
,
27HT
16D-23OV l
(lIM'Ae) I Z7N B3N.
I 160-23OV NJ I
(19OV All) I Z7E1I\1
M
278 83E I
.B- I (me)
,
3 M O.l-60SEC A.2; 3 M. D.1-flOSEC
(ISEC)
A2.
,

I ~ .' L
I~i
! (TT11) NZA4 (ml) EU4
J
!
d d

• •
;WIl3N
sa
,
ill

JHIS SHIH
niiSSHI I I flU ..err",
I &,MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
CONTROL CIRCUIT TTI2
f l-----+--1 (J) If
"TI' OOT. 23. 2006
""'. H.ATAGI ""''''. !'ASE NO.

A1APR. 10. 2007 H.A H. T 1 APPROVED fl. TAHAKA S. NAITO S Z 0 2 3 8 9 004


2 I 3 4 I 6 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9
V
3 4 5 6 L 7 __ I 8
I 2 .1 9~~~
, FIRE"n...ARY AND EXTINGUISHING I, ;I Ol~
1
I CUBICLE
OIL
TEllPERAlURE
-tfVL WINDING
TEllPERATURE TEMPERATURE
HVL WINDING
TEMPERATURE
TIE TRANSFORMER ,
(REFER TO IllIG.. IIo.SVTD2711) I
Mi TI'~iR:X4 iI 'nOO26~l
I _J
:nINDICATOO2"'~1 JINDI]CATO:6~2~·n
INDlO~ATO:..g~, i
~=t~~
THIS SH l~m~~
TIllS SH 7

,3~4,
8 •

~:=_=:=_=:=~::=--J_~_~~_~~~);_i~;"~)~_~_~_ ~ /"F;"~)i /Off"~)~_~_~_~_~_~_~_J


...... I I t ON '65"0 OH '65"C ON 'ss"c • ON '75"C
nUllSH
++-+
.."' .
TIllS 811 1 2.
~

llAMl WF AlITO
~

~ ~
f-
X3 1 2 X3 3 5 G X4l...2....-..2.J COOLER CONTROl CAB I NET , lta'l ~
I ~ ~ I WI OFF
DEVICE

I,
(TTll) TTtl2A12

ZAT3
230V 50fiz

230V 50Hz
~
CD
[ I
13 21 1 1
(TTt4)

I' ic:f8lbJ
i [ I\~-- 't 88F 1;' :'0 1 :0 i b

i /~[j':'d
f_ :: "u , . ·i
-
i ' '" i f-
i i
I ;;;; ~ ~ I
~ i ! c

~ I I
J Ii i
~
I " , I
, BaF Q9 <;9 27C '
)
,
A2 Rll Gll 3 16D-ZlOVAe
(190'1 ,I.e)
I
I

d ! (TTl1) TTll2A42 (TT14) ! d


L_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~. _~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~_~J

- f-

• e

BBF 27'
A1 ,
.
S-tl2.1 15 2)

., ,,.
"
,1.15 6
,
,
nll
nn
0' THIS SH
TIllS SH
SRE-J(J (1 1)

~ 4 i m'
&MITSUBISHI
ELE.CTRIC
Tlill
CONTROL CIRcun
SHEET NO.

TT13
f-

f l---L-l If
m' e OCT. 16. 2007 H.A H. T DATE OCT. 22. 2006 (2)
IJIIG NO. PAGE 110.
B APR. 10. 2007 II. A H.T

A MAR. DB. 2007 H. A H. T


""'"
APPRO""
H.ATA61
S Z0 2 3 8 9 005
H. TANAKA S. HAITO
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 r \7 5 I 6 1 7 I 8 I 9
I 2 I 3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I B I 9

I,

a
I
~ I
,
DC SUPPLY
221lV PC'
a

-
;-lr.==~-~ov --~ -----------------~------:,~~;T2A" ----=~----------em')-
DO em,; COOLER eOimroL- CABINi
I--

b ,
I
- ."",..,.-
2P 15.4.
52F1
12 (n11)
''1
270 ~
~I 27CT
,,,I€d BOC BOGr
'
! b

F t:::: 4 (TIT3) 68 4 68 ,

~
I " 52F2 I
j (1T11) ~ j
- , I - - , I--
I 1J 52F3 1 7 1
i ~ eml) Q u:i (;::DC')I 8 soc 3 I 1i: <; i
' 1 1 '

I 52f4 I c
~

T
j (Tm) j

i
I

I,
e,
:i
8
I" 30F1 !Xl 27CT
A2
I
O.1-60SEC
(SSEC)
T

8
30F2 IXJ
" T
SOOT
M.
I
O.l-6OSEC
(55B:)
B
30F3
i
,
I
r

I ,~ 1 (m,) I
,L (m3)c TTlt z (n21) _
j
d

COOLING FANl " SUPPLY


"'"""'- DO """""-l
SLJPPL'f
~I FAIlURE FA1LLQl.E

- I--

WORKING PAITERH OF FAULT IHOICATOR(TFU-23)


30FD INPUT 0 \ \ \

19-R]
e COIL 7-8 0 i ! e
DISPLAY .W§00M 1I§I.'l§§§§§§§§6'W
, ,. com. 12 r=J I I
COHT. 3-4 r=J I I
RESET PB n n
30Ft- 2 Of'
TFU-23 ( 0 TfU-23 ( O) TFlJ-23 (2/0' NoTE) .:Bl...ACK ~:ORANGE ~:STRIPES I-
m,
,A 1 2
AS ,
m'
TT'"
"
A"
2
Tm
TT2<> "A3 2,
TT'"
() MITSUBISHI "li
""" """'"
SliEET NO.

~ELECTRIC
FAULT INDICATOR CIRCUIT TT14 .
f l.--I--I f
DATE OCT. 23. 200S (1)
[)lJG MO. PAIlE NO.

A APR. 1<1.2007 II. A H. T


""'''
APPROVED
H.ATA81

S Z 0 2 3 8 9 006
H. TANAKA S. NA ITO
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I \l 5 B 7 \ B I 9
I 2 3 4 5 6 I 7 I B I 9

~! BUCHHOLZ RElAY PRESSURE Ra IEF DEY ICE Oil l.EVEl... 6AtlGE (TR) Oil LEVEL GAUGE (OLTC)
TI E TRANSFORlil" ,

I (GAS~TION) (OIL F1JJf)


""
(REFER TO DWll. No. SV19279) J

,
,-- r- r- """ """
r-""'

• ~
I, .I, 96-1 ~ 9&-<1 < 96D1
11 33111 33112 a
I, , ~
~ i
~.

I
-
if ~
"'" ~
~-------------x;?;-iro------t,-1;;---------t3~1i:I--------t5-1;-G------------r,-7-
~ ~
l---------------------.-i
~ ~
18 COOLER GOOTROL CABINET I
I--
I (m.) """" ,,,no I I I I I I I I I I (mo)
I
,

b
I, I,
b

,I I
~ I ,I
- I-
i I I--
i ;;; ;;;,
"', ;;: ;;;
I
I, I,
c

(]
i I
I I,.
I,

'='
;l.... 3OF4 30FS
;l....
~ 30F6 e 'i
30F7
"
30F8
I,
I
I,
I,
c

~ ! l(m4)m~
0 '1' I
d
L (m6)
J d

~
~"'" \or~1 OIL '''E' 1
I a=LZ I ~ ""
RB.tl3"
I .....,
(OLTe)

- I--

, .
l-~
. . , 3<'" , , "
.
30F4
""...,
"" , ,,'" ""
TFU-23 (Z/a) ""
m. " , TT' " , TT" " ,
( lFlJ-1:3 ( 0) TFlI-Zl (z/O:

"" "'" mo n20 " mo ""


,,'"
r-
A 3. 41 A34

TIlLE - SHEET r.:I.


~ MITSUBISHr
I I - ELECTRIC
FAULT INDICATOR. CIRCUIT TT15
f L-..L.-J 1
If
""TE
(2)
..." OCT. 23. 2006
H.IITAGI

APP"""" H. TANAKA S. NAITO .


DWG NO.

S Z0 2 3 8 9
PAGE NO .

007
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I \7 5 "1 6 I 7 I 8 I 9
2 3 4 6
-- - 1 -- 5
,---
1_
- 7 1
TIE TRANS_
8 9

~
T
I

I, Oil TEMP. INDICATOR WINDING TEMP, INDICATOR PROTECTIVE RElAY


. .
CONSERVATOR SHUTIER VALVE -.J'
(REFFER TO llI'G.NQ.SV19279) \

n· n'
(,I.L,.I.R(I (TRIP) WJ.Ra!) (TRIP) All. OLTe FOR MAJOR OiL lEAK FROM THE TANK
r-------
• M ! 2tID-3 26D-4 26"g()-3 261gD-4 S3G, 63Q2 63113 SV 1 •
- I (0"') (,00-0) ("''O) (,""') ,
~ ~~ II!! 1~g I
I
'" "'"' ~,,~
1Da> .... ..,
IS f5 € € ~ ~ l'5 ~ .~ g g g g >: g:! ,

-
i--:,~-)-~:---: ,.-~ U N 23 ... 24 N 25 IN 26 - - - - " " 27 U> 2B U> J!iI a:> 311 CD 31'" 32 - - - - - '" 33 ... 3-4 -----!- " " -1';" --.mER G~~~8 f-

b
I I b
i i
i i
- i i~
! u: i:::;;:;;:;!

n
<ii, Q iJ:i <ii

! !
c c
=
= !I,
>- I!,
l I ! , e 7
JOF9 e 7
30Fl0
7
3OF11
7
3OFt2 e 7
3OF13
.4.1
63QX e 7
30F14
7
30F15
7
JOF16
I
,

~ I 'I' ,~. I
! (TItS) TTl4- 1 )

d
L - J d

~
~ I "" ,""'. I
VERY HIGH
WINDING TEIIP.

HI'" I
WINDING J!3IP.!
VERY HIEII I "-TO
P~~VE
I !S~ V~VEI
TRIP I (~-I B
- ~

• e

'Of' , , .....
.
30Fe 3OFt1
,o , """
13 30Ft4- 3Of15 3OFl6

"" ,.
TRJ-23 (
n"
0

H2O
TFU-23 (
",
.4013.4
0

_IT20
lRJ-23 (2/0
TTlllAlz
A" 4
n"
TT2Q
TFU-:l:3 (Vol

'"
A3:4 ..lJ20
mil
Tf1J-23 (
A 1 2:
A 3' 4 n"
0
TI1S

,, ,
1FIJ-23 ( 0)
1.(TT1SA12 TTl!!
" TT20A34
A 1 21 TIIB II 1 2.
" ."
lFlJ-2:l (2 0) 1FlH3 ( 0

I ,
I I
1&
·1
MI TSUB I SH r
ELECTRIC
'ill
FAULT INDICATOR,CIRCUIT
SIlWHO.

TT16
~

f I---l---1 If
OA" OCT. 23. 2006
(3)
P...GE NO.
B \ APR. TO. 2007 H. II H. T \ DRAWN H.ATAGI ~"'.

- I- - - - 2_ . - ,
, IMAR••,. 2q<!7 H. A H. T I APPROVED H. TANAKA S. NAITO S Z 0 2 3 8 9 008
1 .3 I 4 I 'V 5 I 8 I 7 I 8 I 9
2 1 3 4 1 5 1 6 I_~_ 7 _I B 1 g.

~ /-- -- .... _ _ .. _ - - - ~ - _ . _ - -
HVL BCT '- HVN BCT TI E TF.. 3IRMER!
(REFER TO DllaNO. SVl11219) r
RESISTANCE ELEMENT RESISTANCE B..EMENT
lU lV HI 1N ,
FOR MY WINDING TEllf'. FOR Oil TEMP.
~ I
~
a j-.o--
M
e-
PttOOQ
200ITA f--o-- ..,.
20tIjlA 200/11. 400/11.. e
"'"""VA
PtlOl1Q 51'2'
30VA "" I
~"" ~""
30Y....
"'"
I, I,
-
I 200/11. 200/111 200/11. I f-

"'""
5P2'
"'""

1r1~· 1~1' ~~ ~~ e~ ~I~ ~~I ~~I


IA VA 'OVA
I,
: I I I
§I @ I
~-----~t ---- -t+----------~-t---t~r_----- ~ t----rt-------~Ii---~-t------' -~-t--COOL.R eOORoLl
b b

~
CABINET ,

-
I, I
I I
I
, ,I
c I I, c

~
>-
i
, I,
<L I I, I
I i
~ L ~~
"~---~~*';~---------~-=if-----.-;t-----EfP-:tf-----~-------j-
d ~ ~
_ _ _ _ ---"'-_A_r...
d

- f-

e e

Tln.E SHEET NO.


J
&MITSUBISHI
I I I RTD AND BCT TT17
f I----l--I ELECTRIC
'ATE OCT. 23.2006
IJIG NO.
CIRCUIT (1)
PAGE Nl:l.
If
""" t1.ATAGI
S ZO 2 3 8 9 009
"""'' ED H. TANAKA S. NAITO
~

1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I \l 5 I 6 •I 7 I 8 I 9
I- -
2- --
I -3 -.4 I 5
--------
I 6 I 7 -----.l 8 I 9
I-- ! MY BeT TVacr TIE J/SFORMER !
I-- /
f- I, zv ZTI " I
," " llWG. No. SVl11Z711) I
,m""""
I--
f- I
'" 1 I
3V
'" ,
a i-.-o--
"'/" f~ l-o- t-o- 1--0-- I,
~ I, ,-,
4OOf1A ~

'.'
400/1,1. 150/1,1. ~ 150/1,1.
,,,, h
15011,1. (

F "'" :lOYA
<>.5

"'"' ""
3OV' ''''
"'"' "'"' I I,
l-
I-- I
, I
l-
f- I 400/1,1. 400/1" 400/11.
,,,,
150/1,1. 150/11. 150/1'" I f-
I- 5P20
"''' !if'20
l- I, 3OV'
"'" ""
"'"' ""'
6P"
"'" 30VA
I
I--
l-
I ~§
-5

""~ § ~" § § § §
~ i'l ~ ~ ~ ~ ; "" §liJ I
;;I~
b f- ";ij
§§
~ E
"~~ §g; ;; E
~-------~-- ---
f! § ~ ~ f! ~ liJ
liJ
" ------~
gj fG
I-
I-
f-
-1-------- +---- - - - - - - - - +--- - - - - - - - - - - - ---- r- - - - - - - c--_ .- ------ I-- ---- -- " ~

COOLER
I--
f-
I-- I, CONTLOl
CABINET
i
I-
,
I--
l-
I I
I--
I- I, ,I
c
I--
Iu; I, I, c
lui
>- I, I,
::] I I, I,
i'i I, I,
~ L.____ J-" 15 16 n 21 fi
- - -.1--" 17 18 _1_ X2
"" - _ J--" 19 2(l~L X2
" " ------- Xl 18 16
-
XI 21 22
- Xl 17 19
- """ . J~LXI 25 26
_____J
1\
d
10-------- 1-- --~ - >-------------- ~---------- r--------- i- 1---' - ~----. -,------>------- ----~~-----l
(lTI'mJ)
,

i I
L ________ 1-- ----------------------_.-.------------ I- ----------- _ . - . - - - - - - - ___________J
~L~C CO~TROL-PAN~i17ii >;s------·l 1(';;...)---- - >--------·-·~---------->-----------I
i (", No,,,,,,,,,)
81[-8020-305
i i i e

L ______ - __________ .J L__________._____________________________ j

ITLE SHEET NO.


&MJTSUBISHI
ELECTRI c'
RTD AND BCT TT18
"IT OCT. 23.2006
CIRCUIT (2) f

lJ'II'G NO. PAGE NO.


"""" H.ATAGI
APPROVED Ii. TANAKA 8. NAITO S Z 0 2 3 8 9 010
- -
\7 - - -
2 I 3 4 I 5 I 5 I 7 I B 9
(SYLcu)
I, (
DW6.No. JEZ2K024)
IlK--41~
I
I, I,
a
0>' I, I
L_ _____________J
--&--
-1- ..
-1- ---0--

..
I- ",. -~-

'" .
------------------------------------,

T
• I
" "
- " " '" COOLER cotrrROL CAB INET

'r
w ~
~
~ ~ ~
'"
>;j
'" '" 61 '" '" ~.

" "
I , , I
U U
,
b
I, 30Ft ~ 3OF2 ~1 (TTl4)
30F3 ~' 30F" 30F5 30F6
30~ 3~'
I
I, ,I (T"') I (TTl4) 1" (TTlS) 11 (ms) 11 (TIlS) ·1 ems) I (ms)
i
I COOLING FAN
"""""'"
"FAILURE
sumy "" OOJm<OL """"OCZ ....
"mlP", '''''''''' OIL LEVE.. OIL lEVB...
(Due) 1
,
FAIUJlE """,-y
FAILURE
AL\lm
(GAS ACCUIIJl..ATlllIl) (tilL Fl..fM)
RaIEl'
TO'"~ ""
-"AR' ALW<

i, I,
I, I
,
§I
~ "i
I
OIL TEI!P.

"""
OIL YElP.
VERY HI6K
JflND. TEMP.

""
WIND. TEIIP.
VERY HIGH
om
PROTECTive
",-"y
Stl1TTER VALVE
mIP
- """""
~
....".
CODLING FAll

"
oLTc
PROTECTIVE
",-"y

"
I,
I
I,
c

3OFl4 I t:;:)5 I '(m,)


63QX
J 30F9 SOF10 3Ofl1 30F12 3OF13 '0 3OF16 88'

~i
Z](TT16) 2l (ms) 2] (TT16) 21 em6) ,I (TT") 21 (me) ( 441 (m3) 141 (ms)
I
I~ i , s I
"I .~I"-",, ---1-~----J"'~-
;;;
::;
'" ~
" " 11 6
'" 11
'" '" " " J
d
L_ )(.4121 ~
'" " " '". --t"- I"
E
'" " " _--l; _
~ ~xs_~~
d

,-- -.-+-- - - ------- -----l 1 -------------1


, -
-~- xlT~ 155
, (SYLCU) , DLTe CONTROL PANEL I'
I , ( "". No.
BK-41AO-OOS
"'ZKO") I I,
,
IllIG. No. SZ02403)
( 1ll<-B02D-305 ,

I I I I
i, ,j I I
e L ~ L j e

I
TiTtE S/lEEr NO.
(\ MITSUBISHI. ALARM INDICATION CONTACTS
LmELEcTR1C TH9
f 1----+-1 CIRCUIT f
DATE I OCT. 23. 2006
PAGlO Ito.
I DIlAWN \ K. AlAel
A lOOT. 16.2007 H.A 1l.T ~~~IH.T~ s.mrro SZ0 2 3 8 9 all
) B
2 3 4 v 5 6 7
! 2 I 3 4 5 I 6 7 B 9


~ •

- :- "T----------------------------------------------------------------; f--
! 1ii:;1 COOLER CONTROL GAB INET I

b
I
j
''''Fl

3 eTTa)
,1 30F2
3 (TTt.c)
·1 'Of'
.3 (rTtoof)
~ 30"

3( (rns)
,1
3 (ms)
30F7
,1
.3
30FB
(ms)
,1 30"
3 (1Tl6)
,1 30Fll
3 (TT16)
:

I
b

,
II coo..lNG FAIl
FAtWRE
AC CONTROL
SlJf'P\..Y
DC CONTRlL
SUl'PLY
IlI.ICtmt.Z
Al.ARM
OIL LEVa
CTR)
OiL LEVEL
(OLle)
Oil TalP.
HlGfl
.llm. TEIIp.
HIIiH
I'
- FAIUlRE FAILlJ'lE (GAS ACCIMULJ.TION) AlAAi\ Al..JdlM j f--

i, I
I'
II
BUCHIIl:tZ PRESStIlE OLTC
c lRlP RELIEF OIL TEMP. WIND. TEIIP. PROTECTIVE StlIlTTER VALVE c
"' (OIL FUIII) TRIP VERY HIGH VEllY HI911 RELAY lRlP j
"'
1
~

I
,I 3

\0 3OF5
,1
.3
':\ 'OF6
.3

\6 3OFlO ~
1
.3
30F12'
.3
\6 3OF13
3

\ 'Of,.
'I
! '" f-

~
(ms) 41 (ms). -4 (TT16) 41 (TT16) -4 (ms) 4 (1116) j

I _ ~ I
d
L_~ ~_Q ;!'- J d

r----~--<i--------------------------------------------. ------------------- C;PRBM)-l,

- I, .
L..J
TRIP
( .... No, JEZ2K(24)
BK-414O-{)05
I
' I-
i . !
, I
I ,
, ,L _J e

I-
ITlTlE SHEET Hll.
() MITSUBISHI
~ELE:CTRJC
ALARM AND TRI P .CONTACTS.. H20
f I--H CIRCUIT f
DAlE I OCT. 23. 2006
,1lft6 NO. PIlGE NO.
DRAM! l H.AlABI

A \OCT.16.2001 H.A H.T APP!lOVElI I H. T#JlM\#.. S. NAI TO SZ0 2 3 8 9 012


r 2 I 3 I 4 I \7 5 I B j 7 I 8 I 9
I __ 2 I 3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 B 9

a
~
a

- ~-----------------------------------------------------------------------, c--
(Tnt) nT12A12 230V 5OH2 COOLER CONTROL CABINET
I
I

b I fj ~ OS ! b

i
,
~I
~~G'I
I
- .I (,"") .I
c--
I .
. I

~
I, m m i
1 '
c , I c
I '
, SH
....
IL I'
1 I
, ",,,. 1

~ ,1 I'
~ ! (m~)m1~ i
d
L J d

- I-

e e

~MITSUBISHr
.,ru; SHEET NO.

I I I ELECTRIC
LI GHT I NG AND ..HEATER TT21
f C-I--l If
CIRCUIT
...'" OCT. 23. 2006
D'IIll 1ol0. pJ,SE h'O.
""~ H.ATAGI
APl'RlJVEl)
H. TANAKA. S. HAlTO S Z 0 2 3 8 9 013
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I \l 5 I 6 I 7 I 6 I 9
I 2 L _ 3 I 4 L 5 I 6 I 7 ~ __ 6 I 9

X1 X2
Wru-S1x2Px14 "TX-5.S"xl4P
"TlJ-Six2Px7
~
"TIJ-1So"x4Px3 I •
~
' lSI(lU) FR-l 1 r-TT1IFRl
2
3
lS2(lU)
IS1 (lY)
FS-l-
FH- ,
2 TTl1FSt
~TTI1FTl

- _
4 lS2(tV) FR-2
FS-2- •,
5
-TTllFR2
~TTI1FS2
z
0
;::
0
I-
i.il· : ~;~g~
FT-2 mlFT2 ~

,,
FR-'- J I-.....-TTnFR3 0
0

g =R : I ~~s.:g~ FS-3
FT-3-
FR-4- 16
TTllFS3
;--TTI1FT3
r---TT1IFR4
~

!
Til-- 2S1 (lY) FS-4 11 TTnFS'4 lb
I~
I 11 I r=
JI:2]-2S2(lV)

2S' (111)
III
FT-4-
~
12 TTllFT4

r=
12 2S2(lW) 14

-
g [==1
~
13
14
I lSH1N)
1.S2(1N)
ffi
~
~
fi'
~
~
lS1(2U) ~
'S2 (2U)
."
I 16 f1fJ ~~oJ
I °8~
~_z

I-
~lS1{3U) "'
li'1
~
lsH2V)
1S2(2v)
~ J 1718
I r=
iQJ----1S2(3U)

~ lsH2Wl ~ J 20" ~

~I
17 1S1 (3V) 1S2(2W)
I 18 tS2e3V)
2S1 (2U)
~ 19· ~ IS1 (31f) 2'
I c
g 20 t 1S2e3ft')
2S2(2U)
"
2S1 (2Y) ,. 23
~ 21·
22
23
2S1 (3U)
2S2(3U)
2S1 caY)
2S2(2V)
2S1 (21)
24
25
];
2S2(20)

==l 1 " I
- 24 2S2(3V)

~ 25 251 (3W) (SPARE) • 27


26 2S2(3W)
(SPARE) 2'

r=
~[=1 ;; j (~ARE) [
m
~· . 31
32 z
o
d

~
;
1IORI1AL SUPPLY
AC 400V 50Hz
[
3PHA,SE 4IrlRES
.
34,
35'
36.
TTllN4At
TTTlN4A2
TTl1H4A3
. TTl1N4A4
I
-
~ f-

~
7: ":TTI1E4AT
EMERGENCY SUPPLY [ 3B . - TTl1 E4A2
AC 400V 50Hz
39 " TTll E4A3
3PHASE 4WIRES
40' . TTI1E4M

t I I ' ... I' I f-

A IOCT.lli.2007 H.A H. T
I 2 I 3 I 4 I \l 5 I 6
I 2 I -3 4 I 5 I 6
--L 7 I B I 9
f- , •
c--
L.. X3 X4
f-
, L..
1X-5.5"'xSOP "TX-5. S-xSOP

- a
~
==
TT112A12
TT132A13~
1
2 - Tie In FIRE i
0
26D3-
26D4-
1
2
- l" 3 2601
~

l:i! 26Wg03~
- 3
- 4 -2602 ~ 26Wg1)4 4 ,
- -
5 -26WgDl 5 -TT1981
-
TI1l3B2E
7
• -26WgD2

7
TT19B2
r-T T19Dt
-
-
-
TT14BPl ,• 6~H ,• TT19D2
t--TT19El
TT15Bl- 10 -69-01
, -
-
11 -6!Hl2
10
11
TT19E2
t--TT19Fl b
TT15Dl- 12 -69-2 12 r--TT19F2
- 13 -9601
-
~
TT15El- 14 ,--9602 "14 TT19Gl
.r------ TT1962
15 33Ql-1 15 TTI9Ht
-
TT15FT 15 33Q2-1 ;;; 15 TT191i2
- ;;; 17 :-- 33Ql-2 S 17 TI19Jl
- '- ;: 0
TT15GT 18 -3302-2 18 TT19J2
1;) 2601 ~
- ~

8 TT16Bl- "
20
21
-26D2
2603 ~
"
20
21
TI19Kl
TT19K2
t--TT1911
~ TT1601- 22 2604 ~
22 TT1912
, - 22 -26WgD5
26W~6
ill
~
"
0
;;; 23 TT1SI!1
~
0

~ •
~
~ Tr16E1 24 24 TT19M2
~
25 26WgD7
~
TT16Fl- :5< 25 -TIt9Nl
"8
>- 2G
27
26WgD8
6301-1
~ 2G TT19N2

I TT16Gl-: 28 r--- 63Q3-1


27
28
r-mSGl
TTl9Q2 !
t !5 "
30 -6303-2
6301-2 29
30
r--- TT19Rl
TT19R2
E-
31 6301-3 31 r-TT19S1
! 32
33
I...-.-
SV1
63Q3-S 32
33
j-rr19S2
r---TT19T1
TIT6H' 34 SV2 34 TT19T2
j 35 i----- (RESERVE) 35 r TT19Ul
d
TTl6Jl 3. (RESERVE) 3G r---rr19U2
37 - (RESERVE) 37 TT19Vt
TT16Kl 38 r- (RESERVE) 38 r-n19V2
" "
'"
"'"
"'~t ~"-f
- 41 '<1 TT20B1
IN WINDING
42 r-W<2 42 r-TT20B2
43

" f---- 01 '''' TRIP SIGNAL


43 -TT20Dl

""
RTD FOR n20D2
OIL " 02
f---- 03 OLle PROTECTIVE RELAY
r-TT19Wl

, "47 "47 n19f12

INNER ClJINECTlQN [
Tf14BP-
" (+)...!....
'(-j...!...
J DC SUPPLY
""
e
TTl4BN
"50 220V DC
50

~MITSUBISHI
'ill SHEET NO. '

ELECTRIC
.TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT OF TT32
F f
om OCT. 23. 2006 COOLER CONTROL CABINET (2)
""'''' H. ATAG I "" '" PAGE NO.

,S Z 0 2 3 ,8 9 &015
A MAR. 08. 2007 H. A H. T APPROVED
. I . . I ,
\l
. .
H. TANAKA S. NAITO
-
ENGINEERh-. ,RD NO 0-37-L67324
07L6732401
~ MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
8ER J AI- NUW!ER

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF
OLTC CONTROL FOR SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
TIE TRANSFORMER ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM (EVN)
HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5
PURCHASER
OLTC CONTROL PANEL
PROJECT FOR TIE TRANSFORMER

S I TE BUON KUOP HYDRO pis


~ SHEET No. PAGE No. REV. T I T L E
I- 01 001 B SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LiST
f--
(j I- 02 002 A COMPONENT L18T

-
,~

11 003 B AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATING RELAY CIRCUIT


12 004 COPfTROL CIRCUIT (1)
13 005 B CONTROL CI Reu I T (2)
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
14 006 CONTROL CONTACTS AND INDIGATION CIRCUIT
ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM(EVN)
15 007 OUT OF STEP DETECTION CIRCUIT
16 008 A ALARM INDICATION CiRCUIT
HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5
17 009 TAP posrTION INDICATION CIRCUIT -
BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
18 010 TAP POSITION SUPPLY CONTACT LOT No.27
Sumitomo Corporation

~~
21 &011 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT OF OLTO CONTROL CABINET
• MITSlJBISHI
. . . . ELECTRIC ..... e~
I-
CORRESPONDING SECTION
f,:;; i PROJECT FILE NUMBER BK-60ZQ--305
'"
1'= ~
l:'
"
~ WI!!I'It om DEC. 21. 2006 TITLE SHEET H:J.
"t! 01
I~ ~
~ :=:
H.ATAGI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST
~ ~ DRAWN
~~

'"
1-"'''' ~o
~
. .-
ci
~
~ ffi
.~ i

:;
CHECKED H. TANAKA
NO. S Z 0 2 4 0 3 IREV~NO.
PAGE NO•

I~ . '"
~ I APPRlWED S.NAITO
DW'
001

\7
2 3 4 I 5 6 7 8- , ,-
..
-
[TEll: DEVI CE No. oEseR I pr IOK TYPE SPECIFICATlON Q'IT MANUFACTURER

- 1 BO MOLDElH:ASE G(RCU rT BREAKER NF63-SW 250V '2 POLES lOA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY:7.5KA (220V DC) 1 MELeo
a
"LOWER-RA J SE'"
,
~
2 24LR CONTROL SW ITCH BH HANDLE:OVAL (SPRING RETURN) 2 FUJI

}-
3 24P1X!2X/4X!BX!10X AUXILIARY RELAY SRD-N4 RAn NG : DC 48VCONTACT : 381 b 5 MELCO

e- 25X. gou:, 9ORX, LXi, RX1,


4 S32X BOX AUXILIARY RELAY SRD-N4 RATING: DC 220V CONTACT: 38Tb 7 MELeo
I-
e- 5 24SY, 25T. 48-24 ON DELAY TIllER SRT1HIfI RATING: DC 220V smUliG RANGE: D.l .....GOSEC ADJUSTABLE 3 MELCO
l-
e- , 30Fl-30Fa FAULT INDICATOR TFU-23 RATI NO: DC 220Y B KOUYOU
l-
e- 7 43A CONTROL SW ITCfl BH "MANUAl-AUTO'" HANDLE: FLOWER (SPRING RETuRN) 1 FUJI
b I- I
I- B 43AX, 4314FX1, 43PX1, 43PX2 LATCH TYPE AUX ILl ARY RELAY SRLD-N4 DC 22DY CONTACTS:2a2b WITH AUXILIARY GONTACT:lalb(TYPE:UN-AX11) 4 MElCO
I-
I-
, 43I1FX2 LATCH TYPE AUXILIARY RElAY SRLll-N' DC 220V CONTACTS:3alb WI11l AUXILIARY CONTACT:lalb(TYPE:Uff-AX11) 1 MELCO

10 43MF CONTROL SWITCH BH "'FOLtQWER-MASTER'" HANDLE:FLOWER (SPRING RETIJRN) 1 FUJI

-
11 43P ~TROL SWI TCH ,. '"'PARALLEL-INDEPENDENT' HANDI....E : FLOWER (SPRING RETURN) 1 FUJI

12 43S CHANGE--OVER SWITCH BH '"'REJilOTE-SUPERV I SORY"" HANDLE: FLOWER 1 FUJI


- 13 DC/DC CONY DC/DC CONVERTER P3D-411 IN: DC,220Y OUT: DC 48V 1 COSEl

- 14 90 VOLTAGE REGULATING RElAY YC10lrBU RATING: A.C 110Y SETTING RANGE: 8S.... 140Y (0.5V STEP)
I
1 MR
c
"
~
15 L1 - l7 INDICATION lAMP IH..EJ) RATlNG:'DC 220V WITH RESISTER:2400 OHM LENS: WHITE 7 MELCO

" 16 TeT TEST TERM I NA.l Te-B 2 MELCO

<J I 17 TPI TAP POSITION INDICATOR lP02-11T1


I RATING: DC 48V 1 DA I I GH I ElECTRON JCS
~
18 TVT TEST TERMINAL TP-B 2 UELCQ
-"
J! 19
I

20
d 21

22

23

2'
.
I
25
I
26
I
e 27

28

29

30

Tlil.E SHEET Io1O.


&MJTSUBISHI
ELECTRIC COMPONENT LIST 02
0."" DEC. 21. 200li
I ""'" H.ATAGI IIll'B 1«1. PAGE 110.

I
2
,
3
,

4 \7 5
11 M1IR.09.2007 Ii. 11 J-LT
,
6
..
""'" H. TANAKA S. NA.ITO

7
,
S Z 0 2 4 0 3
B 9
002
3 4 5 6 I _ 7 I 8 I 9

90
·VC 10CHllJ'"
I,
or .r.1 II b
MANUAlLY OPERATED VOLTAGE SElTING DEVIce
~I,U
I,
~--------------------l

,ll:_I,:;"" t I';:'"_ I Socoll,


~ __ J
f

ir
,

,
I'
j TVT Measuring CPU I
!
i5B
87 PI

~
I'll

P31
1

2
lOOrtA

II
trllnllfl[OnJIBr
All>-
Converter
~
Rot: RAM
r-- I

lie
I

! I
I pD'IIor supply Retay driver 11OptocouPler! j
i ' ""'" "."I'''I~ ,.,,": 1,"ooC~" 1 '>, I I'.""'/':"1 ~ II It 0<, c 0> i
i . ~'"f¢ flI~f¢ flI~f¢ flI~f¢ flI~t9-1 R9c:?f Jf¢ i
i i r11 r- lid
I ~ - I
' ' ' ! ,
I, •••••
o ·1'-
, -I'·
.. ,." 06
••
00
,. ••.••-.""
00 6 6
I,
- .l I 0f-
f
,
_E U
(SH.13)
U
(SH..16) (mi. 13)
I I
I

I I
e L jle

& M/TSUBISHI mE SHEET NO.


I
I ELECTRIC AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE 11
f I-------!-I If
"lE DEC. 21. 2006 REGULATING RELAY CIRCUIT
B )IlAY.14.2007 H.A H. T 1 DRAlI'H H. ATAGI '
llWG NO. PAGe. NO.

!
A lIAR. 09. 2007 H.A tl T 1 APPROYED H. TANAKA S. NAITO S Z 0 2 4 0 3 003
1 I 2 I 3 I 4
--T \7 5 I 6 T 7 I 8 I 9
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
~' (SYLCB)

a
, ,
I I 111,11 ,I ,I (REmHTO",,:~:,=~
~ IDC CONTROL SOlJRCE I a

L (-) (+)
l
- ! I"" OLTC COHTROL PANB..
~

~
'(2-\ £'> L' "" ;a<;oJ

BPI OO'VlN I I I WI TO SlI.13

b
'I ~ 6NF6J-sw"
aD
2P lOA
I ,I 43S
1:~ SUPERVISORY
I I 1:-:1,I ~ I 435
RElOTE
I b

"' 8 1 I I I I I -----'-----~---
,I
)~ ,I E~,I E~21
- ,
t ,I'"'
~ E~ ~ ~ E ~ 24LR 24LR f-
~
,"1lF
E AJJTO IlANUAL nIDE- 1 PARALlEL E" lASTER FOLLO'IIER , RAISE , LOWER
PENDENT

c
,, I i c
U">
u">,
i!::: " ~
• • • • • s

<L I

~ ~I',,-~~,;h
, -T~I
d

L]CI --I-tj d

- L ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
BItl BNl TO SI1.13

,
~

,;:ti=!:t±±:, ~7m'
'm"
,, ,
B I 511. 14

,;+++tn=:
~ 5
B TIllS 51-I. /l B THISSH.
I ,
B
A
THIS RH.
,
e
A 511.1-1
~
A
SlLI , ,
3 I 4 A
,, e

-
A TlIIS SII. 1 :1 tlTHIS I .:t A THIS SH. A THiS SH. 1 • 2.

iCO/lTwr[ BIL NO.


~ II-~ SlI. NO. I
r.<lW.lll. --:--M:IB'£lmBIT SM. NO.
~-
IClIIT~rl S11.NO. l.lIIBl IL\IQ;

~I-o' ":~ I
~
: : ; : I~I-o~ :::: '; 1~1~0';;"';;;;
IW/Dl..E Fl./JlIBI ~ ItAND!..E FUlJER ~ 1WllIl..E
~: 1~1~0-"';;,~
FUlJER ~ IWIlL.E
': 1-0'' "::: ':~ ,
FLDIIER I
1
"""'-' "'"
I
,., I"" I"::':: ""

,= 43PX1 ,,=
B"l..IHM~
,,~,

""""
~,
_ ""----
{:Illl &MITSUBISHI dill
SHEET NO.
SFIllHJ.< (3/31 9Il.D-II4 (3/3) ~(3/'IJ ~ (4/1)
-~ .12
f
J. n l~ lill13 ~ 1314 Q!.13 -~1131141 ~ 13H 6l\.13 A 13 14 SIl.I~ A 13 14
III 13 Aj,a!141 Ill_l~ ELECTR"] C GONTROL GIRGU IT (1)
81z1 tt 1:11.13 812112 SIl.13 B IZI 12 BIt. 1. 8121 %1 EIll! B 21 22 SIl.15 8 211tt B12112:2 If
8!311321 SRI4 813132 $lll( B 31 321 rill15 B13132. Bit U A 331341 Ill!. 13' DEC. 21. 2006
A 431"'1 /;11.14 A '3"'1 Rl14 "'~ ~ 013 44 m.14 A'3'" SH.l!
A !33134
A 143"'1
A 133134
A 143 "'I "'''
1""O~4
Dll'G NO.
AI6316( &IlH ~ 631~ RlH 'Q" ~1~1i4 &Ill4 A 63 B(
""'" H. "TAG I
BIGI n &Ill' 1816162 $ll14 B Glll2 S1ll5 B181112 Blt.14 B GI 621
APPROVED H. TANAKA S. NAITO S Z 0 2 4 0 3
I 2 I 3 I 4 I v S I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9
, 2 , 3 4 5 I 6 ,_ _ _ 7 __ _ _, _ • , 9

,...--------,---------..,
No.2 BANK OLTC CONTROl CABINETr'
(FIJTURE)
I' TAP CHANGE
l',rOR DRIVE
(REFFaI Tll..-&.~O·SZ7Ol'J.49)1
I

, " ; IIIHlo20-006
' I 1 r , IN PROSRE8S '
\ 43Me'2; i II ,-- - I
a
) 743PX2 \90RX \90LX" ,i I ~ ~ S15 1-~ ~~AL ) la

' c>'_:
L .:=, .: =: . : . : J' 0' "".." ,.." L' "' 5 J'
--i----~-_____?_"C_+.;~-__t_- --~---<~-_¢ll__---------- 7§.. ~- 1~ : ¢ 1 - - - - - - -
(1I~l)
,, ,, ,I "
I I
, 'I .
TO Sll 16
-
j-------------------------------:r--- ~ - 7 ---<~-~- I~ -->sa-.. . . rr;---~---------~ 82--?si--- 64 ~TC eOlfTROl- PANal ~

., r
I
b
,

I
I
FRC* 8f{,12 llPl

l~
0

t --"'l
1

2'
PC

4SY
nov

~ iii g ;:'; 5,~



....

I~ ~ ~ '~I
~
I
II
···.1.. DOLX u:i
."1~

331
90RX
\ 'OLX
"

RX1
,~I
\
I
24SY
BPI TO SH.14 j
,
, b
, I~ 43?Xl ~,
I ' . i, J) , ~ (.1.1') ~" ! LX1

- I
,
L-f'---J..
I
." ~ ~ 43MFXl
II

43MFXT
"

\ 431FX2'
~ I I-
r •

!
I
,1 3 1 ,
43PXl
m(81\.12)
13
11 (SH.l2:) 34 (SIl.12)
C!; I! 11
48-24

o
r
I
I
1
1~ (SH.1Z)

141
117 14 (SII. '5)
l2
25X t:!

11 (sll.a)
43PX2
.n

; ; : : s : c '
,
! Ie

1
I
f:3A'
13 (SH.12) 11 (811.12)
43AX I
I

~- I 1
r- m ,. ------,
I r
90
I
~ 1
I

~
t

! ! 1 I !.." AUTO ll't. ~ !


1 I 1 1 RX1 LX1 90LX 90RX I

d
i
'I
L_..k-_~.J
T 1" . c'",,) C'",,) .. r~ T~
90RX 90LX
~",
24SY
~". 1"
4.'1-24 S32X
iI
'I
d
u. At .u ser: .u SET: At
, 1 SEC. 1.2 SEC. ,

J mOM SIt 12. BNT ' BNl TO SH. 14 I f--


- L
I

. . . ,

e e

__!!1EL-
WU _ .",(:I/u 24fJY
8ImHflI (3/3)
-24
SIfIlHIII t3/3i ~:(3/J) ,L
1314 mrs lilt
i. A 13 14 TIllS ", A 1314lHrsSl1 A 1314 A 13 l( tit. 14
Blll.u THIS Eft. B 21 z:z TIllS tIL B 21122 B 2.lzz THIS IifI. ~. 21 n 8IlH
TIM
A i:i3T:J.I1 nilS 8K il:liffnllsaI. B ! 3 B 131 321 ;iJ!3\:J.I\-S/LU' &M1TSUB1SHl ""'" NO
~ A 43144 A.,.. A 43 ", A 14~ 4-4
13
lIT SSIU BTIS5 fie' ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCU IT (2)
AT\511 THIS tK. T 61 all Rl.l~ If
'''' DEC. 21. 2006
lM6 NO. PAGE. NO.
B 1MAY. 14. 2007 H.A. H. T

A llIAR.09.2007 H.A tl T
"'" H.ATAGI
S Z0 2 4 0 3 005
I I I I """""I H. TANAKA S. NAITO I I
2 3 4 \l 5 6 7 8 9
2 I 3 4 I 5 1 6 1_ _ 7 1 6 I G
~=-C-'"

~
'I ( SYLGU)', 'I ( SYLC6) I'
REFFER 10 lIIG.Ilo.JEllK024\ (REFFER TIl 1lIlG.1Io.JE2ZK024\
, ( BI\-<l14lHlO5)' , BK~l~) I

, ! i II ~ -J = I
w:
;
~
W
........!
0
['I'
<:: 0
~
<::
~
Oi
c...
w
~
-'
<::
~
UJ
....
!li
c:>
-I
'I B
c... ~ 0 .... Z = W

--:'---f' --Ir--I'--Ir-- '


Q -I

'
L .. ~ 5jL ., '"
~ 1E .. :;: ~
---6-.--f' ---Ir-----,-- --6------ _
I
"

- ,-1-- ---L-
I :l2:l2 :I.l J~
----~- J~ 31
--1-- sa all
-~>u-- .lIJ 41
----Y..---------------------------------------------,
(l' OLTC CONTROL PANEL I
f-
, ;;; ~ a ;:; :a;:g;;;::x g ~ iii
! FROl! Sf!. 13
BPI DCZZOV BPI
TO SH 15
'[

'[ 8
1:~ ~ 1:..\ ~ ",
4 14
S32X
":l2
-.; 43AX 43AX
~
-, 43PXl
3Z 43
43PX1'\
31
43MFXl 43.MFX.l
~l
\ S32X
~
-, 43AX
81
't 43AX
5~1
\ 43PXl
m
43pX1
~l
\ 43MfXl
82l 43l1FXl
i
p b
I
r SUPER-
~ VISORY 'I
RElIOTE
13 ~ 31 013 31 " 31 :lo1 501 flZ 54 82 5" tt
,

i
r
"
11
i
I

- [ S'2)( I f-
i II i
i i
i
'"' i c

'"'>--
i
T i E w ;;: E ~ ,,;:; ii
L
~ i
i
i
i
I R R R R R R R '

i[ !;\ L1
~~~
f;\ L2
~~~
!?\ l3
~~~
f?1"
~~~
!;\ L5
~~~
f::?\ L6
~u U
L7
iI d

, ,
[ BNl BIll I
, FRO~ SIl13 TO SI!. 15
, I--
-
L J
lOCAL AUTO MANUAL f NDEPENOENT PARALLEL MASTER FOlLOWER

&MI-TSU8ISHf
mu SHEET 1Kl.
I
~ELECTRIC
CONTROL CONTACTS AND 14
INDICATION CIRCUIT If
DATE DEC. 21. 2006
D'lG 'l0. PAGE NO.

t I I I I
""'"
APPIlDVED

I
1l.ATAGl
H. TANAKA S. NAITO
I
S Z a2 4
I
a3 006
2 3 4 \7 5 6 7 6 9
I 2 I 3 4 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9

,
I'

,
"'"
I"J "

'~
1:
17
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::rt::::::::[~~'-,~"",
, rt-----n--n-n-------------r--------n-rn-_J:::--1
', " "
, 17 I " ,
ii'

..., I -- -', i a
~
, " 1" , , " too , , " ,
I " " I I :" "6-J: I
"---------
1
, 1'll$.1 L o
S.i 17 I , .
L.o
ros..l I n
No.2 BANK
LTGIfOTORDRIVE'
L--- _M~_~EJ L ~"------~--_(FUTU~
-

~-------------------------~-------OLTC
T uo LTC

OONTROL- PANEL-I, :---------t----------;o7~KOl~c·coNlROL;~


f-

, I FRDM SIL14 1ll'1 oonov 2 "/lI'l TO SH.16 I I _-!'~l ~_~QY_:~------ -------_--- __ -_------.,.-----(~TURE) I b
I :i (
J 32 ' , F I 32 '.... I

I
I 31
43PX2
(SH.1Z)
I
" 31:
43PX2 1
t

I I I : • • 1
- i ~ 4J 43MFX2 i i i 4~ 43MFX2 21 i f-
i " (SH.12) i i i "I, 1 i
I' ""<r
25>: 43111FX2
I' I' ~------------~~
743MFX2.
"f'
25X
I'

~ 1
1 I I t

""(SH.12) I I ": ", I o

1
~
I i :, $ '.fnnnnut·uuuuun~ ,1, :
~ I
I

I
Q

_
~~C U
141
'\ ".m
Dl 1l~---------------------------~-~1
"
I I
-_--------------- ~+
14'

~ ".m
1.2:

_:
I
~~~C i
I

I
13(SH.tZ) (SH.1Z) "':
I I I I
I "" I I 13: I

~----------------j d

I,
I
" "PX>
ltt( (Sn.1Z)
I'
"
I'
_
"L
("PX>
(SIt.1Z) f2,
I'
,
I I I --~------"7----------------------w_--------_~--_____ I
- L FllOII:SIl.14 WI 8Nl TOSH.H

~ L .__ j f-

~(3/3) -"'----
~t3/1)
f-
A
Blzl
h3il~:
U
B 31132'
•••
lIlT 51; 6~;
---sit 1~
.",-:
A 13 U SIl.l'
B 21!2 TIllS SIl.

Af.ii/:i4I
()
~ELEGTRIC
MI TSUS"1 SH 1 ITiTLE
OUT OF STEP
SffE=r NO.

15
,AT 61lilu
DAn DEC. 21. 2006 DETECTION CIRCUIT
DlfG NO. PAGE NO.
DAA1ITl \ H. ATAGI

Al'PIlOVBlIH. TANAKA S.NAITO SZ0 2 4 0 3 007


2 I 3 I 4 I v 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9
, 2 , 3 4 , 5 , 6 ,_ 7 , 6 , 9
, LTC lDRIVE COOLER CONTROl CABIHET!
,
I I I
I I

I ,I
..@

Inn II "I
(REFFER TO DIlG.. 10<,. "n0049\ (REFFEll TO DWG. No. SZ023B9\
, DK-6020-3(6) , 1 81(-6020-304) , REFFER TO D'/IG. No. ~024\
( BK-414lklO5)

§. I,

,L~_~~~LJ (~'U~ w")_J L "~'t.J


a TO RalOTE CONTROL
, 01 04 " 63QX'
I, AlARiI IMllCATlON I a

Fli(XHa13~L1 I I
L __ _L c__ J
i~-=.~:-:p:-:-~:------
1 - 76 -----:--T:::: ,,-"~------~LTC cOORD'- PANEel f-
-
66 -----. ---------------- 71- U v- 68--

, I I'
I ~"
48-24 1- -r-~lL 2ST .
~
b ' I S 6ll 2 21 2 2 'ib
I (SIl.13) . J (StI.15) \ 30F1 30F2 \ 30F3 \ 30F4 I
i L_
, IK'
~_.J. ' , , , !
- II ' 30FS
,I
\1 30F6
'
\. 30FT
,
\ 30F8
IFf--
) 1 11 1 1 I
j ;; ;: :; ill ;;: ;; 5 :;:;;;; 21 I
aox
, 'I
~
~
DC FAILURE [' Ie
,
= ,

=
>- I I,
iCS :O~ i- , :O~ i- , :o:l is :o~ '$ :0:-] iA :0:-] ,-
,

1 I : , :o~ i8 :o~ ~ox :


~ I LI_J L_..L._J L_..L._J L_..L._J L- , _J L_I._J L_..L._J L_..L._J I
; i _ '"" .., I I I T I ~ mn i l SH d

L · J
TAP MOTOR OIL VT 01lT OF OLTC
STAGNATION Ilea TRIP PURIFIER FAILURE STEP PROTECTIVE (RESERVE) (RESERVE)
"AlAR'" RELAY

1 I
30FD
WORKING PATTERN of FAULT IND1CATlJR('rru-Z3)
I
INPlIT D I I

~
, I COIL 7-8 D Ie
DISPLAY *W2M ~
" '<
toNT. 1 2·
=
= ,I
I
,

~
A 314
""
l'fu..23 (VO)
I 2. 1lllSSIL
_"'.~"
J. I 2. TIlISS/l.
A1 3 1!l
,~

TflI-U (z/O)
J. I 2 nllSSIL
_1lItl!..!..
""
TI'tf-.Zl
), I Z mr6Stl
.J.ll:l i!i
l2ID)
,"",
TflI-l'.'l
J, 1 2. nliSSIL
...lll!l.!.L
(2/0)
Al
A 13
~'"(2/0)
TfII-%3 _ """'-
2. lIllSSll. A 1 t THISlJI\.
• • , <
-
J, I
AIWI
2
~"
UfO'
TIllS!<\.

-
....
J, 1314
~,

UfO

B 21 22 !Jl1& Sll
I I \& MI TSUB I SH r TIT"
CONY. 3 4
[ RESET PB
NOTE) • :BLACK
I n
181!iID' O'tIl." ~'STRIPES
n
BLACI(, ORAXGE
Sl£ET NO.
f-

'""
A .~I41
I 16
f I---l-I 1I ELECTRIC
If
DAT>' DEC. 21. 2006 ALARM INDICATION CIRCUIT
IllIG NO. PAGE NO.

A
""'"
1m. 09. 2007 H. A H. T I APPllDYED
H.II.TAGI
H, TANAKA S. NAITO S Z0 2 4 0 3 OOB
I 2 I 3 I 4 I \7 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9
• o •

fj---------------
j; ---- f--

i, zi3
0",
,I" f---

1
8 ! _0
CIl<r.
j~ ,I
00
O-f--
, 0..<
I ! <
f-- °
-
~
j I
,
:-~-----,
i,
! ,:.-----.~~,~"- I" [' [
I
i, ,~---;;,-------,,,~-- i·
~
Ii
i,
I,
w
:>
~
~

I ~ , ro 0

i, ,,--c ,;--~'" -
~
f',~i" i
I
1
~
-
ill
.J

<ti~H
" ill
j
!
I
,--:-.·~'"-I· 1'- I
I ,,--c---;;-,~,"-i.
~
i i,
j--~~'.:i:
, j
, ~_~~-C.-..J
j'
I '--- --.J
1

i
1

i, i,
I ! i
I
i, ,1
I i,
! I
I>
"i, I,
I,
!
!
I
!
,
1

I
• i,
!
;;
• I
______ ---- --- .-J
,
I, •" i,
N
I, • I
N

,I ,i
I, I -,
!
.i--l~'
,I ~
I _J' I,
,1 • !
;;
,1 1


I, " ~ j
~
L_ ~
---- ~j
CI
111I 1Ig19111- dOGI "~'-I -------

ro 0
4 5 16 17 I B I 9

i""':.:.;',~b :
1 I 2 I 3 1 (SYLCll) ,

'---''--:-i- (""",
I ,
a
I TAP POSrTlOO (1lCP cooE) ! a

L-II-II-T'-TI -II--L-------------------------------.------:
: ~ I '" (~ (.) (" "" I J

----,
.. --1--------------------------_____________
- f--
:- ~
-
.. ..
---0-----0--
" .. OLTC CONTROL PANEL
I
I

, • 0; • ~ " ~ i
b
i, ,, b

I
'

r
I
I
~

a.o
24P1X 1
~~

(mll) a.o (.17) ~


24P2X
33

24P4X
(~l~
n

34
em17
24P8X
)"(
33

24Pl0X
.17 )
i
,

I
,
- I-
, I
I ,
,, I,
, , I
.~ II, , c
I
,
1 I I,, ,
I
I,
~~I""
~ I
I
! i
IL _j
j d

I-

f--
SHEET NO.
() . M f T SUB ISH I ITIn.E
~ELECTRtC
TAP POSITION 18
r f
DATE DEC. 21. 2006 SUPPLY CONTACT
""''' H. ATAGI """ "'. PAm: lola.

._--
APPROVED H. TANAKA S. NAr TO S Z 0 2 403 010
I 2
)
3 T 4 V 5 I 6 7 I 8 I 9
~
I I I I I I I

f-

~
f-
Xl
W U -5.o"x90P
I
f-
f- a
,

:'2 1
F 2
f- 3
f- 4 ,
I-
- f-
13811-
1303-
5
s
oJ
z
<
I- 1384 7 1!2;G:J
f- 1301 8 ~c::g;
I- 1302-
~~~

f- 13D3
9
~gt;
10
, I- 1501- 11
0
~
~ ' I
I- 1502- 12 0

f- 13 r---51~
I- 14 17P4B 52
f- 15
1781- 53
f- 16
I- 1782 54
- n 1783-
l- 18
55
1784
f-
"
~
19 >
I- 1785- 51
f-
20
21
13El -
" "
0

I- 1281- 22
13E2- 59 l'1
0

, f- z
"to
1201- 23
13E3
15D:l-
60 z
I-
In

~
~
z
z
1202-
1204-
24
25
13BPl
t3Gl-
61

"
63
"
~

8 12D5~
i'=" z 12D6- "
27
13H1
1601
64

J_ I
§;.
~ 1207
12D8
28
29
16El
16BPl
65
65
67 i-=- (RESERVE)
12D9- 30
I'" 16Jl- 68 I-- (RESERVE)
C@ 1481-
31
32 g "~ lGBPl
16Kl- "
70
(RESERVE)
(RESERVE)

]--~-,~
1-482
1483 "54 z
8 16BPt
16H1
71
72
14B4 35 ffi
I 73
1485-
1486
1487
36
37
38
"- l1Cl-
74
75
1ie2 76
1488- 39
77
1489 4<J
78
- 14810- 41
l6Ll 79
14811 42 } REMOTE CONTROL AJ...ARIl INDICATION
43
16L2- so
81

t
1B80- 44
52

,
lBB1-
1882 ...
45 ~o
_0

~~
12BP-
12BN
83 (+)-
()- J
i DC SUPPLY
1BB3-
lB84-
47
... ~e
~
"
85
86
220V DC

18B5 49
50
lTPl B7
} PT 110V Ad
l1P3 88
~ ~
B9
90

mu SHEET NO.
~ M I.TSUB I SH r
ELECTRIC
TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT OF 21
om OCT. 26. 2006 OlTC CONTROL CABINET
[l1fG NO. PAGE tro.
""''''
mROVB>
H.ATAGI

.fl. TANAKA S. NAITO S Z a2 4 0 3


I
&011
B 9
'Ii
co---

ENGINEERING ORO NO o-35-L67322


.

SERIAL HUMBER 1032658


& MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM (EVNJ
PURCHASER HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5

LTC MOTOR ORIVE


SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PROJECT FOR TIE TRANSFORMER
LTC MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
SITE BUON KUOP HYDRO PIS

r-
f- SHEET HO. PAGE Ho. REY TIT L E
f-
f-
~
00 DOl B SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST ION-LOAD TAP CHANGER
MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN MAKE
: I
f- 01 002 B MOTOR AND CONTROL CiRCUIT
r;; 02 003 HEATER. LAMP AND SIGNALING CONTACT MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN
t:; MANUFACTURER IMR Germany)
r-
~ 03 004 POSITION TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
r- TYPE OF ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER 3 X MS I 301-170/B-IO 19 3W
04 005 A OIL FILTER UNIT
f- TYPE OF MOTOR DRIVE EolOOL
f- 05 &006 LIST OF EQUIPMENT
f-
f- TYPE OF OIL FILTER UNIT 3 X oFIOOoC
f-
f-

r- SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM


f- ELECTRICITY OF VIET HAM
- HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO;5
r-

Iu; BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT


LOT No.27

""
,c::.
F
Sumltomo Corporation

~
~
;;::.
~ MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
CORRESPONDING SECTION
<I>::m
6020
!o
:;: PROJECT FILE NO. BK-6020-g06
u::: L::. E DATE NOY. 15. 2006 TITLE SHEET NO.

T .-<
Lu CI~~;; C1~=;;;:
.0<
C!) LU",,:t:tr.l LU .::l: ' "
UJ-- U > _
DIlA'~ M. Kawashima SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST 00
ii:' ~I:':";~'j: A.OKanishi
0"5270049 ~
CHEC(ED
I > .<::lot: ;::s~
PAGE MO.

~U .. 001
W ..... ::.:: O
w>-:>£o
a::~:i<
~
0::-,:>:< APPROYEIl A.o'anIshi
I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I B I 9
I I ~ 2~!~Eli"~P~E§Z024031

~
111:C8-09J (LIJBt)
I /JC POWER SUPPLY I I BK-6020-a05 r
I
I
Pl:4001230V SOH'
3-PHASE -i-WIRE
I
I
I
I
RAISE
TO 17
lO\\1'R
TO 1 aKIN
II

L_-':~-"'r"'-"'r~-----J L_+ ~ _+---+---------------l


I I I j ' I I I EMERGENCY TRIP

---
C'Q

-< Xl PE I 1 15 16 I? 2 I 10 I 11 I 12 13 ~ 14 15 '
.~~--- - -Xl;a--------- -~r~~O -------------~------------l;:OCi"1:EJiJTE -----Tl-T--UCHlTOR DRivEI--
-
~ 0"1 1 534 532'" ~~,I
~
0"3 FI5>ifl-' RAISE 11 I. llMl'R~,
1 5 04.5
,
.... D
01
D
- -
D D
2
K2 \ ,,,
173

OIL
2 ~ 6 33

~:;=ll K2D ;~---i~-.J,"


21
U
113
"
32

- ~
)(2016
t-------+ " I--
= 1 I. 1 13 15
~

=
Kl K2
514
c
54 ,
,
~l 3
Bo)'l 55' He l NO
c 512 Jc
w
~ HCI: HCINO S13A NC NO:
51 Ne NO Ne! NO
~
-----;!----,
, r,

= 837 0
I
51
~ NC NO
w
x2011 H X2~ Ig to
I ,
H
" " 11

.." .."' ..
- +- I--
S8A c
.=--~----~~~ NerND r-
"
~i
I
NC NO
K 1 1--- K2'---
56A
, __5_6_8
, K20J' "
" "' "
'I 1 ! NC I NO NCr NO c

~' ~,
I' " I"
------ "
21
WI K2 K20
Kl~
Ul VI
K37
FI5>ifl-~
> D
21 2212.( ~ 21
" "
~
AI
Ml L 3 Xl:106 KI
Al
K20~A1 K2
Al

A1
K3? 01 "
A1 A1
"

'
- ~-~--------------~PE---------------------------~-~---~----~-_-----_-~---------~--------------- I--

~ D-" ., K~37 m!~~!


~'t'!'l'~'~.l "I·I'l"l'~.".I-I'l"l'~"I"I'I'l'~'"!'!"'~'
1
Al {}" AI A2 Al Al Q

. 1_.J.-2 Xl
5 -.J.-.(
15H _Y
21-4= 22
l( 1_.J-2
5 -.J- (.
12
11
1_ ,tl
L
2: SI2.Slue-ND
SUA.sna/e-NO
Ij' j' j'

z
5"":1- 6 31...s;- 32: 5 -1- 6, 14- 3_ , : : : . 515/e-I/O
21..A-22 (3_,;.-(( 21....:L-22 u I. 515/e-lle
53 -J-
61--r-62 54 53 -J.- 54
61-1-1--&2 53 -J-
iiI_lEi:>. 5,( 2( 21 5_:;:
t 6 ~:::::::::t~~~~t===='l
3L~ 3.(
NOTE)
78 -..,..- 74
as -.s- 84
71 J-L 72
113 -J--U
73 _..,..- H
liS -.-I-- 54
-
.otY- (2
54.55/C-Ne

LerNER - 0 -
lAP POSlTfllN 1 Z l-----I lA 9~ !e
-I>RAISE
11----1> If II
11 RAISE OPERATION ''--IJ-'' --1>' I--
TAP CHANGER POSITION NO.1 ~17

,,,ji1:11 ttfi II±j~ ! m 2) LOWER OPERATION


TAP CHANGER POS IT ION
3) 01 COIL OPERATION
NO, 17 ~ 1 &, MHSUBISHI
ELECTRIC .
TITlE

MOTOR AND CONTROL CIRCUIT


(
I SHEET

01
NO.

Ia
a: ! I ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER DATE NOV. 15. 2006
I
MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN MAKE
DETECTION OF K20 FAULT
DETECTION OF CONTINOOUS IN LIFE OF KIIKVK20
~O CRANK OPERATION WITmUT or OPEN
BbUll. u. 2on~:' Ml~~~&~A
K KAWASHIMA APPROVED
AIKAy.2!.2G01 A.OKANISIII
liliAn M. Kawashima
A.DkanishI ow'S' Z7 0 0 4 S
PASt:. MO.

002
I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 I
1 2 _ L ~ _._1 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 1 B I 9
I
Rb!~rof:;O~~~•.'p~ELSZ02403
!n"rn:r1 IV UlTI;l [1U.
I
1
I,
r;'109 ,IBK-6020-305
L-- --i-

~ -----x0-~: (--~------~~------f------T~T~----------=rr~------___T------f------ff----CfC"'TOR
J

ORiVE-

- F16 >i13-~
> D
I--
L
2

21
S10 0-
21

X2Q I •

- , , , I--
=
01 " Kl " K2 " F15
13 21
832 R' 827A o;JHe I NO S15

"t:
0
~ X2 1 2
14 \a 5 17 HeINO
'"
~
" " "
~ 1
~
r. l PE
Rl I il El Ix,
~ ~L
2
f:'.

.+
~

-
I " a f---

~
"1 IL---rlI~
X2D S

F161i13-
t D

-----------,~
5~ t~ I I

~
I I I I

--6.1:--------------
Ie

l-
~ I
Xl, 7 20 172 173 2
' X1 , ------ - 0 - --J,.- .b--o
2'2-------'91 2"------293 - ..I--
294-----298 - 300

- f----------- 9 16 .,;.
I-----------~ ------------------ l~ Iff'P~ !
I' OFF 01,
OR F15
TRIP OPERATION ,I
'IOLTC
REFFERmNTROl
m DYl3PANS- -J
~~02D~305 1Ijj:~H+:t1ftl!P
No. SlaN03 _

F16 --------;;-5---------------------------- 8 32 13 I t . . II Ill· - UIH . . 3! n I

2~_' 2It S26A/C~NC~M¥_!iii~~~ SlS/C-N~L


'It
I I• S2&A/C-ND SlS/C-NC

.W:- 3 2
'
~
a-
- 1
,

, -,
1- 3
I 5.
527A/C-NC
S27A1C-NO

~. -'f--

::~: NOTEI
11 S26A OPERATION.
() MITSUBISHI
t:fi::c. ELECTRIC
TITlEHEATER, LAMP AND
SIGNALING CONTACT 02 la
TAP CHANGER POSITION NO. 17 'ATE NOV, 15,2006

~
aI I I -··-··_------l
ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER
MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN MAKE 2) S27A OPERATION
TAP CHANGER POSITION NO. 1
DHA'n
APPR""
t-\. Kawashima
A.Ok,nishi.
OWG NO.
S Z7 0 0 4 S PAGE MO.

003
1 I 2 I 3 1 4 I 5 6 I
r
--r-1TIi;;-"", I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 1 I 8 I 9
No.2 BI I I OLTe CCNTROL PANEL I
l TC r-rL ,fUVE I r REFFER TO DW:3 No. SZ02403 I
(FUTURE) .. I I I I - I l l IB-· 17 6 15 14 BK-6020-305 ~
UJ X4~;~~~~~;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~-~-~-~-~-~-1; ~_~ - ~~~~e- ~~ :~-~~1~~~---------------
-~ - ~c ~C ~C rO- C. - - ~c ~o ~C_~_. - --"--~- 1'- 1'--"---"-s",----------s,OP----------c'-l'- 1'--~--I"-T--"---""---------sS1P----LTC;umR
ORivE
cry ~ C, b. II I -L .\
--0 ~ ~ ~1 D8'(211~
f2--~~ ~1 .2-" XI-- ~1
- 4 f----~ >-2 ..( l 2 X I-- ~2 f-
~I.---~ >---- 3 5 B 3 X Xr-- ::--- S
6 f----f--.5" >----4 6 10 l X I-- >---4
~ r----~ >---- 5 ~ 5 X XI-- >--- 5
r-g-f---~ _Ii -.:..- G XX r-- > - - - Ii
~:-....- f-... a' xI--- ::----- 7
10
~ :---~
r----r:t >---- 7
>----8
> - - - - SA
7

B
g
X
x
XX
t---
Xr--
~ Ii
> - - - 9A
L'--~ ~ 9B -- f--o ' X XI- ~ 9B --f--<>
13 !--~ >---9C 9 X XI-- ~9C
- U? ~ -h.lit >---10 10 X r-- ~10 f-
=
t--
,..c.-
15 ~ , '"'
1 > - - - 11 11 X Xf-- >---- 11
o ~ ~ ~12 e- 12 X X f-- >-----12
l.W ~ ~~ >------13 ~ 13 X X Xf-- >----13
Lr.l ~ 1 >---14 • 14 X X f--- > - - - - 14
C\J ~ ..--~ ~ 15 • 15 X X Xf-- >------- 15
= ~ 1 ;>--1£; rn 16 x Xx f-- >-------16
"'""" :-:=---- '] .>---17 - 17 X X X Xf-- > - - - 17
~2 ~ ~ ~

- I 1, ~

~
00 ~

~
f-

lli
~ ~

r ~ ....., ~

~ ~ ~

~
~ ~

~
co ~
LJ
~
m ~

~ ~

~ ~

- f-
!+= ~

~
~

f$=
~ ~

~ ~

-
~ ~

31

---------------------------
-
_ _ _ 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Xl~
-
--I'I'I"I~I~I"I~I"I'I'I"
~ "'
.. I", "- "- "" .. ", ... ~ '" "" "' .. -
- -- - - - -1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-
~ ~ .i:i :; ~ S:: ,= .: =: =i: E
51 fi 171 19 hnll1!IZ11~(llSllfill+i1811gI2nI8Jlu218318(lsst81871a8188j8Q 81 821gU g(lg+'lg+grTlbl!b~lhUlllSllltliGTbltl
I I
.
I I~H+W.l.:.J.: B
f-

A MITSUBISHI TITLE
SHEET l;n,

'I 11 ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER I ~


X61ITITlTI DUf
ELECTRIC
NOV. 15. 2006
POSITION TRANS~,rTTER CIRCUIT 03
I S· Z7 0 0 4 S
"
MASCHINENFA8RIK REINHAUSEN MAKE ORA"~ M. Kawashima PA6E MO.

APPRaVED A.Okanishi 0", 004


I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 I
I , I 3 I 4 15 16 I 7 I B I 9
,--ri--- mE JRANSFORMER . PRES<;JRE SWITCH 'IlSTAT I

1
1REFFER TO DYtG No. t 19 • (AI IS) Ie) 'fCj. CBI fA) I
, ,
UJ ! B10
2 1811
2 1 812 1 814 1 B13 1 !
: L_____________
· 21

~_:_ 3_ _ ~ ~_ _ 2 _~_ _~ ~_J :: Xl: 17 ~


____________________________________~1 gO 91 92 93 9~ 1105--r-~~-----------rffH)TOR-DRlVE-1__
-
::'::~' y I FI5'l
Ql:I~~ ;Q I
FI7>r, 0 0

830~1' I"
1 , K29 ~f111a
, , I'
~~~f(
I' f---
- " I ,
X2n! u I
05111l~ 06~ilr~ r"" r"" r" r"
~

= >'
~
04
,
:> ID D D D D
K7(
H K81'"
H K91"
H
04 05 Q6
H
K43
1I'"1(
F17
22
a
w

,
,( j 6 ~ I ~ I6 ~ ,l 16
" I" I..
~

~
04\
"
05
1" 06
1" , 'd

= 8116 et.'
],~~::
~l
~

~ , " ,
KB '---....-
" K9
,
\--.;..-
"
K7 --~-
2 I ~ 16
- I
~
:: 1.( I" 2 I ~ 16
•. I---
A'
K7~: ~ ?
A' I B1 AI

lli' cp cp KB
A'
K9
A2
K29
II"
K43
5"
I,
FI7 >ij>-.s;
,>D>
F15:3
-
\ Jff \ !:It! \ tl~ Xl 106 107

r- ---l F17
K7
-0-
K8 KB K29 K43

"1'
u ,
I
I
I, 2
, 0 - 1
AI
V
1_,)- ::
A2 A1

1 -.J- ::
A2 AI
V
1 -.J- 2
A2

"
B1 AI
V
13-:-r- H ,
A2

1 ,I • -.J..-
-J.- -
3' ~ a -J..-'(
5 -J.-- 6
3
,
-J.- 4
' "
IB_
21->;---22
13 ~-t::
31->-r- 32

I, " 13±H 5 G
~~±~~
_.....- H
" "
43 _.J.-4~

""
" 21 2Z
3"1+32 0 1 + 32
21~ 22
31+32
5S-:J--5~
61.....-.- 62

-~
I ~ " I " -:--+- -1:3 U
53 _..;.- 54
43 -.-r- 4(
53 -.J.- 54
U -.-r- 4~
5a -.J.- 54
2B_ 71 .....L- 72
Ba -.1-- 84 I---

a
'Ii I

I 2 -r 3 I 4 I 5 6 I
, I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I B I s

Blo PRESSURE SWITCH CAl S26A END POSITION SIGNALLING SWITCH


= 811 PRESSURE SWITCH (Bl S27A END POSITION SIGNALLING SWITCH
~

812 PRESSURE SWITCH rc) S3 RAISE/LOWER CONTROL SWITCH


S30 TEST SWITCH FOR OIL FILTER SWITCH
- 813 THERMJSTAT <Al I--
814 THERf\1OSTAT (8) S32 LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH
B15 THERM:JSTAT eel S37 SWITCH FOR AUTOMATIC PASSAGE OF POSITIONS
El HAND LAMP S4 END POSITION SWITCH
F15 AUTOMATIC CUT-OUT 840M POSITION TRANSMITTER MODULE WITH N/O CONTACT RANGE
F16 AUTOMATIC CUT-OUT S40P POSITION TRANSMITTER BOARD
F17 AUTOMATIC CUT-OUT S5 END POSITION SWITCH
Kl MOTOR CONTACTOR S6A END POSITION SWITCH
K2 MOTOR CONTACTOR S6B END POSITION SWITCH
K20 AUXILIARY CaNTAcTOR 861M MODULE WITH DIODE MATRIX
- POSITION TRANSMITTER BOARD
f--
~
K29 TIMING RELAY 561P
= K37 COUPLING RELAY FOR AUTOMATIC PASSAGE OF POSITIONS SBA HAND CRANK SAFETY SWITCH
~

a K43 AUXILIARY CQNTACTOR SBB HAND CRANK SAFETY SWITCH


~
K7 MOTOR CONTACTOR FOR OIL FIL TER UNIT CAl Xl TERMINAL
~
KB MOTOR CQNTACTOR FOR OIl FIL TER UNIT C8l X2 TERMINAL
~

Kg MOTOR CONTACTOR FOR OIL FIL TER UNIT CCl X3 TERMINAL


= Ml MOTOR X20 TERMINAL
~
M4 MOTOR FOR OIL FILTER PUMP (Al X40 TERMINAL
~

M5 MOTOR FOR OIL FILTER PUMP fBl X61 TERMINAL


- I
;:;
M6
01
MOTOR FOR OIL FILTER PUMP CC>
MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH
f--

MOTOR PRQTECTIVE SWITCH FOR OIL FILTER UNIT CAl


rn
04
05 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR OIL FILTER UNIT (8)
06 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR OIL FILTER UNIT (Cl
Rl HEATER
Sl CAM-OPERATED SWITCH
Slo DOOR CONTACT FOR HAND LAMP
8116 CAM-OPERATED NON-DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
- S12 CAM-OPERATED DIRECTIONAL SWITCH I--
S13A CAM-OPERATED DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
5138 CAM-OPERATED DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
S14 CAM-OPERATED DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
S15 CAM-OPERATED NON-DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
S2 CAM-OPERATED SWITCH

TITlE snEET HO.


j
~ MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC 05
aI I I ,m LIST OF EQUIPMENT Ia
ON-LOAD TAP CHANGER 1 NOV. 15. 2006
I
MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN MAKE DMU

APPROVE!!
M.Kawilsh i mil
A.Qk,nIshi o"SZ 1 0 0 4 9
PAIiE MO.

&006
I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 I
,----'-'-,r-+, ,~ ' __-"c-
.L L, __~·~ L'__...!.' L'__...!.· 'L__..!..) ..L
, .c- ..L
' __-,',- L, __-,,~, .L
, ,~, .L
' :;" , _ _--',~,
.L ' _ _-"~'
.L .L
' :;" LI .!:"C-__--,~
Lv 0 80~ sl::oI

LETTER Of IWIf PlATE


000

M 112 SQ9(SlIS)

2-<bttlllUS ARRAHGEIENT OF FAULT INDICATOR 30FT - 30F16 IFLl-23~xT6


" ...
'"
l£n",
QXl.fR ClWIRlX. CABINET
SIZE
63Jt315
IUr.TfRlAl
STAlt4.ESS STEEl

- """"
OiL n§, lUllING lEII'. OIL I.£YEL

.....
""
""'"
"m ...
""""" ,~
COCl.ING FAIt

"""'"
""
"""" ""'"
COOLrllG FAIl
"'""-,
,""
,""
""'Ie
PlASTIC
ffi" I'ERYlIllit I'ERYlIllil ffi" ffi" FAlUIlE
-"'""-, ,"" ""'Ie
"I< IIlRIW. SUPPLY t::mmll:l- CmQII1 ,"" ""'Ie
"""" OIL TBl". IlllDlNG lEIF'. OIL l.f'IB. 0." ''''111''''
-., ."...... "15 ClWTRlX..
BERG8fCl'SllPPl..Y COH1ROI.. CfRaJIT
"." ""'Ie
.... "" "" ....
'0.'" """""'~
"'" "''''''
"""
FAll.UIf """'" .
""" '" "'""-,(lIRWIT "..,
16rl;O
Pl..ASHC
""'Ie
-

-
Sf' <SBlIAl.. ... PlAtE) 43xSO STAIItfSS STEEl

llJC ! 100
PAINTING CCl.Ul:
sarr,..
CAIllIEr OUTSI
....
........
CABIIEr IIISIDe
,
,.~ ''''"'''''' IIIIIS8.L 111.5

I CMIIIET l'ROTETlCW DEBltfE I


- ''''

, @ I @

- ,:, !

- I-

..., "''''''''''''''''1'''''''''''''''''''' ... r--=~-=-=


SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAIl
__-:::-----I '
8.ECTRI CITY OF VIET IIAlHEVN)
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UIIIT 110.5
- BUOII KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT t-
LOT 110.27
Sumitomo ,Corporation

- CORRESPONDING SECTION
PROJECT FILE NlIIBER 81(-:-6020-307
Ill!'- F'\J It 1L\1E r IlIli. SEC. lsw.j SPECIAl. WJE \K.\S.\PltINr\ 1lI'.IllST.
M~Z" '~J:u> =1"11615 II I I I I Ii I I I'j IT 111 I 1 I'
I);:"" ,J..I'Tsmrlill B..ElmlJC ClIlPlIlATICW nRE ,
ASSElIBLY DRAWING OF
A ~e .... IL ...TAGI
COOLER CONTROL CABIIIET
(}f~. I~

5C,I,I,£
mm

1/10 1/20
alECKED
[J[$J6IIED
" .....
n. ...JASI
FOR TIE TRANSFORMER
/ -~.
S K 0 8 0 4 7 l"',i,''
, I I I I I l
bATE Jl.L 7.2006 A!'f'RO'r'HI S.MITO
-r
L I
" 11
" I
" I 15
"
r:--:-:-::-'-'-":1"=I''---=-'----'-
'---''----'---
' ''-__J-I_ _..:' J-I_ _..:' J-I_ _.;.' L-I_ _.:.' I,-_ _.:.' I,-_ _.;."_ _-"1 :.."_ _-"1 ..:" -,-
1 _ _..:':..' J-l_ _..:'.:.' J-
1 '::.; J-I_ _....::" ..,~
£90BO)[S·:':a
PAIt/TIHG COLOR l.ETTER OF NAME PlATE
SECTION ClLOR "" ... lETTER SIZE. IATElIAl
PANEl WTSIDE ItIJ.. 7ll3B 11'1 DLTe ClINlRll. PANEl.. 631315 I PLASTIC
PANEl INSIDE IlAl. 7038
tllNER PANEl RAI.. 7038 NPI1 TAP POSITIIII 16x50 Pl..ASTIC
JIlS1JllfIENT IIJISELL Nl.5 IIP12 lJlCAl 16x50 PLJSrIC
- NPI3 AIJTD
IIPH IAIIlAL
16x511
16x50
PlASTrc
PLASTIC
1IP1S IIIlEPElIDEKT 16x50 PUSTtC
ARRANGEMENT OF FAULT INDICATOR 30Ft - 30FB 'TFU-23~x8 1IP16 PAIWl.EL 16x511 Pl..ASilC
MP17 IL\STER 1~ PlASTIC

...'"
1IP18 FlllJJJIER 16)<50 PlASTIC
TN' 10100
11>19 DC SUPPLY {22OYl 16x1iO PlASTIC
PlRIFlflE
16x50 IUSTIC
FAIUf.lf STASIlATlIll Ell TRIP SIB' "'" or
-~ NP21 vr {SEGOIIIARYl
- CAll.E PIT
IITtI COVEll
16x50 Pl..ASTIC

SP {SERIAl Mo. PLATE} 43x6Cl STAlIlLESS STEEl

I PAItEl.. PR1JTECTllJI DEGREE I 1P31 \

-
LIFTING Illl.TS

o
i
SECTION IHl

800 800
LIFTING BlX.TS

- ··j-c0'1==~~==-~I-::I
NI>"::-:::I-==:;"l
i,
Xl

i
ItlSPECTlONj
i Wlllllllf
- 1--- 1------ -
i
i -
i gl
,- --- 1-----+--= -
.-.:1"!~-
i
-
i 1 a -
i1if-+l--,
.L
I
i:
""" 11TH KEY J
11TH KEY
1---
I
-po
0

-
i SECTION B-B SECTION (}-{;
i
i ,--:=::-::::-::=::-:--:::::-::--::-c--f'
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAIl
i ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM(EVN)
- D i 0 HYDROPOIlER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5
Il-I--------f------ .:.L BOON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
LOT No.2)
lj;~1$===f===~-~l Sumitomo Corporation
!
"'"\I.---
B+C
,,,oo'--
t'I.
.j,'l\
.-."ow AU". !I
-
l°f. F I!mJ It nAtE I DIG. SEC. ISI1. J SPECIAl. (OOE 11:.1 s·IRlflirj IM'.PIST.
~,.z. ,I"" -ITI'I'I I I 1 I 111 1 I'" I II I I I
~!~~ J.. IrUIIIISllI ELrelRIC CllRPal,mllll H11£
ASSEllllY DRAWING OF
~e ..., OLTC CONTROL PANEL
Ollt I~ min lHtZEIl
FOR TIE TRANSFORIIER
SCAlE 1/10 1/20 DfSl6ll£Il Il.ATAllI lJIIG.1Il1. Rri.IIO.
lI,I,TE ocr_3tl.2006 »mJVElI S.IIAITC S K 0 8 063 A
L 1 I I 1 I 1 1 1 n I I I 1 15 1 16
1 I 2 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I
, I '" s I 10 I 11 I 12 I IS I 14 I 15 I 16

19£09)/s~;01

,
AA!
'TFlJ-23T"
AA2
'TFlJ.-23'
AA3
'TF\}-23T"
AM
"TFlJ-23T"
AA5
"TFU-23T"
AA6
"TFlf-231"
AA7
'TFU-23T"
AA8
'TFij-23T"
OC220Y DC220Y OC220V DC220V DC220V OC220Y OC220V OC220V
SOF 15 30Ft SOF6 30F 14 30F7 30F12 SOF 10 30FS
BF_TT18H2_X4 I
- I-
~l ~.]
BF-lT19B2-X4 ---,

~
f-02
~
-O~ L .oLl!- SF-HI9Sl-X4 ~JL -
4
I
,o-f-+- BF-TTI8JI-X4
.. !I(lodl 'H"'''-'' 30~
BF~TT19T2-X4 _ '-02 «,.:.......- BF-TT19Tl-X4 lPU-- SF-TTISBI-X4 /-02 lOW-- SF-HISHI-X<: f-o2 SF-TTISHI-X.; BF-TTI9Gl-M
04 30 <14 aofd-- B-TT20Bl-AB2 1-0<- 90f!-- B-TT20DJ-AIl4 fa· •• f!! . fa· •• f-o .0<- sodl Br-TTI9G2-X4 bf 00 .. BF-TT20Dl-X4
so
Ir ,
OS 05 SO OS 50 Os ",0 0.. 50 06 SO 0650 01350
7""- BF-TT16J!-X3 -OS ,.,!-- BF-TT14Bl-CB! 1-0" 70r-- BF-TT1SE1-X3 ~II 7P'--- BF-TTI6HI-xS ~ - BF-TTI5Fl-X3 ~ - BF-TT1BF1-X3 ~ - 8F-HI601-x3 ~f--
-
"'01:\
- ~ ~
Bf-T-TI501-X3

AB! AB2 6-TT2oo2-o'.B4


AB3 81'- n 1!l52-X4 -
AB4 BF-lTI9J2-M -
AB5 BF-H1B02-X4 -
AB6 AB7
, Tfll-23T"
"e-"""-,, ~
(GlBF-TTgBNI-CAB
AB8
"TfU-23T"
'TFU-23T" 'TFU-23T" 'TFU-23T" 'TFlI-23T" "TFU-231" 'TFU-23T"
DC220V AC230V DC220V DC220V DenDV DC220Y DC220V DC220V

- 30F16 30n
BF-TTI902-X4,
30F2
r SF-HISOI-X4
::lOFI3
BF-TT1SK2-X4 - .
30FS
BF-TT19N2-X4 ---,
30Ftl
SF-TTISl2-X4 i 30FS
BF-TTI9F2-X4 -----,
30F4
BF-TTl9E2 X4 -----,

IlF-TT19U2-X4 - ~~~.
04 :30
OS
OOS
BF-TTJ9Ul-X4

SO
7
6-TT2062-AA2
BF-TT16Kl-X3

r ~ lY-TllI2A42-I\Cl/AE2
,3=~Ll-
r;:=:=.oe
BF-TTI9£1-X4
-04 :301l- 6-Tl20BJ-AA2
01;

-
SO
701-- Y~TT14Gl-IIES
Yill~;~~
~~r-- B-TT14EI-AE8

6F-Tl19R2-X4 -
8-TT20D2-AA3 -
n f'o---;-;-;:;:r-- BF-Tl19Rl-X4
f-o ...
OS
foos
301-- B-TT20DI-AAB
SO
70F= BF/ll-nI6GI-X3/AEI
f<:'2
fo·
~
Os SO
fool!
I(>L
,• .,!j
BF-TT1SNI-X4

7 ( > - BF-TTI6El-X3

(G m-TT 14BN1-AEB
~Il
-o~
os
30P==
so
BF-TT19FJ-X4
BF-TJ20Bl-X4

~r-- BF-TTI5Bl-X3
c

- '

AC2
n Gel D

o
'M-LED-S"
YF-TT13D2-CBS
AC3
23C
-
(l.I)YF-TTl12M2-1~1 =3 , YRHl3!"

~ E

- -

AD! AD2
.

-
'5
"SF 115-2' '"
'S"
F
-~
~
]1-0' '~t
(YlY-TTIJ2A12-A.E2/o'.02
~4
~
II 30- YF-TT13B2-X3

' gC:-r--
Y-iT21B2-AC3 II 06 50

- Y-TlISEI-IIES
YF-Tl13Bl-CB~ ....l~I~
ro~ 700 {Y)Y-TTI12A12-IIOI
(YlYF-TTI32A13-X3
-
01< 110 I

- -

-
AE8
AE2
ODC
'SRE-AAU"
AE3
"c
"SHE-IT
AE4
2"
'SRE-Ki
AE5
21£
'SRE-Ki
1"H"I"!"!" ~
bIt;'" ""b..I seI ':1
U,I 4 56
A""
E6
'SRl-Nfr
27CT
'SR10-NN"
AC230V 5DH, OC22OV

.. . ",
J

", "" , -
-
Ii , ID >

I
\/IRIN6 CODE DETAILS ~,_" _-I~ -ITiS151 I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I ,ll II I I I I I I 101 I I II l
/iI.>.-;';' HITSUBISHI B..ECTRIC CORPORATION WIRING DIAGRAM OF
95C
N''r''ll:1 -@>--E3~~ ~Ii.II.BaH.~~~:J.. COOLER CONTROL "CABINET 1/3

, ,
--=
.~­YlR!"; IESIlN.\UDII
l--LDCAU(JII;[IE
t-t! •

. - 1 R ""
,A. t
1lII\,J11

=f'lflt
ll\.1II'"'

: NTS:":
APR. 16. 2007 ~
~ .A;:Z;2

QI.~
..5'. l.N.lJi
-~
FOR TIE TRANSFORMER

S K6 0 3 S 1
I'
I 2 I 4 5 6 I 7 I I s I lD I 11 I 12 j 13 I 14 j 15 I 16
V
,..,.....llI-.'

1 I 2 I 3 , I 5 , 6 7
• 9 10 , 12 13 4 15 I 16

1W1 1W2
us

A Y-Tt21DI-1W2
-1.'1.'4400-

~ (W)'I'/YF-TIlI2M2-DA1/AC2 (YIY/YF-TTll2AI2-X<!/AE9
Y-TI21DI-IWl
t:J ·Z-ISGQ-B·

<
0
~

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

- -

1 "

"
;~ i " ~
>
"~ i~
~~
8

"" ~
~ ~ ~ ~

~ . ~ f> ~ ~ ,~
.
~
~
~, ,~
,-~ .~
""
- ~
,
~
0
~
> > -
iiii iiii CM
" CA6
CAl CA2 CA3 CAS
c

fff~
52"
-NF6HII"
~P 20A

l
~:fff
m
52E
'NF63-SII"
4P 20A
IT
8AN
- NFS3-SlI'
2P 1SAT
ff 8"
• NF63-SlI'
2P ISH
IT e
SA
- llF65-SI."
2P 15AT
IT
80
' NF63-SI.'·
2P 15,1,1
c

~~
~ ff ff ~ ~ y y ~ ! ~ ~ ~
~
- ,
~

!! "
lE ;;:; ~ ~
~
~~
~
in :.

~ ! ~ ~ ~ §

"""
-

" ;; . :;; Z ~
~ - f ~ e
~

""
>
,
""
t
, ~
,~
• •e
0

~
D D
~
0
"
~ ~
> >

-
~ ~
~ 11 ~
, ~
y

E :;;
~
t
~
~
e .'"
~
,
" ,•
%
,~
~
E

I
f-

"~
m
-- CB3 CBS

ill
-- CBl CB2 -" CB4 CB6 1------------------

nI"
52Ft 52F2 \- 528 52F~ 88F B3W83E
• S-N21' • S-2>N21'

r! r
'SV2--t1E06' 'SV2-l'i:OS' , GV2-MEOS'" 'SV2-+lEW'
F 3P 1.4A 3P t.4A 3f'J,H A.C230V 50Hz AC230V 50HZ F
- 3f' UII
f--I>-
" \1 OA 1
~ ~ ~
~
OH
~ ~ ;; ~ ~ ~ 2001/
t-

~
"~ .~" . "e~ ~ ;;
~
> e
~
>
~
>
""
0
~ ~
t " ,, ,
G G

>

E~
;;
- f-
~ ~
"
i ~

H
!
" H

J J

1
- -
I

K K
i
'--------------------

- -
JPl<l.c .0 . .

1
I.'IRING CODE DETAILS _-1- -171SiSI 1 I 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 I 1 I I 1 1 I I I I "I 1 1 I 1
R,;:.t! HITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION mu
~IRING DIAGRAM OF L
:J!H,,~lII'" G-e:.:.: :-l&.l\.llek'<i . .f_;(!'::" COOLER CONTROL CABINET 2/3

,
.. -
11111£ SUE mE
l.OCIITmlCtCIE lJIlUll: r£St1lU.TI,,"

,
Y.:!

..~ 1
lID<.:Dl

II.~
~
NTS c;.;.~
.~.-.. 1 ::SM APR- 16. 2007 ~ ...s: ~
~ ~
=....=,
-~s
FOR TIE TRANSFORMER

K60362
1 2 I s 4 I I 5 I 6 I 7 I
• 1
V
9 I 10 1 11 12 I , 14 I 15 I 16
1 I 2 I 3 I
, I 5 , 6 , 7 8 s , 10 , I 12 , I 15 I 16

£9E09)1sf~"::GI

A A

8 8

X3 X4 -
"TX-5.5".SOP • lX-5. S' .SOP

, ,
o , ""' ,, D
(V IYF-TT132A13-AD2
,, 2601 "'" ,
I , "'" ~.'"
, r-
')'F-Tl13B2-AD2 , 26\1~Dl
26\1.02 ,, j--
8F-TTI9[H-AI\2
BF-TTIStl2-AA2
I-
7 BF-TTl9nl-AElS

(Y)YS-TH IFR1-CBl (RlB-TT148Pl-CBl


•• 69-1 ,• BF-TTlSU2-AB3
SF-HISEI-AB2
'" ( G)YS-TTlIFS1-l:Bl SF-TTISBI-ABS 69-01 10 BF-TTI9E2-AB2
'"en ( R)YS-TTIIFTl-l:BI " 69-02
" BF-TTI9Fi-A88
E BF-TTl501-M8 " 'N BF-17 19F2-AS8
E
'"
I'S2
, fR lY3-TH IFT2-l:B2 SF-TH5El-MB
"
.1.3._ 9601
9602
"
" 8F-TT19Gl~AA8

BF-TII9G2-AAll
'"
eo, l Y lY3-TTIIFRS-tB3 " 33Ql-I " BF-TTI9Hl-AA3

- XI
7

,• l GlY3-TTIIFS3-l:S3 BF-THSFl-A/lS - " 33Q2-1 "" BF-TTl9H2-AA3

'Ttl-ST" X2PXM
'"
no l R lYS-TH IFlS-l:BS "n 33Ql-2 n BF-TTI9Jl-AA5
w fY lYS-TTIII'R4-cS4 SF-H1SSI-ASS 38Q2-2 BF-TTl9J2-AA5
'" '" "'"

m""
(SlY3-TH IFS4.,.CB4 BF-THSK I-IIBS
e- '"' " (R lY3-TTIIFT4-CB4 Bf-TTl6Bl-AB7 " 2501
2502
'" 8F-17191<2-A85
'" "" "'" 2503
" SF-TTISLl-IIB?
F
- " , . "'''"'
:3 lSI( IV) "
SF-lT1GD1-AA7
" "w " BF-TTL9L2-AB7
F
1--0
]~
2611s05 SF-TTISHI-M7
~ IS2( IV)
lSH2U) -
"" SF-TTI6El-ABS " 2511g06 "" BF-TlISH2-AA7
~ S ISH HIl
tS2l2U)
"" 2S\1~07
" BF-TTI9NI-ABB

-
u
w KS 6 IS2( 111)
lSIl2V)
IS2(2V) =H " I '-- KS BF-TTIGFl-AA5
" 2611903
" BF-TT!9N2-AB6
~
> ,
7 251( lU)
IS1(211) " " 5311l-1
"'"
SF-TTlSOt--MS

'""
I 2S2( lU) Bf-TT1GG1-AS" 53(,)3-1 BF-TT19D2-AA6

"'"
,,~

, 2SHIV)
IS2(211)
2SH2U)
63Ql-2
" BF-TTI9Rl-AB4
,,~ W 2S2( IV)
I, 2S2(2U) " '" 53Q3-2
'"
BF-TTI9R2-AB4

G
" 2SHIII)
"z; "
6301-3
""
Bf-TTI9S1-AA4
G

" 11= 2S2( III)
"w~
2SH2V)
2S2(2V)
"
""
63113-3

"" "
BF-TTI952-AM
SF-niall-AM

i~ " ISH IN) BF-TTlBK1-AM BF-TTl9T2-AAl


I " 1S2{ HI)
25\(21/)
" " '" ""
"
- (RESERVE) BF-TTl9Ul-ABl
252(2\1) -
" ""
,,~ '~ w
- " ISH31l) z Bl'-TTI6Jl-AAI -....:. (RESERVE)
" BF-TTI9U2-ABl
I--
" • IS2(3U) <
~ ::::~; =11~: ! {R)BF-TII4BP1-AE8
" (RESERVE)
" B-Tl19Vl-CB5

'" --1 " •


" •
lSl(:3V)
IS2(3V)

(sPARE{~
BF-TTI6Kl-ABl
"
"
(RESERVE)

,."
"
B-TT1SV2-CB5

H
~
u
w
~ ,,~
"
"
" •
"
IS\(3II)
152(311)
2BI(3U)
2S2(SU) I "
NORMAL SUPPLY [ § (Y)Y3-THIN"Al-l:Al

~:;~:=~~::::~=~::
RTO FOR
HV WINDING
t <0

"
"
""
'"'"
'"
ALARM SIGNAL

TRIP SIGNAL
~
""
" 8F-TT20Bl-ABS
BF-TT20B2-ABB
BF-TT2(lDl-AA8
BF-TT2002-AAB
H

z; I~ 2BUSV) AC 400V 50HZ, : RTO FOR " " !-- 8F-TH9'Jl-AEl


,,~ 1 " " ""
- "
"
"
2S2(3V)
2S1(SII)
252(SII)
3PHASE 4WIRES
EMERGENCY SUPPLY[
AC 400V 50Hz
I
.
36
~
3Il
§ (WlY3-TTlll«A4-CAl

(YlY3-TT11E..Al-i:,,2
(G)Y3-TTllEol.J\2-CJ."
OIL

(R)B-TIlol.Sf'--<:A6 -
""
'"
"
(+)-1..
(-) .1...
]OCSUPPLY
OLTC PROTECTIVE RELAY

""
BF-TTl9W2-AEI

§"[ I I~
S9 (R)Y3-TTllEol.A9-CJ.2 (G IB-TTI4BN-eAS
"" 3PH~,SE 4VIRES 40 III)Y3-TTllE4A4-l:A2 " 220V DC
""
J
" J

,
eZI
EARTHINB BUS

- -

WIRING CODE DETAILS ~-I- -1'1 5 15 1 II I I I I I j I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I 11'1 II I I


fH:l't HITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION mu WIRING DIAGRAM OF l
tt ~ II!l ~ -& -E3:.Jl 1)<:- a II.Bel;k\ 'J"'H> COOLER CONTROL CABINET 3/3
1. IlIII.IM I1Ul'!""""" :-: ~ FOR TIE TRANSFoRMER

-~SK60363
, ,
I 2 I 3 I
I I
5 I 6 I 7 8 I

"
s I
ID I I 12 13 14 15 16
1 I 2 , , I
, I 6 I 7 I , 9 I 10 11 12 19 I 14 15 16

AM
'LP02-IITj'
A TPl

11111 II
-
<;;
!
~ :i!: 5'
~ ~ ~ ~
~ :: :: ::
~
. 0:9
~


- ,t, .t. J, ,;,
! ~
, B

ABl AB2 AB3 AB4 ABS AB6 AS7


)
• M-LEo-S' • !'I_LEO_S" • !'I-LED-S' • !'I-LEO-B" • !'I-LEO-B" • H-LED-S' °K-LEo-S"
1I
- " " L5
" " L2

c
'-' ' -' ') '-' ' -' ') '-""-"W) '-"'H'W) .-""-",,
'-' ' -' ' ) '-""_ ... ~
1/ (6)B~12BNI-ACB
{G1B-12BN1-DAl 1/

-
ACl
• TFU-23T'
AC2
• TFU-23T" ,
AC3
TFU~23T'
AC4
• TFU-23T"
ACS
• TFU-23T"
AC6
• TFU-23T"
AC7
• TFU-23T"
AC8
• TFU-23T'
DC220V pezzov OC22DV pe2ZDV DCnDY peZ20\, pe2zav pezzov
30F8 30F7 3DF3 30F6 3DFS 30F2 311Fl 30F4
o
I
EH6Ll~AG1---!::. -0'" l ~ 8 16L2. A61 ~ro' .. .!I l!,~.1J l!,,~, ,• .1J l!.~, ,o~
04 llD o. !l:0
~~N",
O.
00;;
so
50
04
OS
90
50
o.
06
30
so
0 ..
05
90
50
~'-- a-l6Jl-Xl
OS 50
(GJ8-12BNI-foH?----j ~o-j--- B.-16Kl-Xl . [j...oe· 1 a-HiEl-XI 7 0 - - B-16Hl-XI n.oe 70--8-1661-1162
- -OS noOll '701--8-1681-A63
-

ADl AD3 ADS AD7


- "BH" 'BH' "8H' "BH"
m
! .
~ ~ ~
8-1203-...0]'-02 J O<p 8-12D7-AH1/Xl B-12D3-AD:;:r..(l2 1 o.p 1i-12D5-AK3/Xl ll-12D3~AD1,-;:ro2 10<= 11-l2D2-AHll/Xl 8 - 1 2 0 3 - o ' J ) 5 { } 1 (R)B-I2BP\-DAI
O. 30 (H .0 . O. .0 B-aS3-X! • S

F
B-12D3-AE~ "'OS 5 "'F B-120B-AH7/Xl 11-12113~AD5 --06 50.= 11-1204-AH3/Xl B-12DS-AD3--"roe 5 0<= B-l2DI-AHIlIX1 B-l2Bl-XI "5 {R)8-12BPl-A65

- 05 70

~
08 70 08
~
70 B-aB2-Xl e 1 S-14Bl1-AKl

- -
AE4"BW
~
-02 10.1= ll-1201i-AHVXl
G

B-l2D3-ADl ,,1 O~

-0&
08
:I 0
5 0.F= S-12D8-AH3/Xl
70
-
-

·vc
AF4
100~BlJ"
90
J J

i. .'. f-
~ 1
"
" - ;;;~
Q

""
-

2
,
, , 4 5 I 6 7 I 8 I , I 10 I 11 I 12 I
16

I' "
OI~17_1"'"

1 I 2 I I 4 5 I 6 7 I
, 9 10 I 11 12 I 14 I 15 I 16

~:: ~~
6,,:,
E~ ~ ~~ ~

HI +t t
AGS
aD
• NFS3~SW'
2P lOA

!!
"

D
I
~~
~m , ;
"~ ~
,:,.,l,
gm
"t ~
"
~
"+ + H
" i'

F
- 1--"

1
H H

" AJ 1 ~,J2

J
9 Tn
°TP_a' x2
TOT
-rC-B" x2

- -
18, l: l': NIJ"" .. D'" ID~ •. s.tL,"j ... "" to" 1• .I•.I.. ...,.I""'.DU"f.
,
•",= "'~>,
WIRING CODE DETAILS ~-I- -IT15151 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I i I I 1,1, I I I I 1
,A~-
L
" 1'lIASE!JI 1'lLt.- WlllI:' aullR IRE DlII ml' lIlfIE SUE IDlE
~r2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 'WIRING DIAGRAM OF L
, ~- ~
Cl:UUla:u;;I:lUlIIml'DHD all'
T17U"

•= ~ - /1!l~ $-6 ~~ If Ii£ S.Nesoro,T.Umab.


" w
~ OLTC CONTROL PANEL 2/3
-
u

fl!i ~ • 011<.", I]l.ff ~ H.1an.ko FOR TIE TRANSFORMER


m
~ ~ .0
.- ~ M
ill'0
0
~
~ p
~ "J~ !;:ef.t
=-
~
K. Atogj
z
1 I 2 I 3
, 4 5 I 6 I 7
, , , 9 I LO 11 I 12 I
1
13
APR. 13. 20Cl7
I 14 I

I' 'V
:t: n ,.
i
I
0'
I " ! m 101 J I '" !
~
NOO-37-L67324-00
'07. 4.23
~ h,,,NGE

DAl
+

FG
fR}B-17P48-AM/XI

(G)8-17N48-AA4/AGS

G/yFs-E-DZl
--
C\J

0
<..0'-
DC/DC CONV
• P30-48N" ...J
AC(N) (RlB-128PI-A07/Xl
en
AC(L) (Gl8-12BNI-A81/AG4 I", o·
~z
-

'" Xl '"
• lX-5. 5· )l9ap
I I
2
- 3
4
..., r-
B-13811-AHa 5 ~
w
z
8-13B3-AH3/AF4 S ~
~.n.~
B-13B4-AH2/AF4 7
z~w
a-13Dt-AHS- 8 0 0:
<1:. lw
w, qJ] 8-13D2-AHS
8-13D3-AH4
9
10
ro~"

Z
Z "
N'o~
DU~
~~

~"..,= ~L
B-lsOt-AHB II ~
~
8-1502-AH6 12 0

-1 "
• "H

13
14
f--
_1!J H IS
- z 16

~,llllllr ~
17
~
18

~ ffl~m~iii
19
m 20
i~~~F!;g g tn
21
9 lIIel~93? F!
-=I ~I~~~ ~ ~ ~
~

~
8-1281-1107 22

iliil;;
8-120 I-ADS 23
8-1202-AOs 24
m 8-1204-A03 25
~ B-1205-A03 26
~ 8-1206-AOI 27
8-1207-AOI 28 In

In I L' 'OIl';'
:':"; !! ~
B-12D8-AE4
8-12D9-AE4
29
30
---'"I~
" "a( 8-1481-AH1
31
32 '"~
'.I m B-1482-A07 33 I--
--j [[IT} 6-1483-A07 34
B-14B4-AHI 35
B-1485-AHI0 36
... n 2'! 3! 8-1486-AHII 37
~'~F~"~
'" r<l8"'2~p;
~
B-14B7-AHlt
B-14BB-AHlO
38
39 '"
o:~~ ... ~~~~ B-14B9-AHlO 40
8-148 I a-AHa 41
~·E~~FI"C ;;
!='g!~m~i~ffi ~ B-14811-AH8 42

- 2 F! (;) 43 I--
~"'<D"'~ ~ ~ 8~1880-AG6 44

r
.....'!l--'-'" ~ ~ 8-t881~AGlO 45
g~
~~E~ i1il B-18B2-AG9 46
~~ ~ 1:5 ~ inS

"
; ,~ ; 2 C r
8-18B3-AGB
8-1884-AG7
47
48
~8
O-ro
~~
~
I"
B-1885-AG6 49
Y' ... t" ~ iiii l/)
'" '" "' ... III 50
-- iii
~ w; ~ ~
51
(R)8-17P48-0AtlAGB 52
~
,
B-nSl-AGIO
B-1182-AG9
B-17B3-AG8
8-1784-AG7
53
54
55
56 ~
Q'
I
~
'~
»
8-1785-AG6 57
0
(D ~w ¥: 8-13Et-AH4 58 ~
0
10>
8-13E2-AH5 59 ~
0
~
a-19E3-AH4 60
8-ISD3-AH7 61 :e
~

~
(R1B-12BPI-DAI 62
8-13GI-AG3 63
B-13HI-AHI 64
8-1601-AC6 65
B-t6EI-AC3 66
67 (RESERVE)
B-16JI-AC2 68 (RESERVE)
69 ( RESERVE) "'
B-16KI-ACI 70 (RESERVE)
(RIB-12BI"I-AH8 7i }
B-ISHI-AC4 72

73 COOLER CONTROL CABINET I-


7<
K5-IlCI-AJ2~ 75 I
K5-ll C2-AJ2 76
G/YFS-E-DZI 77

8-ISLI-AGI
B-ISL2-AGI
=i 78
79
80
I }REMDTE CONTROL ALARM INDICATION
o

81
82
(RlB-12BP-AGS ~ 83 ~ (f.) - } DC SUPPLY I-
{Gl8-t28N-AG5 84 (_) __ 220V OC
85

RF5-11PI-AJI
RfS-l1 P3-AJ I
=i 86
87
88
I }PT IIOV AC

89
'"
E
~
"
90

;• oZ 1
EARTH BUS
GIYFS-'-Xl
G/YF5-E-AF4 C G/YF5-E-DA I
~

I I
" T m l o T n T 0> --r ,.
0'
T
1 I 2 I 3 I
6 I
? I
8 I
9 I
10 I 11 12 , 13
I
14 I 15 I
16
6L.G61!1S f~~1 TABLE 1 : WIRE OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

EIlIIMNT WIRE SIZE NlM3f1l


TERMINAL WIRK WIRE alLOR
OF CABLE allOR
A
W HV BCT [Ii HVN. BeT [) MV BCT OlJLING FAN KJlOO
FR-I-F!t-.(
Ri-l-FS-'(
BLACK """
YELUlW
OlE,"
A
/~-,-,--------------'''-'''''-----------~, OUTE
/~--=N-""'-"'"--" /~-2W-----------"'-=-----------~,
8-1-8-.(
IV lU 2V 2U REO

1..1~S~1<~N~1+fl\-<>',+, '6111 BLACKI


lUll/iA
5P20 '< >
lSHIWI/l'- 201l/lA
5P20 '<I>
lSIUVl / } ' 2Bll/l,6,
5P20 '<p.
1
151 nUl ""1' ..t1l1l/iA
5P20 '<>
400/lA
ClASS O. 5 < ' -
151 tZi/1 0 4011/1A
ClASS o. 5 <
1> 151 12VJ "1" 401l/1A
ClASS O. 5 < >
151 (2U1 0 2602 BLACK'
2603 BlACK'
SOVA lS211WI 2 aOVA <: tS211Vl 2. aOVA <: lS211Ul 2. aOVA <:: 152 tNI SOVA ' <: r lS2 t2'i/1 2 SOVA < 152 t2Vl 2 30YA' < 152 (2U1 2
I"i1 DIAl.. TYPE [ilL 2604 BLACK<
200/1A 2S111WI 3 21l0/1A 2S111V) 3 201l/1A 2S1 UUl 3 40D/lA 2S112W) 3 401l/1A 251 {2.VI 3 400/1A 251 (lUI 3 L!J TEllPERATURE INDICAlOO 2605 BlACKS REO
B 5f'20 '<: > 5P20 . <: > 5f'211 '<k- 5P20 <I- 5P2O . <> 5P20 <> 2606 BlACKIl B
aOVA <: 2S2111l') ~ aOVA <: 2S2UVI ~ snVA <r ZS21lUI .4 SilVA <: r 25212'1).4 30VA < 25212V).( 3!lVA < 252 t2Ul .( 2110'1 BlACIO REO
'---' "-.-/ 2608 BlACKB
26.gDl BlACKl REO
2liwg02 BlACK2
-,: is lI~~£GTI!lJ lmom ~ 26.g03 BlACKS REO
u Tim n~s~ T §F fllE F :m
rn TV BCl 2611gD4

~~~3Si'~lliVlf~'~~~~Tl!8'f
DIAL TYPE WINDING BlACK'
/~---,--------_'-!.'-""-------------~, TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 2. OSC!+! x BCORES
BCT FOR WINOING« SS211V) 6 [£) 26w905 8LACK5 REO
c TEMP. INDICATOR < 3S311V) '1 ~ "It 3V au 26w906 BLACK6 c
176/5.. 5-5. 0 < aSWVl a,
~~~~lA ..1'_"15,,,1~131l~ltr0-o'I-n ~ 26wg07 BLAOO
-4. 5-4, D-S, 2A < 3S5l1Vl
aslillVI
"
30VA '> 15213'/1) 2
150!1A
5P20 . <!--
lSI 13V)

30VA < ~ 1S2 f3V) 6


15D/IA
~~~~ < f>.
lSI Ism
15213m 10 ....,,
26'908 BLACKB
BLACK REO

1 ISO/lA
5P20 '<>
251 f3YIJ 3 15!l/lA
5P2O '<I-
2S1 (3Vl

3!lVA < r- ZS213V!


7 150/1A
SP20 . <f>.
251 fal/l 11
RESISTA/fCf ElB£NT FOIl
ROOlE WINDING TEIf'ERATURE
..,
96-1
IWHITE

BlACK1 REO
aOVA < 252 (3YIJ .( 8 30VA < 252 tam 12
96-01 BlACK2
BlK:HHOLZ RRAY
9&-02 REO
o 91H
BlAC"
BlACK4
o
3S01-1 BlACK REO
330H l'Ii1IllE
3SIU..,2 BlACK REO
AUXILIARY C. T.
III IllY)
----0"
m DIAL TYPE
OIL LEVEL GAUGE
l!l DIAL TYPE
OIL LEVEL GAUGE BUCHHOLZ RELAY
3SC2-2
63CH, 63CH. 6301-3
WHITE
BlACK
-
~ II 1ll-2UVl
[TfIANSFORMER) IT AP CHANGERl 63CS 1. 63QS-2. 63CH OlITE
9601 BLACK REO

.t
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE 2. (JSQt+t x 2CORES
E Nu.l Nn.2 9602 OlITE E
cL~-j;::~':::::= I'~j 0-2 11V) ~ ~ 5Vl BlACK REO
,

~I ~ ~
WHITE
CO:ACT SIDING SETIING 1S111UJ, lSI11V),lSl flWl BLACK
RANGE USE
HVB.C.T 152t1UL 152 flV), 152 (lWJ WHITE
No.1 55' C COOLER CONTROL 6. OSlltl x 6CORES
251 l1UI , 251 flV), 251 IIII'I REO
Na·2 55' C SPARE
ND.S gO'C 0-160' C AlAR, 2S211Ul. 2S2 flV), 2S2 [lWI GREEN
ND.4 100' C TRIP 151lN) BlACK
ITHIS SHOV!S CONTACT CLOSED I
CONTACT FUNCTION SETTING USE 00 HVN B. C. T
1521N1 WHITE
F IAT THE LOW OIL LEVEL I
No. F
- Nn.l GAS ACCUMULATION
DIL FLOW
450tm!
5Dtli/S
AlAR"
TRIP HVac.T
6. OSQlo'H x 6CORE5
15112l/l. lSi [2V1, 151 t2V/1
IS2 f2l/l, 1S212V1, IS2 (2'/1)
BlACK
WHITE
-!>

251 f2U), WiI2V1. 251 (2\'1) REO


252 f2U), 25212VI. 2S212l¥1 GREEN
PROTECTIVE RELAY PROTECTIVE RELAY PROTECTIVE RELAY PRESSURE CONSERVATOR SHUTTEWR VAlVE lSI tau), 2S1 [3Ul BLACK -

G
:Iala>11 ~s ..
c c
HAP CHANGER}
VtAl PHASE
nAP CHANGERl
l!/fBl PHASE
tTAP CHANGER)
UtCI PHASE
RELIEF DEVICE
SIDING: 12P51
FOR MAJOR DIL LEAK FIlOM THE TANK
UJ TVs.c.r 6. llSQ!tl x6CORES
152 13UL 2S2 13Ul
1Sl13Vl. 25113V1
lS213VL 252 f3V)
WHITE

GREEN
G
I

n n
lS113Wl. 2Sll3Y!1 YELUlW
RESISTANCE ElEMENT FOR DIAL TYPE WINDING ", 1521S'fI). 252 (3\'/)
HH I1VJ """
BLACK
REMOTE WINDING TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 'CT 6. OSllltl x SCORES
IPT-100o. AT O' Cl o ,~ _ ~
fllJ! WINDIN3 TEMP. INDICATOR 0-H1V) WHITE
- CONTACT SETTING
SETIING RANGE USE ~ ~ ~ ~ llVERPRESSJIlE SWITCH X1-S2. XI-9s, Xl-94 BlACK REO
Nll. [K] OF OIL FILTER UNIT 2. oSlHl x 2CORES
Xl-lOll. Xl-9B. n-96 WHlTE
65' C
Nn.l
No. 2. 7S'C
COOLER CONTROL
0-160'C SPARE
rnA THEfM}STAT
Of OIL FILTER lINlT 2, OSCMI x 2CORES
Xl 101. X1-99. Xl-97 BlACK REO
l1S'C ALAIl' YlIRINB SHOWS AT OPEN POSITION
XH04. Xl-lOs, Xl-l02 WHITE
H 120' C TRIP IOF CONSERVATOR SHUTTER VALVE ,,"P.
[I OF OIL FILTER tmlT a. 55CIItI x 3CORES U1-1. Ui-2, l/l-S BlACK YELLOW H
H.Vl-2, VH WHITE GREEN
11'1-1.'111-2,'111-3 REO REO
COOLING FAN MOTOR ell REO
BLACK
- /--------------~, ~~ _ _-~_~~=0'-"01"L-'F.oIl"T"ER'-U"N""1T'-F"0,,R
."OL"T,,'~~~ _ _~~~_ [!] RESISTANCE EL8£tlT FOIl
RoolE [ilL Tel'ERATlIlE S, 55lH1 x SCORES WHITE
/ FOR OLTC FOR OLTC FOR OLTe "'" RED
VfAl WIB) UlC)
FM M FM @11

m ~~~~
No.1 No.2 NO.3
'-. 1. AiMIUIlED CABLES WITH BlACK PVC JACKET ARE U5ED FtlR WIRE OF TABLE 1.

, , ,
~

~~~
~ ~

000
"-~"C m~ ~-
?5,..'" ~~ ~~
"-~~ >30 ::: I£] ~§T'~lE~'~.~STEJ~,~,~rr~I~'~'~'E;~f;';'~'~'~'~'~~'~'~~~~
m 1I1Elflig
~tt
~
BE sml::'lf:!l
WElt flUtE ~ l§I~
:bl::gll~IIlg
HSl!' TI!Sf nr lJl JIIlFnlll"D
TGr
n Il€S S g. 'T!I F9i WilE

-
,,,-;'u ~1 rTo2 s, DETAIL OF '/lIRE END.

Rl~ TOOlE TERMI!IAL


,-~~;;c;-;;=-;;-;~c;-;;;:;;-----I­
SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET H~H
[IJ RESISTANCE ELEMENT FOR ELECTRICITY OF VIET HAM
REMOTE OIL TEMPERATURE COVEREIl WITH VINYL llJl!E VIN'il. TUBE WITH TERMINAl. IWlK HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT No·!i

~
lPT-loDO AT D° CI BUOH KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT J
J
,++-H-+-H----b--i-H-++--i-~-- - l L --;;;:-;2:'"~T'f;N.~.~'~T:o--:o-----j
iXl· 81 82 83 S2 100 101104 8~ 85 86 93 S8 93 103 81 liB 89 S~ 96 97 102 i I SUlitau CDIPDralion

i
L. • _ _• om MOTOR DRIVE ~ __' I MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC

AUX, CIRCUIT DIAGRAM


FOR TIE TRANSFORMER

I , I I I I I I I
""SY19279 C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 , 7 8 9
. ! ! ! ! !
-
GLOTGbO ·~~~I
12HOLES-240IA, NAME PLATE
A PC.490 A
I TEST TAPPING

J )~--='--j "''- '- J


/-~,J:.:~''- / ~'-------------:Jr- r--7 250
-
/' \.J
-++,~~:::- "1 ,\ ,0,,,-- t -~~~+-
! ','.''"''''''
M42X2THD

'"
r-

---r-r
eo eo eo en
<i", l-
tt
en
O?
~
~
en
~
--g:] I- i-
~
i- ---- f-;;; ---
~

f9l!9~ ~ ~
B
>-0
\,
~!
I
! /
I 9-
' - 25
~ \
____
f----_________
----- • --
I--
"i[ -'" B
'-':-d,. I_Jv_/ ' 1-. -------------- :::::::,r_ '--:'
i>-- 117 80
- 22 r-
~ ~
UPPER TERMl NAL 384 22G8 130 820
[SILVER PLATED)
2782 1635 175
C c
4417

~
-
:~] I>

STANDARD : IEC-60I37
~~ -

0 MANUFACTURER : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


: OT
!

4HOLES-M12TAP o
TYPE PC.95
RATED VOLTAGE : 3DD,V
CURRENT : 630A SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
LIGHTNING IMPULSE ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
-
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE : 1050,V HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO,5 f-
BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
LOT Nn.27
CREEPAGE DISTANCE : 6600mm
PORCELAIN COLOR : BROWN Sumitomo Corporation

E MASS : 520"
J... MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Ci:m
CORRESPONDING SECTION 6020
PROJECT FILE NO, BK-6020-31S
F R, 2
0
0
NO. OF R. DATE OWG. SEC. SYM. K. S. PRINT OUP.DIST.
!
W~
SKIP CUP- pl3 01 13 I C 1I
' " C'C
20M MITSUBISII ELECTRIC CORPORATION TITLE
<t 0-
F • M l -$--E3 3RD ANGLE if g I
I
u-'
CD
lit II 1t
R, K",t. HV LINE BUSHING OUTLINE
.
! ' PROJECTION DRAWN

'" ~
M
DIM. IN I. • J!
CHECKED F. Hi Lsu i FOR TI E TRANSFORMER
"
S'R 2 I 0 7 2
!
0
~CALf NTS DESIGNED M.Ueda
'" 0
Z
It II
-DATE 1006-10-13 APPROVED ~ ].kenm
DWG
1 2-
.
3 4
'If
1
'O~ I
2 3
. 4 !
5 !
S
. !
1 !
8 ! . 9
SLOTc;u3 'ElMO

A A

~
SHOLES-150IA.
PC ¢ 200
J 6HOLES-140IA.
I
-
//f-',,- / (--- ~7 4HOLES-140IA.
t-

--r
r
.I
~(-$1~--~~~~" ItH ~ ~ ~r-
r--r---

~--
o - y y
B ::: --- 23 -- f--- t-~ ---
! "'"
-I-~ --~
0
._-~-- - ----
___c_
B
~ ~ ! ~ ~
+ +

'-
,
!
.--,/
, ----
\. --- --
~1.r-
'--- -
-'--'--- --'-
- '. • 25 40 40 40 20 i--

20 15 B5
135 4B 2B2 65 IBO 220
C
530 400

930
<I
- f- I>

0 STANDARD : IEC-60137
MANUFACTURER : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
TYPE : PO
RATED VOLTAGE : 24kV SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
CURRENT : 3150A ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
- LIGHTNING IMPULSE HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5 -
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE : 125kV BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
LOT No.27
CREEPAGE DISTANCE : 572.' Sumitomo Corporation

E PORCELAIN COLOR
MASS
:
:
BROWN
29 kg J... MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Ci~
CORRESPONDING SECTION 6020
PROJECT FILE NO. BK-6D2D-316
F R. 2
= NO. OF R. DATE DWG. SEC. 8YM- K. S. PRINT DUP. DIST.
=!
I 3 I cI I I

..
w~
SKIP DUP- F 310
to ' " nTLE
z 0-
« '" MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
F ' " '-0
u ---'
!
• m~ ~ -$--E3 3RD ANGLE il' g
' PROJECTION DRAWN R. Kamal a HV &MV NEUTRAL BUSHING OUTLINE f
'"
..,~ DIM. IN II m ~
CHECKED F. HI I 50 I FOR TIE TRANSFORMER
S'R2 1 0 7 a
=
!
"SCALE~ 1:5 ~ "
DESIGNED H. U, d.
'" :z:
0
THllOH! ~~M 2006-10-13 ItAPPROVED S
S. TaI,nm
OWG
- .
v
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

vLO T GbO, I·!·O~I


'9MO
- [ [
, [ [ [

t
A A

- 4HOLES-M12TAP
12HOLES-1901A. PCt?5
I NAME PLATE
TEST TAPPING
PCt 350
1 M30X2THO

~
~-<n-f::)i:
'/~-----i7
8 2HOLES-14DIA -.., I ________________ - B
, I \ \~ J '''
---t~ -$- ~1--- ~I : ~ - j- --------------- - ~ -~
= =
~ ----- -~
=
--t-1 - ----
~

--~ ---

- \
K,....
I
IiW.-.:'
2 5 'I _c________________ ___.i-
' \ -I \ ________________ _
-
~ ~ ~

..Ji'5
~

70 220
, 15 -'-'"
~111-"'" 16
-
" UPPER TERMINAL
303 1008 130 420
c
{SILVER PLATED} iZ
1441 835 155
- -
~ t>
117 2276

STANDARD : IEC-6013?
J MANUFACTURER : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION o
TYPE : OT
RATED VOLTAGE : 123kV SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
CURRENT : 63DA ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
- LIGHTNING IMPULSE HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5 -
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE : 55DkV BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
LOT No. 27
CREEPAGE DISTANCE : 3460mm Sumitnmc Corporation
---
PORCELAI NCOLOR
MASS
: BROWN
: 14Dkg J... MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC ~::m
CORRESPONDING SECTION 6020
PROJECT FILE NO. BK-6020-317
F R. 2
<:> NO.OF R. DATE DWG. SEC. sm K. S. PRINT DUP.DIST.
,
<:>
1 3 I CI I I

. ..
W~ O U f l - F 3 01
SKIP
'"z ""
«
'" MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION TITlE
--
0-
~ -$--8 3RD
MV LINE BUSHING OUTLINE I

··"'
,
' " CD
u -' ~ ~ ANGLE i!' g R. KaRal'
PROJECTION DRAWN
"",
..,~ DIM. IN III CHECKED f. Hils" I FOR TIE TRANSFORMER
S·R2 1 0 7 4
= ~CALf 1:10 ~ H.U'i.
DESIGNED
"" a:z =~ 1006-10-13 S. Takmga
DWG·
•APPROVED
I
n n
1 2 3 4
'V
1 2 3 4 5 6 ./
, e , ~

SL.OT~bO, I.!'E'oN
lMo
I I I
-
A A

- I
1
/--<'r~'
/
4HOLES-140IA.

(------ ---~7 r-'


4
I

2HOLES-140IA.
B
f@~
--+i:- -t - --}+--- ___0] of -~ 't_ ~
-<tr -¢- • en """'"
------- -----
+------ ~ -----~- --1- W/
-
. . 0 0-- ~l+- -~-,~. 3--
~._.~ --,"CD
~
~
B

------ ----~~h\
- ""'- I
®..
- _ /'
)lJ;
\ ------ ------ '---, 40 20
~~
6HOLES-1501A.
~'II 15 15 BO

C PC. 180 95 48 3B2 60 180 200 c


5B5 3BO

d
- 965 [:>

STANDARD : IEC-SOI3?
MANUFACTURER : MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
0 TYPE :po
RATED VOLTAGE : 24KV
CURRENT : 1600A SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
LIGHTNING IMPULSE ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
- WITHSTAND VOLTAGE : 125KV HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5 -
BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
CREEPAGE DISTANCE : 932mm LOT No.27
PORCELAIN COLOR : BROWN Sumitomo Corporation
E
MASS : 21K'
J.. MITSUBISHI
ELECTR.I C ~~
CORRESPONOING SECTION 6020
PROJECT FILE NO. BK-6020-316
F R. 2
=
=, NO. OF R. DATE DWG. SEC. SYM. K. S. PRINT OUP. DIST.

..
W~
5KIP DUP- FI3 01 1 3 I CI II
e!) ' "
z ""
« <:-- MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION TITLE
== ~ -$-a 3RO f
c
u-' , • m~ ANGLE if g
: PROJECTION R. Kallata
DRAWN TV BUSHING OUTLINE
'" ""
~, DIM. IN alii D ;,
CHECKED LHit,"i FOR TIE TRANSFORMER
= ~ II:
SeA,'E 1'1 II ~
OESI6NEO H. U, da
'" :z:
0
IHH2I-U
fI'll8N
oAT" 1006-10-13 ~ S
APPROVED S, hkenm OWGS· R2 10 7 6
- -
1 2 3 4
'V
2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9 I 10 I 11
'ON
9S0T6MS 'ElMO WITH COVERPLATE WITHOUT COVER PLATE PLAN VIEW
SWINGFRAME CLOSED SWINGFRAME OPEN I I I
SWINGFRAME INSIDE EI 66A 66B SBA ~BB If 0 I 0 ~
e ~~!
A• 6.7 I A
~l~
X3
b c::Y ......
S27A,~~
S2SA-l' a n F
~m::::j:~~~:~~A~S1S
x"
- "
//,~ 'i=====1====='.I"k'iP
/'"''
0

I
0
SIDE VIEW
I--
/ '
/ / approx. 690 if ,opened 130·
I 345
5WINGFRAME ~Q) SI3B
,-_-!
,// /
6 I4 6116 560
K9 KI \ \') 154
K? ~B hdl~2~2D ~;:::::==_====~ ' /'
/ 330 310 --,I,- ; 13, 5 280
510 DI FIS FI6 Fl? 532 53 .25
B j j
FL--.r==!--_tt"t1 X2D ,/ / ' B
:l[Jllllllml: I31HIUIIIIUI lI?lll>I~1 S40M- ,/ / ' Hand 191.5 191.5

D4 DS D6 530 F"":l.--I--+-tt:j:f-X I ~/
JlL
In m I: SSIM-
L-l-!-'--tt"t1 X40
...
co
,
-
\
N
o I, I--
K3? K29 ~
==L..J--J.--ti1t- XSI
II: ~------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:J m't' -l:-4=~._------+-------' ..
I,
I I
C :1
I
I
I
I I C

~
X2
I
I
I
I
I
I o i,
I
II e I
II I
I
I
~----
-I-- -------------~
I
I
co
i,
-- co N
I,
en
'"
+-
~
N
RI
~---~~---------~-------
~

INTERNAL ARRANGEMENT ~
I,
o OEVICE NO. I, o
EI I,
FI5t FI6. Fl? AUTOMATIC CUT OUT
K1. K2 MOTOR CONTACTOR I,
K?, KB, K9
I,
-
K20. K43
K29
AUXILIARY CONTACTOR
TIMING RELAY
=I ~ I, - t>
K3? COUPLING RELAY FOR AUTOMATIC 1\
MI
PASSAGE OF POSITIONS
MOTOR o i
I
01. 04, OS, OS MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH
RI HEATER
S1. S2 CAM-OPERATED SWITCH 566
E 510 ODOR CONTACT ARRANGEMENT OF FIXING HOLES E
512,514 CAM OPERATED DIRECTIONAL SWITCH 425 ON PROTECTIVE HOUSING
SI3A. SI3B
SIS. Sl1S CAM-OPERATED NON-DIRECTIONAL SWITCH 80 224 80 IVIEWEO FROM BEHINO)
S2SA. S2?A END POSITION SIGNALLING SWITCH I
S3 RAISE/LOWER CONTROL SWITCH
S30 TEST SWITCH FOR OIL FILTER UNIT -
S32 LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH
S3? SWITCH FOR AUTOMATIC PASSAGE
S4. S5
OF POSiTIONS
END POSITION SWITCH ~l. CECJ MANUFACTURER MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN
IMR Germany}
F
840M POSITION TRANSMITTER MODULE WITH
N/D CONTACT RANGE
( >!
TYPE OF MOTOR DRIVE EDI00L F
S40P POSITION TRANSMITTER BOARD
SSIM MODULE WITH DIODE MATRIX 12 174
SSIP POSITION TRANSMITTER BOARD
SSA.SSB END POSITION SWITCH 198 198 MiO
SBA.SBB HAND CRANK SAFETY SWITCH SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF VIET NAM
XI TERMINAL ELECTRICITY OF VIET NAM
X2. X3. X20
APERTURE IN PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR CABLES HYDROPOWER PROJECT MANAGEMENT UNIT NO.5 r-
X40. XSI {VIEWEO FROM BELOWI BUON KUOP HYDROPOWER PROJECT
LOT Nn.27
Sumltomo Corporation

G MITSUBISHI G
NOW ELECTRIC
PLEASE REFER TO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SZ70049 CORRESPONOING SECTION 6020
PROJECT FILE NO. BK-S020-320
-
~'=~'~~j'F~R:.~0=A=TE=!~01"~'r5E~'·rl~~TYM~·W::;Jjttt:W::::t=tttt:d::::tj:tj-;K.¥;S·tP~R~lNtO~U::P.~DI~S~T~-
oUP- F 4101 25 EID 1 DOL
w
I. SK1P TITLE
12 I EI I
C!J
= MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
«~
- ::c ~
-$-E3 3RC ANGLE
PROJECTION DRAWN Il.hnsbin ASSEMBLY DRAWING OF OLTC
H u~ H
';: DIM. INN II CHECKED ~Okani,bi MOTOR DRIVE CABINET
~
~

a
, SCALE 1: IO DESIGNED ItKinsllin

'" 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6
DATE HAY. 10. 2001 APPROVED Y.Hih",
, 4 6 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
'0
C:WOC:/IS 0.0 IFRONT SIDE!

A 107 X3 A
47
x

J.H
B B
74 X2
=
C)

65 X2

"
C
"._!---1="----1 77 X3

C

ITE/ol 28-33
VOll FillER Ul\lT
,-------------,
i i
o 'Xl-S2 IRI i o
I '- ~:=~~B i
II I Xl-sa i
65 75
37 24
ii ~: =:~ i
X2 X2
iI
I

t.1-!
201 Xl-IOI II J
72 X3
'.H 40 40 l ~~=~:4 t' i
'.H 27 I Xl -103 ): i
E 200 43 H 8-2 1 ~ --H i
~~~~~ffi~~
XI-97
37
1..0-2 16 E
I~
UE
~
,

r:-----------------------.J
R R ,

" OS
i INOTE I ITEM
llO)q__ --r- - J
i
i
37 2.»-8
BASE LI NE OF FOUNOATION @- 19 i I. ITEM LIST SW36389 ITEM 20n./! """-ITEM Ull
----+---- - @- 33 J
2. MINIMUM RADIUS OF ARMORED CABLES:I50mm
!
F
i L--T---------.J
42 Xgi
3· SILICONE SEALANT(ITEM@)SHALL BE FILLED
F
INTO CUTTED SURFACE OF ARMORED CABLE
! i I." AT BOTH END ACCORDING TO OWG. ND.S301439 •
4. CABLE WIRING ARRANGEMENT MAY BE CHANGED
FROM THIS DRAWING FOR EASY CONNECTION
WORK AT SITE. IF REQUIRED.
5. WIND THE PDLYRDN TAPE ITEM8.@RDUND THE CABLES
OVER THREE TIMES, (SEE RIGHT DRAWINGS, ALL OF SUPPORT G
POSITION WITH ARMORED CABLE( AND TIGHT UP THE SCREW OF
ITEM @ -@BAND

X2
/--r.. "'
fI i I\'
0 '\ .....1.-.
, . ./ ' ' lU 53
~ 00
00
00
00
00 i
--- - - --1UI--F=I-7':F1l-
58 76
01.9_.2 \£..=£. 75 IL
,"
000
OOo!
" ,,
OQ.d J

U leI \II IB) VIA)


Ii. 0-6 1

2.0-9

WIRING SKETCH·
Pia. NO.

SV20072 A
2 3 5 6 7 B 9 10
OIL TEMP. -
OIL LEVEL CURVE

C'J
co
m 10
c---
CO 9 1/ }R
~
CD 8
I
~
/
w..J
'-'"
HIGH LEVEL OF OIL /
= "- -
7 POURING OIL LEVEL
r.:
- ..-
<C l.-

,- ~ I------ -2
UJ - '-'" L.---
-'
AT INSTALLATION -/
0 - 6

---- -
w..J

L)
~
u
>-
w..J
-' L..-
l-- ty K L..-
/ /'
V TC
5
-
t-
z
a
0-
:
'---
-'
~

= 4
l-- L..- "'-
V/ ./ -
m ...,. ~

,,< ...-<
= / ~
=
= 3
/

~ ~ t-----
~

f-
<C
"-' 2 /
~

=
= / V "~ LOW LEVEL OF OIL
~
1

0
I~V
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

OIL TEMPERATURE { •C }
)!o
-'-

W
(.'J
Z
«
:c
=, --
~l.- u ~

NUJ '"'"
~

W( =,
u
LLI
UJ
I--
~ iii
-=,,
'"'"

~
0
C'J

LL
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
-$---83RO ANGLE fl' Il TI HE
I
ill 1>1 It PROJECTION DRAWN A.Unemi OIL TEMP.
w DIM. IN mm ft\I :i
<i
a.
:=> CHECKED S. Yamana - OIL LEVEL CURVE
0
f'.. It. lit It
u. SCALE NTS DESIGNED A. Unemi
I~ l!rffG 7 9G2
",0

gfT~f1j 200H-7 m
~ci
z *
APPROVED M. Ueda S. Takema
5 . CATALOGUES
5. 1 HV. MV LINE BUSHING TYPE OT A-L6401
5.2 HV &MV NEUTRAL. TV BUSHING TYPE PO A-L7563
5. 3 COOLING FAN TYPE KBW3-54 IB-67106
5.4 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER TYPE MS- I BA65/03en
5.5 MOTOR DRIVE UNIT TYPE ED-L BA138/04en
5.6 OIL FILTER UNIT FOR OLTC TYPE OF100 BA18/06en
5. 7 PROTECTIVE RELAY FOR OLTC TYPE RS-2001 BA059/07en
5.8 CONSERVATOR RUBBER BAG TYP IB-00038
5.9 DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER FOR TR TYPE FG12C SDK-E2004
5.10 DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER FOR .TAP CHANGER TYPE FP2A SDK-E2004
5. 11 SELF RESET TYPE PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE TYPE QUALI TROL. XPRD 12PSI STC3545
5. 12 DIAL OIL LEVEL GAUGE TYPE 170 IB-00027
5. 13 BUCHHOLZ RELAY TYPE J-405 IB-00029
5.14 DIAL TYPE WINDING TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TYPE MTH STC5632
5.15 DIAL TYPE OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TYPE MTO STC5632
5. 16 RESISTANCE ELEMENT FOR REMOTE WINDING TEMPERATURE TYPE Pt100Q atO°c STC5608
5.17 RESISTANCE ELEMENT FOR REMOTE OIL TEMPERATURE TYPE Pt100Q atO°c S403005
5.18 RADIATOR VALVE TYPE BM-80 STC3333
5. 19 GLOVE VALVE STC5953
5.20 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER SDK-N8378
5.21 THERMAL-MAGNETIC MOTOR CIRCUIT BREAKER SDK-N8469
5.22 MOTOR STARTER SDK-D8749-2
5.23 FAULT INDICATOR SDK-M8608
5.24 ROOM THERMOSTAT SDK-N8467

SDT-L.1946
(717 )
FEATURES

1. Outstanding Withstand-Voltage Characteristics


Field-controlling electrodes are arranged optimally in the
interior of the bushing, assuring ideal field distribution
both internally and externally. And since completely
treated oil-impregnated paper is used in the internal insu-
lation, the withstand-voltage characteristics are outstand-
ing.

2, Excellent Thermal Stability


Since the dielectric loss of the insulation paper is extreme-
ly low, and the construction is such that the internal
insulating oil flows through the bushings by convection,
temperature distribution is uniform, cooling efficiency is
excellent even at high voltages and large capacities, and
thermal stability is excellent.

3. No Internal Corona Discharge


The dielectric strength of the oil-impregnated paper is the
most economical among existing insulating materials, and
the bushing design is such that there is no internal corona
discharge even at the rated voltage.

4. Compact, Lightweight Construction


Thanks to the field-controlling electrode, the field distri-
bution is uniform throughout the bushing interior, the
material utilization factor is high, and the adoption of the
center-clamping method assures extremely compact di-
mensions, thereby contributing significantly to reductions
in the size and weight of the equipment in which the
bush ings are appl ied.

5. Easy Inspection and Maintenance


Thanks to perfect-seal construction, there is absolutely no
Fig. 1 Type OT123kV Fig.2 Type OT 300kV deterioration whether in storage or in use. These bush"lngs
630A condenser 1,250Acondenser are inspection- and maintenance-free over their extended
bushing for trans- bushing for trans- service life.
former former
6. Also Usable as Potential Devices
By leading the taps from a suitable field-controlling ter-
Type OT are center-clamping completely sealed minal, these bushings may be used as capacitor-type poten-
tial transformers for measuring abnormal system voltage,
condenser bushings of the oil-impregnated paper
or as a voltage-detection power supply.
type. Standard bushings are available for trans-
formers with a rated primary voltage of 72.5kV 7. Allows the Use of Compact Through-Type CTs
and above. Since the diameter of the lower section hole is small,
Mitsubishi Electric, Japan's oldest manufacturer through-type CTs, when used, can be of the high-preci-
of condenser bushings, has a record of 60 years' sion, compact type.
experience and over 190,000 bushings sold.

• MITSUBISHI
".ELECTRIC
RATINGS

The rated current is taken to be the current with the Bushings rated at 123kV (BIL 550kV) or above can be
lower side in insulating oil at 95°C and the upper side in provided with optional voltage taps on request.
air at 40°C, with the maximum not exceeding 105°C. Bushings can be mounted at any angle up to 30° from
Bushings rated at 123kV (BIL 550kV) or above come the vertical; the oil gauge is of the direct reading type.
equipped with test terminals; those rated at less can be Bushings rated at 123kV (BI L 450kV) or above can be
provided with test terminals as an option. provided with an optional static oil shield.

CONSTRUCTION

Bellows ___ Terminal cap

O-ring
/Ringnut
rn~~~~-contact nut
___---- Upper-spring stopper
------Draw-lead terminal

- Oil gauge

- Expansion chamber
K"'i==,d'------- Inside conductor
~ Coil
\ spring

Lower~spring stopper

Bottom-connection method Draw-lead method

II \
+-+--- Condenser cone
Structure of head part

It-t-+--- Insulating oil


I. ._- _.- Upper porcelain
Standard shed
l
i ~:~-----
~.. ~~
Sealing gasket
and gasket stop
Smog shed

Main flange

I
Bottom porcelain
1 ==
Supporter C:::l::jJt:"5--- O-ri ng

Bottom~connection Draw~lead

I~L:P'Jjl~---Static shield method method


(for transformers above 123kV) Structure of bottom part

Fig. 3 Construction of typical Type OT condenser bushing

2
Flange Insulator Cap
Flexible cable
Coil spring

/ ~
/
/ /
/

/
/ / //j...!'-"7L'::'-~w..:o...*,~"'::"-,,-,,-,,-,,~
/
/ / /
//////.'
.'/// .'//////
//.'.'/////.'

Condenser cone

I
Contact

Fig.4 Cross section of power-factor terminal The power-factor terminal permits measurement of the
static capacity and power factor during regular inspection
of the transformer.
The power factor shows the amount of dielectric loss,
which in turn indicates the general insulating condition.
Measuring the static capacity shows whether or not there
is a weakness in the condenser layer of the bushing.

Flange
Clamper Insulator

Plug
Flexible cable
/

Cover

/
Contact
~
Insulating oil
.~
Condenser cone

The voltage tap is led from the 2nd layer of the ground
Fig. 5 Cross section of voltage tap side of the condenser cone, to allow connection of a
potential device to provide an extremely economical
method of obtaining voltage for voltage measurement or
synchronism detection.
A power·factor terminal or voltage tap or both can be
provided optionally.

3
OUTliNES AND DIMENSIONS
M peD 250

~~
19¢holes (6)
A;:::'f::::;"

~1·111
I, I \'\ A I Key' Creepage distances
Flange details
L
A
Key to Symbols
Total bushing height
Total above flange

II "
I
;-=:.." H Height of live metal
H I Minimum I--'protected V Expansion-chamber length
Line B.1.L
creepage , creepage
,. I \ '\ I no. (kVI G Expansion-chamber diameter
II \ L C-----
distance distance

WI
_.~-

B Depth of current-transformer
1 ~4 325, 1,600 540
350 pocket
5~8 1,760 740
C Total below flange

~! Key' Terminal dimensions


D
F
Maximum diameter
Maximum inside diameter of

~.~ ~ [Rated , gasket space

m-
Lower
S Diameter of lower terminal
~1
Upper termi nal
current terminal
(AI E Bore of tube
c , M N K
R Bolt-circle diameter
400 M30 x 2THD 70 -
M : Top threads

~
630, 1,250 M3Q x 2THD 70 75 N : Length of top threads
(..~ _ _..Ll. ~ Q O _ _ L-~4_2 x 2THD 80 75 I K : Tap-circle diameter

E¢ ~CD K _
~:~ M12 tap holes {4)

Key' Dimensions weight and oil charge _.


Rated Rated Style 1 Total Volume Dimens·lons (in mm)
Line B.I.L
no.
voltage
(kVI
current no. I weight of oil ,

(kVI (AI (TB·I (kgl (QJ ._. L A H V G B C I D F S E

~
P 400 32600:3 ,--66 7.0 1742 1127 808 156 178 320 615 I 130 160 120 ~
~ 630 32601·3 76 I 7.2 1 6.~i--t-!-Q-~~. ~08 ! 15§ 178 320 615! 130 j...l§0 120 -

808 615 r;;~ 160


~ 1250 32602·3 ,--76 7.2 1684 1069_ .. I 156 178 320 120 -

~ 72.5
I 325, 2000 32604·3 79 7.4 11 684 1069 808 156 1.~.~78 32()T 615 130 160 120 -

~O.
5" 32610-3 68 7.0 "1742 1127 808 156 178 +.320 615 130 160 120 29
'-'=---
~ 630 32611-3 78 7.2 1684 1069 808 156 178 320 615 130 160 120 -
1250 32612·3 78 1684 1069
e-.'--
8 2000 32614·3 81
7.2
7.4 .• 1684 1069
808
808
156
156
178
178
320
320
615 130 160
160
120 -

..
.
~. -_._-._-- 615 130.. 120

* The asterisk indicates bushings of the draw-lead type. These cannot be bottom-connected.

Fig,6 Outlines and dimensions of Type OT bushings, 325 & 350kV

4
M PCD290

~'!
19w holes (6)

Key to Symbols

III~\\"
L Total bushing height

I Key: Creepage distances


a) B.I.L 450kV
Flange details
b) B.I.L 550, 650kV A
H
V
G
Total above flange
Height of live metal
Expansion-chamber length
Expansion-chamber diameter
II, \\ HII Line B.I.L
Minimum
creepage
Protected
creepage
B Depth of current-transformer
pocket

m:J
I no. (kVI
iI_I_'I\ I I
1 -4
450
distance
2.030
distance
685
C : Total below flange
o : Maximum diameter
-_5-8
.. _. - ------ f---
2.585 .. -_.. -
. ~ _
1,255
.. _-_.. ,- F : Maximum inside diameter of
T 10-12
550
2,415 810 gasket space
~Ft'.l I
14 -16 3.055 1,485 S Diameter of static shield

~~
18-20 3.120 1,060 T Depth of terminal space
650 U Length of static shield
22 '"'-'24 3.960 1,935

~.8S-
E Bore of tube
M : Top threads
Key: Terminal dimensions N : Length of top th reads

~W 'IC1,1 I Rated Lower


1 /1 Upper terminal
terminal
K : Tap-circle diameter
! current
(A)
u T
M N K
400 M30 x 2THD 70 -
E¢'$=PCDK 630,1,250 M30 x 2THD 70 75
x. M12tap f--
holes (4) 2,000 M42 x 2THD 80 75

Key· Dimensions weight and oil charge


Rated Rated Style Total Volume Dimensions (in mm)
Line B.I.L -- .
voltage current no. weight of oil - ,--- ---,
no. (kV)
1£1 C--- .-- D
~
(kVI (A) (TB·) (kg) L A H V G B F S U E
------ ...• - --- .-
I
l' 400 32800-4 100 8.8 2077 1307 988 156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 144 29
~ 630 32801-4 100 9.5 2019 1249 988 _.156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 144 -

~ 1250 32802-4 100 9.5


- --- .-
2019 1249 988 156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 ·144 --
,~ ..1.0 00_ .:32804~ C 11 0 9.5 2019 1249 988 156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 144 -
---'-
5' 123. 400 144 29
145 450 32810-4,110 -1-_ 8 .8 12077 1307 988 156 178 420_ 770 145 200 200 90
~
-
630 32811-4 ! 110 9.5 2019 1249 988 156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 144 -
1250 32812-4 110 9.5 2019 1249 988 156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 144 -
.....!....
8 2000 32814-4 120 9.5 2019 1249 988 .156 178 420 770 145 200 200 90 144 -

g
- ,
~ 630 33001-4 140 16 2276 1441 1138 196_ 220 420 835 160 230 222 155 220 -

11 1250 33002-4 140 16 2276 1441 1138 196 ! 220 420 835 160 230 222 155 i 220 -
-
12' 123. 2000 33004-4 150 16 2276 1441 1138 , 196 220 420 835 _.160 230 222 155 220 -
- 145, 550
13 170 , 1--.
"""14""
- _
1--;;30
...- 33011-4 140 --16 2276 1441 1138 "196 220 420 835 160 230 222 155 220 -
1250 140 16 2276 1441 1138 196 220 420 835 160 230 222 155 220
...1"- 33012·4
--------- ------
-

16 .-
2000 33014-4 150 .. __ 16 2276 1441 1138 196 220 420 835 160 230 222 155 220
..27... f---- ----- - 1- -
18 630 33201-4 180 21 2606 1711 -1408 196 220 420 895 175 230 222 155 220 -
--
1250 180 21 2606 17'-'- 1408 196 220 420 895 175 230 222 155 220
~ 33202-4 -

145, I-="c-'"
650 2000 33204-4 190 21 2606 1711 1408 196 220 420 895 175 230 222 '155 220
~
-
170 _.
21

~
-- --
630 33211-4 190 21 2606 1711 1408 196 220 420 895 175 230 222 155 220 -

1250 190 21 2606 1711 1408 196 220 420 895


1-
175 230 222 155 220 -
~ 33212-4
--
24 l-woo 33214-4 200 21 2606 1711 1408 196 C""220 420 895 175 230 222 155 220 -

* The asterisk indicates bushings of the draw-lead type. These cannot be bottom-connected.
Fig.7 Outlines and dimensions of Type OT, BI L 450, 500 & 650kV
5
M

tr peD R
24¢ holes (12)

A~Tr Key to Symbols


btJ--+
I~I-~\ I
L : Total bushing height
A Total above flange
, , I Flange details H Height of live metal

I, \'\ A
V Expansion-chamber length
G Expansion-chamber diameter
iI " Key: Creepage distances B Depth of current-transformer

W
H
Minimum Protected pocket
Line B.LL creepage
creepage
no. (kVI
distance distance C Total below flange
L _.
2-4
-
3,655 1,250 o : Maximum diameter

~
750 F Maximum inside diameter of
6-8 4,640 2,290
gasket space
10 "'-' 12 4,550 1,565
900 S Diameter of static shield
14 -16 5,785 2,870

~ 1
T Depth of terminal space
18 "'20 5,635 1,935
1,050 U Length of static shield
Efj-c 22 "'24 7,170 3,555 R Bolt circle diameter
M : Top threads
N Length of top th reads
1\ I 11 I Key: Terminal dimensions
K : Tap-circle diameter

~~t~-3=1T
Rated Upper terminal Lower
B.LL terminal
current
{kVI
- - - -.~I. M N K
630, 1,250, M30 x 2THD 70 95

~
PCDK 750
"",-x M12tap 2,000 M42 x 2THD 80 95
holes (4) 900 630, 1,250 M42 x 2THD 80 95
1,050 2,000

Key· Dimensions weight and oil charge


Rated Rated Style Total Volume Dimensions (in mm)
Line B.I.L
voltage current no. weight of oil
no. (kVI S T U R
(kV) {AI (TB-) (kg) {£I L A H V G B C D F
1
- --
~ 630 33401-4 250 32 2900 1945 1618 216 270 "420 955 200 270 245 175 250 390
~ 1250 33402-4 _ 250... 32 2900 1945 1618 _216_ _270_ 420 _955 200 270 245 175 250 390
~
---- --

170, 2000 33404-=4 250 32 2900 1945 1618 216 270 420 955 200 270 245 175 250 390
- 750 -
5 245
---e-
----'---
630 33411-4 260 32 2900 1945 ',6i8 216
- - -..
270 420 955 200 270 245 175 250 390
7 1250 33412-4 260 32 2900 1945 1618 216 270 420 955 200 270 245 175 250 390
- - -
8 2000 33414-4 260 32 2900 1945 1618 216 270 420 955 200 270 245 175 250 390
-- - ,
9
-
--,-;;- _630 33701-4 360 40 3467 2352 1968 271 310 420 1115 I 235 270 245 175 250 390
--
33702-4 360 40 3467 2352 1968 271 310 420 1115 235 270 245 175 250 390
--'-'-
12
--'3"0
2000 33704-4 360 40 3467 2352 1968 271 310 420 1115 235 270 245 175 250 390
~ 245,
900
1"4 300 630 33711-4 370
._--- - - -
40 3467 2352 1968 271 310 420 1115 235 270 245 175 250 390
~ 1250 33712-4 370 40 3467 2352 1968 271 310 420 1115 235 270 245 175 250 1390
~
--
2000 33714-4 370 40 3467 2352 1968 271 310 420 1115 235 270 245 175 250 390
~ -
~ 630 33301-4 510 79 4017 2782 2398 271 310 420 1235 280 350 245 175 250 490
-
19 1250 33302-4 510 79 4017 2782 2398 271 310 420 1235 280 350 245 175 250 490
245,
20 300, 1050 2000 33304-4 520 79 4017 2782 2398 271 310 420 1235 280 350 245 175 250 490
'21 362 -

~
f-=--- -
630 33311-4 530 _.79 4017 2782 2398 271 310 420 1235 280 350 245 175 250 490
~50_ 79 4017 2782 2398 271 310 420 1235 280 350 245 175 250 490
C%jj~~::
530
~
24 2000 530 79 4017 2782 2398 271 310 420 1235 280 350 245 175 250 490

Fig,8 Outlines and dimensions of Type OT, BIL 750, 900 & l,050kV

6
ORDERING INFORMATION

In ordering or requesting informati'on, please provide the


following information:
1. Type designation and style number.
2. Specifications of internal and external terminals.
3. Desired accessories and/or modifications.
4. Any test items in addition to routine tests.
5. Color of porcelains.
6. Minimum permissible-creepage distance.

7
J.. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI, TOKYO 100 TELEX J24532 CABLE MEleG TOKYO

Revised pUblication,effective Jul. 1984,


superseding publication A-L6401-A of Dec. 1978.
A-L6401-B IT-850B Printed in Japan (HAK) Specifications subject to change without notice.
)...MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., MARUNDUCHI. TOKYO 100. TELEX' J24532 CABLE- MELeQ TOKYO

New publication, effective Dec. 1985.


A-L7563-A IT-8512 Printed in Japan (TOT) Specifications subject to change without notice.
"
Table 3 Standard Terminal Configuration for Type PO
1200A, 1500A 2000A 3000A 4000A

H
H
H 18 ¢
H
14¢ 14 ¢ I H holes (6}--.
50

I ~ holes (6) ~
holes (5) I
14 l'
holes (4) I I~ '"
,-k ~
N
"E ‫)ן‬-
0
M

i'4- 4- I-'"
~

1'\ 17 ~
N
~
0
<t
0
~

o<t ~
m -$- -$- f- M
~
~ ~ -~
o
<t
~
M + ,+,
T
~

~
:;; 0 oo 0
M
20 thick! .~ ~
~

C.
c.
lS'thiCk/ -$- ~ -
M
~ 15 thick
-tIr ~ f-
<t M
oo
~
f- 30 thic/
-tIr ~ f-
N
::J

fi== ::=.~ --,


-- --,
:,fC-- ::'~=r='Ii r:.=== ::;==:l
II II

"" i:
"" "" "I,
""
U
M30x2 THD
U
M36x2THD
U M42x2 THD
U
"
" ""

M80x2 THD

102
50 80
~
14¢ 50 14¢
14¢ 14¢
holes (2), holes (2), holes (4) ~ holes{4)

I~ tl-
0

~- t-'"o
0 o·
~- t-'" I~ ~
0 N

~
1-1 ~ t-'"
0
.-1 IT t-
0
~
~ ~
<t oo ro <t ~
ro <t oo
:;; '5 thick/'
- ( - t- o 15 thick/ ~ ~- t- o ~.~ C- ooo -$ '-fjr +--
20 thiC/
"
0
~ ~
~
~
30 thiC( 0
0
N
--' fi:- -=i=l
:, ' 01 ,-
:, "I' Ii= - ;, L __ =-
"""
~

""
"
II
Ii
I 11
::
<t
" i
II III
~
~

""
",I
"
~
oo "
"""
I, ~
II ::
" ""
0
~

~ LJ ~
"
" I
M30x2 M36x2 M42x2
I MBOx2
I
CONSTRUCTION
1. Type P (Fig. 3) 2. Type PO (Fig. 4)
The insulation system is comprised mainly of a tubular The main insulation system of the Type PO is basically
porcelain unit, with a mounting flange and an upper the same as that of the Type P. The conductor is an
flange cemented in place (Insert C). Insert A shows the aluminum rod, copper rod or tube, and the assem-
upper flange detail, provided with a gasket to seal the bly is hermetically sealed at both top and bottom by
cap terminal. The conductor, of stranded, insulated means of gaskets. A disk spring is provided to reinforce
copper, is attached to a hanger terminal which screws the seals and increase mechanical strength (Insert OJ.
into the bottom of the cap terminal and is fixed by a The cap terminal is a flat type.
lock nut. The lower end is open, and when the bushing Standard upper and lower terminal configurations for
is attached to the transformer, it fills with transformer Type PO are given in Table 3.
oil. Insert B shows details of the standard- and smog-
type porcelain sheds. Insert C shows details of the
mounting flange. The porcelain dimensions conform to
JEM 1397 standards.

~Gasket

Gasket

Cap terminal INSERT A Cap terminal-,


INSERT A

.-Ar===0) Standard shed


c
flange~
'Cement
Upper

~J Standard shed

i.~'I,
1

-1 I, 111
Po",I,;n ~'NSERTB Nameplate

NamePlat~.1
Mounting -I'. (1" \Oi Smog shed
Mounting flange ~
J""( (
\
~~ 15kV ,nd b,low
INSERT C
Cement
flange . Inner conductor Gasket

Insulating oil--t-------+--1-1
11.5kV and below
Insulated inner
~'.INSERTC

~
conductor G"k"
Cement . Pressure ring
Terminal
Gasket: o ring .. Ring plate

Disk spring INSERT 0 Spacer

Fig. 3 Type P construction Fig. 4 Type PO construction

OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS (in mm)

• NO.1 ~0'2 ffirNO '@10 2


W '--1-",

1516 holes (4)


ri~h~leS(2)-H~t~I l ~1
M20x 1.5 THO
~

5D
O O •
Ei-~~t?)
;,-~

1\
" ~

15¢hol" 161
pen N
15¢holes(4}
pen N
elL.
15rf;holes(6l
pen N

p,

<:

~~~,~I"'I~

1-'.1 Fig.5 Type P Fig. 6 Type PO


H
(gauge)
~BII~K.TYPE
, MITSUBISHI
TRANSFORMER BUSHi~ Types P & PO

Fig. 1 Type P: 11 kV, 600A Fig. 2 Type PO: 25kV, 1500A

Mitsubishi bulk-type transformer bushings are It is available in current ratings of up to 600A.


united ceramic-type insulators for use with trans- Type PO is an oil-sealed construction, and is
formers of up to 25kV. available in 1200~4000A current ratings. The
Type P is an open-bottom construction which cap terminal is silver-plated.
uses the insulating oil of the transformer.
IB-67106-C

INSTRUCTIONS
MITSUBISHI TYPE KBW COOLING FAN
FOR TRANSFORMERS

J... MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


1. PREFACE (I) Three phase induction motor
Internal construction of three phase induction motor
Mitsubishi standard cooling fans, which are used for is shown in Fig. 2. This motor has been designed and
forced-oil forced-air cooled, or oil-immersed forced-air manufactured in accordance with the requirement of
cooled transformers, have the large air delivery. totally enclosed Water-proof construction. Therefore,
Furthermore, 6 blade wheel with the improved noise it is possible to use it outdoors. In case the moisture
characteristic is connected with the motor. Fig. I shows enters through the respiratory action, which is caused
the appearance. by the difference between the temperature inside the
The cooling fan is used for the transformer, which is motor and the atmosphere, and forms the water drop,
in continuous operation for the extended period of the water is discharged from the drain plug. The
time. Therefore, the stable operation and in particular bearing of the motor has utilized sealed type ball
the long service life are the indispensable requirement bearing, resulting in requiring no supply of grease.
to the cooling fan. In this connection, the most Therefore, maintenance is exceptionally simple.
important factors are the performance of the motor
directly coupled to the performance of the motor
directly coupled to the fan, and the flawless quality.
Besides, the correct maintenance work and handling Load side
are also needed. ball bearing
Opposite load
In this connection, Mitsubishi cooling fan is pro- Wave washer
side ball

-t3t-~-=-~-~-=--~~~~~~I=~~~~~l ::::":8Ie
vided with the perfect E class insulation with use of
polyester system resin, which is outstanding in the heat
and moisture resistance.
Molor shaft

2. CONSTRUCTION

Type KBW cooling fan consists of three phase


induction motor, blade wheel and guard. Blade wheel Fig. 2 Internal construction of three phase induction motor

and guard directly attach to induction motor case.


Therefor, it has simple construction. Outline is shown (2) Blade wheel
in Fig.1. As shown in Fig. 1, the blade wheel is equipped with
Revolving direction
'SiD -
360
4-15 Dia 650
Mounting frame 9 (in mm)
Mounting
holes
Frame ring

o
0)
r-- Three phase induction
-e- motor
Wind direction
~ rTT7 ...-¥aH::>I,;I._,

Power source cable


Blade

Boss
Guard

Fig. 1 Outline of type KBW cooling fan

- 1 -
· 6 blades. The boss is cast exactly by the cast iron. The Should any defect be found among the inspection
blade is made of aluminum plate and the bending items, carry out the disassembly inspection and clarify
processing is carried out exactly by use of the bending the cause.
plate. In case many defects are found as may disturb the
The blades are assembled and fixed at the boss by operation, it is necessary to take the CQunter-measures.
the rivets. In order to eliminate the vibration, the static Therefore, contact us promptly.
and dynamic balance are adjusted well of the blade Inspection items
wheel. It is therefore free from the abnormal vibration. L Bearing 3. Load current
The blade wheel is tightened on the motor shaft by use 2. Coil insulation resistance 4. Appearance
of set nut and is locked by key. There is no possibility
4,2 Inspection and Maintenance Procedures
that it gets loose during the operation.
(1) Bearing
It is required of the bearing to be used for the
3. RATING AND SPECIFICATION electric cooling fan for transformer that it may have the
higher reliability and longer service life in comparison
The ratings and specifications of the three-phase
with the bearings for ordinary rotation machines. This
induction motor for type KBW cooling fan, which are
is necessary to secure the normal operation of the
used as the standard products by Mitsubishi Electric,
transformer itself.
are shown in Table L
The electric cooling fan for transformer is used
under such unfavorable conditions as 24 hour/day
continuous operation, incessant forced vibration, since
4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE it is directly mounted on the transformer itself
Therefore even when such a bearing is used as has
4,1 Periodical inspection
much higher safety factor than the ordinary service life,
Select the units of motor for inspection arbitrarily in
the bearing section is the most susceptible to the
the reference to the following sampling table in the first
damage in comparison with the coil, frame, etc. of the
year after the installation and every 2 years thereafter.
motor.
Carry out the inspection under the running condition.
Therefore, it is necessary for the bearing to make the
Sampling table (Statistic sampling)
periodical maintenance, inspection, replacement, etc.
Total Sampling The detail explanation is given below.
unit number number
-65 10
[Checking of bearing running noise]
Fist
66-110 15
year Most of the abnormal phenomena of the bearing can
111-1~() 25
be detected through the increase of the noise. The is
Every -65 5
one year the most simple, yet the correct way to detect the
from the 66-110 7
2nd year trouble. It is very difficult to make the qualitative and
Jl1~lH() 10
"" quantitative definition about the abnormal sound.

Table 1 Rating and specification of the three phase induction motor for type KBW cooling fan

Direct connection three-phase induction motor Cooling fan


Pole Start Wing Wind Static
Output Freq. Voltage Current Input
Type
(KW) nu~~er (Hz) (V) (A) (KW) cur;.~nt (~i~) (~Olum~)
M3/min
hress~~~
mmA
KBW3-52 200 2.7 10
50
KBW3-54 400 135 5
Ii-55 6 0.8 700 150 10
KBW3-62
60
220 2.6 9
KBW3-64 440 1.3 4
These motors can be used withm the following rated voltage range.
KBW3-52 190-21OV KBW3-62 210-240V
KBW3-54 380-420V KBW3-64 420-480V

- 2 -
However, it can be said that the careful checking is any serious influence is observed, take the proper
needed when the so-called sliding noise or other sound counter-measure.
than the air friction sound by the fan occurs.
Generally speaking, once the trouble occurs in the
5. CAUTIONS AT THE TIME OF TEST RUN-
bearing, the deterioration proceeds in an accelerated
NING
tempo. Therefore, when other sound is found than the
sliding noise, check it once a week or soThen, it can be (1) Cautions before starting operation
judged if the trouble is resulted from the bearing or not. Before turning on the switch, check whether or not
Should such an abnormal noise increase significant- the power source is as specified in the nameplate of the
ly, it means that something is wrong with the bearing. motor.
Carry out in such case disassembly and inspection and, Check especially whether or not one phase has
if necessary, the replacement of the bearing as soon as failed.
possible. (2) Confirmation of revolving direction
Beside the sliding sound and fan air friction sound, The correct revolving direction of the fan is clock-
there are such sounds like that by the vibration of wise, facing fan.
bearing holder. However, these sounds are hardly Check whether or not it is so. In the case of three
changed over a long period. Therefore, if the periodical phase induction motor, if white, red and black of core
check does not recognize the change in sound, it can be wire are connected with R , Sand T phase respectively,
said that the bearing is free from the trouble. it will turn correctly.
As to the inspection interval, check the running
sound once a month or so, up to 6 months after the start
6. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES OF BEAR-
operation. When 6 month period passes over and the
ING
operation is stabilized, then make the observation once
every half year or on year.
[Cautions for handling the bearing]
Should the trouble is detected, make the observation Since the bearings are fabricated with high precision,
once a week, as mentioned above, and check for the
they should be handled carefully and the following
development of such a sound. points must be observed.
Replacement of bearing is shown in paragraph 6. o Prevent foreign matters from entering inside, when
(2) Insulation resistance of the coil the bearing is going to be stored.
Immediately after the running operation,. use 500V o Do not give a large shock or impact to the bearing.
meggar and measure the resistance. If it is 1MO or Do not drop the bearing.
more, it is all right.
o Prevent the formation of the rust in particular in the
(3) Load current
race and ball holder when the bearing is to be
It is all right if the measured current in the respective
stored.
phase is approximately the current level of Table 1
Observe the following procedures when the bearing-
In case the unbalance ratio between the respective is exchanged.
phase current Max.value-Min.value excceeds 10%, (1) Removal of motor
Average value
it is necessary to examine if it is caused by the To begin with, remove the cooling fan from the
unbalance ratio of the power supply source voltage or transformer. Then, remove the blade wheel and guard
by the trouble in the coil. to the motor to be a unit.
(4) Appearance (Refer to Fig. 3)
Check for the rust formation and corrosion condi- The nut for fixing the blade wheel is of left-handed
tion of the painted sections and name plate section. If screw type. If turned clockwise, the nut will be take

-3-
off. After that, if the blade wheel is pulled out. Holding (3) Removal of poor ball bearings
it as near to center as possible, remove it gently so that For removal of ball bearing, use such a tool as shown
the balance of blade wheel is not broken. In order to in Fig. S. This tool is called PULLER generally and
prevent the blade wheel from turning idly, use the key. available in the market. Applying the claw of this tool
The key has been inserted to the key way of the shaft. to the race of ball bearing, adjust the tip end of the
center pusher to the concave part of the shaft and turn

\ fh
Blade wheel
it gently. Thus, the ball bearing can be pulled out from
the shaft. In this case, special attention must be paid so
Key that shaft is not bent. Incidentally, if the oilseal fitted at
waNSuh\e\r I Washer
T / Bolt the front of the load side bracket is pushed out from the

=_ ===:i-~U;=l:
inside of bracket with a bar, it can be taken off.
-j--- - -l-- - -
\ \
Nut Washer

liJ ~" I "'- '


HEXAGON WRENCH

Ball bearing

Shaft
PULLER

Fig. 3

Claw
After removing the blade wheel, put out the key and Center pusher
store it until the blade wheel is installed.
(2) Disassembly of motor Fig. 5

Removing the through bolts of the motor, remove


(4) Pressing-in method of new ball bearing
the jointing part of the load side bracket and motor
After removing poor ball bearing and oilseal, wash
case. If the outer periphery part of the load side bracket
away old grease and dust from the bearing housing
is struck with a mallet from the motor case side as
inside of the bracket at both side, and shaft with
shown in Fig. 4, the load side bracket will be removed.
gasoline or wash oil etc. At the same time, wash the
Incidentally, the jointing section of the opposite load
washer in the bearing housing of the bracket.
side bracket and motor case shall not be taken off for
Use a new ball bearing according to model as
the purpose of protection the power cable against
selected from Table 2. Applying a pipe tool to the inner
damage. When the rotor is pulled, stand erect the
race of ball bearing as shown in Fig. 6, drive it into the

'
motor with the opposite load side bracket facing
stopped part of the shaft with a hammer. But, in this
downwards, pull it out gently.
case, if a pipe tool is applied to the outer race of the ball
bearing, the ball of bearing will be damaged. Be sure to

/
Nut

...... ---t--
JealwaSher

-/
IJ .
II
~!
r/ :'VMallet

i
I
/
Sealwasher

I
Bolt

I
Nut
drive it in parallel with it in such a way that the shaft is
not bent upon applying it to the inner race of ball
bearing.

Opposite load Ball bearing Shaft


side bracket -
Pipe tool

load side bracket


-, --+-rk.~:3l=c,-=~=l:A--I---~=~=~~
'-.. Motor case
Power cabe Inner race of bearing

Fig. 4 Fig. 6

-4-
Ball bearing are prohibited from contacting impuri- (6) Reassemble
ties such as dust etc. Press-in operations must be After completion of exchanging of bearings, build
carried out with full care. the rotor gently in the motor. Then, if a small quantity
(5) Pressing-in method of new oilseal of grease is applied to the inside of bearing housing of
Use a new oilseal according to model as selected the brackets at both side, internal insertion can be
from Table 2. Applying a pipe tool to the oilseal as carried out smoothly.
shown in Fig. 7, drive it into the front side of load side Applying liquid gasket to the joint section of the
bracket with a mallet. Then injecting about IOcc grease bracket, fit the bracket gently in such a way that the
for lubrication into the grease pocket inside oilseal. oilseal fitted to the front side of load side bracket is not
damaged.

Load side bracket


After that, put a through bolt in motor case, tighten the
nut by approx. 80% and drive the load side bracket
Oilseal
with a mallet.
Pipe tool
After confirming that the bearing has been inserted
perfectly in the bearing housing of bracket, tighten the
nuts with the torque-wrench by 12 kg.m. Turning the
shaft lightly, confirm that there is not nothing abnor-
grease pocket
mal. Then, fit the blade wheel and guard. If grease is
Fig. 7
applied thinly to the shaft section, the blade wheel will
enter it easily and rust generation can be prevented.
Table 2 Parts for replacement procedures of bearing

Description Type Maker Q'ty


Load Side bearing 6205 ZZ N.$.K. Co. or 1
Opposite load side bearing 6203 ZZ NTN Toyo Bearing Co. 1
Oilseal YB25455 Nippon Oil Seal Industry Co. 1
Grease Albania #2 Shell Oil 20cc
Liquid gasket Super Three Bond 1215 Three Bond Co. Little

-5-
Contents

General 5
1.1 Safety Instructions....................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Specified Application 5

2 Design{Types 0.......................................................................................... 6

3 Shipment 7

4 Installation of the tap-changer for cover mounting 8


4.1 Mounting flange 8
4.2 Attaching the on-load tap-changer head to the transformer tank 8

5 Installation of the tap-changer into a bell-type tank 9


5.1 Installing the on-load tap-changer in the supporting strueture................................................................. 9
5.2 Preparation ...............................................•...............:.................................................................................................... .10
5.3 Attaching the bell-type cover 12

6 Connecting the tap winding and the tap-changer take-off terminal....................................... 14


6.1 Connecting the tap selector terminals 14
6.2 Connecting the tap-~hanger take..off terminal................................................................................................. 15

7 Transformer ratio test 15

8 Drying procedure and filling with oil............................................................................................................................. 16


8.1 Drying procedure 16
8.1.1 Vacuum-dry"lng ".......................... 16
8.1.1.1 Vacuum-drying in the autoclave............................................................................................. 16
8.1.1.2 Vacuum-drying in the transformer tank 16
8.1.2 Vapour-phase drying 16
8.1.2.1 Vapour-phase drying in the autoclave 17
8.1.2.2 Vapour-phase drying in the transformer tank 17
8.1.3 Operating the on-load tap-changer 17
8.2 Oil filling 17

9 Pipe connections- :... 1a


9.1 Pipe connection Rfor protective relay RS 2001 18
9.2 Pipe connection S for suction pipe :. 18
9.3 Pipe connection Q 18
9.4 Connection E2 18

065/03/01/0
3
10 Mounting the motor drive unit, the bevel gear and the drive shaft 19
10.1 Mounting the motor drive unit 19
10.2 Mounting the bevel gear 19
10.3 Mounting the drive shaft 19

11 Putting the tap-changer into operation at the transformer manufacturer 21


11.1 Operational tests 21
11.2 Complete all filling g 21
11.3 Ground connections 22
11.4 Electrical tests on the transformer 22

12 Transport to the installation site 22

13 Putting into service at the operating site 23

14 Monitoring during service _ 23

15 Failures 24

16 Maintenance 24

17 Appendix 26

Q) NOTE

The data described in these Operating Instructions may vary in detail from the design delivered.
We reserve the right to make alterations without notice.

4 065/03/01/0
1 General

1.1 Safety Instructions 1.2 Specified Application


All personnel involved in installing, commissioning, operating,
maintenance or repair of the equipment must:
be suitably qualified and
.& CAUTION
strictly observe these Operating Instructions.
The on-load tap-changer may only be used with the trans-
Improper operation or misuse can lead to former specified in the order.
a reduction in the efficiency of the equipment, Installation, electrical connection and commissioning of
damage to the equipment and property of the the on-load tap-changer must only be carried out by
user and qualified, skilled personnel and only in accordance with
serious or fatal injury. these Operating Instructions.

Safety instructions in this manual are presented in three It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the on-
different forms to emphasize important informa'tion. load tap-changer is used for the specified application only.
For safety reasons, any unauthorised work su~h as installa-
tion, alteration, electrical connection, commissioning or

~
modification to the on-load tap-changer equipment is
WARNING forbidden w"lhoul first consulting MR!
The trouble-free operation of the drive, on-load tap-
This information indicates particular danger to life and changer and transformer may be put at risk.
health. Disregarding such a warning can lead to serious
or fatal injury.

.& CAUTION
&. WARNING

All relevant fire protection regulations must be strictly


This information indicates particular danger to the equip- observed.
ment or other property of the user. Serious or fatal injury
cannot be excluded.

CD NOTE

This notes give important information on specific subjects.

065/03/01/0
5
2 DesignfTypes

The on-load tap-changer consists of the diverter switch with


the tap selector mounted underneath (fig. 1).
The diverter switch is installed in its own oil compartment.
00000000
The on-load tap-changer is attached to the transformer
cover by means of the tap-changer head.
If required, the tap selector may be equipped with a change-
over selector. For the standard version, models without
change-over selector are available up to 14 and with change-
over selector up to 27 operating positions.
The design of the on-load tap-changer and the designation
of its main parts are shown in installation drawing 893900
(see section 17). ,
W'

The Operating Instructions contain all information regarding


the following tap-changer models, which are available with
and without change-over selector.
Three-phase tap-changer for neutral application:
MS 111300 Y
On-load tap-changer combination (special design for
delta connection):
MS 1 301/MS II 302
Single-phase tap-changer:
MS I 301
All single-phase tap-changers are also available as a tap-
changer group 3 x MS I 301 with a cornman motor drive.

KHW 834-4

6 065/03{01/0
3 Shipment

On-load tap-changer and motor drive are shipped in the The shipment is to be fully checked against consignment
adjustment position. documents. The parts must be stored in a dry place until
The on-load tap-changer equipment is shipped as follows assembly.
(insulating parts are protected against moisture): All tap-changer parts must be left wrapped in their airtight
Delivery of the tap-changing equipment includes: protective cover and are to be removed only shortly before
Diverter switch oil compartment with tap-changer head and installation.
diverter switch unit installed and the tap selector mounted
(max. weight approx. 230 kg), fig. 1
Motor drive unit ED 100/200 S (approx. 80 kg), or . Q) NOTE
Motor drive unit ED 100/200 L(approx. 130 kg), fig. 2.
In general, the drive shafts, the bevel gear and the protec-
Drive shaft with coupling parts and bevel gear (max. weight
tive relay are packed with the on-load tap-changer.
approx. 20 kg), fig. 3.
Protective relay RS 2001 (3.5 kg), fig. 4.

2 KHW915

& WARNING

When carrying out any work on the on-load tap-changer,


motor drive or components, ensure they are positioned
securely.
Otherwise there ',s a danger that individual devices may tip
over accidentally. This can result in serious injury or even
fatalities.
4 KHW 765-4

055/03/01/0
7
4 Installation of the on-load tap- changer for cover mounting (fig. 5)

4.1 Mounting flange 4.2 Attachment of the tap-changer head to


the transformer cover
A mounting flange is necessary in order to mount the tap-
changer head to the transformer cover. This mounting flange The on-load tap-changer is lowered through the cover
is to be constructed in accordance with the sealing surface of aperture (= mounting flange) of the transformer and bolted
the tap-changer head (see fig. 6 and drawing 893900, see by the tap-changer head to the mounting flange.
section 17). Proceed as follows:
To position the studs (M12, max. length 45 mm) we recom- 1. Place the on-load tap-changer on a level surface.
mend the use of a drilling template (see fig. 7 and drawing 2. Clean the sealing surface of the mounting flange and the
890183, section 17). If requested, the drilling template will tap-changer head.
be supplied with the first installation of a tap-changer type 3. Put an oil resistant gasket on the mounting flange.
MS free of charge.
4. Lift the on-load tap-changer by hooking up the tap-
changer head and carefully lower it into the opening of
the mounting flange. Take care not to damage the
screening rings (only installed if Um " 170 kV).
5. Check installed position of the tap-changer head.
6. Screw the tap-changer head to the mounting flange.

6 KHW 770-4

KHW 769-4
5 7

8 06S{03/01/0
5 Installation of the on-load tap-changer into a bell-type tank (fig. 8)

To install the on-load tap changer into a transformer with a After mounting the bell-type cover raise the on-load tap-
bell-type tank the on-load tap-changer has to be mounted changer (diverter sw',tch insert dismounted) by means of the
onto a supporting structure. Therefore the on-load tap- lifting device (see section 17, drawing 890180) and attach
changer is equipped with a supporting flange at the diverter both on-load tap-changer and tap-changer head to the bell-
switch oil compartment (~special design, see section 17, type cover.
drawing 896762).
To attach the tap-changer head to the bell-type cover we
First of al" lift the on-load tap-changer into the supporting recommend the use of a mounting flange as described in
structure and connect it to the tap winding. For this purpose section 4.1.
the on-load tap-changer has to be attached to the support-
ing structure in such a way that it cannot be displaced.
The supporting flange is provided with bores, so that it can, 5.1 Installation of the on-load tap-changer
without further measures, be provisionally secured to the into the supporting structure
supporting structure. It is advantageous to put spacer blocks lift the on-load tap-changer into the supporting structure.
temporarily between supporting structure and supporting Make sure that the on-load tap-changer is in its proper
flange and to remove them before setting up the bell-type mounting position and fasten it there safely.
cover.

CD NOTE

- In the supporting structure the on-load tap-changer


must be suspended in an exactly vertical position.
- The on-load tap-changer must be mounted so that
it need not be lifted by more than 5 to 20 mm to
reach its final pos,tion after the bell-type cover has
been set up.

It is of advantage to install spacer blocks between supporting


• structure and supporting flange in such a way that the on-
load tap~changer is in its envisaged final position after the
bell-type cover is set up. 8y this measure the leads to be
connected to the on-load tap- changer can be correctly
dimensioned in length. Remove the spacer blocks after
connecting the leads.
To connect the tap winding and the tap-changer take-off
terminal follow the instructions according to section 6.

&. CAUTION

Make sure, that the connected leads do not exert any


force or pressure on the on-load tap-changer.
This can tension the tap selector and thus impair its
function. Moreover, there must be sufficient clearance, so
that it is possible to raise the on-load tap-changer to its
final installation position after the bell-type tank has been
mounted.

8, Drying procedure and transformer ratio test are to be per-


formed in accordance with sections 7 and 8.
06s/0Jf01fO
9
5.2 Preparation
Before setting up the bell-type tank, the tap-changer head
must be separated from the on-load tap-changer.
1. For this purpose, open the cover of the on-load tap-
changer head (24 screws MlO I w.s.17, with locking
washers).
2. Make sure not to damage the cover gasket
(O-ring gasket, fig. 9).
3. Remove the position indicator dial (pull off the clip from
the shaft end, fig. 10). Take note of the red-marked areas
in the tap-changer head not covered by the supporting
plate of the diverter switch insert [fig. 11),
4. Remove the fixing nuts of the supporting plate
(5 nuts Mal w.s.13, locking washers, fig. 12). 11 ~W813-4

9 KHW 762-4 12

10 065/03/01/0
5, Lift the diverter switch insert carefully out of the
diverter sW'ltch 0',1 compartment (fig, 13),
6, Remove the suction pipe, Pullout the connecting piece
in the tap-changer head to the inside (fig, 14),
Do not lose the O-rings of the connecting piece,
7. Loosen the remaining screw connections on the tap-
changer head (17 nuts M81 w.s, 13, locking washers),
see fig, 15,
Lift off the tap-changer head from the supporting
flange,

& CAUTION
13
Under all circumstances avoid dropping any parts into
the diverter switch oil compartment. Otherwise there 'IS
the risk that the diverter switch blocks and both on-load
tap-changer and transformer are damaged.
Therefore, make sure that the number of small parts is
complete when disassembling and reinstalling.
Count them to be sure,

14 §) @kS2B-4

KHW 820-4

065/03/01/0
11
5.3 Setting up the bell-type transformer cover
1. Before setting up the bell-type transformer cover clean
the sealing surface of the supporting flange. Place the
O-ring on the supporting flange [fig. 16). Withdraw the
spacer blocks [see section 5.1).
2. Lift the bell-type cover over the transformer active part
and set up the bell-type cover.
3. Before mounting the tap-changer head, clean the sealing
surfaces [bottom surface of the tap-changer head,
mounting flange). Put an oil-resistant gasket on the
mounting flange.
4. Place the tap-changer head on the mounting flange.
Take note of the two adjusting bolts (fig. 16) and the
markings at the supporting flange and tap-changer head KHW 777-4
[fig. 17), which ensure assembly in the correct position.
16
Depend'mg on the fmal height adjustment leave a
clearance of 5 to 20 mm between tap-changer head and
supporting flange. o o T 0
5. Lift the on-load tap-changer slightly by means of the
lifting traverse [see fig. 18 and section 17, dwg. 890180).
Make sure, that all studs of the supporting-flange are
easily guided through the bore holes on the tap-changer
head.

A
123456

17 KHW 772-4

18 §) /
@KHW821-4

065{OJ/Ol/0
12
6. Attach the tap-changer head in the red marked area not
covered by the supporting plate of the d',verter switch
insert (fig. 19, also refer to section 5.2).
Fixation by 17 nuts Mal w.s. 13, torque 20 Nm, secure by
locking washers. Attach the tap-changer head to the
mounting flange.
7. Remstall the suction pipe. Check proper seat of the 0-
rings. Grease them slightly before mounting.
8. Remount the diverter switch insert with great care.
Make sure that the supporting plate is correctly placed in
the tap-changer head (red marked areas must be left
free).
Attachment of the supporting plate:
by 5 nuts Mal w.s.13, torque 20 Nm, secure by locking
washers. 19
9. Attachment of the position indication dial: ~:".-_\l_~r§l.. ---=:Sk~1=""'~:"'-_---.l!U~
Slip the clip onto the shaft end.
The coupling pin ensures installation of the position
indication dial in its correct position (fig. 20).
10. Close the tap-changer head with the cover.
Make sure that the O-ring gasket in the cover is placed
properly.
Fasten the cover of the on-load tap-changer head equally
by 24 screws M10 I W.s. 17, torque 34 Nm (fig. 21).

20

21 '\Y" ~822-4
065/03/01/0
13
6 Connecting the tap winding and the tap-changer take-off terminal

The connection of the tap winding and the tap-changer 6.1 Connecting the tap selector terminals
take-off lead has to be carried out according to the con-
nection diagram supplied with the particular tap-changer The tap selector terminals are indicated on the tap selector
bars.
equipment.
The crimped ends of the tap selector terminals are provided
with a through-hole for M8 screws, so that the tap leads can
it. CAUTION
be connected by means of cable shoes (see fig. 22).

Carry out all connections carefully and secure them.


The connecting leads must be assembled in such a way CAUTION
as to allow all leads to be connected to the tap selector
without tension. Make sure that the Kterminal is not bent or distorted
If necessary, the lead ends must be shaped in form of in any way, as this could impair the function of the
expansion loops. reversing switch.

22 KHW 835-4

14 065/03/01/0
7 Transformer ratio test

6.2 CoMeeting the tap-changer take-off terminal We recommend to carry out ratio testing before drying of
the transformer.
The tap-changer take-off lead is to be connected to the
take-off terminal of the diverter switch oil compartment To operate the drive shaft in the tap-changer head a short
(through-holes for M10-screws, fig. 23). tube of 25 mm nominai width with a screwed-in coupling
Secure the screw connection (see fig. 24). bolt of 12 mm diameter together with a hand wheel or a
hand crank may be used.
In case of tap"changer group 3 x MS I 301 and tap-changer
it CAUTION
combination MS I 301 I MS II 302 all tap-changer heads
have to be linked together by means of the horizontal part
of the drive shaft (see section 10l.
Place the tap selector take-off leads in the vicinity of the
change-over selector (reversing switch or coarse tap selec- If the on-load tap-changer is equipped with a motor drive
tor) so as to allow sufficient clearance to the movable parts ED, 16.5 drive shaft revolutions are required for one tap-
ofthe change-over selector. change operation. The diverter switch action can be heard
Otherwise the change-over selector may be blocked. distinctly. When operating the change-over selector a higher
torque is required. The end positions, which are to be inferred
from the connection diagram supplied with the delivery,
must never be overrun. Therefore always check the attained
operation position through the inspection glass in the cover
of the on-load tap-changer head (fig. 25). Keep the number
of tap-change operations without oil to a minimum.
After the transformer ratio test the on-load tap-changer
has to be set back to the adjustment position (see the
connection diagram delivered with the equipment).

w,

Q) NOTE

If the transformer is to be vapor-phase dried in its


23 '"' own tank, open the kerosene drain plug (see secr,on 8.1.2).
KHW 834-4

24 KHW 771-4 25 KHW 764-4

065/03/01/0
15
8 Drying procedure and filling with oil

8.1 Drying procedure 8.1.2 Vapor-phase drying


As precondition for MR's guarantee of the dielectric
properties of the on-load tap-changer a minimum drying
treatment must be carried out according to the following
CD NOTE
instructions (either according to 8.1.1 oder 8.1.2). Before starting the drying procedure, the kerosene drain
plug in the oil compartment bottom (fig. 26) must be
8.1.1 Vacuum-drying
opened to drain the kerosene condensate from the oil
8.1.1.1 Drying in the vacuum autoclave compartment

CD NOTE
The kerosene drain plug has a hexagon socket and is easily
accessible between oil compartment bottom and tap selector
gear and can be unscrewed from outside. The kerosene drain
When drying the transformer in the autoclave the cover of plug has a plastic coating on the end of its thread and can
the on-load tap-changer head must be removed. only be screwed through this coating by applying a lot of
pressure (fig. 26).
• Heating up
the on-load tap-changer in air of atmospheric pressure
with a temperature rise of approx. 10 Kto a final
temperature of not more than 110·C.
CD NOTE

• Preparatory drying Turn the kerosone drain plug only to the point of increased
in circulating air at 110 ·C max. applied to the on-load force.
tap-changer for a duration of 20 hours.
e Vacuum drying When vapor-phase drying the transformer in its own tank
at a temperature of 110 ·C max. applied to the on-load (see section 8.1.2.2) the kerosene drain plug, in general, is
not accessible from outside and can only be opened from
tap-changer and a residual pressure of not more than
inside the oil compartment.
10-3 bar for a duration of at least 50 hours.
In this case the diverter switch unit must be removed, the
8.1.1.2 Drying in the transformer tank kerosene drain plug unscrewed with an extended socket
wrench (see section 17, dwg. 890182) and the diverter switch

CD NOTE
unit reinstalled

If the transformer is to be dried in its own tank. the


interior of the diverter switch oil compartment must be
Lt CAUTION
connected to vacuum by a connecting pipe. as the cover Close the kerosene drain plug again after the drying
of the on-load tap-changer head remains closed during procedure to ensure that no oil can flow between the
the entire drying process. diverter switch oil compartment and the transformer tank!

The cover of the on-load tap-changer head is vacuum-proof.


To ensure sufficient drying of the interior of the oil compart-
ment and the incorporated diverter switch unit, a short by-
pass tube of 25 mm nominal width must be connected bet-
ween the transformer tank and a connecting flange at the
tap-changer head that leads directly into the diverter switch
oil compartment.
Connect the by-pass tube either between flanges E2 and Q or
flanges E2 and Rat the tap-changer head (for position of
connecting flanges of the tap-changer head see section 9
and section 17, drawing 893899).
Procedure, temperature, pressure and duration of the drying
process are described in section 8.1.1.1.
26 KHW 831-4

16 065/0J{Ol/0
8.1.2.1 Vapor-phase drying in the vacuum autoclave 8.1.3 Operating the on-load tap-changer

CD NOTE it. CAUTION

When drying the transformer in the vacuum autoclave the Do not operate the on-load tap-changer after drying
cover of the on-load tap-changer head must be removed without prior wetting with oil as this will damage bearings
and stored outside the autoclave. and gaskets.

• Heating up The on-load tap-changer must not be operated before the


by admitting the kerosene vapor at a temperature of diverter switch oil compartment has been filled with oil and
about 90 "C. Keep this temperature constant for about the tap selector has been completely immersed in transformer
3 to 4 hours. oil.
• Drying
by increasing the kerosene vapor temperature by about 8.2 Filling with oil
10 Kper hour to the desired final temperature, but not
more than 125 "C applied to the on-load tap-changer. Close the tap-changer head by lowering the cover. Tighten all
The duration of the drying procedure is normally the 24 bolts MlO/ w.s.17 on the cover uniformly (torque 35 Nm).
same as that of the transformer. Under vacuum, fill the on-load tap-changer and transformer
simultaneously with new transformer oil.
8.1.2.2 Vapour-phase drying in the transformer tank To fill with oil, use the connection S or Ron the tap- changer
If tne transformer is to be dried in its own tank, the cover of head. To apply a vacuumto the transformer and oil compart-
the on-load tap-changer head remains closed during the ment simultaneously, install a connection pipe between the
entire drying process. The cover o(the on-load tap-changer connection E2 and Q.
head is vacuum-proof. To ensure sufficient drying of the
interior of the diverter switch oil compartment and of the
diverter switch unit, it is necessary to connect a common
tube of at least 50 mm nominal width between the kerosene
it. CAUTION
vapor lead and at least two pipe connections Of the tap-
The oil compartment and its associated oil conservator
changer head leading into the diverter switch oil compart-
must be filled with new insulating oil for transformers
ment.
according to IEC 60 296 (Specification for unused mineral
For this purpose use flanges Rand Q for on-load tap-changer insulating oils for transformers and switchgear) and IEC
type MS. (For position of pipe connections at the tap- 60422 {Supervision and maintenance guide for mineral
changer head see section 9 and section 17, drawing 893899). insulating oils in electrical equipment). For dielectric
strength limit values see section 16/table II. The use of any
Procedure, temperature and duration of the drying process
are described in section 8.1.2.1.
other o"ils may put the trouble-free operal'lon of the on-
load tap-changer and the transformer at risk.

065/03/0110
17
9 Pipe connections

The tap-changer head is provided with 3 pipe connections for 9.2 Pipe connection 5 for suction pipe
different purposes. After loosening the thrust collar (4 bolts
This is the connection for the feeding pipe of a stationary oil
M10 I W.s. 17) these pipe connections can be freely swivelled
filter unit. If no oil filter is used, a pipe must be connected
(see fig. 27 and section 17, drawing 893899). Torque: 34 Nm.
which ends with a drain cock at the side of the transformer
tank at operating height.

(}) NOTE
9.3 Pipe connection Q (special design. required only
Functionally speak'lng, pipe connections Q and Rare with oil filter unit)
interchangable so that either the protective relay RS 2001 This pipe connection serves for the connection of the oil
could be connected to Q or the oilt filter plant could be return pipe of a stationary oil filter unit. If no oil filter is
connected to R. connected, a dummy plug is mounted instead of the pipe
connection.

9.1 Pipe connection R for protective relay RS 2001 9.4 Connection E2


The mounting of the protective relay RS 2001 (see section 17, This connection is closed by a dummy plug. It leads into the
dimension drawing 899084) is pursuant to our Operating oil chamber of the transformer tank directly beneath the
Instructions No. 59. tap-changer head and can, in case of need, be connected to
an accumulating tube for the Buchholz relay.

(}) NOTE

The stamped-on serial number of protective relay and


R s Q
on-load tap-changer must be identical.
The protective relay must be installed as close as possible
to the tap changer head in a horizontal position.
The arrow on the installed protective relay must point to
the oil conservator.
The pipe leading to the oil conservator must have an
inclination of at least 2 0/0..

18 065/03/01/0
10 Mounting the motor drive unit, the bevel gear and the drive shaft

10.1 Mounting the motor drive unit (see section 17, 10.3 Mounting the drive shaft (square tube)
dwg. 898801, 898802)
The drive shaft must be mounted according to our Operating
Detailed mounting instructions can be found in our Opera- Instructions No. 42.
ting Instructions no. 138 for the Motor Drive Unit ED.
The drive shaft is the mechanical connection between the
motor dr,ve and the tap-changer head.
The diverting from the vertical to the horizontal direction
CD NOTE takes place through the bevel gear.
Accordingly, when mounting, the vertical drive shaft is to be
The stamped-on serial number of bevel gear and on-ioad attached between motor drive unit and bevel gear, whereas
tap-changer must be identical (nameplate). the horizontal drive shaft is to be attached between bevel
Motor drive unit and on-load tap-changer must be in the gear and tap-changer head.
same operating position. This adjustment position is indi-
The drive shaft itself cons',sts of a square tube and is to be
cated in the tap-changer connection diagram supplied
connected on both ends to the end of either t~e drive shaft
with the equipment.
or the driven shaft of the respective implement by two
The motor drive unit must be mounted at the provided coupling brackets and one coupling bolt.
place on the transformer tank in a vertical position and
protected against excessive transformer vibrations.
CD NOTE
10.2 Mounting the bevel gear When installing the drive shaft, make sure that the shaft
The bevel gear is to be attached to a support on the trans- ends to be connected are exactly aligned
former cover by 2 bolts [through-holes 18 mm diameter, see
section 17, drawing 892916).
Square tubes, coupling brackets, coupnng bolts, crews, nuts
and lock tabs are corrosion-resistant.

CD NOTE
The square tube and the guard plate which serves as foot
step protection for the horizontal drive shaft at the trans-
former cover, are supplied in oversize (various standard
The stamped-on serial number of bevel gear and on-load lengths). These parts must be cut to the required size before
tap-changer must be identical. mounting to the transformer.
The horizontal shaft end of the bevel gear must be in Finally, balancing of the lag of the motor drive relative to
proper alignment with the shaft end of the upper gear the diverter switch action of the on-load tap-changer must
unit on the tap-changer head. be performed (according to Operating Instructions no. 138
After loosening the thrust collar (6 bolts M8/w.s.13) the for the Motor Drive Unit ED).
upper gear unit can be freely swivelled [fig. 28).
When having adjusted lhe upper gear unit, tighten the
thrust collar, torque 15 Nm).
The bolts are to be secured.
In case of bevel gears and diverting gears in special design
and intermediate bearings of the vertical or horizontal
drive shaft, the above instructions apply analogously.

28 KHW 767-4

065/03/01/0
19
Tap-changer group 3 x MS I 301 and tap-changer
combination MS I 301 I MS II 302
This procedure is also recommended for all other models of
on-load tap-changer type MS.
Due to the special arrangement of the tap-changer phases in
three or two columns, the tap-changer heads must be coupled
to each other above the tank cover. Since turning of the
upper gear unit will initiate a switching action, make sure
that the exact adjustment position of the diverter switch is
regained after the alignment of the gear units.
. Proceed as follows:

1. Check that the operating positions of allan-load tap-


changers are identical (inspection window in the tap-
changer head). Each of the single-phase tap-changers
must be in the adjustment position.
2. Turn the upper gear units of the tap-changer heads into
the desired mounting position and fix them there (screw-
tighten thrust collars and tab-lock the screws) .
Take note of I. he arrow on the drive shaft flange
below the punched serial number. The direction ofthe
arrow indicates the rotation sense when turning the hand
crank of the motor drive clockwise.
3. In order to reduce the difference in time between
operation of the individual poles, turn the shaft ends
against the direction of the arrow 50 that all single-
phase on-load tap-changers are separately operated by
one step. and until the diverter switch unit just operates.
Check coincidence of position at allan-load tap-changer
heads.
4. Mount the horizontal drive shaft between the tap-
changer heads.
5. Return the whole tap-changer set, that is all single-phase
tap-changers together, into the adjustment position.
The adjustment position must be reached by turning the
drive shaft in the direction of the arrow.
Check simultaneous operation of all diverter switches.
Check coincidence of positions at all tap-changer
heads.
. 6. Mount the vertical drive shaft.

065/03/01/0
20
11 Putting the on-load tap-changer into operation at the transformer
manufacturer
11.1 Operational tests
Before applying voltage to the transformer, some test opera-
tions must be carried out to check the mechanical functions
of on-load tap-changer and motor drive.
For these test operations the on-load tap-changer has to be
run through the entire operating cycle.
Make sure that in each operating position the indications
of motor drive and on-load tap-changer (inspection window
in the tap-changer head) read the same position.

&. CAUTION

A coupling fault between on-load tap-changer and motor


drive unit exists, if on-load tap-changer and motor drive
unit show a different operat"mg position. M'lSalignment of
coupling between on-load tap-changer and motor drive
unit leads to severe damage of on-load tap-changer and 29
transformer if operation is continued. The transformer
may not be put into operation

Check that the automatic switch-off is working in both end


positions and check the function of the electrical and
mechanical end position limits (see Operating Instructions
no. 138 for the motor drive unit ED).

11.2 Final oil filling


Fill up and bleed the on-load tap-changer completely via the
oil conservator with transformer oil according to lEe 60 296
and IEC 60422.
In this connection bleed:
• The tap-changer head via the bleeder valve in the tap-
changer head cover (El ):
Open the screw cap M30/w.s.36, lift the valve tappet by
means of a screwdriver, replace the screw cap and fix it,
torque 10 Nm (fig. 29).
• The suction pipe (5) via the bleeder screw at the con-
KHW 810-4
necting ellbow: cap nut M16/w.s.22, torque 10 Nm,
slotted bleeder screw M6, max. torque 2 Nm [fig. 30).

CAUTION

Make sure that the suction pipe has been bled completely.
The insulation capability of the on-load tap-changerto
ground is otherwise significantly impaired.

06S/03{Ol/0
21
12 Transport to the installation site

11.3 Ground connections If the motor drive unit is to be demounted for transport of
the transformer to the installation site, move the motor drive
Connect the ground screws of the tap-changer head
into the adjustment position and then uncouple.
(2 screws M12/ w.s.19 with nuts, torque 60 Nm, fig. 31)
to the transformer cover.
Connect the ground screw M12/ w.s.19 (torque 60 Nm) of
the motor drive housing to the transformer tank.
CAUTION

Do not operate the motor drive while the on-load tap-


11.4 Electrical transformer tests
changer is uncoupled.

After the afore-mentioned steps the electrical tests necessary


for acceptance of the transformer can now be performed. To remount the motor drive unit follow the instructions
according to section 10.1 and 10.3.

Q) NOTE

If the transformer is filled with oil but stored or trans-


ported without oil conservator, a by-pass tube must be
installed between the interior of the diverter switch oil
compartment and the transformer tank to equalise the
pressure caused by the expansion of the oil.

Install this by-pass tube at the tap-changer head between


the connection E2 and one of the free connections R, S or Q
of the tap-changer head.
For short stand-by periods between 2 and 4 weeks without
oB conservator, ·tt is also sufficient to lower the oil level by
approx. 5 litres.
If the transformer is to be completely emptied, drain also the
31 switching oil of the on-load tap-changer completely.
The interior of the diverter switch oil compartment should be
conserved and protected in the same way as the transformer,
e.g. by filling with nitrogen.
In the case of a longer stand-by period, the heater of the
motor drive unit must be connected and put into operation.

22 065/03/01/0
13 Putting into service at the 14 Monitoring during service
operating site

Before putting the transformer into service operational tests Monitoring the on-load tap-changer and motor drive unit is
of on-load tap-changer and motor drive have to be per- limited to regular visual inspections of the tap-changer head,
formed according to section 11.1. At the same time check the protective relay and motor drive unit. These can be carried
function of the protective relay. out at the same time as the usual control inspections on the
transformer.
Pay particular attention to the following:
CD NOTE • sealing points of the tap-changer head, protective relay
and, if applicable, connected pipes must be oil-proof,
• sealing of the protective housing of the motor drive unit,
The protective relay has to be inserted into the tripping
• trouble-free functioning of the built-in electrical heating
circuit of the circuit breakers so that on response of the
in the protective housing of the motor drive unit,
protective relay the transformer is immediately switched
• silicagel breather must be. in perfect condition
off (see Operating Instructions No. 59 for protective relay
• function test of the protective relay according to
RS 2001).
Operating Instructions no. 59.
The insulating oil in the transformer should be monitored by
Make sure that the connected circuit breakers operate when the user according to the relevant regulations (also see
test button llOFFI{ of the protective relay is pressed. Be sure section 16).
that they energize the transformer only after the .protective
relay has been brought to position »IN SERVICE" by pressing
the other test button.
15 Failures

CAUTION

The relevant safety regulations must be observed here.


it. WARNING

If the protective relay is triggered, the on-load tap-changer


and transformer must be thoroughly checked. This involves
withdrawing the diverter switch insert and checking it
according to the Inspection Instructions. For more details
CAUTION of the protective relay RS 2001, follow the Operating
Instructions no. 59. This applies analogously when other
Check that all stop valves between oil conservator and protective devices e.g. the pressure relief device trip in the
tap-changer are open. on-load tap-changer. Only operate the equipment again
when you are sure there is no damage to the on-load tap-
changer or to the transformer. Operating the transformer
When having energized the transformer, tap-change opera-
without prior checking is not permitted as serious damage
flons under load can be performed. The switch'lng gas accu-
to the on-load tap-changer and the transformer can occur.
mulating under the cover of the on-load tap-changer head
will cause minor oil displacement or escape via the oil con-
servator. For more serious problems with the on-load tap-changer or
motor dr"lve unit, which cannot be rectified easily on site, or
if the protective relay is triggered, please inform your autho-
rised MR representative or the transformer manufacturer.
Alternatively, contact us directly at
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Germany
Phone: (+49) 9 41 /4090-0
Fax: (+49) 9 41 /4090-501
E-Mail: service@reinhausen.com
065/03/01/0
23
16 Maintenance

Maintenance intervals

MS 11I300Y up to 300 A 100,000 150,000


MS I 301, MS II 302 up to 300 A 100,000 150,000

rable 1 Maintenance intervals


If the number of switching operations according to table 1 has not been reached, a ma"lntenance has to be carried out every
7 years.

The scope and type of maintenance are specified in MR's The tap selector of the on-load tap-changer generally does
correspondIng Maintenance Manual. not require maintenance. In certain cases, for example in
industrial transformers where a high number of switching
If the appropriate preparations are made a proper main-
operations is expected, our Technical Service department
tenance can generally be carried out within a day.
should be contacted when 1,000,000 switching operations
have been carried out.

ill WARNING
For on-load tap-changers with more than 15,000 switching
operations annually, we recommend the use of our stationary
oil filter plant type OF 100 (Operating Instructions no. 18)
Disregarding the inspection intervals or incomplete! with a paper filter insert.
improper maintenance can lead to severe damage on the
on-load tap-changer and the transformer. Filtering the switching oil means the inspection intervals can
be ionger (see table 1 l.
In addition, the limit values for replacement and/or treat-
Generally, we recommend that our Technical Serv"lce Depart- ment of the diverter switch oil listed in table 2 should be
ment carry out each maintenance. As well as guaranteeing observed.
that all work is properly carried out, specific components are
also retro-fitted to the latest standard of technology.
If,a maintenance is not carried out by our Technical Service
Department, please ensure that the personnel carrying out
the maintenance are trained by MR or are otherwise suitably
& CAUTION

qualified to carry out the work. In such a case, we would ask The oil compartment and its-associated oil conservator
you to forward us a report on the ma·lntenance performed, must be filled with new ·lnsulating oil for transformers
to complete our maintenance records. For inquiries about according to IEC 60 296 (Specification for unused mineral
spare parts we would ask you to inform us about the serial insulating oils for transformers and switchgear) and
number (see the name plate on the motor drive unit) and the IEC 60 422 (Supervision and maintenance guide for
number of switching operations. mineral insulating oils in electrical equipment).
For dielectric strength limit values see section 16/table 2.
In addition to the maintenance intervals mentioned
The use of any other oils may put the trouble-free opera-
above, the diverter switch unit of the on-load tap-
tion of the on-load tap-changer and the transformer at
changer must be replaced after 800,000 tap-change
risk.
operations

24 065/03/01/0
Limit values for the exchange and/or treatment of the tap-changer oil:

MS III 300 Y 30 kV /2.5 mm (minimum)

MS 1301, MS II 302 40 kV /2.5 mm (minimum)

Table 2
0) measured according to IEC 60 156
The temperature of the oil sample at the time of measuring the dielectric strength should be noted.
The given values for dielectric strength are valid for oil temperatures of 20 'C ± 5 ·C.

065/03/01/0
25
17 Appendix

On-load tap-changer type MS, installation drawing (centric drive) " " : , . 893900

Tap-changer head [centric drive) . 893 899

Drilling template for tap-changer head . 890 183

Supporting flange, special design for installation to a bell-type transformer cover . 896 762

Lifting traverse . 890 180

Socket wrench for kerosene drain screw , . 890 182


Screwdrivers and spanners for installation and inspection . 890478
Protective relay RS 2001, dimension drawing . 899084

Motor drive unit ED-S, protective housing . 898 801

Motor drive unit ED-L, protective housing . 898802

Bevel gear CD 6400, dimension drawing . 892 916

065/03/01{0
26
52'----1-L-

51 ----,-ffill-

21
36---"":'"
1il---1--16
36
31--~

37--~-"'I

35 -,--4-1'

~~ =~:i~;t~::/~~~eon uaru;fmmer ,avO[ (if ,oquir<d)


13 -Gasket for tap-<hang« h<ad
14 -p",itlon inrlk.lor
15 -In,p,ctionwin<bw
16 -Dri"" ,hoft fo' p",ition i"dioato,
17 _Through_hoi. a 15
@ D'i.<sideofth,tapstl.cto,
.1 -
:12
T.p-,hang" heod
_C""or bolt
:13 - Gask<1 for tap-<h.ng.. co••r
24 _T.p-ehang., h..d eovor
25 - Upp" goo, unit wilh dri•• ,haft 25•
•6 _ P~po oOM.etion R fo, prot.cti•• r<l.y
.7 -P~p. conno"lIOn $ fo, ,uction plp.
~: -~'t" oonnoction 0 for oil ,dum [only with oil filt.. un;t)
a - ••d:' v.iv. oft.p_<h.ngor h•• d rov..
29b - BI ••dong f.cilityfo, t,,,,,,fo,m., oill.nk
290 -Bleeder ,crew fo, .u,lion pip<

~~ _Di",-rter ,witch oil romp.rtm<nt


_011 oom~a'lm.nt. bottom with lOp sel.cto, ,u,ptn,ion
~~ _Connocl,ng t"mlnal of oil comportm<nt
34 -Top-chong" takt-offtermin.1
(with M$ III ~OQ: sla, point termin.1)
35 -Suction pip.
~6 -Smen!ng r~ng> (oniy if Um - 170 kV .nd 245 kV)
~7 -S....nmg rong (only if Urn - 1:13 kY)

41 -Top.docto,
PRQVIDf; SUFFICLENT
42 -lop ..1.<:10, 9""
77.77:77:=~7J
ANCE
. Cl.EA1 4~ -A". t,p ..I.cto,
/777/71///1//77//// / / /7/ ... 7 44 -Change-o,", ,electo,
45 _T.p selector termin.i
TRANSFORMER TAN~ BonOM 46 _Tap ,d<cto; eonn«ting ie.d

51 -Div.rtcrswilcl> unit
5. -Supporting <ylind",
53 -Fix;ng pl.tt
54 -Axing bolt
55 _lifting lug
56 - T..ru;ilion ,<s;,tot!;

OSS/o3/o1/0 27
r~~l --_RJ22 ------cr--""
37,5

._--~

~n--==:l

El "" Bleeding facility for tap-changer head

~
-!- E2 = Bleeding facility for space under the tap-changer head outside the tap changer
oil compartment (same pipe connection as G, S, Ror bleeder screw can be used)
Q = Connection for oil return pipe (only for oil filter)
5 = Connection for suction pipe Connections can be
R = Connection for protective relay turned by 360·
(exchangeable with connection O}
= Ground connection M12

28 06S{03{01/0
Marks to be pounded

065/03/01/0
29
O-Ring 44,2 - 5.7

"",&z""'l~ Suction pipe

Drilling hole represented in the sectional plane

f---~------------'--- .", -------~-~~ . I


Screening ring with f - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . '" ~---------------~
Um =170 kV, 245 kV, 300 kVonly
I Supporting flange - - - i

o
o o

o o
o o
Z = Guiding pin

® Drive side of the tap selector

065}03{01/0
30
M 21.
DIN 580

~Ixi
N
M
M

1.1.5

o
O"l

R -JI---
N

220 o
O"l

Sheet steel
St 37 - 2 DIN 17 100

065/03/01/0
31
I
I
- - ! - - I
I

.....J

-l-
+.}- ~
---r-
r- I-
~
1/2 " 1/2 "
I---
/ '-;-
, '" r=:,
I v110597:47 )- ij 1.---110597 : 63
j--

-+- 1/2 " \i


f
Part no. 014 820 Part no. 017 660
Socket wrench L ~ 1350 mm L= 1860 mm

To be used for on-load Type M (not M OJ Type M III 350 0/6000


tap-changers Type MS Type T
Type RM, R
Type G

065/03/01/0
32
n
)

~ I--'
K)
I

A B c o

Item Quant. Designation Fig. DIN Wrench size


in mm

1 1 Double-ended open-jaw wrench A 895 8 x 10

2 1 Ring and open-jaw wrench C 3113 10


.
3 1 Double-ended open-jaw wrench A 895 13 x 17

4 1 Double-ended socket wrench B 896 13 x 17

5 1 Double-ended open-jaw wrench A 895 17 x 19


6 1 Double-ended open-jaw wrench A 895 22 x 24

7 1 Hexagon socket screw key D 911 4

8 1 Hexagon socket screw key D 911 5

9 1 Hexagon socket screw key D 911 8

065/03/01/0
33
--------,

Cable gland
M25 x 1,5

Identification label

Gasket
1 - - - - -2o, - - - - - 1
Test push buttons
IN SERViCE OFF
(reset) (test tripping)
Dummy plug M25 x 1,5

The arrow must always point towards the oil pipe Plan view of test push buttons
leading to the oil conservator of the transformer. (cover removed)

Variant Key

Contact positions
Variants Relay Designation l ) Reed switch Terminal Arrangement Design
IN SERVICE OFF

t:
0.65 -NO

'\
0
1 1.2
3.0
-NO
-NO
A
1:-0 ;(fr;.!

'~---:-I;I;I""'-
-NO
"E
4.8 1 0

r
~
c

'\:
0.65 -NC
2 1.2 -NC
3.0 -NC
8
0
"
'"
4.8 -NC
2 6 3 2 3
0.65 -CO 6
3 1.2
3.0
4.8
-CO
-CO
-CO
C

1 \ 1 "
~

\: '\: r t:
~

0.65 -2ND ~

t;~
~

4 1.2 -2ND 2A ~

O~ I;l;'lm
3.0 -2ND t:
4.8 -2ND ••
c

r t: \: '\:
0 .- ~
0
0.65 -2NC .... .. c
~
S 1.2 -2NC 28 .~
3.0 -2NC 0 co

\: t r'\:
4.8 -2NC

0.65 -NO+NC
""
'0
~

6 1.2 -NO+NC lAandlB '"


3.0 -NO+NC
4.8 -NO +NC

llNO - normally open contact, NC - normally closed contact, CO - change-over contact


The protective relay must be connected in such a way that if it is energized, the power transformer is immediately
disconnected by its circuit breakers.

34 065/03/01/0
345 330 310
Vertim[ guard plate

1J25
t-M. with spacing ring
Hand crank
70

\
AW...
on
""" ""'"
~ -',!"'V
N
t--
'" t\~~ • N ;J;
~

toR
~ ~ +'
• for designs with

~
*g; "intermediate gear
M"""
<0<0
"':::
@
M
C;;

~ ~

0
\ 3 dummy plates for packing glands
566
speclD.t design for OLTC momtorlng

Wall of transformer tank 1J36


1J20 Shim
:0 " 1/
>: L.
M
M
,

\
~

p: 0$11 o

Attachment of the housing


M16
. o
~
o

560
280 // The [over con be opened to the left or right
depending on the locotion of the hinge pins

~ . approx. 690 if opened 130·


1J 13.5 191.5 191.5
.
(,k I.JL k;"
approx. 864 if opened 180·
[R 0
N N
S

.
-_. __ .-- &-
425
80 224 80
0
0
~
J

,
400
. .
~
0

-- . __ ._- &-
'" ~

;B r
'"
t-- 1/
M
12 174 \;10
RJ 198 198

Aperture of fixing holes on protectivE hOlJsing Aperture in protectivE housing for mbles
(rear view) (underside view!

065/03/01/0
35
345 330 310
Vertico[ guard plate
pi. with spacing ring
70
</J25
Hand crunk
n
""" :'1'. 1/I """
N~
~

• for design with ~


intermediate bearing

~ ao
~
('

3 dummy plates for packing gland

<=I

566
Wall of transformer tank
M16
Attachment of protectivE housing
o
0$1
280
560
. o
~
o

~ 1915 191.5

M
"". ..Jll. b ij The cover can be opened
to the left or to the right
0

. ~ ;,. 690 if opened 130·


N N depending on the arrange-
S

-- ._-.-- I l>-
ment of the hinge pins.
ca. 864- if opened 180'

I
0
425
I
0
~

80 224 80

-- .-1._ ~
~

I 400
. .
~

'"
0
\"
~ r
I ~

'"
~ V 12 174 \;10
I EJ 198 198

Aperture of fixing holes on protective housing Aperture in protectivE housing for [[lbles
(rear view) [underside viewl

36 06SjOJ{Ol/0
~----162
-----133 --~

......- "-
- ---~- ---

l~
i" '

i, i,

, !
~ '"
~
"
KJ"l&,U , --_or"~, - ----- - - -- T

I ft)(m-----~m-----~-+-
i
i

025'
,,
,i
125 ~! I 125 ~

95 ~

\ , 1

, ,~ ,
I , -

065103/01/0
37
Please note: The data in our publications may differ from the data of devices delivered.
We reserve the right to make changes without notice.
SA 65/03 en • 0803/500' 065/03/01/0' F0001602' Printed in Germany
Contents

General 5
1.1 Safety instructions 5
1.2 Specified application ,...................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Function 6
1.4 Type designations 6

2 Design . 7
2.1 Mechanical equipment 7
2.1.1 Protective housing ,............................... 7
2.1.2 Protect'lve hous'lng cover 7
2.1.3 Swing frame 7
2.1.4 Hand crank 7
2.1.5 Indication field............................................................................................................................................ 9
2,1.6 Hand lamp ,......................... 9
2.1.7 Control elements 9
2.1.8 Anti-condensation heater 9
2.2 Gearing ,.,............ 10
2.2.1 Transmission gear _ :................ 10
2.2.2 Control gear 10
2.2.3 Indicating equipment gear...................................................................................................................... 10
2.2.4 Position transmitter equipment 11
2.2.5 Transmission gear, control gear, motor unit wiring 11
2.2.6 Covering for transmission gear, control gear, motor unit............................................................. 11
2.3 Driving motor 11
2.4 Electrical equipment 12
2.4.1 Swing frame................................................................................................................................................. 12
2.4.2 Position transmitter equipment 12
2.4.3 Terminal rails................................................................................................................................................ 13

3 Installation 14
3.1 Installing the motor-drive unit onto the transformer tank 14
3.2 Installing the drive shafts and the bevel gear ,...................................................................................... 14
3.3 Coupling on-load tap-changer and motor-drive 14
3.4 Electrical connection of the motor-drive 17

4 Commissioning 18

4.1 Function test.................................................................................................................................................................. 18


4.1.1 ·Preparations ,...................................................... 18
4.1.2 Checking the step-by-step operation 18
4.1.3 Checking the end position switches and the protective device aga'lnst
passage of positions 18
4.1.4 Check'lng the motor protective switch : ,......................................... 18
4.2 Commissioning on site................................................................................................................................................ 18

138/04/01/0
3
5 Transport 19

6 Maintenance _ 19

7 Special designs 20
7.1 Special designs based on on-load tap-changer features and operating conditions 20

8 Appendix 21
8.1 Type designations 21
8.2 Technical data: motor-drive unit 21
8.3 Technical data: position transmitter equipment 23

CD NOTE
Data contained herein may differ in small ~etails from the motor-drive un"lt delivered.
We reserve the right to make alterations without notice.

4 138/04/01/0
1 General

1.1 Safety Instructions 1.2 Specified application


All personnel involved in installation, commissioning, The motor-drive unit ED is to be used exclusively for operat-
operation, maintenance or repair of the equipment must: ing on-load tap-chimgers and off-circuit tap-changers in
be suitably qualified and regulating transformers as well as for operating plunger-core
strictly observe these Operating Instructions. earth-fault neutralizers.

Improper operation or misuse can lead to


a reduction in the efficiency of the equipment
damage to the equipment and property of the user
ffi CAUTION
serious or fatal injury.
The motor-drive unit may only be used to operate the
Safety instructions in this manual are presented 'in three on-load tap-changerloff-circuit tap-changer of the same
different forms to emphasize important information. serial number. All safety devices have been adjusted to this
specific application.

.& WARNING
It is the responsibility of the uSer to make sure that the
equipment is used for the specified application only.
For safety reasons, unauthorized work, i.e. installation,
This information indicates particular danger to life and modification, alteration, electrical connection or com-
health. Disregarding such a warning can lead to serious or missioning of the equipment must notbe carried out
fatal injury. without first consulting MR !
The trouble-free operation of the motor-drive, the on-load
tap-changerloff-circuit tap-changer and the transformer

ffi CAUTION
may be put at risk.

This information indicates particular danger to the Lock the motor-drive unit using a padlock (not included) to
equipment or other property of the user. Serious or fatal prevent operation by unauthorized personnel.
injury cannot be excluded.

ffi CAUTION
( ] ) NOTE
All relevant fire protection regulations must be strictly
observed.
These notes give important information on a certain
subject.

138/04/01/0
5
1.3 Function
The modular-designed motor-drive unit ED works by
adjusting the operating position of on-load tap-changers MolDr_
ariv.
and off-c"lrcuit tap-changers 'In regulating transformers to
the individual operating requirements (figs. 2, 3).
The tap-change operar,on is activated by starting the motor- ,,"
<d«tor
oo~ o,',~ oo,o~ O"'"""~
O~
0onG>-<?; O~
OO',O~ oo,,~ ~;,'O~ I:O~
°0 '00-0 0o'o"'/i:rf;} 0o~ ',. .
drive (for example by a single control pulse triggered by a ,' II I I ' "
0""",,, 0 0

regulator of the TAPCON®-series). This operation is always


, ,
"

completed regardless of any other control pulses emitted


,
I
I
'i: I , 'I I I

during the operating time. The next tap-change operation


Divert.,
>Witch : I1
, 1 I, "
op.ration
i J
can only proceed once the control devices have been P

adjusted to their rest positions.


0,0
',' 0,3 0,8

Fig. 1 shows the sequence of a tap-change operation. ca.5,4.

~
.. R:, ~ j Wfiim
.
Divert..
switob
<entad
w
.,
·am· '"

.~. .~ .~., .
mo•• ",enl

" " .... . .,

1.4 Type designation


The various basic designs of the motor-drive ED are clearly identified by explicit product definitions.

6 138j04{01/0
2 Design

2.1 Mechanical equipment 2.1.3 Swing frame


2.1.1 Protective housing
The motor-drive unit ED is characterized by two main
features: its uniform construction for all motor-drive designs
& WARNING
and its modular drive concept. Before opening the swing frame the relevant safety
instrucflons must be observed in order to avoid
The motor-drive is available in two types of protective
serious or fatal injury.
housing with the same arrangements for the attachment
points and the drive shaft (fig. 2 ED 100/2005 and fig. 3
ED 100/200 l ). All control elements are installed in a closed swing-frame
The protective housing consists of two parts, the housing and panel located behind the protective housing cover. This panel
the cover, both of which are made of non-corrod"lng cast- protects all electrical and mechanical parts of the motor-
aluminium. They are finished with a one-layer prime coat drive against accidental contact.
(RAl6019) and a one-layer finishing coat (RAL 7033). The closing system of the swing frame is designed to prevent
The spaces between the housing and the cover, as wellas all the frame from banging against the base or cover. The closed
apertures required for operation (driven shaft, inspection swing frame is attached to the protective housing by two
window, aperture for hand crank in special arctic design, spring-supported door bolts. The standard design of the
etc.), are thoroughly sealed. Thus protection against dust and swing frame always opens to the left.
jets of water is ensured OP 66).
The protective housing is ventilated by two labyrinth vents, 2.1.4 Hand crank
with metal filters on both sides of the housing. The bottom
of the housing is made up of three plates providing entries The hand crank is used to manually operate the motor-drive
for the cables. in emergencies or for adjustment purposes. It is attached to
the upper cover plate inside the protective housing.
2.1.2 Protective housing cover
In the standard design, the cover is attached to the base by
two hinges and it opens to the left. The standard cover has
&. CAUTION
an opening angle of 130'. When manually operating the motor-drive unit only use
There is a pocket attached to the inside of the protective the built':"in hand crank. Otherwise, there is a risk of serious
housing cover to hold the connection diagrams. or fatal injury.
The safety switch in the hand crank disconnects the motor-
drive circuit at two poles; however, it does not disconnect
the control circuit.

h...il ,$iii,

~
, q!y
III I
MR j~

i
I

I .
t,
I

2 3
~jtJ
13S/04{OljO
7
[J
@ -eot,ve
[J@ ...... 541.737 ~

,,-
21 22
24~
"T..
.... ' G
~
....... ,.....
IIIL \,,,

e
. ..
0

CJ
@
.. @

9
:)
0

@
&
4
8 m/04/01jo
2.1.5 Indication field 2.1.7 Control elements
A clearly arranged indication field (fig. 5) is installed in the The standard design contains the following control elements
upper part of the control panel cover (fig. 4). mounted in the upper part of the swing frame (see fig. 4):
The data displayed and the displays are detailed as follows:
- Door contact for switching on the lamp
- Motor protective switch
- Control switch "RAISE/LOWER" to initiate a tap-change
operation electrically.

2.1.8 Anti-condensation heater

& CAUTION

Do not touch the panel heater as it becomes very hot


during operation.

The anticondensation heater, fig. 4 (ED 100/200 S:


5 50 W, ED 100/200 L: 60 W) is designed as a panel heater
which also acts as the front cover of the swing frame.

@) - The mechanical operation counter shows the overall


number of operations performed by-the motor-drive.
l3) - The posiflon indicator shows the position of the motor-
CD NOTE
drive and the on-load tap-changer (standard, This new heater design:
max. 35 positions) / off-circuit tap-changer). is a complete anti-condensation heater suitable
@ - The two drag hands indicate the regulating range for all climate regions except the arctic.
currently used. - saves the need for an anti-condensation coat jf
o - The tap change indicator shows the current position of it has a MR-standard inside coat.
the control cam (33 sections per tap-change operation) does not require a thermostat or a hygrometer.

Pointer and operations counter are mechanically driven and


indicate the switching sequence of the motor-drive.
The reset-wheelan the operations counter is lead-sealed at
the factory.

2.1.6 Hand lamp


There is a 4 W tubular fluorescent lamp (cable length ca. 1 m)
inside the protective housing which is switched on via a door
contact when the door is opened.

13B/04/01/0 9
2.2 Gearing It contains cam discs which are used to mechanically trigger
the cam switches. The modular-designed position indicator
2.2.1 Transmission gear
equipment and the additional cam-operated contacts are
Transmission gear, control gearand the gear for the indi- driven by the control gear, the indicating equipment gear is
cating equipment are located in the upper part of the pro- driven by a cam shaft (fig. B).
tective housing. They are protected against accidental
contact by a cover plate.

8 KHW929

Electrical nmit switches prevent overrunning of the end


positions. In addition to this, mechanical and electrical
6
limiting devices prevent tap-change operations beyond the
regulating range.
The entire gearing system (fig. 6) is located behind the upper
control panel in the upper part of the housing. The transmis- 2.2.3 Indicating equipment gear
s'lon gear is a low-noise, single-stage belt-type gear which has
unchanging 16.5 revolutions [~ 33 hand crank rotations} per
switching operation. The transmission is a wear-resistant belt.
'"
14
15161718192021
22,'
"T-;',,,, /....w

CD
\LI
13 23 - -
NOTE 11
12 24 =
25 ..../ : : :
=
10 261'1; \,'
The transmission gear belt must not come into contact 9 27 I I I \

with lubricants. 8 28
7 ~
6 30
5 31
2.2.2 Control gear 4 3r _
3
The control gear (fig. 7) (step-by-step device with cam- 34
(J) 2 35 (J)
operated contacts) is installed below the transmission gear.
9

The indicating equipment gear [fig. 9) mechanically reflects


the tap position on the indicator panel.

7 KHW 935

10 138/04/01/0
2.2.4 Position transmitter equipment 2.3 Driving motors
The position transmitter equipment comprises: The ED motor-drive is equipped with a three-phase motor
- the pos·ltion transmHter, which covers a wide voltage range as well as covering the 50/
60 Hz frequencies. The motor unit is installed below the
- the position transmitter module and
transmission gear.
- a plug-in connecting cable.
The on-load tap-changers and their corresponding motor-
The position transmitter is installed below the control gear. drive unit designs are listed in a separate selection table.
The position transmitter module for the connection by the
customer is located on the terminal rails (fig. 12).

2.2.5 Transmission gear, control gear, motor unit


wiring
The transmission gear, control gear and motor unit are wired
using black. flexible line material (1.5 mm').

2.2.6 Covering for transmission gear, control gear,


motor unit
The touch-protected covering of the transmission gear,
control gear and motor unit is provided w·lth an opening for
the hand crank used for manual operation (fig. 10).
The covering is equipped with fixing clamps and hooks to
hold the hand lam p and the hand crank.

10

13B!a4/a1{a
11
2.4 Electrical equipment 2.4.2 Position transmitter equipment

2.4.1 Swing frame In' the standard model, the following designs of the position
transmitting equipment are available:
resistor-type position transmitter device
N/Q contact position transmitter device
• break before make-type
• make before break-type
pas"ltion transmitter module, diode matrix

11

The electrical equipment is mounted on the back of the


swing frame (fig. 11). Mounting rails and clamping rails
(some two-sided) allow for an easy installation of
components.
The individual devices are clearly marked with designations
for easier identification on the connection diagram kept in
the pocket of the door.
In the standard design, the swing frame is equipped with the
following components:
- anti-condensation heating: designed as a panel
heater (temperature increase in relation to ambient
temperature by M ~ 7 K)
- motor protection w"lth trip coil
control switch for RAISE/LOWER control
contactors for RAISE/LOWER
- auxiliary contactor for step-by-step operation
door contact for hand lamp
The cable connection bundle between the swing frame and
the terminal rails has a zip and a strain relief device on both
sides.

138/04/01/0
12
2.4.3 Terminal rails
The wiring is easily connected using vertically arranged
The terminal board facilitates an easy electrical connection clamping rails and terminal bars.
of the motor-drive unit (fig. 12).

@)
@)

4 1 3

1 - cable entries 6 connection bundle


[closed by 3bottom plates) swing frame - terminal rails
2 terminal bar Xl 7 connection bundle
3 - cable duct terminal rails - transmission gear,
4 - clamping rail control gear, motor unit
5 position transmitter module

12 KHW 1168

138/04/01/0

13
3 Installation

3.1 Installing the motor"drive unit onto the 3.3 Coupling on"load tap"changer and motor"drive
transformer tank
The motor"drive unit is installed using 4 stud bolts (not in"
cluded in MR delivery) attached to the transformer tank.
The necessary drill holes are located outside on the brackets.
.& CAUTION

of the protective housing. The drill hole arrangement in all Make sure that the on"load tap"changer completes the
ED motor-drive designs is "Identical. tap"change operation before the motor"drive stops by
For correct attachment of the 4 stud bolts onto the trans" correctly coupling the motor"drive to the on"load tap"
former tank see the dimension diagram in paragraph 8.3. changer and also ensuring that the position indication of
the on"load tap"changer and the motor"drive are the same
for each operating position. These measures can prevent

.& CAUTION
damage to the motor"drive, on"load tap"changer and the
transformer.

The motor,.-drive's protective housing must not be warped


or deformed in any way when fixing it to the transformer
The above-mentioned requirements are met by setting the
tank.
time at which the operation of the on"load tap"changer
Make sure the motor-drive is mounted vertically and that occurs 1.5 - 2 sections before the grey area of the tap
its driven shaft is correctly aligned with the vertical drive change indicator (fig. 13).
shaft of the bevel gear in order to prevent damage to the
motor"drive, the on"load I off"circuit tap"changer and the Centre mark Resting range of
transformer.
t / the motor-drive

If the transformer causes extremely strong mechanical vibra-


tions, the use of vibration absorbers is recommended. 1/
/'
3.2 Installing the drive shafts and the bevel gear
Further information on attaching these drive components
can be found in the Operating Instructions No. BA 42.
-
'---
/' "---
/ "..
II \ \ \
/
13 aus KHW 934

The centre mark in the grey field of the tap"change indica"


tion will be used as reference for the following procedures.
One tap"change operation is represented by one rotation of
the pointer on the tap change indicator. This indicator is
divided into 33 sections where one section corresponds to
one rotation of the hand crank.
The number of sections from the beginning of the diverter
switch action until the pointer reaches the centre mark of
the resting range should be equal in both directions.

138/04/01/0
14
Aslight asymmetry of a max. of 1 section is permissible.
To obtain a symmetrical coupling, proceed as follows:
& WARNING

Before starting any coupling work make sure that the


motor protective switch is tripped to prevent an unin-
tentional start of the motor-drive.

Carry out any adjustment work by manual operation only.

Attach the hand crank in the motor-drive to the shaft end located in the upper cover
plate. This activates a safety switch which disconnects the motor-drive at two poles.

Make sure the on-load tap-changer and the motor-drive are in their adjustment
positions before commencing any adjustment work.
When adjusting, make sure the posiflon indicators on the on-load tap-changer and
on the motor-drive are identical.

Couple the motor-drive and vertical drive shaft by mounting the coupling brackets.

[~
Ifl2J
Turn hand crank in one direcflon until the diverter switch operation begins.
When operating the motor-drive manually, observe the tap change
indicator which mechan·,cally reflects the progress of the tap-change
operation.

Once the diverter switch operation begins, turn the hand crank in the
same direction while counting the sections required for the pointer to
reach the centre mark of the tap-change indicator.
Note the determ·med value A and the direction of rotation.

..
The tap-change operation is completed.

138/04/01/0
15
Turn the hand crank in the opposite direction, until the diverter switch
operation occurs.

8'3
Rest position ''<110o,
Count the remaining sections from the time the diverter switch
operation occurs until the pointer reaches the centre mark of
the tap-change indicator.
Note the determined value Band the direction of rotation.
(centre mark)

1)
~,' \
~stant of diverter
'-:- switch operation

- d ,-

If the values obtained for both directions are identical, the on-load tap-changer and the
motor-drive are correctly coupled.
- A=B

As a control measure, carry out several tap-change operations in both directions.

If the values for A and Bare not equal, proceed as follows:


6
Determine the correction value C by
d',viding the d',fference between A
and Bby 2.

Uncouple the motor-drive and the vertical drive shaft by removing the coupling
brackets

Operate the motor-drive using the hand crank in direction of the higher value, either A or B by the number of sections on
the tap-change indication which equals C.

Re-couple motor-drIVe and on-load tap-changer and check the coupling using the above procedure.

Make sure that the pointer of the' tap-change indicator is in centre position within the grey
field once the manual operation is finished.

Check the coupling after adjustment work by carrying out a few tap-change operations in both directions.
Check that the operating posit',ons of the on-load tap-changer and the motor-drive are identical.

138/04/01/0
16
3.4 Electrical connection of the motor-drive

& WARNING

Before connecting the motor-drive to the mains supply,


the relevant safety instructions must be observed in order
to prevent serious or fatal injury.

Connect the motor-drive to the ma'lnS supply according to


the connection diagram in the pocket of the swing frame
door. The standard terminal block illustrated 'm fig. 14 on the
terminal rail X(fig. 12) is used for this purpose.

Terminal bar Xl

,...- w
f-
000 a.
000 W

- 000 .~
a.

....
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 '"
M

0 0 0 ....
0 0 0 It>

0 0 0 (l)

0 0 0 ....

14

138/04/01/0 17
4 Commissioning

4.1 Function test 4.1.3 Checking the end position switches and the
protective device against passage of positions
4.1.1 Preparations
- To check the end position switch, operate the motor
drive to the penultimate position by turning the control
& WARNING
switch 53. Using the hand crank, manually operate the
motor-drive to its end position.
When the 53 switch is turned further in the same direc-
The function test must be performed with the supply tion, the motor-drive must not continue to operate.
voltage connected. Make sure that the on-Ioad/off-circuit Check to make sure.
tap-changer completes the tap-change operation before
the motor-drive stops by properly coupling the motor- Using the same procedure, operate the motor-drive to the
drive to the on-Ioad/off-circuit tap-changer. Also ensure other end position and repeat the above check.
that the position indications of the on-Ioad/off-circuit Check that the pointer of the tap-change indication is in the
tap-changer and the motor-drive are the same for each grey field.
operating position. These measures can prevent damage to To check the protective device against passage of positions,
the motor-drive, the on-Ioad/off-circuit tap-changer and operate the motor-drive using the hand crank while the
the transformer. motor protective switch is activated.
The relevant safety instructions must be strictly observed Check that the motor protective switch trips after a max. of
to prevent serious or fatal injury. 4 sections.

ill
4.2 Commissioning on site
CAUTION The function tests as per 4.1 are to be repeated before the
transformer is commissioned.
Electrical mains supply
Make sure that the mains supply fulfils all the connection
requirements of the motor-drive unit. & WARNING

Phase sequence test Under no circumstances is the transformer to be com-


When checking the motor c"lrcuit voltage, make sure that missioned, if the devices described in 4.1 do not pass the
voltage applied to the connecting terminals has a clockwise function test. Otherwise serious or fatal injury may result.
phase sequence.

4.1.2 Checking the step-by-step operation


Initiate a tap-change operation by turning the control
switch 53 (fig. 15) and keeping it turned while the
ill CAUTION

motor-drive is in operation. In case of a longer period before commission"lng or a shut


Check that the motor-drive switches off automatically down period of more than 8 weeks, the heater of the
after performing one operation of the on-Ioad/off-circuit motor-drive unit should be connected and operated.
tap-changer and that the pointer of the tap-change indi-
cator stops within the grey field.
Carry out this test in both directions.

IJII~,-II
LjL""","-L"-,"_L.J~ _ _~ l.J
-r-;"'--C_c--l

15
18 138/04/01/0
5 Transport 6 Maintenance

If it is neccessary to remove the motor-drive for transporting The ED motor-drive unit does not require regular main-
the transformer, proceed according to section 3 of these tenance. However, if used with industrial transformers, our
Operating Instructions when re-installing the unit. Technical Service department must be contacted after the
unit performs 500.000 tap-change operations.

CD NOTE
ill WARNING
To prevent damage to the motor-drive unit during trans-
portation use the packing material provided by the MR The control checks must be performed with the supply
delivery. voltage connected.
if the motor-drive has to be removed for transporting the
The relevant safety instructions must be strictly observed.
transformer from the factory to the site of operation,
FaHure to do so can lead to serious or fatal injury.
operate the on-ioad/off-circuit tap-changer and the
motor-drive to the adjustment position beforehand.
Reinstall the motor"drive according to sectibn 3 of these We recommend that the following control checks be carried
Operating Instructions. out on the motor-drive unit during routine transformer
inspections:
- checking that the sealing of the protective housing is
water-proof,
checking that the built-in electrical heater is functioning
trouble-free,
- checking the exterior condition of the equipment
installed in the motor-drive.
When inspecting the on-load tap-changer, also carry out a
functional test of the motor-drive according to 4.1 .

.
'

13B{04{Ol{O
19
7 Special designs

The standard design of the ED motor-drive unit can be modified to accommodate specific operating requirements.

7.1 Special designs based on on-load tap-changerfeatures and operating conditions

20 13B/04!Ol{O
8 Appendix

8.1 Technical data: motor-drive unit


The technical data is relevant to the standard design and may vary depending on the design delivered. It is subject to change
without notice.

138/04/01/0
21
8.2 Technical data: position transmitter equipment
Resistance-type position transmitter
Standard resistance: 10.0 Q (0,6 W, +!-1 0/0) per step
The maximum load on the module is determined by the number of resistors loaded and can be inferred from the capability
curve below. The permissible supply voltage is calculated from these power ratings and the total resistance value. However, the
supply voltage should not exceed DC 220 V.

load on the resistance-type position transmitter


Permissible load in relation to the number of resistors

,
~ .0

"
"15
E
2

:5" ,,5
c
o
~

.2 1
I·-I----

--_.

a --~

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Number of resistors loaded

N!D contact position transmitter (break-before-make contact)


AC: 250 V, 0.5 A (ohmic load)
DC: 220 V, 0.5 A (ohmic load)
Minimum voltage level for signal and data processing: 24 V

N!D contact position transmitter (make"before-break contact)


AC. DC: 250 V, 0.02 A (ohmic load)
AC. DC: 24 V, 0.20 A (ohmic load)
Minimum voltage level for signal and data processing: 24 V

N!D contact position transmitter, lOA (make-before-break contact) for controlling current matching transformer in
industrial applications.
AC!DC: 250 V. 10 A (ohmic load)
AC, DC: 24 V. 10 A (ohmic load)

Position transmitter, diode matrix


DC: 220 V, 0.5 A (ohmic load)
Minimum voltage level for signal and data processing: 24 V

138/04{Ol{O
22
8.3 Dimension drawings

Motor-drive unit ED-S, protective housing 8988012E

Motor-drive unit ED-L, protective housing 8988022E

138/04/01/0
34'> 330 310
Vertjm[ guard plute with
154 spacing ring 70
'1J25 Hand crank
\
~
,n .t! ~

0:~,",
""'" <0.

~
~ ~
N -0

• for design with ;=j


t.R\ -v
~~
~

intermediate bearing

~
.
~
ro r. ~
~

0;

.
~ ~

\ 3 dummy plates for po.cking olands


566
speclil! design With ommomtorlrlg reqUired

Wall of trallsformer tank


'1J36
Shim

Attachment of protective housing

560
The [over mn be opened
280 to the left or to the right

~
'1J 13.5 depending on the arrange-
191.5 191.5
ment of the hinge pins.
• ;a. 690 if opEned 130'
.J1l. kt-. ca. 864 if opened 180'
0
N
S
"'"
-- ------; ~ 425
80 224 80

-- ------ l-
. .
400 '"
0' 0
!i1'
~ r
'"
'"
~ /
12 174 \;10
~ 198 198
Aperture of fixing holes on protective housing Aperture in protective housing for cables
[rear viewl (underside view]

24 138/04/01/0
345 330 310
Vertical guard plate with
1;25
r-12L spacing ring 70
Hand crank

"., f ... ..IlL

I'• N"I~ e- '"

~ f '=
• for design with
., intermediate bearing

~
~
.
f

3 dummy plates for packing glllflds


~Spe(jQl design with om monitoring reQUired
~ c

0/ ~
1;36
1;20
"", ,
566
Wall of tl1I1sformer tank Shim
M16
Attachment of profe(ti~e housing
o
560
0$1
280
. l¥f •
o o
1; 13.5 , 191.5 191.5
>-..L ~ k .ij The [over can be opened
0 to the left or to the right
N ~.
S
-- '-,-
I . _ - ll-
• ~o. 690 if opened 130" depending on the arrange-
ment of the hinge pins.
[[I. 864 if opened 180·

I
425
I 80 224 80

_.-l._ t-
:
I 400
. .
~
0
'"
~ r '"
I
~

'"
~ v 12 174 \;10
I ~ 198 198

,
Aperture of fixing holes on protective housing Aperture in protective housing for mbles
[rear view) (underside view)

138fo4jOljO
25
Please note: The data in our publications may differ from the data of devices delivered.
We reserve the right to make changes without notice.
BA 138/04 en· 1104/3000. 138/04/01/0· F0047003 • Printed in Germany
Table of Contents

General......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Safety instructions 4
1.2 Designated application c............................................................................................. 4
1.3 Function 5
1.3.1 Function principle 5
1.3.2 Cleaning and drying 5
1.3.2.1 Cleaning of the switching oil by a paper filter 5
1.3.2.2 Cleaning and drying of the switching oil bya combined filter cartridge 5
1.4 Type designations 6
1.5 Available designs 6

2 Design 7
2.1 Suction pipe 7
2.2 Pipes , , , , ,................................................ 7
2.3 Pump unit ,................. 7
2.3.1 Pump motor 7
2.3.2 Feed pump 8
2.3.3 Fiiter cartridge 8
2.3.4 Tank 8
2.4 Control............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.4.1 Control inside the motor drive housing 8
2.4.1.1 Electrical control........................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1.2 Electrical protection 8
2.4.2 Control in separate control cabinet n..... 9
2.4.2.1 Electrical control........................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.2.2 Heating 9
2.4.2.3 Electrical protection 9
2.4.2.4 Electrical monitoring equipment 9
2.4.2.5 Control cabinet 9

3 Criteria for operation , ,............ 10

CD NOTE
Changes may have been made to a product after going to press with this documentation.
We expressly reserve the right to make changes to a product's technical data and design as well as changes to the scope
of delivery,
In all cases, the information submitted and agreements concluded during processing of the qi,jotation and order
in question shall be binding.

2 8A 18/06 018106101/0
Table of Contents

4 .Installation 11

5 Commissioning ,.................................................................................................................................................... 15
5.1 Time switch 14
5.2 Filter cartridge 14
5.2.1' Paper filter cartridge 14
5.2.2 Combined fi Iter cartridge 14
5.2.2.1 Oil quality check regarding water content during commissioning and
during operation 15

6 Replacement of the filter cartridge 16


6.1 Paper filter cartridge 16
6.1.1 Replacement of the filter cartridge c................................................................. 16
6.2 Combined filter cartridge 16
6.2.1 Replacement of the combined filter cartridge 16

7 Special designs 18

8 Disposal of used filter cartridges 18

9 Appendix...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19

018f06/01{O BA 18/06 3
1 General

1.1 Safety instructions


All personnel involved in installation, commissioning,
operation, maintenance or repair of the equipment must:
it. CAUTION

be suitably qualified and Since the instruments of the oil filter plant (manometer.
strictly observe these Operating Instructions. pressure switch) are not absolutely vacuum-proof. the stop
valves in fig. 1 (item 5) must be closed during the entire oil
Improper operation or misuse can lead to
filling procedure (application of vacuum and oil filling).
a reduction in the efficiency of the equipment After the oil filling procedure of the on-load tap-changer,
damage of the equipment and property of the the stop valves in fig. 1 (item 5) must be opened.
user
serious or fatal injury. The amount of oil which flows into the oil filter plant
(approx. 35 I + quantity in the applicable pipe lines) must
Safety instructions in this manual are presented in three be added to the on-load tap-changer oil conservator.
different forms to emphasize important information.

~ WARNING Lt. CAUTION


This information indicates particular danger to life and It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the oil
health. Disregarding such a warning can lead to serious or filter unit is to be used for the designated application only.
fatal injury. For safety reasons, do not carry out any unauthorized work,
Le. during installation, modification, commissioning and
alteration of the oil filter unit without first consulting MR!

Lt CAUTION The trouble-free operation of the motor-drive, the on-load


tap-changer and the transformer may be put at risk.
This information indicates particular danger to the
equipment or other property of the user. Serious or fatal
injury cannot be excluded.

it. CAUTION
,
CD Note
Observe the local environmental regUlations when handling
the tap-changer oil.

These notes give important information on a certain


subject.

& WARNING

1.2 Designated application All relevant fire protection regUlations must be strictly
observed.
The oil filter unit OF 100 is exclusively used for cleaning and
drying the switching oil of on-load tap-changers in power
transformers and plunger-core earth-fault neutralizers.

Lt CAUTION

Do not dry the oil filter plant and the control cabinet
(special design) together with the transformer.

4 BA 18/06 018/06101/0
1.3 Function 1.3.2 Cleaning and drying
1.3.1 Function principle The oil filter unit is used for cleaning or for cleaning and
The cylindrical tank of the pump unit contains the feed drying the switching oil in on-load tap-changers.
pump, the pump motor and the filter insert. The flange Depending on requirements, it can be fitted with a paper
connections for oil feed and return are located on the top filter (for cleaning) or with a combined filter (for cleaning
and bottom covers, and drying).

The pump unit draws the switching oil in through the suction
pipe of the tap-changer and the feed pipe.
1.3.2.1 Cleaning of the switching oil by
The oil enters the tank of the pump unit and is then pressed
paper filter
through the filter insert by the feed pump. The filtered oil (in
case of combined filter insert filtered and dried) leaves the When on-load tap-changers are used in industrial trans-
tank through the flanged connector and returns to the tap- formers under extremely onerous conditions (high switching
changer head through the return pipe. frequencies, consistently at full load and high frequent
overloads) arcing will relatively soon cause contamination of
the switching oil. This applies, for example, to On-load tap-
& CAUTION changers incorporated into transformers on furnace or
electrolytic plants.

Replace the filter cartridge when the working pressure These service conditions can be met by an oil filter unit with
exceeds 3.5 bar and the oil temperature is higher than a paper filter insert.
20" C. The paper filter cartridge allows to clean the oil from solid
particles. The number of inspections and oil changes which
are otherwise necessary at short intervals, is reduced.
A pressure switch, set at 3.5 14.0 bar (combined filter 1 paper
filter cartridge) at the factory closes a signalling contact, The specific contamination of the switching oil depends on:
when the critical pressure has been reached and gives a the quantity of oil (litres)
remote signal to the control room. • the switching energy (kWs)
If required by the customer, the signal of the pressure switch • the switching frequency
is suppressed by an integrated temperature switch if the oil
temperature falls below 20 "C. In this case an incorrect signal Refer to section 3, table-' and 2 for the criteria on how to
due to an increased oil viscosity is avoided (special design). use the oil filter unit

1.3.2.2 Cleaning and drying of the switching


Q) NOTE oil by a combined filter cartridge
(paper filter with drying agent)
Please note that the manometer may trip during start-up When the on-load tap-changer is installed in areas where
due to a higher viscosity of the oil in the presence of a low humidity is extremely high and the temperature in the oil
oil temperature (standard design). conservator usually falls below the dew point every day, an
This signal can be ignored" when the oil temperature is increased water content in the tap-changer oil and an
below 20 ·C. accumulation of water in the carbon deposited on the
insulating materials can occur which will deteriorate the
insulating properties ofthe on-load tap-changer.

Refer to section 3, table' and 2 for the criteria on how to


use the oil filter unit

018J06/OlfO
BA 18/06 5
The combined filter cartridge not only filters contaminating
particles from the switching oil but also reduces the water
content to a residual amount of < 10 ppm.
CD NOTE
The necessary oil monitoring can be reduced and an oil
Please note that the storage time of a combined filter
conditioning during maintenance may not be required.
cartridge in its original wrapping should not exceed
The combined filter cartridge is equipped with a paper filter
4 years. Otherwise the trouble- free function of the filter
on the outside (filter fineness ca. 9 micron) and filled with a
drying agent on the inside (granules approx. 4 kg). plant cannot be guaranteed.

& CAUTION & CAUTION

Check after receipt of the delivery that the transport Because of the highly hygroscopic properties of the drying
container with the combined filter cartridge is undamaged. agent do not remove the combined filter cartridge from
Even minor damage to the air-tight wrapping can render the transport container until immediately before installa-
the filter cartridge useless in a very short time. tion into the pump unit and commissioning of the plant.
Carefully store the filter cartridge In its air-tight wrapping.

1.4 Type designations


The different basic designs of the oil filter unit OF 100 are identified by distinctive product designations.

OF 100 DC Oil filter unit with control in the motor-drive unit with combined filter cartridge
OF 100 DP Oil filter unit with control in the motor-drive unit with paper filter cartridge
OF 100 D Control for oil filter unit in the motor-drive unit without pump unit

OF 100 SO Oil filter unit with separate control cabinet with combined filter cartridge
OF100SP Oil filter unit with separate control cabinet with paper filter cartridge
OF laO S Control in a separate control cabinet without pump unit

OF 100 NO Oil filter unit with combined filter cartridge without control
OF 100 NP Oil filter unit with paper filter cartridge without control

1.5 Available designs

with without integrated in ED separate control

Standard design • •
Special design • •

6 018/06/0110
BA 18106
2 Design (see fig. 1)

A complete oil filter unit comprises the following 2.3 Pump unit (appendix, dim. drwg. 898718)
components:
For transformers one pump unit with filter
cartridge
2.1 Suction pipe
is installed for each switching column.
A suction pipe installed in the on-load tap-changer which
leads from the tap-changer oil compartment bottom to the
tap-changer head.
2.3.1 Pump motor

Ratings (standard design)


2.2 Pipes
Power: 1.1 kW
Two pipes (feed and return, nominal width not less than Voltage: 3 AC 230/400 V (other voltages on
22 mm) with appropriate flanges D115. request)
When installing the pump unit, the feed and return pipe is to Rated current: 4.5/2.6 A
be equipped with a stop valve. Frequency: 50-60Hz
The pipes and accessories are to be provided by the Synchronous speed: 3000 llmin (50 Hz)
transformer manufacturer. 3600 llmin (60 Hz)

Ah1~.H'I--- 7

~:i
3 4 5 6
~~ii
'TIT Oil filter unit,
I schematic illustration
_._._"I
1 Pump unit
2 Contact manometer
1" 3 Pressure switch
Ad1fung
:: :.:.=::;:::.~
==:;:====:: 4 Oil return
5 Stop valve
6 Oil return pipe
7 - Tap-changer head
8 Oil feed
9 Drain valve

I
1" I
I
8 I
_._._ .....-.i

9 ---.-J:\."S,?
inlB31

018106/01/0
BA 18/06 7
2.3.2 Feed pump 2.4 Control
Centrifugal pump 2.4.1 Control inside the motor drive housing
capacity approx. 65 IImin (35 I/min)
2.4.1.1 Electrical control
against a pressure of 0.5 bar (3.5 bar)
The electrical control of the standard design is installed in
2.3.3 Filter cartridge: the housing of the motor drive unit (fig. 3).

Design with paper filter cartridge for cleaning of the Control by a potential·free contact of the motor drive;
switching oil, filter fineness ca. 9 micron Operating time:
Design with a combined filter cartridge for cleaning . factory setting by time relay
and drying of the switching oil, filter fineness (see. table 1, section 3);
9 micron. granule filling approx. 4 kg - by control switch for permanent operation
Voltage: AC 230 V
2.3.4 Tank
Steel cylinder with top and bottom covers (pump flange) 2.4.1.2 Electrical protection
Outdoor design Each pump motor is provided with a motor
Dimensions (W x H x D) = 410 x 925 x 406 mm protective switch with thermal and magnetic
outside paint RAL 7033 overload trip
Test pressure 6 bar
Flanged connectors for feed and return pipes
Manometer (mounted to pressure tank)
Pressure switch (mounted to pressure tank)
a<jjustable from 0... 6 bar, set at 3.5 bar,
contact rating: AC 250 V, I = 3 A
P = 500 VA/250 W m"
m"
Temperature switch (special design) at the bottom
(pump flange installed) fig. 2
set to 20 ± 5 "C,
contact rating: AC 230 V, lOA
Weight of the complete pump unit (dry): approx.75 kg
Oil capacity: approx. 35 litres

3
4

1 - Temperature switch
(optional)
2 - Oil sample valve
3 - Earthing screw
4 - Terminal box
5 - Stop valve
KHW 1122-4-01
2 KHW 1143

018/06/01fO
8 8A 18/06
2.4.2 .Control in separate control cabinet (special design) 2.4.2.3 Electrical protection
2.4.2.1 Electrical control Each pump motor is provided with a motor
protective switch with thermal and magnetic
The electrical control of the standard design is installed in
overioad trip
a separate control cabinet (fig. 4).
Automatic cutout for control circuit
Control by a potential-free contact of the motor drive;
Operating time:
- factory setting by time relay 2.4.2.4 Electrical monitoring equipment
(see table 1, section 3); Elapsed-hour meter, 5-digit display
adjustable up to 24 hours by time switch (recording of pump operating time)
(see page 14, section 5.1.1);
Pulse counter, 6-digit display
by control switch for permanent operation.
(recording of pump starting frequency)
Voltage: AC 230 V
Power consumption per motor co"ntactor: 2.4.2.5 Control cabinet
65 VA (initial)
9 VA (running) Sheet-steel housing, outdoor design, protection IP 55
WxHxD: 400x600x210mm
2.4.2.2 Heating Paint: RAL 7033
Voltage: AC 230 V Weight: ca. 10.5 kg
. Power: 15 W

530 K1 K29

Control cabinet with eqUipment for one


pump unit

K29 Time delay relay


Kl Motor contactor
530 Control switch
P2 Time switch
P3 Elapsed-hour meter
F14 Automatic cutout
.2 +i+-+-
Ql Motor protective switches
H6 Counter
Rl Heating
Xl Terminal strip

Xl

o
KHW 903-4
4
018f06/01/0 SA 18/06 9
3 Criteria for operation

For the operation of process transformers with an annual For OLTCs in operation with full insulation between the
number of switching operations> 15,000 it is recommended phases (V III .. .D, H III .. .D, M III ...0 as well as the single-phase
that an oil filter plant with a paper filter cartridge be in- switches with Um > 300 kV) the installation of an oil filter
stalled, as this will extend the length of the maintenance plant with combined filter cartridge is recommended for
interval (refer to operating instructions of the various maintaining the dielectric properties of the switching oil
on-load tap-changers). according to table 2.

Type V, H 30 min.
Type M, MS 30 min.
Type R, RM 60 min.
Type T 60 min.
Type G 60 min.

Table 1 Factory setting of pump running time of the oil filter unit with paper filter or combined filter cartridge for
various OLTC types.

V 111200 0-76
V III 350 0-76 55 kV < UblW '; 79 kV
V 111500 0-76 Urn = highest voltage
79 kV < U.sT '; 123 kV for equipment
H 111400 0-123 79 kV < UblW '; 123 kV OLTC
H 111400 0-145 123 kV < UblW '; 145 kV > 245 kV
H 111400 0-145 79 kV < UblW '; 95 kV ' 1
1) autotransformer

Table 2 Operating criteria which make the installation of an oil filter unit with combined filter cartridge Obligatory.

018106/01/0
10 SA 18/06
4 Installation

The installation of the complete oil filter unit should be carried


out in the following steps:
Attach the pipes and fastenings (studs) for pump unit and
&. CAUTION
control cabinet (special design) to the transformer tank. Check the oil level in the oil conservator after the installa-
tion.
The trOUble-free op~ration of the oil filter unit, the on-
&. CAUTION load tap-changer and the transfomer may be put at risk.

Please note that a stop valve is obligatory on the feed and


return pipe flange (fig. 7). Without it large amounts of
tap-changer oil can leak out during the changing of the
filter.

Before proceeding with the installation, install the on-


R s Q
load tap-changer in the transformer, dry it and fill it with
oil.

Attach pump unit and control cabinet (special


design) to the transformer tank.
Connect the pipes to the tap-changer head (fig. 6) and
to the pump unit (fig. 7), see also fig. 11.
Establish an electrical connection with the pressure switch
( see connection plug in fig. 5) respectively the temperat-
ure switch (special design).

CD NOTE
Take care to keep the inner surfaces of the pipes absolutely
clean and free of rust, scaling etc. 6

r:n
F=!
~~
.",. . " "~';:
--::::. -
.~
~\ ~.,. Connected to Q
(compare to , 1

\ ~ (fj fig. 8) , =~"''''.


,,,,,-'-
It~
I i~:='·
E '

\ s<tl8lo:r"tl<, .. ~ ... J.5~"


\J-Z50V tu:- 1_3A
I
!111 I~- t-:.-
I ~,
l'_OOOVI;l25D W
« i
~
MR-Nr:7l1OW':OO
I
J IQ ~
l ~ J

~~q"T0",,~1
31m
~

~ ..----,. 0'
~
/!f'2 'S

'\'?/~1))
\1
tUll
IIil 5J I!I
-
1 •
11 ar ~ I'
Connected to S
~~
,," (compare to fig. 6)

018{06/01/0
KHW 1114 7

SA 18/06
----"=="-'- KHW1120

11
E.stablish proper ground connections at the pump unit Ensure proper filling of the pump unit.
and at the control cabinet (special design).
Bleed the pipe system and the pump unit by opening the
Ground connection of the OF 100 is ensured on all the
bleeder screw (fig. 9) on the return pipe flange.
flanges by 4 contact washers for each flange.
The contact washers are locking devices and ensure a
proper metallic contact. A ground connection for the
pump unit is provided on the terminal box (fig. 8). CD NOTE
The electrical connection of the pump motor alld of the
If the phase sequence is correct the manometer shows
control cabinet (special design) must be established
higher than 3.5 bar with the pump running and the return
according to the corresponding circuit diagram (see
valve shut.
appendix).

Special design:
temperature switch

8 KKW1142
9 KHW1118

After installation of the oil filter plant at the transformer site


prick the breather cap on top of the manometer with the
attached needle, as shown on the decal (fig. 10).

.... 3,5 bar


U_250V AC 1_3A
p_ 500VAI250 W
MR_Nr.:706094;OO «(; i

10

12 BA 18/06 olato6/mlO
Type

'I f
Connecting Q---.....
V flange
s, Q
s~ .._.

R~'
: ----
.-
O-ring
gasket 44.2-5.7
t -;\
E2
./
/

Type

I
COl'mecting
H flange
S, Q
,,
."
S

O-ring
gasket 44.2-5.7
t
Type
MS
M
RM
Connecting
flange
s, Q 1- s
R
O-ring
flange 44.2-5.7
t
s .1iT·
...&~-G--.-o..
'0"
"'
.. R,E
X.
'.A""-C-- ''0. /.";.,,,

Connecting / ~ 0 o
flange
S, R
Type
G
Sealing
area o o

Position of feed and return pipe connections on the tap-changer head


11

018/06/01/0 SA 18106 13
5 Commissioning

Perform the functional test with the protective housing cover Attach the connecting flange on the return pipe
of the motor-drive or the control cabinet (special design) connection.
open and the supply voltage connected as the motor protec- Open the stop valve for feed and return pipe.
tive switch for the pump motor is only accessible in this way.
Bleed the tank at the return pipe connection
(see page12, fig. 9).

ill. WARNING
81eed the. feed pipe connection (suction pipe
connection) at the tap-changer head (see page 11, fig. 6).
Carry out all other commissioning procedures
Observe the safety regulations during commissioning. according to section 5.2.1 or 5.2.2.
Danger to life and limb.
Perform a test run and bleed again.

5.1 Time switch 5.2.1 Paper filter cartridge (4.8 kg)


When using the integrated time switch (special design) the Operate switch S30 to makeatest run
pump unit - independent of the switching operations of the
For a functional test close the stop valve of the return
on-load tap-changer - is set to a daily pump operating time
pipe. During operation of the oil filter unit the contact
of at least 2 hours. The operating time is set by the manu-
manometer should read a pressure of at least 3.5 bar.
facturer between 0.00 and 2.00 o'clock. When taking the oil
If not, check the phase sequence of the motor voltage
filter unit into service set the time switch to local time.
(VV, V, U clockwise).
5.2 Filter cartridge
Test of the response value afthe manometer:
When the stop valve is slowly closed, the return pipe is
throttled. With an electrically connected manometer, the

it. CAUTION
response pressure can be read on the manometer when a
signal is given. The standard response pressure is around
3.5 bar.
The filter cartridge (paper filter or combined filter cartridge) The operating time of the pump unit at the time delay
is delivered separate from the oil filter unit and must not relay K29 is set to match the oil content of the tap-changer
be unpacked and installed into the oil filter unit until im- oil compartment. It is set by the manufacturer on the basis
mediately before commissioning. of the values stated in table 1.
Before commissioning the oil filter unit make sure that the Under certain operating conditions it may be necessary to
filter cartridge has been installed. Without it the oil filter seta different pump operating time. In this case the
unit is ineffective. desired operating time has to be readjusted at the time
delay relay K29.
Installation of the filter cartridge (paper and combined filter Check by giving an impulse at the motor-drive to set the
cartridge, see appendix, drawing 707 931) pump unit going automatically as soon as the motor-drive
starts.
Shut the stop valves of the feed and return pipe
Loosen the connecting flange at the return pipe
connection
Loosen the 6 cover screws M10/w. s.17, 2 ring screws M10,
remove the cover with gasket.
If the pump unit has already been filled with oil, drain
approx.10 I at the sampling valve (see page 8, fig. 2).
Take the cartridge out of the transport ca~e and insert it
into the pump unit; please note that the cartridge will be
centred automatically when the cover is closed.
Fasten the cover and the cover gasket (6 screws M10/
w. s. 17, 2 ring screws M10, max torque 30 Nm).

14 BA 18/06 018106101fO
5.2.2 Combined filter cartridge (14.0 kg, transport Check the residual water content and the dielectric strength
case included) when commissioning the oil filter unit and during further
operation on the basis of the flow chart in fig. 12.

.& CAUTION
In dependence on the water content relevant measures must
be carried out.
Fig. 12 shows the standard procedure in bold print, i. e. the
The combined filter cartridge must never be exposed to water content and the dielectric strength are within the
humidity before installation. admissible range.
For this standard procedure oil samples are taken in the
See table 2 on page 10 for operating conditions that require following intervals:
the use of an oil filter plant with combined filter cartridge. first oil sample 30 min after commissioning
• second oil sample 24 hours after commissioning
Test run, functional test and setting of the pump operating
• further oil samples at 2-year intervals.
time are carried out according to section 5.2.1.
Procedure for taking oil samples:
Switch off the OF 100 (motor protective switch)

.& CAUTION
Remove the screw cap from the oil drain valve.
Open the oil valve by means of the wrench surface
integrated in the screw cap.
The combined filter cartridge is packed separately. Before
Take oil sample. Take as much as needed by the lab.
commissioning, the filter cartridge has to be installed and
the tank filled with oil. These actions must be carried out Close oil valve.
one after the other without interruption to avoid that the Replace cap.
combined filter cartridge absorbs humidity from the air. Switch OF 100 on again (motor protective switch)
Use only new and clean transformer oil with a dielectric
Note down the oil temperature of every oil sample.
strength of <: 60 kV/2.5 mm and a residual water content
of'; 10 ppm. Independent of the criteria for the residual water
content, the dielectric strength of the tap-changer oil must
Take oil samples from each transport container and analyse
be at least 40 kV!2.5 mm, measured according to DIN VDE
them. Furthermore, make sure that the oil quality is not
0370 Teil1.
affected by dirty filling equipment.
Before commissioning the filter unit at an active on-load
tap-changer, all insulating parts immersed in tap-changer
oil (diverter switch unit and inner surface of the oil com-
partment) must be thoroughly cleaned and inspected. CAUTION

The combined filter cartridge has to be replaced:


- when the max. operating pressure of approx.
5.2.2.1 Oil quality check regarding water content 3.5 bar has been reached, or
during commissioning and during operation - when the residual water content exceeds 20 ppm
After commissioning the oil filter unit must be operated even after 24 hours of operation, or
. when the dielectric strength of not higher than
continuously for 24 hours.
40 kV/2.5 mm has been reached after 24 hours
The drying ability of the combined oil filter cartridge must be of filter operation
controlled by taking oil samples at regular intervals. If the
measured residual water content of the switching oil exceeds If one of these limit values has been exceed, the filter
cartridge must be replaced.
20 ppm, the combined filter must be replaced.

018106101/0 BA 18/06 15
6 Replacement of the filter cartridge

6.1 Paper filter cartridge 6.2 Combined filter cartridge


The paper filter cartridge must be replaced when the max. The combined filter cartridge is to be replaced:
operating pressure of approx. 3.5 bar has been reached.
when the operating pressure exceeds 3.5 bar,
The exact pressure limit is set by the manufacturer at the
when the residual water content exceeds 20 ppm,
pressure switch.
when the dielectric strength is lower than
40 kVl2.5mm.

&. CAUTION 6.2.1 For replacing the combined filter cartridge


proceed as described in section 6.1.1.
The paper filter cartridge is separately delivered in dried Oil quality check is to be carried out according to section
condition. Do not unpack until immediately before 5.2.2.1. Strictly observe the safety instructions given in .
installation. section 5.2 and section 5.2.2.

6.1.1 Replacement of the filter cartridge should be


carried out as follows (see appendix,
.&. CAUTION
draWing 707 931):
Only use original MR filter cartridges which are especially
Shut the stop valves of feed and return pipes designed for the described oil filter unit.
Loosen the connecting flange at the return pipe The use of another type of filter cartridges can lead to
connection. severe damage on the complete oil fitter unit, and the
Loosen the 6 cover screws MI0/w. s.17, 2 ring screws MI0, sequence of operation to be observed (see fig. 12) is no
remove the cover with gasket. longer ensured. MR must decline any responsibility when
another type of filter cartridges is used.
Drain approx. 2 liters through the drain valve (see page 8,
fig. 2).
Slowly pullout the old filter cartridge using the handle
Take the new cartridge outaf the transport case and in-
sert it into the pump unit; please note that the cartridge
&. CAUTION
will be centred automatically due to the pressure exerted
Only use the here described oil filter unit OF 100 for MR
during the closing of the cover.
OLTCs, which has been specially designed for the conditions
Fasten the cover and the cover gasket (6 screws MI01 around this type of an on-load tap-changer. The use of
w. s.17, 2 ring screws MI0, max torque 30 Nm). other oil filter units on MR on-load tap-changers can lead
Attach the connecting flange on the return pipe connec- to problems on the on-load tap-changer and the
tion transformer.
Open the stop valve for feed and return pipe
Bleed the tank at the return pipe connection
(see page12, fig. 9).
Bleed the feed pipe connection (suction pipe connection)
at the tap-changer head (see page 11, fig. 6)
Perform a test run and bleed again.

16 SA 18/06 018/06/01/0
Dielectric strength U o of Ihe tap changer oil
measured according 10 DIN VDE 0370 part 1

< 30 ppm and


> 40 kV!2.5 mm > 30 ppm

< 10 ppm and < to ppm and > 30 ppm or


> 40 kV/2.5 mm > 40 kV/2.5mm < 40 kV/2.5 mm
2. oil sample
after 24 hour
10 ppm::;; H20 < 30 ppm
al1dUo > 40 kV/2.5 mm
,-----''--------,

>20 ppm
> 20 ppm
,--<:=Another oil sample;;~--+ +-e~---<:=Another oil s a m p l e c : : > - - - - - - - - - - - ,
< 10 ppm and
10 ppm::;; H20 < 20 ppm > 40 kV/2.5 mm

Tral1sformer may remail1 in ransformer may remain in


service service
Prepare fo replace filter Prepare to replace filter
cartridge cartridge
Operating limits after 24 Operaling limits after 24
hours 01 filler operatiol1; hours of fiiler operation:
max. 20 ppm H2 0 max. 20 ppm H20
min. 40 kV/2.5 mm Uo min. 40 kV/2.5 mm Uo

> 20 ppm or
< 40 kV/2.5 mm ,--:::c-:c-,

::;; 20 ppm and > 20 ppm or


> 40 kV!2.5 mm < 40 kV/2.5 mm
::;; 20 ppm and
> 40 kV/2.5 mm
Oil ~ample

Oil filter unit with combined filter cartridge - Monitoring of oil quality
Flow chart to be observed when putting the oil filter unit into service,
when replacing the filter cartridge, or after an on-load tap-changer maintenance

12
018/06/01/0
SA 18/06 17
8 Special designs 9 Disposal of used filter cartridges

The electrical equipment of the control cabinet can be Disposal of used oil filters in accordance with the local
supplied in the following special designs: environmental regulations.
Different rated voltages and/or rated frequencies for
motor and control circuit

18 BA 18/06 018f05f01/0
9 Appendix

Rating plate WN 4033-02


Pump unit, dimension drawing 898718
Oil filter unit, control cabinet , ,.......................................................................................................................•................... 897 688
Installation and replacement of the oil filter unit 707 931
Control for oil filter unit (1 pump) in the motor drive, standard connection diagram 362 596
Control for oil filter unit (3 pumps) in the motor drive, standard connection diagram 362 597
Control for oil filter unit (1 pump) in the control cabinet, standard connection diagram 362715
Control for oil filter unit (3 pumps) in the control cabinet, standard connection diagram 362716

018106/01/0
SA 18106 19
0
(I) 0

ISerial no.: Year:

IType: OLTC-Serial-no:

f~- V Hz ~MSS: A

I-~ V Hz Circdiagr.

I :(E
0 71818500 0

Field No. Explanation Designation example

1 MR serial number of oil filter unit 362819A


2 Year of construction 1999
3 Type designation OF 100 SC
4 Serial number of the tap-changer 150890
5 Motor voltage 400
6 Motor frequency 50
7 Setting of overcurrent tripping 3.2
8 Control voltage 230
9 Frequency 50
10 Connection diagram 362462

018/Q5/01fO
20 SA 18/06
Bleeder screw The connecting flange is supplied with an o-rin::-l
(Flat gasket 0114x040x2 type y. I
22B.6 / Pressure switch
"KlINGER~SIL C~400" is also permitted) I
" ~~
,«~ -
S
-
... 8)
t--- """" .00"" mo I
it2S
it 6S 1

itBS
rOT
L ..l.Lu..=== itl1S

I Filter cartridge:
I The filter cartridge (paper or combined
en
N
~I filter) is supplied loose. The filler must not
be installed until immediately before the
0-
~I 0
N
~ commissioning of the transformer!
0- Installation and changing of the filter
<-
according to installation drawing 707931.
<-
I 314
I 270 Control:
I In the standard model the control of the oil
I filter unit is integrated in the motor drive
I unit. The control of the special design is
installed in a separate control cabinet.

Pg 16
(cable07.5 ...16)

Terminals for Sampling valve


pump molor View X

Pg 16 (cable 0 8 ... 10)


Shut-off valves are not included
in the delivery of the oil filter Ground screw
plant. MR can supply such
valves on request. o

Temperature switch (for


special design only)
cable gland Pg 9
40 (cable 0 6 ... 8)

~
8[ it13 ~
I Sampling
valve

Bleeder screw

The pipe connection (086942:) is


continuously adjustable in an angle
range from 1500' to 225 0 and from 270·
315 0 to 30°

018/06/01/0 BA 18/06 21
I.. 210

r------ ,
I
I
I
I
I
0
d~
I
23 I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I 1
I I
I I
I I
I
q~
I

J11
I
IL _ _
0
423
i 1~
-'"i
400 ~18
o --1
x+

View from th e rear

22 SA 18/06 018/06101/0
450970 (M 10-
Corresponding dimension,drawing 89a 718:
Pipe connection turned to
sectional plane

Stop valve

. ti)f~
455046 ~ --!
(M10x20) ~
~
I

705917 (SKM10) / Md=30Nm


or 704 370 (SKK10)
;
705921 (O-nng 215-7)
705 922 (a-ring 265-5), '0°, M12
Torque :r-ao Nm
-- -':~ -1- ----
!j;; ::: ::: :: :: =,= :: :: == ::
g:
o
en I Flange

--n I Filter cartridge:


Papsr or combined flter cartridge
__ .J __IJ
I is delivered loose and must not be
installed until immediately before the
commissioning of the transformer.

Installation procedure (installation and removal of filter cartrjdge):


2. After opening the cover the filter cartridge can be Inserted Into the 3. The fixing screws M10 must be lightened with a limited torque of 30 Nm.
1. After closing the two stop valves on the feed and return pipe the
cover can be opened by loosening the 6 fixing screws (M10 x 20) flange by means of the lifting lever integrated in the cartridge. 4. Due toils pre-tension the lifting laver is lifted out of the groove above
and the 2 eyeboll screws (M10). (The lifting lever moves back into its fixing groove when closing the oil level when the cover is opened so that the filter cartridge can be
N the cover so that it will not touch any sealing surface). easily lifled out.
W
c------------- --------------
...
N

r- - - -- -l -1 _ltlDICATION OVER~RESSURE

"~~~§~~~~~
r- - - - - - - r- -
"-r
g= I I
~~._._.~-+-~._._.
I
I
I 0"
6100-
1, 2 I'
: I
I 613 rn-~,
1 I
I
-- -- ~'Ol ~105
x,\17178179 '" '"

fL'
530 ~
, , K29
ItGS 1J.,"15118
1 13 15
K7'
/l.G4 ~ "14
Q4
110GB
~"42
Q4 ~
04
11.GS
" X20 44
I1.GB ~
"
~ ,4 15

,
5116 '7;;
~ '"
~

2J , "
'" 11~~ 12 14 16
X20 ,

K7
/1.F4:9.:fA2
K29
/1.FS
" ~"
x1181102183 '0<
'" '"
~" ,--1-

~
04 2l45"1617"BJ11 PRESSURE SWITCH
K7 K29
'"
~"
M4 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
~4MfiA2 '1.E5A2 ~"
"
S118/C-NO
'" MOTOR CONTACTOR FOR PUMP

'!m'
S116/C·NC K7
TIME RELAY
l=~±:
K29

""1:=tm:
MOTOR FOR PUMP
~d+~ 11,B5 " _1-
16
....... 15 M'
O. MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH

~~= 25-...L 25'


530 SWITCH FOR PUMP TEST
CAI1-0PERA TED NON·DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
=~:: I1.C4 3=-.../...24 $116
"'- /1.C9 4~2

~
~
9

i
~

,..- - - ~..:-..:-..:--=.:..:--;::- i =r-t-..L-::...-==--=--=--=-1-- 1


r- __ INDICATION OVERPRESSURE

t~ i "-r ,I, rI I I I I I 1, b I,
I
I
1, ,
610 611, IT B12, J 615 B14 613
~3 I i i _ __ _ _ I
" ---T",r I 0- @l, 0- 1 I I I I I ffi-j, ffi-), ffi-j, I
,,,
91 193 194 195 ~97~99 ~101 ]102 ~103 ,'04 !105
'"
Xl 77 76 19
"

04 W- DH-
, , ,
a5>-11l- (-
,
J'1' 06
'~
.
D~D
530 J::1'
....

."'j"
11.6

r
/l.G D D /1.G2 D D D /1.G3

, • , ,•, , , D

., ., .,
" I 44 K7I " K8~ " K9~ " a4[ a5f 06

1" ,,~
04 05 06 34
X20
/1.G4 114 /1.G5 114/1.G6 114 /1.G1 42 /1.G2 42 I1.GJ I 42
/1.Cl 34 /1.G2
I"
, , , ,, , ,, ,
, -• , KB , -• , K9 :- , • , 1
"
e- /1.FS /1.F6
5116 -I<el NO

CD
J> )(20145
~

25
cr>

,,. '"
Xl Bl 92 &3 64 85 66 87 B6 6 I f06 '"' '" '" '" '"

~
w.,." ~.w.,." ~w.'"
,-1.-
M4f;1 MSf;' M6r;t
"?E "'PE "PE
~ = ~

B10,B11,812 PRESSURE SWITCH


K29 813,814,815 THERMOSTAT (OPTIONAL)
Q4 as 06 K7 K8 K9
D .. D ""'-0- ~i
K7 MOTOR CONTACTOR FOR PUMP

'-' '-' '-'


If,Es A1 2 /tE5 A1 "'2 /tEG 112 I1.E6A21] MOTOR CONT ACTOR FOR PUMP 2
K6
m~ ~:-t-:
MOTOR CONT ACTOR FOR PUMP 3
:l~g ~::!: ~ ;~g ~:.-t- ~ K9
K29 TIME RELAY
13= : " JJ=: : " f~1~~ 1~ ::t: ~4 ,;1~~ 1~ :;E ~4 "'t-
I1.C45_"1""6 15
'1,61 /1.62 J3= : " /1.83 ItGl0 13 .... J : 14 /1.86 15 M' MOTOR FOR PUMP 1
15_ t;l 6 5_ 1 tl 6 15_ tl 6 ~1 ::t: ~~ ;1 :::t: ~~ ;1:::t::~~ ;:--..L:zs M5 MOTOR FOR PUMP 2
MOTOR FOR PUMP 3
l1.e5 3~..t...:!4 Il.es 3~-l24 Itea 3~-l.24 ;~ :j: ;1 ;~ :j: ;: 43
53
-..l-
-J.-
44
54 26 ....
M6
0\ MOTOR PROTECTIVe SWITCH FOR PUMP 1
/1,Cl1 "~-J._~;2 /\,Cl1 4~Z f1.C12 4~2 02 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR PUMP 2
03 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR PUMP 3
S116 CAM-OPERATED NON_DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
830 SWITCH FOR PUMP-TEST

N
U;
l _ ---._---- .
N
0>

I "- ,,--
I ,--------1
I
PE2 PE~ I, " 1,;1 : 1'"
F14 >ljl-->;
), I
I
I
I
I
I
01
fl,ES ,"ro- I I I
I h 613 ]1
810
I ~11 ffi-\,
I I I
, I I 1
., ~~'
C-l •
PE'
I. _
I Q1 1" K1
rI" -
1I" ---
1I"
K29
n.E9
,,}" 16118
530 \
I
I
1
I
I
, Il.F6 42 11FT
44 54

I I I

"!
1 13 15 I I I
K1 ItF6 34
ItE7 12 14 16 I 1 1
I I I
P3fO H6@O K1 " /tEe
P2 K2." "' I I I
A?
{tE9 I A2
I I I
g; ItET

I I I
J
~

i3
0> Xlj'Oj"i 12 I' " " I'
t: J" !"
I H1~ l I

~
H4 CONTACT WITHOUT POTENTIAL IN THE MOTOR DRIVE

I I T I
K2.
! ~
~ j 01 K1 P2
M1 ' -----L- 11.07Ali}:" 11.[19 ~4 /1.D9A2 ~"
"
"
'!m'
""1:=ti:
1'.C2 1 _
Itel 3
;~:g~ 1~ :f ~4
~1~~~
2
4
nCB 'l,
"
Il.cr " _1-
18

26
...... 15

-..L 25
Itcr 3~U4 j~:g~ ~~ ::t ~~ ~-
N,e5 4~2

." 813
PRESSURE SWITCH
TEMPERATURE SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
AUTOMATIC CUT-OUT
'"
H1
H4
SIGNALLING LAMP "01 OFF" CONTROL ROOM
SIGNALLING LAMP "PUMP IN OPERATION" CONTROL ROOM
H6 ELECTRICAL COUNTER
MOTOR CaNT ACTOR FOR PUMP
1 "'29 TIME RELAY

X1 lif.hoffiffibi1\Pi-f,.,
~~~~l
"\"1"1"'"1 \"1B~§\~\SIS
1"
!i I1tl]11]1:Z[13Tffi,S"!1ti]11 118119120
H1
P2
MOTOR FOR PUMP
TIME SWITCH
P3 SERVICE HOUR METER
"I.I'I'I'I~ lolo!o!< .,
0, MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH
HEATER
530 SWITCH FOR PUMp·TEST
INDICATION OVERPRESSURE
g

i"
9

~
~
c, ---..-- c,_ r----------,
I, b 612:-r.=-l-l I
r--------,
r,- 815-rFi -1 I
~l :I . l.1I r '-r-' I B10 , 811, B13 -11 B14
Bj, [B-\ [B-''j: I I 1 ffi-j, ffi-1' ffi-i, I : I
1t
1
r;-j
PE_ ..

,.!.2346~
I

1"..' PE2 PES I. 25 - be h


21
i 26 29
J _ I : y33
I

F14 HJj-.. ..Ii


j, L ...:--=--==--=--=--=-_-.J J I j
I
,".f13" INDICA nON OVERPRESSURE
I

Q
~.~ " ~~~' ~J'
~D I{ I{~ Q2 P D D 03 PDP
I
1

, II
245/1.F2 245f1.F3 245 I
"
~I
R1
p?
;-~I
' Q1
41
02
41
03
4\
K1
113 K2 113 K3 113 K1
143K2 143 K3 143 K1
153153
K2 K3
153 K29:>t.:115 530
1 1
3
P2..(2 3
1
J1
II 4242421414144444445454541616 24
.. "2 /1.Gl I1.G2 /1.G3 /1.FS Il.P6 11.F£ /1.FS /1.F5 /1.F6 /loGS /1.G6 IloG6 11.FB /loF7

135135 135
33 33 33
I
r- K2 - K3r-- I
Q1~ Q2~ Q3~
: 246 1,.Fa246 !1.F6246

~ ~ """~, ~ 1
IloG1 34 11,G2 34 /1.G3 34 I
a I A1 A1 AI 4 At ~t
I
P3 H60 K1 K2 K3 P2 N K29 I
"" " ,>.eo " "" "" I
00
»
I

rrH41
00
C3
en I
~J ,
"~j=i~i:' ~j:'j:\' ~j~j~i:' ,-L
I N HiTI"HZ H3
1"
,-L...
I CONTACT WITHOUT POTENTIAL
IN THE MOTOR DRIVE

M1t;1. M2f';1. M3t;. 810,B11,B12 PRESSURE SWITCH


813,B14,B15 THERMOSTAT (OPTIONAL)
PE PE PE AUTOMATIC CUT.OUT

01
..
02
".

03
..
K1 K2 a P2 K2. '"
H1
H2
SIGNALLING LAMP "01 OFF" CONTROL ROOM
SIGNALLING LAMP "02 OFF" CONTROL ROOM
-D- ~1MDA2/~f ~4 1~2A2VM
M

'~' 1'~' 1'~'


/1.09 AI D A2 11.010 Al A2 H3 SIGNALLING LAMP "03 OFF" CONTROL ROOM

~1:g; J:-I- ~ ~1g ~::t; ~ ;1gJ~~ SIGNALLING LAMP 'PUMP IN OPERATION" CONTROL ROOM

!tat 13=: : 4 11.82 J3:= : 4 /1.B3 J3:= : 4 ~1:g~ 1~ :3: ~4 ~i:g~ 1~ =:!: ~4 ~:~~~ ,'l, If~91B~~ • H'
H6 ELECTRICAL COUNTER
MOTOR CO~ ACTOR FOR PUMP 1
15_ ~1Z~~ ~1Z~~ ~Z~
K1

--
~~H
l;1 6 5_ t;l (; 5_ t;l 6
K2 MOTORCONTACTOR FOR PUMP 2
/1.09 3~_--t24 l1.!>lD 3!....-l24 /1.011 3!....-l2 4 ;~:g~;~ :j:;: j1:g;~::t:;: ~=~: K3 MOTOR CONT ACTOR FOR PUMP 3
'l.CS 4~2 Ite5 4~2 Itell 4~2 K29 TIME RELAY
M1 MOTOR FOR PUMP 1
M2 MOTOR FOR PUMP 2
M3 MOTOR FOR PUMP 3
~
~ ,,1,,1,,1 I~IBI~ c~ ~I~ I"ti 1_1_1"1_1_1"1_1_1'
ti ti ~ ~ i:i Q ~ ~ ti I"I~I~I~
~ ; ~ aI'I'
ti til I I~l~l~
P2
P3
TIME SWITCH
SERVICE HOUR METER
X1 I~h 2131415~El1617 'E31 B 19110111 !12T13114!1S!1611-;li6119!20l2tli2!23124I25J2612712BI29130!31 132133 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR PUMP 1

;:l~ 1~1~1~1;lglgl; I;l~l~lg


"
02 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR PUMP 2
~ :;1~1:312; :;12 01. I~ I~ I~ I~ I~ I~I~I~ I~ 03 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH FOR PUMP :3

L- INDICATION OVERPRESSURE "530


HEATER
SWITCH FOR PUMP-TEST

N
--J
BA 18/06 en • 1105/2000 • 018/06/01/0 • F0007605 • Printed in Germany
Q) NOTE

Changes may have been made to a product after going to press with this documentation.
We expressly reserve the right to make changes to a product's technical data and design as well as changes to
the scope of delivery.
In all cases, the information submitted and agreements concluded during processing of the quotation and order
in question shall be binding.
Contents

General.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Safety instructions 4
1.2 Designated application 4
'.3 Function 4

2 Design . 5
2.1 Housing 5
2.2 Relay 5

3 Mode of operation 5

4 Installation instructions _ ~ ;....................................................... 6


4.1 Assembly 6
4.2 Electrical connection _................................................. 7

5 Commissioning· _ _........................................................................................................................... 8

6 Response of the protective relay 8


6.1 Flap valve in position "IN SERVICE" 8
6.2 Flap valve in position "IN SERVICE" 8

7 Technical Data 9

8 Special designs ,0
8.1 Protective relay with change-over contact CO 10
8.2 Protective relay with two reed switches................................................................................................................... 10

9 Appendix 10

OS9fo7/01/0 3
1 General

1.1 Safety instructions Installation, electrical connection and function check of


the protective relay must be carried out exclusively by suitably
All personnel involved in installation, commissioning,
qualified personnel and under strict observation of these
operation, mainte"nance or repair of the equipment must:
Operating Instructions.
be suitably qualified and
strictly observe these Operating Instructions.
Improper operation or misuse can lead to
serious or fatal injury,
ill. WARNING
damage to the equipment and property of the user
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the relay is
and
used exclusively for the designated application and that the
a reduction in the efficiency of the equipment.
protective relay is correctly dimensioned, partic.ularly its
Safety instructions in this manual are presented in three tripping value.
different forms to emphasize important information. The non-observance of these Operating Instructions and
work carried out inappropriately during the installation,
electrical connection and function test of the protective
ill. WARNING
relay can put the on-load tap-changer and transformer at
risk and lead to damage to the equipment and serious injury.

This information indicates particular dangers to life and


health. Disregarding such a warning can lead to serious or
1.3 Function
fatal injury.
The protective relay is used to protect the on-load tap-
changer and the transformer when a malfunction occurs in

ffi CAUTION
the diverter switch or selector switch oil compartment It is
triggered when the specified oil flo")' between the on-load
tap-changer head and oil conservator is exceeded due to a
malfunction. Connect the protective relay so that the trans-
This information indicates particular dangers to the equip-
former is immediately disconnected when the protective relay
ment or other property of the user. Serious or fatal injury
is tripped. Install the protective relay in the pipe between on-
cannot be excluded.
load tap-changer head'and oil conservator considering the
installation instructions.

CD NOTE
Since the protective relay is part of an oil on-load tap-changer
and its properties are subject to lEe 60214-1 publications in
the applicable version or a future subsequent standard, it is
This note gives important information on a certain subject part of the scope of our delivery.

1.2 Designated application


ill. WARNING

It is absolutely essential that the protective relay be adjusted to Connect the protective relay in such a way to ensure th.at
the on-load tap-changer for which it will be used. the transformer is immediately disconnected when the
protective relay is tripped.
See assignment of the tripping values to the specific MR on- Systems which only generate an alarm signal are not
load tap-changer types as stated in section 7. permitted.
If you intend to use the protective relay on other types of on-
load tap-changer and on-load tap-changers of other manu-
facturers, you can obtain the applicable tripping values from
MR.

4 059/07/01/0
2 Design

2.1 Housing (fig. 1: front view


fig. 2: rear view)
The housing consists of corrosion-proof light-metal and is
provided with flanges for the connection of pipes leading to
the on-load tap-changer head and to the oil conservator.
An 'lnspection window ',s located on the front side of the
housing to check the flap valve position.
The terminals of the reed switch are housed om a terminal box,
sealed from the oil chamber of the relay by oil-tight seals. The
terminal box is ventilated by a covered opening.
In addition, two test buttons in the terminal box serve for
checking the tripping function ofthe protective relay as well
as for resetting the flap valve.
The terminals are protected by a clear plastic screen.

2.2 Relay (fig. 3: protective housing open)


The actuating element ofthe relay consists of a flap valve with
a permanent magnet.
3
This magnet serves for actuating the reed switch and for fixing
the flap.valve in position "IN SERVICE".
An intermediate position ofthe flap valve is not possible.

1 - Cable gland M25


2 - Ventilation forterminal box
3 Mode of operation 3 - Identification label KHW 851-4
2
The protective relay responds only if oil flows occur from the
on-load tap-changer head to the oil conservator. The flowing
oil actuates the flap valve which tips over into position "OFF".
The reed switch is th ereby actuated, the circu',t breakers are 2
tripped and the transformer is deenergized.

Q) NOTE

Switching operations at rated switching capacity or at


permissible overload will not result in a response of
the protective relay.
1

1 - Flap valve
2 - Permanent magnet
3
3 3 - Reed switch KHW852-4

059/07/01/0
5
4 Installation instructions

4.1 Assembly Test button Test button OFF


IN SERVICE
Install the protective relay in the pipe leading from the on-
load tap- changer head to the oil conservator - located as
near as possible to the on-load tap-changer head.
Install the protective relay in a horizontal position and
with the test buttons upwards. The reference arrow on the
terminal box cover must point towards the oi,'
conservator.
Use a pipe of at least 25 mm nominal width between protec-
e e e e ~
, ~ @e..,J----j11
tive relay and on-load tap-changer head/oil conservator.
Take care to install the protective relay well supported and
protected against vibrations in this pipe connection.

CD NOTE 4 Cover open KHW 853-4

The pipe from the protective relay to the oil conservator


must be placed with an inclination of at least 2 0/0 to ensure =
free escape of switching gas.

Provide a stop valve between protective relay and oil conser-


vator (fig. 7), I
\ \
I
CD NOTE
Install the protective relay in a place where the influcence
of magnetic fields (bushings, busbars etc,) is felt as little as
possible.

Prior to mounting check the function of the protective relay, KHW 849-4
Open the cover of the terminal box at the 3 bolts M6/w,s, 10 5 Position "OFF IT

(fig. 4) and actuate:


Test button "OFF":
flap valve is inclined (line marker appears in the middle of the
inspection window, fig. 5),
Test button "IN SERVICE":
flap valve is vertical (fig, 6),

CD NOTE
Do not press both test bottons at the same time,

The associated contact positions for checking of the electrical


continuity are evident from the drawing 899084 in the
appendix,
6 Positiori 11lN SERVICE" KHW B50-4
Always check the position of the flap valve,
6 OS9fo7fOlfo
I A
Inclination at least a continuous 2 % I

\d~V
a b c

a - On-load tap-changer
~ ~ ~
oil compartment ~
b - On-load tap-changer head
c - Protective relay RS 2001
---- I---

d - Stop valve
e - Oil conservator
... F M3

e- L-----..

7 B99759

4.2 Electrical connection


The reed switch of the protective relay can either be provided Replace the clear plastic screen and lock the cover of the ter-
as NO or as NC contact. Other contact combinations are minal box (3 bolts M6/w. s. 10, max. torque 5 Nm).
available as special design (see section 8).

& CAUTION
.&. CAUTION

00 not dry the protective relay together with the active


Connectthe protective relay into the tripping circuit ofthe part ofthe transformer.
circuit breakers ofthe transformer to be protected so that
the transformer is immediately disconnected by the circuit
The protective relay responds to oil flow, not to gas accumu-
breakers when the protective relay of the transformer is
lated in the protective relay. It is not necessary to bleed the
tripped.
protective relay when filling oil into the transformer tank.
Gas accumulation in the protective relay is normal.

For entering the leads use the thread-hole at the most suitable
side of the terminal box. Fit the cable gland and close the
other hole by the blind screw. The cable gland (M25 x 1.5)
is adequate for leads with an outside dia. of 10 ... 19 mm.
ill. WARNING

Potentially explosive gases (switching gases) collect in the


Remove the cover of the terminal box (3 bolts M6). protective relay while the on-load tap-changer is in
Connect the leads (terminal bolt M6, max. torque 2 Nm). operation.
Connect the protective conductor to the ground screw M6 in When you open the protective relay, make sure that there
the terminal box (max. torque 5 Nm). are no open fires or sparks "In the vicinity. Otherw'lse a danger
of explosion exists. Wait approx. 15 minutes before you
begin further work on the protective relay so that the gases ,_
have a chance to volatize.
059/07/01/0
7
5 Commissioning

Repeatthe test of the protective relay according to section 4.1 6.1 Flap valve in position "IN SERVICE"
when commissioning the transformer.
If the flap valve is in position "IN SERVICE", there may be a
In addition, check to make sure that the circuit breakers dis- fault in the tripping circuit. Check the tripping circuit. If this
connect on all sides the transformer to be protected when the does not clarify the cause, remove and check the diverter
"OFF" test button is pressed. switch insert or tap selector insert (visual check), see sec-
tion 6.2.
During the test make sure that
• the transformer stays disconnected,
• the grounding for work has not been removed on the 6.2 Flap valve in position "OFF"
transformer and If the flap valve is in position "OFF", it is essential to remove
• the automatic fire extinguishing device is deactivated. and examine the diverter switch insert/tap selector insert and
examine according to the relevant maintenance instructions.
Ensure that switch-on is not possible again until after the
protective relay is placed in the "IN SERVICE" position by Check the tripping force of the flap valve.
pressing the other test button.
Contact MR and inquire about the tripping force, indicate the
serial no. of the on-load tap-changer.
Furthermore, the following questions must be clarified:
6 Response of the protective relay • What was the load ofthe transformer at the instant of
tripping?

.& WARNING


Was a tap-change operation performed right before or
during the tripping?
Did any ot,her protective devices of the transformer
Make sure to check on-load tap-changer and transformer respond at the instant oftripping?
after the protective relay has been tripped.
Remove the diverter switch insert or the tap selector insert • Were switching operations in the network performed at
and check as described in the relevant maintenance manual. the instant oftripping?
Do not put into service before having made sure that there • Were overvoltages registered at the instant of tripping?
is no damage to on-load tap-changer and transformer. In addition to the measures described under 6.1 and 6.2,
Safety concerns prohibit to reconnect the transformer Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen or the authorized MR
without prior check as this can result in considerable
representative and the transformer manufacturer should
damage to the on-load tap-changer and transformer. be informed whenever the protective relay has responded.

When the circuit breakers have been tripped by the protec-


tive relay, proceed as follows:
• Determine the instant of tripping.
• Determine the operating position of the on-load tap-
changer.
• As a precaution, block the motor-drive unit by tripping the
motor protective switch to prevent the on-load tap-
changer being actuated by remote control.
• Examine the on-load tap-changer cover. If oil leaks out,
shut the oil conservator stop valve immediately.
• Check the flap va Ive of the protective relay if it is in
position "OFF" or in position "IN SERVICE".

8 059{07/01{O
7 Technical Data

Housing: Tripping switch:


Outdoor design Reed switch, available on request as NO (version 1) or NC
switch (version 2). Designations of versions, see dimension
Protection:
drawing 899084 in the appendix. Other contact combina-
IP 54
tions available as special design on request, see section 8.
Relay actuation:
Electrical data for reed switches, NO contact or NC
Flapvalve with aperture
contact
Vibration immunity: Switching capacity:
up to max. 3 g'
• Switching capacity AC: 1.2 VA to 400 VA
Weight: • Switching capacity DC: 1.2 W to 250 W
ca. 3.5 kg Max'imum admissiblevoltageAC/DC:
Oil flow speed of available types on response • Maximum admissible voltage: 250 V
(oil temperature 20·C): • Minimum admissible voltage: 24 V·
0.65 ± 0.15 mls Switched currentAC/DC:
1.20 ± 0.20 mls • Maximum switched current: 2 A
3.00 ± 0.40 mls
• Minimum switched current: 4.8 mA at 250 V
4.80 ± 0.60 mls
Power-frequency voltage test:
Assignation of response values to the relevant on-load • Between all voltage-carrY"lng connections and the
tap-changer type grounded parts: minimum of 2500 V, 50 Hz, test
duration: 1 min.
On-load ta p-changer - current delivery program
• Between the opened contacts: fTlinimum of 2000 V,
50 Hz, test duration: 1 min.
Frequency Response value
[Hz] [m/s] onc type
0.65 A, VV (without OF)

50/60 1.20
V, VV (withoF),
VRC, VRE, MS,
M (without M 11203, M 11503)

R, RM, T, G,
3.00
M 11203, M 11503

G-16 2/3 Hz,


162/3 4.80
M-162/3 Hz,

On-load tap-changer - not current delivery program

Frequency Response value


[Hz] [m/s] onc type

0,65 A

50/60 1.20 H

3,00 M11800, T

a59/07folfa 9
8 Special Designs 9 Appendix
(on request, at extra cost)

8.1 Protective relay with change-over contact CO Protective relay RS 2001,


dimension drawing 899084
The protective relay can be supplied with a reed switch,
including change-over contact CO (version 3). Designation of
versions, see dimension drawing 899084 in the appendix.
Other contact combinations available as special design on
request (see section 8.2).

Electrical data for reed switches, NO contact or NC


contact
Switching capacity:
• Switching capacity AC: 1.2 VA to 200 VA
• Switching capacity DC: 1.2 W to 130 W
Maximum admissible voltage ACjDC:
• Maximum admissible voltage: 250 V
• Minimum admissible voltage: 24 V
Switched currentACjDC:
• Maximum switched current: 1A
• Min"lmum switched current: 4.8 rnA at 250 V
Power-frequency voltage test:
• Between all voltage-carrying connections and the
grounded parts: minimum of 2500 V, 50 Hz,
test duration: 1 min.
• Between the opened contacts:
minimum of 1150 V, 50 Hz,
test duration: 1 min.

8.2 Protective relay with two reed switches


The protective relay can be supplied on request with two
independent reed switches (versions 4...6). These can be
designed as NO or as NC contacts and are galvanically isolated
from each other. See appendix, dimension drawing 899084.
Electrical data identical to versions 1 and 2 (see section 7).

059/07/01/0
10
Inspection
window

Identification label

Gasket Gasket
1-----20' - - - - - 1
Test push buttons
IN SERVICE O~
[resell (lest tripping)

Dummy plug M25 x 1.5


I
r- -+ fh
'" ~~
I--
-+= ~
~
V, "
The arrow must always point towards the oil pipe leading to the Plan view of test push buttons
oil conservator of the transformer. (cover removell)

Key of versions

Reed Contact positions


Version Relay des'lgnation 1) switch Arrangement oftermina Is Design
Inservice Off

0.65 - NO o

~
1.2 - NO A
3.0 - NO
4.8 - NO
.

2
0.65
1.2
3.0
-
-
-
NC
NC
NC
B .
",-It~ o
4.8 - NC

0.65 - CO
3 1.2 - CO C
3.0 - CO
4.8 - CO
0.65 - 2ND
4 1.2 - 2ND 2A
3.0 - 2ND
4.8 - 2ND
0.65 - 2NC
5 1.2 - 2NC 2B
3.0 - 2NC
4.8 - 2NC

0.65- NO+NC
6 1.2 - NO + NC 1 A and 1 B
3.0 - NO + NC
4.8 - NO+NC

ljNO _ normaJly open, NC - normally closed, CO - change-over contact

The protective relay is to be connected in such a way that if it is energized, the power transformer isswitched off immediately by the corresponding circuit breakers.

059/07/01/0
11
SA 059/07 en • 1005/3000' 059/07/01/0 • F0015205 • Printed in Germany
IB-00038-A

INSTRUCTIONS
MITSUBISHI RUBBER CELL TYPE
CONSERVATOR
(VACUUM WITHSTANDING STRUCTURE)

J....MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


,. Introduction (5) Maintenance and inspection can be made very
To make the oil·immersed transformer operate safely easily.
maintaining the maximum dielectric strength, insu-
3. Construction and Operation
lating oil shall be kept always under the same con·
dition as that of the beginning the unh has been manu- This device is to prevent insulating oil from contacting
factured. However, since the insulating oil absorbs air directly by providing a synthetic rubber-made cell
gradually moisture according to the respiratory oper- in the space above the oil surface in the conservator;
ation when oil contacts with outdoor ai"r or becomes the appearance is shown in Fig. I and the construction
gradually to deteriorate due to the oxidation by oxy- in Fig. 2.
gen contained in air, the insulating oil becomes to reo As shown in Fig. 2, insuiating oil is filled at all parts
quire to filtrate for reclamation in using over many excepting inside the rubber cell in the conservator, and
years even though the conservator and the moisture contact between insulating oil and air is shut-off by
absorbing breather are provided. the rubber cell.
Therefore, to prevent the deterioration of oil, it is The shape of the rubber cell corresponds to the change
thought to be most efficient to prevent directly con- of oil quantity due to an expansion or a contraction of
tact of insulating oil with air. Rubber cell type conser- oil by making the rubber cell deform.
vator is employed to many transformers and obtains As the rubber cell is made of nitrile system rubber re-
a good result, since a synthetic rubber-made cell is inforced properly which is superior to oil resistance
provided inside the conservator and this cell makes and weather-proof property, the unit can be used with
insulating oil prevent from contact with air completely, enough reliability for a long period operation even in
and also the unit has the feature to be simple to handle its strength.
and thereby the maintenance and inspection is scarcely Air in the rubber cell is passed to the outdoor air
required. through the moisture absorbing breather to prevent
the rubber cell from its deterioration, and the inside of
2_ Feature the rubber cell is always kept at the atmospheric
(1) The conservator outer box is of the vacuum with- pressure.
standing construction. Further, oil is filled inside the conservator at all parts
(2) As the contact between insulating oil and air is other than inside the rubber cell as described above,
shut-off by this rubber cell, the deterioration of and as the bottom of the rubber cell is made to be the
insulating oil can be completely preserved. horizontal corresponding to the oil quantity at that
The gas is not dissolved into insulating oil so that time, this is indicated as the oil level by the oil level
the maximum dielectric strength is always main- gauge.
tained. Furthermore, as the alarm contact is equipped with the
(3) Since the synthetic rubber which is examined suf· oil level gauge, an alarm can be given when the oil level
ficiently in its quality is used in the rubber cell, it becomes zero.
never causes damage in a long period use.
(4) Since the specific attachments are not required
outside, the area to set up the unit can be kept
small.

Fig.' Appearance of the rubber cell type


conservator
Air

Breather
connecting
tube

Oil level gauge


Insulating
oil

Conservator 0'
J J
Drain valve
q~~"
Buchholz relay

l\ Breather

Fig. 2 Construction of rubber cell type conservator

4. Notes for Maintenance (2) The rubber cell is provided inside the conservator,
therefore, avoid to heat it partially by welding
(1) It is ideal that the inside of the rubber cell is al- from outside.
ways kept dry though the rubber cell is made
(31 Check whether the oil level gauge indicates the
using the material selected with care, and has a ex-
cellent weather-proof property. correct position.
Accordingly, change the moisture absorbent in the (4) Even in case an abnormality has been found with
moisture absorbing breather once every half-year the rubber cell, the transformer is operated in bet-
or reclaim it. ter operating condition than a general breather
Silica gel - moisture absorbent used in blue colour type transformer, and the operation can be conti-
under the dry condition. nued as it is. But, if the operation is continued for
It is changed into red colour when the moisture is a long period, as the insulating oil is apt to deterio-
absorbed. rate, treat the oil as quickly as possible.
J... MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE: MITSUBISHI DENKI 8lDG~ MARUNOUCHI, TOKYO 100-8310. TELEX: J24532 CABLE: MELee TOKYO

IB-00038-A AK-9812(MDOC)
INSTRUCTIONS

MITSUBISHI TYPE FP/FG/FGz DEHYDRATING

FILTER BREATHER

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

SDK-E2004 f:J 1/s-


MITSUBISHI DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER is designed to remove moisture and dust
from the air breathed into a transformer. lt consists of a silica-gel container, a filter with an oil
pot and a connection pipe located at the top.
When clearance permit, the filter breather is shipped completely installed on the tank with the
silica-gel in place. If clearance prevent such shipment, the filter breather is dismantled and
shipped as a unit long with the other apparatus. When shipped in this manner, the silica-gel
and oil are removed from breather and placed in separate containers, which are packed and
shipped along with the breather.
The construction of the filter breather is shown in Fig.l(type FP),Fig.2(type FG-12) and Fig.3
(type FGz-18).

RECEIVING
When clearances permit, the filter breather is shipped completely installed on the tank with the
silica-gel in place. If clearances prevent such shipment, the filter breather is dismantled and
shipped as a unit along with the other apparatus. When shipped in this manner, the silica-gel
and oil are removed from breather and placed in separate containers, which are packed and
shipped along with the breather.

INSTALLATION
To mount the breather when shipped disassembled:
1. Bolt the dehydrating chamber to the transformer tank wall.
2. Connect the pipe between top of breather and top of transformer case or conservator.
The flanged joints in the pipe connections must be airtight.
3. Remove the cap (silica-gel vent) on top of the dehydrating chamber and fiII the chamber
with silica-gel.
4. Remove the oil pot in bottom of the breather and fill with clear silicon oil to the level
mark.

OPERATION
In response to the oil temperature in the transformer the oil level of the conservator moves up
and down. Then the air of the conservator operates breathing action. For the prevention of
the oil deterioration due to the moisture and dust of incoming air, a dust filter and silica-gel are
provided in the breathing path.
During in breathing of the transformer, air passes in through oil pot and filter. The dusts of
the incoming air is filtered and then cleansed air passes up through the silica-gel which absorbs
all the moisture allowing only dry air to pass into the transformer.
To prolong the life of silica-gel, it is isolated from atmosphere by the oil pot so that the
moisture of incoming air is absorbed.
The container is filled with cobalt chloride impregnated silica-gel which is blue in color when
in the dry state, but as the silica-gel become saturated with moisture, its color changes to a
whitish pink.
SDK-E2004 B
MAINTENANCE
The quantity of silica-gel in the breather is sufficient to last from six months to a year before
drying is necessary. This time depends upon the size of the transformer, the load cycle of the
transformer as well as atmospheric conditions. It is advisable that the color of silica-gel behind
the window be checked periodically at first to determine the approximate length of time that the
breather will operate on the particular transformer. When the whitish pink color begins to
appear in the window, it is indications that silica-gel should be changed or dried out in the near
future. A recommended method is to have a spare of dry silica-gel kept on hand in a sealed
container. Then it is only necessary to remove the damp silica-gel and replace it with dry
silica-gel. The damp silica-gel removed can be dried out and stored for the next change.
In those cases where the drying of the damp silica-gel is required, it should be placed in an
open pan and dried at a temperature between 150°C and 200°C for about 2 hours.
When the color of silica-gel grain has changed to cobalt blue, the reactivation approaches
completion. This dried silica-gel can be kept in fine condition for next use if it is stored in
sealed containers.
It is also desirable that the sealing oil an the bottom pot is replaced with clear new one when it
is contaminated with dust in the breathed air orwhen a drop of water is found in oil pot.

+.¢ 12 holes ~

~"'Y
!.£~

Connecting flange
\'~~
~
•• 'Cl>j)S

- - ~ Silica-gel vent ,~ .-

:[~ jlil.

I ~ ~ <

Oil pot

Filter \
1~silicon oil
Set screw ~,;I .
Activated alumina Level mark (red line)

Q'ty ofsilica-gel Size (mml


Type
(kg) A B C1lc
FP-2 2.0 480 280 114
FP-3 3.0 475 275 145
FP-4.5 4.5 603 403 145

Fig.! TYPE FP DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER

SDK-E2004 B
4-<P12 holes 170

Connecting fIang-e

Silica-gel vent ~----.,---,...

Silica-gel
Ii",
Glass window

Dehydrating chamber
~l
"'I

I
1
';'1 I (
I ,. .
Oil pot ~ 2-12 x J4 holes
Se(s~ew ~

Fiiter silicon oil ' -'-<-,-----~.


\ Level mark (red lIne)
Activated alumina Q'1yofsiIict-gd 9.0 (kg)

Fig.2 TYPE FG-I2 DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER

195
~
'"
4-<lJ12 holes

Connecting flange
o[ , .

\ S.ilica-gel vent

SiUca-gel

Glass window

-Dehydrating
• chamber"-..J!I

OiJPO~'
l~
.
~~

- --:.
J
silicon oil
Set screw

Filter
Activated alumina
Level mark (red line)

Q'ly of silica-gel 13.0kg

Fig.3 TYPE FGz-I8 DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER

SDK-E20048
.213
4-<P12holes ~.

'" , ; I

Connecting f1<wgc
[
~
\ ,. . Silica-gelvenl

.rc. 'I. J I

Siljca-geJ~/' ,

Glass window.
r
Dehydraling chamber.. . . . . .)

I o o

203 I I
8:(~
Oil pOl ....
R!";P->l-_ silicon oil
Set scrcw--- r0~
c:::TI
\.4- 20hob
.,
Filler
Acth'a1cd alumina '\LeVeJ mark (red line)

Q'ty of silica-gel 20. 0 .kg . .

FigA TYPE FGz-20K DEHYDRATING FILTER BREATHER

SDK-E200413
XPRD Extra High Flow Pressure Relief Device

50% more
tank
protection-
made easy XPRD Extra High Row
Pressure Relief Device

Direct
When the pressure is 011, protect your The top and side seals are molded as
replacement equipment with a device you can
trust-the XPRD Extra High Flow
one part, combining to create an
extremely effective gasket, which is
Pressure RdiefDevice, manufactured· securely fastened to the flange. This
by Qualitrol, the company that set superior design eliminates the
Integral the standard. The XPRD provides
50% more protectlon and this unit
potential ofseal blowout and provides
more reliable resealing and more
is the only PRD that is third-parry consistent operation. The optional
directional flow tested, provi.ding a quantified
flow rate to guarantee the protection
switch is available with three different
ratings, and a large variety of switch
of your transformer. connections.

shield The built-in directional shield can


be positioned in any direction and
the discharge can be piped to a
The XPRO Extra High Flow Pressure
containment device. This directional
Relief ·Device offers:
shield helps ensure employee safety,
addresses environmental concerns J:. More protection under fault conditions
and provides hassle-free cleanup. I:l Safer expulsion. of oil or gas spray

The QuaJirroJ)(PRD Extra High t:l Consistent operation ;;;.


Flow Pressure Relief Device offers III Easy retrofit-no retooling '"'"
many standard features such as a
m Highly visible semaphore '"
"0
gas bleed system, highly visible '"
E
semaphore, built in directional shield
that is 3600 positionable, corrosion
Ili Luge variety of s\"';{ch options
m Integrated gas blecdsystem
..,'"
r:

resistant stainless steel cover, shield '"


E
and valve, and a standard bolt pattern
for easy retroflt.
.s::s
«

OUALITROL

STC3545
( 1/4 )
More protection under II The XPRD is equipped with a spring-loaded valve, providing
fault conditions instanraneous amplification of actuation force resulting in a flow
rate of 12,600 SCFM, which provides greater protection for your
transformers. The valve is stainless steel and sealing areas are lubricated
with silicone based lubricant. The springs are ASTM A229 oil-tempered
spring wire with epoxy/polyester coating. The XPRD is the only device
that is third parry tested to validate flow rate and guarantee your
transformer protection

Safe expulsion of oil or • Standard with the XPRD is a patented directional shield that can be easily
gas spray positioned to discharge in any direction. The discharge can also be piped
to a containment receptacle. This means you can count on:
- Safer operations
- Environmental protection
- Easy cleanup

Consistent operation • This unit conrainsa patented single piece, dual-acting gasket which is
mechanically fastened to the flange with an aluminiwn ring. This design
eliminates the potential of seal blowout and provides more reliable
resealing, preventing moisture laden air from entering the tank.

~ singLe-piece,
duaL-acting
gasket

Easy retrofit-no retooling • The XPRO has the same 9.25" bolt circle as the device that is presently
being supplied, yet increases the flow rate to 12,600 SCFM. This
patented combination provides 50% more tank protection while allowing
for a direct retrofit.

Highly visible semaphore • Another standard feature is tbe highly visible semaphore providing a visual
alert of operation.

Large variety of switches • Alarm switches are designed to provide remote indication when the XPRD
has operated. The s\",itch is designed to latch arrer changing state and is reset
manually. Qualj[rol offers 3 voltages and switches can be provided with
detachable connector, terminal box connections or permanently attached
cables or flying leads.

Integrated gas bleed system " Another plus is an integrated gas bleed system to allow easy release of
minor gas buildup.

STC3545
e/4)
Flange Diameter: 11.92 (302.8 mm)

Mounting Diameter: 9.25 {235 mm} bolt circle mounting

E),.'"ternal Height: 11.30 (287 mm) including switch


Dimensions
Vent Outside Diameter: ~7.91 (200.9 mm)

Recommended Tank
Opening: ~6.75 (171.5 mm)

Shield Turning Radius 12.73 (323.3 mm)

Alarm Switch: Standard: 10 A@ 125/250 VAC


0.5 A@ 125 VDC noninductive,
0.25 A@ 250VDC non inductive
Ratings
High DC (SPDT only): lOA @ 125 VDC
Low Level Circuit {gold plated contacts}: 0.1 A@ 125 VAC

Flange: Cast aluminum, ASA 70 light grey polyester powder coat


Ring: Cast aluminum, chromate conversion coated
Valve: Stainless steel, sealing areas lubricated with silicone based
lubricant
Indicator: Nylon or epm.."y/polyester painted aluminum
Bushing: Nylon or epoxy/polyester painted aluminum
Spring: ASTM A229 oil-tempered spring wire, epo),."}'/polyester
Materials painted
Gaskets: Nitrile (standard) or Viton (optional)
Hardware: StainJess steel
Cover/Shield: Stainless steel
Studs: Stainless steel
Alarm Switch: Die-cast aluminum with polyester powder coat
Roller/Plunger
Assembly: Stainless steel

Ambient Operating
Temperature: _40°C to 80°C HO°F to 176°F)
(tank fluid at 30°C)

Environmental Materials and coating withstand 1000 hours ofsalt spray testing
Resistance per ASTM B:] 17 with no appreciable loss of strengdl in any
structural members.
Switch Hi-pot: 2000VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Switch Enclosure: Meets the requirements of IP54

Relief Protection Flow Rate: 12,600 SCFM at ]5 PSI with] 0 PSI operating pressure.

STC354,5
(3/<;: )
11.92
>---(30'.8)-
vented enclosure switch
available in detachable
connector (Ouatitrol shown)
permanently attached or
terminal box styles

(6) .63
(16.0)

</1.50 (12.7) indicator


normaUy flush-
extends as shown Mounting View
dotted after device (rotated)
has operated
to reset-push down

Required information:
• Operating Pressure of4, 5, 6, 7, 8, III Switch Connection Style
10,12,13,14,15,17or20PSI • Optional Detachable Connecwr
• Nitrile or ViWll Seals and Length
Iii Optional Mounting Gasket
• Switch Type

QUAUTROl Worldwide Sales Offices


Asia Padfic Phone: 65-745-9265 CA"I. 21
Qualitrol Singapore Fax: 65-746-1791
246 MacPherson Road
#08-01 Betime Building
Sin!?aporc 348578
Europe Phone: +49 (0)211-5288 0
Qua1itrol GmbH Fax: +49 (0)211-5288 367
\X'ilISlaetiersuasse I I
40549 Duessddorr
Germany
latin America Phone: 52-55-5560-3637
Pasco D<, Ech<'garar #18A Fax: 52-55-5560-3637
Fracdonamicnto La Florida
Naucalpan, ESlado de Mexico
53160 Mexico
North America Phone: 585-586-1515 E-mail; inro@qualilrolcorp.com
Qu.1liu-ol Corpor.uion Fax Orders: 585-377-0220 www.qualitrolcorp.com
]385 Eairpon RDad Fax Quoles: 585-377-9613
Fairport, l\.ry ]4450
USA

© Qualitrol2004 _ Qualitrol CoqJOl<!lion is:m ISO 9001 systcm certified company.


QSB XPRD, 3/04. Infom131ion whjtct to change without nOlice.

STC3545
( 1/4 )
IB-00029-E

INSTRUCTIONS

MITSUBISHI BUCHHOLZ RELAY I

A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


oint

Float lock device detail


Transformer side

Float lock device

H15holes,

Fig. 1 Buchholz Relay Internal Construction drawing

Buchnolz relay
Conservator

Transformer main Transformer main body


Conservator
side body side

Fig. 2 Operational Principle Diagram Fig.3 Installation Diagram

- 3 -
IB-00027-B

INSTRUCTIONS
MITSUBISHI
DIAL TYPE OIL LEVEL GAUGE

J...MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


1. INTRODUCTION
This oil level gauge is attached to the con- vator goes up and down according to the expan-
servator of an oil immersed transformer and is sion and contraction of oil due to the tempera-
to check from outside the change of the oil ture change inside the transformer, and the float
level due to change of the oil temperature or goes up and down correspondingly to the above.
the oil leakage. This is converted into the rotation of the rotor
magnet by an arm and a gear.
2. FEATURE The stator magnet corresponding to the
(I) Indicating part, which is attached at the rotor magnet is outside being isolated itself from
high place, tend downward, so the scale the conservator with the non-magnetic metallic
can be read so easily. plate being oiltight and airtight completely, and
a pointer attached to the stator magnet is to
(2) The container is made of machined alu-
indicate the oil level by transmitting the rotating
minum castings of good quality.
angle of the rotor magnet to the outside as it is.
(3) This dial type oil level gauge has silica Further, figures 0 - 10 are marked on the
gel in the indicating part to prevent the scale plate, but these are ones that the maximum
dew. and minimum displacements of the position of
the float are divided into uniform scale, and not
3. CONSTRUCTION and OPERATION that the oil quantity is divided into uniform
Fig. I shows the outside view, Fig. 2 the scale.
construction, and Fig. 3 the shape of the fitting Still further, in case an indication of the oil
flange. level became zero due to the lowering of oil tem-
The construction and operation are as shown perature or the oil leakage, the contact is closed
in the figures. The oil level inside the conser- to give an alarm .

Fig. 1 Outside view of type 170 dial oil level gauge

-1-
Sil ica-GeJ box

o
-I\€>t--N
<>
Terminal box

G 1/2 screw Rotor magnet

Gear

Float
Glass Arm
Oil level
Scale plate

Pointer shaft

Stator magnet
Micro switch
Case

Fig. 2 Construction view of type 170 dial oil level gauge

6-q;12 Holes

Fig. 3 Dimensions of fitting flange

-2-
~ MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE: MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., MARUNOUCHI, TOKYO 100-8310. TELEX: J24532 CABLE: MELeo TOKYO

18-00027-8 AK9703(RODj
.J.. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE: MITSUBISHI DENKIBLDG.. MARUNOUCHI, TOKYO 100-0005. TELEX: J24532 CABLE: MELeG TOKYO

IB-00029-E AKO 0610


INSTRUCTIONS
DIAL TYPE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR .
(TYPE MTO, MTH)

).... MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


STC5632
(1/7)
1. INTRODUCTION
Mitsubishi temperature indicators, type MTO and MTH are used primarily for a transformer.
Type MTO detects and indicates the maximum oil temperature of transformers and type MTH
detects and indicates the maximum winding temperature of transformers. Both types are also
used for the protective operation such as alarming or breaking and for the automatic control of
transformer cooling devices. The thermo sensitive element of this temperature indicator is
mounted on the transformer cover and the indicator (including the contact points) is installed on
the floor at a place that offers easy observation. Another feature is that the setting
temperature for alarm, breaking and cooler control can be made easily at the field.
The features, performance. operation and construction, as well as the handling instructions are
detailed in the following clauses.

2. FEATURE
2.1 Complete humid-proof
With the consideration of air-conditioning, dust and dirt during the assembling process, the
sealing unit is made to air-tight water-proof composition.
For the humid air absorbed to some extent during the assembling process, a desiccant is
sealed inside. Dewing inside the instrument and frost on the front glass due to changes of
weather condition are therefore prevented.

2.2 Liquid filled pressure type structure


The structure employs equal graduation due to the liquid filled pressure type, making the
reading easy. A large torque is also obtained to drive a number of electrical contacts since the
liquid expansion of tlie thermo sensitive unit is converted to expansion of bellows. The simple
and solid expansion mechanism ensures high reliability.

2.3 Temperature compensation device


A sUb"capillary tube is provided to compensate the error due to the temperature around the
capillary tube which is a disadvantage of liquid filled pressure type. A sub-capillary tube leads
from the root of the thermo sensitive unit embraced with the measuring capillary tube to the
sub-bellows so as to cancel the displacement of the measuring bellows due to the temperature
variation around the sealed liquid in the measuring capillary tube. By this arrangement, the error
of the ambient temperature can be compensated automatically even if the capillary tube is
extended.

2.4 Set temperature adjuster


Electrical contacts for alarm, breaking and cooler control, micro switches are employed and the
set temperature of these switches are adjusted to the specified temperature in the plant.
However, the set temperature can be changed or adjusted simply even after site installation.

STC5632
(2/7)
3. PERFORMANCE
These temperature indicators are possessed of the following performances.

3.1 Ambient condition for use


The construction and surface treatment of the indicator is so made to withstand outdoor use in
general. When used at a place of high corrosive condition, however, repair painting shall be
made depending on the condition.

3.2 Indication temperature range and error


The indication temperature range is 0 to 160°C for both MTO type and MTH type and the
indicationerroris ± 2°C.

3.3 Adjustable range and standard sat value


Each contact is adjustable freely within the full scale range.
Each standard set value is shown on Table-1.

Table-1 Adjustable range of set temperature and standard set value.


MTH type winding
MTO type oil temperature
Contact temperature
Application
No. Adjustable Standard Adjustable Standard
ranQe set value ranQe set value
O
1 0"C-160°C 55°C D C-160°C 65°C
Alarm or
2 DOC-160°C 65°C DOC-160°C 75°C
breaking
for cooler
3 0"C-160°C BO°C DOC-160°C 110°C
control
4 DOC-160°C 90°C DOC-160°C 115°C
Note: The set temperature indicates the value of contact ON and the difference between.
ON and OFF is set at 7±2(deg).

3.4 Electrical rating and durability of contacts


The electrical rating and durability of contacts are shown on Table"2.

Table-2 Electrical rating and durability of contacts.

Voltage Resistive load Induction load


(V) Current Minimum durability Current Minimum durability
4
(A) (X 10 times) (A) (x 104 times)
5 20 3 20
A.C. 250
3 50 2 50
125 0.5 30 0.1 30
D.C.
250 0.25 30 0.05 30
Note: • The minimum durability on the table means 95% guranteed value.
• The induction load on the table is AC: power factor 0.4
DC: time constant 7

STC5632
(3/7)
3.5 Features of winding temperature indicator.
MTH type winding temperature indicator is an indirect type winding temperature measuring
equipment with the thermo sencitive device mounted on the maximum oil temperature section.
For measuring, the maximum winding temperature is stimulated by passing a current
proportional to the load through the heat coil around the thermo sensitive device. Respective
transformers have naturally different values of w'lnding temperature rise depending on the
specifications and characteristics. Accordingly, transformers shall be operated with correct
thermal image as far as possible. For MTH type winding temperature indicator, a current tap is
provided at the secondary side of the bushing type current transformer to select the most
suitable tap to the characteristics of the transformer out of the test result of actual temperature
rise test. The maximum temperature of winding is obtained by adding the following temperature
to the average temperature of the winding measured by the resistance method of ANSI
C57.12.00.

(1) 55°C rise transformer' . 10deg.


(2) 65°C rise transformer' . 15deg.

Ih other words, the temperature rise of obtained by energizing the heat coil is.
Average tamp. of winding +10(or 15) - (max. oil temp.)
The taps of the bushing type current transformer selected from the above values of temperature
rise suitably to the characteristics of the indicator are shown on Table-3.

Table-3 Conducting current of heat coil and temperature rise


Conducting current Indication temp. - maximum oil temp.
B.C.T tap No.
(A) (dec. )
11 4.0 15
12 4.5 20
13 5.0 25
14 5.5 30
15 5.9 35

4. OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION


As described above, this temperature indicator transmits the expansion of the liquid in the
thermosensitive unit to the indicator and consists of he double capillary tube to compensate the
error due to ambient temperature, two bellows, expansion mechanism, electrical contacts, set
temperature adjusting mechanism, and the instrument unit incorporating a pointer and scale etc.

4.1 Operation
The sealed liquid in the thermo sensitive element mounted on the maximum oil temperature
section of the transformer is expanded or contracted by the oil temperature change and affected
by the thermal change of the heat coil. Thus the linear displacement is obtained at the bellows
STC5632
(4/7)
in the measuring instrument through the capillary tube. This displacement moves the pointer
through the expansion mechanism such as the lever for temperature indication. On the other
hand, four control switches (micro switches) are operated by the cam plate mounted on the
same shaft of the pointer.

4.2 Construction
(1) Thermo sensitive element
As shown on Fig-1, this temperature indicator is mounted inside a well. If it is malfanctioning,
therefore, it can be replaced independently from the insulation oil of the main body by removing
the nut "A" shown in Fig.1.

(2) Capilliary tube


As mentioned before, a sub-capillary tube is used to compensate the error by the ambient
temperature which is a disadvantage of liquid filled type pressure system, and the connection
between the capillary tube and the bellows of the instrument unit are completely soldered to
avoid any trouble. The capillary tube is also covered with a flexible tube against some flying
matters for trouble prevention.

(3) Indication unit


The contraction or expansion of the liquid in the thermo sensitive unit is converted into linear
displacement by the bellows within the instrument unit, which is transmitted through the
expansion mechanism of long and short levers combination to the pointer shaft to move the
pointer. Since the expansion mechanism is the combination of simple levers for pointer return,
the parts are hardly worn out during the use and the indication is not disordered. One to four
micro switches are arranged around the cam plate mounted on the same shaft as the pointer
and the switches turn ON and OFF at the respective set temperatures. As described before, the
selling value, however, can be changed without any difficulty at field because of the special
structure provided (The method of the set temperature change is described later.)
Inside the indication instrument is sealed a desiccant to absorb the inside moisture.

5. SET TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT


At the shipment, the indicator is set at the specified temperature (at the standard set
temperature of Mitsubishi as described before if no specification is given). If the setting is
changed after field installation, take the following procedure. (See Fig.1)

(1) Loosen the front cover fixing screws (4 pieces) to taken out the front cover, sight glass, and
"0" ring in the order as stated.

(2) Loosen the small screws for the micro switch base plate, turn the base plate while fixing the
micro switch on the plate and fit the indication mark printed on the micro switch base to the
desired temperature on the auxiliary scale plate.
(3) Tighten the small screws firmily.
STC5632
(5/7)
(4) When the set temperature is changed, the desiccant inside main body should be replaced by
removing the container as external air of high humidity may sometimes be absorbed.

(5) Fix the silica gel container, "0" ring, sight glass, and front cover as they were originally. In
fixing the container and protection cover, pay close attention to air-tightness.

4-M12 fixing bolts


4-M12 fixing bolts
PC</> 78
PC</> 78

:3 ---

Thermo sensitive unit of MTH type


temperature indicator

Nut "A"
Cabtyre cable" Nt "A"
(2 core)
~~~I
" Aj
J0-
Transformer cover
~
- 19 19
I
§
~Trans former ai I (3cc)
L J~,Well
Transformer oi I (120cc)
,i
Max. temperature pointer
Temperature poi nter
4- 10 mounting holes
PC </> 180
Heat co i I;
/
Well
,~",,-n--c
'N
I
1,t,
~
Thermo sensitive unit of MTO type
temperature indicator

Cap i II ary tube


Cover fixing bolt
4-M5 screws
-- g - - ~------

Set temperature
scale plate
Set temperature
adjust screw
o

Micro switch base


o
]
Terminal name plate 85
Cabtype cable
Set shaft of max. NO.1 contact (2 cores)
temperature pointe No.2 contact (4 cores)
No.3 contact (6 cores)
No.4 contact (8 cores)

Fig,1 Outline of Temperature indicator Type MTO, MTH

STC5632
(6/7)
6. HAN DOLING INSTRUCTIONS
(1) Handle the indicator with care so as not to give any strong impact on the indication unit and
the thermo sensitive unit.
(2) Pay attention in handling the capillary tube .and the flexible tube for capillary tube protection
as they may sometimes be damaged if curved too much or pulled forcibly.
(3) In changing the set temperature, be careful not to touch any other parts unless otherwise
specified.

STC5632
(7/7)
RESISTANCE ELEMENT
(Pt 100 Q at D'C)

4-. 12HOLE

2000

25 x 32
,,-------

.12.7
rP 16.0

RESISTANCE
4-M4 SCREW ELEMENT HEAT COIL

CABLE
:1:1 2mm2 5 CORE

( /

STC5608
(1/1)
CONNeCT/ON

'>~
~ '>
: :>
..-= SEARCH COIL

an
.... TEkMINAL (MS STUO)

.-J~~~.
'==:
L....
./
--- --'f2 SEARCH CO/l,

11==+,==t'''t:;:~ ~PF liz selfEW


, ~+-.-------

1 1
L
I jTRANS
I
_ --,.-1--1--
l---1- - _.L-K..
_
. COVER
I

<l t>

70

L-_-c- !:: F=

I I , ' , I , I I I I , I I I , , I

_i-'J MfTSUBfSHf ELECTRIC CORPORATION" JAPAN


~
I
~ !s .t'i\! I
ill III ~
t:: J I I
1II3"'~
DIM"
300 ANGLE
PROJECTION

mm
1'<'"
OOAWN

:HEC<:'
.,.
~ •.,;. .. :.'
.1, ;'....
.....-.-
i>/ (T
TITLE
0/ L TEMPERATURE
/ NO / ell T(7I?
o ~I\-:. I R. """'" It
oil!!
"'i
~
!!.1"~1
.. " ...u
1 ",'
I
1 ./
A,"" - ,

r-;:r I
SCAlE
g~~'\l.c_
/
1/ -
~ llESIGNED
It
,,J, /YlI~
'79 ~PRD~D M /4,"'-.:-
°SWG,'4 NO
', ,3 -
···.IIII

. TYPEBM- 0 RADIATOR VALVE ~ PART CATALOG

~....

D-RING
CAl'

o
U1

i,

Opera UOIl
1. III else or 0PCI1Jllg the valve .
I.J After rCJlloving the upper cap :111(1 illScrl tile hal1dle ill(U tilC Sll:lrt grouve, turn the handle 90" clockwise.
1.2 -,\ncr DpcrallOIl, pl:\I':c till.: Cilp (rcvcr$C ::;idc) ,nld lix it. III lids C;lSC, be sure to rcpJ;lcc the U-rillg lo CUIIH:

inside. Due {D the Olhovc, tile ::;!1id"! lhroup.h p.n! beeOl,l1CS Ihe double p;lckillg struct\lre i1ccnrdil1g 10 the
G-ring to enable the inside liquid to sc:,1 cUl1lplett:ly.
2. closing tlle v<1lve
III C<lse of
2.l After renJOYing"lhe upper Ci.lp <lIHI insert lile handle into the sh:lrt groove, (lim the h:.l11dlc 90° counter.
clockwise. Arter opernliol1, nx the cnp ill 'like ll1<llll1Cr <"IS ill item I.

3. Notice:
Dc sure 10. usc :1 SpCCi;l]'j1l1rpllSC hiltldlc ill opcr:ll"Hlil.

~~
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION STC-3333
NO I NAME OF PARTS OTY MATERIALS SPEC,,_.,·CAT IONS
JIS SPEC.
01 I BODY I DUCTILE IRON FCD-S
2 BONNET 1 DUCT! LE J RON FCO-S
3 STEM 1 sTAINLESS STEEL SUS420J2
4 Dlse 1 STAINLESS STEEL SUS403
5 LOCK NUT 1 DUCTILE IRON FCD400-15
6 PACKING NUT 1 DUCT I LE J RON FCD-S
7 GLAND I S_y,INLESS STEEL -
SUS420J2
9 (s 1ZE 10-20)
~

10 SUSLlO3
>-< / ' (SIZE 25& OVER)
(~ I fl-.n"l
S-rGLAND PACK[NG -r ISI(4)
1 DUCTILE IRON FCD450
H
(OPEN)
ffi
5
11
9~AND WHEEL
-I-
DUCTILE IRON
(SIZE 10-50)
FCD400
>- (5 I ZE 65-80l

-
-<.
2
I I / = \. I I I I
40
'---'
10
11
16
19
WHEEL NUT
BoNNET RING
NAME PLATE
GASKET
I
I
1
I
CARBON STEEL
DUCT! LE IRON
ALUMINUM
(5)
55400
FCD-S
AI050P
3
-4 30
40
BODY sEAT RING
LOCK PLATE
I
1
sTAINLEss STEEL
sTAINLESS STEEL
SUS403
Sus304
>-
30

~~_~'CIO lS-\ SET

CI:l
~
0
::1 C.J1
CO
+--+ h
SIZE 55& OVER

,-,I C.J1
c.v
L

DIMENSIONS UNIT:mm
V"" .,,,",
NOMINAL END FLANGE SHELL SEAT

. HYDROSTAT[C 2.06 MPa f 21 k9f1C~~ 1 ,51


Mfa l15. 4k91/cm'l
'--l '--l h~
SIZE (I) BOLT HOLE BOLT (2) ~
~ MPa 1 k9f1"m~ 0.59MPa {6 k~I/CM'l
1o. d H 01 L II ft 0 NO. h SIZE f
C t
" I 1 I FCO-S 1 FACE TO FACE OR END TO END JIS62011

I
10 3/8 15 108 60 85 8 90 4 15 HI2 11
65 1 KITZ I 1 (3) I
END CONNECTION JIG 62239 10K
L __ J ~::~2~
15 1/2 15 122 70 85 11 95 70 4 15 M12 11 WALL TH[CKNESS KITZ STANDARD
20 3/4 20 125 80 95 12 100 75 4 15 HI2 11 FIGURE 10SJBF
25 I 25 146 90 110 15 125 90 4 19 M16 13 ONE SIDE THE OTHER SIDE
32 1.1/4 32 160 100 130 16 135 100 4 19 HI6 14 MARKING ON THE BODY 10K DUcTILE IRON
40 1.1/2 40 180 115 150 18 140 105 4 19 MI6 16
GLOBE VALVES
50 2 50 188 . 135 180 21 155 120 4 19 MI6 16
65 2.1/2 65 250 180 210 25 175 140 4 19 MI6 18 SCREWED BONNET, INSIDE SCREW, FLAT FAcE FLANGED ENDS.
80 3 80 280 225 240 32 185 150 8 19 MI6 18
DATE APPD SEP. 14' 05 DRAWING NO
-
NOTE (I) EXCEPT FOR SIZE IO,"L" SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WlTH JIS 82011. APPD BY Y. HASIOKA
(2) UP TO 5 J ZE 32.• t' SHALL NOT BE I N ACCORDANCE WITH J I s 82238 10K. CHKD BY T. AIKAWA
(3) VALVE SIZE (mm) IDENTIFICATION, DSGND BY K. TAKAHASHI
842-A20050
(4) NON ASBESTOS PACKING. DRAWD BY l. GEJYOH REV-05 MARK DATE BY
(5) 5T A I NLESS FO I L I NSERTEO FLEX I BLE GRAPH I TE.
KITZ I l"iTZ CORFORATiON

II
Mitsubishi Presents th~,
the High Detnands of
Mitsubishi Presents the WS Series, Satisfying the
High Demands of the Global Standard New from
Mitsubishi Electric, the company which has used
its impressive controller device line-up in
realizing high precision FA support, the WS
(World Super) Series of next generation molded
case circuit breakers and earth-leakage circuit

High-Performance
WS Series, Satisfying
the Global Standard
breakers. This series complies with IEC and
UL/CSA, JIS standards, achieving a stellar level
of globalization to satisfy genuine international
needs. A product line-up designed with the
environment in mind, together with the pursuit of
easy usage and high performance to forge the
way to a bright new future for breakers.

World Super
INDEX
Features.........•..........;:,"
The Great Variable Ace
Perfect Solution...............•..
1. Series Configuration and Li ........•. , 23
Product Models -. 'es, 30
2. Detailed-Specifications :-1 and Dimehsio.ns 33
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers............•.... 13 7. Ordering Information 62

SerIes Earth~Leaka:ge Circuit Breakers


Motor·Protection Breakers
UL Listed Products "
17
19
20
2
NEW21 Century Global Standard

MITSUBISHI World Su i nedfor Global Application

Complete change in Mitsubishi Complying with the various Raise each rating to address the
breaker design colors world standards international market.
Complete color change to ivory from Besides obvious conforming (1) NF30-SP =<> NF32-SW
WS Series. Use of shift to white standards of iEC, UL, CSA and JIS, (2) NF60-HP =<> NF63-HW
breakers and more stylish design to third-party certification and ship (3) NF100-SP =<> NF125-SW
boost attention on the international classification standards will also be
market. obtained in each country, to
respond to the world market.
(Refer to the ieft entries for more
details.)

WS Series International Standard Conformance List


Safety Certification Marine ApprovalS
IEC JIS EN
UL CSA LR GL DNV ABS BV NK

InlemaooMI Japan Europe USA Canada UK Germany Norway USA France Japan
Standards
m ,""
® @ Wl
f1io$IHw;
~
. , AElS ;vlJi~'
'.
'12'

(Notes) "e" responds with standard item. "0" will manufacture according to instructions.

3
Targets one~class higher performance, in realizing superb
"~ M~rea~ng performance

The WS Series presents a new technology.


.-
• Interchangeable Relay-unit
Thermal type <=> Electronic type
~
• Isolation suitability
• Class II insulation
Breaking Performance
• Increased leu
• High voltage
• AC/DC.common·use • Extending operating cycles -lcs=100% leu
•T/A adjustable range is expanded.
• Co-ordination type "2"

II1mlII
• IP20 Mold-cover Finger
protection
• Front compression
termlnal<:::>Box terminal
<;:;>Rear.;;::::.PM

Shunt-less: Advanced ISTAC PA Au~o·Puffer External Accessories


• Cassette-type accessories • Electric operators
• Wide range of Rated (j) High speed type
Voltage @Isolation suitability
• IP20 PM with Safety Device
• Handle Lock Device
• RIV handle
• IP40 Terminal cover

[PA Auto-Puffer] [JPT]


_
Polymer. A_blation type Auto-Puffer [M""d '" 'ow,
HGW, RGW, UGW ]
J_et ~
pressure T_rip Mechanism [AdOptedDllSGW,]
HGW, RGW, UGW

PA auto-puffer is the technology to increase the Ablation gas jet through the hole installed on the unit
interrupting performance by blowing out the gas to the case directly activates the trip mechanism. This.acts
arc by right angle. The gas pressure which is generated faster than the relay (magnet), and contributes to
from high-polymer materials is accumulated in the improved current-limiting performance and breaking
accumuiating space, and the gas is blown to the arc to reliability.
extinguish. Especially this technology improves the high
voitage breaking performance. Unit Case
Trip Bar When short circuit
Tripping actuatorto fault occurs, the
push the trip-bar contacts are opened
before the trip by and arc is generated
relay unit. between the contacts.
At that time the
pressure in the unit
Tripping Actuator case become very
Arc high.

Hole
High pressure gas
blows through the
hole 10 rotate the
Extinguishing tripping actuator
unit
Fixed conductor
Arc Extinguishing Concept
CDAblation =:>@Gas accumulating =>@Gas flow=> Arc extinguishing
4
Targets one-class higher performance, in realizing superb
~dbJ~b_re_aki_'n_g_pe_rfo~rm_a_n_ce_~_"_"_'d_" ~k._._~
[Advanced ISTAe] Advanced impulsive S.lot-Iype Accelerator [ii'''w'~;~,S~]
Further evolution in Mitsubishi originallSTAC breaking. technology'. Optimization of the current path and the added
magnetic core enhance driving electromagnetic forces. By the high-speed opening and the arc driving, the rising rate
of arc voltage is increased and the peak current "Ip " is decreased.
"The tripie forces v;!hich are the repulsive fOI-GEl, the attractive force. and the pressu,e 3ccelerste the sepal'sting speed of the movable conductor.

Movable contact

L==::!,~"g".~",2B~J~ ~:~~ontact ~ '-----I"'I-,'--,-'."'''contact VJC


conductor

(1) Electromagnetic attractive force between Current A and Current C These three forces
(2) Electromagnetic repulsive force between Current B and Current C generated high-speed drive
(3) Ablation gas pressure

Mai I!it-lhniugbpeokcurrenl (kA)


Breaking Capacity Icu/lcs 2M {4110VAC)

=",!..J.!.!.!",,,! l"n I
ClITerllOS)'lTl.peak
NF9~r-

/ /~
200
.- ~ NFZ5J~W-
·•,
150 ,
,, , • 6 " 0 .. '0 ~G oolllll00 200
Short~ClrciJit Current,sYinl,m,5,(liA)
(kA) 100
(."..)'" ft let through characteristics (40OVAc)

50
·
U(UGW)
R(RGW)
H(HGW) ,'f-I-t-ttl-+'rm-
::,~
690VAC
S(SGW) Series
-~ ~ .. ....- -
Short-Circuit Current, sYin,r.m,s. (ItA)

[Shunt-less]
Shunt-less Current Flow Technology [AdoptedonSGW,]
HGW, RGW, UGW
Movable contact ...._... ..
Double plates conductors hold the movable conductor without flexible
wires.This shunt-iess structure achieves the extending operating Holder
cycles. \\
\
(times),----------------~----,
Endurance 511,aoo
DEIec1rical !jJMech."lcal
(C-O cycles)
40,000

30,000
..--.-..
20,DOD
......Spring
10,000 Movable contact
revolving shaft
During revolution the movable contact is constantly
in contact with the holder, maintaining current flow.

5
Product design which pursues greater use ease by wide variations

Interchangeable Relay Unit


To enhance flexibility, the Mitsubishi
WS Series is equipped with
interchangeable relay units (available
in thermal or electronic types).
The move has been made to
AC/DC common use, while the
expanded adjustment range enables
reduction in the number of 250AF
relays from 10 to 7 types. Thermal type unit
A magnetic adjustable function has
been added to the thermal type,
while 4P neutral protection has also
been enhanced.
(Note: Only authorized members
available to replace)

Electronic type unit

~
~ting b'l{A)it i:-··25-· -,:.-".,: 40 63 100 125'" ';-160)·'· 250

liIDCF1.JXi(AC)
II[X<WI\AC) Type
NF250-SGW / HGW
NF160·SGW J HGW •• •
NF125-SGW I HGW
• • • • •
T Tripping threshold Ir (Al
16-25 I 25-40 40-63 63-100 8(l.125 f 125-160 160-250 (160-225)
Neutral protection(note1) 4P3E No Protection
4P4E 1 x!r

Tripping threshold rl
tOxin 4to10xln I
Note: (1) The type 4P 3E 1$ standard. If the type 4P4E IS required, specify the type 4P4E separately and explicitly.

Ir Ii

Electronic Relay Ratl ll 9 [n(Al'-


NF2SO-5GW I HGW
(40'C) 32 63 100 125 :~:160 250


Type NF160-SGW I HGW
NF12S-SGW I HGW
• • • • •
Tripping threshold If (A) Adj"'''bl'
16-32 32-63 75-125 80·160 125-250
Tripping time TL(s) 12-60-80-100 step adjustable (at 2 x If)
LTD
Neutral protection (Sleclable) 0-1 x Ir (Step adjustable)

T
i( I,<M'·· ;;;';;;;'";,,,>:
STD I Tripping lime Ts{s)
I,
\;16,'«::':::'"
0.06-0.1-0.2-0.3 slep adjustable (at 1.5 x Is)
<';+

~TL
INST Tripping threshold Ii 4 to 14 x In continuous adjustable

I Pre-Alarm
Pickup current Ip 0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0 x Ir step adjustable
PAL 1 Operating lime Tp TV2

m) Ul oto.7 x I, I
PAL-LED (orange) Flashing atlp and Iii at Tp I
Over -LED (red) litat1.15xlr I

6
Product design which pursues greater use ease by wide variations

Internal Accessories 3 Way Lead Wire (Selectable)


Adopted for the internal accessories is a easily installed
cassette type. Common use of different voltages realizes major
reductions in types.
The UVT for ELCB is aiso possible. Time delay type variations
have also been expanded, addressing a wide range of applications.

'f-iiii#! fflIIi Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SHT)


(24). (48), 100-120. 200-240,
24-4B. 100_240, 380·550
:lBO-450. (440_SS0)

DC (V) (12), (N). (36), ('IS). 100. (1 10), (125). (220) 12,24-35.35-48,.'00-125, (220-250)

100-110, (100-120), 200-220, (2.20-240), 24/48. 100~1101120-130.200_220/230_ZS0,


(380_415).400_440, (440_480), (500-550) 380_4'5/440~480,500·550

"
DC (V) (24). (4B}.lOC, (110) 24/48,100-110.110-125

lead-wire to Line side Flying Lead-wire

-Cassette-type Accessories
CassetteMtype accessories ensure f1exbility when upgrading
circuits.
Ordering is easy, and installation is one touch simple and
safe too thanks to the insulated cassette design.
Fits all breaker series
The alarm switch (AL), auxiliary switch (AX), shunt trip (SHT),
and undervoltage trip (UVT) all comes as cassette~type
1. Pusllthetrip bution 2. Loosen the fronl 3. Open the front 4. Install the 5. Closs ths front rover
accessories to suit all breaker series. (PPT) lo!he breaker rovsr screws cover accessories and Iighlen Ihe screws.

External Accessories Power Supply Module

Hight speed Motor Device


Supplied for the 125 through 250AF is a motor device easier to use,
which simplifies instaliation.
*Adoption of a spring charge mechanism for high-speed operation
t
(0.05-0.1 seconds)
* Swift and slmpie installation, by tightening oniy two screws.

External Handle
Adoption of a safer and easy to operate handle.
-Complying with protection degree IP65.
- Isolation function achieved through combination with the breaker unit.
* Structured to allow relay adjustments after installation as weil.
- Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.

V-Handle R-Handle

IP-20PM with Safety Device


Specialized for 3-and4-poles use (2 poie incompatible).
-Complies with protection degree IP20.
-Safety device supplied as option.
*May be connected with up to nine ieads (for PLT).
*May be modified from front connection to rear connection.
(Note: Modification by end users not authorized)
IP20: Finger protection.

(IP-20PM)
7
.. ·,_c'4l-

Product design which pursues greater use ease by wide variations


IP-20 Terminal Connection Terminal Cover
With the SGW, HGW, Major improvements have been made in
connection safety has been front connection terminal safety.
further elevated. 'With terminal covers. IP40 protection
-Standard IP-20 protection degree is ensured.
degree secured.

Variable Connections
Compatible with various
connection methods. IEC Rail Mounting for 32, 63AF
Solderless terminals The 32,63AF includes installation
extending outside the hooks to IEC rails as standard
breaker unit on the equipment, greatly simplifying
conventional type have installation work.
been upgraded to a
built-in internal type (see
Diagram 2). Maximum connecting Cabie of 185mm'
(SGW/HGW).
(Note: Certain models have externally attached terminals)

Handle Locks
With the WS Series, ON/OFF locking
is possible through the padlock to the
breaker unit.
Up to three padlocks may be attached.
- Customers are requested to supply
their own padlocks ON Lock OFF Lock
OFF Leek with 3 Padlock

New system configuration through the use of an intelligent breaker

AE-SS MDU WSSMDU Eco Monitor

Data Measuring &Transmission Working through a sequence Ce-Unk interfac:e unit makes It possible to
collect electrical circuit measuring data.

MITSUB1SHI MOU (MeclliUring Display Unit) Breaker


~SECNETJ10 or Other upper bus '" • AE1600-SS US3 Relay with CC·Link
• NF250-5WM with CC-Link
llIlJ
CC·Link
1DSDA
",m
PAL
Interface unit 411SV OVER
BIF·C 654321 kWh Trlp[L)
567kVarh Trip(S)
CC·Unk IlS%(PF) Top(l)
60H2: Tripcurenl OkA
BOA(Hamonlcs)

8
i~'<,':l The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution

250AF Product Skelton

,
w...

csl
,~t

Q. 1; 0

..,.--,
ffi]

@]

.~~
w'_t;~

9
· _ =_L

[iJ MCCB
[II Relay unit (Thermal type) (RT)
rn Relay unit (Electronic type) (RE)
[I] Relay unit (Magnetic only type) (RM)
ffi] Relay unit (Switch-disconnector type) *
[ID Super current-limiting unit*
rn Solderless (Box) terminals
[[] Front connection nuts
W Rear connections
IlQ] insulating barrier (BA-F)
[j] Small terminal cover (TC-S)
IT] [j2J Large terminal cover (TC-L)
[j] Rearterminal cover (BTC)
!HI Plug-in base (PM)
Iill Connections for Plug-in
II] Mechanical interlock device (MI)
II2l OFF Lock with 3 Padlock (HLF3)
II] Handle lock device (LC/HLF/HLN/HLS)
!ill Variabie-depth operating handle (V type)
@] Rotary operating handie (R type)
1m Electrical operation device (MD)
~ Alarm/Auxiliary switch device (AL/AX)
[g] Under voitage trip device (UVn
[g1] Shunt trip device (SHT)

Note *: All the accessories are field mounting type


except No.5 and 6.

10
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models

Series Configuration
Molded-case circuit breakers

NP·C NP-S Np·H NP·U


Economy type Standard type
High.performance Current Iimiting-type
~pa ultra breaker

"~"J'I
~c.;':'-~-,

~i'J~:
__ .

Earth-leakage circuit breakers

NV-C NV-S NV·H NV·U


Economy type Standard type
High-performance Ultra current-limiting
~pa ~pa

Motor"Prot~ctionbreakers

MB
Motor breaker

Miniature circuit breakers Clrcllit protectors

BH BH·PS BH·D6 KB·D CP30·BA Cp·S


DIN-series for general consumer unit

.~ --~

11
List of Product Models <=Themodelsshownln,hadedboxesareWS,.rie,.)

'.0 250 400 630 BOO 1000 1250 (1200) 1600 2000 2500 (3200) 4000

NF250.cw NF40O-CP NF630-CP NFSOG-GEP

ii NF-S
standard type
r1~==+NF~'~60-S_W~+N="'=O~~~W;:fN~F=40~'~S_P+N~F6~30=~=P:::tN~F='OQ.=S~OP:1
NF250-SGW NF400-SEP NF630-SE? NFSOO-5EP
NF1250-SS NF1600..y
NF100O-SS (NF1201J-SS) "S NF2000-S NF3200-S NF4000-S

CD NF-H +--+~-+------+--+--+--+---+----t----t----1NF250Q..S
:II High-performance type NF25Q.HW NF400-HEP NF63Q..HEP NFSOO-HEP
~--r----+-:------1fc---+-~=+c---1 NFE300M NFE400Q..S
j "'N"'F-'U.------\'-"
NF100Q.SSD NFl250-SSD NF1600-SSD NFE2000-S
NFl25-HGW NF160-HGW NF25I)..HGW NF4{)(l..REP NF63Q..RE? NF80Q..REP
NF125-RGW NF2SQ..RGW
Ultra eurnml-llmiling type NF125-UGW NF2So-UGW NF40Q..UEP NF530-UEP NF8lJo-UEP NFl250-UR
NV~C NV125-CW NV2siJ.tW NV40O-CP NV53[).Cp
.. ECOllOlnytype

j
.. NV-S
NV40Q..SP NV630-$P
NVaOo-SEP
~ standard type NV400·SEP NV630-SEP
~ NV-H NVl000-sB NV1200-SB
liP High-parformance type NV400-HEP
NVSOO-HEP
NV40(l..REP NV630-HEP
If;;;"',----f
,
ls MB
~.5Motorbreakar
;

UL listed products Series

NF-UL NV-UL UL489 LIsted


Molded-case circuli breaker
Earth~eal<aQe protector
Ul489l.isled
UL489 Listed U Earth-leakage proledor
Melded-case cifCllll breaker
Molded-use circuit breaker :;1 UL489 LIsted
=> Molded-case rnrcuit breaker
DeIaIIS wl~ be aVailable)
( upon reQuest.

c::::::::J ;Released in Aprl12001


1}\.i';:;i';-;f;"~H ; SclJeduled Ie be released In October 2001

~ :Available soon

Miniature Circuit Breaker DIN Series Circuit Protectors

BH MCB BH-D6 CP30-BA


BH-P
BH RCCB BV-D CP CP-B
BH-S
BH-PS RCBO BV-ON CP-S
Isolating
switch KB-D

12
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series C series S series H series


Gcou WSSGl WSSG2 WSSG3 WSSGl WSSGl
FrilrneSize 63
i;-l';l;,
125

.., 250

.;
32
e.
",.j-J
63
""~~
63
~ti'~l

~3\
;~~t· ''':i
.. I ~l ~i ~I\
Type name
Photo
~;;:j';;: ~I iUI 'i;~,,;;,~
j,~.

~i>~'
I Available soon I I Available soon I I Available saon I I Available soon I
WS series NF63-CW NF125-CW NF2SD-CW NF32-SW NF63-SW NF63·HW

346101620 50 63 80 125 150 175 ZOO 3461016 346101620 1016202532


Rated current In (Amp.) 25 32 40 50 63 100 125 225 250 20 25 32 25 32 40 50 63 40 50 63
Rated ambient tern erature ) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Num era ales 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rate lnSU aUon va ta e Ui 600 600 600 600 600 690
690V
525V
-- 2.5/
-
500V 2.5/1 7.514 1015 2.511 7.5/4 7.514
Rated AC 440V 2.5/1 10/5 15/8 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5
short-circuit IEC60947-2 (SO/60Hz) 415V 2.5/1 1015 lBJ9 2.5/1 7.5/4 lOIS
breakin.9 (lw/les) 400V 5/2 10/5 lB19 5/2 7.5/4 1015
capacities (kA) 380 5/2 1015 18/9 5/2 7.5/4 10/5
230V 7.5/4 30/15 35118 7.5/4 1518 25/13
250V 2.5/1 7.514 ...1 1015 *1 2.5/1 7.514 7.5/4
OC
300V -
SUila II for isolation ~~
Utilization cate 0 •
A •A

A •A •
A
•A
Reverse connection terminals unmarked
Rated im ulse withstand volta e Uim •6 •
8 6 • 6
• •
6 6
Pollution de ree 2 3 2 2 2 2
without current 10.000 10.000 8,000 10,000 15.000 15.000
440V-lnl2 6,000 6.000 4,000 6.000 15,000 15,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-ln 6,000 6,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 8.000
with current
690 - nl2
690V- n - -
- -
r-'-1 rfu • 50 75 60 90 105 50 75 50 75 100 50 75 100

,b 130 130 165 130 130 130

lEH UJ
Overall dimensions (mm)
68 68 68 68 68 68
co 90 90 92 90 90 90

Fixed
Front
Screw terminal
Solde ss box terminal Sl
Busbar terminal
• •• •• • • •
Installation
""d
connections Plug-In
Rear
Rear
Rear/front IP20
PM
PM-IP
B

••
-
•• •• ••- •• ••
IEC3Smm Mountin hook o tion
raU Ada tei" o· tion • •• • • •
Alarm switch
Auxilia switch
AL
A •• •• •• ••• ••• ••
Cassette-type Shunttri SH
•• •• • ••-
••• •
accessories
Underuoltage trip (UVT) N~S chronous osin VT-N
5 ctlronous Closin VT-5
Accessorie's
with Lead-Wire termlna lock
with Internal terminal e
{SLT)
• • •- • •
connection
with FI in lea s
Pre-alarm &ontatt ou .3 • • • • • •
Buill-in
"'
OVercurrent trl .alarm *3
PAL
OAL -
••• •• -
accessories
ClirJerke lock

Enclosure
Dustproof
S
I •• •• •• •
.Ie "0 • •• •-
••
Electricalo eralion device D
Mechanical interlock
Side
W.
.le
"m
e
e
(MI-S)
(MI- • • • • •- -
'" • •• •• ••
••• •••
(HL)

•• •
Handle lock device \Handle lock oS)
lock.cover C
•• •• ••
•• ••
External
accessories External
operating
Dooi-mountlng
S
(R) • ••• •• •-
handle Mounted on breaker
(
•• •• • ••• •••
••• •••
Insulating Belween hase BA-
barrier To round (BA-G
•• • ••
••• ••
lar e (TC-l
Terminal
Small
Trans arenl
COS
C •• •• •• •• ••
cover
for rear connection BTC
• •• • •••
••• ••• •• • •• •
roc lu -m (PTe)

•••
LlR
GIL
•• •• ••
•• •••
Marine approval IAvailable soon I BV
DNV
AS
• Thermal-
•• Thermal- • •• •
Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped EqUipped
Notes *1: Use two poles III the case of three-pole or four_pole products.

U"~Li"~
In addition, wiring as shown 10 the rlghl allows the three poles to be used
for up 10 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to SOOV DC.
*2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four_pole products.
In addition. wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to SOOV DC and the four poles to be used for up to 600V DC.
*3: Both PAL and OAl is not available. only one specified.
Load load
3-pole 4-pole

13
S series H series S series H series 5 series
WSSG2 WSSG2 WSSG4 WSSG4 WSSG3 WSS G4
125 125 125 125 160

,','J ""I J
"I
•• iia~

~~I t~i
,<.'
~Il
~U
".'r".
~"""_t,·

Nf125·SW

16 20 32 40 50
"".
~=-
'I;~tiJj·)

Nf125·HW Nf125-SGW
RT
16 20 32 40 50 16-25 25-40 40-63
:t:"~l~: '
Nf125-SGW

16--3232-63
RE
Nf125-HGW
RT
16-25 25-40 40-63
iJ;J; •.~
~~~l1,,_;O_"
,:\-,::1' .
NF125-HGW

16-32 32-63
RE
i:~J
NF160-SW NF160-SGW
RT
:\,(,',,"~'
·!'.. r~ ..
NF160-SGW
RE

63 aD 100 125 63 80 100 63-100 75-125 63-100 80-125 63-100 75-125 125 150 160 125-160 ao--160
63-100 80-125
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
2 3
690
• 2 3
690
• 2 3
690
4 3
690
4 2 3
690 • 3
690
4 2 3
690 • 2 3
690
4 3
690
4

8/.
18/5
10lS
22/11
8/8
22122
8/8
22/22
20/20
35/3S
20/20
35135
- 8/8
22/22
8/8
22/22
18/9 30/15 3D/3D 30130 50150 50150 15/a 30130 30130
25/13 50/25 36/36 36136 65/65 65165 25113 36136 35136
30/15 50125 36136 36136 10170 70170 30/15 36136 38/36
30115 50125 36136 38/36 75115 7sn5 30/15 38/36 36136
30/15 so/ 36/36 36136 15/75 7sn5 30115 36136 36136
50/25 100/ 0 a5/85 85185 100/100 1001100 50125 85185 85/85
15/8 *1
-
40/20 *1 -
20/20 *2
-
40/40 *2
- 15/8 *1
20/20 *2
•A •A
•A •A
•A •
A •
A •
A •
A

! 8 • •8 8 8 8 •
8 6 8 8•
3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
25,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 SO"OO 12,000 40,000 40,000
20,000 20,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 4,000 30,000 30,000
10,000 10,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 4,000 20,000 20,000
1000 1000 1,000 1,000 1000 1000 1,000 1,0 a
1000 1 000 1,000 1,000 1000 1000 1,000 1,0 0
60 90 120 90 120 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140
130 130 165 165 165 165 165 165 16
68 68 86 8. 86 86 68 86 86
90 90 111 111 111 111 92 111 111
•• •• •• ••- •• •• •• •• ••-
-
•• •• •- •- • • •• •- •
- - - • • • • • •
•• •• •• •• -
•• •• ••
•• ••• ••• • ••• • • •
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••- •• ••
•- • • •• ••
•- • •-- ••• •• ••• •
• •• • •• • •••
•• • •• • •• •• •• •• - •• - •• ••
-
• • • •- •• •• •• •• •• ••
-

- • •- - - - •
••• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
• •• •• •• •• •• •• •-
••• •• • -
••- ••
• ••
••
• ••• •

•• ••• ••• •••
••• ••• •• •• ••• ••• ••• •••
••• • •• ••
•• - •• • ••• •• •• ••• •• •

- •• ••
•• •• •• - •• •• •• •• •• ••
•• •• •• •• ••
• --

Thermal-
magnetic

Thermal·
magnetic
Inerma,l.
magnetic
Electronic
- Thermal-
magnetic Electronic

Thermal-
magnetic
Thermal-
magnetic
Electronic
EqUipped Equipped Equipped Equipped E uipped E uipped Equipped EQuipped Equipped

14
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Series H serles S series

"',' I
Groll WSS G3 WSSG4 WSSG3 WSSG4
Frame Size 160 250
;1._* •.
• • ".!
,}~!.
·.
~'·:·:'I ,:::~.l
i~.j
~~l
Type name
Photo
ii"' f";;'j
lii~.-~j I':'~-~~ 1Ii.:c__.:lIiI -'';...1 ~_.'"
WSseries Nf16o-HGW NF160-HGW
NF25O-SW NF2So-SGW Nf250-SGW
NF160·HW RE
RT RE RT
Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 160 125-160 a0-160 125 150 175 125-160 160-250 125-250
200 225 250
Rated ambient lem erature ) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Number of ales 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
Rate InSll alion va ta e 'M 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 5/3 20/20 20120 818 818
525V
500V
-
30la
35/35
SO/50
35/35
50/50 1518
22122
30130
22122
30130
Rated AC 440V 50113 65165 65/65 25113 36/36 36/36
short-circuit IEC60947-2 (SO/60Hz) 415V 50/13 JOnO JOnO 30115 36/36 36/36
breakln.9 (Iculles) 400V 50/13 75/75 7SnS 30/15 36136 36/36
capacities (kA) 380V 50113 75175 7SnS 30/15 36/36 36136
230V 100125 1001100 1001100 50125 B5fB5 851B5
DC
250V 40120 ..1 - -
-
151B ..1
- -
Su]ta Ii for ISO ation
Utilization cate 0
-- 300V
•A
40140 ..2
•A

A •A
20120 ..2
•A •A
Reverse connection terminals unmark
Rated im ulse withstand volta e Uim (kVl
Pollution e ree
•6
• 8 •
8
3 2
•6
3
• 8 • 8
3
2 3
w, out current 12,000 40,000 40,000 12,000 25,000 25,000
440V-ln/2 4,000 30.000 30.000 4.000 15,000 15,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-ln 4.000 20,000 20,000 4,000 10,000 10,000
with current
690V- nl2 1000 1,000 1,000 1000 1,000

,
690V-ln
105
1 000
140
1000
105 140 105
1000
140 105
- 140 105
1000
140 105
1000
140
rill
Overall dimensions (mm)

ffik llJ b
"
"'
165
69
92
165
86
111
165
86
111
165
68
92
165
86
111
165

"
111
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Screw terminal
Front Soldeness ax terminal Sl
Fixed
Busbar lerminal
Installation
,,' R~,
R~' PM
B
•• • •- •• • •,
connections Plug-in Rearlfronl tP20
lEe 35mm Maunlin hook o tion
rail Ada ter (0 tion)
PM-IP
•- • -
-
•- •-
Alarm switch AL
•• • ••• •• ••• •••
••
Auxilia sWilch A
Cassette:type
accessones Shunttri
Nan-S
SHT
mnous Closin UVT-N •• ••
Undet\ioliage trip (UVT)

,
5 chronous Closln
wilh lead-wlre terminal block
UVT-S
SLT)
•- •• •• • •• •••
Accessorie's
connection
with Internal tenninal
with FI in leads
• •• •• • •• ••
Built-in
Pre,alarffi (contact 0
Overcurrent tri alarm .,3
"I .3 PAL
(OAl •• ••
accessories
e In ar e ,"
5
• • •• - •
•• •• •• • •• •• •
Dustproof (I)
Enclosure
aler roo (W) -
•• ••
,
•• ••
Electrical a eralion device MD
Mechanical interlock
Sli e late t
Wakln beamt ,(MI-S)
[MI·W) • • •
(HL
•• •• •• • • ••
••• •••
Handle lock device Handle lock
Hl·S

External
Lock cover {LC)
• •• •• ••
accessories External Door mounting
(5)
•• •• •
••• ••• •
operating
(R)
•• ••• •• ••
handle Mounted on breaker
(F)
Insulallng Between hase BA-
barrier To round
La, ,
BA-G
{TC-l) •• •• •• •• •• ••
Small TC-S
•• • ••
••• ••• ••
Terminal
Trans arent C
•• •••
cover
for rear connection BTe
foe lu -in (PTC)
•• • •
•• •• • • •• •
L1R
Marine approval IAvailable soon I
GIL
BV
• ••• •• ••
DNV
AB
•• ••
Thermal-
- • •
Thermal- ••
Thermal-
••
Thermal· Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping devlce magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equi Equi ped E ui Equip ed Equipped
" "
Notes *1: Use two poles In the case of three-pole or four-pole products_

UO~LiO~
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 400V DC and the four pales to be used far up to 500V DC.
*2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products_
In addition. wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 500V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 600V DC •
.,3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
Load Load
3-pole 4-pole

15
H series U series
WSSG3 WSSG4 WSSG4
250

"" j
125 250
..
~.I
~-;~
·~":_·~I ;&;;1
~~1
-Ji::" '.~t;t;
'. I
"l~i~:
~,
,U;'J,

~~l
'!~h'
NF2So-HW NF250-HGW NF250-HGW NFl25-RGW NF125·UGW NF25Q.RGW NF25Q.UGW
RT RE RT RT RT RT
125 150 175 125-160 160-250 16-25 25-40 1&-25 25-40
200 225 250 125-250 40-63 63-100 40-63 63-100 125-160 160-225 125-160 160-225

40 40 40 40 40 40 40
2 3 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 4
690 690 690 690 690 690 690
5/3 20120 20120 2512' 30/30 25/25 30130
-
3018
35/3'
SO/SO
35135
SO/50 1251125
-
200/200
125/125
1251125
-
200/200
50113 65/65 65/65 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
50113 70110 70ne 125/125 2001200 125/125 200/200
SOI13 75175 7sn5 1251125 2001200 125/125 2:001200
50113 75175 75nS 125/125 200/200 1251125 2:00/200
100125 100'100 1001100 12:5/125 2001200 125/125 2:00/200
40/20 ..1
40/40 ..2
-- -
40140 ..2
-
40{40 *2:
-
40/40 *2: 40/40 ..2
•A •A A •A •
A •A A
•6
2
8
3
• •8
3
•8
3
8
3
• •B
3

8
3
12,000 2:5,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 25,000
4,000 15,000 15,000 40,000 40,000 15,000 15,000
4,000 10,000 10,000 30,000 30,000 10,000 10,000
1,000 1000 1 000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1 000
100O 1000 1 000 1000 1000 1 000 000
10' 140 105 140 10' 140 105 10' 140 105 10' 140
165 165 165 240 240 240 240
68 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5
92 111 111 111 111 111 111

•• •• •• •• •• - ••
••- • • •• •• - ••
•- • -
-
- - -
•• •• •• •• ••• ••• •••
•• • •- •-
• ••- •• •• ••- •• ••
• •• •• •• •• •• ••
•••
- - -
• • • • •
•• - •• - •• --
-
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••
•• ••• •• ••
••
•• ••• ••
••
••• • •• ••- •
•• ••• ••• • • •- •
••• •• ••

••-

••

••

••
•• ••
• ••• •• •• ••• ••
•• • ••
••
•• •
• •• • •• •• • -
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••

Thermal-
magnetic
Thermal-
magnetic
Electronic

Thermal-
magnetic

Th~rmal-
magnetic
Th~rmal-
magnetic
Tnermal-
magnetic
£ ui ,d £ ui ,d E ui ,d E ui ,d
Equip ed Equi
" E uipped

16
2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers

Series C series S series H series


Grou WSS Gl WSSG2 WSSG3 WSSGl WSSGl

.,
Frame size 63 125 250 32 63 63
z;.i"_~ t
"'i- ltE-.;I1! l~4:l'

Type name
Pholo ~~iI
_,,-.~_
-t;ii:5-'i; ~~1
.:,,"::~:~-.:; ):
~

~!ill
&-1;
'
~~I
it~!-5;:
i
iii'
-~;~-
iii
~ij;}
I Available soon I .. ~ ',f-.?I i;*;• I Available soon I I Available soon I I Available soon I
WSseries NV63-GW NV125-CW NV25O-CW NV32·SW NV63-5W NV63-HW
16 20 25 32 40 125 150 175 6 10 16 20 16 20 25 32 40 16 20 25 32 40
Raled current In (Amp.) 50 63 63 80 100 125 200 225 250 25 32 50 63 50 63
Rated ambient tern eral:ure (OC 40 40 40 40 40 40
umber of I" 3 3 3 3 3 3
230-400-440 230-400 440 230 400 440 230-400 440 230 400 440 230-400-440
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage Iype MUlti.voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi.voltage'Wpe
3D-lOa-SOD 3D-lOa-SOD 30-100-500 30'100'500 30'100'500 30-100'500
High-speed type Rated currenl sensitivity I!J. n (rnA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max_ 0 eratm time at 51 o , 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity Il::.n (rnA) - 100-300'500
Selectable
100'300'500
selectable
- - -
Time-delay type
Max. operating time a1211::.n (5) - 0.45'1.0'2.0
Selectable
0.45'1.0'2.0
Selectable
- - -
nertla non-o eratlll time at2 0.1-0.5'1.0 0.1-0.5-1.0
Ear! • eaka e in lcalion s ',m "' Button Button Button B"""o Button Button
AC440V 2.5/1 1015 1518 5/2 7.514 m5
Rated breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 5f'- 10/5 1819 512 7.514 1015
IEC60947-2 (Icullc:s) AC3BOV 5f'- 5f'- 7.514 10/5
AC230V 7.5/4 30/15 35/18 10/5 15/8 25/13
without current 10000 10000 8000 10000 15000 15000
Number of operating cydes 440V-ln/2 6 000 6000 4000 6 000 15000 15 000
IWith current
440V· n 6 000 6000 4 000 6000 8000 8 000
•b 75 90 105 75 75 75

ffiR 10
130 130 165 130 130 130
Overall dimensions (mm)
, 68 68 68 68 68 68
90 90 92 90 90 90
Screw terminal " •- •• •• • • •
Front SoJderless box terminal SL
Fixed
Busbal" tenninal
• •• •• ••• • ••
•• ••
Installation and Rear (B
connections
Plug.in
Rear
Rearffront IP20 (PM·IP)
PM
•• • - •
lECJ5mm Mountin hook a tion
• •- • •
•••
rnn Ada ter 0 tion

Casselte:type
Alarm switch
Auxilia switch
AL
AX •• •• •• •• ••
Shunttri SHT
accessones
Uridervaltage trip (UVT) Non-s nchrooous dosiri
S nchronousdosin
UVT-N
(UVT-S) •- •• • • • •
Insu alion SWltc
Earth-Ieaka e tri alarm
[MG
EAL •• •• •• •• •• ••
Bullt-in
accessorieS
Test button modu
Pre·a arm-conlact ou
e
0'
TBM)
IPA • • • •- •- •
••• -
Cinereock
Accessorle's
connection
with Lead·wire terminal block
with F in leads
SL
•• •• •• •• ••
Elidosure \Dustproof
(S
I •• •• •• •• ••• ••
W,,,, roof
• ••• • • •
•••
Electrica 0 eration deVice (MD)
Mechanical interlock MI
(HL •• •• •• •• •••
Handle lock device I Handle lock
HL.S
••• •• •• •• • ••
•••
Lock cover (LC)
External
accessories
External
operating
Door mounting
(5
IR • •• ••• •• •
handle

bn:r~:~ng
Mounted on breaker
Between hase BA-F)
••• •• •• •• ••• ••
,
To round
L.
{M.G}
Col
•• ••• ••• ••• •• ••
•••
Small CoS
Tenninal
Trans arent IITC)
• •• •• •• ••
••
cover
for rear connection BTC

Automatic tripping device


foe lu ·in (PTC)
Hydraulic-
magnetic
Thermal-
magnetic
• Thermal·
magnetic
• Hydraulic.
magnetic
• HydraUlic.
magnetic
• Hydraulic-
magnetic

Trip button E ui ,d E ui ,d Equip ed Equipped Equipped E uipped
Note *1: 125A rated current IS 3p only.

Rated operational voltage 23G---400-440V


Available voltage range 195 484V

17
S series H series S series H series U series
WSSG2 WSSG2 WSS G3 WSSG3 WSS G2 WSS G3
125 125 250 250 125 250
iI,-i •

ii'. il"-
JI_J'.~_JII_
~ ii_l,a.
~

ii~tH
'Ji;.'iEid
~
~

-.-
~
ii~ i
',";:,1
NV125-SW NV12S-HW NV25Q-.SW NVZSQ-.SEW NV250-HW NV25D-HEW NV125-RW NV250-RW
16 20 32 40 50 16 20 32 40 50 125150175 \125 150 175 125-225 125 150 175 125-225 16 20 32 40 50 125 150 175
63 SO 100 125 ",1 63 SO 100 200 225 2Sll I 200 22S Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 63 SO 100 200 225
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3
230-400-440 230 400 440 230-400-440 2~~,?Q-440 23Q-40G-440 230-400-440 230--40Q--440 ,~~Q--40Q-.440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-vnltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage lype Multi-voltage type MUlti.voltag~·tVpe Multi-voltage type
30-100-500 30-100-500 30·100·500 30'100-500 30-100·500 30·100-500 30·100·500 30-100-500
Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selec:table
0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
100-300-500 100-300-500 100'300'500 100-300-500 100-300-500 100-300-500 100-300-500 100-300-500
Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
0.45·1.0-2.0 0.45'1.0'2.0 0.45-1.0'2.0 0.45-1.0'2_0 0.45-1.0-2.0 0.45-1.0'2..0 0.4S·1.0·Z.0 0.4S-1_0·Z.0
Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
0.1·0.5-1.0 0.1'0.5'1.0 0.1'0.5'1.0 0.1'0.5'1.0 0.1-0.5-1,0 0.1-0.5'1.0 0.1-0.5-1.0 0.1-0.5'1.0
Button
25113
30/15
.""""
50125
50125
.""""
25/13
30/15
.""""
25/13
30/15
.""""
50113
50/13
Button
50/13
50113
Button
125/125
125/125
.""""
125/125
125/125

SO/25 laO/50 5025 50 5 100/25 00/25 125/125 25/125


25000 25000 12000 12000 1 000 1 000 2 000 12000
20000 20000 4000 4000 4000 4000 20000 4000
10000 10000 4000 4000 4000 4000 10000 4000
90 120 90 120 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 90 105
.,
130

90
130
68
90
165
68
92
165
68
92
165
68
92
165
68
'2
191
68
90
240
68
'2
•• •• •• •• •• •• • ••
•• •• •• •• •• •• ••• ••
• • • • •
• • • •• •• •• ••
• •• •• ••
•• •• • • •• •
•• •• •• •• •• • •
•• ••
• • • • • •• •
•• •• • • •• •• •• ••
•• • •• • •• • •• • •
• • • • • • • •• ••
•• •• •• •• ••• ••
••• •• •• ••• ••• •• •• •••
••• •• •• ••
•• •• •• •• ••
•• ••
•• •• •• •• ••• •• ••
••• •• •• • •• •• •• ••
•• ••• •• •• •• ••
•• •• •• •• ••• ••

Thermal-
magnetic Electronic Thermal-
magnetic
• •
Electronic Thermal-
magnetic ~ha~r:~~~

Equipped Equl ed Equipped E uipped Equi ped E uip ed

18
2. Detailed.Specifications
Motor-Protection Breakers

Frame A 30 50 100 225


Type name
MB3D-SW MBSD-CW MB50·SW
MB100-SW MB225-SW
I Available soon I I Available soon I I Available soon I
200122llV 400/440V 200!220V 4QOI44OV 2001220V 4QOI44OV 200mov 40014411V 2001220V 4001440V
A

"",., kW A A A A
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
25 11
16
12
3.7
,.,
7.' 45 11 22
,
7.1 1.'
100
eo 22
"45 22'
" 110
- 2.2 200
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated motor capacity: kW
10
8
2.2
3.7
4<l
32
18.5
, 0.75 1.'
71 18.5 37
175 45 eo
,,
7.1 1.'
2.2 25 ,.,
7.' 15
11 2.' 0.'
63
45
15
11
30
22 150 37 75
Reference ambient temperature 40"C
(45°C for marine applications) 2.'
2
1.'
1.2
0.8
0.75
0.'

0.2
1.'

0.75

0.4
16
12
10
8
3.7
-
2.2
7.'
,.,
3.7
2
1.'
12
0.8
0.2
0.75

0.4
(40)
32
(25)
(16)
(12.5)
.
7.'

3.7
19
15
11

,.,
7.'
125 30

Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500 500 500 500 500
IEC60947-2 440V 2.511 2.511 7.51' 2$113: 25/13
Jig C 8201-2
1ft
.
(lculles)
AC 4<lOV
23DV
7.5'4
7.5/4
7.514
7.514
·····.7.51'
1518,
30115
00/25 . .
30115
'012' .
r'1 • 15 75 .75 90 105
~'§E b

lliH 10
130 130 130 130 165
~~g ,
'6 00 "
90
"90 "90 "90 68
92
, • Crimp contact
Front connection IFl • Crimp contact • Crimp contact • Crimp contact • Crimp contact
~:g
~ii Rearconnectlon IB) • Round stud • Round stud • Round stud • Bar stud • Bar stud
5E
" Plug-in (PM)
• •
Remark: The products of which rated current Is parenthesized will be produced when an order IS placed.
• • •

19
a. D~tililed Specifications
UL Listed Products

Frame A 100 225 50 100 150 250


Type name NF100-CWU NF225·CWU NF50-SWU NF100-SWU NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW

Photo

Available soon

Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 175 5 10 15 20 15 20 30 40 50 (125) (150) 175


15 20 30 40 60 125 150 175
50 60 75 100 70 80 90 100
at ambient temperature 40"C (IEC30"C) 200 225 30 40 50 50 60 75 100 110 125 150 200 225 250 200 225 250
Number of poles 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3
Rated voltage (V AC) 240 240 240 48OY/277 600Yl347 600Y/347 GOOY1347
600Y/347V 18
UL489 480V
AC
~ 4S0YI277V 50

I f---~~-tcc-,,--'-,,---=2c4cOV-,,-ccr---=--==~--=-t--=--=--=cc.--=--=+--=--=-c:::-'--=--=-f-~--=cc.--=--=--=F--=--='=--=--=-4--=--=--==---=--=+~--=--==---=cc..J
Rated insulation voltage Ui M 600 600 600 690 690 690 690
! 6SW
~
~ SOOV
~
.- JIS C 8201·2
440V
~.~ IECfi0947-2 AC 415V
(Iculles) 400V

J 380V
230V
DC 250V ..3

~1 !O
Overall b 150 165 150 150 185
dimensions
(mm)
, 68 68 68 68 86 86 86
~ 90 92 90 90 110 110 110
Mass affront·face type (kg) 0.7 0.95 1.5 0.55 0.75 0.7 0.95 2.0 2.0 2.0

Fronl
Crimp contact (FI
• • • • • • •
11
u
connection Soldeness
tenninal
(SL)
• • • • •
~


Alarm switch
Auxiliary swttch
(AL)
(AX)



• •• •• •


• •

.~ Shunt trip (SHT)
• • • • • • •
j Under-voltage trip (UVT)
• • • • • • •
Verticallead-wire terminal unit (SLT)
• •• • • • • •
Mechanical Interlock (MI)
• • • • • •
.
~
Handle lock device (HL)

F

• •
• •



•• •
••

••
·i Operating halldle S
• • • • •
..~ Insulating bafTier
V
(IB)

• •
• •


• •





E
] Terminal
rn'"
Large

Small
(TC-L)

(TC-S)
• -
•.. • • • • •
lEG 35mm rail fixture Supplied slandardly

Thermal· Thermal- Hydraulic_ Thermal- Thermal- Thermal adjustable- Thermal adjustable·


Over current trip means
magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic

Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped EquIpped Equipped

TOV type approval


• • •
Notes: ..1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible to both AC and DC.
• • • •
Lin~
*2 Specifications for products with a CE mark differ from those for general-purpose products. Details will
be available upon request.
*3 Use two poles among the three poles in the case ofthree-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the
right allows the modeis of NF10o-CWU, NF100-SWU and NF225--CWU to be used for up to 400 V DC and
the models of NF-SFW, NF·SJW, and NF-HJW 10 be used for up to 500 V DC.
*4 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger protection) structure.
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed. 3~pole Load

20
3. MOO Breaker (Measuring Display Ubit)

.Summary .Appearance
The circuit breaker incorporates a digitai Measuring Display Unit
(MDU). It can measure and display a range of circuit condition
data for more efficient energy management.

• Features
.Measuring and displaying the load current, line voltage,
harmonic current, power, electric energy and power factor.
• Direct connection to open network CC-Links is possible.
• The measuring VT and CT are Installed within the circuit breaker,
thus offering savings on space and wiring.

NF250-SWM 3P

• MDU breaker product lineup and measuring display items


, • MCCB
. ,,;,,1.,; , .
Load current for each phase: present value, demand value, maximum demand value
Una voltage: present value
••
Harmonic current: 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19th, total harmonics
Present value, demand value, maximum demand value •
Power. present value, demand value, maximum demand value

Electric energy: electric energy, time electric energy, maximum lime electric energy
Power factor: present value
••

• Specifications
Series ... //. •••
. ... 'S.senes .....
.

Group WSSMDU
Frame size 250
Type name NF250-5WM
Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 175 200 225 250
Rated ambient temperature (oel 40
Number of poles 3,4
Supply system 311l3W, 103W for 3 poles, 304W for 4 poles (10ZW available for 3 poles)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
500V 15/8
440V 25/13
415V 30115
Rated short-
circuit breaking
IEC60947·2 AC 400V 30/15
(Icu/lcs) (50{60Hz)
capac~ies (kA) 30/15
380V
240V 50/25
230V 50/25
Connection Front type (F), Reartype (8) *1

Transmission (option) *2
I Pulse output
Solid-state relay (SSR), no-voltage a contact, DC24V/AC10D-ZOOV 20mA
Output pulse unit 1-1D-10D-100D-10000kWh/pulse set, pulse width 0.35-0.45 sec.
I CG--Link Load current, Line voltage, Harmonic curren~ Power, Electric energy, Power factor
Maximum measuring current (Amp.) SOD
Maximum measuring voltage 690VAC
MDU control power supply (For 10D-Z40V AC/DC, allowable voltage range: 85%-110%) 12VA (Use a fuse with a 4A rated current or larger) *3

Notes: *' 1
Apply the MDU panel mounting type when the breaker IS to be on the back.
*' 2
With pulse output attached type and CC-Link attached type cannot be used al the same time.
*3 Use a separate power supply when CC-Link allached type is used. Use ~nsulating tr<lnsformers) (12VNunit) when connecting direclly to the main circuit.

21
4. Connection Method

1. Connection Types The front connemion model will be delivered unless otherwise specitied. Notice, however,
that you can convert the front connection madelia other types (excluding the plug-In) by
Table 4-1: Connection Types using an appropriate connection component, which is separately available.

Connection Method (Abbreviation) Front connection (F) Solderless tanninal Rear connection (8) Plug-in (PM)

Appearance
"'J
Note *1: Rear studs are bar studs forthe models of 125A, 160A and 250A of frame size, and round studs for olhertypes of models.

2. Connection Accessories
Table 4·2: List of Connection Accessories
TYPe'name ... Solderless terminal (Sl) Rear studs (B-ST) Pll.ig~iri (PM) ::'-1
NF32·SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P ST·05SW2 PM-oSSW2
NF32-SW, MB3D-SW, MB5D-CWISW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 3P - ST-05SW3 PM-QSSW3
NF63-SWiliW 4P ST-OSSW4 PM-oSSW4
NF12frCW/SW 2P ST-1SW2 PM·1SW2
SL-1SW4 PM-1HW2
NF125-HW 2P STw1HW2
PM·1UW2
NF125-CW/SWf'rWoI, MB100-SW, NV125-CW/SW/HW PM-ism
3P SL·1SW3 ST-1SW3
NF125-RW/UW, NV125-RW PM-1UW3
NF12S-SW/HW/UW, NV12frSW/HW PM-1SW4
4P SL-1SW4 ST-1SW4
NF12S-UW
NF250-CWISW/HW, NF16D-SW1HW 2P SL-1SW4 PM-2SW2
ST-2SW2
NF250.cW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NF16D-SW/HW, NV250·CW/SW/HW/RW/SEW/HEW
3P SL-2UW3 PM-2SW3
NV2S0-RW ST-2UW3
NF2S0-SWIHW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW 4P SL-1SW4 ST-2SW4 PM-2SW4
NF2SD-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGWIHGW, NF125-SGWIHGW PM-2GSWIP2 .. 2
2P SL-2GSW4 ST-2GSW2
NF250·RGWIUGW, NF125-RGWIUGW PM-2SW2
NF2S0-SGWIHGW, NF160·SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW PM-2GSWIP3 ,.. 2
3P SL·2GSW3 ST-2GSW3
NF250-RGWIUGW, NF125-RGW/UGW PM-2SW3
NF250-SGWIHGW, NF160-SGWIHGW, NF125-SGW/HGW PM-2GSWIP4 ,.. 2
4P Sl-2GSW4 ST2GSW4
NF250-UGW, NF125-UGW
Notes: *1 You can use the plug-m terminal unit (PM) when the wlnng of terminal units IS required In advance, and the delIVery of both the marn body and the
components at the same time, which is normal, is not allowed. Furthermore speclfy the nonuse of plug-in terminal (PM-N) for the connection of circuit breaker.
.. 2 IP20 with safety device.

3. Connection of Line and Load Line Load


The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is (a) normal connection shown on
the right. Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection, which may lead to the decrease·m
j j j t t t

I I
breaking performance. However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models
(except NF and NV models with MDU).
NF-C series, NF-S series, NF-H series, NF-U series,
MB series, C' S series of NV40Q-SOOA Frame Revan;e connection is allowed forthe standard models.

j j j t t t
Load Line

Normal connection (a) Reserve connection (b)

Normal and reverse connection methods

22
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories

1. Accessories
Table 5·1: Accessories
Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type of accessories

AL Alarm switch A switch that electrkally indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker.
NF-C'S'H'U,
NV·C'S'H'U

AX Auxlilary switch A switch that electrically indicates the ON-OFF status of the circuit breaker. and MB series

A device that electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remole distance.
SHT Sh""'''p Permissible working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or
70 to 125%. oflhe DC rated vollage.
NF-C'S'H'U
and MB series •
A device that automatically trips the circuit breaker if the voltage is lowered. NF-e'S'H'U, (Note 1)
UVT Undervoltage trip Working voltages are 70 to 35% ofthe UVT rated voltage. When the voltage
recovers to 85% or higher, you can reset the device and put into operation.
NV·C·S·H·U
and MB series •
A switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the earth leakage
EAL Earth-leakage alarm switch cin::ult breaker caused by a ground fault. This switch is available only for -
models with the verticallead·wire terminal unit (SL1).
NV-C'S'U

TBM Test button module


This moduie allows you a remote testing by applying a voltage.
An external sequence cammon to SHT can be used. (The standard
configuration requires the verticallaad-wire termInal unit (SL1).)
NV-C'S'U' -
The inoorporalion of this switch enables the measurement of insulation resislance
MG Insulation switch
between Ihe lerminals of the load with the circuit breaker being lumed OFF.
NV-C'S'U -

Note: (1) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are excluded. Remark: (1) Accessory termmals are marked by both IEC-based terminal symbols
and conventional symbols, like 9B/Ala.

2. Switch Operation and Rating


Table 5-2: AL Switch Operation Table 5-6: AL and AX Switch Rating
.,.,., .
--
CirtlJitb'rtiakefstatUs AL "","" ","lad

~9B/ALa (open)
::..----
OFF or ON
. 96/ALb (closed)
95/ALc

~9B/ALa{clOSed)
---y- 96/ALb (open)
460 250 0.2 0.2

Trip 95/ALc
S 250 3 2 125 0.4 0.4

Table 5-3: AX Switch Operation 125 5 3 30 4 3


Cii'ci.iit breaker.status
Please cantact us for applications in the field of smaller current values.

~
14/AXa (open)
---y- . 12/AXb (closed)
Table 5-7: EAL Switch Rating
OFF or Trip 11/AXc

~
14/AXa (closed)
12/AXb (open)
ON 11/AXc

Table 5-4: EAL Switch Operation


200 3 2
CirClJit breaker statUs EALswitch coritiict

~ EALa (open) 100 3 2


Over current trip,
short circuit trip,
ON, OFF ~EAL' A conlrol power supply (compatible 10 100 and
2QOV AC) is required; see 1he diagram on the
righl showing its wiring. (The pennissible range
r-- EALa (closed) ofvo~age of the contml power sllpplyis80 10
242V AC, and the power requirement is lOVA.)
Ground fault trip
L - EALc
Table 5-5: MG Switch Operation
Cireuitbreaker Status MGS:witch status

~
---y- MG switch (open)
OFF or Trip

~
~
ON MG switch (closed)

23
3. Combinations of Accessories r Breaker handle oAL oAY. IISHTorUVT
Left pole-[][]- Right pole
6MG ~~EAl ~TBM -- Direction of outgoing
lead wire
Table 5-8: Combinations of Accessories c::J Cassette-type accessories
Series NF-C' S' H . U, MB NV-C'S'H~U
NF32-SW NF32·SW{3P) NV32-SW
NF63-CW/SW/HW NF63-CW/SW/HW(3P) NV63-CW/SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW NF125-CW(3P), NF125-SW(3P, 4P) NV125-CW/SW/HW
NF125-HW, NF125-SGWiHGW NV2SD-CW/SW/HW
NF125-RGWIUGW NV2SlJ.SEW/HEW

~
NF16Q-SWISGWIHWIHeW NV125-RW, NV2SQ-RW

~
NF250-CW/SW/HW
NF2S0-SGWIHGW
'Of NF2SD-RGWlUeW
POles
MB3O-SW, MB5o-CW/SW
MB100-SW, MB225-SW
Accessories 2-pola 2-pole, 3-pole, 4-pole 2-pole, 3-pole, 4-pole

AL [Et m m
AX. [8-- M W
-m m
(Note 1) (Note 1)

AL+AX. ~ (1)c@
0·.·.
ITJ=m
SHTor UVT
(Not. 2)

ID(Not.2)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)

rn (Note 2)
(Note 4)
(Note 6)

AL+SHT or UVT
(Note 2)

AX.+SHT or UVT
ill
AL+AX.+SHT or UVT
m (Note 1)
(Note 2)

MG
rno
AL+MG
~
AX.+MG
m (Note 5)

EAL [ill}
TBM [IT)
Notes: (1) Second IV< can substitute the AL on the left-pole.
(2) Models with UVT require a UVT voltage module to be installed on the lead-wire term'lnal unit. (No such voltage
module is required for SHT.) Part of UVT accessories is not of cassette type. (Details will be available upon request.)
(3) UVTs for left-pole installation can be produced, if specified, for frame current values of 32, 63 and 12SA
(exclUding SGWtHGWIRGWJUGW).
(4) SHT cannot be installed.
(5) EAls are available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). Specify a control power supply
of either 100 or 200V AC.
(6) Models NV2SD-SEW/HEW are not allowed to install the UVT device.
Remarks: (1) Circled numbers indicate the order of installation.
(2) Accessories of EAl, and TBM can be installed independent of installations of AL, AX, and MG.
(Two units among EAl, and TBM cannot be installed at the same time.)

24
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories

4. Shunt Trip (SHT)


Table 5·9' Standard Coil Rating
Cut-off Input power requirement (VA) (Nate 1)
Series switch VollageM Operating time (rna) (Note 2)
AC DC

32(30)'63A Frame
125A Frame 50
(NF125-SGW/HGWIRGWIUGWare excluded) AC10o-240
NF-C'S'H'U 380-550 15 or less
Equipped 120
MB (Compatible to 50 and 60Hz. )
DC10D·125
160'250A Frame 60
NF125-SGWlHGWIRGWIUGW

Notes: (1) Secure a sufficient Input power so that the voltage will not drop below the permIssIble lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage).
(2) The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open.

5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT)


Table 5·10: Standard Coil Rating
• UVT Voltage Module UVT voltage module
Input
Series: P.Owe f. The UVT voltage module is
D1fP1
(VAl normally installed on the
AC10D-110f12o-130 selectable verticalleadwwire terminal J1(lJC1
200-220/230-250 selectable
All models 380-415f440-480 selectable 5 30 or less unit (SLT). (A separate-
(CompatIble to 50 and 60Hz. ) J2JUC2
DC1 00f11 0 selectable
mount type can be produced
upon request.)
Notes: (1) A desired voltags can be selected by changing the tenninal wiring.
(2) The operating time denotes the time from when no voltage Is
applied to UVT until when the maIn contact of the breaker starts to UVT Voltage Module Wiring Diagram
open. (Lead-Wire Connection)
(3) Time-clelayed types can be produced. Details will be available upon
request.

6. Test Button Module (TBM) 7. Lead-wire Specifications


• The effect of pressing the test button on the breaker main body is Table 5·12
produced while the input control voltage is applied. (Apply the voltage
for more than two seconds for the breaker main body of time--delayed
NV models.)
(Note 1) A ring-mark marked
• The model with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT) is standard. Heat·
by the terminal symbol 19B/Alal. 196fALbl. 195/Alcl
resistant 0.5mm2 450mm
is attached to each
'"~ lead-wire.
IC1/S11, IC2IS21
Table 5~11

SOri",

Input rated
Compatible to
i n18 Note: (1) The length is 400 mm for the model of four-pole, right-pole installation.

• Lead wires are normally extended laterally.

~
• Grooves are provided standardly on the side face of the breaker,

~r •
AC100-24OJ TBM2
control
voltage (V)
DC100-240 TBM1 allowing the extension of the lead wires along them. (Note 1)
(DC24) (Note 1)
Note: (1) The models ofNF125-SGW/HGWIRGW!UGW, NF160-SGWfHGW,
.- NF250-5GWIHGW/RGW!UGW are excluded.
H~
Input control
1VAoriess
power (VA)

Note: (1) The specifications of 100-240V


g,
AC/100-240V DC are standard
unless otherwise specified. The
specifications of 24 V DC are
available If requested.
i 7

12.5

8. Internal Terminal Type (INT)


• This unit is an internal accessory that is provided with terminal screws for lead-wire connection.

Remark: (1) Available for the models of NF125-SGWIHGW/RGWIUGW,


NF160-SGWIHGW, NF250-SGWIHGWfRGWIUGW.

25
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT)
• The circuit beaker can be mounted, being closely fitted to the unit.
• Terminal screws are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and screws can be tightened further after wiring.
• A terminal cover is provided standardly.
• This unit supports the models of front connection, rear connection, and plug-in type (excluding PLT).

nTh!"tTTTi

M3.5
Self.up lerminal screW

10. Cassette-type Accessories


• Cassette-type of accessories can be mounted onto and demounted from the circuit breaker by users themselves.
Table 5·13- Cassette Types of Accessories

<i/ .... , ...... .. '


"l.·.
2. :'L· .
Kh1d Of aCCe_S@~~s ii ·····i
ii AI: ••• AXe" •Al+AX SHT(NO%:1) J ····i•
UVTNA13O-0SSWR{S) UVTNA48Q.OSSWR(S)
NF32-SW, NF63-GWISWIHW SHTA24lJ.05SWR(S)
Al-OSSWl(S) AX-DSSWl(S) AlAX.05SWL(S) UVTNA13D-OSSWl(S) UVTNA480-0SSWL(S)
NV32-5W, tN63·CWISWfHW 05 SHTA5So-05SWR(S)
Al~05SWR(S) AX-OSSWR{S) AlAX-OSSWR{S) UVTNA2SQ.05SWR(S) UVTN0110-05SWR(S)
MB30-SW, MBSO-SW SHT0125-05SWR(S)
UVTNA2SD-OSSWL(S) UVTND 11 Q-OSSWl{S)
UVTNA13Q-1SW UVTND11Q-1SWRS
UVTNA13D-1SWRS UVTND11D-1SWLS
NF125-CWISW/HW Al-1SW AX-1SW AlAX·1SW SHTA24Q-1SWR(S)
UVTNA130.1 SWlS UVTSA13D-1SW
NV12S..cW/SW/HW/RW 1 Al-1SWLS AX-1SWlS ALAX-1SWLS SHTA550-1SWR(S)-
UVTNA2SD-1SW UVTSA130-1SWRS
MB100-SW Al-1SWRS AX-1SWRS AlAX-1SWRS SHT0125-1SWR(S)
UVTNA2SD-1SWRS UVTSA2SD-1SW
UVTNA2SD-1 SWlS UVTSA250-1 SWRS
UVTNA48D-1SW UVTSA48D-1 SW
UVTNM8D-1 SWRS UVTSA480-1SWRS
UVTNM80-1SwtS UVTSD11D-1SW
UVTND11D-1SW UVTSD11 Q-1 SWRS

NF250..cWISW/HW
NF16O-SW/HW , Al-2SWl{S)
Al-2SWR(S)
AX-2SWl(S)
AX-2SWR(S)
AlAX·2SWl(S)
ALAX-2SWR(S)
SHTA24D-2SWR(S)
SHTA550·2SWR(S)
UVTNA130-2SWR(S)
UVTNA130·2SWl(S)
UVTNA2SD-2SWR(S)
UVTNA48Q-2SWR(S)
UVTNA48Q-2SWl(S)
UVTN011 D-2SWR(S)
NV250..cWISW1HW/RW/SEWIHI?N SHTD125-2SWR(S)
UVTNA2SD-2SWl(S) UVTND11D-2SWl(S)
SHTA24O-2GSWR(S)
SHTASSD-2GSWR(S) UVTSA130-2GSWR(S) UVTSA13D-2GSWRN
NF250-SGW/HGWIRGWIUGW AL-2GSWl{S) AX-2GSWL{S) AlAX-2GSWL(S) SHTD125-2GSWR(S) UVTSA250·2GSWR(S) UVTSA25D-2GSWRN
NF160-SGWIHGW 'G AL-2GSWR(S) AX.2GSWR(S) AlAX-2GSWR(S) SHTA24D-2GSWRN UVTSM80-2GSWR(S) UVTSA480-2GSWRN
NF125-SGWfHGWIRGWIUGW AL-2GSWN AX-2GSWN AlAX·2GSWN SHTA550-2GSWRN UVTSD110-2GSWR(S) UVTSD11D-2GSWRN
SHTD125-2GSWRN

I Model deSignation code I :<~-;'.·.S.7,t,I~Pi?~s.that;tI1el:v~rtical.'>:i-H;:·


Notes: (1) NV models are excluded.
,_!eCld.;vj~}~rmi_~C1I,b!9~J~FP-ll)- a~d~d (2) UVTN Non-Synchronous closing
(~.n9;_s~c:ifje~;.-,I~d'\\'i#.llre.~~l)d~); UVTS Synchronous closing
. .'~ denotes'lritemal termjn'al;~- -
With the UVTS model, the breaker can be resel even if
the voltage is not applied_
NF250-SEW/HEW models cannot be produced.
Remarks: (1) Referto Combinations of Accessories for
detaits of combinations and poles.
hiSta.l1atiM p.osltion (2) A cassette type of Al cannot be Installed on circuit
SHT UVT R: right-pole installation breakers with MG switch.
L: left-pole installation
A048 : 2448VAC A048 : 24-48VAC selectable
A130: 10Q-110/12D-130VAC selectabie Blank: elther pole installation
A240: 100-240VAC
A550 ; 380-SSOVAC AlSO: 200-220/230-2S0VAC selectable
0012: 12VOC MaO: 38D-41S!44D-480VAC selectable
0036: 24-36VOC A600: S0D-5S01600VAC selectable
0048: 313-48VDC 0110: 100l110VOC selectable
012S: 10D-125VOC
0250: 22Q-250VDC

11. Pre-alarm Modules (PAL)


• The PAL can be installed on the right side face of electronic • Pre-alarm Characteristics .Pre~alarm Module
circuit breaker.
Table 5·14
Pre-alarm Pre-alarm module
SSRotitput (mechanical contact oiJtput) (/:4ote2)

NF125-SGWIHGW
NF160-SGW/HGW Option Option (Note 1)
NF250-SGWIHGW PALa Pre-alarm output
NV2SD-SEW/HEW • (Note 3) Option (Note 1) P'::JControl
P1 power supply
Notes: (1) A control power supply {compatible to 10G-200V AC} IS reqUired. (PALc)
(2) An additional accessory cannot be installed on the right pole in this case.
(3) LED indicate only

The self-hold type is standard, but an


automatic-reset type can be produced
upon request
26
5. Accessories
External Accessories

1. F-type Operating Handle


• Appearance (Color N1.5)

• Outside Dimension Diagram Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker


Left hinge Right hinge
Cenlerof H X, H X,


theelrcuil
breaker Less than 170
and the 0 (SH+100) 10 or higher
operatlng or higher or higher
handle 10 (SH+120)
or higher or higher
Plale
• This handle in conjunction with the breaker Ihlc:kness 1.2-3.2
enables the isolation function effective. 51 A±2
Operating handle
• The standard model is equipped with a safety

F~~"~
device that prevents the circuit breaker from
being turned on if the door is open. (If not • Drilling Dimension Diagram
desired, please specify so.) Center of the clrcuit
• The handle can be locked at either ON or breakero;ng~endEle
41i112 Left hinge circuit Right hinge
OFF position. (Three padlocks (40mm) can
be installed. OFF-position lock only
specifications are also acceptable.)
Ci,~' f1X
breaker'l;;m~
breaker

• Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP3X


(IP5X with dustproof packing) ~,'l7 The above illustration shows a view of
the hinges and the clrcuitbreaker when
~
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit viewed from the direction of the load.
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected
(only In the case of a single padlock (35 mm).

Table 5-15: Summary of Dimensions

~r";::':: MoU"'~
,(mm
, : " ': ',' "
,',' , ,.', ,

FOSSW2P NF32-SW, NF6g.CW/SW/HW 2P


C
"''''' '
- (a) Circuit
NF32-SW, NFeg.cW1SW/HW, NV32..sW, Nves.sW/HW, MB30-SW, MBSO-CW/SW 3P,4P 111 breaker
FOSSW 25
NV6g.CW/SW 2P,3P 105 Either mounting screws
2P M4xO.7 (2pcs)
F1SW2P
F1SW
NF125-CW/SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV12S-CWfSW/HW, MB100-SW 3P,4P ----,,---- 111 screw or ,,5 (b) Handle
mounting screws
F2SW NF160-SW/HW, NF250-eW/SW/HW, NV2SD-CW/SW1HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 2P, 3P, 4P 107 35 126
(2pcs)
F2GSW NF12S-SGW/HGW, NF16D-SGW/HGW, NF2SD-SGWIHGW 3P,4P 125 35 126
Note. (1) Dimensions of both front connection and rear connection are shown. The plug-In type has a different reference plane for mounting the Cllt::uit breaker.
Remarks: (1) The test button becomes difficult to press when an operating handle Is Installed on an NV model. Then, use models with either TBM Instead.
(2) Dustproof packings are separately available.
(3) You may coMult us for details of the F-type operating handle for the U series.
(4) The standard type is equipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows the door to be opened only when OFF operation (see below") is canied out (0) We can sLPply upon
request another door~lock mechanism that allows the door to be opened only when reset operation Is canied out, which, however, is not Isolation-compatible.

2. S-type Handle
• Appearance (Color N1.5) • Outside Dimension Diagram • Front Plate Drilling Dimension Diagram
Operating plate 4-04.5 Center of the CITClJit
fVFront plate OperatIng plate ," , ~/-_ breaker

I' Face Plate,+ -+_,_'


Clasp
(Nole 1
Center ofIhe clrcuit breaker Front plale deviation of 4mm or less
operating hendle 100 ormore (210 crmcre
• The handle can be locked at either ON or when the hinge Is On the left)
OFF position. (Three padlocks (40mm) can
be installed. Off-position lock only
• (Nole
17 43.S! Front plate thickness 1.2-3.2

specifications are also acceptable.)


• Digrees of protection (IEC60529) IP5X
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected
(only in the case of a sIngle padlock (35 mm)).
Reference plane for mounting
the cllClJiI breaker
Table 5-16" Summary of Dimensions

Typename
· ' , i i . ', . , "ii,}ppli",bl' mod"' • A (Note 4) B(Nole-4)
Dimerisions(mm)
C (Nole4)
S05SW NF32-SW, NF53-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, l'fV63-CW/SW/HW, MB3D-SW, MBSD-CW/SW
87 102 104.5
S1SW NF12S-eW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100·SW, NV125-RW (NoleS}
S2SW NF1eO-SW/HW, NF250-CWfSWIHW, NV2SD-CW/SW/HW, NV25G-SEW1HEW, MB225-SW, NV250-RW (Note 5) 95 110 112.S
S2GSW NF125-SGW!HGW, NF160-SGWIHGW, NF25G-SGW/HGW 113 128 130.5
Noles. (1) The clasps are not supplied standardiy, and shoUld be prepared by users. Details on dimenSions and others Will be Remark; (1) These are not SUitable for Isolation.
available upon request
(2) When the optional clasp is used.
(3) The tolerance from the center of 252 Is shown.
(4) The dimensions of the front-face type are shown. Some of the back-face and plug-in types have a different reference
plane for mounting the circuit breaker.
(5) The front plate drill1ng dimensions forthe U series differ from those shown above. Please [;(Jnsult us for their details.

27
3. V-type Operating Handle
• Appearance (Color N1.5) • Outside Dimension Diagram Center of Hinge and
Circuit Breaker
Front plate
Fronlbs&!I

Fll:lrrtplala

~~
"'.
Right
Hinge Hinge

o
I
Circuit
breaker
MinimumE
MaldmumF
x X
• This handle in conjunction with the breaker main
enables the isolation function effective.
H X
• The safety standards of EN Standards
(EN60204-1) are satisfied, o or hIgher (5H+100)or higher
• Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram
• Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP65 is The above illustration shows a view
satisfied standardly. of the hinges and the circuit breaker
C~cuitbreeker Cenlarcfthe Centeroftha
when viewed from the direction of
• OFF-position lock only is available for up to three

~
Centerofthe operating handle circuit breaker
the load.
commercial padlocks (lZl8). circuR breaker
operating handle
~
-Tt- CenlerOftheclrcult"'x~ ~/
_t
• A door-lock mechanism allows the door to be
tt"IJ
breakerOlleratlnghendlll...
~ Front Plate Drilling
opened at OFF-position only.
Dimension Diagram
, I '
,t- ~~-l"
I

,~ II'
"~~--l-
Center of the circuit breaker
OIIerating handle

I, I
,
, I' I
' I I 'I
I"
, N bllmkar
0'001<
If.-- 1=
ffiJ' ;;l;
.

G Either M4>:O.7 Either M4>:O.7 -4>',


screw or liS screw or 115

3·pcle 4-pole '"


Note 1; The drilling attl1ls position is not required for the models of both V2GSW and V2GSWF.

Table 5-17: Summary of Dimensions

I+,;";;j;i.\~ cc,i. .""··ii2:' Ai ".'..


. . .fV;¥i~i
i i i,1,0jcik~;>i'c> ~f"~~
.....•........
'.·.i>···. ""c", .,...·.;;i. . ,if';
.. ·,.,Ai> ~c "'d i,ip i.E' 'F', '.i'S '<i J
{Note 2) NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SWIHW, NV32-SW
{Note 3) NV63-CW1SWIHW, MB30-SW
3P
75 130 44 61 125 - 25 111 -
-
V05SWF MB50-CWISW 4P 12.5

V1SW 3P 154 51' -


NF125-eW/SWIHW, NV125-CWISW/HW
90 130 44 61 3D 111 -
(Nota 2) MB100-SW
V1SWF
4P 125 - 15

V2SW
NF160-SWIHW, NF250-eW/SW/HW, NV25D-CW/SWIHW
2P,3P
105 46
154 518
-
-
165 61 35 126
(Note 2) NV25D-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW
V2SWF
4P 125 - 17.

V2GSW 3P 172 536 -


(Note 2)
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGWIHGW, NF250-SGWIHGW 105 165 46 79 35 126 I---
V2GSWF 4P 143 - 17.5

Noles: (1) This hole is nol required for two and lhree poles.
(2) The last letter of "F" of the type designations of V-type operating handles denotes a fixed type. Attach the letters of"4P"
10 the end of designation for four-pole models of circuit breaker main body.
(3) Adjustable types can be produced upon request. Please contact us for details.
Remark: (1) You may contact us for details of the V-type operaling handle forthe U series.
.. Equipped wttI1 cylinder key (option) 10 prevent deUberale operation.

28
5. Accessories
External ACcessories

4. R-type Operating Handle


• Appearance (Color N1 .5) • Outside Dimension Diagram

Handle

• Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram


• This handle in conjunction with the breaker main Circuli breaker Center of the Canllll" cfthll canter of the circuli
enables the isolation function effective. Center of the operating handle Qrooit breaker breaker oparatlng handle
• OFF-position lock only is available for up to three ~
-Tt-
4 t-t_ + ~~
-Tt-
circuit breaker Center of the drcuit" ' " f£ f£ / Center of the
operatlng handle
commercial padlocks (08). breaker operallng handlll. .. cltt:ulI breaker
• Equipped with cylinder key (option) prevent
deliberate operation. I ,,:IJ t~
, ~--J-
,-l- I' 0 ,-
II"
,~--L 0 ,1- I--1--.' .",.
I
,
! II
I!! I
, .... i
't- I
-"""1-~ I

...J i"C ...J


F Either M4xO.7 Bihar M4xO.7
6!;teW or 1iI5 screw ilr ,,5
Center of the
2,3·pole 4·pole operating handle
Note 1: The drilling atthis position is not required farthe models of R2GSW.
Table 5-18: Summary of Dimensions

I~~lf$t' ....• ··"'·JA#,,~~,,~~~!·.JJ


/ ... ;, ........;; i~(~~f ;..A.
3P
'/.

90
.. /
••••••••
I.';c,·, '0/ .~
'.('1\~)].; ••.
... :;g.... A
'" •
K. J;
-
/

NFi25-CW, NF-125-SW, NFi25-HW


RiSW
NVi25-CW, NVi25-SW, NFi25-HW
130 61 105 142 30 111 - ~

4P 120 15
RiUW NVi25-RW 3P 90 191 61 105 142 30 172 30.5 -
NF160-SW, NFi60-HW, NF25Q.CW, NF25Q.SW, NF250-HW 2P,3P 105 -
R2SW NV25Q.CW, NV250·SW, NF250-HW, NV250-SEW ,165 61 107 144 35 126 - ~
NV25Q.HEW 4P 140 17.5

R2UW NV25Q..RW 3P 105 240 61 107 144 35 201 37.5 -

NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NFi6Q.SGW, NF160-HGW,


2P,3P 105 -
R2GSW
NF25Q..SGW, NF250-HGW
4P 140
165 7. 125 162 35 126 - f--
17.5

R2GUW NFi25·RGW, NFi25·UGW, NF25Q..RGW, NF250-UGW 3P 105 240 7. 125 162 35 201 37.5 -
.. Equipped wlth cyl1nder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation. Remark (i) You may contact us for details of the V-type
operating handle for the U series.

5. Circuit Breaker Box and Box-type Circuit Breaker


Table 5R19: Types and Specifications
Wajeiprciof(W)

Appearance

Degrees of protectJon (IEC60529) IP54

Number of pales 2P,3P 2P,3P 3P


NF32·SW, NF63-CWISW/HW, NV32·SW
NFS·OSSW (Nole 1) NFI-lJSSW NFW-05SW
NV63-CW/SWIHW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW

NF125-CWfSW, ~125-CW/SW, MB100-SW NFW-iSW


NFS-iSW (Note 1) NFI-iSW
NF125-HW, NV125-HW NFW-1HW

NFi60-SW, NF250-CW/SW, NV250-CW/SW, NV25Q.SEW, MB225-SW NFS-2SW


NFI-2SW NFW-2SW
NF160-HW, NF250-HW, NV2S0-HW, NV250-HEW

NF125-SGWIHGW, NF160-SGWIHGW, NF2SQ..SGWIHGW NFI-2GSW NFW-2GSW

Note: (1) Attach the letters of "2P" to the end of type designation when the circuit breakBr of external two poles.
Remarks: (1) Use your working current by 80% and under of rated current.
(2) The dustpraoftype (I) is not suitable for isolation.
29
6. Terminal Cover
Table 5·20
Large terminal cover Small terminal cover Transparent termInal Rearterminal cover Plug-in terminal cover
(TC.L) (Te-S) cover(TTC) (BTC) (PTC)

~~~~~
Breakertype

(Nole 1) (Nal1l1) {Nate 1)


TCL-05SW2W TCS-05SW2W TTe-OSSW2 BTe-05SW2W PTe-05SW2W
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SWIHW 2P
(50 x65.5 x25) (50 x 65.5 x 5) (50)(65.5 x 25) (50)(65.5 X 5) (50 x 65.5 x 6.5)

NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)


TCL·05SW3W TCS-05SW3W rrc-GSSW3 BTe-05SW3W PTC.{)5SW3W
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SWIHW, MB30·SW 3P
(75x 65.5 x 25) (75 X 65.5 X 5) (75)(65.5)(25) (75 x65.5x 5) (75)(65.5 x 6.5)
MB5Q..CWISW
(NoIe1) (Nole 1) (Note 1)
PTC-1SW2W
NF125-CW/SWIHW 2P IP20
TCL-1SW2W TCS·1SW2W ne-1SW2 BTe-1SW2W
(60 X65.5X 6.5)
(60 x 65.5 x 40) (60 x 65.5 x 6.5) (60)(65.5 X4O) (60 X 65.5)(6.5)
(Note 2) (Nate2) (Note 2)
NF12S-GW15WfHW, NV125-CW/SWIHW, TCl-15W3W TC5-1SW3W nC-1SW3 BTC-1SW3W PTC-1SW3W
3P
NV125-RW, MB100-SW {90 x 65.5 x40) (90 x 65.5x6.5) (90 x 65.5 x 40) (90 x 65.5 x 6.5) (90 X 65.5 X 6.5)

(Note 2) (Note 2) (Ncle2)


NF160-SWiHW, NF2SD-CW/5W/HW,
2P TCl-2SW3W TCS-2SW3W TTC-2SW3 BTG-25W3W PTC-25W3W
NV25D-CWISW/HW, NV25D-SEW/HEW, NV25D-RW
3P (105 x 65.5 X4O ) (10S x 65.5 x 6.5) (105 x 65.5 x 40) (105 X 65.5 x 6.5) (105 X 65.5 X 6.5)
MB225-SW

NF125oSGWIHGW/RGWJUGW, NF16D-SGWIHGW 2P IP40 TCl-2GSWSW TCS-2GSW3W TTC-2GSW3 BTe-2GSW3W PTe-2GSW3W


NF250-SGWIHGWIRGWIUGW 3P (105 X 84 x 40) (105 x 84 x 6.5) (105 x 84 x 40) (105 X 84x6.5) (105 X 84 X 6.5)

Notes:(1) Attach the letter'p to the end of model designation for models with F-type operating handle. (Those are F-type operating-handle dedicated models,
and screws are used forflxing.)
(2) An F-type operating handle can be installed standardiy.
Remarks: (1) Parenthesized numbers denote the outside dimensions (AxBxC in mm).
(2) The terminal cover for a four-pale model can be produced upon request.

7. Electrical Operation Device


Table 5·21: of Model
" ',' (No." ,,, ".'",. "
"",:." .".
. :" .. "
""
'.4P) "

..... " . I'~" .. "


"

MDSD024-NF1SWE MDSD024-NF2SWE MDSD024-NF2GSWE MDSD024-NV1SWE MDSD024-NV2SWE MDSD024·NVE2SWE


Rated operating 124V DC
voltage I,Compatible to 10D-240V
AC/100-25DV DC
MOSAD240-NF1SWE MDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD24Q.-NF2GSWE MDSAD24l}.-NV1SWE MDSAD24lJ-NV2SWE MDSAD240-NVE2SWE

Table 5~22' Specifications


Rated operating voltage Compatible to
(Allowable voltage range 85-110%)
24VDC
I 100-240VACI10Q-250VDC

ON action 0.05-0.1
Operating time (s) OFF action 0.6 or less
Charging action 1.2 or less
Power requirement (VA) 150
Note: (1) Place an order of other models In conjunctIon with the CircUIt breaker.

Remarks: (1) The standard terminal cover can be used.


(2) Please contae! us for details of the outside dimensions.

Power suppiy module ----Electrical


__ ----0_-operation device _
-----------------------
P.S
Switching power supply
power P.S (100-240VAC/100"250V DC model only)
supply
SW1 Automatic/manual selection switch
ChargeJDischarge
---------------- 51 SW2
Sensing switch
@ Motor
S2
,.
i: K1
K1
K1
K2
Relay (OFF)
Relay (Motor)
----r--
W OFF
S4
K3 Relay (Motor)

(RESEll This refers to the status in which the ckcuit breaker is


OFF and the electrical operation device is charged.

30
5. Accessories
External Accessories

Dimensions
~
• NF125·CW, NF125·SW, NF125-HW

R""",,:
The~.'I<oJl't<.......
JT1Odob-of_NF':lS-HW~ll,"
oI".
It\roe.polc<frWI_''''''''''•
......l<ONlu<l«omg'''''''ved.
Tb -.po1em>oonlylo ......

-- ,,-"= forlil
il-<>oI ~
oIIlFl25-l;W,ond
_ _ "..,. •• .

....,.....{'=:::::i'1[,'==1 _'orlhomo<lelNF'D(l-SI'I.

(t:hq~)

• NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250·CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW

R"""ri"
Tho2.".1ornodokaro3-pol._...

. 08+1, , _., ""'' .",n'.poI.,""""""


Th'3-pd.~onlilo .. olI""""
1h< NF25O-CW, ........ _ .
""d+poI l"lY"" .. -.k<
1Il......tl/lF'"""W.NF'oo-mI.
NF25O-SW '"'" W'25\l-flW.

• NF125·SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-5GW, NF160-HGW, NF250·SGW, NF250-HGW

• NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125·HW

• NV250-SEW, NV250·HEW

"",-"...- ""'.'of....._._••

~: ~m,
_.,: '. ,.lilib."
l iJ :6~~ ~
. o8+l . . '
, ,
JL, ..:. " R""•• ,<,,,
Th•...."..._ o,q." .,."'N.
la- ... modoftMStl-SSW • ..,j
NV:1511-f<EW.

'T

31
8. Mechanical Interlocks (MI)
Table 5·23
Number Panel mouting Direct mount on
Applicable models of poles Front CIlnnection, RearcOnnection, Plug-in DimensIon A mm circuli breaker
NF32-SW, NF63;oCW/SWIHW 2P MI-OSSW3
47.5
NF32..gW. NF63-CWtSW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-GW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW 3P MI-05SWFB3
NF63-SWiHW 4P MI-OSSW4 -
NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P 45
MI·05SW3
3P MI-1SWFB3
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW1HW, MB10o-SW, NV125-RW
4P MI·1SW4
NF150-SW1HW, NF250-CW/SWlHW, NV2SQ-CW/SWIHW, NV25Q.SEW/HEW, 2P MI-05SW3 MI-2SWf83
MB225-SW, NV2So-RW 3P -
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-SWIHW, NV2SQ-SW/HW/SEW/HEW 4P MI-2SW4 -
NF125-SGWIHGWIRGWIUGW, NF16D-SGW/HGW, NF2SD-SGWIHGWIRGW/UGW 3P MI·2SGW3 Ml-2SGW3
NF125-SGWIHGWIUGW, NF16o-SGWIHGW, NF250-SGWIHGWIUGW 4P MI-2SGW4

• Outside Dimension Diagram .Orllllng Oimenslon Diagram


(Front connection. Rear connection, and Plug-in) (Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug.in)
I Notes: (1) When the panel plate thickness is
4" ("5.5 and "7.5 countersunk (rear) (Nota 1l); 2.3 or more, prepare four holes
.. ---i------· ----- -----, use M5xO.8 nat countersunk head screws to fix• (li!l5.S and ,,9.5 countersunk (rear».
+i-- 7E aj::l ~-i Center of mechanical (2) These are standard dimensions for
i
.U
. bb'
! _I~ !ii
L J J !L
. '+'
.
.ill.
!
! ..:
i
.1,
i
inlerlock

Center of circuil
breaker
_·----t;;;E
L .
_.t-.-$--~

-;l-~~ Ce""" m"h,"i~1


! +--50-'--$--12!
Machine this part according to
the front plale drilling dimensions
of the main breaker.

interlock
of
2- and 3--pole models, but can be
altered upon request•
(3) The U serles have different
dimensions.
Please contact us fordetalls.

~~~~i~~''~'~~"~O~k~e;~)
~L ~Iate
(t1-3.2)
Panel thickness
-+-'-+---3--;-- ._. '-_._. - Center of circuit
Remarks: (1) Please·contact us for outside
dimensions of other models of

~
~ ; breaker different speclfications.
(2) These are not isolation-compatible.
(Gapbetween i 120 (Note 2) i
the circuit breaker
and the panel)

9. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder


Table 5-24
Lockcolier(lC) H$i1i:llidock (HL) - Haiidl~ 1iii:k(H('S)(~i) OFF LOCkWith3 PadloCk Card hOlder;

NF32-SW, NF63--CW/SW/HW 2P (Note 1) HLS-05SW2P

NF32-SW, NF63--CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 3P HLF·05SW


lC-OSSW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW{SW HLN-Q5SW HlS-05SW

NF63-SW/HW 4P
NF12frCW/SW/HW 2P {Note1} HLS-1SW2P

NF125-CW/SW, NV12frCW/SW/HW HLF-1SW


MB100-SW, NV12frRW
3P LC-1SW HLN-1SW CH·PNo.5
HLS-1SW

NF12S-5W/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P
(Note 1)
NF160-5W/HW, NF250-CW/SW{HW, NV2So-CW/SW/HW 2P HLF-2SW
NV2So-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 3P LC-2SW
HLN-2SW
HLS-2SW
NV2S0·RW 4P
HLF-2GSW (Note 1)
NF12S-5GW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGWfHGW 3P,4P LC-2GSW HLS-2GSW HLF3--2GSW
HLN-2GSW
Notes: (1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON·lock.
(2) HL·S types are used for OFF-lock.
Remark: (1) Users are requested to prepare padlocks for HL and HL-S types. (2Smm padlock for HL, and 35mm padlock for HL-S.)

10. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters


M4xO.7 screw Adaplerfor
Table 5-25 IEC35mm rail
Number of poleS Parts nUmber (DIN-1SW2,
Applicable models
6 DIN.1SW3)

NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
NV32-SW, NV63--CW/SW/HW, MB30·SW
2P DlN-OSSW
MB5O-CW/SW
3P

2P D1N·1SW2
NF125-CW{SW
3P
2P DIN-1SW3 Mounting hook
NF125·HW, NV125--CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW
3P for IEC 35mm rail
(DIN-OSSW)

32
G. Charilcteristic:s and Dim,nsions
Molded~Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers

NF32-SW NF63-CW Series S series C series S series H series S series C series Sserles
Group WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1
NF63-SW NF63-HW Frame size 32 63 63 63 30 SO SO
MB30-SW MB50-CW Type name NF32*SW NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW MB3Q.SW MB5IJ-CW MBSO·SW

MB50-SW 346 10 3 4 6 10 3 4 6 10 10 16 20 0.8 1.2 1.4


22.545
8 10 12 0.8 1.2
Rated current In (Amp.) 16 20 ?5 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 25 32 40 16 25 32 1.4 2 2.5
7.1 8 10 12 4 5 7.1
32 40 50 63 40 50 63 5063 16 25 4045
Number of poles 2" I 3 2.1 I 3 2" I 3 I 4 2·'1 3 I4 3 3 3

",I.
\i.'J;~ "
.-
Rated insulation voltage Ui M 600 600 600 690 500 SOO SOO

• • '5~
0>-
-eo·'u AC
690V
SOOV
440V
-
2.511
2.511
2.511
2.511
- -
7.514
7.5/4
2.5/1
7.5f4
1015
-
2.5/1
-
-
2.5f1
-

7.5/4
o~ IEC60947-2 (50150Hz)
" u 400V 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 7.5f4 7.5/4 7.5/4
u m (Icullcs)
.s Z3DV 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8 25/13 7.514 7.5/4 15/8
~] DC 250V 2.5111 - 2.511 7.5}41 7. 514 1 -
Suitability forisolation ~-
Utilization category
•A

A
•A •
A

A

A

A
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Raled impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
•6

6

6

6

6

6

6
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Type NF32-SW
*1: Types of DC specffica,tlons can be produced upon request.

• Operating Characteristics ---------------~---------------

,"
/IC".. (1Ec6lJ947.2)
DC".. (1fC6Q947-~) (IECOO947.2.)
Nf30-SW " ,.~

, M'63·CW NFli30SW
""- flF:l[]..SW
flF63-CW flF63-5W flF6J.-HW
,
t,lR5lJ-CW MBSll-SW

"
"
,~ "-
! 100m ,=
M=

• , "-
f ~: /

••
, Min.
\
1\
.••, Mo.
"-
..""
/
Min.
"-

•.,
•h
\ .. \ 1\
. ~

\ 0.0..
l"- e-

••""
. .. \ '-
n.Ol
," 45671n 152n JO~O
0.01
4 6 8 7 10 15 20 30 40
••" 1 1.3 3456710162.0 JD4D

x 100% of Rated current x 1 00% of Rated current x 1 00% of Rated curren!

.Internal Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .Temperature Characteristics - - - -


r
[& [IT [k [ill: Breaker handle
2-po1.

mTIE}mm
left-si~e -00- Right.~ide ••
,,
-
mounting mounting
• Al OAX

:rnrn: ~
0

3~pole IDt £Dm~


tI SHTorUVT
Lead wire
direction

8
Remark: (1) referto 24. 2.0 30 4D

Ambient temperallJre {"C}

.External Accessories .Standard Attached Parts - - - - -


... (Front connection)
AccessorieS' Typ··,m' ReferenCe
page
AccesSories Typenam~
Reference
page
F F05SW\'1} Mechanical Mounting screw: M4xO.7x55
27 MI MI-05SW3 ('1) 32
S S05SW interlock (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Operating handle (Note)
V V05SWF 28 Small Te-S TCS-05SW3W ('1)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P; 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
R - § Te-L TCL-05SW3W (1)

• S NFS-05SW
"§ "'''''
Skeleton ITC TTC-05SW3 ("1) 30 Note. These are supplied with NF63-SW, NF63-HW, and

~
Dustproof 29 MBSO-SW models.
1 NF1-05SW Rear BTe BTC-OSSW3W ('1)
Waterproof W NFW-05SW I' Plug-in PTC PTC-OSSW3W (°1)
'" LC LC-05SW
HlF-05SW lEe 35mm rail
Handle Jock device "J 32
mounting adapters
D1N-05SW 32
HL HLN-OSSW
HL-S HLS-05SW ('1)
Noles: (~1) The deslgnallon depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HlF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.

33
• NF32-SW, NF63-CW, NF63-SW, NF63-HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW, MB50-SW

lnsulaUon barrier
(removable) MSx1l.8screw

,I (MiS for63A)

:<t: •
~ t
~~h;=li~m-~4 ,5.5
(8.5mm-dlameter for liSA)

i~
Neutral pole

." ~r 2"901& 3"Pole 4-p"le

(COI1ductor thickness
2...01e 4"Polo t=5ma"'.) Drilling plan

Conductor dnl~ng
for direct connection

Rear connection

Mounting panel
t=32max

2"1'01& 3-pole 4-pole 1.0mm c1eamnce OIl each sidellf


lhehandle frame.

Drilling plan
Fronl-panel Moul

Plug-in

M5XO.8 31'01e 4-pole


terminal block mounting screw

<, hO::j·,"g<",~~ "o~)

rn
. '.
- , : +.+'
'. i ' .,
: +. +,

,J .. ~=
Details ofterminal
1,;:, 1 1,:,,1
Cutout and drilUng plen
~\ 6mm-<lla.hole or
orMS><O.8 taps

34
6.i.Cha.rac:t~ristic:s and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers

NF125-CW NF125·SW Series C series S series H series S series


Group WSSG2 WSSG2 WSSG2 WSSG2
NF125-HW MB100-SW Frame size 125 125 125 100
Type name NF1ZS-GW NF125-SW NF125-HW MB100-SW
(12.5) (16)
16 20 32 40
Rated current In (Amp.) 50 63 80 16 20 32 40 (25) 32 (40)
50 63 80
100 125 100 125 50 63 80 45 63 71
100 90 100
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 3
Rated Insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690 500
590V - Bf4 10/5

'§~ AC
soav 7.5/4 18/9 30/15
·5; (SO/60Hz) 440V 10/5 25113 50/25 25/13


-to
~n
.0
~w
IEC60947·2
(lcullcs)
4QOV
23DV
10/5
30/15
30/15
50125
50/25
100lS0
30!1S
50125
01.5 260V 7.5/4 I 1Bf8 - 40120
~~ DC" 400V - 7.514 - 1518 40120
5GOV 11518 - 40/20 -
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
~- •A •A •A •
A

Type NF125-CW Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)


Rated Impulse wIthstand voltage Ulmp (kV)
•8

8

8

8
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3

*1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and
4-pole models for up to 500 V DC•

• Operating Characteristics ------~--------_----------------

,-,-..,
.~.
,~

.~

.,
I .~
- ::
" .
...
. "

:""
:~:m!Wi!~
.'
"""'-$<to,... ~_'.""OIp
","" , ",,,,".OIp
, ••• ? ,. , , "
X1DO%"'R!llodo"~ Xl0ll%"'R"'~.I,,,r.n1 X100.%ofRaledOlJ..-ont

Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB100-SW.

.Internal Accessories .Ambient Compensating Curve - - - - - -

2-pole Left-side I
Operating handle
~, Right-side ~ ""
mounting -[J]]-- mounting § ""
• Al OAX • ""
3,4-pole WSHTorUVT "~ '""
0
lead wire
- direction '"
Remark: (1) referto 24.
'"
-," 10 20 30 40
Ambient temperature eCl
50

.External Accessories .Standard Attached Parts


... \ TYe'H#h¥. ReferenCe
i "page.
,. TYP,ename
Reference
page
(Front connection)

F F1SW('1) Mechanical Mounting screw: M4xO.7x55


27 MI MI-05SW3 ("1) 32
S S1SW interlock
Operating handle (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P; 4pcs)
V V1SW('2) 28 Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W {'1} (Nol~)

§
i Closed-box
Duslproof
R
S
I
R1SW
NFS-1SW
NFJ-1SW
28
.
0
'E
large
Skeleton
Rear
TC-l
TIC
BTC
TCl-1SW3W ("1)
TTC-1SW3 ("1)
BTC-1SW3W('1)
30
Insulation barrier: (2P: 1PC, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pes)

Note:These are supplied w[th NF125-SW, NF125-HW, and

~
MB100-SW models.
Waterproof W NFW-18WI1HW ~ Pulg.in PTC PTC-1SW3W{"1)
LC lC-1SW IEC35mmrail
D1N-18W3 ('1) 32
HLF-1SW mounting adapters
('4)
Handle lock device 32
HL HlN-1SW Electrical
MDS·NF1SWE ("3) 30
Hl-S HlS-1SW ('1)('4) operation device

Notes: ('1) The deSignation depends on the number of poles. Referto the reference page.
(*2) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
("3) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB100-SW should be placed at the same lime as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*4) HlF types are used for OFF-lock, and HlN types for ON-lock.

35
• NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HW, MB100-SW

Insulation banier
Solderless terminal
(removable)
forwire size
0 / 0
! 01 14-2!OAWG CU/AL

l
oo~'" hoi.
!II •
MBsCfflW Breaker

~
! I! -\>f-fE-='-- o o
i-<;r-~--'

± t~]l
, ,

o I~

6\ - -
Hill WIre connection
0t±t'1 I
~
Lu 'JI 'I
i I
_
'0
--

~=-m
; ,~ ,

~ 1\ Noo
pole
30~ \

M4XO.7fapS
or Smm-dla. hole
30

"" 2ilole 3illlle 41:Iole

Zilole 3ilole 4-pole Drilfingplan


(Conductor thIckness
FSmslC.)

Candudef dnlling
for dltllel: COIlneclion

Rear connection

,.
.,
ng plale

-
, ''-'I' ~Stud
102

17
Y900

C~II III
I
ll..po!~
C
-fiE'll 3-pole C
1<:

i
1'1.
Breaker

o Connection
iL.W! it-"'
, f.="
,-{+5 allowance
\::l:i i '! i
~ I
MOb
'0;.

.. ~,'
" "
"
,,,.
InSUlation

Zil ole 31'01e


M4xO.7laps or
5mm-dla. hole 1.0mm <:!eetatu;e on each side
of the handle lrnme.

" 104.5
Front-panel culo\1l:
Drilling plan

Plug-in

Jilels
M5xO.8
Terminal blocl<

~
Breaker (plug_In terminal bta<:k)
Mounting plate mounting screw

P1ug~n terminal block " 0 o

en
\

LTI~
' I !

+il~ ~
I !
I ' I

"I'
:; cit I i~ + I,
- -r--r-;:,;
!! ;f;

7"1= tH
I, +' '
I
, !

~ , "
'-....f..-'
, I j (g

DataTIs oftetmlna\
"
" '"
M8screw
~"
21'01e
Conductor drilling
." lJ
for direct connection
"
.21'ole 3-pole 4-pole
6mm-<lia. hole
Drilling plan orM6x(l.8taps

Remark: 2-pole model of NF125-HW are 3~pole model with the central pole removed.

36
. •.· h.•.a.·. racterist.ic.·•.s a..ndDim.e
6.·.· •. C . n.s.•ions
M()lded~Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers

NF250-CW NF250-SW Series S series H series C series S series H series S series


Group WSSG3 WSSG3 WSSG3 WSSG3 WSSG3 WSSG3
NF250-HW NF160-SW Frame size 160 160 250 250 250 225
NF160-HW MB225-SW Type name NF160-SW NF160-HW NF25Q.CW NF250-SW NF250·HW MB225-SW

Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
125 150 160 125 150 160 200 225
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 250

Number of poles 2 I3 1 4 2 13 1 4 2 I 3 2 I3 I 4 2 13 1 4 3
Rated insulation voltage UI M 690 690 600 690 690 500
690V - 5/3 5/3 -
'§~ AC
SDQV 15/8 30/8 10/5 15/8 30/8 -
8- (50160Hz) 440V 25/13 SOfi3 15/8 25/13 50/13 25/13
~~
o· IEC60947~2 400V 30115 SO/13 18/9 30/15 50/13 30/15
~o
.0 (Icullcs) 230V SO/25 100/25 35f18 50125 100/25 50125
~~
.E 250V 15181 401201 i0tS I - 15/8 40/20 - -
~~ DC 4QOV 15/81 140120 10/5 15/8 - - "a,
SODV - 115/8 - l4oa, - 115/8- j40!lO - -
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
-oK- •
A

A

A
•A
•A

A

Type NF250-CW
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Raled impulse withs!<md voltage Uimp (kV)
•, •
6

6

6
•6
• 6
Pollutlon degree 2 2 2 2 2 2
..1: When Wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and 4-pole models for
up to 500 V DC•

• Operating Characteristics ~~~~~~~-


'"rn,--,--.,---,--,.-r---------,
''"" a+=:t=1=l=~
I\-\-
,,
30min
'Om
I
...
14m1n
,~"
~"

'm
~
lmin "- w w ~ ~ M M
~.
,§ Ambient tempeJ<lture (0C)

[ '",.
'" (rated ambient 40~C)

0 Remark: The reference ambient temperature for IEC models is 30 c C.


,. 'it
.Internal Accessories ~-----~-~~~~~--
."'" I
•.'" Left·side
Operating handle
-DO-- Right-side

"I '.
0.1_
mounting mounting
0.05.
• Al OAX
0.0,2. I.
Ii SHTor UVT
0.01_
, U 3 4 S 6 7 lS 20 30 «l
lead wire
x 100% of Rated current direction
Remark: (1) refeTlo 24•

• External Accessories .Standard Attached Parts - - - - -


, Reference (Front connection)
::page:i- ;.;. TYe~~';",' . Reference
page
F F2SW Mechanical Mounting screw: M4xO.7x55
MI-05SW3 III
Operatlng handle
S S2SW
27
interlock MI
" (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
V V2SW('3} 28 Small TCoS TCS-2SW3W ("1) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
R R2SW ~ "'~, TC·L TCL-2SW3W (°1]

~I Dustproof
S
1
NFg..2SW(OS)
NFI-2SW
29 ".§ Skeleton
Rear
TIC lTc-.2SW3 (°1]
'TC BTC.2SW3W (01) 30
~ Waterproof W
LC
NFW·2SW
lC·2SW '" Plug-in PTC PTC·2SW3W ('l)

('4) HlF·2SW Electrical


Handle Jock device
HL HLN·2SW " operation device
MDS-NF2SWE ('2)

Hl-S HlS·2SW
Notes: ("1) The deSignation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
('2) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB225-SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
('3) Attach the letter"F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
('4) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(~5) NF16o-HW, NF250-HW model cannot be produced.

37
• NF250·CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW, NF160-SW, NF160-HW, MB225-SW

InsulaUng barrier
(remevabl ,j Mabolt~
(' , I ,
< (Hex-soket) \ II . Breaker
MounUng hole i

.
\ I III
. .
; ;
• Solde~ess Iennin'"
i+t-·( I+¥-'
<II~l"
farWiresi%e

'3]'
1ZS-175A 14-115mm'

< 1-·11 - ht+- ! ~


2ll0-Z5DA 7{1-1Z5mm'
Wire connection
t-i -y·-t i'1
~ ..., , ' '@ .... . ". , !J'\" ~~u_'
+-t-
+1

"
!
'W'
!

"
,
,
Neulral
• L .. " ..J

M4xO.1taps
pole
w"
~
'"' (Buslmax."-7)
3-pole
'" "" " Bus drilling for

4-polll " dlrecl connection

Rear connection

MounUnll plate InSUlating


t max.= 32
• lube
",I r
Stud can be
tEll d 90'

~ :>-pole

~
,~""

< ffi1
<'
.~,

i!3l
¢.. Breaker

~.H--,-,
I 1
i <~~~
Connection •

<mn
1 "I
G\
_. allowance
,,, ' I
t-t-'-ri'1 !
IOJ I'M4xl).7
' ! i i . .!. . i

tUTur
~
breaker

"I .£.. I--


"-
mounting
'"~
,;',
,"
~4>dl.7
"
" " ....2"- ~SUla~ng laps " '00

" "
M e bolt

'"
"'. ~ "" '" 1mm clearance
a-pDlll 4-p<>le on each side
" '" Drilling plan mhandle
Front-plale cutout

Plug·in

Mounting plale ~

~ JL'-I

~
_.Plug-In terminal block

I
1
"
_L.!
I
Breaker \Term;nal blorJ<.)

iii
_ ...1..._
~
<ci . _ . " ;
"
m'I+~'1 ~
~ I 'j

~,
"
"I I
Terminal bloc!<
mounting scr~ .
~~
" " '" d allachable In this
derection only InSlllaUng barrier
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan

Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2~ and 3-pole models are available for the model of NF250-CW, and only 3 pole models are available w

for the model of MB225-SW.

38
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

H""rl= $ .. orl",..
NF250-SGW NF250-HGW s"riss Sseri""

NF160·SGW NF160-HGW
Gr<>up
F<am...." ' "
Type na<n"
WSSG'"
'20
NF12!>-SGW
e,
".
WSSG'"

NF':l.&-SGW
eo
WSSG4

".
NF12s-HGW
e,
".
WSSG4

NF125_HGW
eo
WSSG4
"0
NF'S~GW
""ssG...
,"0
NF16<>-SGW
Ro
16-25.2&-40, 16-25.25-40.
NF125-SGW NF125-HGW Rated cu..... "t In (Amp.) 4G--G3,63-100,
60-125
16-32. 32-63.
63--100.75-12.5
40--63,63-100,
aO_1'!.5
16--32,32......3.
63-100.75-125
125--160

Numbe. of pol"..
Rated ,nsulatlon voltago Ul (\I)
.. .,.
• •0 " • •0 " " •• 0 • •0

.,.
• •0
.,.
"0

..
~ ~ 20120 20/20
~~ AC
BOOV 30130 "0130 50150 SO/50 30130 30130

""
~ " 'OC
("(l160Hz) ~
"'DOV
36/36
36/36
36136
36/36
55155
75(75 ,=.
.~. 36/36
36135
36/36
36/36
~fr
60947_2
(l"uJl=) 2S0V 85/8S 81>/81> 1001100 ,oonoo 85/85 65/85
-gg> "'OOV ,~. 40/40 20120

~~
-· -·
DC·' SOOV ~C. 40140 ~=

·• ·•• --.
GO~ 411/40 20120
"~.
Sultabl"ty for lsolaUon
~- •
··"
Utilization eat.,gory A A A A A A

·,
R,w""", =n~lon (",rrnlna's unmaoo.d)
""''''d ''''Pul.......lhl;\'md
Pellu.len deg......
vo~ Ulmp (kV)

3

3 , 3

Seo1e9 H ....o1.... H ....o1.... "' ....oi....· S ....,.;"'.. H ....ri..,,· H".. ri....


Group =S~ WSSG4 =S~ WSSG4 WSSG4 WSSG4
F""m.... I.z.. '"0 "0 ,"0 ".0 ,"0 ,"0
NFle.a-HOW NFH'O·HOW NF2!ithSGW NF25lI-SGW NF2~<H-IGW NF2StI-HOW
Typ.. n"me R, R6 R, RO ~ e6
125-160 125 160, 125-250 125-160 125-250
"''''..d CUTT",,' In (Amp.)

...
160-250 16Q.-.250
, , ,
Type NF250-SGW
Numbee

;i;
or po'e..
R ..... d 1"....,I"lIon volta".. W, (V)

AC
..
500V
~
• •0
20/20
50!SO
• •0
20120
50!50
" " • •0
~.
30/30
.,.
• •0

30130
3
• •0
20120
50/50
20120
50/50
4

'"
~"
(SOltiOHZ) 440V 55/65
7=. B5165 38/36 ,~. SSlB5
7=. ,=.
65165

_.
'EC ~OV 75175 35/35 36135
~~
..
60....7·2
(lcull=) =OV 100/100 100/100 85/BS 85/B5 100/100 100/100
-gg' 300V 40/40 20120 .W~

~!
-- ·-
DC· ~ 40/40 40/40

-•
'

·· ··
.o~ 40/40 ~= 40/40
SuItability foe Isol...lon
WtlJlzaotion ·cs'egmy
~- A A A

A A A
......8"'" conh8ctian (10""1,,,,'" ..."rna_d)
w"""'"'''' •, ••
","'ed Impul'8
Pollution d .. "re..
val"'"" Wimp (kV}
3 ,• , ,• •
3

-1: Use eIther 2-pole. \Nilen Wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 500 V DC, aI1d 4-pole models for up to 60l)V DC•

." ."
,-,- -.- -,...-_
~~~~k>_
...,,,,,..._.........
WNl'"""NF,,,"""

,-
--
r.:;
"

-,..
,-
-
.~
~.
~"._ ..
'Ee....,·,
............ -.
"",eon ,,,,.'..
'"
,,,,, ~-~
!1S=
.........~

~ 'od,
~ '; ~ 'ml, ~
~

-
f
~
~
!
- f~
" ~

".
"'''''''''e'''

-_..... ,
0••
0 ••
. "
>:100% of R>lM """"nl >:100%ofRal.d<:IJfTtlnl
><100%ofCllfTtlntooll;,.g
Nol.)ln,l.>"""'"{l1JoUlpplngOlJ""nl(><10Il'fooflnj

""-""-
.,:,...., ......
~, ....
,-,
.Ambient Compensating Curve

.•
Ambient Compen."tion
NF125-SGW NF125-HGW
NF16tl-SI3WNF160-HI3W
NF25tl-SI3W NF250-HGW

~
'"
!, ,,, I
i :l ". I
I
o .. ! '00
.... " "
/lrnbl.mlomp"",lurt('C)
Ira1"oml>,."l"~C)
i
Q
"
'" -00 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (OC)

>:100%olCu""nt.otling >:100%ofCu""nloelll"ll
tlolo) I..<anl.>n.ou. lrlpplng ClJ""nt(><1oD% of In) Nolo) l""tonlon'O\iOtrtl'f>lng ClJ""nt(x1DD% ofln)

.Internal Accessories - - - - .External Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -


Reference Reference Not.S:
0perating handle , . Aceessaiie.s . '",,'00;"
Type name
"', Type name ('1)ThIl designation depllnds
Right.~ide
mountmg --dD _ Left-si~e
mountmg
• AL 0 AX
,
, F2GSW Mechanical
pagll
on the numl>er of poles.
Rllferlo the referenoe page.
1m. SHT or UVT -- Lead wire direction Operating handle
, S2GSW " interlock
"'
Ml-05SW3 (1
" ("2) HLF types are used lor
OFF-lock, and HLN types
, V2GSW[·3)
'" Small ,G' TCS·2GSmW rl

,I
forON~ock.

, R2GSW Lar e 'GI TCL·2GSmW rl) ('3) Attach theleller "F" to the

II Dustproof
, '"
Skeleton ITe nC-2GSW3 (.1) end of designation for a
fi"edtype.
~
NFI·2GSW Reor ",e BTG-2GSW3W rlJ
> Waterproof W NFW-2GSW
Ie lG-2GSW
Plug-in eTe PTC·2GSW3W r1)
'"
HLF·2GSW Eleolticai MDS-NF2GSWJ
Remark: (1) refer to 24, Hondle lock devica
"
;1 HLN·2GSW " op.ratioll device ("1)

39 Hl·S HLS·2GSW
• NF250-5GW, NF160-SGW, NF125-SGW, NF250-HGW, NF160-HGW, NF125-HGW

Solderless terminal
forwire slze

ff
Insulating barrier

"~=4
(removable) MBbolt
Mounting hole (Hex-soket)
I<{ i I I

,.",j--,
L""i-J • j~ ~
Hex-50ckel sel screw
Wire connection

!W! •
" ~"" 11.44><0.7 taps

..
ora5
~ pole
3-pol& 41'01&
'" Drilling plan
(BllstmllK."7)

"" Bus drilling for


dIrect connection

Rear connection

Insulating lube

,
MD\Jnting plate Stud can ,.
max."S.2
\,
jtared 90"
~l~ 0:I OIl
~ ">~
Connection
I, I I I' I
---
<1
<bw!~,!~"
allowance

~
M4xO.7

.
.~
- '"
f-" MB bolt
.-
''',
. 70
breaker
mounting

Insulating laps
ofe5
" '"' 70 105
1mm clearance
" '"' 3"Po1o 41'010
on each side
of handle
Drilling plan
Front-pane! ClIIOIJ!

Plug-in

~ug.ln terminal block

Ir
Mo \lilting plate
~

~
·
cJ ---
"
Maball
.,I "
->
"
(Hex-sokel)

~ r~~

" \, •
. '" .- Term;nal block
mounUngscrew
" ud can be
rolated 90· Insulating barrier Drilling plan
(removable)

Remark: 2·po]e models are 3~pole models with the central pole removed.

40
6.~tiaracteri.$tit:s and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

NF250-RGW NF250-UGW Series U series


Group WSSG4 WSSG4 WSSG4 WSSG4
NF125-RGW NF125-UGW Frame size 125 125 250 250
NF125-RGW NF125-UGW NF2SQ-RGW NF250-UGW
Type name RT RT RT RT

Rated current In (Amp.) 16-25 25-40 16-25 25-40 125-160 125-160


40-63 63-100 4Q-63 63-100 160-225 160-225

Number of poles 2 I 3 2 3 4 2 I 3 2 I 3 I 4
Rated insulation voltage Ul M 690 690 690 690
690V 25/25 3D/3D 25125 30{30
SOOV 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
3~ AC
.g~ (SO/60Hz) 440V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
~.i3 40QV 125/125 2001200 125f125 200/200
IEC60947-2
~&
u~
(Ieu/les) 23DV 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
• .5
~~
30nV 40f40 I - 401401 - 40/40 T - 40/401 -
DC 500V 40/40 - 40/401 - - 40/40 - 140f40
60DV - 140/40 140/40
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
~- •
A
•A

A

A

Type NF250-UGW Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)


Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
•8
•8
•8

8
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3

Note: When Wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for upto 400 V DC, and 4-pole
models for up to 600 V DC.

• Operating Characteristics ~--------------

"
'" '" .,.,._..........., '" ..,.._
,-
ThelmaJ.AdjllS"'hlelyJ>es
"""""""'''''"'''''_ _>=S.'\ ThennahMju'lab!e lJ'pes wo"""""""
Thormal-Mjuslabl.1ypes _
" fil.1...._ ........_ ,
0-"
"'............Ol-_(It""' ....... ,"'1
" """\

.
--
,~. o~.

.......-
20m" 20m'.
lEC6I:OO'-2 IEe6O!l41-2
1''''" 1~~
1<",.

-_.
,~. ,~

--
~" ~. ~"
~" ~.
~"
~.
~"
~ ". ~ 1m" ,.
~ 1"".

f ''".• f .•
'
~ o.
I ~

& • ...• """


.••.
,
• ,.

III
" "'~ ,.
•• ..•
,.
o.
." '.0> ~±=E~~~t~"~'~it~-~±~ "": .""
..
."
"
."
'. :..
,......«0..,.... ,..""...........
0,020

0,0\.
,
;~..,..... ~
"""
... ~

"", '''''''''"'' • < 6.7 \0 ,.20

xl00% of Rated (;lJtrent xl(){l% of Rated (;lJITenl x1 00% of Rated currenl

.Internal Accessories ----~-- .Ambient Compensating Curve


0peratin g handle
Left-si;:le
mounting
--d]: .
Right.~ide
mounting
• AL OAX ~ SHT or UVT
i2il ~ "" •t
{ "" ~
""
1 '""
0
""
""
-,"
'" '"("e) '"
'"Ambienl'"temperature
.
Remar1<:: (1) refer 10 24. (",ted ambient 4ll'C)

Remark: The reference ambient temperature for lEe models is 3D"e.

.External Accessories ~~----------~---- • Standard Attached Parts - - - - -


(Front connection)
•••••••••
s.·· Tr~~"·m8 Refererice
page
Typl:iname ReferenCe
page

F - Small TC-S TCS·2GSW3W ('1) Mounting screw: M4xO.7xS5 (4pcs)


-
Operating handle
S
V V2GUW
-
28
~ Large
Skeleton
TC-L TCL·2GSW3W ('1)

TTC TTe-2GSW3 ('1)


~ 30
R R2GUW 29 '§ BTC-2GSW3W ('1)
Rear BTC
~
• Dustproof
S - Plug·in PTC PTC-2GSW3W ('1l

~ I - - LC lC-2GSW
.IT Waterproof W - Handle lock ('3) HLF-2GSW
device HL 32
Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SW3 ('1) 32 HLN-2GSW
Electrical operation device *('2) 30 HL·S HLS-2GSW
Notes: (*1) The des(gnatlon depends on the number of poles. Referto the reference page.
(*2) An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*3) HLF types are used fur OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
41
• NF250-RGW, NF125-RGW, NF250-UGW, NF125-UGW

Sotderl!>SS lenninal
Insulating bamer forwfresize
M6boll
(temcwablej (Hex-sokelj 24 2.5-16Srnm' Breaker
Mounting hole
i~{ i
...
r; • g
::11 ~-4 ~~ ~

''''+r~
. I .I .

818,
..
c
...

!~!
c


~eutral
" I pole
1 i'!

"
~
Hex-sockel set screw
Wire connect.,"

IIri4
~6.5
i i ,

~iJ="
" "
. i
~-,--L~ -1-.1-.--, ;;
! i ! Ii!

M4XO.7 taps
~ o,eS

."
24mat.
---r-rc- 3."Dl.. 4"9018
(Bustmax.=7)
'"' "" Bus drilling for Drilling pilln
3-pol"
"" dlrecl connection

Rear connection

Insulating lube

Pm
Breaker

~
Mounting plate Stud can be 'eo'
r+{~
f--iTI
tmax.=3.2 rotated BO" ot... Breaker
3.""le

~ .- -
"~ '"'
Connection ~
i
~.~
~HI t+-'-.;::
i!fi
~-l'!!IH
...u..i-+-
allowance

H i'l I I ' I ! - :" 1Il

.
"
"
"
'"'
"
15 MBbo11
'"
'"'
InSUlating

'""" Il! 35

70

3"'D]"
824

M4xO.7

~::5
Drilling plan
3

3S

105

4-pole
W-J
'""
lmm clearance
On each side
of handle
32.5

Front-paneJ ClItoll\

Plug-in

Plug-in terminal
Mounting plate block

Stud attachable In \hIs


derectlOll only

104 32
"'
Terminal blook
mounting screw Insulating
barrier
Drilling plan

Remark: 2-pole models are 3~pole models with the central pole removed.

42
6.< Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV32-5W NV63-CW Series S series C series Sserles H series


Group WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1 WSSG1
NV63-5W NV63-HW Frame size 32 63 63 63
Type name NV3Z-6W NV63·CW NV63-SW NV63-HW

6 10 16 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32
Rated current In (Amp.)
20 25 32 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
230-400-440 230-400-440 230-400-440 230-400-440
Rated operational voltage Ue ry AC}
Muttl-voltage type Multl-voltage type Multl-vollage type Multi-voltage type

d
Hlgh-spee type
I Rated current sensitivity IAn (rnA) 30·100·500
Selectable
30·100·500
Selectable
30·100·500
Selectable
30·100·500
Selectable
Max. operating time at SiAn (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Earth-leakage Indication system Button Button Button Button
AC440V 5/2 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5
Rated breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5
IEC60947·2 (Jeu/les) AC380V 5/2 5/2 7.5f4 1015
AC230V 10/5 7.5/4 15/8 25/13
Mounting screw: M4xQ.7x55 (2pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
;~ Insulallon bamer. (3P: 2pcs) excluding models of NV63-CW

Type NV32-SW

.Operating Characteristics --~------ .Earth·Leakage Tripping Characteristics


"
'"'"
30ml
20m;'
,-
"
14 min
" NVOZ.sW
""~ tlWa-sw ~,~
30mln'" ...
Hiyh-
sp~ed

,.••: 10lnln

4mln
~, 2mln
~ 1mi
"
M
~
• 'm,.,
1"-
• "-
~
". =
.." II-.. Ia 5s
!
'\ "
" Min. 0.5s"~
.." \
\
0.26:
0.1s
~

o.
" 0._
o. M
0.0,. O.02s
0.016:
\ 25 5Il 100 50D
0.0
00 ",.
," 3 4 S 57 1(l 15 2{l 30 40 Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensiUvity)

X100% of Rated current

.Internal Accessories----------------- perature Characteristics


r Operating handle
Left-side -00- Right-side
mounting mounllng
II UVT 00 I,
eAl

IMG ~EAl
QAX
00

00
- r-- 7
~ Lead wire
!B
Remark (1) referto 24. ~ TBM .... direction
AmblenllempetallJro ("C)

.External Accessories
Reference Reference
': 1··Typ"'~~ pa,ge, ..•.. Type namel
page
F F05SW Mechanical
27 MI MI-05SW3 ('1) 32
S S05SW interlock
Operating handle
V VOSSWF 28 Small TC·S TCS-05SW3W


R
S
-
NFS-05SW ..§ la",.
Skeleton
TC-L TCL·05SW3W
nc TTG-05SWS 30
~
Dustproof

"
~
w Waterproof
I
W
NFI-05SW
NFW-05SW
29

'"
Rear
Plug-in
eTC
PTC
BTG-05SW3W
PTG-05SW3W
lC LG-05SW
HLF-05SW lEC35mmrail
Handle lock device ('1) 32 OIN·05SW 32
Hl HLN-05SW mounting adapters

Hl" HLS-05SW
Leakaga
Note. (1) HlF types are used for OFF-lock, and HlN types for ON-lock. Indication button

43
• NV63-CW, NV63-SW, NV63-HW, NV32-SW

M5xQ.8serew
Appuoable
{M6for63A}
Insulation barrier Wire slze:1.6mm.-dia.to 22mm2
(removable)

Moontlnghcla ,I
It.:
SensitiVity ClJrTlml
selector ~
as.5
Screw terminal

~~'-"" ••
.
1+
...L--+~!L:L"J il ",\m~,~)

I
~+ ~l-t "
Tripblltlon Leakage
Indicaten button

Test bullon 61
I -tI- ";m~

(Condul:tcrth!ckness
25 M4xC.7taps
or 5mm dle.hole

t=5ma~.)

Conductordrimng
Dritlirigplan
for dlred IXInneCUOll

Rear connection

Mounting panel
t=3.2max
InSlllatkln tube <t.

II E'"""If~r
]~ IH"" I M4xO 7 screW
formountlng breaker
M4xO.7 taps 1.0mm clearance on each side of
or 5mm-dla.hole the handle frame.

.
72 42
Drilling plan Ffonl-pane\ cutout

Plug-in

M5>dJ.B
terminal block mounting screw

Mounting panel
Breaker (pluitln terminal block)
Plug-In terminal block \ ~

'r-1~~+----, --.----;'.,"""'@"
'" ~
Genter line of
breaker body

89 30

Conductor dnllin!! cutout


Details of terminal for direct connection
Cutout and drilling plan

44
6. etlaracteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV125-CW NV125-8W Series C series S series H series


Group WSSG2 WSSG2 WSSG2
NV125·HW Frame size 125 125 125
Type name NV12S..cW NV125·SW NV125-HW
16 20 32 16 20 32
63 80
Rated current In (Amp.) 40 50 63 40 50 63
100 125
80 100 (125)01 80 100 125
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4I
230-40G-440 230-400-440 230-400-440
Rated operational voltage Ue 0! AC) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30'100-500 30-100·500 30·100·500
Rated curren! sensitivity Illn (rnA)
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating lime at SiAn (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04
100·300'500 10D·30Q·500 100·300·500
Rated current sensilMty IAn (rnA)
Selectable SelsGlable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45·1.0-2.0 0.45·1.0-2.0 0.45·1.0·2.0
Max. operating lime at SiAn (s)
Selectable Selectable Selectable
lnerfull non-operating time at21An (s) 0.1"0.5-1.0 0.1-0.5-1.0 0.1'0.5"1.0
Earth-leakage Indication system """,,0 Bullon Sulton

1 AC440V 10f5 25113 50/25


Rated breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V 1015 30/15 50/25
IEC60947-2 (Ieu/les)
AC230V 30/15 50/25 100150
MounUng screw: M4xO.7x55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pes)
Standard Allached Parts (Front connection) Insulation bamer. (3P; 2pes, 4P: 3pcs)
Type NV125-CW excluding models of NV125-CW

*1: 3P only
Note: The time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.

• Operating Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

-,

X100% of Rated current X100% of Rated current


..
,"'''''''',., " -".

x100% of Rated current


-
""
,-.... ,
Xl00% of Rated CUlTent
.
.Earth·Leakage Tripping - - .Internal Accessories - - - - - - - .Temperature Characteristics - -
Characteristics Operating handle r
.. ~
DO ""
-
Left-side Right-side
~~ 1m '" I;~~ll+t~~~ mounting - -mounting ~
~ ,,"
eAL OAX II UVT ~ 1"
''''
~ ;:
Lead wire
~ MG ~EAL
,~

- aTBM ~
direction

I ,. ,-
~ ""
• •• . ,• ·•• !! <3
~

j "'
i f-
---
o

....• , •
~
,
"

. ,-_Oil""'
"
0,01,

ijO'.
~SO'OO \(IlIliW'OO ~,
""'00
---
.~

~, 2.\ SOlo> ~,
Remark: (1) referto 24•
"' - ," 10 20 30
Ambient temperature (OC)
40 50

GrounMault current (% of rated current sensitlvily)

.External Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Internal Wiring Diagram ~-----

••••••••••• TYpeo""~j ~e~ren¥_


:pa:ge
AcceSsorieS Type name Reference
page
Test blllton
I·.·. F F1SW Mechanical
r--------(---
27 MI MI-05SW3 ('4) 32
interlock

~ f-':
Operating S 515W
handle V V1SW(1) 2" Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W r4)
R R1SW § Large Te-L TCL-1SW3W("4)
~h:
~ Dustproof
S NFS·1SW
29 "."E Skeleton ITC TTe-1SW3("4) 30
I I
~
l'w Waterproof
I NFI-1SW
W NF\tV-1SW/1HW I'
Rear
Plug-in.
BTC
PTC
BTe-1SW3W ("4)
PTC-1SW3W ('4)
Magnetic
device
J----r:::::7 1
I
LC LC-1SW IEC 35mm rail
I
Handle lock ('2) HLF-15W mounting adapters
DIN-15W("4) 32
I : I,
device HL HLN-1SW
32
Electrical
MDS-NV1SWE ("3) 30
.-iJ----- --~-~_ ..........
HL·S HLS·1SW operation device Leakage
indlrntion button
Notes: ('1) Attach the letter "F"to '\he end of deSignation for a fixed type.
("2)HLF types are used for OFF~lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
("3) Specify the working voltage.
45 ("4) The designation depends on the number of poles. Referto the reference page.
• NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125-HW

Insulation barrier
(removable) Solderiess terminal
Mounting hole forwlresize
< / MBscrew , ~_WG CUIAL Bre,'"

~wre'OO",dlOO Ttr~t-tmtfTTnl:
~
iil:'::::::'-"'
..- Opot>llingllmo

~1.-.l.I.ylype}

L... k.ago <


iOCroaS""blItlcn
I ,
'" " "
Testb\Jll<ln -,."i1-.. "" I.
," , --e-
,----.

rn -1
Trip
button Nelllrsl pole

3·pola 4-pola
~
_I I 4
-l$.= <0

3-poJe
M4x07laps
"Smm-<'" hoi,
4-polo

(Conductor thickness Drilling plan


t=5 rnax.)

Conductor driUing
for direct connectIon

Rear connection

~
-ocl'
Breaker C
/i.Mounting base 0.1 0
3-po!<o

Molllrtin 9 plate
I
'" ~, ~ Breaker

;~:ffiJI'
SW d rotatable
t=3.2m ,~
, "..{
ij
by' O'
1 ! I, I i
. I ij I 1
oi i I<"
I : I
iri.VI IT.
Connection
. iii I 0 -
o
! ,:-p-
N

wr
allowance
c ,
" 1$' . I . . 1DITI
: ~
M' boll
'''~ "
"

~ e- " M4xO.7lapsor

. "., " a_pole


Smm-dia. hole

4·pole
1.0mm clearance on e<ldl side
of the handle frame.

" 104.5
Drilling plan
Front-pane! cutout

Plug·in
4.pole
M5xO.B
Terminal block mounting screw
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Mounting plate

r't1 cb-----+·
Plug-In tennln..i block \
"r--H--.

j +1+ \ +h. + I
~"'
i,'

C_+.--r---r-+.+ I .
I I
!.' -

tI!tl
+1+ i -+-
I \1-,+
!

~
Ii

Details of terminal
M8screw

3_pole
ConduclordnlITng
for direct connectiOll
3-pola
';; 1\
4-pole
Smm_dla. hole
or M5xC.8taps

Drilling plan

Remark: NV125-CW is available in 3-pole only.

46
§. ~harCl&teristi&s and Dimensions
Earth~Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV250-CW NV250-SW Series C series S series H series


Group WSSG3 WSSG3 WSSG3
NV250-HW Frame size 250 250 250
Type name NV250·CW NV25O-SW NV250-HW

125 150 175 125150 175 125150175 125 150 175


Rated CUrTen! In (Amp.)
200 225 250 200"'," 200'" 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4
23D-40D-440 230-400-440
230-400-440
Rated operational voltage Ue 0! AC)
MultI-voltage type MultI-voltage type MUlti-voltag e type
30·100·500 30·100·500 30·100·500
Rated current senslUvity 1M (mA)
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at SIAn (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04
100·300·500 100·300·500 100·300·500
Rated current sensitivity IAn (rnA) Selectable Selectable Selectable
Tlme-delay type 0,45·1.0'2.0 0.45·1.0,2.0 0.45·1.0·2.0
Max. operating time a15111n (s) Selectable Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 21M (s) 0.1·0.5·1.0 0.1·0.5·1.0 0.1'0.5·1.0
Earth-leakage Indication system Bullon Button B"",,"
AC440V 15/8 25/13 50113
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V 1B/9 30f15 50/13
IEC60947·2 (lcunes)
AC230V 35/18 50/25 100f25
Type NV250-CW Stand<lrd Attached Parts (Front connection)
Mounting screw; M4xO.7x5S (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

.Operating Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - .Earth·Leakage Tripping Characteristics - - - -


• ''"" ~
• NV25D-CW NV25o-RW
NVZ5tJ-SW MN225-SW
'" ".
JCmin
~- ,- =' E
,~

, •~ ,,
~
,""

,.
,~
I l ,,
,
I" ,. ! 1
5. ~

• , I,
"• ,, ~
::: •
~ ••
~ ~
"
,~

",
Mol'
,'"
D.DI.
2550j~5l)(I255C1100 5001000 2550100 5D~j 255lJlOO 5001
GrounMault current (% of rated current sensllMIy)
X10D%cfRate<leummt

.'nternal Accessories .Temperature Characteristics - - - - - - - -

llII!uvr ~120
lead wire
~TBM ,§ 110
direction

[100

0
"
10 20 30 40
Ambient temperature eC)
Remark (1) referto 24.
(rated ambient 40 C) D

.External Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Internal Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - -


..... T",'~'~'
Refurancii
'page"
. .,,,.
.,,,,, TYPllnairle
Referilnce
page
r---- ----1------,
Test bullon

F F2SW Mechanical
27 MI-05SW3 ('3)
inlerlock
MI
"
~t:
Operating S S'SW
handle V
R
V2SW("1)
R2SW
28
§
Small
Large
TC-S
TC-l
nc
TCS-2SW3W ("3)
TCl-2SW3W ('3) .
:5
'
:
il S NFS-2SW('5) ~ Skeleton TTC-2SW3 ("3)
Duslproof
1 NFI-2SW
28
E R,~ BTC BTC-2SW3W ('3)
I '-t:-UULr

~ Waterproof W NFW-2SW
~ Plug-in PTC PTC-2SWSW r3j " Magnetic
device I
LC LC-2SW I " --_.-L.."":O,]

i~ =_=_==_~J
Handle lock C') HLF-2SW Electrical
device HL HLN·2SW
HL8-2SW
" operation device
MDS-NV2SWE ('4)
L'_
Hl"
Leakage
Noles: ('1)Attach the letter "F"to the end of deSlgnaUon for a fixed type.
indicatlon bUll.on
('2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
('3)The designation depends on the number of poles. Referto tile reference pege.
('4) Specify the working voUage.
('5) NV2SQ-HW model cannol be produced.

47
eNV250-CW, NV250-SW, NV250·HW

---- • •

Mounting huttOll
Tripbullon

p
,/
Insulating barrier
(removable)
•I
MBbe11
(Hex-liokel) ' ~----J-
\fI
T! rEI:
- SlItderiess termInal
forwil'eslze

~~~~~ ~t;~~:'2
Wire connection

a8.5

••
Leakage
IndiCifllon
b"",'

Neutral
Test button pole

'"'
,..
'"'
(Bustmax."'7)

Busdrillingfor: n
311010

DrlUing ptan
4-pole

direct """Medic
3-pole

Rear connection

Insulating lube <pot,


Moonling plate rotated 91)
,~ ),',"3,2

'", ,
/
Conne&tion
• G
~ allowant:fl

M " •
II~
"
" -~
~ ..
MB lmR '",
II"'- "' " 1mm clearance
on each side
31>010 41>010
I"'- " T '"' Drilling plan
of handle

Front_pial!! culout

Plug-in

Plug-ln terminal block

~e5nninal
block
,9
mounting sr;rew
MB bolt
Stud attachable in this
derection only
InSUlating barrier

Drilling plan

Remark: NV250-CW are available in 3-pole only.

48
Q. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth~Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV250-SEW NV250-HEW Series S series H serles


Group" WSSG3 WSSG3
Frame size 250 250
Type name NV250·SEW NV250-HEW
125-225 125-225
Rated current In (Amp.)
Adjustable Adjustable
Number of poles 3 4 3 4
230--40D-44Q 230-400-440
Rated operational voltage Ue fY AC) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30·100·500 30·100·500

• • High-speed type
Rated curren! sensitivity IAn (rnA)

Max. operating time at 51An (s)


Selectable
0.04
Selectable
0.04
100·300·500 100'300·500
Rated curren! sensitivity 1M! (rnA) Selectable Selectable
Tlme-delay type 0.45,1.0·2.0 0.45·1.0·2.0
Max. operating time at SIAn (s) Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating timfl at 2111" (s) 0.1·0.5·1.0 0.1·0.5·1.0
Earth-leakage Indication system Button S<rtlon
AC440V 25/13 50/13
Rated breakIng capacity (kA)
AC400V 30/15 50/13
lEC60947·2 (Icullcs)
AC230V 50125 100/25
Typs NV250-SEW Mounting screw:
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) M4xO.7x55 (3P: 2pc:s, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pc, 4P: 6pes)

.Operating Characteristics .Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics - - - -

•• ~
'" . r=~ limO-dO\aylype
'-,'- ~~l~

-
"~
10rTin
1 0
Eo ,
s

~ ••! - I~
,
1min

• t ~.

,.
~ Soil •,, ,,
j
J
a "
"."
....
~

,"
~
~
~
~

lnerf~l
""""peral>lgm.,
-
-rotipg ......
-
""""peralirglIne

0-01.
2550100 ~25Sll100 5OO1uw 2550100 5001 2550100 5001

Ground-fault current (% of rated current SBllsitivity)

.Internal Accessories - - - . ----~----- .Temperature Characteristics - - - - - - - - -


r
Left-side _DO_Right-side
Operating handle eAL

I MG
OAX

~EAl ~TSM
II UVT
Lead wire
0 ,
mounting mounting direction 0 !
0 ~
"
0

0
0
Note: (*1) Parenthesized dimensions represent those for models with PAL, EAL,orTBM.
FlUSh-mounted models with PAL, EAL, orTBM have an outside view different from 0
the standard outside view, which will be available upon request. o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: (1) refer to 24. Ambient temperature (OC)

.External Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Internal Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - -

Operating
handle
'. F
S
V
",.".~,
F2SW
S2SW
V2SW('1)
ReferenCli"
;'paga",
27

28
• ~"
Mechanical
interlock
Small
MI
Typen,arne

Ml-05SW3 ("~)

TC-S TCS-2SW3W ("3)


Reference
page

32
Toslbutlon

R "'SW ~ large TN TCl-2SW3W ("3)


nc TTC-2SW3 ('3)
j
S NF8-2SW ('5) Skeleton
il
~
Duslproof

Waterproof W
1 NFI-2SW
NFW-2SW
29
Rear
Plug-in
'TC BTG-2SW3W ('3)
PTC PTe-2SW3W ("3)
30

lC LG-2SW
Handle lock HLF·2SW Electrical
"I 32 MDS·NVE2SWE «4)
devica Hl HLN-2SW opel13t1on device
HL. HLS-2SW
Notes: ('1) Attach the leller "F"lo the end of deSignation for a fixed type.
("2) HLF types ere used for OFF-lad<:, and HLN types for ON-lock.
('3) The designation depends on l\1e number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
('4) Specify the working voltage.
('5) NV250-HEW model cannot be produced.
49
• NV250-SEW, NV250-HEW

Insulating barrier Mabolt


(remova.bhi') (Hex-soket)
~al<a!le indicator
Mounling hoi..
i r Ib~on ,i I ,i 8
'U
. ..1--=
t-~rjl- J~
I!O "'" •

T~'
Test button

'W'
! i
• •,
,~,
Operating
characteristics
seletlor
"
'"
'r'leUlral
pole
.."
". (Eluslmax.=1)
Bus drilling fur
direcl conneellon
31>01.. 41'018

Drilling plan

Rear connection

'0
'm ""
M aX.=3.2
"'
Tat ,
Insulal;ng
tube

\
SllJd can be
jota1£,d 90"
S "',.
~<
i~ ' ,! .. ]II Breaker

,
EB1
"".
~l1--,-
¢.. Breaker

C -- Connectlon
allowance
, n
I !

kf
:1 <~ ~-+
1
11!
+~1---+ ~ ~
~.
<mn
I I' I

"
~
"
"
'"
"
., ,
MBbol
-'- -
~
'"
1"- "'""
breaker
mounting screw

\SUI8Ung
woo
,

~ I~::T
~
."
31'ole
ora5

Drilling plan
l]J 105

41'ole
& '"
1mm clearance
on each slde
ofhendle
Front-mate rotout
32.5

Plug-in

Plug-in terminal Breaker (Terminal blod<.)

Pm
M01Jntingplale~ block
< I <

Ii rt1 i I ~ il
<
I+'~ ·
tt+TI ~---+--~," +

18
"~,
Terrninlllblod<.
' ~TI~I ~
~~
mounting screw
86 32
Stud attachable in this Insulating 3-pole 4-P0le
derectlon only barrier
Drilling plan

50
6. Ghara.cteristic:s· and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV125·RW Series U series


Group WSSG2
Frame size 125
Type name NV125-RW

Rated current In (Amp.)


16 20 32 40
50 63 80 100
Number of poles 3
23Q-40a-.440
Rated operational voltage Us (V AC)
Multi-voltage type
30·100·500
Rated current sensitivity Illn (mA)
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 51.iYl (5) 0.04

Rated current sensitivity Illn (rnA)


100·300·500
Selectable
Tlme-delay type 0.45'1.0·2.0
Max. operating Ume at SiAn (5)
Selectable
Inertial non..operating time al21An (s) 0.1-0.5'1.0
EartMeakage Indication system e"",,"
AC440V 125/125
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2 (Icuflcs)
AC40QV 125/125
Type NV125-RW AC230V 125/125

.Operating Characteristics ~-------------------------------~

5: -.
~= ~"''''''''
-
:=: ~=~
~
,.- ,.
~ '"
f=,.. f=.
~ ~ .

"......... <10 _ ...


..,<10 '""~"' ......
'0 ",. .... ''''m • .. "T ,. ,." " •• " , • "T " " ..
x 100% of Rated WIT.. nl x 100% 01 Rated culTllnl x100% ofRaledcuITent

.Earth-Leakage Tripping - - .Internal Accessories --~~- .Temperature Characteristics


Characteristics
_.""'"

""llllji!!lli~1111
operating handle
Left-side
mounting --dQ: Right-side
mounting
~12O
,- f ~
~ ~"'" eAL OAX fmUVT 110
~- Lead wire
2'1";'
IMG }EAl ~TBM 1:' 100
.. lD>
,
.... direction § .,
~ 'Do § i , . O
o ~ 1 .,
1. ! -10 10 20 30 40 50 60

:: 10 Ambienttemperature eCl
0.1.
000
o.~
Mb

Remark: (1) refer to 24.


Ground-fault cuITent (% of rated currenl sensitlvlty)

.External Accessories -~------~------- • Internal Wiring Diagram


> ITYP'H~#<
Reference
page
AccesSorfes
.•.•r>c,,6·M, Reference
page
Test button
1-------1---
F F1UW Small Te-S TCS·1SW3W ('1)

~
27
S TC-L TCL-1SW3W ('1)
Operating handle
S1UW
"'~.
V
R
V1UW
R1UW
28
29
".~
~
Skeleton

Rear
TIC
BTC
TTC-1SW3 (*1)
BTe-1SW3W ('j)
30
Jt!
• Dustproof
S - Plug-in PTC PTC-1SW3W ('i) I i
",---j
"
Magnetic
I - lC LC-1SW
~w Waterproof W - ('3) HLF-1SW
device
I
Mechanical interlock
Electrical operation device
MI MI-OSSW3 (*1)

*('2)
32
30
Handle lock
device Hl HLN-1SW
HL-S HLS-1SW
32
1--6-----
Leakage
~
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number Of pales. Referto the reference page. indl<:ation button
(*2) An order shouid be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*3) HLF types are IJsed for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.

51
eNV125·RW

Mounting hola
M8wew
\c Sensitivity current
-'I>I-~

• , i 001,,0::10'

c- !-" Operating time


sele<;tor

" 8
!5
(timlKlelay type)
Leakage ;I;

" Trip
I>-J

iI i:T
indical10n button
TestbUtlon

button

ffi (Conduclorthlckness 1=5 rnax.)


Conductor drimng fer dIrect connection
M4x7ta!l5o t
5rnm-<lia.hole

DrlUing plan

Rear connection

Mounting plate Stud rotatble


t=3.2rnax. by9(lo Breaker

c C /Breaker
,-i-,
c 1I ! ~1
c r-----r--: ~
tlt~[
Mounting base
C
Connectlon 8
15 allowance
• f-~--l
~
,. MBbott
,.,
M4xO.7
bleaker
M4x7 taps or
5mm-dia. holo:!
~
" mounl1ngacrew
1.0mm clearance On each
~
". 104.5
" Insulation
Drilling plan
side of the handleftame.

" WO,
Front-panel <;u!out

Plug-in

M5xO.a
Terminal block mounting screw
Moun~ng platll

Piug~n
block
lerminal \
-..,~.l..~,L __~


\, 89
" M8screw
6mm-dla. hola
or M5xO.8 laps
Details of terminal Conductor drilling
for diraet connection

Drill[ng plan

52
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV250-RW Series Rseries


Group WSSG3
Frame size 250
Type name NV250-RW

125 150 175


Rated current In (Amp.)
200 225

Number of poles 3
230-400-440
Rated operational voltage Ue 01 AC) Multi-voltage type
30·100'500
Rated current sensiUvlty 1M (rnA)
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at SiAn (s) 0.04
100·300'500
Rated current sensitivity 1M (rnA)
Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45·1.0·2.0
Max. operating lime at SiDon (s)
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 21An is) 0.1·0.5'1.0
Earth-leakage Indication system Button
AC440V 125/125
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V 1251125
Type NV250·RW IEC60947·2 (lculles)
AC230V 125/125

.Operating Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - • Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics


..
"
NII25Q.RW
" ~
", ,"'" .. lime:.o.1ay1lP<
1l.~5s(W.X) ,,"""
r....l.o,;laylypo

,
r"""-delaltype
."""
t, ~ •,- J
::: ,-, F= , ~ ., '=
~ : , i 1 ,

f ;•,·i, I,
-
! Ii' ,
, I
0
! !
.• •• .- ;;
~
J~
·, • •, !

::~
~~,
O~ ~~ma
I".,...,
O~ n r»POrolingtim.

·
0.'
iftortial

.'1'~ 0.• rIOI1Op"Gltir>;timo

" ""
_0;, .... O~
0.0
J
<5 5~1ta- 500 25 5Cl00 2,51'1100
""
255111oo ~,
5001000
Ground-fault current (% of ralad curren! sensitivity)
x 100% of Rated currenl

.Internal Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - .Ambient Compensating Curve - - - - - - -

"'lIIi
operating handle
Left-side
mounting
--d[}" Right-side
mounting
~12o ..,

lIIuVT I MG ~EAL ~TBM


Lead wire ;;
• Al OAX -+ directlon ,§ 110
NV250·RW "llOa
U
'"
'" _10 10 20
Amblenttemperature (Oe)
30 40 50 60

(rated ambient 40°C)


Remark: (1) refer to 24.

.External Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Internal Wiring Diagram - - - - - -


.. ..••
F
/ •Trp'"ma
F2UW
Reference:
page:
...... Type name Reference
pagll
1--------1------,
Test blrtton

Mechanical
27 MI MI-05SW3 ('"1) 34
S S2SW interlock
Operating handle
Tc;.S
IE;
V V2UW 28 Small TCS-2SW3W ('i)
R
S
RZUW 29 !. Large TC-L
TIC
TCL-2SW3W ('1)

~I
Skeleton TTC-2SW3 ('1)
Dustproof
I "
E Rear BTC BTe-2SW3W ('"1) I :
~ Waterproof W ~ Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W 1'1) 30 Magnetic

LC LC-2SW
deVlj G----c:::::_~lJ=====:'_J
Handle IOl:k device
("2)
HL
HLF-2SW
HLN-ZSW
32
Electrical
operation device
*('3)
!
I--{}--- L
--------~
HL-S HlS-2SW
Leakage
Notes. (~1) The deSlgnalIon depends on the number of poles. Referto the referenca page. indi<::alion button
('2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-Cock.
('3) An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.

53
eNV250-RW

Me boll
MounHng hole (Hex-sockel)
§] IEIJ Breaker
" <-I
Sensitivity selector
SolderleS5 terminal
forwlrn s1za
125-175A 14-95mrrr'
2OQ-225A 71>-125.
lei. ..-,-, I

+-H-I
Opara~ng time salador
(lor Ilme-delay type) WiI'9 connection
;;
• ,• ~,

' I'
I

rl4 I -~'l ~
Leakage Indjcation
burton

Trip
Bulton
Test button

n4 ~ M4xO.7 screw
,,,'
(Buslmax."7) Dlimng plan
Bus drilling: for
direct eonM<;Iion

Rear connection

Insulating
stud can be
'"" Breaker

Iii]]
rolated 90' Breaker
<,
_LI


<

< iT:1-
iii
H
Idt
<m:
II

Ir-TI
I
!

• iii
!+ •.

I~I .,.,
~
M4xO.7
" breaker

" " Mabolt


mounting screw

~ M4xO.7

"
n
" Insulating
wo.
,~w

orl!l5
lmm clearance
on each side
'" ofhandle

Drilling plan Front-plate CIJlol.ll

Plug-in

Plug~n terminal
Mounting PlaI\ J block Breaker (Terminal block}

ir I
~
dj--..--
ef-
E
r-
<- r- 1
cI
h
If,;,
14

I • .1.
• <-iiiI , {,
i+
,' I

" \M5 ,5
M8bolt

,,' Terminal block


Insulating
" rnounllngscrew
'w'
'ore
attachable in this
ction only banier
Drimng plan

54
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

NF50-SWU Series S series


Group WSSG1
Frame size 50
Type name NF5Q-SWU

Rated current In (Amp.) 5101520


30 40 50

Number of poles 2 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 240
UL489
AC 240V 10
]'~ Rated insulation voltage Ui M 600
E~

~'"
~" IEC60947·2
SOOV 7.514
211 JIS c 8201~2 440V 7.5f4
~o (Icullcs) AC
4QOV 7.514
23QV 15/8
Mounting screw; M4XO.7x55 (2pcs)
Type NF50-SWU Standard attached parts Insulation barrler. (2P: 2pcs, 3P:4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)

.Operating Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

'" Operating Characteristics


'"
'h (UL489)

30mln NF5Q..SWU
20mln
14mln
10mln
Sml/l
4mln

2mln "-
•E 1min
\ "'- M~ .

~
~
c
30. "'-
~
~ '"' "'-

~ '"'5. I'-..
0
/ 1\ 1\
" Min.

"
0."
\
0.25
\
(Us
\
0.05s 1\
O.Ols
\
0·015
" 5 6 7 1a 15 20 30 40

x 100% of Rated current

.Internal Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - .Temperature Characteristics - - - - - - - - - -


-----.C- Operating handle
Left-side --DLJ-- Right-~lde • AL 0 AX iii SHT or UVT Lead wire , I

-
mountIng mounting direction
,
0

, I---
i
,,
i------- 1
20 30
Ambient temperature ('C)

.External Accessories ------------~--~------------------


AcCesSories Typenaiile AcceSsories Type name

F05SWU2P
F Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SWU
F05SWU
Operating handle
S S05SWU
V VOSSWUF(1) Terminal
cover
I Large TC-L
TCL-05SWU2
TCL-05SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-05SWU
Note: (·1) Adjustable types can be produced upon request.

55
eNF50·SWU

Insulation harrier
(removable)
IllS.S

'l__~ MSxO.a screw ~


Iii (M6klr63A)\

~
" (Conductor thlcknllSs

,j1
1=5 max.)

-1l---1kkll-- I-- .... § Conductor drilling


o :
~ for direct connection

t
~Hi -+-_g-L
~
"
Applicable
wire sl2e: 1.6mm-dla. lo22mm'

~
, "
"
'"
~
2·pole
"
3-pole
Screw terminal

M4XO.7laps or 5mm dis,hole

, Breaker

• t Breaker

,-'--
, -t I r+-,
I ; I
-----+----r
I I I
'"
98.5

_U~:,: j- _- L
iii i I I i I I JL.
·1
i ! ]
, ~---+-+-
! i I
; ,-~EJ-"
' " (Insulation plate) / ;

I
i i !
! ~- J -iL itJ::
\ : I
(Une)

CAUTION:

2·pole 3-pole
" When mounted In steel or cast box
cover must be Insulated 85 shown.
30mm air gap to cover or n.Bmm
2·pole 3-pole
fjbre insulating plate extending
12.7mm outfrom each side cfbreaker.
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.

Drill1ng plan Front-panel cutout

56
6.. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

NF100-CWU Series C series S series


Group WSSG2 WSSGZ
NF100-SWU Frame size 100 100
Type name NF100-CWU NF100-SWU

Rated current In (Amp.) 50 60 15 20 30 40


at ambient temperature 40~C (IEC30°C) 75 100 5060
75 100
Numberofpoles 2 I 3 2 I 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 240 480YI277
0 UL489
AC
I 48QY/2TN 22
~
e~ I 240V 10 35
~~ Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690
-
,~


'u ,g 690V 8/4
':'"Li sonv 7.514 18/9


~~

~o
~
IEC60S47~2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/les)
AC 440Y
400V
10/5
10/5
25113
30/15
11 230Y 30115 50/25
DC 250Y 7.5/4 15/8
Mount1ng screw: M4xO.7x55 (2pcs)
Type NF1 OO-SWU Standard attached parts lnsulation barrier. (2P; 2pcs, 3P; 4pcs).
Insulation board: (1pc)

.Operating Characteristics --~~~---~~--~-~---~~~----~~~----


'"
~

'"
30mln
,~,
""..
NF100.cWU SOA-l00A
NF100'SWU 40A-10OA 30ml"
,~.
""
NF100-SWU 15A-30A
lAm;" 14mln
10min 10m..

,...
,.,
6miJ1

'.1 "
_M.
M.
(S

"
A~10

,SOA
A)

~ lm1h
2min

, M.

"'-
""
g>
~
30.
20.

10.
,
/ "- o
" Min.
"-
S.
MI~. I'-..
• •
0.5. o.s.

0.' 0,2. "-


0.1. 0.1.

0.055 0,055

0,02. 0.02.
Tlme-delay trip nstantaneous trip ~ TIme-deiaylMp nstanlaneous IMp -
0.01. 0.01.
1 1.35 4 5 5 7 10 15 20 30 40 4557 10 1520 3040506070

X1000/0 of Rated current X 100% of rated current

.Internal Accessories -~---~~---- .Ambient Compensating Curve --~~~~---

---..C.. Operating handle


Leli:-si~e -uu- mounting
Right'~ide • AL 0 AX lli!!l SHT or uvr Lead wire
130
mountmg direction
C
~
0
120 .
~ 110 )
C 100
~
,
() 90

80
-10 o 10 20 30 40 50
Ambint temperature ("C)

.External Accessories ---~----------------~----------------


AcCessories Typ:en.sme ACcesSories Type name

F1SWU2P
F Mechanical interlock MI Ml-OSSWU
F1SWU
Operating handle
S S1SWU
V V1SWU (°1) Terminal ( La TCl·1SWU2
cover rge TC-l
TCl-18WU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-18WU

Note: ("1) Attach the letter"P to the end of designation for a fixed type.

57
• NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU

_ _ _ _ (Standard)
./ Insulation bamer
o " (removable)

• I

Mounting
h••
'I

~
MB&erew

- m,
"

~
N 0 Iffi {Conductor thickness
IIlfll10 t=5mllX)
Clmdut:!ot drimng
I for direcll;Qnn"ctiOll
L
~
, TO,
Ii '""""
I' 61
~
~
"' '"
2·pole 3-pole

Front connection (Solderless terminal) (Option)

Soldlll1ess terminal

o o
,!
ffl-
-;-,
~~.
i
0 ffi'
i ! , 1ml
IIfJI
, 10 0 IIfJI Hexagon oocket set scIl!w

,
wtre size
-~
I
il-~ 14-2IOAWG curAl

2·po[e a-pole

j '"
lc_'__O~I
3"1101e
o (; Breaker _ : Breaker 1 98.5
~r!-----'"
!,
t j -t- I , I!
I 1 I I
o,-+---+I---+~ J--.-li
~ffiJ I
(Insulation pla!ll)
(;_~ ;
, i ~ (LIne)

I I I
~~--~6--1
CAUTION:

I +,
~.----.
I i '
When mounted In st....! or cast bDJ(
cover must be Insulated as shown.
30mm air gap to cover or
I "" M4xO.7 taps or
5mm-dla. hole O.8mm fibre Insulallng plale
extending 12.7mm outworn
~ 1.0mm clearance on each each side ofbreaker.
sIde of the handle frame.
2-pole 3-pole
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout

58
6.Cha...acteri~tics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

NF225-CWU Series C series


Group WSSG3
Frame size 225
Type name NF225-CWU

Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 175


at ambient temperature 40"C (IEC3D"C) 200 225

Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 240
E UL489
AC I 24QV 35

!~
g::l
Rated insulation voltage UI M
500V
600
10/5
'f'a IEC60947~2
~u 440V 15/8
0" JIS C 8201·2 AC
1ii~
u
(lcullcs) 400V 1819
~ 230V 35118
~" DC 250V 1015 lOl}
Mounting screw. M4XO.7x55 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Type NF225-CWU Standard attached parts TelTTlinal cover: (1 sel),(02)
lflsulalion board: (1po)

Notes: (Oi) Use either two poles. When wired as shown althe bottom Of page 13, the models can
be used far up to 400 V DC.
("2) The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger
protection) structure•

• Operating Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

NF225-eWU
"
""
""
"
"-
"

"- r-... Max.


" /'

"- .......

'"
"

Min.

0.10
M
'
lime
I
.,
0,050

J .,
i---- Time del. !Ii lnf;tan neous
1 1.35 45671015203040

x 100% of Rated current

.Internal Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - .Ambient Compensating Curve - - - - - - - -

-DD-
Lefl.-si~e
r Operating handle
Right-~ide. Al 0 AX l&'l SHT or UVT
lead wire c '"'" ,•
mountmg mountmg l2iiI direction 0
1
~ ""
~
§ '""
" • . '" • •
Ambient temperature (eC)
(rated ambient 40"C)

.External Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F2SWU
Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SWU
Operating handle S S2SWU
V V2SWU ("1) Terminal
cover
I large T<>L TCL-Z5WU3
Handle lock device HL HlF-2SWU
Note: (*1) Attach the letter"F' to the end of deslgnalio~ for a fixed type.

59
~~---
eNF225-CWU

i;; j Insulating battier


"1-
010
.
UntinghO~
" 1-L- §
MBbolt
(Hex-soket) "-

l
IT
I! ~
Ililiir
'<I' l"l"J I --:'il-

• ~ ~
.
~
§
~
j 1 t
Trip button
/ ~~
rr i
- I

~1
"
1-1 "
70"1"
-I
-I
61
45
-
'05 , " -I
" -I
'"

___ •~,! __ ,;sreaker • Brea ",


"
fl
=
I 10.
-r' ~
g

JI

I
~ -I
,
",,/
-
"
,
!l8.S

{',,,'M',,,,.., (Line side)


I
, I
I
.
,,1~
--+<
"
M4><O.7 s .,w
."
'00
"" B,US drilling for
dErect connection

Drilling plan Front cever cutout

each sIde of ~nod~e


__________________ 1mmdearan
_

60
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

NF-5FW Series
Group WSSG4
S series
WSSG4
H series
WSSG4
NF-SJW Frame size 150 250 250
Type name NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW
NF-HJW 15 20 30 40
Rated current In (Amp.) SO 60 70 80 (125) (150) 175 125 150 175
at ambient temperature 4QoC (lEC30°C) 90 100 110 200 225 250 200 225 250
125 150
Number of poles 3 3 3
Rated voltage (AC \I) 6QOY/347 600Y1347 600Y1347
~ 600YI347V 14 14 18
~ UL489
AC 480V 35 3' 50
!~
,-
240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
65
690
65
690
100
690
eo
~~
..
690Y 818 818 1Sf15

~~ IEC60947-2 'OOY 30/30 30/30 35136
~u JIS C 8201·2 440V 36/36 35136 50/50
(Icu/les)
AC
400Y
~
36/36 36/36 50150
23DV 85/85 85185 100/100
DC 250V('1) 20120 20/20 20120
Mounting screw: M4xO.7x73 (4pcs)
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier. (4pcs),

Type NF-SFW .
Note: ( 1) Use e\thertwo poles. When Wlred as shown at the boltom of page 13, the models can be used for upto 500 V DC•
Insulation board: (1pc)

• Operating Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
.. Operating Characte~stics
. Opera~ng Characteristics
. Operating Characteristics
'" (lLlao) '" W~ '" W~

,~.
'" ~~
,~.
,~. '" NF·5i'W
~'AA ,~. '" NF·sJWWW
,~

,-
,~.

,-
,~.

'w.
,~.

'w.
...,..
,~.

.. ...
,~.

-..
~, .~
.~ w.
M.
• , N-.
• 400+00

••
..
~
,~ l",ln ,~

~
M
~
..,. ~
~
,,~
I
~ "- ~ ~ 10 1IlOO:=200

• '".
g
i
0 ~ "
..
", i ,. "
"
.
"
."" ."
"
...., .,
SOM

,
",.
•." ..., ""\l"

..
Mo.. "",
• •
.......
~ .~ ~

0.\,
, ....
0.1. 0.1 •

.. , ..• ." . ..J . .".'" . " , '". ... , • , ---


J J

" . " '" " .


.~ D.02.

,•••
,
, '"
~~

, '"
~
0.01. 0.01. D,lrl.

x100% of Rated current


" '" " •• '"
xl00% of Rated CI.lrrent
M 1.35

x1oo% of Raled current

.Internal Accessories - - .Ambient Compensating Curve - .External Accessories - - - - - - - - -


IOperating handle ACCessories - rY~\l~,mEr Acc8$sOries Typ6 11 ame
Left-sl~e_DIJ__Right-~de .AL OAX
mounting mounting Lead wire
;;:
-
'"
12D
I F F2GSWU
Mechanical interlock
~ SHT or uvr- direction
i ,.. ~
Operating
S S2GSWU
MI MJ-OSSWU

i ...
handle

0 Handle
V

Hl
V2GSWU (*1)
Terminal
cover
I La"" TC-L TCL-2GSWU3
'"
'"
-10 10
'" '"
Ambient temperalure (OC)
. .. ""
lock device
HLF-2GSWU

Note: (·1) Attach the letter"F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(..lod.mOlonI4D'C)

• NF·SFW, NF-SJW, NF·HJW


Front connection (Standard) Front connection (Solderless terminal) (Option)
Inoul.lingbarri.,
(remov.bl.) CAIJTION:
In,ui.~ng bam.", must b. u•• d
willi un;naulolod buoba.. or
olimp on lo""lnol•.

, I"/iro.il:.
NM4AWG35OMCM CUIAL
(2.5-185m""')

TripbUllOll (Conduc.Wr Ihid",... t-7m""-)

Su.b... drilllnglor ~RONT


dirot:l"",n.ol;on

,.'" ••
4-FRONT , CAiffiml:
H' Whon mountod;" .tool orco51 box 00"10'
",".t be """I.:.d as mown.
:lnmm air gnp 10 C<MIr or OXl.nding 12.7mrn
oLJI !rum.."" .. ~. of b",.krIr.

Fronl-paMI MOul
OutIin ••mldim.n,;ono(mmfonch))
61 Typo NF-$FW,NF-sJW.NF-l-lJW
7. Ordering Information

• • • .. ~
• •

Type name C Economy type


Type name
C Economy type
S Standard type S Standard type
NF NV
NF250-SW l- H High-performance type
NV250-SW L H High-performance type
U Ultra current~limjtlng type U Ultra current-limitIng type

I MB Motor braker
I
Number of poles Number of poles
2P NV 102W

3P I I NF I 2p, 3P I 3P L 3P NV
102W
103W
I MB I 3P I 303W
I I 4P NV 3e4W
Rated current Rated current
Even for adjustable rated current
models, the working current should be Even for adjustable rated current
200A specified. 200A models, the working current should be
specified.
I I
Rated voltage Rated voltage
Secify DC voltage when for use in
AC230-400-440V
I DC circuit
AC230-400-440V
I I
Rated sensitivity
Standard
current I I
I Specify the applicable marine 30·100·500mA
I standards I 100·300·500mA I
100'300'500mA
* "CE" is standard.
I I
Connection F Front connection Connection F Front connection
method SL SolderJess (box) terminal method SL Solderless (box) terminal
B Rear connection B Rear connection
B PM Puig-in
B PM pulg-ln

I I
Internal AL Alarm switch Type of residual I I Blank I High-speed type I
accessories AX AuxUlary switch carrent protection \ l Specify I Time-delay type I
Al, SHT (AC11 OVI L SHT
Shunt trip
(Specify rated coil voltage.) I
Internal AL Alarm switch
I UVT
Under voltage trip
(Specify rated coil voltage.)
accessories AX Auxiliary switch
UVT
External
accessories PAL Pre-alarm module AX,SLT,TBM L MG
Shunt trip
Insulation switch
SLT lead-wire terminal block:
INT Internal terminal type I EAL
TBM
Earth.leakage circuit alarm switch
Test button module
External
I MD Electrical operation device
accessories PAL
SLT
Pre-alarm module
Lead~wire terminal block
Quantity F'S,V Operating handle
S·I·W Enclosure box
10 '-- MI Mechanical interlock I MD Electrical operation device
Terminal cover Quantity Operating handle
TC ITC-L, TC-S, TIC, BTCl
F·S·V
S·I·W Enclosure box
LC·HL
HL~S
Handle lock device 10 - MI Mechanical interlock
Terminal cover
CH Card holder TC (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
LC·HL
Handle lock device
HL-8
CH Card holder

62
Service Network
Country f Region Company Address Telephone
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Austral", Ply. ltd. 348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia 612-9684, 7586
Belgium Emae S.A. Industlialaan 1, 8-1702 Grcot-Bijgaarden, BelgIum. 32-{O)2-4810211
VIe. Agua Santa 4211 CasHla 30-0 (P.O. Box)
Chile RHONA SA (32)-611896
ViRa Del Mar. Chile
Building of Innovation Center, Room No. 406A,
SHANGHAI SETSUYO TRADING CO.,LTn. 680 Gulping Road Shanghai, P,R.China 021-6485--6611
China
{Shanghai)3F, BlockS, 103
RYODEN INTERNAnONALLTD. 021--6475·3228
COlO Sao Road, Shanghai, China
Cra 53 No 29G-73 U.I.C.~ MedellIn.
COlombia Proeleclrico Represenlaciones S.A. 574-235-00-28
COLOMBIA.
Denmark Louis Poulsen co. AlS Geminivej 32, OK-2670 Greve, Denmark. 45-(O}43-95-95-95
9 Rostourn Street Garden City, APT. 5,
Egypt CAIRO ELECTRICAL GROUP P.O. BOX: 165--11516, 20-2-7961337
Caim-Egypt.
Germany Mltsublshl Electric Europe B.V. German Branch. Gothaer Strasse 8. 40880 Rallngen, Gennany. 49-(0)2102-4860
52, Arkadias
Greeee Drepanias Antonlos S.A. 30{1)5781 599699
STR.GR 121 32. Pensteri Athens Greece.
101F Manulife Tower 169 Electric Road North
Hong Kong Ryoden international Ltd. 28878870
Point. Hong Kong.
JL Muara Karang Selaten Btak AJUtara No.1
Indonesia P.T.SAHASAT INDONESIA. kav. NO.11 P.O. Box 5045/Jakarta111050. 021-6621780
Jakarta Indonesia.
Ireland Milsublsht Electric Europe B.V.lrish Branch. Westgate Business Park, Ballymount, Dublin 24, Ireland. 353-(0)1-4505007
C.D. Colleoni-? Perseo Ing. 2, Via Paranelso 12
Italy Mltsubishl Electrin Europe B.V. !lOlly 39-(0)3960531
1-20041 Agrate Brianza (M1)
2 FI. Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg., 1F660-11
Ko~ HAN NEUNG TECHNO Co., Ltd. 017-255-0174
Deungnhon-Dong. Kanguseo-Ku, Secul, 157-030 Kcrea
Kuwait SALEM M AL-NISF ELECTRICAL CO.W.l.l. P.O. Box 4184. Safat. 13048 Kuwait. 965-484-5660

SOCIETE LAO IMPORT-EXPORT


43-47 lane Xang Road P.O. BOX 2789 vr
leoPDR Vientiane lao PDR, 21-215043,21-215110

COMPTOIR D'ELECTRIClTE Cebaco Center-Block A. Autostrade Dora,


lebanon 961-1-240430
GENERAlE INTERNATIONAL P.O. BOX: 90·1314 BeiM-Lebanon.
No. 216, Bo Aung GyawStreet,
Myanmer PEACE MYANMAR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 951-295426
Botataung 11161, Yangon, Myanmar.
KHA 2-65, Volt House Dilli Bazar Post Box: 2108,
Nepal Watt & Volt House Co.. Ltd. 977-1-411330
kathmandu, Nepal
Netherlands Imtenh Marine & Industry Postbox 5054, NL-3008 AB·Rotterdam, Netherlands. 31-(0)104871911
New Zealand Meine Sales (N.Z.) Ltd. 1 Parliament Street Lower Hutt. New Zealand. 644-569-7350
Norway SCANELEC Leilvlkasen 43B, N5020 Bergen, Norway. 47-55-506000
Pakistan Prlnce Electric Co. 16 Brandreth Road Lahore 54000. Pakistan. 042-7654342
lngenleros s.a. Paseo de 1a RepubUna 3573
Poru I.T.E. (1) 221-2710
lima 27. Peru.
24th FI. Galleria Corporate Center Edsa Cr, Ort19as Ave.
PhilippInes EDISON ELECTRIC INTEGRATED, INC. 02-643-8691
Quezon City, Metro Manila. Philippines.
Poland MPL TechnotogySp:w.o. ul. Wroclawslta 53, PL-30011 Krakow, Poland. 48-(0)1263228 85
AI-Nabhanlya Slreet-4th Crossing,
Saudi Arabia CENTER OF ELECTRICAL GOODS AI-Hassa Road, P.O.130X: 15955, Riyadh 11454, 966-1-4770149
Saudi Arabia. -
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02 Mitsubishi
Singapore MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE Lm. 65-473-2308
Electric Building Singapore 159943
Slovenia INEAd.o.o. Ljubljanska 80, SI-61230 Oomzale, Slovenia. 386-(0}17 21 80 00
South Africa M.S.A.MANUFACTURING (PTY) LTD. Bramley 2018, Johannesburg, South Africa. 27-11-444 8080
Polingono Industrial "Can Magi", Calle Joan
SpaIn Mitsubishi EleclMc Europe B.V. Buscalla 2-4, Apartado de Correns 420,08190 34-93-565-3160
Spanish Branch. Sanl Cugat del Valles, Barcelona, Spatn.
Sweden Euro Energy Components AB Box 10348.5-434 24 Kungsbcka, Sweden. 46-(0)300-6900 40
Mllhlentalstrasse 136, 8201 Schaffhausen,
Switzeriand TrielecAG 41-(0)52-6258425
Switzerland
5F, NO. 105 Wu-Kung 3rd rd., Wu-Ku Hsiang,
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., ltd. 02~2298-8889
Taipei Hslen Taiwan
77/12 Bumrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak,
Thailand UNITED TRADING & IMPORT CO .. LTD. 223-4220-3
Pomprab Bangkok 10100.
Barbaros Bulvari Gaziumurpasa sok. 9/4,
TUrkey HEDEF DIS Tic. ve Musavlrlik LTD. STI 90-(0)212-2754876
TR-Baimumcu-Istanbul, Turkey.
Mitsubishi Eleclric Europe BV.
U.K. Travellers lane, Hatfield, Herts, Al10 8xB, U.K. 44-(0)1707-276-10Q
UK-Brannh.
Uruguay Fierro Vignoli S.A. AV. URUGUAY 1274. Montevideo. Uruguay. 598·2 92 08-08
!.Ie 8, Galpon Ellnsu,
Venezuela ADESCO C.A. la Urblna-EDO, Miranda P.O. 58-2-241-7634
BOX 78034 Caracas 1074A.. Venezuela
Vietnam Sa Giang Techno Co., ltd. 2Q7/4 Nguyen Van Thu St., Dist 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam 848821-6453

Safety Tips Be sure to read the instruction manual fully before using this product.

J.... MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


HEAD OFFICE: MITSUBiSHI DENKI BLDG.. 2-2-3. MARUNOUCHI. CHIYODA-KU. TOKYO 100,8310, JAPAN

New publication,effective May 2001


L-172-C5411-A FY0105 Printed in Japan (HAK) Specifications subject to change wilhout notice.
Manual Motor Starters,
Controllers, and Protectors
Type GV2, GV3, and GV7

File 2520

~Telemecanique I

CONTENTS

Description Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . , , .. 4
Product Selection ,, , 9
Accessories Selection.. " ,. , , '" 10
Specifications , , . 22
Dimensions ..• , , 50
Wiring Diagrams, 57
Schneider Electric Brends Indexed Catalog Numbers 59

Schn~ider
..l}E[ectrk

SDK- N8469
DTe,emecanique I

2
© 2001-2002 SchneJder Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
IITelemeCaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Table of Contents
GENERAL INFORMATION
Introduction 4
PRODUCT SELECTiON
GV2/GV3, GV7 Selection 9
ACCESSORIES SELECTION
GV2 Accessories , .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. 10
GV2 Enclosures 14
GV3 Accessories and Enclosures ,, 16
GV7 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPECIFICATIONS
GV2 Specifications 22
GV3 Specifications 34
GV7 Specifications 41
DIMENSIONS
GV2 Mounting Dimensions , 50
GV3 Mounting Dimensions ~ 53
GV7 Dimensions 54
WIRING DIAGRAMS
GV2 Wiring Diagrams 57
GV3 Wiring Diagrams 58
GV7 Wiring Diagrams 58

3
10102 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All"Righls Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
General Information
IITelemecanique I
INTRODUCTION

Square DfTelemecanique offers a complete line of products for the manual control and protection of
motors. This catalog covers those devices designed to meet lEG standards for protection and control ....

The GV2 and GV3 manual starter and protector provides manual isolation, manual motor control, and
overcurrent protection in one compact unit. Square D offers four different products that make up the GV
product family; GV2ME, GV2p, and GV3ME and GV7. These devices are UL Listed as Manual Motor
Controilers.

The GV2ME controls motors with fuilload currents up to 32 A. The GV2p, high performance manual
starter, offers a higher withstand rating and vjsible trip indication. The GV3ME controls larger motors
with fuWload currents up to 63 A. The GV7 provides control and protection for motors with fuil load
currents up to 220 A.

The GV2 and GV3 manual starters and protectors are also UL Listedfor group installation applications,
See page 6 for maximum fuse or circuit breaker ratings when used in gr?up ,installations.

In many European applications, the GV devices are used as circuit breakers because they meet the
requirements of IEC 60947-2 for circuit breakers~ However, the GVstarter does not meet North
American circuit breaker standards such as UL, National Electricql Code, 'or eSA.

Standard Features
The GV family offers such standard features as:

UL Listed, CSA Certified, and CE Marked


UL Listed for Group Motor Applications (for more details see page 7)
Overload relay
- Class 10, ambient compensated (GV2,GV3)
- Class 10, solid state (GV7)
Single phase sensitivity
Magnetic instantaneous short-circuit protection
Test trip mechanism
Provision for padlocking in the OFF position
- Standard for GV2, GV3
- Requires attachment of rotary handle for GV7
Fingersafe terminals (meets IP20 standards)
North American and European terminal markings

"" Related catalogs cover products used In conjunction wlth manual motor protectors:
IEC Style Contactors and Starters, catalog number 8502CT9901 R9/02.
Wiring, Communication and Busbar System, catalog number 8502CT0101.
For manual motor starters designed to meet NEMA standards refer to catalog number 2510CT9701.

4
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10{02
DTe,emecaniqu.e I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
General Information
Standard Features (continued)
GV2ME GV2P GV3ME

O.11030A
O.11032A Upto15hp@46QY 1to63A-
Up\o 20 hp@460V 50 kA shortcircuit current@480V Up to 4.0 hp@460V
10 kA short circuli current@480V Rotary Handle Operator 50 kAshort'clrcull cuITent@460V
Push SlItton Operator Visible Trip Im:llcatlon Push Button Operator
Type of protectlori
;. Cilp-an ni"oilntliigori-35 mm Dliil'rillf: Uncllps'; 'Cllp:.ori- mounllng" on 35 mmDiN"ralL-Uricllps • alp-on mounting on 35mm DIN rail.
Mountlng without using a tool. wlthout using a tool. Uncllps without using e tool.
:.~~ne!ml:ltlnt_V"_lt!J lTIetal_~dapt~r ~ate., '. Panel mounl directly. ·,Pan~ mount directly.
Connactlon ysae-C:i-oSs..tieadscfewdr_l.v~r; captiVescrews~ -Same screwdriver'used for: conn'ectl?I1S (111 ,GV2 ~tartars,e_nil theIr,add-on blocks.

Tripping test
Signalitn'g on froni face
'By the manual control device • ON or OFF state 'ON or OFF state • ON or OFF slate
'"Tripp)ng by overload, short circulI, iJndervoltage
or shunt trip.

·.Jdppln~~Y~~(I~ clrcult- -
Padlocking
The thermal curreni·seitlng dial 15 covered by a
Tamper-proof current dial· < ' . !'"Bnsp~rentcover wh!ch can be sealed,
'-Mounted'on the ffonfciftheprodiicl:
>.~Elther N.C. or N.O., N,O. + N.O, or N.D. +Nc, Instanteneous contact blocks which do not Increase the width of the product.
Side-mounting, accessories snap onto, the starten;, without the use of tools.
;':On the left-band side, cOntact blocks whIch prOvide the followIng:
,~N.O. + N.O. or N.O. + N.C. Start-Stop contacts,
'~N.O. or N.C. trip sIgnalling contact, Incorporatl[1g a mechanical flag Indicator, end N.O. or N.C. Start-Stop contact,
Accessories -C/o magnetic tripslghaUlng contact, associated wlth a mechanIcal flag Indicator, used for resel
'On the rIght-hand sIde:
:~h!1nt trlporul1~e,rvollage trip., '
- For GV2P, visible ISblalloj,6iock whIch moiintS
"Combination block for use with K contactor.
on the Incoming termlna,ls of the device
:. Bus ban; and connectors
~,D~or,lnterltl~k nlilchanlsm:
Selecflon :Page 9 PageS

GV7R.EI GV7R.S

25 to 220 A
Upt0150hp@-460V
25 kA short circuIt current@-41:10V
Toggla Operator.
~i:llid stete, overload - magn.e!lc ~b,ortclrcult
Mounting
ConnectIon
Marking Continue e~lstlng ceU from previous column.
SIgnaling on front Faoe
- By manual control On or Off state
- By mechanIcal flag TrIpping by overload or short circuit
Padlocking W~en used with door mounted rotary handle or with separate locking device
Fron(accesslble, Internally mounted
- Auxiliary contects
- Trip Indication contacls
Accessories - Shunt trip
- Undervoltage trip

Rotary Handles
Selection Page 9

5
10t02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors g"'elemecaniquel
General Information
GROUP INSTALLATION SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT

The GV2/GV3/GV7 deviCeS ~re UL 508 iisted, Manual Motor Controliers for use in group instailations.
If each motor in the grouping is controiled by a GV2/GV3/GV7device, only one branch circuit protective
device (circuit breaker or fusing) is necessary for the entire group per NEC 430·53c, provided that:
• The controiler is UL iisied for group installation
• The overload device is UL listed for group installation
Refer to the tabie below to determine the maximum RMS short circuit current capacity for the GV2/GV31
GV7. The GV1 L3 current limiter module may be used to increase the maximum RMS short circuit
current values for the GV2M14-M32.
The maximum RMS short circuit current rating for the complete group installation is determined by the
individual GV device with the lowest RMSshort circuit current value.
For example: a group instailation uses ~ GV2M08, GV2M16 and GV2M22. The respective maximum
RMS short circuitvaiues@480V, without the use of ~ GV1L3 current iimiter module, are: 50 kA, 25 kA
and 10 kA. Therefore, the group inst~i1ation has a maxirnum RMS Short circuit value of 10 kA.

UL Maximum RMS Short Circuit Current

Current Max RMS, kA Max RMS, kA MaxRMS, kA Max RMS, kA MaxRMS, kA


GV2. GV2 GV3 GV7 GV7
Range (A) 48DV BDDV 4BOV eOGV 480V 600V 240/480V aoov 240/480 V eoov
0.1-0.16 ME01 50 30 P01 50 30
0.16-0.25 MEiJ2 50 30 P02 50 30 - - - - - - - - -
0.25·0.40 ME03 50 30 '03 50 30 - - -
0.40 - 0.63 ME04 50 30 PO' 50 30
0.63-1.0 MEOS 50 30 'OS 50 30 - - - - - - - - -
1.0 -1.6 ME06 50 30 '06 50 30 ME06 50 23 - - - -
1.6 -2.5 ME07 50 30 '07 50 30 ME07 50 23
2.5-4.0 MEOa 50 30 'DB 50 30 MEOa 50 23 - - - - - -
4.0 - 6.3 ME10 50 30 p10 50 30 ME10' 50 23 - - - - -
6-10 ME14 30 30 P14 50 30 ME14 50 23 -
9-14 ME16 23 10 P16 50 16 - - - - - - - - -
10 -16 - - - - - - ME20 50 23 - - - - - -
- -
13-18
16-25
ME20. 25 10 P20 50
" ME25 50 23
- - - - - - - - -
17-23 ME21 • 10 10 P21 50
" - - - - - - -
20-25

24 - 32
ME22.

ME32.
10
10
10
10
P22
P32
50
50
"
• 18 -
12 - 20 - - - - - - - - - RE20 25 10 RS20 65 10
15 - 25 - - - - - - - - - RE25 25 12 RS25 65 10
25-40 - - - - - ME40 50 23 RE40 25 10 RS40 65 10
30·50 RE50 25 10 RS50 65 10
40 - 63 MEG3 50 23
48-80 - - - - - - - - - RE80 25 10 RSBO 65 10
60-100 - - - - - - - - RE100 25 10 RS100 65 10
90 -150 - - - RE150 25 10 RS150 65 10
132·220 RE220 25 10 RS220 65 10

Whellused with GY1L3 Currellt limiter Max kA RMS at480 Yls 50 kA and at 600Y 30 kA.
• For Spring terminals add 310 the cstelog number. Example: GV2ME013.

6
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
mTe,emecanique I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Generallnformalion
FUSE AND CIRCUIT BREAKER SELECTION

Disconnect Selecting the proper- upstream short circuit protection for Group Motor-installations can sometimes be
a confusing process. Specific National Electric Code rules must be appJiedforGroup Motor installations.
The examples below illustrate the most common applications-ofGV manual starters with upstream short
circuit protection in a Group Motor instaiiation. Refer to NEC Section 430·53 C and D for proper
conductor ampacity selection.
NOTE: Examples below show tuff load currents that may not be typical. Use actuai motor namepiate
date for determining actual values.

Example 1:
Eight motors with the sizes shown below are. installed on a conveying system. Choose the correct GV
mahuarstarter and the. proper size short circuit protection for this application. The user prefers time-
delay"tuses.
Mo(or'QtY~ H~ Voltage_ FLA
1 5 46' 7.£
2 3 46' 4.8
5 "." 2 460 3.4

One GV2M14, two GV2M1 0, and five GV2M08 manual starters wouid be selected for this group motor
insfallation.
Per N.E.G. section 430-52 & -53 and N.E.G. table 430-152, the lime-delay fuse must be sized as foiiows:
175% FLA for largest motor + sum of FLAs for all other motors
==> (1.75 x 7,,6) + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) = 39.9 A

N.E.C. 430-52 allows use of the next largest standard size fuse - which in this case is 40 A. If nuisance
tripping is a problem with this fuse selection, N.E.C. does allow 225% of largest motor FLA to be used
in lieu of 175% when calculating the size. In this case, the calculation would be as follows:
(2.25 x 7.6) + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) =43.7 A

The next largest standard size in this case is a 45 A fuse.

Example 2:
Ten motors with the sizes shown below are installed on a packaging machine. Choose the proper size
circuit breaker for this application.
MotC!r Qty HP Voltage FLA
2 10 460 14
1 5 460 7S
2 3 460 4"8
5 2 460 3A

Per N.E.G. seciion 430-52 & -53 and N.E.G. table 430-152, the circuit breaker must be sized as follows:
250% FLA for largest motor + sum of FLAs for all other motors
==> (2.5 x 14) + 14 +7.6+ (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) = 83.2A

The next iargest standard size circuit breaker is 90 A.


If nuisance tripping is a problem, N.E.C. allows for circuit breaker sizes that "shall in no case exceed
400% for full load currents of 100 amps or iess, or 300% for full load current greater than 100 amps".
In this case:
(4.0 x 14) + 14 +7.6 + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) =104.2 A
The next largest standard size in this case is a 110 A circuit breaker.

7
10/02 © 2001~2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemeCaniqUe I
General Information
TYPE 2 COORDINATION

IEC Standard 60947-4-1 dafinas Typa 2 Coordination as a lavel of protection which assures that a motor
starter will be suitable for further use following a short circuit. The standard allows small tack welds that
can be easily broken. Device should be replaced during regular maintenance. Proper combination of
GV manual motor starters with LC1D contactors can yield a Type 2 Coordinated installation. Refer to
the table below for selection.

Three Phase HP Rating Max. Available


Manual Starter Contactor Fault Current (kA)
200V 230V 460 V at 460 Vac (1)
GV2P02 LC1009 50
-. GV2?03 LC1009 50

- GV2P04 lC1009 50

- 0.5 .. ~V2P05 LC1009 50

- 0.75 .. GV2P06 . LC1009 60


0.5 0.5 1 GV2P07 LC1009 50
0.75 1 2 GV2P08 LC1009 50
1.5 1.5 , GV2P10 LC1009 50
2 , 5 GV2P14 LC1bo9 50
, , 10 GV2P16 LC1D2$ 50
5 5 10 GV;lP20 LC1D25 50
5 7.5 15 GV2P21 LC1D25 50
5 7.5 15 GV2P22 LC1D32 50
10 10 50 GV3ME40 LC1D40 8
20 20 40 GV3ME63 LC1D115 8
(1) Higher maxImum fault currents can be applied at lower voltages.

B
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
DTelemecanique I Manual Motor Starters, Controller,s, and Protectors
Product Selection
GV2/GV3 SELECTION
GV2/GV3 Manual Motor Controller and Protector
Maximum orsepower _Kstng.s GV2ME. GV2P
Setting Range of
Single Phase Thre~ Phase Pushbutton Rotary Handle
Thermal-Trips (A)
-115VHP 230V HP, 200 VHP 230 VHP 460 VHP 575 VHP Catalog Number Catalog Number
0.11 -0.16 -- -- -- GV2ME01 GV2P01

---
0.016·0.25 - - GV2ME02 GV2P02
0.25- 0.40
0040·0.63
-
-
-
-- -
-
-
-1.
-
-1/2
GV2ME03
GV2ME04
GV2P03
GV2P04
0.63 -1 -- - - GV2ME05
1·1.6
1.6-2.5 ~
1/10
1ffl
-
1/2
-
1/2
3/4
1
1
1-1/2
GV2ME06
GV2ME07
GV2P05
GV2P06
GV2P07
2.5-4 1/8 1~ 3/4 1 2 3 GV2ME08 GV2POa
4-6.3 1/4 1/2 1"1/2 1-1/2 3 5 GV2ME10 GV2P10
6 ·10 ,1/2 1·1/2 2 3 5 7·1/2 GV2ME14 GV2P14
9 -14 3/4 2 3 3 10 10 GV2ME16 GV2P16
13-18 1 3 5 5 10 15 GV2ME20 GV2P20
17 - 23 1-1/2 3 5 7-112 15 20 GV2ME21 G¥2P21
20-25 2 3 5 7·112 15 20 GV2ME22 GV2P22
24-32 2 5 10 10 20 30 -GV2ME32 GV2P32

--1IB -1/2
1 -1.6 1/10 ~.
314 1 GV3ME06
1.6·2.5 1/16 1/2 1 1-112 GV3ME07
2.5-4 1~ 3/4 1 2 3 GV3ME08
4-' 1/' 1/2 1-112 1-1/2 3 GV3ME10
6 -10 1/2 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-112 GV3ME14
10 -16 1 2 3 5 10 10 .GV3ME20
16 - 25 2 3 5 7-112 15 20 GV3ME25
25 -40 3 5 10 10 30 30 'GV3ME40
40 - 63 5 10 20 20 40 60 GV3ME63
56- 80 5 15 :20 25 60 60 GV3ME80
.' For Spr ng termlnals.add to the catalog number. l:xample: "" ""Vll:u1,,';
Weight: 0:260 Kg (0.57Ibs). FHe E164864 File LR 81630
Note: GV2ME32 Is not available wllh spring term!nals; CCN NLRV Class 3211 05

GV2ME
I GV3ME

GV7 SELECTION
Standard manual controllers and protectors include terminal and device mounting hardware, Cable
clamps and accessories are listed on page 17.

GV7R·..• Manual Motor Controller and Protector


.

I.EC Breaking M~xlmum orsepower at ngs


Setting Range of Catalog Weight/kg
::Capaclty at 415 V 3PH
Thermal Trips (A) Number (Ibs)

12-20
• 200 V HP 230 VHP 460 v HP
1
57:J V HP
15 GV7 E20. 2.010 (4.43)
15 25 7.5 15 20 GV7RE25 2,.D10 (4.43)
25 40
30 - 50
25kA - lO
15
." 3 _
30
30
40
GV7RE40
GV7RESO"
2.o10{4A~)
2.015 (4'44)
'48- 80 30 6U" 75 G¥7REBO . 2.040 (4~5)"
60-100.A 30 7.~ 100 GV7RE100 2.040 (4:5)
90-,150A:' 50 100 150 GV7RE1SD 2.020 (4,45)"
35kA
132 220 A 75 100 200 GV7RE22D 2.350 (5.18)·
12 20 5 10 .15 GY7RS20 2.010 (4,43)
15 25 7.5 15 20 GV7RS25 2.61~ (4.4~)
2 40A' 10 30 30 GV7RS40 2.010 (4.4).'
30-50A'. j 15 30 ~q, GV7RS50 2.015 (4.'~4r'
65kA
30 GV7RSBO 2.040 (4.5)'
"
60
BOA
100A 30
60
75
75
100 GV7 S100 2~040 (4.5)
90 150A SO· 100 .150 GV7RS1S0 2.020 (4.45)
132 220A 75 1SO 2,00 GV7RS220 2.350 (5.18)
• Refer to tab!e on paga 54 for ratlngs at other voltages.

9
05/04 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Accessories Selection
DTelemecanique I
GV2 ACCESSORIES

GV2V02

GV2ME

GVAM11

GVAU

GVAM11

GVAS

LS1D30
/\ ~
I ~ GVAE11,AE20

~ ) GVAE1{N.C.)

GVAE1 (N.O.~
FJlpWindaw cover 1S0'
GVAN

Auxiliary Contact Blocks


Description Mounting Location Max. No~ of Blocks Contact Type Sold in Lots Of Catalog Number Weight I kg (Ibs)
Front (3) N.D, or N.C. (1) 1 GVAE1 0.015 (0.03)
1 N.O.+ N.C. 1 GVAE11. 0.020 (0.04)
Instantaneous auxiliary conlacts N.O.+N.O. 1 GVAE20. 0.020 (0.04)
Left Hand Side , N.O.+ N.C. 1 GVAN11. 0.050 (0,11)

Laft Hand Side (2)


N,O.+ N.D.
N.D. (fault) + N.D.
1
1
GVAN20
GVAD1010
• 0.050 (0.11)
0.055 (0.12)
Fault signalling contact + N.D. (fault) + N.C. 1 GVAD1001 0.055 (0.12)
1
instantaneous auxiliary contact N.C. (fault) + N.D. 1 GVAOO11Q 0.055 (0.12)
N,C, (fault) + N.C, 1 GVAD0101 0.055 (0.12)
Short clrct.ll! signalling conlact Left Hand Side 1 SPDT 1 GV2AM11 0,045 (0.10)

(1) Mounting of a GVAE contact block or a GV2AKOO visible Isolation block on GV2P and GV2L,
(2) Choice of NfC or NfO contact operation, depending on which way round lhe rever;sible block is mounted, flip window 180·,
(3) The GVAD Is always mounted next 10 lhe circuit-protector.
• For Spring terminals add 3 to the catalog number. Example: GV2ME013.

10
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric Ali Rights Reserved 10/02
mlTelemecaniQlle I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Accessories Selection

Electric Trips
Description I Voltage I H, I Catalog Number Weight Ib (kg)
Undervoltage or shunt trips (1)
50Hz GVAe025 023 (0.105)
24V
60Hz GVA.tl26 0.23 (0.105)
50Hz GYAIt055 0.23 (0.105)
.8V
60Hz GVA~~6 0.23 (0.105)
-100V 50Hz GVA.10r; ~.23 (0.105)
1lio..'.110V-· 60Hz GVA.107 0.23 (0.105)
50Hz ~VA.115 0.23 {O.105}
11D•••115V
60l;lz GVA.116 0.23.(0.1051.
120.,.127y 50Hz GVAe125 0:23(0.105)
1.27 V 60.Hz .GyA.115 0:23 (0,105)
Side
(1 block on RH side
200 V 50HZ ,GYAt,207 ... C.· 0.23 (0.105)
of GV2) 200 V,,;220V 60Hz GVAe2D7,': 0.23 (0.105)
50Hz 'GVAe225 O.2~ (O:105)
220 V;'..240 V
60Hz GVA~26-;' '.P,.23 .!O.~.O5}
50 Hz GVA~_85' _. g;~? .(ct105)
3BO V.ADO V
60 Hz GVAit3i16' 0.23(0.105) .
415 V;,.440V 150 H,' GVAII415 0.23(0.105)
415V .1.60H ... ~VA1I416 0.23 (0.105)
440 V 1601 , . ~y'Ae:38~. 0.23 (0.105)
480V 1
601 / ., ...• ~YA~1s, 0.23 {0.1 OS)
SOOV 50Hz GVA.50S 0.23 (0.105)
600'V 60Hz GVA.SOS 0.23 (0.105)
Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME)
Safety device for dangerous machines, conformIng 10 INRS and VDE 0113
50Hz' GVAX1.15
110•••115V
GVAX116
127V .60 Hz GVAX1'1S
50Hz, GVAX225 '0:24 (~.110j
Side 220...240 V
(1 block on RH side 60 Hz GVAX226
of GV2) 50 Hz GVAX3B5 0.24(0.110)
380...400 V
60 Hz GVAX386 0~2:4:(0~110)
415".440Y 50 Hz . GVAX415 0.24'(0.110)
440Y GVAX385

Add-on contact blocks


Descriptio,:!: J;JIou.nting _I Maximum number Catalog Number Weight Ib (kg)
GV2AKOO 0.33(0.150)
GV1l3 0.29 (0.130)
Limiters
LA9LB920 0.70 (0.32~)

(1) To order an undervo~agelrlp:replace the dol {e) w~h a U, example: GVAU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (e) with an S, example: GVAS025.
(2) Visible Isolaijon ofllie 3 poles'upstream of clrcull·breaker GV2P and GV2L.
(3) MOlln~ng of a GVAE contact block or a GV2AKClD vlslble Isolation block on GV2P and GV2L.

Fuse Holder, 30 amp maximum


Sold in Weight
Description For Fuse Type For Use In Catalog Number
Lots of Ib (kg)
Sc~ew clamp terminals, 3-~ole CC, KTK·R O.~1 X..1~5 ~1?:3 X. 38 mm) US Markets Ls103D 0.5 (0.23)

Spring Terminals, 3-pole 'CC,KTK-R O.41,'X.1;s"ho.3 X. 3B mm) US Markets (510303 0.5 (0.23)

Screw clamp terminals, 3.pol~ .aM, 9G 0.39 X. 1.5 (1~~ 3,~ mm) ,European M~rkets LSi 032 0.5 (0.23)

Sprint ter'!!lnals, 3-pole aM,gG 0.39X.'1j {1D ~X~B ~m} Eur~pe§;l Markets' LSi 0323 0.5 (0.23)

Screw clamp terminals, 4~p~le aM, g8 0.39 X. '1.5 (10)<38 mm) Ls1OT32 0.5 (0.23)

11
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITelemeCaniqUe I
Accessories Selection

GV2G454 LAD31 GV1G09 GV2G454 GV2G254

GK2AF01

I
- GV2GA01

GV2V03

12
©2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
BTelemeC<lniqlJe I
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers,. and Protectors
Accessories Selection

Mounting Accessories
Description APplication Sold In Lots Of Catalog Ni..inber Weight I kg (Ibs)
With a-pole connection for
Molor starter adaptor plate mounting of a GV2 amI en 10 GK2AFO-1 0.120 (0.26)
[C1-D0910 025 contactor
'For $Crew mounUng of a
10 GV2AF02 ._O.~21 (0.05)
GV2ME or LS1P30_
Adaptor plale For mountlng GV2ME or
GV2P and LC1D091hrough
1 LAD31 0.040 (0.09)
LC1D32 contactorwith front
GV2GH7. faces allgned.
for mounting GV2ME or
GV2P and LC1009through
Mounting bracket
LC1D3B on common base
1 LAbi11 0.080(0.18)
using 2 din ralls.
To ellow GV2ME and GV2P
7~5 mm height compensallon plate to be mounted on a common 10 GV1F03 .0.003 (0.01)
busber
Between GV2ME, LS1D3D
10 GV2AFD1 ~~020 (0.04)
and LC1Kor LPl K contaetor
Between GV2, LSl D30 and 10
contactor LC1D09 to D3B GV2AF3 0:016'(0.03)
Combination block
Between GV2/LS1D30
mounled on LAD31 and 10 GV2AF4 0.016 (0.03)
centaelor LC1D09 10 038

Wiring Accessori~s
lAD31 Number of Side
NU,mber'!fGVs Mounted-Auxiliary Busbar Sold in Catalog Weight I
Description
to be Mounted Blocks on Each Pitch (mm) Lots Of Number kg (Ibs)
GV Starter
nene 45 1 GV2G245 ~.03~ {0.08}

2 1,GV2AN. ,6,~. AD . 54 1 GV2G254 0.038 !0.84)


1 or 2 GY2AN; AM, AD;
72 1 GV2G272 0.042 (0.09)
or 1 GV2,6,S, AU
None 45 1 GV2G345 0.052 (0.12)
Sets of 3-pele, 63 A 3
1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 1 GV2G354 0.060(0.13)
busbars
None 45 1 ~V2G445: 0.077 (0.17)
1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 1 GV2G454c 0.085 (0.19)
4
1 or 2 GV2AN, AM, AD;
72 1 GV2G472 0.094 (0.21)
er 1 GV2AS, AU
5 1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 h GV2GS54 0.100 (0.22)

Description Appl[catlon
Sold in ~iltal~g Weight I
Lots Of Number, kg (Ibs)
Protective end coVer For unused busbar outlets 5 GV1"!1D 0.005 (O.02)
Terminal blocks fer .C~r:~ectI6nfr?,mlhe top 1 GV1G09 : 0.040 (0'..09)
supply to one or mere
C6n'n~ell~~-fr~~ bottom can be fitted with a GV1L3 current llmlter 1 GV2G05 0.115 (0.25)
GV2G· busb~~~ets~, . ,'0' c' ~

C,civ'edort~ii~f~al bi,6~~; F~;',~iciuritlnglri ii:i6dul~r panels 10 LA9ED7 0.005 (0.01)


LAD311
Flexible 3-pole
Fer conn13ellrl9,a GV2! LS1D30 10 an LC1 009 10 025 conlaelor (AC coil) 10 GV1GD2 0.013 (0.03)
canne,elor
Cllp-ln:"marker holders For GV2P ro 31 x Q 87 10\
(suppl1ed with each 100 LA9D!l2 0.001 (0.02)
(8X22mm)
m?lor~rter)
Ineeming'Una Insulater For GV2P when In UL50B TYpe E appllcatlen~ 10 GV2GH7 0.020(0.04)

Padlockable External,Operator

•..
Description Catalog Number WeIght I kg (Ibs)
Fer GV2P I Slack handle. blue legend plale GV2AP01 0.200 (0.44)
(601011410)
(150 to 290 mm) IRed handle.. yellOW legend plate GV2AP02 0.200 (0.44)

Padlocking Device
6 padlecks,.0 6 mm shank max.
Fer all GV2 devices GV2V03 0.130 (0.29)
GV2AF3 ( GV2AF4 (padlock nel suppllsd)

13
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors It]TelemecaniQuel
Accessories Selection
GV2 ENCLOSURES

GY2MC- GV2V01

GV2K·

GV2MP..

GV2E01-

GV2SN-

14
©2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10102
IITe,emecan;que I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Accessories Selection

GV2ME Enclosures
Degree of Protection
Application Type Ca.taJog Number Weight/kg (Ibs)
of EnclC?sure
IP41 GV2MC01 0.290, (~:l)4)
Surface mounllng,
IP55 GV2MC02 0.300 (0.66),
double Insulated with
For GV2ME manual starters and protective (saleable) cover. IP 5510r
protectors with orwllhout accessories GV2MC03 0.300 (0.66)
tamperalure < + 5 'C (41°F)
(maximum of 1 accessory on right and
left for GV1MC and GV2MP01or IP 41 (fuli:size) mounting GV2MP01 PJ1~(ll45)
MPQ2, 1 accessory only on right for
GV1MP03 and GV2MP04) IP 41 (redueed size) GV2MP03 ',P:115(O~25j
Flush with protective cover.
IP 55 (full size) GV2MP02 'O;130'(ri:2~)
IP 55 (reduced size) GV2MP04 0:130(0:29)

Front Plate
Degree of Protection Catalog
Application Sold In Lots Of Weight/kg (Ibs)
of Enclosure Number
Padiocking device (1)
for·GV2M operator
(padlocking Is only 1 GV2V01 O.Q7S (0.17)
posslble'ln the '0'
pos~16n)

Spring r_ellJr~
- 1 • GV2K011 0:052 (o:h)"
Mushroom head 'stop' Key:tBlIl,ase (key#455) 1 GV2K021 0.1'00 (0-.22),
.j
pushbutton (1) 12140 Latching
mm,red Turn to release 1 . GV2K031 0:052 {~.J~)
LatchlngfPadlockable Turn to release 1 GV2K04 0.120 (0.~61

IP55 10 GV2E01 0.120 (O,~6)


For enclO5Utlls
Sealing kit IP 55 for
and front plate 10 GY2E02 0.120 (0~26)
temperature < + 5'C (41°F)

Nautrallink 10 GV2N01 0.030(0;06)

Catalog
Description Voltage Color ~old in Lots Of Weight/kg (Ibs)
Number
Grean 10 GV2SN13 0.019 (0.06)

R,d 10 G1i2SN14' p.019 (0.06)


110V
Orange 10 GV2~N15 0.019 (0.06)

Clear 10 GV25N17 O.~19."(O:O6)


Green 10 GV25N23 _~.O19_(0,0~)
R,d 10 " GV25,N24 0.019 (0.Ci6)
Neon Indicator light (2) 220/240 V
Orange 10 GV25N25 0.019 (0.06)

Clear 10 . .GV25N27 0.019 (0.06)

Green 10 GV25N33 0.019 (0.06)


R,d 10 GV25N34 0~019 (0.06)
3BOf440V
Orarige 10 GV2SN35 0'.p19 (0:06)

Clear 10 GV2SN37 0.019-'0.06)


.
(1) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit
(2) Leads ere approximately 9.5" (260 mm),

15
10102 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITe,emecanique I
Accessories Selection
GV3 ACCESSORIES AND ENCLOSURES
Catalog WeightJ
Description Characteristics Voltage Sold in Lots Of
Number kg (Ibs)
Voltage trips (1) 110,120,127V50Hz
Under voltage trips 1 GV3B11 0.070 (0.15)
(Internal mount) 120,127V60Hz
GY3B 220,240 V50 Hz
1 GV3B22 0.070 (0.15)
240,277 V 60 Hz
3BO,415V50Hz
1 GV3B38 0.070 (0.15)
480 V 60 Hz
110,120,127 V 50 Hz
Shunt trips 1 GV3011 0.070 (0,15)
120,127V60Hz
220, 240 V 50 Hz
1 GV3022 0.070 (0.15)
240,277 V 60 Hz
380,415V50Hz 1 GV3D38 0.070 (0.15)
4BOV60Hz
Instantaneous auxiliary
Normal early break type contacts N.C. + N.D. 1 GV3A01 0.060 (0.13)
contact blocks

(1 per GV3)
N.O.+ N.D. 1 GV3A02 0.060 (0.13)
(side-mounted)
GV1A01
N.C. + N.D. + N.D. 1 GV3A03 0.070 (0.15)

N.O. + N.O. + N.O. 1 GV3AG5 0.070 (0.15)


N.O. + N.O. + 2 spare terminal blocks 1 GV3A06 0.070 (0.15)
N.C. + N.O. + 2 spare terminal blocks 1 GV3A07 0.070 (0.15)
Fault signalling contacts (1) N.C. 1 GV3A08 0.030 (0.70)
~nlernal mount) N.O. 1 GV3A09 0.030 (0.70)
Padlocking device for Slatt button 5 GV1V02 0.010 (0.01)
(1) only 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact may be added InsIde the GV3 device.

Metal Enclosure
GV3CE01
Degree of Protection
Application Type Catalog Number Weight I kg (Ibs)
of Enclosure

For GV3 with or


without accessories
Surface mounting IP 55 GV3CE01 2.000 (4.41)

Enclosure Accessories (to be ordered separately)


Catalog Weight I
Description Reference Characterlstlcs Sold In Lots Of
Number kg (Ibs)

GV3CE01 Neutral termInal, 2-pole LA9D40959 0.001 (0.01)


IP 55 padlockIng device for operators (when padlocked, the motor circuit Is automatically in the Open (OFF) position) GV1V01 0.044 (0.10)
Mushroom head
"stop' pushbutton (2) SprIng return 1 GV1K01 0.052 (0.11)
12140 mm, red

latching Key release (key #455) 1 GV1K02 0.095 (0.21)


Turn to release 1 GV1K03 0.052 (0.11)
Sealing screw for enclosure cover DE1DS4091 0.001 (0.01)

(2) Supplied wlth IP 55 sealmg kit.

GV3CE01

16
©2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10102
mTelemecaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Accessories Selection

GV7 ACCESSORIES

Standard manual controllers and protectors include terminal and device mounting hardware. Cable
clamps and accessories should be selected from the table below.
Cabling Accessories
Sold In
Description Application For Contactor Catal.og Number Weight I kg (Ibs)
Lots 9f
:For GV1R.40 throlJgh'GV7R.150. 3 GWAC021 0.300 (0.66)
,1;&-:-~5 m~2(#141o#3/Q aW,9)._
Clip-On Connectors
"For,:GV7R_220
GV7AC022 0.350 (O.77)
J .~185 mm2 (#14. to 350 mcm).
SpreadBI1:l _ 3 G'{lAC03 0.180 (0.40)
GVlAC01 0.125 (0.28)

Phase BalTle~ '" p~ides maxi~um phase separation alille power con-nection poInts. :2 GV7AC04 0.075 (0.17)
Insulating Screens Provides Insulation between the connecUons and the backplate, 2 GYlAC05 0.075 (0.17)
lC,1F1~5toF185 GV7AC06 0.550 (1.21)
Kit for comblnellon with
conlactor .., LC1F225 and F265 GV7AC07 0.550 (1.21)

LC1D11~~~d 0150 GV7ACO~, 0.550 (1.21)

.Il.: Terminal shields cannot be used together with phase barriers•


.., The kit comprises Ilnks, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker.

17
05/04 © 2001~2bo2 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors GlTelemecanique I
Accessories Selection

GV7AU,AS

Add-On Auxiliary Contacts

Add-on auxiliary contacts provide remote indication of the starter contact state. They can be used for
signalling, electrical locking, or relaying. Two versions are available: standard and low level. The
auxiliary contacts include a terminal block. A hole is provided for wiring exit.

An auxiliary contact can perform any of the following functions, depending on where it is located in the
starter:

Location Function Application


1 N.O.lN.C. contact Indicates lhe position of the starter poles.

2 Trip Indication Indicates that the starter has tripped due to an overload, short-cIrcuit, differential fault, operation of a voltage
release (under voltage or shunt release), or by the "push to Irlp' button. II resels when the starler Is reset.
Electrical fault Indlcales thai the starter has tripped due 10 an overload, short-cIrcuit, ordiffarentlal faul!. It resets when the starter
3 indication Is reset.

4 N.O./N.C. Contact Indicates the posilion of the starter poles.

Type Voltage Catalog Number Weight I kg (Ibs)


Standard - GV1AE11 0.015 (0.03)
Low laval GV1AB11 0.D15 (0.03)

18
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10f02
Rrellamecaniqu",I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers,and Protectors
Accessories Selection
Magnetic Fault Indication Device

The magnetic fault indkation device either differentiates a thermal fault from a magnetic fault or opens
the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault (see page 18).
Vortage Catalog Nl:lmber Weight I kg (Ibs)
24-48 VAC I 24-72 VDC GV7A0111 0.100 (0.22)
110-240 VACIDC GV7AD112 0.100 (O.22)

Undervoltage Trip GV7AU

The undervoltage trip opens the motor starter when the, control voltag~drops below the tripping
threshold of 0.35-0.7 times the rated voltage. For the slai"ler contacts to be closed again, the control
voltage must be above 0,85 times the rated voltage. Thep\f7AU undervoltage trip meets the
requirements of lEG 60947-2. For location of the und~rvoltage trip unit, seepage 18.

Sh unt Trip GV7AS

The shunt trip opensth'e"':J10t6r sUlrt~r when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage.
For location of the shunt trip units,ee page 18.

Operation (GviAU orGIi7AS)

When the motor starter has be,,~ tripped by a GV7AU or AS trip, it must be reset either locally or by
remote control. (For remote control,.pleas$consuJt your Square D Regional Sales Office).
Tripping has priority over ma~ualGlosingdfatriPping instruction is present, manual action does not
result in the dosing of the c()l'"Itacts~ven te-n1PP[arily.
Both the undervoltage trip and sh.unt trip have 'a durability of 50% of the mechanical life of the motor
starter.

Type Voltage , catalog Number Weight I kg (Jbs)


48\1;50 Hz
, GV7AU055 0.105 (0.23)
110-130 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AU107 0.110 (0.24)
Undervoltage Trip 200--240 V,?0160 Hz GV7AU207 0.110(0.24)
381J-.440 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AU387 0.10S (0.23)
52SV, sO Hz GV7AU525 0.100 (0.22)
"48\/, 50 Hz GV7ASn55 0.105 (0.23)
110-130 V. 50/60 Hz GV7A5107 0.110 (0.24)
ShunlTrip .200-240 V.. 50160 Hz GV7A5207 0.110 {0.24)
380--440 \/, 50/60 Hz ~V7AS387 0.105 (0.23)
525 V, 50 Hz ", GV7AS525 0.100 (0.22)
,

19
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All-Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemecaniquel
Accessories Selection

GV7R shown with the following options and accessories:


Extended rotary handle (GV7AP01 or GV7AP02).
Direct rotary handle (GV7AP03 or GV7AP04).
Conversion accessory (GV7AP05).
Locking device (GV7V01).

20
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights ReselVed 10/02
DTelemecaniQue I
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
GV7 Accessories Selection
Direct Rotary Handle

The direct rotary handle replaces the starter front cover and is secured by screws (see the diagram
on page 20). It includes a device for locking the starter in the 0 (Off) position by a padlock. As many as
3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (0.2 to 0.3 in) can be used. The padlocks are not
supplied. Accmversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on an enclosure door.
In this case, the door cannot be opened if the starter is in theUtrjpped'~ position. Starter closing is
inhibited if the enclosure door is open. Refer to the diagram on page 20.

Descriptlon- Type Catalog Numbe.r Weight I kg (Ibs)


Black h~ndle, blal;~legend plale GV7AP03 ·0;205 (0.45)
Direct Rotary Handle
·~e~ h~~die, yellow legend- piat~ GV7AP04 O~205J0.45)

ConversIon Accessory ... Fofmountlng dlrectrolary handle on GV1 APOS 0.100 (0.22)
enclosure door

A This corwerslon accessory makes It Impossible to open the door lflhe device Is closed and prevents the device froin being closed If the door Is open.

Extended Rotary Handle

The extended rotary handle makes it possible to operate controllers installed in the back of an enclosure
from the front of the enclosure. Refer to the diagram on page 20~

It consists of the following:


- a unit which screws onto the front cover of the starter
- an assembly (handle and front piate) to be fitted on the enclosure door
- an extension shaft which must be adjusted - distance between the mounting surface and the
door: 185 mm(7.28 in) minimum, 6PO mm (23.62 in) maximum
It includes a device for locking the starter in the 0 (Off) position by a padlock. As many as 3 padlocks
with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (0.2 to 0.3 in) can be used. The padlocks are not supplied. This
prevents the enclosure door from being opened.

Description Type -Catalog Number Weight I kg (Ibs)

Black handle, black legend plate GV7APD1 0.775 (1.71)


Extended Rotary Handle
Red handle, yellow legend plate GV7APD2 0.775 (1.71)

Locking Device

The iocking device allows controllers without a rotary handle installed, to be locked in the 0 (Off) position
by a padlock. As many as 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (0.2 to 0.3 in) can be used.
The padiocks are not suppiied. Refer to the diagram on page 20.

Description Application Catalog Number WeIght I kg (lbs)

For GV7 not filted With a rolary


Locking Device GV7V01 0.100 (0.2.2)
handle

21
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITe,emecanique!
Specifications
GV2 SPECIFICATIONS
Environment
LS1D32, LS1DT32,
Type GV2ME GV2P LS1D30, LS1D303
lS1D323
Conforming 10 standards lEe 60947·1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60204, 864752, 854941, UL 508, eSA C22.2 No. 14, NF C 63-650, NFC63·120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660.
DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, eSA. UL, BV, GL,
Product approvals
LROS, ON\!, PTS
eSA, UL, PTa UL, eSA BV
UL File Number file E164864, CCN NlRV
eSA File Number File LR 81630, Class 3211 05
Protective treatment - - "TH" "TH"
Degree of protection
conforming to lEG 60529
In enclosure GV2ME01;
IP 41 In enclosure GV2ME02: IP 55 - - -
Shock reslstanr:s
conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 30 9 300 - -
Vibration resIstance
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 5g(5to150Hz) Sg(5to150Hz) - -
AmbIent air temperatlJre
-storage
-40 to +176 of (-40 to + 80°C) - -
-4 to +140 of (_20 to + 60 'C) Open . -58 to +158 of -58 to +158 of
- operation -4 to +140 of (-20 to + 60 'C)
-4 to 104 of enclosed (-20 to 40 'C) Enclosed (-50 to +70 °C) (-50 to +70 °C)

Temperature compensation
-4 to +140 OF (_20 to + 60°C) Open
-4 to 104 of enclosed (-20 to 40 'C) Enclosed
-4 to+HO of (-20 to + 60°C) - -
Flame resistance
1760 OF (960°C)
conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
Maximum operating altitude 6562 ft (2000 m) 6562 ft (2000 m)

~"0 ~
Operating positions
"0 0
'11

In relation to normal ±23 • -
L-~ ___
!I
vertical mounting position

'."":.";-,
,
Wiring
M" MJo M" Mlo M" MJo
Number of conductors and cross
sactlonal area (c.s.a.)
24i8 AWG (2~ mm2) 2-#16AWG (2-1 mm2) 2.:#8 AWG (2-6 mm2) 24i16AWG(2-1 mm2} 2-'#8 AWG (2-6 mm2j 24#16 AWG (2-1 mm Z)
Solid cable
Flexible oable Without cable end 2.:#8 AWG (2-6 mm2 ) 2-#14AWG (2-1mm2j 24iB AWG (2-6 mm 2) 24#14AWG {2-1 mm2j 24#8 AWG (2-6.mm2j 24#14 AWG (2-1 mm 2)
FlexIble cable with cable end 24#10 AWG (2-4 mm 2) 2-#16AWG (2-1.mm2j 24#10AWG(2-4mm 2) 2..#16AWG (2-1 mm 2) 2-#10AWG (2-4.mm 2) 24#16 AWG (2-1 mm2)
SUitable for Isolation
conforming to IEC60947-1 § 7-1- y" y" No No
6
Tightening torque 151b-ln (1.7 N·m)
ResIstance to
0.5 J 0.5 J
mechanlcallmpac~

Sensitivity to phase fanure Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, paragraph 7-2-1-5-2 I No INo

22
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
DTe,emecanique I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications

GV2 Specifications I Characteristics


LS1032, L51DT32,
Type GV2ME GV2P LS1030, LS10303
LS1D323 A.
UlllJzation category
A A
conforming 10 lEG 60947·2 AC20B#
conform!ng to lE.G 60947-4-1 AC-S AC-3

Rated operational v~1tage (Ue)


conforming to lEG 60947·2
v 69~ (590: GV2ME••3j 690 690 690

Rated Insulation voJlags.(UI)


conformIng to lEG 60947-2
v 690(590: GV2,ME.':3) 690
690
conforming to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL50B V 600 (590: GV~ME"3) 600 (B600)
Rated operational frequency' H, 50/60 SOIBO 50/60 50/60
conformIng 10 IEO.60947·2
R~ied IlTlP~I~~-~lhstand-VOli~-9~ (U 'm~f'
conformh19 to lEG 60947·2
kV , ,
w 2.5 2:5 "3.2 S.2
Mecha~lcal-lke
(ops; closlng,'openlng) 0" 100000 100000

-EleCtriCaI'Ufe opS ·100000 100000


for AC-3 d~1y
Duly de!;!;
oPSIIl 25 25
(maxlmu":! operallngrale)
Rated duly Continuous
l:onformlngto lEe 60947-4·1 d"~

.... Conforming 10 IEC 60947·3

23
10102 © 2-001-2002 Sch~eide~ -Electric All RighlSRese~ed
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors eTelemeCaniquel
Specifications
GV2 TRIP MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Characteristics

Type GV2AU GV2AS


Rated Insulation voltage (VI)
V 690 680
conforming to lEG 60947·1
Operational voltage
V 0.85-1.1 Va 0.7-1.1 Ua
conforming to IEC 60947-1
Drop-oulvollage
Inrush consumption
V
VA
0.35-0.7 Va

12 ,.
0.2-0.75 Ua

W 8 10.5
Sealed consumption VA 3.5 5
W 1.1 1.6
OperatIng time
mseo From the momsnt the voltage reaches Its operational value until opening ofthe GV2..10·15
conforming !clEC 60947-1
On-load faclor 100%
.
Wiring
Number of conductors and cross
Mlo M"
.
.
sectional area (o.s.a.)
1-#16to#12AWG (1-2.5 mm 2) 2-#16101;112 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2)
ScUd cable
Flexible cable without cable end 1-#1.810,#12 AWG(O,75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#18 to ~12 AWla"(O.75-2.5 mm 2)
Flexible cable with cable end 1-#18to #14.AWG (0.75-1.5 mm 2) 2-#18 to #14 AWG (0.75-1.5 mm 2)
TIghtening torque 121b-ln (1.4 N'm) max
Machanicailifa
(ops: closing-opening)
,,. 100000

24
© 2001-2002 Schneider Eiectrlc All Rights Reserved 10/02
9Telemecaniquel Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV2 AUXILIARY CONTACT SPECIFICATIONS
Instantaneous AuxlllaryContacts Fault SIgnalling Contacts
Type
GVAN,GVAD GV2AD, GV2 AM11
Rated Insulation voltage (U1)
(associated Insulation coordination) V 690 690
conforming to lEe 60947-1

to CSA 022.2 No. 14 and UL 508 V '00 300


Convenl1onel rated thermal cUrrenl
(Ith) A 6 2.5
conforming 10 lEe 60947·5·1
to eSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 50.8 A. 5 1
Mechanical life
op' 100000 1000
(ops: clo~lng-opanlng)
Operational power and curren!
conformIng to lEe 60847-5·1 AC-15/100 000 ops AC-14f1000 ops
a,c,opEll1.'ltion
110 230 380 '110 230
Rated oparatli:malvollaga (Ue) V 48 127 240 415
440 SOO 690 2' 48 240
127
Opar_all~mal p~t:r, normal condlllolll;' VA 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 3' 48 72 72
OccasIonal bn.~klng a~d making -
VA 3000 7000 13000 15000 '1~3 000 12000 9000 220 300 450 450
ca~acltles, abnormal condillons

Ratad ope~lI~nal current (Ie) A , '.5 3.3 2.2 1 .5 1 0.' 1.5 1 0.5 0.3
op~raiionel. power and.c~rfenl
conformIng 10 lEe 80947.-5-1
... DC-1~/100 000 ops
'

Dc..1311000 ops
d,c. ope~t1on

Rated operational voltage (Ue) 24 48 '0 110 ~40(1)
". 24 48 '0
Operatlonal power, normal conditions W "140 2'0 ,1.80 140 120 - - 2' 15 9 -
Occasional breaklng.and making
capacitieS, abnormal condllions
W 240 360 '240 210 180 - - 100 50 50 -
Rated operational current (Ie) A , 5 3 1;3 0.5 - - 1 0.3 0.15 -
MinImum operational conditions V 17
d.c. operation rnA 5
By GBZCB'; circuli breaker (rating acco~ding to operational current for Ue~· 415 V)
ShOrt circuit protection
orby gG fuse 10 A max (or equivalent).

Wlrlng(scr~w clamp) M'" Mox


Number ~ conductors and cross
sectional aras (c.s.a.) 1-#16 to #12AWG (1-2.5 mm 2) 2-#16 to #12AWG (1-2.5 mm 2)
Solld cable

Flexible cable Without cable end 1-#~6 to #12 A~G{0.75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#16 to #12AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2)

Flexible cable With cable end 1-#18 to #14AWG (0.75-1.5 mm 2) 2-#18 {o#14 AWG (0.75-1.5 mm 2)

WIring (sp!lng tannlnsl) Min (GVAN only) Max (GVAN only)

Flexible cable without cable end 1-#18 to#1~ AV:JG (~.75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#18 to #12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2)

Tlght:nin9 torque 121b-ln (1.4 Nom) max

(1)Add an RC cIrculi ty~ LA4 Dtothe load terminals, see Square D Digest.

25
10/02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemecanique I
Specifications

GV2 Auxiliary Contact Specifications (continued)


Type Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts GV2AE
Rated Insulation voltage (Ut) (assocIated
Insulatlon coordlnatlon) conforming 10 V 250 (690 with respect to main clrcuft)
lEC60947·1
to eSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 V 300
Conventional rated thermal current
A 2.5
(Ith) conforming \0 lEe 60947-5-1
to eSA C22.2 No.14 and UL 508 A 1
Mechanical life op' 1009°0
Operational pOWI:lr and current
AC-15/100 000 ops (closing I opening)
to lEe 60947-5-1. a.c. operation

Rated operaUona] voltage (Us) V 110 230


24 48
127 240
OpBratlonal power, normal conditions VA 48 60 120 120
Ooosslonal breakh19 and making
VA 480 600 1270 2400
capacities, ab.normal condilions
Reled'operatlonal current (Ie) A 2 1.25 1 0.5
Operational poWer and current
to lEe 60947-5-1. d.c, operation DC·13f100 000 ops (closing (opening)

Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 24 48 60


Operational pOwer, normal conditions W 24 15 9 -
Occasional breakIng and makIng
capacities, abnormal conditions
W 100 50 50 -
Rated operational current !Ie) A 1 0.3 0.15 -
Low level swltchln"g contact rellabJllty Number offaults for "n" mlll10n operatlng cycles (17 V-5 mAl: _10. 6
Short clroultprotection By GB2CB06 circuit breaker or gG fllse, 10 A max
Wiring (sorew clamp) M'o M"
Number of conductors and cross
sectlonal area (c.s.a.) Solid cable 1-#16to #12 AWG (1·2.5 mm 2) 2-#16 to #12AWG (1-2.5 mm2)

Flexible cable wlthoLJI cable end 1-#18 to #12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#18 to #12AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2)
FleXible cable with cable end 1-#18 to #14 AWG (0.75-1.5 mm2) 2-#18 to #14 AWG (0.75·1.5 mm 2)
WJrhig (spring terminal) Min (GVAN only) M"
Flexible cable without cable Bnd 1-#18 to #12AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#18 to #12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2)
Tightening torque 121b-ln (1A Nom) max

0
I
,W;}:f~~ri'~ 0
Power Pole ;0'"' Conlact Open

I~~;~~~;'~'
GVAN20 N.O.
0
N.O. I , I
Contact Closed

GVAN11 N.O. OpBration offaLllt


I ,I' I sIgnalling contacts
N.C. I GV2AM11

I",
Change of state
GVAE1 N.O.

Contact operation
InstantaneoUS auxiliary conlacls
N.C. I I I followlng tripping on
short circuit.

GVAE20 N.O.
N.O. I II-l,~~;:'::
,
,'~

;I GV2A010 and ADOl


Change of state
followlng tripping on
GVAE11 N.O. short circuit, overload
N.C. I I, I or undervo\tage.

GVAO..10 N.O.
I, ·1
GVAOu01 N.C. I i

26
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric An Rights Reserved 10102
mTe,emecaniqUel Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications

GV2 ACCESSORY SPECIFICATIONS


3-Pole Busbars and GV2G'
Rated Insulation vollage (UI) Conforming to lEe 60947·1 v 690
Conventlonal rated thermal curren!
Conforming to lEe 60439-1 A 63
(Ilh)
PermIssIble peak. current
kA 11
(I~l9ak)

Permissible Ihermailimii kA'. 104


(12t)
De'gree of protection Conforming to lEe 60529 IP20

Terminal Blocks GV2G05 and GV1 GOg


Rated Ihsulatlo~ vollage (UI) Conformlng.to lEe 60~47-1 v 690
.Co.nvBntlonaJ rated :Iherma! current (llh) Conforming to lEe 60439-1 A 63
Degree of protecUon Co.nformlngto lEe 60529 lP20
1-#14 to#2 I'WG (1.510 25 mm2) conductor or
Wiring Solid cable
2~14,to~AWG (1.510 10 mm 2) conductors

Flexible cable without cable end 1.:#14 to #2 AWG (1.5 to 25 mm 2) conductor or


. 2-#:12 I? #6 AWG (2.5 to 10 mm2) conductors

Flexible cable with cable end


14#14 to #4 AWG(1.5 to 16 mmiij conductor or
~-#1:4 t~~10 A~G (1.5104 mm 2) conductors

TightenIng torque COnnector 20 Ib-In (2.2 N·m)

Screw~a'!lP 1S !b-In (1.7 N'm)


.

Current Limiter GV1 L3 (European applications only)


Rated ln~uletlo.n voltage(U1) v 690
A 63
Operating threshold ~ms currenl" A 1500 {non, adjustable threshold}

Solid cable 1~14to #2 AVI/G (1.510 25 mm ii) conductor or


Wiring
2-#14 to #6 AWG (1.5 to 10 mm 2) conductors

Flexible cable wlthollt cable end 1-#14 to "#2 AWG (1.5 to 25 mm 2) conductor or
2-#12 to #f3 AWG (2.5 to 10 mm2}conductors

Flexible cable with cable end 1-#1410#4 AWG {1.5 to 16 mm 2} conductor or


2-#14 to #1 0 AWG (1.5 ',0 4 mm 2) conductors
Tlght~n!ng torque 20 Ib-1n (2.2 N'm)

27
10/02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights ReserVed
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemeCaniquel
Specifications
GV2 OPERATING CURVES
Thermal-Magnetic Tripping Curves for GV2ME and GV2P
Average opsrEting lime at 20' C accordiflg 10 mUltiples of the setting current

Tlme(s)

10000

, , ,
;

1000 I

100
\ 1\
c
\ I'
\
0
"" l' f'..
2
3

"- "-
1
'" "
I
,1

0,01

I
0,00 1
1,5 10 100
x selting curran! (Ir)

3 poles from cold slate


2 poles from cold state
3 poles from hot state

28
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
RTelemec",niqUe! Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV2 OPERATING CURVES (CONTINUED)
Current Limitation on Short Circuit

For GV2M and GV2P


Three-phase 400/415 V

Dynamic stress
1 peak'" f (prospective Isc) at 1,05 Ue = 435 V

Maximum peakcurrenl (A)


100000

~If/
11
1/
"bY 2

0'1 I/; 3
4
10 000
, V'

5
~ "
1) I ~V
~~~ ;- 6
" 0 V
7
1/ [/.{- I--
----

~ /" v~~
8

&,Q ~V
9
1000
/

I/.~ -:/
I?' V
10
'0r2i
!k ty k--
~~
1/ lr
V

~
1/
100
100 1000 10 000 15000 (11) 100000
Prospec!lva Iso (Al

1 I peak max. 6 a-iDA


2 20-25 A 7 4-6.3 A
3 17-23 A 8 2.5-4 A
4 13-18A 9 1.6-2.5 A
5 9·14A 10 i-i.6A
11 limit of rated Ultimate breaking capacity on short circuit of GV2M
(14, 1e, 23 and 25 Amp ratings)

29
10/02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITelemecaniquel
Specifications
GV2 OPERATING CURVES (CONTINUED)
Thermal Limit on Short Circuit for GV2ME
Thermal limit In kA2 s In the magnetic operating zone

Sum of L2dt '" f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Us '" 435 V

Sum ofJ'dl (kA's)


100
./ 1
2
V 3
1//4

/,// ~5
V 1/
VB
10
Vt;~
7
1/ / /
V//
'/ /V
__ 8
1/
~ V ./

/ 1/
/ -9
/ / ~
I-
1/
0, 1 / 1/ 1/

/
7
7

0,01
0,1 10 100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 20-25 A 6 4-6.3A
2 17-23 A 7 2.5-4 A
3 is-1eA 8 1.6-2.5 A
4 9-14 A 9 i-i.6A
5 6-10A

30
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
DTelemeCaniQUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV2 OPERATING CURVES (CONTINUED)
Thermal Limit on Short Circuit for GV2P
Thermal limIt In kA2s In the magnetic operatIng zone

Sum of )2dt '" f (prospective Iso) at 1.05 Ue;:: 435 V

Sum of l'dl (kNs)


100
1
2
/' 3
V// 4V
7/
V 1-5

10
~
1/
!,A 1/ ~ f-6
..

7
./'Z" ' /
#/
[7
'/ " 8
I"
19 f/ y
~

/
1/ / 8
/ I ..-- V '-
V
0,1
/ /

/
/
1/

0,01
0,1 10 100
Prospective Ise (kA)

1 20-25 A 6 4-6.3 A
2 17·23 A 7 2.5-4A
3 13·18A 8 1.6-2.5 A
4 9-14A 9 1·1.6A
5 6-10A

31
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemecaniqUe I
Specifications
GV2 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS
GV' GV'
Type ME01 POl P21
to ME07 MEOa ME10 ME14 ME16 ME20 ME21 ME2' to P07 POS P10 P1. P16 P20 & P32
MEOa P06 P22
0.1
Rating 0.1 to 2.5 10 23 2.5 10 14 23'
A 4 6.3 14 16 25 to 4 6.3 16 25
32
1.6 1.6
230f
240 V
100 kA
• • • • • • • 50 5tJ
• • • • • • • • •
I~
%(1) • • • • • • • 100 100 • • • • • • • • •
4001
415V
100 kA • • • • • 15 15 15 15 • • • • • • 50 50 50
I~

Breaking capacity
%(1) • • • • • 50 50 40 40
• • • • • • 50 50 50
conforms to
lEe 60947-2
440 V 100 kA • • • 50 15 B B 6 6 • • • • • 50 20 20 20
I~
%(1) • • • 100 100 50 50 50 50
• • • • • 75 75 75 75
SOOV 100 kA • • • 50 10 6 6 4 4
• • • • 50 42 10 10 10
I~
%(1) • • • 100 100 75 75 75 75 • • • • 100 75 75 75 75
690V 100 kA • 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
• B B 6 6 6 4 4 4
I~
%(1) • 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 • 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

230{
240V
,M A • • • • • • • so so • • • • • • • • •
91 A
• • • • • • • 100 100
• • • • • • • • •
AssocIated fuses
4001
415V 'M A • • • • • " " so so • • • • • • 100 100 100

{If required)
If Ise > breaking
,I A • • • • • SO SO 100 100
• • • • • • 125 125 125

capacity leu 440 V ,M ·A


• • • 50 50 50 50
"SO 63
• • • • • 50 63 SO SO
conforms 10
lEe 60947·2
"'M
A • • • "50 63 63 63 so· • • • • • 63 SO 100 100
SOQY A • • • 50 50 50 50 50 • • • • 50 50 50 50 50

91 A • • • 63 63 63 63 63 63 • • • • 63 63 63 63 63
690 V oM A • 16 25 32 32 40 40 40 40
• 20 25 40 40 50 60 50 50

• >100kA.
,I A
• 20 32 40 40 50 50 50 50
• 25 32 50 50 63 63 63 63

(1) As% of leu.

32
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
mTelemecanlque I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV2 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS (CONTINUED)

Used in Association with Current Limiter GV1L3

Type GV2
.
ME01
to MEG7 MEOa ME10 ME14 I ~E1,6 ME20 ME21 ME22
ME06
.
Ral1ng A 0.1 to 1.6 2.5 4. 6.3 10 14 18 23 25
230/240 V loc kA • • • • • • • • •
I~
0(0 (1) • • • • • • • • •
400f415V loc kA • • • • • 100 100 100
.,
100
I~
Breaking capacIty
conforms
%(1) • • • • • 50 50 40 40

to lEe 60S47·2 #O\i loc kA • • .f: • • 50 20 20 20


I~
%(1), • • • • • 75 75 75. 75 _
SOOy loc
I~
%(1)
kA •




• .
'•. 50
10P
"l-2"
100
10

75
10

. -75
1
,10

75

GV2

Typo POi P21 &


to P07 P08 PlO P1. P1. P20
P2S
P32
PO.
Rating A 0:'1 to 1'.6 2.5 4 ·S.3' 10 14 18 21 &23 32

230!240V loc kA • • .- • • • • • •
I~
%(1).
I • • • • • • • • •
IkA • • • • • • • •
..
1o,
4001415 V
I'.
BreakIng capacity
conforms
%
I~
(1) • • • • • • • •
to lEe 60947-2 #OV 1o, kA I!. • • I· • 100 100 100 .100
I~
%$1) • • • • • 50 50 50 50

SOey leu kA • • • • 100 100 100 100 100


I~
%(1) • • • • 50 50 50 50 50

GV2

Type MEa1
to ME07 MEna ME10 ~E14 ME16 ME20 ME21 ME22
ME06
ROlling A 0.1 to 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25
Cable protection against thermal stress
In the evenl of short circuli Jl.Jl<Jo'" 13) (3) (3) 10kA 6kA (2) (2) (2) (2)
(PVC Insulated copper cables) 1 mm'
Minimum cross seotlonal area

(o.s.a.) proteoted to 40 'C at Jl.Il6Jn' (3) (3) (3) 20kA lOkA (2) (2) (2) (21
1.5mmi

Iso max ~ (3) (3) , (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
(3)
2.S-6mm

+>100kA. (1)As% of leu. (2) Cable u.s.a. not proteoted {3l oable c.s.a. protected.

33
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors DTelemeCanique!
Specifications
GV3 SPECIFICATIONS
Environment
Conforming to standards lEG, NF C, as, lEG, VDE
Approvals ASE, eSA, UL, LROS, (.IVE
UL File Number File E164B64, CCN NLRV
GSA File Number File LR 51630, Class 3211 05
ProteCtive treatment "TC'
GV3ME open-mounted: IP 20
Degree of protection I Conforming \0 lEG 60529
GV3ME In enclosure GV3CE01: IP 55
Shock resistance I Conforming to lEG 68-2-27 22 9 for 20 rna duration
Vibrallonres)slanca I Conforming to lEG 68-2-6 2.5 9 (0-25 Hz)
Storage -40 to +176 OF (-40 to + 80 'C)
Ambient air temperature Open -4 to' +140 OF (-20 to + 60 'C)
Operation
Enclosed -4 to +104 OF (-20 to + 40 'C)
Open -4 to +140 OF (-20 to + 60 'C)
Temperature compensatIon Conforming tClIEC 60157·1 EnclosBd -4 to +104 OF (-20 to + 40 'C)
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 I Conforms for 1760 OF (960 'C)
Maximum operating altitude Wlthout'deratlng 19843 ft. (3000 m)

Operallng poslllon

Type
Q\
4l--~-- I
I:: ~;';:

GV3ME06 through ME2D


m ~6~
GV3ME25 through ME63
Wiring MI, M"' MI' M"
Number of conductors and cross
secllonal area (c.s.a.) 1-#16 to #6 AWG (1-6 mmi.) 2-#1610 #8 AWG (1-6 mmZj 1-#12 to #1 AWG (2.5-35 mm2)
Solid cable
Flexible cable w~houl cable end 1..#1610#8 AWG (1-6 mm2-) 2-#1610 #8 AWG (1-6 mmi) 1-#12 to #2 AWG (2.5-25 mmll) 2-#12to#4 AWG (2.5-16 mmi)
Flexible cable with cable end 1-#1610#10 AWG (1-4 mmi.) 2-#1610 #10 AWG (1-4 mm2) 1-#12 to #2 AWG (2.5-25 mm2) 2-#12 to #4 AWG (2.5-16 mmi.)
TightenIng Torque 151b-ln (1,7 Nom) 44lb-ln (5 Nom)

Technical Characteristics
Type GV3MED6 through ME25 GV3ME4D through ME63
Conforming 10 IEC 60158-1 V 690
Raled insulation vollage (UI) ConformIng to
V 600 (B600)
CSA C 22.2 No.14 and UL 508
Maximum conventional rntad thermal current (Ith) Conforming to IEC 60157-1 A 63
Mechanical life
0" 100000 50000

Electrical life
ops: Closing-opening
AC-3 duty
0" 100000 50000

Maximum operating rate opslh 25


Sensll1vlly 10 phase fallure Conforms to IEC 60947-4-1 Sec 7-2-1-5-2

34
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10{02
DTelemecaniQue I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV3 SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED)
Voltage Trip Characteristic.s

Conforming to IEC 6015B c1 V 690


Rated Insulation vollage {UI)
ConformIng to eSA C22.2 No'-14 and I:H.:50a V' 600 (B600)
Pick-up voltage 0.8-1.1 Un
Drop-out voltage 0.7-0.35 Un
Inrush consumptlon 12VA(7W)
Sealed consumption 7VA(2.5W)
Operating time (1) m, GV3B:10. GV3D:15
On-load fector 100%
~

WirIng Mlo M"


Number of conductors and cross ..
sectional (c.s.a.) 1.:#1610 #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm2) 20#16 10 #12 AWG (1-2.5 mrni)
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end 1411810 #12 AWG '(0,75'2.5 mmi) 2~18 t~__#12AWG (0.75-2.5 inm2)
Fle:<ible cable with cable end 14i~8tO:#12AWG (O.75~2.5-~m2j 211'15 to #14AWG (0.75-1.5 m~l
(1) From Ihe disappearance of Ua at the trip termlnels to opBnmg .oftheGV3.

35
10/02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors BTelemeCaniQUe I
Specifications
GV3 AUXILIARY CONTACT SPECIFICATIONS
Auxiliary and Fault Signalling Contact Characteristics

Type Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts GV3A01 to A07 Fault Signalling Contacts GV3A08 and A09
Rated Insulation voltage (VI)
conforming to lEe 60158-1
V 690 690

conforming to
V 600 (BGOO) 600 (BGOD)
eSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL SOB
Conventional rated thermal
current (lth) A 6 6
conforming to lEe 60337-1

conforming to
A 5 (BGOD) 5 (B600)
eSA C22.2 No.14 and UL508

MechanIcal life op, 100000 1000


Operational power and currenl
48 110 220 380 110 220 380
conforms to V 127 240 415 440 500 690 48 127 240 415 440 500 690

lEe 60337-1 a.c operation AG-.111100 000 ops (Closlng-openlng) AC-11/1000 ops (Closlng-openlng)
Oparatlonal power VA 350 500 800 850 700 700 400 240 460 800 850 450 450 200
OccasIonal breaking and
VA 4000 12000 20 000 20000 15000 15000 10 000 2400 BOOO 12000 15 000 12000 12 000 8000
makIng capacll1es
Operational current (Ie) A 6 4.5 3.5 2.2 1.5 1.5 0.6 5 3.6 3.5 2.2 1 1 0.3
Operatlonal powar and current
conforming to V 24 48 60 110 220 24 48 60 110 220
IEC 60337-1 d.c. operation
DC-111100 000 ops (Closlng-openlng) DC-11f1000 ops (Closlng-openlng)
Operational power W 180 240 180 140 120 120 120 90 70 60
Occasional breaking and
making capacities W 240 360 240 210 180 160 180 135 105 90

Operational currenl (Ie) A 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 5 2.5 1.5 0.7 0.3


Short circuit protection By GB2CElClB circuit breaker for control circuits By GEl2CElOB circuit breaker for ccntrcl circuits
conforming to IEC 60337-1 or g I fuse, 6 A max (or equivalent) or g I fuse, 6 A max (or equivalent)

0 ,
Powar poles: pi 1 1

GV3AC1,A07 ~I 1
1 I
Contact cperatlon
GV3A02 ~I I I GV3A08 and A09 change state
~I
1
O=N.C.
F=N.O.
GV3A03 I I following an overload or short circuit fault

~I I Conlact
GV3A05

GV3A06
1 I
~I I I c:::::::J Open c:::::::J Closed

Type Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts GVsAD1 to AD7 Fault Signalling Contacts GVsAD8 aT1d ADS
Wlrlng Mlo M" Mlo M"
Number of conductors and cross
sectional area (c.s.a.)· solid cable 1-#16 10 #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2) 1-#16 Ie #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 )
flexible cable without cable end 1-#18 to #12AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #12AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 1-#1B to#12AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2)
flexible cabla with cable end 1-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #14 AWG (.75-1.5 mm 2 ) 1-#18 to#12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2) 2-#1810#14 AWG (.75-1.5 mm 2)

36
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
DTelemeCaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV3 OPERATING CURVES
Thermal·Magnetic Tripping Curves for .GV3ME
Average oi)eraUng tIme at 6a· F(20 ·C) accorclng 10 multiples althe setting current.

Time (5)

10 00 0

\ I I I
1000 \\ I
,
I

\\ \ \
iO 0
\\\ \

'"!"
i" 1

0
~2
4

~
" i'.

o. i
,

0,01
\

I
0,001
i iO iOD

X setting current (Ir)


1 3 poles from cold state, rallng 1.6 ~ 10 A
2 3 poles from hot stale, rating 1.6 ~ 10 A
3 3 poles from cold stale, rating 16·63 A
4 3 poles from hot state, rating 16·63 A

37
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Ehilclric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors .TelemeCaniqUel
Specifications
GV3 OPERATING CURVES (CONTINUED)
Current Limitation on Short Circuit for GV3ME
3-phase 400/415 V
DynamIc stress
I peak'= f (prospective Ise) 811.05 Ue = 435 V

Maximum peak current (kA)

100

1
<:,:,lrJ7
fl
1/
10/ Ir 2
If 3

10
O'
,
o~
" / 1.-:::: ~ 1.- 54

)
" 6
o· ~
"

~
~ 7
V L--
~
VV
" rY'V 6


i/; V- V 1/
V
,l /
1 9

10 I

~~
1/
/
1/
,1
0,1 10 15 100
Prospective Iso (kA)
1 I peak max 6 6-10 A
2 40-63 A 7 4-6A
3 25-40 A 8 2.5-4 A
4 16-25 A 9 1.6-2.5 A
5 10-16A 10 1-1.6A

38
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10102
DTelemecaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV3 OPERATING CURVES (CONTINUED)
Thermal Limit on Short Circuit for GV3ME
Thermal llmll In kA2s In the magnetic operating zone
Sum of 12dl = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Us =435 V
Sum of 12d! (kNs)

10
°

L.--- +-,
:::;:; V
::.---
:)

0
5
I
7 ---
IW
hII 1/ 1-6
~ 1/ V
JV
1// l/ V l-- 1-7-
1
V V

/'
./
/ 8
.-- I-- I----
I--

V ----- ---
.v
0, 1
0,1 10 15 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 40-63 A 5 B-l0A
2 25-40 A 6 4-6 A
3 16-25 A 7 2.5-4 A
4 10-16A 8 1.6-2.5 A

39
10{02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemecanique!
Specifications
GV3 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS

GV3

Type ME06
and ME08 ME10 ME14 ME20 ME25 ME40 ME63
ME07
Breaking capacity (len) 230 V kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
conforms 10 lEG 60157-1 (P1)
400/415 V kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 35 35
MOV kA 100 100 100 25 25 25 25 25
500 V kA 100 100 100 8 8 8 8 8
e90 V kA 100 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Associated fuses {If requJred)
if 1st> breakIng capacity len
230 V aM A
• • • • • • • •
"aM
A • • • • • • • •
400/415 V A • • • • • • 250 315

"aM
A • • • • • • 315 400
MOV A
• • • 125 160 200 250 315

",M
A
• • • 160 200 250 315 400
SOOY A
• • • 80 100 125 160 200

"aM
A
• • • 100 125 160 200 250
esov A
• 40 50 80 100 125 160 200
91
Fuse not requIred. breBklng capacity len> Iso,
A
• 50 63 100 125 160 200 250

40
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
DTelemeCaniqUel Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV7 SPECIFICATIONS
Environment
lEe 60947-1, 60947*2, 60947-4·1, EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4·1, NF C 6:3-650, 63·120,
Conforming to Standards
79·130, YOE 0113, UL50B, GSA C22.2 No.14
UL FIle E 164864 CCN NLRV
Approvals
CSAFlle LR 81630 Class 321105

,Protective Treatment "Te·


Degree of ProtectIon
IP 405 with terminal shields
conformIng t~ lEe 60529

Storage
Amblsnt AlrTempetalure
Operation :'25 ·C to +70 ·C (-1~ of 10 +15~'F)
-25 ~C to +55"CH3 OF 10+1'30 OF)
Temperature Compensation
For ll.sa up to 70·C (+158 OF), please consullY£lur Regional Salas Of!ice
Maximum ,?perating Altitude 2000 m (6562 ft.) .

Operatlng Posltlon

SuitabilitY. for ISOI~t:lon ConformIng t~IEC 6Q947~1 7:1..f3 Yes


VlbraUon Resistance

Phase Lo~s SEn:;~lti\llty Yes;conformlnQ to lee 60Q47-4-1, 7-2-1-5-2

Cabling Characteristics
Connection to Bars, and Cables with Lugs or Bare Cables

GV7R,.40-GV7R .100 GV7R .220

Type

without spreaders 35mm(1.4In) 35 mm (1.4, In) 35 mm (1.4 In)


Pitch
~th spreaders 45 mm (1.8 In) 45 mm 6.ain) 45 mm (1.8 In)
:;;6 {0.24 In) :;;6 mm (0.24 In)
Bars or Cables with Lugs L :;;25 (1 In) :>25mm(1In) ~5mm(1In)

d :;;10 mm (0.39 In) :;;10 rom (0.39 In)

size M6 MB MB
Screws
tlghtenlng.torque 15 N-m (11.3 lb.-fl.) 15 N_m (11.3 lb.-ft.)
height 20 mm (0.78 In) 20 rom (0.78 In) 20 mm (0.78 In)
Bare Cables
(Copper or Alumlnllm) cross-secUonal area 1.5 mm 2 (#18 AWG)
1.5-95mm2 1.5-185mm2
(ff16-#31O AWG) (#16-350 mcm AWG)
with Connectors
tightening torque 15 Nom (11.3,lb.-fl.) 15 N_m(11.3Ib._ft.) 15 Nom (11.3 lb.-ft.))

41
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITelemecaniquel
Specifications

Technical Characteristics

GV1
Type
RE2o-RE100 RS4IJ-:.RS100 REiSQ RS15D RE22D I RS220
jConformlng to IEC 60947~2 A A A
Utilization Category
_ I ConformlngtoIEC60947-4-1 AC·3 Ae-, AC-3
Rated Operational Voltage (Us)
B90Y 690V B90V
Conforming to lEG 60947-2
Rated Insulation Voltage (UI)
750 V 750 V 750V
Conforming to lEe 60947·2
Rated Operational Frequency'"
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Conforming to lEe 60947~2
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (U Imp)
Conforming to lEG 60947-2 SkV 6.kV SkV
Total Power Dissipated Per Pole 5W 8.7W 14.5W
Mechanical Durablllty (C.O. - Close, Open) 50,000 C.O. 40,000 C.O. 20,000 C.O.
!440V Iln/2 50,000 C.O. 40,000 C.O. 20,000 C.O.
Electrical Durabmty
1440V 1'0 30,000 C.O. 20,000 C.O. 10,000 C.O.
Rated Duty Conforming to IEC 60947+1 Continuous duty Continuous duty Continuous dUty
GV1
Type
RE4D-REi00 I RS4D-RSi0D REi50 RSi50 RE220 RS220
Rating 25-40 A to 60-100 A 90-150 A 90-150 A 132-220 A 132~220 A
Icu + 85kA 100kA 85kA .. 100kA 85kA 100 kA
2301240 V
Ics%. 100% 100% '.100% 100% 100% 100%
Icu + 25kA 70kA "kA 70kA "kA 70kA
400/415 V
Ics%. 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
Breaking Capacity Icu. 25kA 65kA "kA 65kA "kA 65kA
Conforming to 440 V
Ics%. 100% 100% . 100% 100% 100% 100%
IEC60947-2
Icu + 18kA 50kA 3DkA 50kA 3DkA 50kA
500 V
Ics%. 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
lcu + .kA lOkA 'kA 10 kA .kA lOkA
690 V
Ics% • 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
... GV7R molor controllers and protectors are not recommended for use wllh variable speed controllers or soflstart units for applications under 40 Hz.
+ Icu _Interrupting capacIty at full voltage.
• 1(;1; - short-circuIt Interrupting capacity as a percentage of leu.

UL Maximum RMS Short'Circuit Current (ka)


Type Range 24DV. 4BOV. aODV.
GV7-RE40 25t040A 25 25 10
GV7 - RE50 30t050A 25 25 10
GV7· REBO 4BtoBOA 25 25 10
GV7·RE100 60to100A 25 25 10
GV7·RE150 9010150A 25 25 10
GV7· RE220 132 to 220 A 25 25 10
GV7·RS40 25t040A 65 65 10
GV7· RS50 30t050A 65 65 10
GV7 - RSBO 48toBOA 65 65 10
GV7 - RS100 60 to 100A 65 65 10
GV7· RS150 90t0150A 65 65 10
GV7 - RS220 132to 220 A 65 65 10
Group Installation. MaxImum NTD fuse sIZe. 1200 A I Maximum clrcul! breaker rating. 1200 A. Suitable for use on a CirCUit WIth an avallabla short cirCUit
current level no greater than the short cIrculi current rating of the manual motor controller, or circuit breaker, whichever Is less.

• Nominal system voltage.

42
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
mTelemecaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications
GV7 AUXILIARY CONTACT SPECIFICATIONS
Auxiliary Contact Characteristics

Typo GV7AE11 GV7AB11


Rated Insulation Voltage (UI)
(assocIated InsulatIon co-ordination) 690 690

Conforming to IEC 60947~ 1


600 300
from eSA C22.2 No. 14 & Ul50/;l

Conventional Thermal Current (lth) 6A 6A


Conforming to lEG 60947·5·1
from eSA C22.2 No. 14 & UL SOB 5A 1A

Mechanical DurabilItY
50,000 C.O. 50,000 C.O.
(c.a,: CI?se-Open)
Operational Current
Conforming to IEC 60947·5·1
ACOperalion AC·12 orAC·15, 50,000 C.O. Ae-12 or AC:15, 50,0,00 C.O.
Rated Operational·Voltage.(Ue) V 4B 110 230/240 380/415 #0 690 4B 110 230/240 3801415 440 690
I',AC-12 A , , ,
2'
6 6 6 , 2'
6 5 5 5 5 5 5
Rated Operational Current (Ie)
I~Acr15, A 6 16 5 , 3 3 0.1 5 5 , 3 2.5 2.5 0.1
OperallonBl Current
Conforml~g 10 IEC 60947-5.~

DCO~~t1on ge:12' or,Oc-14, 50,000 C:W PC:1.2 or DC~14,.50.000 C.O•.

Rated Operational Voltage (U~) ')I 110

Rated Operallonel Currenl (Ie)


I.DC-12 A
2'
2.5
48
2.5
110
O.~
250
0.3
2'
2 "
2 0.5
250

-
1°C:14 A 1 0.2 0.5 0.03 0.5 0.1 0.25

MinImum operating conditions '17 ii , ,. ',' . ','


12V
DC qperatlon . §mA .... . _. ..' S.mA
Short-circuli Prolectlon f!yGB~C~•• clr(;ull brt:!a.kar ~r.aled acc.ord!ng 10 .ope~lIonalcurrflnt for Ue ~ 415.VJ or by gl fuse, 10 A max.
Cabling
1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x#16 AWG) 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x#16 AWG)
Solid Cable
Flexible Cable wIthout Cable End 1 x1.~ mm 2 (1 x#16AWG) 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x#16 AWG)

Flex!ble Cable with Cable End 1 x1.Smm 2 {1 ~#16AWG) 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x#16AWG)

Characteristics of Electric Releases

Type GV7AU GV7AS


Rated Insulation Voltage (UI)
690V 690 V
Conforming to IEC 60947·1

Operatlonal Vollage
0.85-1.1 Ue (V) 0.7-1.1 Ue (V)
ConformIng 10 IEC 60947-1

Drop-Oul Voltage ~.35-0.7 Ue (V) 0.2-0.75 Ue M


<10VA <10VA
Inrush Consumption
<5W <5W
<5 VA <5 VA
Sealed Consumpllon
<5W <5W
Operating TIme
<50 ms <50 ms
Conforming to IEC 60947-1

On-load Factor 100% 1000/,

Cabllng
2x 1.5 mm 2 (max.) (2 x#16 AWG) 2 x 1.5 mm2 (max.) (2 x#16 AWG)
SoIld or Flexible Cable

43
1Of02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemeCaniqUe I
Specifications

GV7 OPERATING CURVES

The current limiting capacity of the motor starter and protector is expressed by two curves which give,
as a function ofthe prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no protection
devices were installed):
The actual peak current (limited),
The thermal stress (in A's), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor with a
resistance of 1 n.

Example: The real value of a 70 kA prospective short-circuit current limited by a GV7RS220 is 20kA
peak, seepage 46.

Permissible Thermal Stresses for Cables (A2s)


,
S(mm 2)

AWG

PVC
CO
1.5

'16
2.97 X104
2.5
.14
6.26 x 10 4
4
.12
2.12 X105
#10
4.76)(10 5
..
10

1.32 X 106
16

'"
3.4 X 1{J6
25
#4
8.26 x 106
35
#2
1.62)(107
50
#1
3.31 X 107
Insulation ,oJ - 5.41)(10 5 1.39x 10 6 3.36 x 106 6.64)(10 6 1.35x107 - -
Co 4.10 X 10 4 1.39x105 2.92 x 105 6.56 x 105 1.62 x 10 6 4.69 X106 1.39 X107 2.23 X 107 4.56 X107
PRC
,oJ - - 7.52 X10 5 1.93x106 4.70 X10 5 9.23 x 10 5 1.88 X107 - -
PRC'" Cross-llnked polyethylene

Example 1: For a GV7RS220, the peak value is limited to 20 kA for a prospective Isc of 40 kA.

",xample 2: For a GV7RS220, and with a prospective Isc of 40 kA, an I't of 7.5 x 105 Ns is obtained,
which requires the use of a PVC insulated copper cable with across~sectjonal area of 10
mm' (# 8 AWG).

44
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights·Reserved 10/02
mTelemecanique I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications

Thermal.Magnetic Tripping Curves for GV7R


Average operating time at 20'C according to multiples of the setting current

Time (5)

10000

5000

2000

1000
500

\\
200

100 \"'-
50

1'\1\
20
1\
10
5
1
2
'\

0.5
3
0.2

0.1

0.05

0.02

0.01

0.005

0.002

0.001
1 1.12 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100

x setting current (Ir)


1 Curve from cold state
2 Curve from hot slate
3 12 -14 Ir
In the event oltotal phase failure, tripping occurs aller 4 s ± 20%

45
10102 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITelemeCaniqUel
Specifications

Current Limitation on Short-Circuit for GV7R


3-phase 400/415 V

Dynamic slress
1 peak = f (Prospective 1sc)
For GV7RE only
Limited peak current (kA)

100 V
80
70
60
50
40 /
30
/

20
/
1
...---:;
.--y c:;.--
0
V"
....... 3
8
7
6
5
1GV7RE220
4 2GV7RE150
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 6070 100 3GV7RE100

Prospective short-circuli current, lsc (kA)

For GV1RS only


Limited peak currenl (kA)
v
100
V
80
70
60
50
40 /
30
.-
20
/
"'--::::::1--
.....,1
.... ::/'
0
Y::/J
8
7
6
5
1 GV7RS220
4 2 GV7RS150
2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 6070 10D 3 GV7RS100

Prospective short-circuli current, Iso (kA)

46
© 2001 ~2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
DTe,emecanique I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications

Thermal Limit on Short-Circuit for GV7R


3-phase 4001415 V

Thermal Um!!
Fdt" f (Prospective Jac)
For GV7RE only

10
, SumofFdt(A2s)

5x10 •
,,' O·

'" O·

10 •
1
5x10 • 2

3x10 •
3
L--
2x10 •

10 •
Sx1Q

3x10
·•
·
1GV7RE22Q
2x10 2GV7RE150
2 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 6070 100 3GV7RE100
Prospectiveshort~clrcull current, lsc (kA)

For GV7RS only

10
, Sum of 12dt (A2 S)

5x10
·
3x10

2x10
··
10 • ,
5x10

3x10
·• 2
3
I--
2x10 •
10
·
5x10

··
3x10

2x10 1GV7RS220
2 3 4 5 6 '0 20 30 40 50 6070 100 2GV7RS150
3GV7RS100
Prospective short-circuit curren!, I~c (kA)

47
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITelemecaniquel
Specifications

Current Limitation on Short-Circuit for GV7R

3·phase 690 V

DynamIc: stress
1 peak = f (Prospective Iso)
For GV7RE only

50 Limited peak current (kA)

40

30 /
20
1/
/
1/

1/ ,
0 I.;.:: "'::-2
8
7
IA
6
1/
5
V 1GV7RE220
4 2GV7RE150 and GV7RE1 00
2 3 4 5 6 9 10 20
Prospllclivll short-circuit current, Isc (kA)

For GV7RS only


Limited peak current (kA)

40

30 /
20
1/
/
1/

/ f-1
0 £, ~ ..... 2

8
7
h
/
8
V
5
V 1GV7RS220
4 2GV7RS150 and GV7RS100
3 4 5 6 10 20
Prospeotlve short-cIrcuit currenl, Isa (kA)

48
© 2001~2002 Schneider Electric All Rights ReselVed 10/02
IITelemecaniqUel Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Specifications

Thermal Limit on Short-Circuit for GV7R


3-phase 690 V

Thermaillmlt
l~dt '" f (ProspecUve lsc)
For GV7RE ~mly

3" 0'

", 0'
.

10
,

1
5" 0'
,
3x10
,

2x10
,

, 1 GV7RE220
10 , 3 4 5 6 8 10 20
2 GV7RE150 and GV7RE100

ProspectIve short-cIrcuit current, Isc (kA)

For GV7RS only

3" 0'

10 .
1
5,1 0'
/, 2'

3x10
,

2><10
,

1 GV7RE220
10
, 2 GV1RE150 and GV7RE10Q
2 3 4 5 6 10 20
ProspectlvB short-clrcull current, Isc (kA)

49
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric· All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors fjJTelemeCaniquel
Dimensions
GV2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
GV2ME GV2AD, AM AN, AU, AS, AX GV2AE LS1D30

Block GV2AD. AM. AN A LS1D7323:


Blor.k GmU, AS 3.92 X

~
'060--;- 101 ,- 'OOci~
000
"DE~
.. EJ
. . ~I~ I '-'.. k
000
rlll.-I!- 000"
16 " I....X~
1.8
>7:,
Xi Electrlt:l31 clearance:= 1.6" (40 mm) for Ua:> 690 V
GV2P GV2AD,AM,AN,AU,AS GV2AKOO

BloCkGV2AD AM AN
Sloc:k GV2AU AS

X2 = 1.8" (40 mm)


Xi ElectrlC<l1 c1earance:= 1.S' (40 mm)fOf Ua :;;415 V, or 3.2" {80 mm)for Ue=440 Y, or 4,7" (120 mm}for Ua = 500 and 690 V
Mounting of GV2M On Panel with Adaptor Plate GV2AF02
On 1.4" (35 mm) rall On Pre-slotted
On Mounting Rail DZ5MB201
C:= 78.5 on AM1DP200 (35 x 7.5) Mounting Plate AM1PA
C = 86 on AM1DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

GV2AF02
EA4
DZ5MB'01 DZ~:E8

Mounting of GV2P
On 1.4" (3S mm) rail
=
On Panel
On Pre-slotted Mounting
Adaptor plate GK2AF01
:;i
•5
15
.
35
N•

C 98.5 onAM1DP200 (35 x 7.5) Plate AM1PA


=
C 106 on AM1DE20Q, ED2DO (35 X is)

AF1EA4

"'!I
NI
[
[~~ +- ~~
[ PI~
I-j-

GV2AF01 GV2M + GV1L3 GV1F03


GV2M + K conlaclor combination (current limiter) 7.5 mm height compensation plate

,"f).;;<;,~,­

"""'"
§:fffi
0d0i::l0
Dual Dimensions ~
Ik 1 mm
X1 = DAD" 110 mm for Ue = 230 Vor 1.2' {3D mm for 230 V < Ue s; 690 V

50
© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
mTelemeCaniqUe! Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Dimensions
GV2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED)
GV2.AF4 + l.AD·31
CombInation GV2·ME + 0 range contactor Combination GV2-P + 0 range conlactor

c
c
d1
d
GV2·ME+ lC2·D09to01B LC2·025 and 032 GV2·P + LC2-D09to 018 LC2·D25 and 032
b },.4(18.,8.6j. b ':c' 6.61 (169.1) 7..9 (199:5)
3.9 (99): 4.6(116.6) 4.6 (116.8)
," 4.8 (122.3) 4.8 (1.22.3)
d1
d ,4.1 (103;8) 1.4(10.~,8)

Mounting of External Operator GV2AP01 or GV2AP02 Door Cut-out

Surface Mounting Enclosure GV2MCO'- Front Plate GV2CP21

"
(1) 4 knock-outs f()r o.~~ '11.6 mm plastic. ca.ble glands or.n 0 1.6c6rii::lUit:

GV2MPO-
----"--
GV2MP01, MP02

"
-aV2MP03
. . ,~

rler .~
§ m :lo ~~

,.~ l ""
""
"""
. If t!

GV2 , ,1
Dual Dimensions InchB:>
MP01, MP02 2.S" (71 mm) mm
MP03, MP04 2.8 '(71 mm) 3.4 " (86 mm)

51
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors IITelemeCaniquej
Dimensions
GV2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED)
Sets of Busbars GV2G445, GV2G454, GV2G472 with Terminal Block GV2G05

p
GV2G454 (0.16 x2.1 InI4,X54 mm) 8.1 In (206 mm) -2.1 In (54 mm)
GV2G445 (0.16 x 1.81n/4X45 mm) 7.0 In (17e mm) 1.8 In (45 mm)
GV2G472 (0.16 x2.8In/4 x 72 mm) 10.21n (260 mm) 2.8 In (72 mm)


No. of Taps
GV2G454
5
10.2!n (260 mm)

12.41n (314r:nm)
7. 8
14.5Iil(368mm) 16.6!n (422 mm)
.

GV2G445 8.8 In (224 mm) 10.61ri (26?rnm) 12.4 111(314 mm) 14.1 In (359mm)
GV2G472 13.1 In (332 mm) 1-5.~ I~ (404 mm) 18.7Iii(476mm} 21.6In{548mm)

Sets of Busbars with Terminal Block GV1G09 Sets of eusbars GV2G245. GV2G254, GV2G272

GV2G254 (0.08 )(2.1In/2x54 mm) 3.9 In (9S mm)


GV2G245 (0.06 x 1 ~8 Inl2 x 45 mm) 3;5111 (89 mm)
GV2G272 (0.08 x2.81n/2X 72 mm) 4.6 In (116 mm)

Set of Busbars GV2G554 Set of Busbars GV2G354

~06~
I I

Dual DimensIons In~t;;:s

52
© 2001~2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10tQ2
IITelemeCaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and. Protectors
Dimensions
GV3 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
GV3M Mountlng·on Rail AM1DE200 or AM1ED201

2xO.16
~

Xl '" ElectrIcal c)esrancEI 1 6 "/4Q rom fur IJB< !jOD V (1) Auxiliary contact blocks GV1A01 to A07
(break!ng at ISCffiIlX.) 2.0" 150 mm fcrUe '" 690 V

Mounting on Preosl_otted Mounting Plate AMi PA

AF1EM

Surface _Mounting Enclosure GV3CE01

(1\ 0 04 X Q 83' /1 X 21 rom and 0 04 X 1 fi" /1 x37 5 mmblanklng nt\lOS for cable entries
(2) 0.04 X0.83 "/1 X 21 mm and 0.08 x 1-.5" /1 x 37.5 mm blanking plugs for cable entries

Dual Dimensions Inches


mm

53
10f02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemeCaniqUe I
Dimensions
GV7 DIMENSIONS
The following table lists the maximum horsepower ratings for the GV7 manual controllers depending on
the supply Yoltage.
Maximum Horsepower Ratings
220-240 Vae 440-480 Vae 550·600 Vae
Maximum hOl"5epower rating 75 Hp (FLC=192 A) 150 Hp (FLC=180 A) 200 Hp (FLC=192A)

FLC = Full load current. The valullsllsted are for three-phase AClnductlon motors.

Motor Controllers Motor Controllers with Terminal ShIelds and Phase Barriers
GV7R GV7R + GV7AC01 + GV7AC04

(;~

IJ II
('""'"

II II

105

(1) 126 for GV7R_220 (2) Phasebarrllll"5-GV7AC04


(3) Terminal shields - GV7AC01

Safety Clearance x1 x2
Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
Painted or Insulated mBtal plate, lnsulallon or Insulatad bar oto) 1.18 (30)
Bare metal plate U:S:440V 0.20(5} 1.38 (35)
440V<U<600V 0.39 (10) 1.38 (35)
LJ ssooV
Minimum distance between 2 circuit breakers mounted side by side .
0.79 (20)
O•
1.38 (35)

Combination of GV7 and LC1F with Kit GV7ACO a I b I c


Inch (mm)
GV7R+LC1F115or
4.69 (1i9) 13.15 (334) 7.13 (181)
F150+GV7AC06
GV7R + lC1F185 + GV7AC06 4.69 (119) 13.31 (338) 7.40 (188)
GV7R + LC1F225 + GV7AC07 5.16(131} 14.09 (358) 7.40 (18B)
GV7R + LC1F265 + GV7AC07 5.12 (130) 14.33 (364) 8.46 (215)
LC1 D hardware avallabla soon.

Dual Dimensions In~~s

54
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/02
RTelemeCaniQUe I
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Dimensions
GV7 DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED)
On Panel On Two DZ5·MB201 Mounting Ralls

2x00,24 DZ5·ME5
'><'06

~[,e. J~
~<fl
1('>....
''IN
"<to-

e. 1.38
35

1 Starter n Controllers GV7R


Flush Mounting
GV7R Side by Side

::.1-';
4.25 .
1",

Combination of GV7R and LC1F with KIt GV7ACO· E H


G /2l0.28xO.39 Inch (mm)
07x10 GV7R + LC1F115+ t3V7AC06 1.73(44) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120)
GV7R-t LC1F150 +GV7AC06 1,81 (46) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120)
GV7R+ LC1F165+ GV7AC06 1.89 (48) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120)
GV7R t LC1 F225 + GV7ACO? 2.24 (57) 3.35 (55) 4.72 (120)
GV7R + LC1F265 + GV7AC07 2.36 (60) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120)
LC1D hardware available soon.

Dual Dimensions ~
mm

55
1Of02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors BTelemeCaniqUel
Dimensions
GV7 DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED)
Spreaders GV7AC03 Cabling Smooth Terminals Connectors

a (ln/mm)
O.77f19.5
GV7R.220 0.85/21.5

Direct Rotary Handle GV7AP03, GV7A04 Flush Mounting

Direct Rotary Handle, GV7AP03 or GV7AP04 GV7AP05 Front Fuse Center Enclosure Viewed from Top

.61
41 Door cutouts require a minimum
distance between the center of the
4,72 circuit breaker and the door hinge
120 point d <: 3.94 In (100 mm) + (h x 5)

Extended Rotary Handle GV7AP01, GV7APO~

60·

60·

I: 7.28 In (165 mm) minimum, 23.62 In (600 mm) maximum.


The shaft of Ihe extended rotary handle GV7AP01 or GV7AP02 must be cuI to length: I- 4.96 In (126 mm)

Dual DImensions ~
mm

56
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights ReselVed 10/02
mTe,emecaniQUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Wiring Diagrams
GV2 WIRING DIAGRAMS
GV2ME GV2P Current Limiter GV1L3

----; ~I ~I ~I L...j~I~I~1
--11> I> 1>1 YI> I> 1>1
~ ~ ~ -
Ii •~ I;;"
Front Mountmg Add-on Contact Blocks
Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts
GVAE1 GVAE11 GVAE20

~I ~I
~T,
Side Mounting Add-on Contact Blocks
Instantaneous Auxiliary Contact and Fault Signalling Contacts
GVAD0110 GVAD01D1 GVAD1010 GVA01001

~,I
~ ~I
I>
~:f
Instantaneous Auxiliary C~~tacts
~,I
I>.~ ~I ~:f
GVAN11 GVAN20 GVAM11

~'r
~;;r ¥ g~1 ~lrK
~~ -~g ~~Y;I~t:..
eM.'"
lB-~
Voltage Trips

GVAU GVAS GVAX..•

01 ~I

~. ~ ~J
Use of Fault Slgn~tIing Contact and Short-circuit Signall1ng Contact

Short-circuit
signalling

Trip
slgrlBlJ1ng

57
10/02 © 2001·2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Res8Ned
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors mTelemecanique I
Wiring Diagrams

GV3 WIRING DIAGRAMS


Motor Circuit Breakers
GV3M

Auxiliary Contact Blocks


GV3A01 GV3A02 GV3A03 GV3A05 GV3A06 GV3A07

Fault Signalling Contacts


GV3A08 GV3A09

~ ~
I>-:
Voltage Trips
GV3S.. GV30..

~ ~
GV7 WIRING DIAGRAMS
Motor controllers GV7R Add-on aUXiliary Contacts GV7AE11, GV7AB11

~~!4
l-m--i---- :r
t::: 1>1>1>
A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed 10 the front face of the starter to allow personalized
~ ~ ~ marking eocordlng to the functlon of the contact or contacts.
Electric Trips GV7AU ..• GV7AS ... GV7AD111, AD112

~
-KA1

-KA1
~

-KM1 ;;;;:

58
© 2001·2002 Schneider Electric Ali Rights Reserved 10/02
Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors
Indexed Catalog Numbers
DE1DS4091. .16 GV2SN25 .. , 15 GVAD1001 ,. 10
GK2AFQ1 13 GV2SN27 .... 15 GVAD1010 . 10
GV1F03. . 13 GV2SN33 ...... 15 GVAE1 10
GV1G02... .., 13 GV2SN34 15 GVAE11 .. 10
GV1G09.. 13 GV2SN35 15 GVAE20. .., 10
GV1G1Q. . 13 GV2SN37 15 GVAN11 .. 10
GV1K01 . 16 GV2V01 . 15 GVAN2a 10
GV1K02 .... . ..... 16 GV2V03 . 13 GVAP02S.... . .... 11
GV1K03.. 16 GV3A01 .. ,. 16 GVAP026.... ., 11
GV1L3 11 GV3A02 . 16 GVAP05S...... . .•.. 11
GV1V01 ,....... .. 16 GV3A03 . 16 GVAP056. . , 11
GV1V02 . 16 GV3A05 16 GVAP107 .. ,. . 11
GV2AF01 .. , 13 GV3A06 ..... . 16 GVAP115... ..11
GV2AF02.. ., 13 GV3A07.... .. 16 GVAP116.... . 11
GV2AF3. ~.. .. 13 GVSA08 . 16 GVAP125.,. . 11
GV2AF4.. .. 13 GV3A09. . 16 GVAP207.... 11
GV2AKQO.. . 11 GV3811 16 GVAP225... . 11
GV2AM11 10 GV3822 .. . 16 GVAP226...... .. 11
GV2APQ1 . 13 GVS8S8 16 GVAPS85.. . 11
GV2AP02 13 GV3CE01 16 GVAPS86...... . 11
GV2E01 15 GVSD11 16 GVAP415,.. .. 11
GV2E02 .. . 15 GVSD22.... 16 GVAP416 11
GV2G05..... . 13 GVSDS8 . 16 GVAP505 , 11
GV2G245. . 13 GV3ME06 " 9 .GVAX115...... .. 11
GV2G254 .•.... . 13 GVSME07 ..•..... .. 9 GVAX116... . .... 11
GV2G272 .. ,.... . 13 GV3ME08 '" 9 GVAX225, ..... , .. 11
GV2G345 . . . . . . . .. , 13 GV3ME10 ...... " . 9 GVAX226.......... 11
GV2G354. . 13 GV3ME14 ,...... .. 9 GVAXS85 11
GV2G445...... . 13 GVSME20 .. 9 GVAXS86.... 11
GV2G454 ., ... ,.. ., 13 GV3ME25 ., 9 GVAX415 11
GV2G472... .. 13 GV3ME40 ..; 9 LAgD40959 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16
GV2G554 13 GV3ME63 ,...... .. 9 LA9D92 13
GV2K011 ... ; 15 GV3ME80. .. 9 LAgE07 . 13
GV2K021 , 15 GV7A8i1 . 18 LA9LB920 ., .. 11
GV2K031 15 GV7AC01 .. 17 LAD31 13
GV2K04 ,.... . 15 GV7AC021 ..... ,... . . 17 LAD311 .. , is
GV2MC01 . 15 GV7AC022 .. .. 17 lS1D30 11
GV2MC02 . .. 15 GV7AC03 .. 17 LS1D303 11
GV2MC03 . 15 GV7AC04 .. 17 lS1D32 .. 11
GV2MEQ1 9 GV7AC05 17 LS1D323. " 11
GV2ME02 . 9 GV7AC06 . 17 LS1DT32. . .... 11
GV2ME03 9 GV7AC07 ..... 17
GV2ME04 .9 GV7AC08 .. 17
GV2ME05 9 GV7AD111 .... . ... , 19
GV2ME06 9 GV7AD112 .. ..19
GV2ME07 .... . .. 9 GV7AE11 .. 18
GV2ME08 .. 9 GV7AP01 .. 21
GV2ME10 ..... 9 GV7AP02 .. 21
GV2ME14 .. 9 GV7AP03 .. 21
GV2ME16 .,. 9 GV7AP04 .,. . ... 21
GV2ME20 9 GV7AP05 .. 21
GV2ME21 9 GV7AS055 .. 19
GV2ME22 9 GV7AS107 .. 19
GV2ME32 ,. 9 GV7AS207 ........ 19
GV2MP01 15 GV7AS387 19
GV2MP02 15 GV7AS525 .... 19
GV2MP03 " 15 GV7AU055 .. 19
GV2MP04 ..... 15 GV7AU107 .. 19
GV2N01 .. 15 GV7AU207 19
GV2P01 '" 9 GV7AU387 .. 19
GV2P02 .... . .... 9 GV7AU525 .......... .. 19
GV2P03. . .. 9 GV7RE100 ... 9
GV2P04... . ..... 9 GV7RE150 . 9
GV2P05. .,. 9 GV7RE2a ... 9
GV2P06 .... . ..... 9 GV7RE220 . 9
GV2P07. . .. 9 GV7RE25 ... 9
GV2P08 .... . .. 9 GV7RE40 .... . 9
GV2P10. . .. 9 GV7RE5a.. . .. 9
GV2P14 .........•......... 9 GV7REBO . .. 9
GV2P16. .9 GV7RS1ao '" 9
GV2P20 .... . 9 GV7RS150 .... . .. 9
GV2P21 9 GV7RS20.. . .. 9
GV2P22 " 9 GV7RS220 9
GV2P32 . . 9 GV7RS25 9
GV2SN13 .. 15 GV7RS40 . 9
GV2SN14 15 GV7RSSO .. . .. 9
GV2SN15 15 GV7RS80.. ... 9
GV2SN17 15 GV7V01 . .. 21
GV2SN23 15 GVAD0101 .. 1a
GV2SN24 .. 15 GVAD0110.. .. 10

59
05/04 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric AU Rights Reserved
mTelemeCaniqUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors

61
10/02 © 2001~20D2 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
RTelemecaniQUe I Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors

63
10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
.+, MITSUBISHI
MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
AND MAGNETIC CONTACTORS

M series
Performance with a refined new design and functional beauty

Mitsubishi motor starters are manufactured at a


factory where environmental management stan-
dard (ISO 14001) and quality system standard
(180 9001) have been officially certified.

....,.~, Gtr~
g/IO"~
14121 \
\uaC'.,J)! ~
.t ~
'" .r.."..,p<9!o:'5f
m 00
-
~~
-
ISO 9001
l ~
I/~
1m
C€
(Note) This mark indicates EC Directive Compliance.
Products with the CE mark can be used
for European destinations.
EC97J1113
SDK-D8749-2
,
i'

F
.-"":P",·
.<"
,<,

F""
t cif1&.~~subishj's standard products comply
. . Interp§'honal Standards. .,
.' Applicabiltandards: JIS, JEM, IEC, EN, VDE, BS.
Approved standards: UL, CSA, LR; BV, NK, KR, TUV
. .: "
-~
,'; : Smali-Sized Models ••-"!

-:c'
8-1\1110-1\135
Simple installation and wiring
The MS·N series contactors, starters and relays can all be installed on
a DIN rail (35mm width). The terminals of these.coils ar!3 arranged on
the contactor with simple wiring. Furthermore, the distance between
the center of the rail and the coil terminals is unifiedaf38.5mm.
(S-N10 to N21, MSO-NlOto N21 and SR-N41

..~"n:im ~3.~~ ?iPt1.;~.~!i~~~~


,',

"- ,.
':1"·~': "
" Simple iri~pecti9ns ':.,', '
..'
.• =.-""
'.:: The contactor can be inspected easily by removing the arc cover.
.';:-f,"
.;':".:'

:'.

Built-in'surge absorber
The model with built-in surge absorber for coils is obtainable as
an option.

Indication of absorber Surge absorl?er

Safe and speedy terminal functions


The models with finger protection are safer and speedier even if
the lug of a closed type eyelet (ring) terminal plate is used.
(S/SD-NOOCX,TH-NOOCX,SR/SRD-N4(CXISA)

Stronger barrier strength is improved with th~ thermoplastic mold.

Improved magnet
By using a spiral kick-out spring, the dynamic balance of the
moving parts is improved, bouncing is reduced, and the core life
is extended. Furthermore, the core movement is generally
stabilized. The efficient magnet has been achieved through
modern technology of the magnet section using a computer. The
contactor has a performance to withstand a voltage drop to 35%
with the closed contact.
Medium-and Large-Sized Models: MATCH WITH ELECTRONICA
S-N50-S-N800 CONTROL FORFACTORY AUTMEL
·~iniJJ~iJ?r.ottictiolLC.ornpatibJel~h~;wte~.~.t~~~ X>ire.i6iu-eil1SU[ge!!ab~6rb~e¥1~~ff.~J~§,~i;t~~,~g~~
An easy-to-install terminal cover, which lays importance on If the magnetic relay coil is opened and closed near an electronic
further safety and is compatible with finger protection, has been circuit malfunctioning of the electronic circuit could be induced
prepared. by a surge voltage. The UN-SA type surge absorber suppresses
the surge voltage when this coil is' opened and closed. In
addition to the general barrister
type and the CR type that lays
importance on suppressing the
induction voltage when starting,
the type with operation display
(barrister type), and the barrister
type with CR are available.

fA:ifxl'iafyrC:6nfiic't\1unitMiith;IOWfI'e~i~lIT:onta"trx~
~,-.;.

This is an auxiliary contact unit with low level contact, capable of


opening and closing the low voltage and minute current of the
'1[fi\:!'tar.c'5Io:Wci'f(fdirEH:ti~siDe""1i'f'c'11all·~e:mtb~'li'",~, ,
[f" ~:""tt~"~""'~·""'';''-'"",~~:1'1'-~","'':J..~''''''''''fi·:':'''''t''~~'''''''''B~:.\.<I:,17oi""~~''''"·'''-':''<'f'"
....~:<..,rt-~';\,O\.\h~. electronic control circuit. It can be installed with one touch onto
! u; uerdIDQtQ\le.."sa .e. y.,an ,space.,c.ans.et a IOD:;!NE'¥'"Sf..\'l the magnetic contactor or magnetic relay that opens and closes
A new extinguishing structure, which eliminates the blow off of the power of the motor, etc. The jUI1ction relay for opening and
,hot gas (arc) to the fron((direction to door of control panel) closing the low voltage and minute current is not needed so
,when the current is cutoff "has been incorporated. this unit is suitable for opening and dosing electronic i~put
circuits in programmabl~ logic controllers, etc. A compact ;"~
microswitch is used for the low lever contact, so the unit will not
Arc space{mm)
S-K malfunction due to fields and
Frame S-N
surge voltqges from the main
N50/N65 5 10
circuit current and coil of the
N80/N95 10 10
magnetic contaetor.
N125-N220 10 30
A lalb low level contact and
N300/N400 10 50
lalb standard contacrare built-
N600/N800 10 10 in, so the opening and closing
of 200VAC and 24VDC can be
In addition to improved safety, the freedom of panel design has handled with one unit
o been increased allowing space to be sayed.
~~iti'riitJ£ifIlI!jf~fii;Wi~"l1m"'~ilJiili4"!W'~
+Ztypesofinputs '
DC Electromagnet with AC The long life no-contact output type (UN-SY21, SY3l) and
Operation (Patented) contact output type (UN-SYZ2, SY32) are available.
+One touch installation
rCtiirB1>'ast~tLfu:W~J;l~R.a:w'~n{l~e:qU'lt1!Di:ents~~)\~ The UN-SY21, SY22, SY31 and SY32 types can be mounted with
'Coil power consumption has been greatly reduced so MS-N one touch onto the coil terminal. Post-installation work is easy_
Series contactors can be controlled by aimost any type of relay, +Single standalone unit
even small output relays of programmable controllers. A single unit installation type
IUN-SYll, SY12) is available for \
the S-KRll and S-N80to N400 _.
tl(~·~$1}N~1§Hlgeaf.6mlC,o]n~lWitt:~ftwfi~~~.w~~1t~41
magnetic contactor.
When switching a coil, the energy will be desipated within intemal
circuit of electromag'net

,i!:!mnfnliig'CollipletelY:,Elffi'ilh'l!if~Wti\(~!11);;'~~;'&1t{l~
DC excitation does not cause humming so operation is quiet.

',Corit'iictoffiCOils''Hav,[,'1lJJfi'a'WiCIe,:Rang'''i!'"6f;Rafin'g's1N~
__•__ ••
H . ~ ~ ' - _ ' - ' ; : _ __"'':'-'-'-_'_ ' _ "
~ ',-......:...1 ...:.._ _..........._ ._"_'_ _
' ••• -

The number of coil types has been cut by two-thirds and there is
no need to re-wire for different frequencies. The coil also
withstands large voltage drops.
Even Greater Contact Reliability
Contact reliability has been greatly improved by the bifurcated
Internal circuit of the electromagnet auxiliary moving contact

/"'----- Contact
spring
Bifurcated
/moving
Coil 'i==f~~V contact
L-.-,r-'
r- ..,.. . . . . . Stationary Bifurcated mQving
contact
contact
CONTENTS

. ····.L··

1. GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS & STARTERS Series MS-N


1.1 Conformity to International Standards 2
1.·1.1 Li~t of C€ Marked Type : : : 3
1.1.2 TUV Certified Type · : 3
1.1.3 UL Approval for U.S.A. and Canada 4.
1.1.4 Approved Marine Standards 5
1.2 Selection Guide 6
1.3 The Overview (Type designation breakdown) 8
1.3.1 Non-Reversing Types : 8'
1.3.2 .Reversing T~pe 9
1.4 Technical Data of Series SoN Contactors : : 10
1.4.1 Ratings and Characteristics 10
1.4.2 Performance DfSeries SoN ContactDrs ..: ; 12
1.4.3 MDunting Attitude Df Starters and CDntactDrs :.: 12
1.5 When Ordering .;.; : 13
1.6 Selection Table Df Contactors :•. 14
1.6.1 NDn-Reversing GDntactors Type S-NO, SO-NO 14
1.6.2 Reversing GDntactors Type S-2xNO, SD-2xNO· : 15
1.6.3 NDn-Reversing Mechanically Latched CDntactDrs Type SL-NO, SLD-NO 16
1.6.4 Reversing Mechanically Latched CDntactors Type SL-2xNO, SLD-2xNO, SLxS-N 0 17
1.7 Selection Table of Direct-on-Line Motor Starters : 18
1.7.1 NDn-Reversing MotDr Starters without Enclosure(IP 00) .. Type MSO-NO 18
1.7.2 Reversing MDtor Starters withDut Enciosure(IP 00)· Type MSO-2xNO 19
1.7.3 Enclosed NDn-Reversing MDtor Starters{lP 20)·.: Type MS-NO : 20
1.7.4 EnclDsed Non-Reversing MDtor Starters with PushbuttDn Switch(IP 20) Type MS-N 0 PM : 21
1.8 O'ptional Parts and AccessDries for Contactors : 22
1.8.1 Replacement CDiis : , 22
1.8.2 Replacement Contact Kits : 22
1.8.3 Auxiliary Contact Blocks : 23
'1.8.4 MechanicallnterlDcks : 23
1.8.5 CDnnecting Bar Kits : : : 23
1.8.6 Surge Absorbers 24
1.8.7 Terminal CDvers · · 24
1.8.8 Pheumatic Time Delay Modules 24
1.8.9 DC Interface Modules 24
1.9 . Connections and Contact'Arrangement : 25
1.9.1 S, SD-NO 25
1.9.2 S, SD-2xNO 26
1.9.3 SL, SLD-(2x)NO · 27
1.9.4 MSO-(2x)NO , 28
1.9.5 MS-NO 29
1.9.6 MS-NOPM : 29
1.10 Outline Dimensions : 30
1.10.1 Outline Dimensions of Non-Reversing ContactDrs 30
1.10.20utline Dimensions of Reversing ContactDrs 31
1.10.30utline Dimensions of Open Type Starters 32
1.10.40utline DimensiDns Df EnciDsed MotDr Starters : 33
..~-'

2. MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS


2.1 Thermal Overload Relays Series TH-N 34
2.1.1 Selection Guide of Thermal Overload Relays : :: 35
2.1.2 Selection Guide of the Current Transformers for TH·N600KP : 36
2.1.3 Technical Data 36
2.1.4 Selection Guide of Quick Trip Thermal Overload Relay : ~ 36
2.1.5 Operating Characteristics of Thermal Overload Relays : : 37
(Connecting wire size: Refer Table 2.1.2)
2.1.6 Optional Parts' and Accessories 38
2.1.7 Outlir.te Dimensions : : : 39
A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

1. GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS & STARTERS


Series MS-N
.1 Conformity to International Standards
Milsubishi magnetic motor starters and contactors are designed to conform 10 the JEC60947-4-1 InternationaJ VDE0660 Germany
relevant lEe recommendations and tp the standards of as many countries as
possible. Specifically, they conform lethe following:
Europe
EN60947·4-1 Europe

North America I UL
NEMA-ICS U.S.A

Marine
..
Tabl 11

CEMark TOV Usting Recognition U.K. France Korea Japan

Type Model Name


( E 1i:- TDV Rholnland
U.S.A
c®us
Canada

,@ 'i\I c'i\I
U.S.A
c'i\lus
Canada
~ I
• I." (i) (Jt)
® ~
Uoyd's
Register of
Shipping
Bureau
Veritas
Korean
Register of
Shipping
Nippon
Kaiji
Kyokal
S-N10!CX)
S-N11(CXlIN12 CX1
S-N1B(ClCl
a a a <>
S-N20(CXVN21 CX
S-N2srclCl • " " '"
(,@
S-N3S!CXl
S-N2BIClCl
(*2)
" (
®
Mark ) Mark )
-

•..
S-N3BICX!
S-N4B CX! . - -
S-N5D
~C·Operated S·N65
Contaclar S-NBD "
S-N95
S-N125
S-N150 • .. @
a a
a lO.

S-N1BD
S-N22D
S-N30D
S-N40D
S..,.N60D
S-NBDD
- -
TH-N12 CX)KP
a
""
TH-N1B(CX)KP a 0

Overload
Relay
TH-N20[fAl(CXlKP
TH-N6U[fA)KP
TH-N120[fA)KP
.,
(*2)

. . <> @

a
- -
TH-N22DRHKP!HZKP
a 0
TH-N40DRHKP1HZKP
SO-Nl1(CXVN12(CX)
SO-N21(CX) •
(*2)
., " '"
(@Mark) (.@Mark)
0
a a
SO-N3S(CX)
SD-N5D
SO-N65
SD-NBD
DC Operated
Contactor
SD·N95
SD-N125
SD~N150
@

• . " a a
- <>

SD-N220
SD-N300
SD~N40D
SD~N600.
SD·NaDD
- - - - -
AC Operated
Contactor SR-N4(CX) • " " a a - -
Relay " (*2) '" " (@Mark) (,@Mark)

OCOperaled
Contactor
Relay
SRO-N4(CX)
" •
(*2)
<> O· "
(@Mark) (,@Mark)
<>
a a - -
UN-AX2(CX)
a
Auxiliary
UN-AX4(CX)
<>
(*2) " " "
(@Mark) (.@Mark) " a a
- -
Contact Block UN-AXl1(CX)
UN-AXBO
UN-AX1S0
a - - a - a a
Notes:1. © .. CE Mark (Manufacturer's Declaration) == Standard model applicable, marking on the product.
UL =.= Standard model applicable, marking on the product.
NK == Standard model applicable, Certificate No. on the product.
• .. Standard model applicable, no marking on the product. If marking required, order model name followed by suffix "DZ".
o . Standard model applicable, no marking on the product.
t:r .. Special model applicable, marking on the product. Order model name followed by suffix" UL ".
-.; Not applicable to the Standard or not approved.
2. Finger protection type is certified according to DiN VDE 0106 part 100. For finger protection type, order mode/name followed by suffix "ex".
3. For each certificate conditions, see next three pages.

2
1.1.1 List of
Standard-Contactor5"-.
CEMarked Type
A.p. operated ... · '"
CE
S-N10, S-N11, S-N12, S-N18, S-N20, S-N21 , S-N25, S-N28, S-N35. S-N3B, S-N48. S-NSO, S-N65, S-N80,
Table 1.1.1

Non-reversln-g .~- .;,T"_":~' :--:--.'.:- .~: ,.:1:. ;:"':~.:'~>.:'. S-N95, S-N125, S-N150, S-N1BO, S-N22D, 8-N3DO, S-N400, S-N60D, S-NBOO
~::. (~~;:~\;:~';~':~:i./~=::::'.;:_ .O-:-C:-'ope;t;d-~~~d -SO-N11. S[).N1i; S-D-N21:SD-N35. SO:-N50:-S0-N65. SD-:NBO~ SO-N95,SO-N125.SD-N150,-SO-N220,- - -
.::/~~t~~~·~t-S::!.t~;;r::<' ~,~~}.~¥;;:~~~~;j,*:';~;~~', 3D-N3DO, SD·N400. SD-N6DO, SD-NaOO

~i:~{!t~~·~~~~;.f~~~~~~.~ :~~~Z::~~~O:~K~~~~~::~~~~D~O:KP.·TH-N120KPI TH·N120TAKP, TH-N220RHKP,

.:r~~0~~~~~!_~~~~~1~~~.p;~~t~~~~?~~~~~· -~~;4 --.- -----------------~ --------------------


D.G: In!.erfac~ CoJ$,Ctots\ NO!!'~reversinft:'-'>:V!)~_ So-M11. SD·M12. SD-M19 '
-
,~'~::i':~:-;:~?:~Y;'~f'~"~~~, 'R~vertin9:~:~~iB:f,7.· SO-MR12, SO:-MR19 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Notes:1. Listed types /2.Te representatives and containes standard models. 3. For mechanical interlocks,
2.. Applicable product s t a n d a r d s ' no marking on the product.
Contactors . EN60947-1. EN60947-4-1. EN60947-5-1 Mechanicol interlocks are applicable
Thermal overload relays EN60947-1. EN60947-4-1. EN60947-5-1 when used in reversing contactors_
Aux. contact blocks EN60947-1. EN60947-5-1
. Mechanical interlocks EN60947-1. EN60947-4-1. EN60947-5-1

1.1.2 TOV Certified Type


El Contactor
TOv Rheolnland
-
. (1)
Table 112 n Overload Relay Table 1 12 (2)
Model Name Applicable standard Certificate No. Model Name Applicable standard Registration No.
$oN10(CX)(SA) TH-N12(CX)KP EN60947-4-1 J955133B
S-N11 (CX)(SA) EN60947-4-1 R9551340 TH-N18(CX)KP EN60947-4-1 J955133B
$oN12(CX)(SA) TH-N20(TA)(CX)KP EN60947-4-1 J9551341
S-N20(CX)(SA) TH-N60(TA)KP EN60947-4-1 J9851140
EN60947-4-1 R9551336
S-N21 (CX)(SA) TH-N120(TA)KP EN60947-4-1 J9851168
S-N25(CX)(SA) . TH-N220RHKPIHZKP EN60947~4-1 J9851166
EN60947-4-1 R9651190
S-N35(CX)(SA) TH-N400RHKPIHZKP EN6D947-4-1 J9851172
$oN18(CX)(SA)
S-N28(CX)(SA)
EN60947-4-1 ,R96511B9 F. Contactor Relay Table 1.12 (3)
S-N38(CX)(SA)
S-N48(CX)(SA)
S-N501S-N65 EN60947-4-1 A9851170 SR-N4(CX)(SA) EN60947-5-1 R95S1339

EN60947-4-1 R9851138 SRD-N4(CX)(SA) EN60947-5-1 R9551339


S-NBO!S-N95
S-N125 EN60947-4-1 R9851169
S-N150 EN60947-4-1 R9851167
Iili1 Auxiliary Contact Block Table 1 1.2 (4)
S-N1801S-N220 EN6D947·4-1 A9B51164
,. " . ,Model Name'::,", .. , Applicable"standard " , Registration No•
S-N3DDlS-N40D EN6D947-4-1 R9851171
UN-AX2(CX)
SD-N11 (CX)(SA)
EN6D947-4-1 R9551340 UN-AX4(CX) EN60947-5 1 A
J9551337
SD-N12(CX)(SA)
A9551336 UN-AX11 (CX)
SD-N21 (CX)(SA) EN60947-4-1
R965119D UN·AXBO
SD-N35(CX)(SA) EN60947-4-1 EN6D947 5-1
A
R9851225
R9851170 UN·AX15D
SD-N501SD-N65 EN60947-4-1
SD-N8O!SD-N95 EN60947-4-1 R9851138
SD-N125 EN60947-4-1 R9851169
SD-N150 EN60947-4-1 R9851157
SD·N220 EN60947-4-1 R9851164
SD-N300/SD-N400 EN60947-4-1 R9851171

Notes:}. Standard models are applicable underfollowing conditions.


Main circuits : AC·3 rated current at440V AC max.
(Main contacts) and rated continuous current.
Auxiliary contacts AC-15 rated current at 550V AC max.
and rated continuous current.
Operation coil AC coil designation
NlO-N35. N18-N48 and SR-N4; AC12V-AC380V
N50-N150.. AC24V-AC400V
N180-N400.. AC48V-AC400V
DC coil designation DC12V-DC220V
2. Standard models are with no TOV mark on the product. ..
For contQctors and contactor relays, order model name followed by suffix "DZ" ijTUV mQrk on the product is required.
3. Finger protection type is certified according to DIN VDE 0106 part 100. For finger protection type. order model name fallowed by
suffIX .. ex".
4. Models with builtAin surge absorber (model name followed by "SA ") are also certified.
3
1.1.3 UL Approval for U.S.A. and Canada
c@us c'i\lus
o Contactor and Motor Starter Table 1 1.3 (1)

Mark ®.
_c .L us c1.i\Ius
Model Name s.Nl0(CX) ~1I1Cl1 ~N1B[CX) s.N20(CX) ~N25(ClI) S~}lI35{GlI) S(DrNSO SlOrNSS S(DrNBO S(D)·NS5 S(D)·Nl25 S(D)·N1SO 8-N180 S(D)-N220 S(D)-N300 S(DrN'DO S·N6DD S-NBOOC
SIO}lII2{CX} S~}N2I{CX)

13 2D 3D 30 3S 4D 8D 95 lDD lDD 125 150 22D 22D 3DD 4DD 6BO 91D
Conla· CtlOOnuous curren! A
clor .pen
(open) HOISepoY/I!flilling
- - -
--
,~Ie plose 120YHP 1/2 1/2 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 7-1/2 lD 15 15 15
241lVHP 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 3 3 5 7-112 lD 15 15 20 25 3D 4D - - -
Three~e 21lIIYHP 3 .3 5 5 7-1/2 lD 15 • 15 20 25 4D 4D 60 6D lDD 125 150 . 25D
240YHP 3 3 5 5 7·1/2 10 15 2D 25 30 40 5D 60 75 lDO 150 2DO 300
.400VNP 5 7-1/2 lD lD 15 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 75 lDD 125 15D 2DO 300 400 6DD
SOO'/HP 5. 7-1/2 lD lD 15 2D 3D 4D 50 6D 75 lDD 125 15D 2DD 3DD 40D 6DD

-
Mark c'.i\lus -
Model Name MaD- MSD- Mao MSD- MSD- MSD- MSO· Moo- MSa- MSO· MSa: MSO- MSO- MSO· MSO- MSO·
NIOKl1ClI) NlIKPjGlI) N18KPjClI) N20KPlgj N25KP(ClI) N:l5KP(CX) N50KP N6SKP NBOKP N95KP Nl25KP Nl&JKP N1BDKP N220KP N40DKP - -
Nl00'[CX) N2IKP(
Starter
(open) CooIiooous cunenI A 10 13 lB 18 26 34 50 65 8D lDD 125 150 180 22D 30D 40D
HD15epower IalRJ .
Three pbase 208V liP 3 3 5 5 7·1/2 lD 15 15 2D 25 40 4D 6D 60 100 125 - -
240VHP 3 3 5 5 7·1/2 lD 15 20 25 30 4D 50 6D 75 lDO 150 - -
40WHP 5 7·112 lD 10 15 20 30 4D 50 60 75 lDO 125 15D 200 300 -- -
600YHP 5 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 300 -
Max. rating of sholt
circuli protection device
Fuse class K5 A 3D 30 70 70 100 125 250 250 300 225 350 350 500 500 600' 5002 800 3 120[)3
Circuit breaker A - - - - 100 125 - - 300 225 350 350 500 500 6DO 1000 - -
Noles: 1. UL listed types for S-N50 10 S-N800, SD-N50 co SD-N400 alld MSO·N50KP 10 N400KP require suffix letters" UL" (eg. S-N65UL).
2. Time delay fuse
3. Class Lfuse
4. UL recogJlized type is model S-NBOOUR.
5. S-NlO(CX) 10 S-N35(CX) Cllld SD-NIl(CX) 10 SD-N35(CX); Mark Oil Ihe producl is @.@.
MSO-NlOKP(CX) to N35KP(CX); COlllmlor= @-® ' OLR= 1i\I c1i\I.
MSO-N50KP loN400KP; Contaclor=,1i\Ius, OLR=c1i\Ius. .

I!!il Contactor Relay and


o Thermal Overload Relay c'i\lus Table 1 1.3 (2)
Auxiliary Contact Block
Table 1.1.3 (3)

TH-N12(CX)KP'" D.I2A(D.l·-(l.16),O.17(0.14-0.22),0.24A(0.2-0.32), Rated/CGDD


·trtd~fZ~~~\·I.:·;·~:~~.:~;·~:~·. ~a?~~~~·~ff~~~~
TH·N12(CX)" 0.3SA(D.2B-0.42I,O.5A(0.4-0.6),O.7A(0.55-D.85).0.SA(0.7-1.11, Code' AC600Vmax Contactor. Rated Rated
TH-N12HZKPUL*, * 1.3A(1-1.6},l.7A{1.4-2},tlAll.7-2.S);2.SA(2-3),3.6A(2.B-4.4}, Relay
Code; Code;
TH-Nl2HZUL*l * SA(4-6},6.6A(S.2-8),9A(7-11),11A(9-13} @-® ABOD R3DD
TH·NlaKP'" 1.3A(1-1.6},1.7(1.4-2),2.1A(1.7-2.S}.2.5A(2-3},3.6A(2.B-4.4}, S-N1 a SR(D)-N4
TH-Nl B'" 5A(4-6),6.6A(S.2-B},9A(7-11 },11 A(9-13),15A(12-1 B) - - ' - - - - - j AC600V max DC250V max
0.24A(0.2-o.32),O~SA(D28-0.42I,O.SA(0.4-0.6), 5-N20 Auxiliary
Make Make
TH·N20KP 0.7A(O.5S-D.BS),D.SA(O.7-1.11,1.3A(1-1.6},l.7A(1.4-2}. S-N21 Contact
TH-N2D 2.1AI1.7-2.5I,2.5A(2-3),3.6A(2.B-4.4I.5A(4-6),6.6A(S.2-81. S·N25 Block 7200VA 2SVA
9A(7-11),11A(9-13),15A(12-1B) . 5-N35 Break Break
TH·N20TAKPu 22A(18-26) S-N25,N3S
@-® 720VA 2sVA
TH·N20TA..:r 29A(24-34} S-N35 UN-AX2(CX)
UN-AX4(CX)
lSA(12-1 B),22A(18-261,29A(24-34PSA{3D-401,42A(34-50} ~NSO~55~"~95 Raled/B600 UN-AX11 (CX)
TH-N60KP ~""~~=-==""-===-==:':"':::!...-F""':':7.':?':::'1
_ _ _ _ _ _-f5"4"'A7.(4::;3'--6~5;;-)_ _- ---_-+,,S."'N6;:;S,N,,8~0,Nl5=__j Code AC6DOVmax - - - - -
TH·N60TAKPtT
67A(54-BO) S-NaO,N95
~B;;;2A'i:(;:;.6i-5--;1C;;0;;;0):-----------+'~S"_N"'9'O'5"'--1 Make 3600VA(30A max)
'iU
UN-AXBD
UN-AX150
_T~HC"N:'21~20~K::::P t4;;2A:?'(3"4~-5":0;!;),,,,54,,A:1(4~3~-~55:l)~'6~7A3(,"54c:-::;.aO~)~,8~2A~(~6oc5-:cl~0~0)+~S.~N~12O'S,~Nl~SO~Break 3S0YA(3A max}
105A(a5-125) S-N12S.Nl5D
TH·N120TAKPtr
125A(10D-15D) S-N150
TH·N220RHKP", B2A(6S-! 001,1OSA(BS-1251, l25A(l oo-ISD),150A(120-1 aO} S·Nl BD,N220
TH·N22DHZKP* laOA(140-220) S-N220
TH-N400RHKPtT 105A(85-12~, l25A(IOO lS0),lSOA(12o-1B~,lBOA(110-220),25IlA(20o-300) 5·N3oo,N400
TH·N4DDHZKP* 330A(260-4DO) S·N400

Notes: 1. 1:r is to be coupled with contaclor and can not be mouJ1led separately from contaclar. * is only for separate mounting.
2. SuffIX UKP" ,. Qverload and phasefailuTe protection type with three heater elements.
3. *1;@.@
4. TH-N12(CX)(KP) 10 TH-N20TA(KP); 'it); c'ii\I
5. TH-N12(HZJ, N18 and N20(TA) are approved for single phase motors.

4
·1.1.4 Approved Marine Standards
Wi Lloyd's Register of Shipping (LR) ~
~ Bureau Veritas (BV) I - - - (1)
Table 114
~-\:T-ype .J,: .
:::.,,-;"".:~
~-: - ",:- . :j\~.'fJ;~ ::~'::- .ModelName "..: .~~;~:?~~;-~{ ;~ ;,-~V.:~rtificate N9;·:~;;· ;:;.;.."LA Certificat"e" No: . .:::.~~:~-·i~~:·: Nole 'C;"!':':·
8-Nl0, Nll,N12,N20, N21(CX) 2634/6139 95110008
SO-NIl, N12, N21(CX)(SA) 2634/6987 96/10035 Ae-3 ..
S-NI8, N25, N28, N35(CX)(SA)/SO-N35(CX)(SA) 2634/898B 96/10034 Maximum 55DV
Contactor
SlSO-N50, N65,NBO, N95 2834U07905 98/10016 Standard model
SlSO-NI25, NI50, N220, N300, N400, S-N180 2634U07905 96/10018 can ~e appned.
. SlSO-N800, N800 2634U07905 98/10018
TH-NI2(KP), N20(KP) 263416139 95110009
Maximum 550V
TH-NI8(CX)(KP), N20TA(CX)(KP) 2634/8988 .96/10033
Thermal Overload Relay Standard model
TH-N6O(KP), N60TA{KPJ, NI2D(KPJ, NI2DTA(KP), N22DIKPJ, N40O(KP) 2634U07905 98110017
can be applied.
TH-N600(KP) 26341107905 98/10017
SR-N4(CX) 2634/6139 95110010 Ae-15
Contactor Relay·
SRO-N4(CX) 2634/6987 96110035 Maximum 550V
UN-AX2, AX4, AXll{CX) 2634/6139 95110010 Standard model
Auxiliary C~ntact Block can be applied.
UN·AXBO. AX150, AXSOO 26341107905 98110016
--

~ Korean Register of Shipping (KR) @ -.


Table 1 1 4 (2)

Contaetor Model Name Certificate No. Contactor Model Name Certificate No. Contactor Model Name Certificale No.
S-Nl0(CX) KOB02571-EL020 S-N21 (CX) KOB02571-EL024 S-N95 KOB02571-EL028
- S-N25(CX)(SA) KOB02571~El025 S-NI25 ' KOB02571~EL02B

S-Nll (CX) KOB02571-EL021 S-N35{CX){SA) KOB02571-EL026 S-N150 KOB02571·EL02B


S-NI2(CX) KOB02571-EL022 S-N50 KOB02571~~L028 S~N220 . KOB02571·EL028
8-NI8(CX)(SA) KOB02571-EL027 S-N65 KOB02571·EL028 S-N300 KOB02571-EL026
S-N20(CX) KOB02571-EL023 S-N80 KOB02571·EL028 S-N400 K0802571:EL028

Note: 1. Standard mode:ls are applicable. (Ae3 Max. 440Vacco:ding to JEM standard.)

Jlijj Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK) @ ..


Table 1 14(3)
: f;·.>"-Contactor Modei Name·["··:;'~~· ··Certlficate No..' .~~. : .Corit.actor Moder Na;~e-:c~ .,- .:; .Cer1!ficate.·f:'Jo;·;' Contactor Model Name' Certificate. N0.:..;
S-Nl0(CX) - 94T415 S-N125 SD-N125 98T407 SL(O)-N21NK 95T401
S-KRll - 85T405 S-N150 SD-N150 98T408 SL(O)-N35NK . 96T401
S-Nll (CX) SO-Nl1(CX) 94T418 S~N180 98T409 SL(O)-N50NK 98T413
S-NI2{CX) SO-N12(CX) 94T417 S-N220 SD-N220 981410 SL(O)-N65NK 98T414
S-N18(CX)(SA) - 95T404 S-N30D SD-N300 981411 SL(O)-N80NK . 98T415
S-N20(CX) - 94T418 S-N400 SD-N400 96T412 SL(O)-N95NK 96T416
S-N21(CX) SO-N21(CX) 94T419 S-N600 SD-N600 85T406 SL(O)-NI25NK . 98T417
S-N25(CX)(SA) - 95T402 S-N800 SO-N800 851407 SL(O)-NI50NK 98T416
S-N35(CX)(SA) SO-N35ICXHSA) 9ST403 19ST401 S-N38(CX)(SA) - 96T402 SL(O)-N220NK .
98T419
S-N50 SD·N50 98T403 S-N48(CX)(SA) 96T403 SL(O)-N300NK 98T420
S-N85 SD-NBS 98T404 B-N20 BO-N20 95T404 SL(O)-N400NK 98T421
S-N80 SO-N80 98T405 B-AS5 BD-ABS 81T420 SL(O)-N600NK 851408
S-N9S SO-NBS 98T406 B-Al00 BO-Al00 61T421 SL(O)-N800NK 65T409

Note: 1. Standard models are applicable. (AC] Max. 440Vaccording to J~M standard.)

5
1.2 Selection Guide

S-N11 S-2xN11 MSO-N12 S-N21 MSO-N35


3.5(4-112) 3_5(4-112) 4.5(6) 5.5(7-1/2) 5.5(7-112) 7.5(10) 11(15)
5.5(7-112) 5.5(7-112) 7.5(10) 11(15) 11(15) 15(20) lB.5(25)
5.5(7-112) 5.5(7-112) 7.5(10) 11(15) 11(15) 15(20) lB.5(25)
5.5(7-112) 5.5(7-112) 7_5(10) 7.5(10) 7.5(10) 11(15) 15(20)
20 20 25 32 32 50 50
lNO 1NO+1NC .J 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC
lNC 2ND 2ND

:~~;~~;·~;,~~;11~.r~::~~::~;:.::;..t::~~~·~::o':::,,;~:;:I~"~~"':;~':+---:~'--l---:;---j---;--t--.-+--:;---+---:c--t---::--+--.:;-----j
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
:~~~a:.;.ntact ~ fCl.o~W:':le~ve~i.s~igneJ~(~fron~~+-"":'_-+-----'--1I---'--+---'----+--'---+_"":'---1--~-+--~-...j
[lND+1NC
, '" (+SIanderd INO+ lNe)]

Notes 1: Number ofauxiliary contact shows thatfoT non-revers.ing type. Twice althe auxiliary contacts are provided on reversing type.
2: (2NO + 2NC) X 2 auxiliary contacts are provided on r.eversing type and no additional contact can pe mounted.
3: Front clip-on and side clip-on block should not be mounted both.

Contactors
AC operated models
I Non-reversing S-Nl0(CX) S-Nl1(CX) S-N12(CX) S-N1B(CX) S-N20(CX) , S-N21 (CX). S-N25(CX) S·N35(CX)
;' I Reversing· S-2xNl0(CX) S·2xNl1(CX) S-2xN1B(Cl<) S-2xN20(CX) S-2xN21(CX) S-2xN25(CX) 5-2XxN35(CX)
DC operated models. ...,.... .._.":"._.
~~ -," ..~. ,.. "
.,;.; ..
SD-N11(CX) SD-N12(CX) " , .... .:.--:..i, . .:-.!,r::.~: :SD-N21(CX) r~';'".:+(:,~, .. SD'J:l35(c;X)
~

Staters (AC operated)


MS-N11 MS-N12 MS-N20 M5-N21 MS-N25 MS-N35
: (KP) :' -{KPf '·, . N~~¥~~j :f):\iKP)~t~i tf..~(i<p:):}·'{;. ;··f.~r(KPf~( _~)i~~;{~pj(~~~'·
MSO-N11 Mso-N12 MSO:N18 MSO-N20 MSO-N21 MSO~N25- MSO-N;3S;·
".(KP)(CX)· ',' (KP)(CX) {(KPiicx)-,: ;' iKPj(CXj'~ 7iKPj(cxjT '.:(KP)(cJij\':t"j{pj{cii)'f·
,
it
Thermal Overload Relays l
Three heater type with:
. TH:Nl BKP(CX)
pha~e fajJur~ p~te·etion . .-.... . .,,~~: ... ,
Two heater type . TH-N12(CX) '" ' "TH'N20(CX) . "-, , lj+N20'rA(CX'r::, '

Healer setting range. -A 0.1-0.15(0.12A) 1.7-2.5(2.1A) 1-1.5(1.3A) 0.2-0.32(0.24A) 2-3(2.5A) lB-26(22A)


(Ordering designation) 0.14-0.22(0.17A) 2-3(2.5A) 1.4-2(1.7A) 0.2B-OA2(0.35A) , 2.8-4.4(3.6A) 24-34(2SA)
0.2-0.32(0.24A) 2.B-4A(3.BA) 1.7-2.5(2.1 A) OA-O.6(0.5A) 4-5(5A) 30-40(35A)'
0.28-0.42(0.35A) 4-B(5A) 2-3(2.5A) 0.55-0.85(0.7A) 5.2-B(6.6A)
0.4--0.6(0.5A) 5.2-8(B.5A) 2.B-4A(3.5A) 0.7-1.1(0.SA) 7-11 (9A)
0.55-0.B5(0.7A) 7-11(SA) 4-6(5A) 1-1.B(1.3A) 9-13(11A)
0.7-1.1(0.SA) 9-13(11A)' 5.2-B(6.6A) 1.4-2(1.7A) 12-18(15A)
1-1.5(1.3A) 7-11(9A) 1.7-2.5(2.1 A) 16-22(19A)3
1.4-2(1.7A) S-13(11A)
12-18(15A)

Notes 1: Saturable reactorsfor thennal overload relays are available as a kit or equipped with the relay. The suffix "SR" following the
mode/name of the relay indicates "with sawrable reactor", (ex. TH-N20KPSR*5A) (Exceplfor type TH-N12KP, TH-NI8 and TH-N18KP)
2: Except for size NIO. 3. For size N20 ~ N21 only. 4. For size N35 only.
6
S-NG5 S-N125 S-N400 S-NBOO
Table 1.2.1
15(20) 18.5(25) 22(30) 30(40) 37(50) 45(80) 55(75) 75(100) 90(125) 125(170) 190(250) 220(300)
22(30) 30(40) 45(60) 55(75) , 60(80) 75(100) 90(125) 132(180) '60(210) 220(300) 330(450) 440(600)
25(30) 37(40) 45(60) 55(75) 60(80) 90(125) 110(150) 132(1BO) 160(210) 225(330) 330(450) 500(670)
22(30) 30(40) 45(60) 55(75) 60(80) 90(125) 110(150) 132(180) 200(270) 250(330) 330(450) 500(670)
80 100 135 ,150 150 200 260 . 260 350 450 800 1000
2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2N0+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2N0+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC
- '. -
....• -
- - - - - - - - - -
-
- . - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - -
1 1 - - - - - - 1 1.

- - -

S·N50(CX) S·N65(CXj S'NBD S-N95 8-N125 S-N150 5-N18D S-N220 S-N30Q S-N400 S-N600 S-NBOn
S-2xNSO(CX) S-2xN65ICXj S-2xN80 'S-2xN95 S-2xN125 S·2xN150 5-2xN180 S-2xN22D S-2xN300 S-2xN400 S-2xN60Q S-2xNBOO
. SD-NSD· .. SD-N6S SO-NBD 'So-N95 SD-N125 SD-N1S0 - SD-N220 SD-N300' SD-N400 SO-N600 SD-NBOO

, MS-N30D' M$-N4QO'
'(kP!"'! (KP)
.~~9:tl50..,. ~§.o:l'J6~" ,.!I',1~;!!,~~ . ~~~.9.~.tt!}~, MSO-N125 MSD-N150 .N1S9-li~80 ~S9.:-N?~O -MSO-N300. MSO-N400
:(I<pj(CXj' ,"(KP>(CX), ,(KP) ':'T(KP)""!KP{'<"')(kPi I " (KP) - (KP) '(KPj""" (KP)
,
','

TH·N120KP TH~N120TAKP TH·N220RHKP TH·N400RHKP TH-N600Kp9

TH-N60(CX) ',TH·N60TA, TH·N120TA TH·N220RH TH-N6009

12-1BI15A) 54-80 (67A) 34-50 (42A) 85-125 (105A) 65-' 00 (82A) 85-125 1105A) 200-300(250A)
'8-26{22A) 65-' 00(82A)' 43-65 (54A) 100-150(125A)6 85-'25 (10BA) 100-'50(125A) 260-400(330A)
24-34(29A) 85-105(95A)' 54-80 (67A) 'OO-'50(125A) 120-1 BO(150A) 400-600(500A)
30-40{35A) 65-1 DO(B2A) 120-1BO(150A)' 140-220{180A) 520_BOO(66DA)10
34-50(42A) 140-220(1BOA}7 200-300(250A)
43-6S154A) 170-250(21 DAy 26D-400{330A}8

5. For size N95 only. 6. For size N150 only. 7. For size N220 only. 8. For size N400 only.
9. TH-N600(KP) must be ,/Sed with the currenttransfonners (to be supplied by the customer.) See Table 2.1.2.
10. For size N800 only.

7
1.3 The Overview (Type designation breakdown)
1.3.1 Non-Reversing Types
Table 1.3.1

, Attachable Provided as a standard


Attachable
1 Mechanical interlock unit Attachable

~ . AC operated S-D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E'c
o DC operated" SD-D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"0
Q)

S-DCX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8- Anger protected
SD-DCX 0 0 0 0
Mechanically latctied SL(D)-D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AC operated MSD-D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DC operated MSOD-D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
With phase.failure protection' MSO-DKP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
U'J m Sll?~triplype.,· <•• : " , .
ffi 0 with s~tur~le 'reactor' . MSO-DSR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~ :~- .Q~!~.~:~~P'.~~':~ :':<>;'~Jr;;t}~~J~~~:~~::/~~~£~;~i'i!;
F- 'l'. 'wlttr2"heater- elements"'-.l.-,·'-'·-· .. ~ ..: MSO~OFS' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~ ~ _pfTa~e:iajiUre :pF6i~.c#jqn:~·t~~~fMS~Q.~~::­ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-g ~ Sta~dardtyp~ >:·-i':';:-:;~i .... <·.M$~PJ:2::': 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
'~i :8~ ":With~ puSh DLiftoii:~~~2'~;' ":·~·:MS-E1PM~~.' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ill ~ wrtJ:l phase failur~. protection.. ' MS-Df:(P: . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DIN rail mounting ;::.,:~ -".. ':.:'.< Available

Notes: 1. Additional head-on type aux. contact blocks cannot be attached to the enclosed type, mechanically latched type ofsize N50 & N65.
2. Surge absorber is provided as a standard on ac operated contactors and starters ofsizes N50 to N8DD.

8
1.3.2 Reversing Type
Table 1.3.2.

30 37 45 55 75 90 125 190 220

55 60 75 90 132 160 220 330 440

o o o 0 o 0 o 0 o
o o o 0 000 o
DC operated "MSOD-D 0 0 0 0 0 o o o 0 o 0 o
ffi With phase failure protection' MSO-oKP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o 0 000 o
(J) 0 Slpw.lrjp.type. _..
~ with ~aturable reactor MSO.QSR o o o o o o o o o o o 0 o 0 0 0
~ ~ QUick·trip type
CI)!!= wllh 2 heater elemenls' M$().OFS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"1:"~~~llh~J:h~a::~,:'
_r .:.:·f~"'~·lu~r=.J:p~ro~le::C~r::lo~n,-._-,-_~M~S:::lJ.O~:::K::FC-J~0'4,-O::-t-=:=-;I--:0:-t_O=-+-"0:-1I--:0:-t":O:::'-j-.:0:-1I--:0:-t~:...j.":::+':::+':::+=-+-==-t-=::..j-=:...j.-=:..j
3 Standard type
D MS-o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0
",,-~f-~:;:Wi=.it)1"·p~.h".!'S"-"~-':-.faJ::. ·"'u,...·re'-·p':"ro-:t"ec':".f,·i>".~~::-~,7··':"·":""C-:M::S=-.Q=K::P,-t-':O::-l-O::::'-f-'='--t-o:::-'f-::o'-tc.;o:-t-o:::'-t-:O:-t":o::-11--:0'-t":o::-11--:0'-tC-:o:-t-=o'-t-"o:-t~'+"::'+=-i-==-J
'pIN ,:.;, ;iibu"t'ng:.·;.·':;':·.: 'J., ·:te':':'.:" ..';:." ." .•,-;',•..,.... Available'

Notes: 1. Additional head-on type aux. contact blocks cannot be attached to the enclos~d type, mechanically latched type of~ize N50 & N65.
2. Surge absorber isprovided as a standard on ac operated contactors and starters sizes 2xN50 to 2xN800. oj
3. Remove a mounting plate for DIN rail mounting ofsizes 2xN25 to 2xN65.

q
1.4 Technical Data of Series S-N Contactors
1.4.1 Ratings and Characteristics

Ratedcontii1uouscurrent.:',;··· .... : ;.".' Jth A:.. 20 20 25 32 32 50 60 80 100

7.5(20) 7.5(20) 9.5(25) 12(32) 12(32) 18(50) 20(60) 30(80) 35(100)


7(11) 8.5(13) 13(20) '20(32) 20(32) 30(50) 35(60) 50(80) 65(100)
781 9.5(11 13f16 25(321 25(321 40f501 5060 65(801 85(100)
7(6) 8(8) 11(10) 30(32) 30(32) 50(50) 60(60) 80(80) 100(100)

11 13 18 22 22 30 40 55 65
9 12 16 22 22 30 40 50 65
7 9 13 17 17 24 32 38 60
5 7 9 9 9 12 17 26 38

0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5


1.1 1.5 2.2 3.7 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5 11
1.1 1.5 2.2 3.7 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5 11
1.1 1.5 2.2 3.7 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5 11
Max. current for AC-4 duty at MaV A , 6 9 9 13 13 17 24 32 47
Rated current for DC non-inductive loads
CategDlY DC-1 . 10 12
--;,4;;8'i'V;-_ _t-7A_ _+___'~;-_~ __-::':;-__;;;;-__
12 20 ~i_----,:;;---"*,'--~-';2:--_~_
20 25 35 50 65
100 operationslhour max. --,:'",'O"V';-_ _+A'C--_ _ 8 12 I--::-__-;';:__---:c:-__-;:;;--__
12 20 7.:'-__::::-__
20 25 -:7---'-_-"O'__--':=-_
35 50 65
500,000operatio.ns 220V A 8 12 12 20 20 22 30 40 50

f3ated Current for DC motors


Category DC-3 & DC-5 48V A 6 10 10 20 20 25 30 35 40
100 operationslhour max. 11QV A 4 8 8 15 15 20 20 30 35
5DO,ODOoperations 220V A 2 4 4 B B 10 10 12 15

~~:;-, :.'" .•.. ,.;-.

2;2 3 4 5.5 5.5 8.5 12 20 20


3.3 4 6 10 10 14 20 40 40
4 5 6 10 10 14 20 30 35
3.3 4.5 5.5 10 10 14 20 30 40
Rated insulation voltage V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
.

--
Making & breaking· -,
3-ph, cos8=0.35 A 1101110 1301120 180/180 2201220 220/220 3001300 400/400 550/460 650/620
240V/440V' Breaking current A 10Df72 120/100 180/130 220/220 220/220 300/240 4001320 550/460 650/620
CategoN AC-l 1,800 1,BOO 1,800 1.800 1,800 1,800 l,BOO 1,200 1.200
.;- . Galegory AC2 &. AC-3 1,800 1,800 1,800 1.800 1,800 1,B00 1,BOO 1,200 1,200
Category AC-4 660 660 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Operating time {?t rat't.9 cqil voltage}
AC operated Closing ms 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 25 25
Opening ms 10 . 10 10 10 10 10 10 53 53
DC operated Closing ms 45 33 50 57 57
Opening InS 10 12 13 15 15
Coil consumption (at rated coil voltage)
AC operated -',;'In:''",;s:,h;-_+:;;VA;;:-._+-:6:;o_ _-:;6,,o_ _~60i_--9;:0:--_---'9,,0'---'1;';'0"_--:~--~'---'3~-
110 132 132
Sealed VA 10 10 10 15 15 13 13 17 17
Watts W 3.5 3.5 3.5 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 2.8 2.8
DC operated Inrush VA 7 16 18 24 24
Sealed 'VA 7 16 ,8 24 24
Coil voltage tolerance 0.B5 to 1.1 times rated coil voltage
Mechanical endurance (makelbreak operations) million 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5
Permissible ambient temperature 'C -2510 +55
Vibration (10-55 Hertz) mis' 19.6
Shock (10 ms half sine wave m/s' 49
Conductor size mm' 1-2.5 1-2.5 2-16 2-25
Main terminal (contactor)
Main terminal (overload relay) mm' '-2.5 1-2.5 H H H 2-16 2-16 2-25 2-25
Control terminal mm' 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5" 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5
Busbar width mm

Notes: 1. 660A at ambient temperature 40-55 DC. 2. 800A at ambient temperature 40-55';'C.
3. Conductor size in parentheses indicate compression !enninal style not for bare clamping.
4. The peak value of inrush current should be less thcm 2000% afthe effective value for rated current of capacitors.
The selection is invalidfor the circuit ofparallel capacitors which are controlled individually.
10
..
Table 1 4 1 (1)

~fh~~~li~f~~~*JJw~f.f£~~}~ff~~~}~{l~~lt~~;~.~~~r:~~~J~~~~~~:~l:~Y:::·~:6~;B~J~:,~:~~t·
690 690 690 690 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Rated operating current of
135 150 150 200 260 260 350 450 800' 1000'
auxiliary contacts
50(135) 55(150) 55(150) . 75(200) . 95(260) 95(260) 130(350) , 170(450) 250(660) 300(600) .. (2)
Table 141
B5(135) 90(150) 90(150) 130(200) 170(260) 170(250) 230(350) 290(450) 430(660) 530(BOO) Rated continuous current A 16
110(1351 120(150 120(150) 170(200) 220(260) 220(260) 300(350) 3804501 570860 700(800 Ra.led operating current
135(135) 150(150J 150(150)' 200(200) 260(250) 260(260) 350(350) 450(450) 660(660) 900(BOO)
CalegorY 120VAC A 6
85 105 125 150 lBO . 250. 300 400 630 BOO AC-15 240VAC A 5
85 105 120 150 lBO ,250 300 400 630 BOO
75 B5 90 140 lBO 200 ' 250 350 500 720 500VAC A 3
• 52 65 70 100 120 150 220 300 420 630
660VAC A 1.5
-."
7.5 11 ,1, lB.5 22 22 37 45 65 75 Ca~gory '24VDC A 5
15 18.5 22 30 37 45 60 75 110 130
15 18.5 22 37 45 55 60 60 130 150 48VDC A 3
15 18.5 22 ' 30 50 55, 75 90 130 150 DC·13 l1QVDC A 1.2
62 75 90 110 150 180 220 300 400 630
..
.' A 0.8'
80 93 120 150 180 220 300 400 630 BOO
220VDC A 0.2
80 93 100 150 lBO 220 300 400 630 BOO
60 70 BO 150 lBO 220 300 300 630 BOO Note: 1 UN-AX2(CX), UN-AX4(CX),
UN-AXll (CX).

60 90 90 130 180 220 280' 280 630 630


50 80 80 , 120 150 150 200 200 630 630
20 50 50 BO 100 100· 150 . 150 630 630

35 35 38 50 60 60·· 95 115 190 190


60 60 65 BO 120 120 150 200 350 350
48 60 65 BO 150 150 200 250 350 350
50 60 65 80 150 150 200 200 400 400
690 690 690 690. 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

850/850 1050/1050 125011250 150011500 180011800 250012500 300013000 400014000 6500/6500 800018000
800nSO 930/930 100011000 1200/1200 1450/1450 200012000 2400/2400 320013200 5040/5040 6400/6400
1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
600 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

27 27 25 27 ' 30 3D 35 35 65 65
75 75 85 B5 100 100 120 120 75 75
75 75 125 135 145 ,175 175 105 105
16 18' 22 37 40 55 55 BO BO

225 225 320 320 4Bo 460 460 4BO BOO BOO
22 22 26 26 44 44 54 54 100 100
3.3 3.3 3,5 3.5 5 5 7.3 7.3 15 15
27 27 31 31 41 55 55 600 600
27 27 31 31 41 55 55 75 75
0.85 to 1.1 times rated coil voltage
5 5 .
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
25 to +55
19.6
49
2.·50 2-50
(2-60)' (6-70)' (6-95)' (10-120)' ('O"50)' (25-24o)' (25·240)' (70-325)~ (70-325)3
2-50 2·50 (6_70)'3 (6-95)' {10-120)3 (10-150)3 (25-240)' (25-240)' - -
1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2..5 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-2.5 1-4 '-4
'5 15 15 20 25 25 30 30 35 35
1.4.2 Performance of Series S-N Contactors
5 220-240VAC R'9.1.4.2 (1)
Electrical Life
The electrical iife of the main contacts of a contactor is \I\\~\~~\I\\\~I\\ 1\ \[\
determined mainly by the circuit-opening duly it will perform.
The relationship between eiectrical life and rated current of
Mitsubishi contactors under nDrmal and jogging duties of
squirrel-cage motDrs is shDwn in Fig. 1.4.2(1) and 1.4.2(2).
In the case Df a mixture pf nDrmal and jogging duties, the 1\
expected cDntactor life can be determined as fDIIDWS:
a .
N= Nr/1 + 100 (Nr/N'-1) Eq.1.1

where N: Lile in the case of a% jogging duly


Nr : Life in the case of normal duly
N, : Life in the case of 100% jogging duly
a : Percentage of jDgging duty

f--S.NBOC

Electrical life versus rated operating current 380-440VAC 14.2 (2)


RIg..
5

3
~ \\ \" ~\ ,\' ~,,~~ \' \\1\\ i\ ~ \ \
2
\ .\ .. ~ ,,~ :\ \\\\~ [\\ :\\ 1\ \\
m 1.5
\ \ \. ,;,\" \ ,\" 1\\ 1\\ \
-Normal dUty, 6te ant Ie off. on-load factor 40%.
\ '\ .\ ~ \'
"
~

1200 operations/hour (AC3) ~ 1 ,


---Jogging duty, 6le on, Sle off. on~load factor 7%, ~ ,\ .
\ \ 1\
600 operationslhour (AC4)-S-Nl0-S-N30D ~
• 0.7
'\ , 1\
300 operationslhour (AC4)-S-N400-S-N500 o 0.5
150 operationslhour (AC4)-S-N800 ~
•g- '[\ '\ 1\ 1\ 1\
'\ [\\ ,
0.3
1\ , 1\
'0c 02
\1\ , ,
~ 0.15 ,, \ , \
I \
~ 0.1
\ \. , \ \ \
~ 0.07 1\ ,
:so 0.05 ,
• 1/ 1\
ill
0.03

0.02
. /1\
S'~10
" ~ir\B,
IS-
N25
IS·N50
S·N125 S· N1Bd'\
1!~9~111111 1\
....S·~rAJj DSiN150!}IS.N400
I!.1.'!S.N30~.",
f-
0.01 S-Nl1,N12 S·N20,21 S-N35 S-NaD '·S:N220 S-N6OD
2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 50 70 100150200 300500 BOO
Rated operating current (A)

1.4.3 Mounting Attitude of Starters and Contactors


TD assure proper performance, Mitsubishi magnetic motor Top
starters and cDntactors should be mounted on a vertical
suppDrting surface with the line terminais upwards and the
iDad terminals dDwnwards. The supporting surface may have
a maximum inclinatio,: of 3D!;> from the vertical in any direction.

Regular installation Inclined installation

12
1.5 When Ordering
Contactors, indicate lha model name and tha ordaring designation of the coil.

Exampie: S-N20 *AC230V (* 2A) -_


L ~ode
T -----Model name -
of arrangement, if spacial aux. conlacls, ref. Table 1.5.4
Ordering designation of the coil

Overload relays, indicate the modername and the ordering designation of the heater setting range.

Example: TH-N400RHKP*250A

- -I ----c
~-- - - - - - - M o d e l
Ordering designation of the heater setting range
name

Motor starters, indicate the model name, heater setting range, main circuil voltage, coil designalion.

MSQ·N11 KP*6.6A*380V*AC230V
Example:
TL L ~L Ordering designation of the coil
Main circuit voltage
Ordering designation of the healer setting range
Model name

Note: Mark * indicates a blank space.

Coil Ratings and Ordering Designations


for S-N10(CX}, -N11 (CX), -N12(CX}, -N1B(CX}, -N20,
-N21 (CX), -N25(CX}, -N35(CX) and SR-N(CX} for S·N50(CX}--NBOO
Table151
, , Table 1.5.2
'i :.~. . ..':"':.' ~ ", Rated voltage (VAC)" . ;
, Rated voltage (SO/60Hz) Ordering designation.
.. . ;
--. ,- '." :.Oz:dering de~ign?~.~~~.
'.~-, .~_

• 50Hz 60Hz: 100-127V AC100V


24 24 AC24V 200-240V AC200V
48-50 48-50 "AC4BV 26D-3S0V AC30DV
100 100-110 AC100V 3BO-440V AC40DV
110-120 115-120 AC12DV . . 46D-5SQV AC500V
125-127 127 AC127V AC?24V,AG48V are available for S-KSO-·K1S0
200 200-220 AC200V
208-220 220 AC220V
220-240 230-240 AC230V
240-260 260-280 AC260V for SD-N, SRD-N
346-380 380 AC380V Table '.5.3
380-415 400-440 AC4DDV Rated voltage (VDC) Ordering designation
415-440 460-480 AC440V - 24 DC24V
500 500-550 AC5DDV 48 DC48V
100 DC100V
110 DC110V
120-125 DC125V
200 DC2DOV
220 DC220V

Code of arrangement for sepcial aux. Contacts


Table '.5.4
Arrangement Code
1NC 18
2NO 2A
A : Normally Open
B : Normally Closed

13
1.6 Selection Table of Contactors
1.6.1 Non-Reversing Contactors Type S-NO, SO-NO

Model name ; S-N10


Coil designation (See page 13) AC400V Note: Mark*indicates
If required special aux. contact (never specify for standard) : , 1B a blank space.

18
'6 4.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 ~::cx: PrQ'Jided
~cx 1 Pto1Iidad
22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5 )
s-N2DCX 2 Pro\/II:I~
22 22 5.5 11 11
30 30 7.5 15 15 11 ~x 2 2 . ~ed 2
40 40 11 18.5 18.5 15 '~ ~g:ma;cx 2 2 Provifed

55 50 15 22 22 22 s-Hsoex SD-NSD 2 2 Plt>lli:':led


65 62 18.5 30 30 30 ~~cx SO-N65 2 2 .. P,D"oIid..d
85 85 22 45 45 45 8-NBO So-NBO 2 2
105- 105 30 55 55 55 S-N95 SD·N95 2 2 - . Max.
2
125 120 37 60 60 60 S-N125 SD-N125 2 2
150 150 45 75 90
180 180 55 90 110 110 S·N1ao 2 2
Max.
250 250 75 132 132 132 S-N220 SD-N220 2 2
2
300 300 90 160 160 200 S-N300 SD-N30Q 2 2
400 400 125 220 225 250 S·N400 SD-N400 2 2
630 630 190 330 330 330 B-NGeD SD-N600 2 2
800 800 220 440 500 500 g·NBQD SD-Naoo 2 2

S-N10 S-N21 SD-NB5 S-N220 SD-N400 S-N800

14
1.6.2 Reversing Contactors Type S-2xNO,SD-2xNO
r'" Ordering Designation .......................•.... c•••••••••••••.• : ••••••• ,•••• C••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• "'i
i Model name ~ ~ S·2xN95 i
I ::::~:::~;::.::::::;:: 13) ~~:~~~~::::~ I Note: Mark-t-indicates
.a blank space.

~ _. __ _-_.~-_ .. _--_.------_._ .. ---_._-----_ .. _-- .. __ _-----_._----_._--.---_ _----_ _-- .. _._-_. __ ._-._---_ .. _- .. _--~

Tabla 1.6.2

11 9 2.5 4 4 4 =~cx 2 2
2 2 2
13 12 3.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 ~::~mcx ~g:~~cx 2 2
18 16 4.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 I s~~:cx 4 4
22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5' s-2>'.N20CX 2 2
22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5" =~cx ! :~~cx 4 4
30 30 7.5 15 15 11 ;=cx 4 4
2 2 2
40 40 11 18.5 18.5 15 . ~=cx ~=cx 4 4
55 50 15 22 22 . 22 =~ SD·~50 4 4
65 62 18.5 3D 30 30 I =:~cx So..2XN65 4 4 ,.
85 85 22 45 45 45 S-2xNao SD-2XNBO . 4 4
105 .105 30 55 55 55 5-2xN95 SD-2XN95 4 4 2
125 120 37 60 60 60 S-2xN125 S[);.2xN125 4 4
150 150 45 75 90 90 - S-2xN15D SD-2xN150 6 6
180 180 .55 90 110 110 S-2XN18D 6 6
250 250 75 132 132 132 s..2xN22D SD-2XN220 . 6 6 2
300 300 90 160 160 200 S-2xN300 SD-2xN300 6 6
400 400 125 220 225 250· S-2xN400 SD·2xN400 6 6
630 630 190 330 330 330 S-2xNSOD SD-2xN600 B 8
BOO 800 220 440 500 500 S-2xNBOO SD-2xNBOD . B 8
.

S-2xN11 S-2xN21 S-2xN150


1.6.3 Non-Reversing Mechanically Latched Contactors Type SL-ND, SLD-ND
..-. Ordering Designation .....••-..•...........•...............••......•.............•.•.....•..••........-•••.•.•....•.--.,
Model name SL·N35 . i
Closing coil designation' AC200V :
Note: Mark*ilJdicates

_;~;:~:;~:~~;~~~~~---~~-:~:~~i~~~:~:~::_j
a blank space.
J. See TableJ.6.3 (2).

Table 1.6.3 (1)

, .
,I --,.
~1';;=;;:::JI~a'l
22
40
55
22
40
50
5.5
11
15 _.
11
1B.5
22
1B.5
i1

22
7.5
15
22
SL·N21
SL-N35
SL-N50
SLD·N21
SlD-N35
SLD-NSD
2
2
2
2
2
2
Max.2

65 62 18.5 30. 30 30 SL·N65 SLD-N65 2 2


85 85 22 45 45 45 SL·NaO SLD-N80 1 2
105 105 30 55 55. 55 SL-N95 SLD-N95 1 2 Max.2
125 120 37 60 60 60 SL-N125 SLD-N125 1 2
150 150 .45 75 90 90 Sl-N15D SLo·N150 1 2
250 250 75 132 132 132 SL-N220 SLO-N220 1 2
Max.2
. 300 300 90 160 160 200 SL-N300 . SlQ-N300 1 2
. 400 400 125 220 225 250 SL-N400 SLD-N40D 1 2
630 630 190 330 330 330 SL·NGOO SLo-N600 1 2
800 BOO 220 440 500 500 SL-NBOO SLD-NaDO 1 2

• Coil Ratings (Closing & Tripping) • Precautions


Table 1.6.3 (2) • Minimum energising time, both for closing and tripping must
Qrqering, ~. be set longer than the followings.
designation. Applicable voltage
SL(D}-N21 to N220 : 0.3 sec.
AC100V . 10D-127VAC SO/60Hz SL(D)-N300 to N800 : 0.5 sec.
AC200V':' 20D-24DVAC SO/60Hz • Make sure never to over lap ·the energising time for closing
AC300V... 260·35DVAC SO/60Hz and tripping.
AC400V 380-440VAC SO/60Hz
ACSDOV 460-55DVAC 50/60Hz

. ~~:~~~i#r
DCl OOV ",,;;;.
24VDC'
".48VDC
10D-110VDC
Dci25v.':;\ 120·125VDC
DC~OOV, 2DO-220VDG

SL-N35 SL-N150

16
1.6.4 Reversing Mechanically Latched Contactors
(Components for Automatic Transfer Switches) Type SL-2xNO, SLD-2xNO, SLxS-NO

,----Ordering Designation·-----·····---··----·-·----··------·-·--···----...-.---.--.--------.--.•-.----.-.---.. -----.-..--:--.•-..-.---.;--...--.----...---.•---,


.
,, .
.
, • Mechanically latched & mechanically latched contactor
Model name _SL-2xN35
,
,

Closing coil designation in normal left side' AC200V


Tripping coil designation in norma/left side' ~ : DC100V
Closing coil designation in standby right side' DC100V
Tripping coil designation in standby right side' AC200V

Complete type designation SL-2xN35*MC1·AC200V*MT1·DC1 00V*MC2·DC1 00V*MT2·AC200V

• Mechanically latched & normal contactor


Model name : : SLxS-N150
Closing coil designation in normal left side' : AC200V
Tripping coil designation in normal left side' ;.. AC1 OOV
Coil designation in standby right side' : _ AC100V

Complete type designation SLxS-N150*MC1·AC200V*MT1·AC100V*AC100V


. :._~~---~_._--_._------~--------_._-_._----._-_._------ -,--_ .. _--"------_._---------------- _--_
.
__._- ----------------------------------. __ ._---~._"._---_.- -----_:_-.:
Notes: Mark*indic.ates a blank space.
/. See Table 1.6.3(2) 2. See Table 1.5.2

. Table ':6.4

40 40 11 18.5 18.5 15 Sl·2xN35 . SLD-2xN35


Max.2
55 50 15 22 22 22 Sl-2xN50 SLD-2xN50
65 62 18.5 30 30 30 SL-2xN65 SLD·2XN65 SlxS-NGS
85 as 22 45 45 45 SL-2xN80 SLD-2xNBO
i05 105. 3D 55 55 55 SL-2xN95 SLD-2xN9S Max.2
125 120 37 60 60 60 SL-2xN125 SLD-2XN125 SlxS-N125
150 150 45 75 90. 90 Sl-2xN150 SLD~2XN150 SLxS~N150

250 250 75 132. 132 132 SL-2xN220 SLD~2XN220 SLxS-N220


Max.2
300 300 90 160 160 200 Sl-2XN300 SLD~2XN300 SLxS-N300
400 400 125 220 225 250 SL-2xN40D SLD-2xN400 SlxS-N400
630 630 190 330 330 330 SL-2xN600 SLD~2xN600

800 BOO 220 440 500 500 SL-2xN800 SLD-2xNeDO

• Precautions
• Minimum energising time both for closing and tripping must be set
longer than the followings.
SL(D)-2xN21 to N220, SLxS·N65to N220: 0.3 sec.
SL(D)-2xN300 to NBOO, SLxS-N300 and N400 : 0,5 sec.
Make sure never to overlap the energising time for closing and tripping.

SL-2xN35

17
1.7 Selection Table of Direct-On-Line Motor Starters
1.7.1 Non-Reversing Motor Starters without Enclosure (IP 00) Type MSO-ND
... Ordering Designation ..••.•................•.........,•........•...••...... ·····················~·········,············i
Model __ MSO·N50KP i
Heater designation of overload relay .42A i
Main circuit voltage 440VAC i Note: Mark*indicates

::::~::::::::::::;:: 13) ............................................•:~~:.~~~~.~:~~;:::~~~:::::~ I a blank space.

------._-_._-_._-_.-.--- .. _---_ .. _----_ _---_ _. __ _._--~--_._--.-._._._-_ .. _--- .. _--_. __ .----.-- ---------------._._------_.

Table 1.7.1

19A

55 50 15 22 22 22 =~~~~ctl MSO-N5D 2 2
65 62 18.5 30 30 30 =~=~CX' Moo-N6S 2 2
l-~--~----I~~----"~-~~-~-1...!l!~~~~+_~~~~_1_--=------=-I lSA, 22A, ';9A, 35A, 42A, 54A
85 85 22 45 45 45 MSC-NSOKP MS()..NSD 2 2
6.7~A
105 105 30 55· 55 55 MSC-N95KP MSO-N9S 2 2 .'"
''''
l-_'125==-_---'12:o0'---+--..:3~7:.-.-_ _'6~0C__.::.6:'0C__.!:6~O_1,2!M!OS~o-~N-"25~K~P4-'M~S:".o-~N~1~2~6____1~2=-_~2'_1
150 150 45 75 90 90 MSO-N150KP MSO-N150 2 2 42A, 54A, 67A, 62A, 105A 125A
l-_'1."'BO'---_ _'1."'60'---+--..:S:'SC__--'9~0C__ __'1_"~O__.:!.1''C0C_J_!!M~S~0o!:.~N~1B~O!!K~P4-'M~S:".O~-:'N~1"'B"-0____li__:2=----'2'_1
250 250· 75 132 132 132 MSD-N220KP MSO-N220 2 2 82A, 105A, 125A1 15DA [,60A.210A
I _~3~OO'---_~30='0o---+--..:9"'O=---_--'1~60~_..:1:':6::0_--::20=D'----!--"M"S~O~.~N"'30"'O"K~P4---'M::S~o-~N::3~D~0____l---'2=----'2=---1
r 10SA.12SA,160A,lBOA,2S0A
400 400 125 220 225 250 MSO-N400KP MSO-N400 2 2 r 330A
Note:] "CX" denotes with finger protection terminal covers.

MSO-N11 MSO-N18KP MSO-N50 MSO-N125KP MSO-N220

18
1.7.2 Reversing Motor Starters without Enclosure (IP 00) Type MSO-2xNO
r'" 0 rderin 9 Desi9nation ......•...•.....••......•••.....•.•....••..............•......••............•.••...•-..,..•....•..:
1 Model name MSO-2xN35KP i
i Heater designation of overload relay 29A i Note: Mark*indicates
! Main circuit voltage 440VAC i a blank space.
i: Coil designation (See page 13) AC200V ,
.:,
,,, .,
i, Complete type designation MSO-2xN35KP*29A*440V*AC200V,,
,
.~_~ •. . . •. •. . • . .-- -0. .._._--- •• ------.-------.------.------.- • ,•

~~~~EJi~~:~;il·~s{~->1t;~~1~~!~~l'Ji~.rr~.~~i.~~~~'~~~··~·
':operationar:'':'<ii£~;' _. ihase AC"-2.& A~3

!I~;t"m=~ . -~.
11 9 2.5; 4 4: 4 so.::~~~PCX' MSQ-2xN10 2 O.l2A, O.17A. O.24A, O.35A, O.SA, O.7A
a.9A, 1.3A, 1.7A, 2.1A. 2.5A, 3.6A, SA
18 16 4.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 =~~8~~C~ MSO-2xN18. 4 2 6.6A,9A,11A l5A
22 22 5.5 11 . 11 7.5. =~~2xN2tl~CX' MSO':'2XN2D 2
0.24A, O.35A, O.SA, C.7A, D.SA, 1.3A, 19A
22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5 =~g::~~ MSO·2XN21 4 2
1.7A, 2.1A. 2.SA, 3.6A, SA, 6.6A,
30 SO 7.5 15 15 11 MSg:=~CXl' MSO·2x:N25 4 2. 2M
9A. 11A, 15A
40 40 11 18.5 18.5 15 MSC:~~CX" MSD-2xN35 4 2 29A 35A
55 50 15 22 22 22 :=~cX' MSD-2XN50 . 4· 2
65 62 18.5 30 30 30 M=~:~~ MSO-2XN65 4 2
l5A, 22A, 29A, 3SA, 42A, S4A
85 85 22 45 45 45 MSD-2XN80KP MSO-2XNBQ 4 2
105 105 30 55 . 55 55 MSO-2XN95KP. MSD-2xN95 4 '2
125 120 37 60 60 ·60 MSO-2XN125KP MSO~2xN12S 4· 2
42A.54A.6!A,B2A,1 05A
150 150 45 75 90 90 MSO-2XN15DKP MSO-2xN15D 6 4 l2SA
180 180 55 90 .110 110 MSD-2xN180KP MSD-2xN18Q 6 4
82A, 105A, 125A. 150A
250 250 75 132 .132 132 MSO-2XN22DKP MSD-2xN220 6 4 180A,210A
300 300 90 160 160 200 MS()..2xN30DKP MSO-2xN300 6 4
105A, 125A,.150A, 18GA, 250A, .
400 400 125 220 225 250 MSD-2XN400KP MSO-2xN400. 6 4 330A

Note:]. "ex" denotes with finger protection tenninal covers.

MSO-2xN11 KP MSO-2xN18 MSO-2xN35 MSO-2xN150KP

'0
1.7.3 Enclosed Non-Reversing Motor Starters OP 20) Type MS-ND
...• Ordering Designation _......•.••._.-...........•...•....._•••••. _ _-_...•_._ _.._ -

Model name MS·N21 KP


Heater design'ation of overload relay 15A
Note: Mark*indicates
Main circuit voltage 220VAC
Coil designation (See page 13) AC230V
ablank space.
Complete type designation MS-N21 KP*15A<220V*AC230V

Table 1.7.3

11 9 2.5 4 4 4 MS-Nl0KP MS-Nl0


13 12 3.5 5.5. 5.5 5.5 MS-NllKP MS-Nll
O.24A, O.35A, a.SA, a.7A, a.gA, 1.3A -
1.7A, 2.1A. 2.5A. 3.SA. SA, B.BA, 9A llA
13 12 3~5 5.5 5.5 5.5 MS-N12KP MS-N12 1
,22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5 MS-N20KP . MS-N2D 1,
D.24A. 0.35A, a.SA, O.7A, a.9A, 1.3A, 19A
22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5 MS-N21KP M5-N21 1 2
i.7A t 2.1A, 2.5A, 3.6A, SA, B.SA,·

I: f3sA
, 3D 3D 7.5 15 15 11 MS-N25KP M5-N25 1 2
BA, 11A, 15A
40 4D 11 lB.5 18.5 15 MS-N35KP , . MS-N35 1 2
55 50 15 22 22 22 MS-N50KP MS·NSO 1 2
65 62 18.5 3D 3D 3D M5-N65KP MS-N6S 1 2
15A, 22A, 29A. 35A, 42A, 54A·
, B5 . MS-NBOKP

I
B5 22 45 45 45' MS-NBD 1 2 67A
• 105 105 3D 55 55 55 M8-N95KP MS-N95 1 2 .~
, 125 ' 12D 37 6D 60 6D MS-Nl25KP MS-N1~5 1 2
150 . 42A,54A,67A,B2A,105A
15D 45 75 9D 9D ' MS-N15DKP M5-N150 1 2 I 125A'
lBD lBD 55 90 110 l1D MS-N1BOKP MS-N1BD 1 2
82A,10SA,125A,150A
25D 250 75 132 132 132 MS-N~OKP MS-N220 ,1 2 I,BDA.210A
3DD 3DD 9D 160 16D 2DO MS·N30DKP MS~N300 1 2
105A,125A, l50A, 180A,250A
400
4DO 125 220 225 25D MS-N400KP MS-N40D 1 2 I 33GA
Note: 1. Models with finger protection tenninal covers. are not available.

MS-N10 MS-N21 MS-N65 MS-N220KP

20
1.7.4 Enclosed Non-Reversing Motor Starters with Pushbutton Switch (IP ~O)
Type MS-NDPM
Whel1the thermal overload reley is tripped, type MS-N/KDPM enclosed direct-on-Ilne motor starters can be easily reset by pushing
the OFF buttbn on the enclosure (MS-Nl0. and -Nll by pushing the RESET bUllon).

r'" Ordering Designation .._...•...... ~.._-........•..._.•........••.•._.•....-...•.......•....••_...•.. ~ •...... _......•.-.••

1 MO(~el name •.•. :~.: , : MS-N21 PMKP


;, Heater designation of overload relay 15A
Note: Mark*indicates
i Main ·circuit voltage : 220VAC

I ::::~:~::;:::::::::: 13) .............................•............. ~~:~~;.~~~;~;.~;~~~:~~:::::~


a blank space.

.~
L . ~ .__.__.__.__..." "w • • • _. _. • • _. _ • • • _ •• A •• • ••• 0 • __ A __ A ._ • • J

. . . . .. .' Table 1.7A-

.~!!.IJf~~r.!i"'£
'(A).,> ·'(A)'" i:(kW);;'/ [kW) (kW) (kW) .protectlontype Two heater type
_ _--I
j-.:..~1~1 _ _~9,..,..-I--:2::.S:.-_~4'::-_-='4,..,.._~4'::-+::M8-N::-::1::D':PM::K::=P=-t-M=S-7N':1:::;0P:.:M::--+--:- O.24A, O.3SA, O.SA, O.7A, O.9A, 1.3A,
13 12· 3.5 5.5 5.5 5.5· MS-N11PMKP MS-N11PM 1.7A,2.1A,2.5A,3.6A.5A,6.6A.9A 11A
22 22 5.5 11 11 7.5 MS·N2DPMKP MS-N20PM 1
1--=22=---'22=--+-"S:::,s:...:,--'1.:.1~·--1.:.1'--.:.7.=S-If-"'t.lS-~N2=1=:PO::MKO::P-f-=M"S•.:.NO::2"1P"'M':-+.-1---'2-1 O.24A, O.35A, a.5A, O.7A, O.SA, 1.3A, 19A
1--=3"0----'3=0:...:+-=7"'.5:-.---'1':'5---''-':'lS'---'1:::1-f-:: 1 7A
M=-S-7.N''25::P::M=KP=-f-'' M=-S--7N=2'''5P'''M':-+-1=---:2-1 . , 2.1A, 2.5A, 3.6A, SA, 6.6A, SA,
1-.':4~0--4~0~.-'·+.~1:::1:""''-1::B'':.5''''''-:17B.5'::--~1-=5--cI--::M:-S-::N=35=P::M~KP=-t-=M=S-7 N::35=PM::--+--:-1----:2--1 l1A,15A
55 50·. 15... 22 22 22 MS-NSDPMKP MS-NSOPM 1 2
"65 62' .°18.5: 30 30 30 MS-N65PMKP Ms-N65PM 1 2
1--=--=--4.,,-'::"'----"':---"':----=--1--::::-::=::;=--1-:=7.':=::--+-:-----:--1 15A. 22A. 29A, 35A. 42A, 54A
85 85 ",' .:', .22'-.-, 45 45 45 MS-N8DPMKP MS-NaOPM 1 2
105 105"·" ·30: 55 55 55 MS·N95PMKP MS:'N95PM 1 2
67r:rA
.'9""

MS-N11PM MS-N80PMKP
1.8 Optional Parts and Accessories for Contactors
1.8.1 Replacement Coils Tobie '.B.'

S-N'O, S·N", S·N12, S·N11·COIL ACooOV SD·N11, SD-N12, SD·N11·COIL Dcobov


0.06 0.23
S·N' B, SR-N4 SRD·N4
S.N20, S-N21 S-N21-COIL ACoOOV 0.08 SD-N2' SO·N2l-COIL DCOOOV 0.24
S-N2S, S.N35 S'N3S-COIL ACoOOV 0.08 SO-N3S SO-N35-COIL OCOOOV 0.23
S-NSO, S·N6S S-NSO-COIL ACooOV 0.27 SD·NSO,SD-N6S SO·NSD-COIL ocoooV' .O.B
S-NBO, S.N9S S-NBD-COIL ACooOV 0.6 SD-NBO, SO·N9S SO.NBD-CoiL OCOOOV 0.6
S.N12S, S.N1S0 S-N125-COIL ACooOV 0.48 SO·N12S, SD·N1S0 SO-N125-COIL OCOOOV. 0.9
S.N1BO, S-N220 S-N1BD-COIL ACoOO.V 0.6 SD·N220 SO-N220·COIL OCOOOV 1.4
S.N300, S-N400 S·N30D-COIL AC 000 V 0.9 SO·N300, SO·N400 SD-N30D-COIL OCOOOV 2.0
S-N600, S-N800 S-N60D-COIL AC 00 0 V 2.0 SO-N600, SO·NBOO SD-N60D-COIL DCOOOV B.O
Note: When ordering. please specify the operating voltage according to Table 1.5.1-3.

1.8.2 Replacement Contact Kits


Ki~s of _i:nain 90ntacfs 'for':cqrJta~tots ~:\' ~i;';,~.i:J. :~~~,'::~~(:5~.~}:;::~-':_t~*·~~:~~~~j~:;.~:~.: ;·~·Y:~~~~~f-;1~~~t::;t:~;Coniacfdr;:r:.~,r ~~~;.;r_:;{:;'_~ ; ;~~,,:~~F~;~:Itl; ,p~rf.ri~mtjer-.::.;;';;;~~~~~
-1

Kit consists of 3 mo.ving contacts


PARTS BH7l9N300 0.03
and 6 stationary contacts Onclude
springs and spring supports also). PARTS BH729~300 0.05
PARTS BH739N30D 0.05
PARTS BH749N300 0.07
,.
:~-~
..- ,--,., -
,~
.
--
·lj~.;S·
.----..::.-~
'd .
PARTS BH74~N301
PARTS BH749N303
PARTS BH759H300
0.07
0.07
0.11
PARTS BH759N302 0.11
PARTS BH739N300
PARTS BH759N301 0.11
PARTS'BH7s9N303 0.11
PARTS B~69N300 0:1
PARTS BH7'9N302 0.1
PARTS BH7'9N301 0.1
PARTS BH7'9N303 0.1
PARTS BH7i9N300 0.1
PARTS BH779N301 0.1
BH569N300 PARTS BH789N30D 0.2
PARTS BH799N300 0.4
PARTS BH199N30f 0.4
PARTS BH609N300 O.B
PARTS BH609N301 O.B
PARTS BH619N300 2.5
PARTS BH619N301 2.5

BH599N300

Table 1.B.2 (2)

Kits of auxiliary contacts for confactqrs ~)


Kit co,!sists of 1 bifurcated moving
S.N1~CXj, N11ICXj, SD.Nl1ICXj 1NO
PARTS BH719N310 0.01
contact and 2. stationary contacts. 1NC PARTS BH719N311 0.01
Kit consists of 2 bifurcated moving S·N12ICX), SO·N12ICX) 1NO+1NC PARTS BH729N31O 0.01
contal:ls and 4 stationary contacts. S·N.OICX) PARTS BH739N310
, . 1NO+1NC 0.02

~
.'"""
- -, ~ S-N21ICx) to S·N35(CX), ?NO+2NC· PARTS BH739N311 0.03
".'.
Kit consIsts of 4 bifurcated moving SO·N21ICX) to SD-N35(CX):
contacts and 8 stationary contacts. S·NSOICX) 10 N95
PARTS BH729N310 2NO+2NC PARTS BH539N315 0.02
SD·N50 to N95
S·N12S, SD-N125 2NO+2NC PARTS BH579N312 0.02
S-N150 10 NaOO (Use auxiUiary contact blocks, see
SD~N150to N800 1.8.3 "Auxilliary Contact Blocks.")

22
1.8.3 Auxiliary Contact Blocks Table 1.8.3

Front cJip-on .2 S-N10(CX), -N11{CX), -N12(CX), Standard 2ND UN-AX2(CX)2A


'
-N20(Ci<), -N21 (CX), -N25(CX), 1N0+1NC UN-AX2(CX)1A1B
-N3S(CX), -Nl B(CX), -N2B(CX), 2NC' UN-AX2(CX)2B
-N3B(CX), -N4B(CX), -NSO(CX), 4NO UN-AX4(CX)4A
-N6S(CX) 3NO+1NC UN-AX4{CX)3A1B
SD-N11 (CX), -N12(CX), -N21 (CX). 2NO+2NC UN-AX4(CX)2A2B
. -N36(CX)•.-NSO, -N6S
SR-N4(CX) Low level signal 1NO+1NC (low level) UN-lL22(CX)
SRD-N4(CX) (SVdcSmA) 1N0+1 NC (standard)
UN-AX4 UN-AX11 S-Nl0(CX), -Nll (CX), "N20(CX). Standard 1NO+1NC UN-AX11(CX)
-N21 (CX). -N25(CX), -N3S(CX)
-N50(CX). -N65:(CX)
SD-N11 (CX), -N21 (CX); -N35(CX)
-NSO, -N6S
SR-N4(CX), SRD-N4(CX)
UN-AX150 S(O)-NBO, -N95, -N12S 1NO+1NC ..UN-AXBO .
SID)-N150. -N180, -N220, -N300, -N400 1N0+1NC UN-AX1S0
S(D)-N600, -N800 2NO+2NC
Notes:'j Front clip-on and side clip-on should not be mounted both.
2 MaXin:um 1 piece ofaux. contact block can be mounted on a Contactor / Relay.
3 Maximum 2 pieces ofaux. contact.block can be mounted on a Contactor / Re1a.y.

1.8.4 Mechanical Interlocks .... , Table 1.8.4


Contaetar Part Number
6-Nl O(CX), -Nl1 (CX), SQ-N11 (CX) UN-ML11(CX)'
S-N20ICX), -N21 (CX), -N2S(CX), -N3S(CX), UN-ML21
,Nl B(CX), -N2B(CX), -N3B(CX), -N4B(CX),
-N50(CX), -N65(CX)
SD-N21(CX), -N35(CX), -N50, -N6S
S(D)-NBO, -N95, -N125 _ UN-MLBO
S(D)-N150. UN-ML1S0
S-Nl BO, S(D)-N220, -N300, -N400 UN-Ml220

UN·Ml11 UN-Ml21

1.8.5 Connecting Bar Kits Table 1.8.5


For connecting reversing contacIars Contactor Part Number
Kit consists of 3 connecting bars or wires S·2xNl0(CX), -2xNll (CX) UN-SD10CX
each for source and load side. S-2xN1B UN-SD18CX
S-2xN18CX UN-SD1BCX
S-2xN20, -2xN21 UN-SD21CX
.S-2xN20CX, N2xN21 CX UN-SD21CX
S-2xN2S, -2xN3S UN-SD35CX
S-2xN25CX, -2xN35CX UN-SD35CX
S-2xN50(CX), -2xN65ICX) UN-SDSO
S-2xNBO. -2xN95 UN-SOBD
S-2xN125 UN-SD125
UN-SD50 S-2x:N15D UN-SD150
S-2xN180, -2xN220 UN-S022D
S·2xN300. -2xN40D UN-SD3DO
S-2xN6DO. -2xNBOO UN-SDBOO

2
1.8.6
. Surge
. Absorbers Table 1.8:5
Contactor/Aeray . Applicable control voltage Part Number
Varistor tYpe S-Nl0, -N11, 'N12, -N18, -N20, AC24-240VlDC24-2S0V UN~SA21 AC20QV
-N21, -N2S, -N3S, -N28, -N38, -N48 AC200-480V UN-SA2l AC400V
SD-Nl1, -N12, -N21 , -N3S, SR(D)-N4
Varistor type with operating S-Nl0, -N1l, -NI2, -N18, -N20, ACSD-240V UN-SA22 AC200V
indeicator (LED) -N21, -N2S, -N3S. -N28,,,-N38, -N48 DCBO-2S0V
SD'Nl1, -N12, -N21, -N35. SR(D)-N4 ".' .. -.
Varistor and CRtype S-Nl0,-N1l, -N18, -N20, -N21, AC24-127V UN-SA25 ACl OOV
-N2S, -N3S, -N28, -N38, -N48 DC24-125V
UN-SA13 SD-N11, -N12, -N21, -N3S AC10D-240V UN~SA2S AC200V
SR(D)-N4 DC10D-2SOV
CR type S·Nl0; -N1'. -N12. -N18, -N20, -N21, AC24-240V' UN-SA23 AC200V
-N25, -N3S, -N28, -N38;-N48, SR-N4
SD-N11, -N12, -N21, -N3S, SRD-N4 DC24-250V ·.uN.SA13 DC200V

1.8.7 Terminal Cov~rs Table 1.8.7


For contactors Contactor Part Number For starters Starter (loadside) Part ~umber
S(D)-N50, -NBS' UN-CZ500' MSO(D)-NSO, -NBS' UN-CZS01' (+CZSOO)
S(D)-N80, -NBS . UN·CZ800' MSO(D)-N80, -NBS UN-CZBOP' (+CZ80D)
S(D)-Nl25 UN-CZ1250' MSO(D)-NI2S UN-CZl251' (+CZ1200)
S(D)-N1S0 UN-CZ1500' MSO(D)-N1S0 UN-CZ1501 2 (+CZ1500)
S-N180, S(D)-N220 MSD·NIBO, MSOIO)-N220 UN-CZ2201' (+CZ2200)
S(D)-N300, -N400 MSO(D)-N300,-N400 UN-CZ3001,: ,(+CZ30DD)
S{D)-2xN50, NBS MSO(D)-2xNSO, NBS UN-CZ504
S(D)-2xN80, N9S UN-CZS02 MSO(D)-2xN80, NBS UN-CZB0 4
S-N65 with 2pcs of. S{D)-2xN12S UN-CZ1252 MSO(D)-2XN12S UN-CZ12S4
S(D)-2xN1S0 UN-CZ1502 MSO(D)-2xN1S0 UN-CZ1S04
UN-CZ500
&2.<N18IJ, SIO}2><N220 UN-CZ2202 MSlJ.2><NIBO, MSO{O)-2><N22G UN-CZ2204
SID)-2><N:IDO, N400 UN-CZ3002 MSDID)-2xN300, N400 UN-CZ30D4

Notes: 1. 2pcs are requiredfor one conractor


2. For line side anoth~r cover (for contactor) is required.
3_ Terminal covers sho~ld not be mounted!or type S-N50CX, S-N65CX, MSO-N50(KP)CX and MSO-N65(KP)CX.

1.8.8 Pneumatic Time Delay Modules Table 1.8.8


Contacfor/Relay On deray
S-Nl0ICX} UN-TR4AN(CX)
S-N1l(CX)
S-N12(CX)
S-N18(CX}
SR-N4(CX)
SD-Nll(CX)
SD-N12(CX)
UN-TR4AN SRD-N4(CX)
For detail see item 4.6.
Note, UN-AXl1(CX;'(Table 1.8.3) can not be combined to a Contactor / Relay together with UN-TR4AN (eX).

1.8.9 DC Interface Modules Table 1.8.9

Direct mounting Output


10 contactor . Contactor/Relay Solid slate . Relay
S-N1DICx), -Nl1 (CX), -N12ICX), -N1B(CXl, ,N20(CX), UN-SY21 (CX).
-N21 (CX), -N2SICX), -N3SICX), -N2S(CX), -N38(CX),
-N49(CX)
SR-N4(CX)
S-NSD UN-SY31 UN-SY32
S-NBS

UN-SY21
Separate S-NBO to N400 UN·SY12
mounting
For detail see item 3.8.

24
1.9 Connections and Contact Arrangement
1.9.1 S, SD-N D

A2Al' llLl 3IL2 5IL3 13 'A2Al llLl 3IL2 51L3 21 A2Al 13 1/tl 31L2 5IL3 21
d-'t
U--l--1--'f-r D--y-t-~--~--(
.Lldddl .Ll d d
U--l--1--'f-) 2IT1 4IT2 srr3 22 14 2IT1 4{f2 6fT3 22
2IT1 4IT2 6ff3 14

S-N10, N11{1NO) S-N10, N11{INC) S-N12, N20


SD-N11{1NO) SD-N11 (INC) SD-N12

A2Al 13 llLl 3IL2 51L3 23 ", A2 A1 13 21 llL1 3IL2 51L3 43 31


'.Ll I d d d I' "
u--j--'f-l--l-l' :" c=r-y-t-\-l~-~-~-1
14 2IT1 4J;r2 6ff3 24 2IT1 4IT2 6ff3 14 22 2IT1 4IT2 6ff3 44 32

S-N12{2NO) S-N18 S-N21, N25, N35


S-N20{2NO) SD-N21, N35

Al A2 Al
I I 13 21 ' 43 31 i 13 21 43 31 ' ,
a b (13)(31) llLl 31L2 51L3(23)(41) a (13)(31)(23)(41) llLl 31L2 5IL3

D--y-t-\-+-~-~--( ~I't.''t.d
T-rTl-T-T-l-~l
d d

14 22 2fTl 4IT2 Srr3 44 32 A2 14 22 44 32 2fTl 4rr2 6fT3


(14) (32) (24)(42) I (14)(32)(24)(42) "
b

S-N50-N400 S-N600, N800


SD-N50-N400


I

A1/a 1,3 21 43 31
+ '(13) (31)(23)(41) llLl slL2 5/L3
ddd
l-rr-r-l--'1--)
''tl't.

14 22 44 32 2fTl 4rr2 Srr3


(14) (32)(24)(42)

SD-N600, N800
1.9.2 S, SD-2xN 0
BLACK

g_~~_r-+_~:~~~~3~g~~'_+_t_~:~~~{
A2 Al11L1 3IL2 SIL3 13 AD1 Lel Al 1111 3Il2 5IL3 13
d d d I
d d
-l~-l--T-1-
d I

2fTl 41T2 6fT3 14 R


- "" - L02
-T-l~-l--)
2ITl 4fT2 arTa 14 2fTl 4IT2 6IT3 54 62 72 84 2fT1 4fT2 6JT3 54 62 72 84·

S-2xN10, N11 S-2xN18


SD-2xN11

g4~-~~~~~~-r~~'~t~_~~-~~-~l
A2 Al 13 1ILl 3Jl2 5IL3 21 A2. Al 13 llLl 3J1.2 5IL3 21

t:}~-~--t-~--t~t:}l~-~--t-~--(
14 2IT1 4/T2 6fT3 22 14 2fT1 4fT2 6rrS 22 14 22 2tT1 4IT2 6fT3 44 32 14 22 2fT1 41TZ 6fT3 44 32

S-2xN20 S-2xN21-N35
SD-2xN21, N35

Al A2. 5361 1321 lIL1 311..2 51L3 4331 All>2 1321 11L1 3IL2 5A..3 4331 8371

t:}~-t+1-~--~-~t-~-tV-t:}~-t-~--~-+-~-t~-1
5462 1422 2fT1 4IT2 6IT3 44 32 1422 2fT1 4fT2 6fT3 44 32 8472

S-2xN50-N400
SD-2xN50-N150, N220-N400

M M·
~ 1321433111L1 3IL2 5IL3 53618371 1321433111L1 3Il.2 SIL3 53618371' ~
¢-'f--(~-t~--~-++t~-t-V-'ff~-t~--~--\-+-tl~t¢
)2142244322lTl 4IT26fT354628472 1422443221714112 6fi'35462B472 A2.
I I
b b

S-2xN600, N800

r-----,
I, I
, ,tub
=-:'-=--.11 132143311111 3Il..2 5/l..3 53516371
I _ AlIa
13214331111...13/1..2 5IL3 53616371 +

H~-t~--4--\-+t~-t-V-'ff~-t~--~--\-+1+t
-O---<'-_<__--'----J 14224432 2fT1 4fT2 6IT3 54 628472 14224432 2fT1 4fTZ 6IT3 54 628472

SD-2xN600, N800

26
1.9.3 SL, SLD-(2x)N 0

CLOSING
'E CLOSING ::: !

A 1'2. 13 21 tIL1 3Il.2 5IL3 43 31 55' 63 E1

·_y-t-f-l~-~-~-~~ -~
14 22 2fT1 4JT2 6IT3 44 32 ~S ~~ E2
,, ''
;.H>l
TRIPPING
SL(D)-N21, N35 SL(D)-N50, N65

TRIPPING is'

rc TRIPPING :: I CLOSING "

14 I
I'
CLOSING
~
"
5~~131' .. .
~~5~ 1f'321\ :1J1..1d311..2d5JL3
d 43i i31
.'*. 13 214331 tILt 3lL.2 51l.3 5361 B371
i ,
t
- -r -Y-l--l-l--( . .ltl\:d d d Iltly
., ~ .J 422 2fT1 4fT2 6IT3 44 32
'5 ...J'
t..::
1l-r l--'1--j--l-Tl-l
14 22443221ft 4IT2 6lT3 54528472.

SL(D)-N80-N400 SL(D)-N600, N800

Ic CLOSING is I I EO CLOSING ;;- r


A2 'At 13 21 tILt 311...2 5Jl..3 43 31
It d d d I .It.
~r-r-y~t-l-l-T'L
I
55'
r--"f ":
E1

-i.:--t
A2 'A 113 21 lILt 3n..2 5IL3 43 31

-t-t-f-+++~t
I

-ell
E1

14 22 2IT1 4172 srra 44 32 56 -c:r_~ 14 22 2fT1 4fT2 6IT3 44 32 56 'S?_~


~ ~

SL(D)-2xN21, N35

, '" CLOSING :; I I Ii! CLOSING ::: I

At' ~ 13 21 1J1..1 3Il...2 5Il3 43 31 551 63 E1 Al' A2 13 21 ,n..., 3Il2 51L3 43 31 5 I 63 E1


r-::;:r, r::;:r.,
I It
-r-r-Y-t+l-rie ~li't
d d d I It I It
-'T-r-T--T-l-l-(·~
d d d I .It.
-J: I'
.-
6
~f..l ~t-J
14 22 2fT1 4IT2 6fT3 44 32
,, ,, ,E2 14 22 2fT! 4IT2 61T3 44 32 e.G
,, ,, E.2

.......
TRIPPING TRIPPING

• 14 I
I J

~~5t~
I:S;: TRIPPING :: I
CLOSING
~
I
J

t,'1321
It
SL(D)-2xN50, N65

1~1dy~
it d~ 43
di 31
,I.
14 I

~~5t4
I~ TRIPPING ; 1
CLOSING
~
"

j,t11321 M..1 3IL..2 SIL3 4331


-, 15 I
- TY--If-l-l-TV- -, . - TY-t-l-l--' '5 I
'tdddiit

1.: ..J 1422 2fT1 4fT2 6!T3 44 32 . L: .J _ 1422 2fT1 4IT2: 6lT3 44 32

SL(D)-2xN80-N400

CLOSING ? I ! '"" CLOSING =- I


TRIPPING
I I
I, " TRIPPING
I I
It

5~'<:~':\21433"~1 3JL2 511.2 53515371 ::\2'43311~1 Yl2 511.2 5351837' 55~1':~E2~ .

156 I
C ..J
1~-t~--4--~l~t~-t~ 1~-t~--4--~1-f~-t~
14 2244322/T1 4fT2 6fT35462B472 14 2244322fT1 4fT2 SfT354628472
1 56
L..::
- _

SL(D)-2xN600, N800
1.9.4 MSO-(2x)N 0
A2A1 1ILl 3!L2 SIl.:3 13 AZA1 13 11L1 3JI...2 5IL3 21 A2A1 13 21 11ll 311....2 5!l.3 43 31

G-fm-·
-- --I tJ-m"::O_:" tJ--f-tm---~-i
~JTr 21r1 4IT2 6IT3
14
97

-+-(
98
95

96
14
.

2fT1 4ff2 6fT3


22

._+-(
97 95

S8 96
.

2fT1 4{T2 5173


97

-~--(
98
95

96
14 22

2fT1 4IT2 6fT3


44 32
97 95

-~-i
98 96

MSO-N10, N11 MSO-N12, N20 MSO-N18 MSO-N21-N35

A1 A2 13 21 lIL1 3Il.2 5Jl3 43 31


A1 A2. 13 21 1ILt 3Il...2 51L3 43 31

tJ--f-tm---+i
14 22 44 32:
97 95
W--f-r- - -. -.lh
LLlltdddl.lt

14 22 44 32
97 95

-~-i ~--(
2IT1 4fT2 err3 98 96 98 96
2fT1 . 4fT2 6fT3

MSO-N50-N150 MSO-N180-N400

14
"546272 B4 54 62 72 B4

9795
9795.

-~-( L:J---+-=tJ - - ~ - r
2fT1 4fT2 6JT3 98 96
2If1 4ff2 6IT3 9896

MSO-2xN10, N11 MSO-2xN18

"'- A2 tL3 4331

'4 22 14 22
1422
--+-1
4432

9795
9795

2fT1 4fT2 6fT3


-+(
98 96 --+r
2fT1 4ff2 6fT3 98 96

MSO-2xN20 MSO-2xN21-N35

A1

L-1-1~ It-- \ 511..3/--\-7'I -0-~-t1--1I--


A2. 1321 '1L1 3112

_J - -
43 31
1,.
A1 f A2. 13 21 'Ill 3Il2 \s/L.3 4331

--
\ .
-- --'H
A' 4331

-t-(-H
8371

1422 4432 1422


I
4432 54 62 1422 4432 '42' 44 32. 84 72

1\
9795
. 9795

I[
c1---H
2fT1 4fTZ 6rTS 98 96
fL--+--+1=2:!:T
2fT1 4rr2 arT3
~-Lt
96 96
_
MSO-2xN50-N150 MSO-2xN180-N400

28
1.9.5 MS-NO
, - ----=::.:;::.::-.:-~-:;...:;:;-.:-_?t,--,
II A2 A113tI _2111L~/ 3Il2./sn:
- - -- - ;
IIIL~s-Y OFF
,I, --tm--:--l--1! ,")
4,3 31 I

1 L~ .1:t!2' I
ON
-

I
I
'r
-i-
95 I -
L --- 2fT1 41TZ 6fT3 9B 95 ..1
- J1. E

MS-Nl0, Nll - MS~N12, N20 MS-N21, N35


r- ~ - -- - ~_.:.=-_-_=':.::"L __ r- --.:.=::.:;::.::-.:_~-:;....::::..:-:;:;..:;..a,-,

i A21~
1
-----~----------~
-;: iL~ i A21~ 21 -:3~ ii ~
,'3~1 511.3-
I

A1 111..'/31L2 511.3 -- - : OFF

,-
I
-t- --'-- -l--(! '- ~1 ,I --t- . -- -+-( !'L_J\-1 ON -
A1

14 L~
2"11.'

1- __ .¥_!2 1 I
OFF

ON_
14 L~ .¥-~ .:.._l
I 979 I· I 979
I I
l U I Wh
notes:. en separate control,
I r;: ['e.-~- I I . "1-- wire---isnotprovided.

L ~ 1iTZ_ 6fT3
_9~~J~E 'L - ---~
:2JT1 411"2 6!T3
- -_ -
9B 96" 11-
-:...l
E 2. Wire---a;ui push buttons
are notprovzded.


MS-N50-N150 MS-N180-N400

1.9.6 Ms-NoPM
common control common control

A2. A1 'Jl1 3IL2 5IL3 13

-m-
__d_) 14
E-

E-
ON

OFF' I ....

97' .:,I~ "


I Eo: RESET '7'
-1-- --"-
[~ e.
IL+--+--,+, -1--- I ON I OFF
--.Jt..(RESET)
2fT1 4fT2 8fT3 9a 96 2ff1 4IT2 6IT3 98 95
" separate control
separate control
,
CONT.CKT"

A2.
CDNT.CKT
'A1 M.l 311...2 5n..3 13
rb-- -/ __L_ --1:
113:;;11.1 :iIl2 SII,.3 "21

--m/-,-/---d-);-ON
. 14 E- OFF 14
d

22 - I....
9795 .:, ,....-;.t

-1-- --"- 'r'~t ONI


. I E-: RESET

2IT1 4rrz 6JT3 98 96


1
2fT1 4Ir2 6IT3
+- 98 95
OFF
~-"",,"""'(AES E1]

MS-Nl0, NllPM MS-N20PM


common control common control

./ 5A.3
flO,--(:- -- d_+-1
' -
21 111..1 311.2 43 31

1-- .-
14 22 4432 I.
'7 , W Jo:.
-
'7 ,
- ~..:. ,....
- I
...
~
ON I OFF ON I OFF
L::11i,1--l-+"~ - i --
I
---!..t..(RESE1) I -i-- I
----!b.{AES E1]

zin 4fT2 err3 98 96 2fT1 41T2 BlT3 98 96


separate control separate control
,
CONT.CKT ,
CONT.CKT

NZ Al,3r 21'1l1 311...2 5!l3 43 31

--r-m----.1)--(
~/Jdl~ _+/_ /__
1
13 21 111..1 3!L2 511...3
d_~ __(
43 31

14 22 44 32 14 22 44 32
9795 9795 ..:. j-.i
-
-i-
I
-1-- J ONIOFF
----!.I:.(RESET)

2fT1 4fT2 efT3 98 96 2fT1 4IT2 61T3 98 96

MS-N21 ~N35PM MS-N50~N95PM


1.10 Outline Dimensions
1.10.1 Outline Dimensions of Non-Reversing Contactors

oes for M4 screw$


I hi
2mg.
I· ~f.·~~~:~~':~;ft.·~*~})A·.':Il~·!f~{qi;~~:M~~AB_;i?\C/;B~:~"B~~'::~¢/CA~):i~M?ss(kQft
x x
.,
."
S·Nl0ICX),.NllICX) 43 78 78 35 4.5 70 50 19 10 106 4. 0.3 5
r-- i~1.'91.'9
!, ., S-N12ICx) 53 78 78 40 4.5 50 19· 10 106 4 0.32 5

!L_
~(,2)
D !m S-N16(CX)
Sb-Nl1ICx)
43
43
79 91 .30 6
78 110 35 4.5 70. 50
60 13
19
10 109 4 0.33 5
10 139 4 0.62 5
SD-N12(CX) 53 78 110 40 4.5 50 19 10 139 4 0.64 5
AS I AA Note: Front clip-on and side clip-on aux. contact blocks should not
13.5 A 1\ M3.5screw be mounted both. .
AO T OA

(with side clip-on sux. (wilh front c1ip-on aux.


CO~tacI bl.ockJ contact block)

I for "'14
2rnlg. hoes =-
I
M4$C:rew M3.5screw
,/ t~~;:f.t~~~~'~~fiA~{±?'J~:?rf.;¢.:jl1.M~.t!~¥:i~~.J{~~,¥{~*t;¢.¢\,cA~i~p~~'~(Jffitt
® ® /;;§. 5-N20ICX),.21ICXJ 63 91 81 54 4.5 90 60 14 6.5 109 4. 0.4 5
r-- ~®QOQO~ -j .. ~
~r-- 5-N25ICX),·N35ICx) 75 89 91 65 5 102 70 13 6.6 119 4 0.52 5

j ~ 0 : ! .,., . ., ~! SD-N21ICX) 63 .81 113 54 4.5 90 60 14 6.5 141 4 0.72 5

~®®®~ j ~l_ L ----'--*i o Top


\
Hat rail
SD·N35ICX)
SLD-N21
75
63
69· 123 65
81 137 54
5
45
102 70
90 60
13 6.5 151. 4 0.85 5
14 6.5 4 0.55" 5
'-- 135mm)
SLD-N36 75 69 147 85 5 102 70 13 6.5 4 0.67 5
AB AA 00
Note: Front clip-on and side clip-on aux. contact blocks should not
13.5 A T o
be mounted both.
AO T OA
(with fronl clllXln aux..
(with side cUp-on aux. contact block)
CD1ltac1 block)

2 mIg. hDl"" fDr M .s<:reW!i • Key to Dimensions·


~ -:;;::"~~~,·,s.::-.,'.,.".·, ,A."., .R ·.·_.}:;~·.M,._A8.-' AC" 8.8., ,..8.f"-,·CC,.·,CA,,-· D"."M·,_,_ ~,.Ma,,(kg);r,·
000 " S-N50~::'N65 .';";:.~ 88 106 106 70 9 75 15.5 10 135 4.5 M4 M6 0.75 10

. ir-J
--, 75 15.5 10 135 45 M4 M6 o.n
1"-
i @S 0 . j m
m
.5-N5OCX, 'N55.GJq, 86 108 106 70
.~~N~cr,:~N95':l:":.,;:. 100 124 127 80
9
10 128 110 7 12 M5 M6 1.8
10
10

L @S~ ~ ~ ..i
t~ ~ ~
Ll SPd"50·,':N65"~:~ 88 107.5133 70
-SD:N80~':N95:- ~~: 100 134 157 80
SL'1>l50;'N65,". ' 88 106135.5 70
9 -

9
75 15.5 10
10 126 110 7 12 -
-
75 15.5 10
- M4 M6 2.1
.M5 M6 3.3 -
- -
M4 M6 1.3
10
10
10
AB I AA
\ ;\ D
SL-N~D,-N95:;;"::: 100 172 127 60 10 128 110 7 12 - M5 M6 2.1 - 10
A T C
AC M4=.W T C'
(with s1d~ /1IIlllnted a,,>:. {WIthheld cllp-<>n But.
conl!ld. b1oclc) tonLlclbJoc>;j

• Key to Dimensions
. -:;.... . ....... .. .,f';: :-.. 8,:'',l,C::,'.M . A8! 8.8;,.8A,' CCYCA:
~: ~:- ~;D ;';:;.M-.:"J .p,. -Mass{kg).:'r:y.

4 mIn, holes for Mscrews


S-N125 .,.,.,,',. 100 150 137 90 5 125. 12.5 1.6 - - M4 M8 2.5 3D
S-N'.50 .': .,.... 120 160 145 100 10 125 17.5 1.6 - - M5 M8 3.2 30
I ~ S-N180,-N220 138 204 175 120 9 190 7 1.6 - - M6 Ml0 5.5 30
0'0 d OID f- S-N300,-N400 163 243 195 145 9 225 9 2.3 M8 M12 9.5 50
0 ~ S-N600,-N800 290 310 235 250 20 250 30 10.5 - Ml0 M16 27 10
0
0
0
SD-N125. 102 150 162 90 5 125 12.5 1.6 - - M4 M8 4.3 30
SD·N150' ........
120 160169.5100 10 125 17.5 1.6 - - M5 M8 4.3 30
0 lil'"
0 SD-N220 .. 136 .204 200.5 120 9 190 7 2.0 M6 MlO 7.5 3D
0 SD-N300,-N400 163 243 221 145 9 225 9 2.3 - M8 M12 13.5 50

I~O 0 oi I--
SD-N600,-N800 375
SLID)-!;I125 100
310 235 250 20 250 30
191 137 90 5 125 12.5
10.5
1.6 -
- -
-
Ml0
M4
M16
M8
29
3.0
10
30

! I AA
A
I A'tl 4 screw SL(D)-N150
SL(D)-N220
120
136
201 145 100 10 125 17.5
224 175 120 9 190 7
1.6 -
1.6
- M5
M6
M8
Ml0
3.6
6.0
3D
30
SL(Dl·N300,-N400 163 259 195 145 9 225 9 2.3 M8 M12 10 50
SL(°l-N6DO,-NBCO 290 390 235 250 20 250 30 10.5 - Ml0 M16 27 10

30
1.10.2 Outline Dimensions of Reversing Contactors
- ~~
N ml hgles fgr M srnws
a s[;l"e..... P screw ..
r~00"'$ 3"'. 0~
m
m

1~m
i.

AB .
~e0e~

.
0
AA
D
3"'0."'~

/'
I
I
a) ,,~
A 'a.s T
b) IN m1". hglss 19r M ScrllWS
o screw P s~rsw N ml • hCllas lot Mscrews

o I- eO o o~
••

c)
o 0
o

0
••
0•

0
o

o
..•••
o 0-
I
,:
AB AA
A T1-_---'0'-_ . d) S(D)-2xN600/N800
• Key to Dimensions
~';,..~:¥';:.-s.~i.:"-;Type·~"i ~-:'~~;;';~0 1~.f,ig:~~ "'M'·$,' ~:§'"af)~\ ;p.p~:f.:': :;iAA~.r~ :~,Al?'( ,f,AC--;;-';' ?":~BA~'} /:-?B"~i. .,:CC·;,· <:N'I".; ~.;1.M+~·i ;.!r·f.'~';'~ ·"'i1.\,."; MaSS(kg) .h:rh
.?'~·S~\S;2xN101N1:';~~F:\t,}..~:: a .99 78 78 35 4.5 21 50 19 10 4 104 103.5 103.5 0.64 5
;. "=-"'* S-2xN1.B:';'.;J·,:-:~2;~'::-Sit{~~\' a 96 79 109 30 3.5 23 60 13 10 4 104 104 103.5 0.75 5
.;,,:'tS-2xN2D1N21 ",.,,:,.{ll','· a 136 81 81 54 4.5 19 60 14 6.5 4 104 104 103.5 0.8 5
t ;.8-2xN2s1N35 \t·::ur b 160 110 97 150 15 100 8 1.6 3 104 105 103.5 1.3 5
.,Lo;;S-2xN50n,/65 .i/c;"'~' b 216 115 112 204 8 100 8 2 3 105 106 104 2.6 10
.,,- S'2xNBDlN95 b 270 140 137 247 11.5 100 32 10 3 108 106 104 4.3 10
';:" ..S-2xN125· ···c .•.. 0 276 150. 148 255 10.5 125 12.5 1.6 4 108 MB 104 5.7 30
.',,' S·2iN150'··:"
, '.'" 0 296 160 156 275 10.5 125 17.5 1.6 4 106 108 M4 7.2 30
.. 370 215 189 34D 15 190 12.5 1.6 4 M8 Ml0 30
S·2xN1801220 ;v14 12
'·:,.'-·S,2xN300iN40O.
,, 0
c 395 250 209 365 15 225 12.5 2.3 4 MB M12 104 20.5 50
~ ~ -S;2x:N600lNBOD '..:: .. d 660 - 54
':'.;:. SO-2x!'l11·;.':" :;,:.;_,,:-.- a 99 78 110 35 4.5 21 50 19 10 4 M4 M3.5 103.5 1.3 5
. "·'.SD-2xN21,,'!',.. ·.·,.,·;." ..., b 160 100 119 150 5 90 5 2 3 104 M4 M3.5 1.7 5
-;.fE; $o:.2xN35~;'. ~f.,.~ -·~,;:'0:':'j.;t;<· b 160 113 129 150 5 100 8 1.6 3' M4 M5 M3.5 2.0 5
~~$;;SJF2xNq_O/N,65.::~Y:j?A~.: b 216 116.5 133 204 6 100 8 2 3 105 M6 104 4.5 10
;¥."f~1-S.~:::~N801N.9~;~
..\2;::~· b 270 140 167 247 11.5 100 32 10 3 M6 106 104 6.4 10
·~?:~$.Q..gxMt?59F.·:;c:,r;M:~~ c 276 150 173 255 10.5 125 12.5 1.6 4 106 MB 104 9.2 30
::;, :;:$p';?><!'li ~p;;" .. ~.:"<.::;;' c 296 160 160.5 275 10.5 125 17.5 1.6 4. 106 M8 M4 10 30
·~~~~(:}So;2XN~p£;?-K-#~ft~.:· 0 370 216 214.5 340 15 190 12.5 1.6 4 109 Ml0 M4 17 30
~~ft:.$q;2X~.3Pom40P~i. c 395 250 235 365 15 225 12.5 2.3 4 M8 1012 M4 29 50
L~'"';~S.D~2X~6dolN~do>~';i~: d 600 64

1m Latched Contactors
(Reversing)

4.5 19

'" 13S.S a)
SL(D)-2xN21

n-m\9h~l~
l~rM~C"a... III ~,)~,
'~ '" 6 "'1 ho!lI~ lor M1 DSCII!"'"
b) 650

SL-2xN600/N800 (Mass: 60kg)


• Key to Dimensions
:. Type ..Fig. . A. S .. C AA AS 6A(Se) SS CC N M P. Q Mass(kg) T
SL(D)-2xN35 a 160 113 153 150 5 lDO B 1.6 3 M4 M5 M3.5 2.2 5
SL(D)-2xN50/N65 a 218 115 141.5 204 6 100 6 2 3 M5 M6 M4 3.2 10
. SL(D)-2xN801N95 b 270 184 137 247 11.5 100 74 10 3 106 M6' M4 5.3 10
SL(D)-2xN125 b 276 191 148 255 10.5 125 53.5 11 4 M6 MB M4 6.7 30
SL(0)-2xN150 b 296 201 156 275 10.5 125 59.5 11 4 M8 MB M4 B.6 30
SL{D)-2xN220 b 370 230 189 340 15 190 27 14 4 MB M1D' M4 13 30
SL(D)-2xN300IN400 b 395 253 209 365 15 225 25 14 4 MB M12 M4 21.5 50'

31
M3.5 screw
M3.5 screw , P screw
~

'" \ . "''''/ m

f~
m

I I
~
' ' O' '@ ;:; -- .--
~D
0

:'l
~
0
~
:'l
l "'®®~ - m
f-- 2 mig. holes
..l-
2 mig. holes
0 "- lorMscrews

'®~
for M4 screws
4 !o>®®
RESET BAR
10
RESET BAR
l'---c.......r I-i A8 AA \. RESEfBAR CO
4' 7' 1!!. l- T C
~ A
SS 7'
a) MSO-N10/N11(KP)(CX) c)
b) MSO-N12(KP)(CX)
(Mass: O.38kg) (Mass: 0.42kg)
N mig. holes for M screws
p screw p screw
,..--
A N mtg. holes for M screws
AS AA CC
:ill/: M4screw

+
®®®¥
D~
~ ~".:,~
;:;
m

_., I\
W
Q
mo
CJ

O· 0'
@

~
;:;
In
I
'0; e)
d) 0·0 0
~®%L, . CC
AA •
AS T c·

• Key to DImenSIOns
. . T C
.
A

. Type Fig. A B· C' ·AA ' AB' BA BB·' ,... CC ·N '.' .·'.M·,;·· '(-~:Pl':.::·it'- Mass(~'g); ~·~hJi'f!'.
MSD-N18(KP){CX) .. c 54 122 81 30 7 60 13 10 2 M4 M4(M3.5) 0.5· 5
MSD-N20{KP)(CX}.",/,., c 63 127 81 54 4.5 60 '14 6.5 2 M4 M4{M3.5) 0.6 5
MSD-N21(KP)(CX)'";"" c 63 127 81 54 4.5 60 14 6.5 2 M4 M4(M3.5) 0.6' 5
" MSD-N25/N35(KP)(CX}'" c 75 157 91 65 5 70 13 6.5 2 M4 M5{M3.5) 0.8 5 :
···MSO-N501N65{KP) "!S',;'. d. 90 158 106 70 9 75 16 10 2 M4 M6 2.2 10
., ,MSO;N501N65(KP)CX,"C,' d 9.2 160 106 70 9 75 16 10 2 M4 M6 2.3 10
::MsP'NaolN!t5(Kpy~:. .. d 100 196 127 80 10 110 7 12 2 M5 M6 3.2 10
. ~ "MSO~N125(I:<P}':~:?~~§:?!-;;,;!:: e 112 239 137 90 14 125 12.5 1.6 4 M4 M8 4.2 30
:".:. ~~Q.Nlt!O(KPr·f.;t;1:-##·.~-:. e 120 250 145 100 10 . 125 17_5 1.6 4 M5 Ms: 7.7 30
·;jCMSG.-N'·BdfN22d(KP).".;,<.'
'. MSO-N300lN400(KP) ·,;.;,r •e 144
163
282
358
180.5
195
120
145
12
9
190
225
7
9
1.6
2.3
4
4
M6
M8
Ml0
M12
7.7
12.5
30
50
Note: 1. Value In paretheslS shows tenmnal screw of coll and auxlllary contact.
..
G Reversing Starters without Enclosures
Q SCfew
P screw
P screw Q screw
A
fA ~ c

I,- '-'-
o 0
n.--.91 •
:•
I
....l..-.f ---'- ~
.. ~<b$ .•..
~ .9~:;:; - m
D
··•• .
;:;

A'

a)
....
AA
Q

AA .\ N mIg. ~oles lor M screws

A'

b)
'0@

M
N mIg. holes lor M screws

c)
A' AA
A
o 0 0 III

• Key to Dimensions
Type Fig. A S Q. ·.M: AS AC. BA ..· BS CC·. N. ' M . P .' ".Q. . Mass{k9) ....-T:.
MSD-2xNl OINll (KP)(CX) a 99 79 115 35 4.5 21 50 19 10 4 M4 M3.5 M3.S 0.76 5
MSD-2xN18{KP){CX} a 97 109 122 30 6.5 23 60 13 10 4 M4 M4 M3.5 0.9 5
MSD-2xN201N21 [KP)(CX) , 136 138 81 54 4.5 19 60 14 6.5 4 M4 M4 M3.5 1.0 5
MSD-2xN25/N35[KP)(CX) n. .160 158 97 150 5 - 100 8 1.6 3 M4 M5 M3.5 1.3 5
MSD-2xNSO/N60[KP)[CX) b 216 169 112 204 6 100 17 2 3 M5 M6 M4 2.9 10
MSD-2xN80fN95[KP) b 270 213 137 247 11.5 100 45.5 10 3 M6 M6 M4 4.6 10
MSD-2xN125[KP) c 276 251 148 255 10.5 125 24.5 11 4 M6 M8 M4 6.6 30
MSD-2xN150[KP) c 296 276 156 275 10.5 125 43.5 11 4 M6 M8 M4 8.5 30
MSO-2xN180fN220{KP) c 370 304 194.5 340 15 190 28.5 14 4 M8 Ml0 M4 14.5 30
MSO-2xN300/N400(KP) c 395 392 209 365 15 225 42.5 14 4 M8 M12 M4 24.5 50

32
1.10.4 Outline DImensions of Enclosed Motor Starters
1m Nonreversing Starters with Enclosures ",'Mmlo.holu

, i_l ~
cb ~
ti:l
I, . ~

I
I •

3-'Mml~.I>oI8S !?oft-
- t I t' l-
I •
0

~
AA
~

0
D
~
wo..'Y ~
~.'N
:7" ~
2><2-#22 . r ~ "D
knDckoul hIllQ . EII<tt1lonri/lll -l!L1". Eal1hl......na1
MS-N1 O(KP)(CX)-N21 (KP) MS-N25(KP)-/'l400(KP)

, • Key to Dimensions
.\~~~iigij?;[~1YP~e·~;E~.J'·~~:f~:'~,~1,f~~~ AM·~S '??A~;0' ·}xt~·~~ ·~KBAft c,'

~_~~:~;~;~~~i6~;i~l~~~:
," f,ASCN20!KI')INi'ii'(KP)i'·n,
76'
76
104
45
45
76
33
33
50
159.
159
170
120
120
140
£36:;, ''Be
21
21
15
6
6
6
, ';c"
97,5
97,5
110
" CA.:',,:., ",M,'f, J:Y~ i.,N f\.. .·.,;:,;! 'Mass(kg}'.:
21,5
21,5
30
5
5
6
22
22
22
0,8
0,9
1.1
M~N25(KR)iN35(KP)i,,> 135 95 50 225 165 30 6 126 45 6 28 2,0
" M§Nso(KPj'\:.:O;::'l:,:-.--- 160 120 80 270 220 25 12 145 45 6 22x35 3,2
MS,N65(KPk" '".,".'." 160 120 80 270 220 25 12 145 45 6 22x35 3,2
MS-N80/N95(KP) :.:::-'.:~ .', 190 150 100 300 260 20 12 163 67 7 22x35 4,0
MS-1'l125(KP) ,:'.- ;: 230 170 90 380 330 25 12 190 80 9 44x50' 8,0 '
MS'Nf50(KP) "::, 270 200 120 480 400 40 12 209 85 9 44x50 12.8
MS-N180/N220(KP), . 270 200 120 480 400 40 12 209 85 9 44x50 '16,2
.MS-N300/N400(KP):. ; 0:'; 440 320 160 590 480 55 12 220 140/90' 11 62x78 28
=I: Left value is for power-supply side, right for load side.

iIij Enclosed Type Nonreversing Starters with Pushbuttons


.. ~" .hol••

.£ m
L-J
~ .
0
,t . t·
I M ~

l!><2·,tf Jf1 " ~I


~~E.l\hl.TII'IlnI.l
llncckOlllholu

MS-N1 OPM(KP)-N21 PM(KP) MS-N25PM(KP)-N95PM(KP)

• Key to Dimensions
" Type
, ,. .
'.:'A',,' ,,'M , . 'AB: B" BA BB BC· C CA M 1'1 Mass(kg)
• MS-N1 0/1'111 PM(KPji,'>':, 76 45 33 159 120' 21 6 114 22 4 22 0.9

- ~~:~~~~~(~~~:~;.sH~}·' 104

135
76

95
50

50
170

225
140

165
15

30
6

6
114

130
30

45
6

6
22

28
1.3

2.1
MS-N25/N35PM(KP),"
MS-N50/N65PM(Kf') 160 120 80 270 220 25 12 149 45 6 22x35 3.3
MS-N80/N95PM(KP) 190 150 100 300 260 20 12 167 67 7 22x35 4,1

33
........ IVIII ;:'UOI;:,nl t:LCI." I I"'ill."
2. MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS
2.1 Thermal Overload Relays
TH-N Series Thermal Overioad Relays Will Make a Convenience and Safer
Systems.

TH-N12 TH-N20 TH-N12CX

·A Selection of Relays for Optimum • Display and External Trip Mechanism


Motor Protection Characteristics TH-N12(KP)
Th,nheimal relay line-up includes two-element units as well as Display External Trip

--
the phase failure protection type models (three-element relays),


~

..,.~
..:;'. '''"'Ii
Display

) ----
all with the same external dimensions..
This array of protection characteristics allows you to choose . , '. window

the units best suited to YOUr motor protection needs.


When the green or the display
leVBr can be seen, !he cellit:!
lever "." lever.
Maintenance and Inspection Are Easy has been reset ,
,.. ol.sPlay
,
.,~ ."
An operation indicator makes maintenance and inspection easy.
Checks can be performed using manual operations. ..

~
::
~. window
When reset When tripped

When the green·of the lever turned Can be tripped manua"y by turning In the display lever.
1NO + 1NC Contacts In,!he device has been trlpped.

97 95
TH-N20(KP)-N600(KP)
Display 1"
External Trip .. ' Dispi~y
~nver Iwindow
~+--( ~=~~~ Oisplaywindow 0 ~~~:ai

contacts.
98 95

1 NO and 1 NC contacts can be


used independently as signals
100
When Ihe display window Is
green Ihe deviee ha~ been
m When the dl~play
window Is
white the device ha~ been
Reset TrlPpJ'
Can be tripped manually by
pushing In with a screwdriver
reset. lrlpped. ami turning the display lever•

• Switching Between Automatic and Manual Reset


Rated Current Can Be Set Easily
The value of the rated current is displayed on a dial. TH-N12(KP)-N600(KP)
Simply adjust the dial to the full-load current of the motor and Manual Reset Mode Automatic Reset Mode
Stopper
motor protection is assured.

Finger Protectors
Modeis with finger protectors that conform to DIN VDE 0106
Part 100 (TH-NDCX) are also available.
Swilchover Switchover
Various Accessories plate plate
Swllchlng lrom manual to alJlomalic: : Break the stopper 011 and theil, snde the
• Independent mount adaptor for TH-NI2(CX). switchover plata to the rfght (10 position -A") 10 ImmobilIze the reset bllr.
: UN-HZI2(CX) SwItching from alJlomaUc 10 manual: Slide Ihe switchover- plale \0 Ihe left (to
poslllon"H'). .
• Reset release: UN-RRDDD
• Trip indicating LED: UN-TLDD TH-N20(KP)-N600(KP)

Trip-Free Reset Bar


Choose between automatic and manual reset. Also features
triptree reset bar mechanism.

SWitching from manual to automatic: Flip the stopper on the end of


the reset bar down and then, after pushing it all the way in, rotate it
counterclockwise 90" {to position "NJ.
Switching from automatic to manual: Rotate the reset bar 90 0
clockwise (to position ~H-) and the reset bar will pop out.

34
SeriesTH-N
2.1.1 Selection Guide of Thermal Overload Relays Table 2.1.1

0.5 1 0.17A 0.14-0.22


1 2 0.24A 0.2-0.32
- 0.03(1/24) 0.06(1/12) 0.06(1/12) 0.0911/8)
1 2 0.35A 0.28-0.42 0.05(1/16) 0.09(1/8) 0.09(1/8) 0.12(1/6)
1 2 O.5A 0.4-0.5 0.06(1/12) 0.12(1.6) 0.12(1.6) 0.18(1/4)
2 4 . 0.7A 0.55-0.85 0.09(1/8) . 0.18(1/4) 0.18(1/4) 0.25(1/3)
--.::2--f--C"4----/----+:0':.9-OA--t·"0.'=7.=:1-':.1,.:-:.-i ~ 0.12(1/6) 0.25(1/3) 0.25(1/3) 0.37(112)

1.3A 1.D-l.6 0.18(1/4) 0.37(1/2)


2 4 0.37{1/2) 0.55(3/4)
0.55(314)
4 6 1.7A .1.4-2.0 0.25(1/3) 0.55(3/4) 0.75(1) 0.75(1)
4 6 2.1A 1.7-2.5 0.37(112) 0.75(1) 1.1(1-1/2)
@
6 10 2.5A 2.0-3.0 z 0.55(3/4) 1.1(1-112) 1.1(1'1/2) 1.5(2)
6 10 , a.sA 2.8-4.4 0.75(1) 1.5(2) 1.5(2) 2.2(3)
B 16 5A 4.D-6.0 1.1{1-112) 22(3) 2.2(3) 3(4)
12 20 a.SA 5.2-8.0 1.5(2) 3(4) 3,3.7(4.5) 3.7(5)
3.7(5) 3(4)
12 20 9A 7.D-ll 22(3) 3.7(5) 5,5(7-1/2)
4(5-1/2)
16 25 32M35 l1A 9.0-13 3(4) 5.5(7-1/2) 5.5(7-1/2) 7.5(10)

20 32 32M50 15A 12-18 ~zg


~ 3.7(5) 7.5(10) 7.5(10)
9(12.5) 9(12/5)
25 40 32M63 19N 16-22 5.5(7-112) 11(15)
40 63 32M63 22A 18-26 5.5(7-112) 11(15)
50 80 63MBO 2BA 24-34 7.5(10) 15(20)
63 80 63M80 35Az 30-40 9(12.5) 18.5(25)
63 100 100Ml00 42A 34-50 11(15) 22(30)
80 125 l00M125 54A 43-65 15(20) 30(40)
100 160 lOOM160 67A 54-80 18.5(25) 37(50)
125 200 lOOM200 82A' 65-100 22(30) 45(50) .
200 100M200 95A3 85-105 30(40) 55(75)
250 20DM250 lOSA 85-125 30(40) 55(75)
250 2ooM250 125A 100-150 37(50) 75(100)
'315 200M315 150A 120-180 45(60) 90(125)
400 180A 140-220 55(75) 110(150)
500 210A' 17D~250 75(100) 132(180)
132(180) 132(180)
630 250A 200-300
B 75(100)
160(220) 160(220)
1601220)
8
~ 90(125) 220(300)
630 33DA 260-400 z 200(270) 200(270)
110(150) 250(340)
'-8 220(300) 220(300)
z"' 132(180)
800 SODA 400-600
180(220)
250(340) 250(340) 400(530)
300(400) 300(400)
200(270)
1000 660A 520-800 400(530) 400(530) 500(670)
2201300)
Notes: 1. For starter size N20, N21 only. 2. For starter size N35 only. 3. For starter size N95 only. 4. For starter size N220 only.
5. Selection by mounting

.. ~ . .. W/o F/P

W/o F/P TH·N12(KPj TH·N20IKP) - TH·N60IKPj - TH·N120(KP) TH-NI20TAHZIKPi TH·N220HZIKPI TH~400HZj1(PJ TH·N600(KPj
lndependenl +UN·HZ12 +CTs
f---+-""-'-''''-1f----+---/----+---+----If----+---+---/---+-------j
mounling With F/P TFf-N12CXKP Tli·N20CXHZKP TH-N50CXKP
+UN-HZ12CX
* Use "Cormectzng parts" when couple WIth conlaclOr (see Table 2.1.6(3)).

35
2.1.2 Selection Guide of the Current Transformers for TH-N600KP Table 2.1.2

Heater Designation(A) 250 330 500 660

* Current transformer to be supplied by.customer.


2.1.3 Technical Data Table 2.1.3
':;_"·_""Thr~eJJe.ter type'';i/Jll'· N12KP(CXY ~jB)<P(CX) N2QK!'(CXj N2U!AKP(CXlN'Okp(c19. N6bTAk~, ,~.i2bk~:~ H12QTAK'p' .N?2QRB'Y'il)4QOJIIJi<JJ: ,:tlfi1l9kJ>,;1
;.....<:. ~qwo~,alertype'S "'JfI-' N12(CX).:. "N1B(CX). N2o(Ox).• N20TA(CX)••N6olGX)· .:'):J60r""· h N.120y•• ·j.N,120TEc·: ::N2fl!flH'" ";,N!fl0R~';} ::ii.!"69b·'~'
;.M~,setti!J·g~!!i[~bf;·';.'(\f.~~;~..:;A: 13 18 22 40 65 105 100 150 220 400 800
~ Ran.ge.ofsettl'1g·quiTent.:,.~~(::-~~;;;.2,A 0.1-13 2.8-18 0.2-22" 18-44 12-65 54-105 34-100 85-150 65·250 85-400 200-800
: ~ Rated insulap~ri,vol~9~;'f::-.':r.:~~~.~ ..V" 690 690 S90 690 690 690 690 690 1000 moo 690
i Pe~lssible'ambleOt t~mperatute''-': ~ ·~C·" -25 to + 55

Via eTs Via CTs'


: Max.-heater dissipation per current patti -
~ ,~'. ': ' '~;;::, Min. setting . ;:l'W o.B 0.9 o.B 1.4 1.7 2.4 2.5 3.2 2.5 2.5 2.5
;.~', "".-' ~ 'Max.setting ,::W 1.B 2,2 2.2 3.5 4.9 5.2 7.1 B.6 6.0 6.0 6.0
Auxiliary contact . :, 1NO+1NC
Raled opemting currenl of aux. contacts
Category NO ---:',,2o":V"----'A't 2
:: +- -:2: ..-
AG-15 contact ....::2.::4o:,V:,-.::A.:.+ --,.::1;:-__ +- --,.::';:- _
500V A 0.5 0.5
NG 120V A 2 3
contact 240VA 1 2
50DV.· A 0.5 1
Category .. 4BV. A 0.4 ' 0,5
lD~?:::~~~{;jh-. . ~.• .: ~ : :~.c..~'--;'--.• ~::.4.----:~:::~---------1f---------------...:~::::2:" ---------------

M4 M4 M6 M6 MB M8 M4
M3.5 M4 M4 M5 M6 M6 M8 MB Ml0 M12 M4
0.24A-2 3.6A-2 0.24A-2 22A-5.5 15A·3.5 67A-22 42A-14 10SA·60
I I I 29/35A-B 22A-5.5 82/95A-3B 54/67A-22 12SA-60
11A·2 l1A·2 l1A·2 29/35A-8 82A-3B
15A·3.5 15A·3.5 42A-14
19A·3.5 54A-22
: Max: conductor size'. , .
: Main',~ line side ':":~~i, (2.5)2 6 25 38 60 6
:, ;",' ~ .',: load sfcle ;'.-': mm2 2.5 6 6 16 25 38 38 60 150 240 6
Busbar. width ,.
_..' '''One'slde mm 15 20 20
.' : ' :', ' t;.oaCf side IT!m. 15 20 20 20 25 3D
;: 'Aux. con'tacts , ., mm2 2.5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Notes: 1. Used with CUTTent transfanner (to be supplied by the customer). See Table 2.1.2_
2. When used with UN-HZ 12(CX)adaptor.

2.1.4 Selection Guide of Quick Trip Thermal Overload Relay Table 21 4


Applicable contactor S-N1D S-N20 S-N25 S-N50 S-N80
S-N11 S·N21 S·N35 S-N65 S-N95
$-N12 S-N25 S-NBO
S·N35 S-N95
Three heater type with TH·N12KF TH·N20KF TH-N20TAKF TH-N60KF TH-N6oTAKF
phase failure protection'
T"(o healer type - TH-N20FS TH·N20TAFS TH·N60FS TH-N60TAFS

Heater setting range 1.7-2.5(2.1A) 1.7-2.5 (2.1A) 18-26 (22A) 34-50 (42A) 54~BO (67A)
(Ordering designation) 2.B-4.4(3.6A) 2.8-4.4 (3.6A) 24~34 (29A) 43-65 (54A) 65-93 (B2A)'
4-6(5A) 4-6 (5A) 30-40 (35A)'
5.2-8(5.6A) 5.2-8 (6.6A)
7-11(9A) 7-11 (9A)
9-13(11Aj 9-13 (11A)
12-18 (15A)

Notes: *1. Only for S-N35.


*2. Dniy for S-N95.
36
2.1.5 Operating Characteristics of Thermal Overload Relays
(Connecting wire size: Refer Table 2.1.2)
TH·N12 TH.N18 TH·N20·TH·N20KP
TH·N12Kp·TH·N12SR TH.N18KP TH-N20SR·TH-N20KPSR
~ ~
2 2
,
'h)
, ,
1 Amb. Temp.: 20'C Amb. Temp.: 20'C , Amb. Temp.: 20'C
I') I')
'DO 0 'DO 0 I'l ,
~gg !800 1000
.DO 'DO
~~
'DO
0" 0
With reactors ~
.§ 100
i,<T-N12SR)- . 0 " With reactors; r-
~ ~ ~\ " 0
0 \' ,, (TH-N20SR) t-
0
1\\
t~
0 ,0
0

f.\.
,
0
0

1\."-
0
, .
.- -
-
s . 0
s 0
-
•• •• ••
s

2
Single phasing r-
2
Single phasing . 2
Single phasing
(TH-N20KP, .
.1 (TH-N12KP
g.l t-!TH-N1SKP ,
.6!=Mean
.- value) .
o..
.6l::Mean value) o
o
oA
..
.S
Mean value)

• 0.811.5234568101S
2
0.B1 1.5 2 3456810 1S 2
Multiples,of setting current 0.8 1 1.5 2 3 4. 5 6 8 10 15
Multiples of setting current
Multiples·of setting current

TH-N20TA.TH·N20TAKP TH·N60·TH·N60TA TH·N120·TH·N120KP


TH·N20TASR·TH·N20TAKPSR TH·N60KP·TH·N60TAKP TH-N120SR.TH·N120KPSR
TH·N60SR·TH-N60TASR TH·N120TA·TH·N120TAKP
TH·N60KPSR.TH·N60TAKPSR TH·N120TASR·TH-N120TAKPSR
, ~)
, (h)
,
, Amb. Temp.: 20t , Amb. Temp.: 20'C
, Amb. Temp.: 20"c

I,)
'"
'DO 0
!88
\DDO
~g 00
,
I'I
\DDO
lii"
.DO 0
"
With reactors "
200 . 'DO
With reactors

..
(TH-N2OTASR) Wilh reactors - ,
.§ 100 (TH-N120(TA)S~
0
0
, I,' I<' ....
'"
S0
0 Ix ,( [rH-N60SR) -
0 , \ <7
~ ~
0
0
, "
o f-
'. r\ f":-< -
0

0
s "
,
. -
~
0 ,0
0

s
t00
.
- r:: o Single phasing" - -
F=
~~ I-

•• ••I - Single phasing : [rH-N120[rAIKP,


.
I- Single phasing 4~an~uel
'r- (TH-N20TAKP, 2 r- [rH-K60[rA)KP, ,r-
.•,r--
1 ~ Mean value)
o..
...•
oll=t- Mea~ value)
-~= +--
g.S ,-c
o.- o ..•• f- f-
-
o2 2 '1-
0.8 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 0.8 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 2
0.81 1.5 2 34 S6 810 15
MullipJes of setting current Multiples of setting current
Muitiples of setting current

TH·N220RH , TH-N600 ,
(h)

TH·N220RHKP ,- Amb. Temp.: 2D'c TH-N600KP , Amb. Temp.: 20"c


TH·N220RHSR TH·N600SR
TH·N220RHKPSR I')
'DOD
so, , TH·N600KPSR "
'DOD
)

TH·N400RH SOD .DO


0

""so
TH·N400RHKP "0 0
, With reaclors
TH·N400RHSR
TH·N400RHKPSR 0 ,, (TH-N220, ~
" , With reactors
0 , \ N400RHSR)
E
F
100
,0 1'-\ ,,\ .[ (TH-N600SR)
0
E: 0

- - -- - -
0
0 0
-
0
/ . -
~ 3
~
~
0 ," .
0
s
•• Single phasing
0,0
s " -
[rH-N220RHKP,
- ••!- Single phasing
,
2
N400RHKP,
Mean value) 2 :- (TH·N600KP I
.
o..
, Mean value)
I.... t-

...
o .S
.S
o.•

0.811.5"2345681015 2
0.81 1.5 2 3 4. 5 6 8 10 15
MUltiples of setting curren! MUflJples 01 setting current

37
2.1.6 Optional Parts and Accessories
Saturable Reactors lor Slow Tripping
r • Ordering des{gnation . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .,
I I

I
I
THR- G22 I
I
I I
I Part number I
I I
I see table2·1·6 I
I I
~------~------------------------~

Table 2.1.6 (1)

0.24A TSR-AOY TSR-COY


O.36A TSR-AOY TSR-COY
0.5A TSR-AOl TSR-GOY
TSR-A03 TSR-C03
'- 0.7A.
0.9A
1.3A
TSR-A05
TSR-A09
TSR-G03
TSR-G07
1.7A· TSR-Al1 TSR-G09
2.1A TSR-AI2 TSR-Gl0
2.5A TSR-AI3 TSR-G12
3.6A TSR-A15 TSR-G15
5A TSR-A18 TSR-C17
6,6A TSR-A21 TSR-G20
9A TSR-A23 TSR-G23
llA . TSR-A25 TSR-C25
15A TSR-G26 THR-G22
19A TSR-C29
22.A TSR-D28 . THR-G24
29A TSR-D29 THR-G26
35A TSR-D28 THR-G27
41A THR-G27 THR-H41
54A THR-G29 THR-H42
67A THR-G29 THR·H43
82A THR-G30 THR-H43 THR·Fl0
95A THR-G30
lOSA THR-H44 THR-F13
125A THR-H45 THR-F13
150A THR-F15
1BOA . THR-F16
210A THR-F17
250A THR-FI8' THR-EI3
330A 1HR~F19 THR~E'3
500A THR-E13
66DA THR-E13

Note: 1. Saturable reactors can be adopted onlyfor the two heater type TH-N12

Table 2.1.6 (2)

Thermal overload relay Part number Length (mm)


TH-N12(KP){CX) UN-RR205 200
TH-N18IKP)(CX) UN·RR405 400
UN-RR655 550
UN-RR705 700
1}i·N20.N20TA(KP){CX) UN·RR200 200
TH·N60{KP)--N600{KP)' UN-RR400 400
UN·RR550 550
. UN·RR700 700
.Separate m"e;;untfng adaptor::~:··~ ~:;.:;.: Thermal overloa~ relay Par1 number
........
'.. ....
"
TH-N12(TPIKP)
'"=,.....,--=:c==-~..;....---------....,..,==--'-----------
UN-HZI2
...• ,TH-N12(TP/KP)CX UN·HZI2CX

Note: 1. ExceptJor type TH-N60CX andTH-N60KPCX.

38
• Connecting Parts for Contactors to Thermal Overload Relays Table 2.1.6 (3)
For connection between
oontaetor (nonwreversing type) Overload relay Contactor Part number Mass(kg)
and thermal overload relay
TH-N20(CX)(KP) S-N20(Cl<), S(D)-N21(Cl<) UN-TH20 0.02
TH-N20(CX)(KP),-N20TA(CX)(KP) S-N25(CX), S(D)-N35(CX) UN-TH2S(CX) 0.02
TH-N60(KP)(CX) S-NSO(CX), -N65(CX) BH559N350 0.02
SO-N5D, -N65
'* Connecting bars and TH·N60(KP), ·N60TA(KP) S-NBO, -N95 ,BH569N35D 0.04
mDunring plDte Me inc:luded in SO-NBD, -N9S BH569N3S2 0.04
the au ojTH·K220RH(KP)
and TH-K4DDRH(KPJfor TH-N120(KP), N120TA(KP) S(Ol-N125 BHS79N355 0.36
S-1980. -K220. -K3OD. -K4DD. S(O -N1S0 BH589N355 0.36

2.1.7 Outline Dimensions


n
M35 screws

/: thole
5 mg.
.--rr-
DO x @® 4 r'"
-1
®®®
®® x ® 00 '"'" '"
'"
"l

_J\
i
@@@
76.5 I~@® (x
I {;)
Top Hat rail
(35mm)
MS.5 screws
8 35 4.5
TH-N 12(CX)(KP) (Mass: D,11 kg)
4B 83.5
M3.5 screws

TH-N12(CX}(KP) with mounting adapter UN-HZ12(CX)

TH-N18(KP)(CX) (Mass: D.14kg)

~~iit;'~0~:l:~~Yi~1~~!~;::~;:~t9;}~~:~~;$!:~~\!:~:;
":tK~}:g;.:~~j*~ 91.5 57 87 70 12 45 6 9 2' 4.5 Me - M4.· 0.28
~;IHiEi6.<i(k~)Cix.f,\~'\ 91.5 57 B7 70' 12 45 6 9 2 4.5 - M6 M4 0.2B
k~Ii{IW20iKP) 103 67 105 75 14 50 6 10' 2 B M8 M4 OAB
tf.'ii!i7NGhO(KPl. 83 42 B3.5 19 14 33 2 7 2 4.5 M4 M4 0.14

N-¢M mlg.holes (P') screws

~~{~~~~~k~&~;:i i:tM:::·~ii~~;~jt~~r¢~t~t~£l~~_~~~~§E~l;~~~;~~~:~f4J£~~rjlWl~:;):
~1!$~W!{~Ml,i~~j: 74 72 B3.5 Ms (M4) 0.2

MB (M6) 0.32
MB (MB) , 0.75
Pscrews
,-,IH'Nf;;OTAHZ(KPf, 112 103 105 75 45 50 45 10 2 6 MB (M8l 1.0

.. '..:. ;._' . M4Spj"""


~:: T"~°J. I
<0

~"r ~:> ..-. :


p
. '0' '0
bOl.1~..."j"",,,,,,,:n,,,,-, f -_ _-'c"-' I ':TH-N400RH(KP) "
144 114 179.5
144 160 193.5
M10
M12
2.5
2.7

C ' AA ,AS Mass


".f-
,-:.;:,/;;-<Typ'~ ",._. : '~:~.
A" B BA.., BB CC N M '.p
(kg)
. TH·N220HZ(KP) , 144 104 166.5 47 48.5 62 21 1B 4 6 Ml0 2.5
r··...
TH·N400HZ(KP) 144 173 166.5 47 48.5 B2 55.5 1B 4 6 M12 2.7
cc
AB
Note: Suffix "HZ" denotes separate mounting type.
P bolts 1--_-"~ _ __1

3S
A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
4. RELAYS Series SR-N

4.1 Contactor Relays

The MITSUBISHI series SR-N contactor relays are specially designed for use in low voltage control
circuit applications. Series SR-N have many superior features .

• Features
• High reliability: By adopting bifurcated moving contacts and by improving the shape of the
contacts, contact performance has been made more reliable than ever.
• Long life • Mountable on 35mm DIN rails. • Dust-proof construction
• Easily visible coil ratings • Easy wiring (self-risin\! terminal screws)
• Various accessories common with the series S-N contactors .
(Head-and side clip-on type additional aux. contact blocks, surge absorbers, safety covers)
SR-N4 • Finger protected types are available (DIN 571 06NDE 0106 Part 100)

- - -·Type Designation- - - - - ---- - -- - - - - -- - - - -- - - - ---- -- - - - - - -- - -- - --- -- - - - -- - -- - -- --- - -- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -, - --- --- - -- -- - - - - -- - ---


• Standard types

- N4 ~200V[1~I_*~I=2~A~2B~:::::;-t- - - - - l
'--'-C""OLNT=R=O=L-cTY=P""E--' TYPE COIL VOLTAGE' rC"'O'="=N""r=A-=C=T-:-A"'R=RA'"'N""G=E=M=E=N=T"::(C"'O=D=E"')
SR AC operated See Table 4.1.2 See Table 4.1.5
SRD DC operated
*
JH
Standard type
Big capacity type
SRL' AC & Latched LC With overlap contact type
SRLD' DC & Latched CX' With finger protection cover

Notes: 1. For latched type relays, JH and LC types cannot be available.


2. When ordering the latched type relays, please specify the closing coil and tripping coil voltage.
*
ex: SRL-N4 MC-A C200V MT-A C J OOV 4A * *
cw~ngcoil trippmgcoil
3. Only suffu "ex" is admitted to make any combination with other tabulated suffixes.

Note: Mark * indicates a blank space.

.40
4.1.1 Specifications
• Rating and characteristics Table 41 1 (1)
SA-
Type N4 (CX) N4JH (CX) N4LC (CX)
SAO-
Available contact arrangements (code) 4NO{4A) 4NO (4A) 4NO (4A)
3NO+,NC (3A1B) 2NO+2NC (2A2B) 2NO+2NC (2A2B)
2NO+2NC (2A2B)

Rated insulation voltage V 660-


Rated continuous current "h A 16 20 16
Rated operating current 110VAC A 6 '0 6 (3)'
Category AC·15 230VAC A 5 10 5 (3)'
{coil load) 440VAC A 3 ' 5 3 (3)'
550VAC A 3 4 3 (3)'
110VAC A 16 20 16
Category AC·12 230VAC A 12 16 12
(resistive load) 440VAC A 5 10 5
550VAC A 5 10 5
24VDC A 5 3
Category DC·13 48VDC A 3 2
(large coil/oad) 1,OVDC A 0.8(2)1 0.5
220VDC A 0.2(0.8)' 0.1

24VDC A 8 5
Category DC·14
48VDC
110VDC
A
A
3
2(4)1 ,
2

220VDC A 0.4(1)1 0.2

24VDC A 10 8
Category 0(;..12 48VOC A 8 5
(resistive load) 110VDC A 5(8)' 3
220VDC A 1(3)1 0.5

Mechanical life Operations 10 million (latched type 1 million)


Electrical life Operations 0.5 million
Permissible ambient temperature/hurnidity °C/%RH -25 10 +55145 to 85
Coil consumption Inrush VA 60
Ac-operated Sealed VA 10
Walls W 3
DC-operated ~atts W 7
Call voltage tolerance times· 0.85 to 1.1 (rated coil vollage)
Operating time Make ms 15 (AC ) 50 (DC )
(average) Break ms 10 operated 10 operated
operations
Switching frequency 1,800
/hour
Vibration resistance l0·55Hz mis' 19.6
Shock resistance '0 msec. half sine wave mis' 49
Conductor size mm' 1.0t02.5
NOles: 1. Parentheslzed rated operatmg currem is for swttchmg the load in 2-pole serles connectIOn.
2. Parenthesized rated operating Cllrrenr is for switching ofNC contact.

• Coil voltage Table 4 ..


1 1 (2)

Coil Rated voltage (AC) Coil Rated voltage (AC) Coil Rated
designation designation designation voltage (DC)
50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz
AC12V 12V 12V AC220V 208-220V 220V DC24V 24VDC
AC24V 24V 24V AC230V 220-24DV 23D·240V DC48V 48VDC
AC48V 48-SDV 48·S0V AC26DV 24o-260V 260·280V DC100V 100VDC
AC100V 10CV l00·"l0V AC380V 346-380V 380V DC,l0V l,OVOC
AC120V 1l0-120V ll5-120V AC400V 380·41SV 400-440V DC12SV l20-125VDC
AC127V l25-l27V 127V AC440V 415·440V 46(}.480V DC200V 20QVDC
AC200V 200V 200·220V AC50QV SOOV 500·550V DC220V 220VDC
Note: AC operated cods are the same as those of S·N10 etc.. and DC operated cods are the same as those ofSD-N II etc.

41
4.1.2 Auxiliary Contact Blocks

- - - - Type Designation- - - - - - - - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- - -- - - -- - --- - - - - - - - - - -- - --- -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - --- - -- - - --


• Front clip-on types
UN-AXP ~ * I 2A2B I [FOR LOW SIGNAL LEVELl
UN- LL22 1Ef
t
POLES FINGER PROTECTION CONTACT FINGER PROTEC11ON
4 4 pole * None
ARRANGEMENTS
See Table 4.1.4
*I None
2 2 pole CX WnhFIP covers CX With F/P covers
• Side clip-on types
UN-AX11¥

FINGER PROTECTION

* WithNone
CX F/P covers
-----.---------------
Note: Mark * indicates a blank space.

• Ratings and characteristics .. (1)


Table412

Type UN- AX2 (CX) AX4 (CX) AX11(CX) Ll22 (CX)

2NO 4NO
1NO+1NC 3NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC'
Applicable contact arrangements INO+JNC
2NC 2N0+2NC [Standard] flow levelJ

Rated insulation voltage V 690 25a


Rated continuous current Ilh A 16 1
Rated 110VAC A 6 240VAC20mA
Category AC-15 (COS~;,a.95)
operating (coil load) 220VAC A 5
current 44DVAC A 3 4BVDC 100mA
(UR~1msec)
48VDC A 3 Minimum
Category DC·13 a.9
110VDe A operating current
(large coil toad) a.2
220VDC A 5VDC5mA
Mechanical life operations 10 million 2.5 million
Electrical nfe operations 0.5 million 0.5 million
Permissible ambient temperaturelhumidity °C/%RH -25 to +55/45 to 85
operations
SWitching frequency 1,800
/hour
Conductor size mm' 1.0to 2.5
.. ..
Note: 1. Contact reliabilIty may be decreased if ills operated more than 1 milliOn opera/iOns
..

• Selection guide & contact arrangements Table 4.1.2 (2)

UN-AX22A 53 63
UN-AX21A1B 51 63 UN-AX22B 51 ., UN-lL22

----t-~ "
53 71
I I
---(--1
'3

--l~--\ --+-~---(--'(
Front
c1ip-on
2NO 54 '4 1NO+1NC 52 54 2NC 52 .2
54 '4 72 .2
types UN-AX44A
53
I
---1--\-i~-\
.3
I
73
I
83
I
UN-AX43A18 53

---~--- I t-i--\ --+--t--1--\


61 73

I
63

I
UN-AX4 2A2B 53
Sl 71 83
U
standard
lowlevef

54
4NO 54 .4 74 54 3NO+1NC 62
" 54 2NO+2NC 54 62 72 84 1NO+1NC. ,NO+,NC

UN-AX"
53 61 83 71

Side
clip-on
types
---+-1 54 62
--+--(
When mount on left side
84
"
When mount on right side
1NO+INC

Note: FrOllt clIp-Oil types alld Side Cltp-Oll colllact block should not be mOllllled bOlh.

42
4.1.3 Contact Arrangements of Contactor Relay Table 4..
'3
With standard contacts
4NO 3NO 2ND
+ +

0. \---t-~--\
33 43 33 43
0.. \--l-+-\
A2 At 13
1
23 1NC A2 At 13 21 2NC A2 A' 13 21 31 43

D-:+--t-+-~
I I I I I I

14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
-
SA-N4(CX)AC······V 4A SA·N4(CX)AC······V 3A1B SA-N4(CX)AC······V 2A2B
SAD-N4(CX)DC······V 4A SAD-N4(CX)DC······V 3A1B SAD-N4(CX)DC······V 2A2B

With big capacity contacts


4NO 2ND
+
A2 Al 13 21 31 43
0. -\--l-+-\
A2 Al 13
I
23
I
33
I
43
I
2NC

o.-+--t--(--~
14 24 34 44 14 22 32 44

SA-N4JH(CX)AC······V 4A SA-N4JH(CX)AC······V 2A2B


SAD-N4JH(CX)DC······V 4A SRD-N4JH(CX}DC······V 2A2B

With late break contacts


3NO 2ND
+ A2 Al 13 21 33 43 + A2 Al 13 21 31 43
lNC 2NC
(late break)
o.-~~--t-~--\ (late break)
o..-\~--t--(--\
14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44

SA-N4LC(CX)AC:·····V 3A1B SA-N4LC(CX)AC······V 2A2B


SRD-N4LC(CX)DC······V 3A1B SRDwN4lC(CX)DC······V 2A28

Wrth mechanical latching


4NO 3NO 2ND

5
CLOSING CLOSING CLOSING
I' 'I55 +
1NC
I' , 1 +
2NC
\, ,I
~ 13
~lf_~~_~_55_~~]
A2. At 13 23 33 43 E1 . 21 33 43 El

~-t-~-+-)~-'~-~~]
a:
14243444 56 LMT
Me -t-++-+-t~~]
14 a:
22 34 44 56 L MT 1422 32 44 56 L MT rr
~ ~ ~

E2 E2 E2
SRL-N4 AC······V 4A SRL-N4 AC······y 3A18 SRl-N4 AC······V 2A28
SRLD·N4 DC······V 4A SRLD-N4 DC······V 3A1B SRLD-N4 OC·······V 2A2B

4.1.4 Spare Coils & Accessories


Spare coils and accessories are common with the series S-N contactors.
• Spare coils See Table 1.8.1 (except for Type SRL(D)latched relays)
• Surge absorbers(suppressors) .................................................................•......................................................•. See Table 1.8.6

4.1.5 Outline Dimensions


2 mig holes for M4 screws
M35 screws • Key to Dimensions
/ / 1 .. Mass
I Top Hat
Model C1 C2 (kg)
rail (3smm)
r'-'
i
i
..
I SR-N4(CX) 78 106 0.3

i i i
j
-r i
L._.
In
II
SRD-N4(CX)

SRL-N4(CX)
SRLD-N4(CX)
110

134
138

-
0.62

0.45

I
Cl ~
70 C2
i' I
(with side cnp-on aux. (with front clip-on au):;.
contact blocks) contact block)

Note: Front clip-on and side clip-on colltacl block should_nor be moumed both.

43
4.6 Pneumatic Time Delay Relays Series SRT-N

The MITSUBISHI series SRT pneumatic time delay relays are designed for general purpose time
delaying,such as star-delta starters and transfer panels.

• Features
• Easy delaying time adjustment • Mountable on ·35 mm DIN rails
• High contact reliability:By using bifurcated moving contacts,centact performance has been made
more reliable than ever.
• Finger protected types are available
• Manual testing
• 2 delayed contacts(1 N01 NC)&4 instantaneous conta,cts(2N02NC)
SRT-NN
- - - 'Type Designation' - --- -- - -, - - -- - - -- -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- --- -- --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----.- -. _. - -- - - -- -- - - - --

SRT cp - ~* I DC100vi
I
t
CONTROL CIRCUIT TYPEOFDE LAY FINGER PROTECTION CONTROLCOIL VOLTAGE
NN ON None Same as pag e 58, '.'
* AC
* Table 4.1.2
D DC NF OFF CX With FIP covers
- --_._----.-----. -.----.--.-------.--.----- --------------- -- - -- -
Note: Mark * indicates a blank space.
• Specifications • Contact arrangement
• Ratings & characteristics Table 4 61 Table 4.6.2
Adjustable delay time range sec. 0.11060 ON-delay OFF-delay
Type of contacts Delayed Instantaneous
" 57 55

~--------~ --~~------~
Rated continuous current Ith A 10 16
Rated category 11QVAC A 5 6
operating 220VAC A 3 S
currenl AC·15 440VAC
550VAC
A
A
1
1
3
3 "
13') "
( 26) (38)" "
(25)

¢r--~--~~-l-~ ¢--+_:~+-~
category 1,OVAC A 6 16
220VAC A 4 12
AC-12 440VAC A 1.5 5
550VAC A 1.5 5 A2Ib 14 22 32 44 A2Ib 14 2:2 32 44
category 24VDC A 1 5
48VDC A O.S 3 SRT-NNtCX)AC v SRT-NF(CX)AC V
DC·13 110VDC A 0.3 0.8
220VDC A 0.15 . 0.2 SRTD-NN(CX)DC v STRD-NF(CX)DC V
category 24VDC A 2 10
48VOC A 1 8 Notes: 1. f3~J4,43-441nstantaneous NO contacts
OG-12 110VDC A 0.6 5 23-24,33-34 Instantaneous Ne contacts
220VDC A 0.3 1 55-56.65-66 Delayed He contacts
Rated insulation voltage VAC 660 57-58,67-68 Delayed NO contacts
Mechanical life operations 1 million 2. Aux. con/act block should not be mounted.
Eleetricallife operalions 1 million 0.5 million
Repeat accuraCy % ±10
Min. pause time msec. 500 • Delay time characteristics
Min. energizing time AC operated msec. 15 Fig. 4.7.1
DC operated msec. 30
120
Permissible ambient temperature "C -5 toSS
Control coil voltage tolerance % 8510110 /
Make and break capacity AC limes 11
~ 90
(at rated operating current) DC times 2 g /
Average
operating
times
AC
operated
Make
Break
msec.
msec.
- 11
10
45
..
"'-
.g:
~

60 /
DC Make msec.
-
Coil
operated
AC
Break
Inrush
msec.
VA 50
10 •
~ / V-
/
consumption operated Sealed VA 10 30 / /
v
SWitching frequency

Vibration resistance
DC operated

la-55Hz
W
operations
/hour
nVs
7
1.800

19.6
3
o ----
V
90 180 270 300 330
Shock resistance 10rnsec. half sine wave nVs' 49 Dial rolation (degress)

Conductor size mm' 1.0102.5

44
• Pneumatic Time Delay Modules

Type UA-TR pneumatic time delay modules are designed for attachment to series S-K
contactors and SR-K contactor relays.

:- - - _.Type Designation - - -- - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .. _.. - - _.. - --- -- _.. - - - --

UN - TR4 ~LX ~
~
TYPE OF DELAY FINGER PROTECTION
AN oN * None

CX With FIP covers


UN-TR4AN

Note: Mark * indicates a blank space.

• Applicable contactor and relay selection Table 4 6 3


Type Type of delay Applicable contactors and relays
S-Nl0(CX),Nll (CX),N18(CX)
AC operated
SR-N4(DD)(CX)
UN-TR4AN(CX) ON delay
SD-Nll(CX)
DC operated.
SRD-N4( 0 0 )(CX)
Note: When thlS module lS mounted, au.x. contact block should not be mounted.

• Contact arrangement • Ratings & characteristics


ON-delay ...................._...... See delayed contacts of Table 4.7.1
• Delay time characteristics
67 55 Note: 55-56 Delayed NC
contQcts ................................................................... See Fig.4.7,1
67-68 Delayed NO
contacts

68 56
• Key to Dimensions
UN-TR4AN(CX)
Type A B Mass(kg)
SRT-NN(CX),
121.5 - 0.36
-NF(CX)
SRTD-NN(CX),
-NF(CX)
153.5 - 0.68

• Outline Dimensions UN-TR4AN(CXI - 48.5 0.06

2-mtg. holes for


Adjustment dial
M4 screws M3.5 screws

--..J.---J- 10
4
\ . 45
.1
1---,3,,5__+-\_ 4.5 ~l..\.< ---,A,,-- ___
45

45
SeriesSRE
4.2 Voltage Detection Relays

'=fl
"
"'. --
.~ ...." .
The MITSUBISHI series SRE relays are specially designed for voltage sensing.The type SRE-A
is specially designed for the detection of undervoltage or overvoltage conditions.The type SRE-K
is particularly useful for the switching of automatic transfer panels The type SRE-K can detect
undervoltage by simply connecting to the power-source termioals.

SRE-AA
• Features
.• High sensibility • High reliability • Easy wiring
• High surge tolerance • Wide detective voltage range
,- - .• Type Designation-'" --' - -- - .... - ---- -- - - - •• - -- - - .. -.-- --' - - ---- --- -- - •• , --' - - - - - - -. ---. - -- --. -- - - - •• -- - - -- -- -- .. ---- ...
SRE·A AU I 050 I cp SRE-K T AC120V

t t
OPERATJONVOLTAGE DETECTABLE DETECTABLE SEITING VOLTAGE
A 10o-110!2OD-220VAC
VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT TYPE * Drop-out voJlage

~ I
AU ,,5-120/230-240VAC See Table 4.2.1 DC T Pick-up voltage
AC

• Specifications
• Selection table Table421

Permissible Input
Type Detectable Operation
voltage range
input voltage impedance voltage
(continuous)
OP5D D.'-O.5VDC ± 100VDC 20KQ
lP5D
0050 ,.
O.3-1.5VDC
5VDC
+ 10QVDC
± 15QVDC
± 150VDC
50KQ
100Kn
Type SRE-AA
10o-"OV SO/60Hz
0150 3-1SVDC 100Kn
20Q-220V
SRE-AA 0500 lD-SOVDC ±20QVDC 500KQ
SRE-AAU 1500 30·1S0VOC ±300VOC 800Kn
2500 SD-2S0VDC + 300VDC 800Kn TypeSRE-MU
01SA 3~15VAC 1S0VAC 100Kn 11S-120V
OSOA lD-SOVAC 200VAC 500Kn 50/60Hz
23D-240V
150A 30-150VAC 30QVAC 800Kn
2s0A SD-250VAC 300VAC 800Kn
AC100V 75-105VAC 120VAC 10D-l10V,50/60Hz
AC120V 90~125VAC 132VAC Input 115-l20V,SO/60Hz
AC200V 15O-21oVAC 240VAC 1.8VA 2oD-22DV,SOJ60Hz
SRE·K AC240V 18D-25OVAC 264VAC 230-240V,50/60Hz
DC12V 9-l2.5VOC 14VDC 12VDC
Input
DC24V 18-25VDC 28VDC 1.7W 24VDC
DC100V 75-10SVDC 120VDC 100VDC
AC1QOV 8D-115VAC 120VAC 100-11 OV.SO/60Hz
AC120V 95·130VAC l32VAC Input 115-120V,50/60Hz
1.8VA
AC200V 160-230VAC 240VAC 200·220V,5D/60Hz
SRE·KT AC240V 190-260VAC 264VAC 230-24DV,So/60Hz
DC 12V lD-14VDC 14VDC 12VDC
Input
DC24V 20·28VDC 28VOC 24VDC
l.7W
DC10DV 80-11SVDC l20VDC 100VDC
Note: The Type SRE-A 0 D, for DC detectlon can be used/orfull-wave rectificaClon VO!lage.
• Operating Condition Fig421

YPE:SRE-AA1AAU,SRE-KT TYPE:SRE·K

Ol,llPul Output
relay relay

Selling value Selling value


v, T T V,

DrOP-Oul
~
OFF
iON
pick·up

• Vollage
Drop-oul
~
OFF
i
ON
Pick-Up

• Voltage
V, is about 90% of the setting value. V2 is-about 110% of the setting value.

46
"latings and characteristics TabJe422
Type SAE-A I SAE-K
Outpul contact arrangement 1 changeover
Rated continuous current of output contact Ith A 3
Category 110VAC A 1.5
Rated operating AC-15 22DVAC A 1.0
current of output
contact Category 24VDC A 1.0
DC·13 1,OVDC A 0.2
Repetitive operation' % - ±1
Accuracy Control vollage fluctuation % ±1.5 I -
Ambient temperature change % ±2.5
Response time{at 150% 9f the rated voltage) msec . 100to 200
Mechanical life operations 10 million
Electrical life operations 0.25 million
Permissible ambient temperaturelhumidity °C/%RH -10 to +55/max. 85
Power consumption VA 2
Operation voltage tolerance (ambient temperature 40°C) % 85t0110 I
Withstand voltage VAC 1500 [1 minute}
Insulation resistance (SOOVDC insulation tester) Mn min. 100
Vibration resistance 10 to 55Hz m/s' 19.6
C>hock resistance 10msec half sine wave mfs 2 98

Note: 1. Repetitive operation accuracy (%) = :t~21 x max. measuremenl- min. measurement X 100.
max. scale value

• Wiring precautions ..
Fig422

Type SRE·A Type SAE-K

- -
V,O- 7 8
- -7 8
I--

;:::J+
Power V,O-
~
(-.+)0-
source Power source I .... ~

*
common~

+
& defection
(-.-)0-
r- ~ 8
Detection
(-,+)0- '2 2
(-.-)

SRE·AA SRE-AAU
V1~CDmmon AC100 - 110V AC115 - 120V
V2-Comrnon AC200 - 220V AC230 - 240V

., Outline dimensions

M3.Sx8 93(terminal heignt)


sell.lihing lerminal

~
~
0
~

2-4.8x6.8
mtg holes
(for Mol screws)
l} 107
=1

47
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC WORLDWIDE SALES NETWORK
CountrylRegion Company name and address Telephone
Austrana Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty., Ltd., 348 Victoria Road, P.O. Box 11, Rydalmere NSW 2166, Australia 612~9684-7245
Belgium Emac S.A., Industrialaan 1, 1702 Groot-Bijgaardeh, Belgium 32-2-4810211
Chne Rhona S.A., Vte. Agua Sanla 4211 Casilla (P.O. Box) 3Q..D Vina Del Mar. Chile 032-610896
China Setsuyo Auschina Electric Co. Ltd•• Innobation Center Bldg., Room No. 406A Guiping Road, Shanghai,
China 02;1-6495-6611
Ryoden International Ud., (ShanghaO, Rat G, H, J, 4F Jin Ming Bldg., Block 2.8, Zuo Vi R?ad South,
Shanghai, China 021-6275-83n
Colombia Proelectrico Ltda, Carrera 43G No. 27~12, P.O. Box 4346, Medellin, Colombia .2322300
Denmark ELPEFA MS., Geminivej 32, DK-2l}70 Greve, Denmark 45-43-694369
·Egypt Cairo 8ectrical Group 9, Rostoum Street, Appt #5 Garden City, P.O. Box 11516-165, Maclis EIOl/aad,
Cairo, Egypt. 20-2-3561337
Germany Mitsublshi Electric Europe B.V., German Branch, Gather Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany 49-2102-4860
Greece Drepanias Anton SA, Lenormanman Str•. 193, 104 42 Athens, Greece 30-1&.141910
Hong Kong Ryoden internalional Ltd., 101F Manulife Tower, 169 8ectric Road. North Point, Hong Kong 28878~70
Indonesia P.T. Sahabat Indonesia, JI Muara Karang Selatan Blok NUtara No.1. Kav No.l1 P.O. Box:
50451Jak'artat11050, Jakarta, Indonesia 6621780
Ireland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V., Irish Branch, Westage Business Park, Ballyffiount, Dublin 22,lreland 353-1-4505007
Israel Gino Industries, 3 Ophir St, 32235 Haifa, Israel 972-4-8670656
Italy Carpaneto 10090 Caseine Vica-Rlvolf (To), Via Ferrero, 10-Ang. Pavia 6 Italy 39~11-9590111
Korea STCTechno Seoul Co., ltd. (Setsuyo), 2A. Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg. 660-11, Deungchon-Oong,
Kanguseo-Gu, SeoUl, Korea 02-3664-8333
Kuwait Salem M AJ:.Nisf 8ectrical Co. W.LL, P.O. Box 871, Safat, Kuwait 710036
Lao PDR Societe lao Import-Export,43-47 Lane Xang Road, P.O. Box 2789, vr
Vientiane. Lao PDR 21-215043,21-215110
Lebanon Comptoir d'Electricite Generate-Uban, Cebaco Center-Block A, Autostrade Dora, P.O. Box 90-953, Beirut,
Lebanon 961-1-896610
Peace Myanmar Electric Co., Ltd., No. 216, Bo Aung Gyaw Street. Botataung 11161, Yangon. Myanmar
Myanmar
Wait & Voll House COO! ltd., KHA2-65, Volt House Dilll Bazar, P.O. Box 2108, Kathmandu. Nepal
951-.:?95426 .,
Nepal 9n~1-411330 .
Netherlands R-l:H Technology B.V.,lndustrieweg 3D, 3361 HJ Sliedrecht, Netherlands 31-104871521
New Zealand Melco Sales (N.z.) Ltd., 1 Parliament Street, Lower Hut1, New Zealand 644-56g.7350
Norway SCANELECAS. 5074 Godvik Leirvikasen 438, Norway 47-55~506000
Pakistan Prince Electric Co., 16 Brandreth Road Lahore 54000, Pakistan 7654342
Peru I.T.E.,lngenieross.a, Paseo de'la Republica 3573, lima 27, Peru .5114-4H825
Philippines E'dison Electric Integrated Inc., 24th A. Galleria Corporate Cenler, Edsa Cr. Ortigas Ave., Quezon city,
Metro Manila, Philippines ' 02-643-8691
·Poland .MPL Technology Sp Zo.o., UI, Wroclawska 53, 30011 Krakow, Poland 4a.12-322885
Saudi Arabia Center of Electrical Goods; AI-Nabhanlya Street-4th Crossing AI-Hassa Road, P.O. Box 15955, Riyadh
11454, Saudi Arabia 966-1-4n0149
Singapore MUsubishi Electric ?ales, Singapore Ply. Ltd., No_6, Commonwealth Lane #01-01 Singapore 149547 65-4767439
Slovenia INEA, Ljubijanska ao, 61230 Domzale. Slovenia· 386-61-718000
South Africa M.S.A. Manufacturing (Ply) Ltd., Bramley 2018, Johannesburg, South Africa 011-444-8080
Spain Mitsubishi 8ectric Europe B.V., Spanish Branch (Barcelona), Pofingono industrial "Can Magi", Calle
Joan Bascalla 2-4, Apartado de Correos 420, 08190 Sant Cugat del Valles, Barcelona, Spain 34-3-565-3131
Sweden Euro Energy Components AS, Energigatan 15 S-43422 Kungsbacka Sweden (0)300-51800
Switzerland Trietec A G., MQhlenstra~se 136, 8200 Schafthausen, Switzerland 41 ~52-6258425
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co.• Ltd., 8th R. No_88 Sec. 6. Chung.Shan N. Rd., Taipei. Taiwan, ROC 02~2381-3015
Thailand United Trading & Import Co. Ltd., n/12 Bumrung Muag Road, Klang Mahanak, Pomprab, Bangkok
10100, Thailand 223-4220
Turkey HEDEF, Balmumcu-Istanbul Barboros Bulv. iba Bloklari Gazi Umur P. So Turkey ,90-212-2754876
UK MUsubishi Electric Europe B.V., UK Branch. Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts AL 108 XB, England, U.K 44-1707-276-100
U.S.A Mitsubishl Electric Automation, Inc., 500 corporate Woods Parkway a47·478~21 00
Uruguay Fierro Vignoti SA, Avda, 1274 MonteVideo, UnJguay 920808
Venezuela Adesco CA, Apartado de Correos 78034 Caracas 1074A, Venezuela 2422348
Vietnam Sa Giang Techno Co., Ltd. (Setsuyo), 207 Nguyen Van Thu Sl., Dist 1 HeMe, Vietnam 848~B21-5450

Safety tip: Be sure to read the instruction manual thoroughly before using these products.

J.. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION


HEAD OFFiCE: MITSUS1SHl DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310. JAPAN

SDK-D8749-2
ReviSed publication eflecUve Sep. 1999,
l(NA)7410921S-G(9909)ROD Specifications Subject 10 change without oolice.
FAULT INDICATOR (TYPE: TFU-23)

SDK-M8608 (1/6)
This indicator, model TFU has an electromagnetic coil to display an instantaneous
fault or a continuous one and by a solenoid as well as the solenoid-operated four switching
contacts, the indicator can give many options for users.
Changing combination of the built-in contacts, a number of specified indicators
are available and by bringing these into practice, high-degree or simplified
indicating circuits can be obtainable.

Features
(1) Multi-function
Changed combination of the built-in switching contacts for getting three
output circuits, this indicator itself can fully work likewise can do a conventional
indicator with auxiliary relays.

(2) Economizer
No need of auxiliary relays, simplification of wiring and miniaturization
of the panel can be achieved.

(3) More options


Beside more than ten standardized types, specified types can be produced.

(4) Easier for monitoring


Thanks to larger detector-window and its card holder, it is much easier
to check. Furthermore, it is easy to change the cards and plastic ones
can be used.

(5) Easy to change circuits


Because of plug-in-junction, it is easy to change the circuits.

Uses
For indicating any faults on the facilities at power plants or substations
and faults, instantaneous or continuous ones, in power systems by linking
with related protective relays.

Composition
The indicator case is panel showing detecting window, reset button and card
holder at the front side and eight plug-in terminals for outgoing at the back side.
All parts inside of the case can be drawn out as a cassette in the forward direction
after front cover is removed.
SDK-M8608 (2/6)
when fault detecting signal comes in, the operating solenoid is energized to
change the cards from black one indicating no fault to orange one indicating fault
having occurred.
Then, push the reset button, the orange card disappears.
And black card comes back if the fault is a instantaneous one or black with orange
stripes card appears if the fault is a continuous one. Upon the fault goes away, the
black card comes back again. Accordingly two sWitching contacts (30) follow the above
sequence by way of closing or opening which is depend on input signals. In other words,
contact Ta synchronizes with orange color display card and contact Tb which follows
reset button having been pushed after display of orange card, synchronizes with input
signals in either case energized or de-energized. That is, Tb keeps as it is when being
energized even after reset button operated.
Many kinds of circuits can be available by changing combinations of these three
contacts which have their own roles. The most characteristic one among them is a series
circuit of the contact for 30 and contact" b " of Tb. In this circuit, output can
hold about 50 ms only when initial stage. Making use of time interval for dropping of
the display card, it can get the short period output very definitely. in case of no
voltage detection by contact" b ", the sequence goes as the above does.

SDK-M860a (3/6)
Fault indicator type TFU with flags

Specification

1 Type TFU

2 Size 40W x 70H x 127D (mm)

3 Weight 400g

4 Color Display panel


Normal ........ Black
Accident ....... Orange
Reset ....... Stripes
(during accident) ....... (Black and Orange)

Frame •. .•••. N1.5

5 Action Double type display

6 Withstanding Voltage
AC2,000V,1min
(AC1 ,OOOV, 1min between open contacts)

7 Life 20,000 times (electrical and mechanical)

8 Capacity of internal contact


Continuous current · .. ····3A
Interrupting current ...•... O.4A (R load)

0.1A (L load,UR=12ms)

SDK-M8608 (4/6)
9 Coil
Rating Impedance Continuous current Insulation Use
(Ohm) Capacity Level
DC220V 17000 110% of rating E a contact driving

DC110V 7000 130% of rating A a contact driving


DC48V 13000 130% of rating A a contact driving
DC24V 340 130% of rating A a contact driving

DC220V 24000 130% of rating E b contact driving


DC110V 9000 150% of rating E b contact driving
DC48V 17000 150% of rating E b contact driving
DC24V 430 150% of rating E b contact driving

2A 0.3 130% of rating A current driving


1A 1 130% of rating A current driving
0.5A 4 130% of rating A current driving
0.25A 15.7 130% of rating A current driving

AC110V 2250 115% of rating A a contact driving


DC125V 7000 130% of rating A a contact driving

Note 1. short-time rating (1 sec.):current driving use

500% of rating

SDK-M8608 (5/6)
FAULT INDICATOR (TYPE TFU-23)

110

CARD HOLDER
i rr=: ,
~

I
I 1.-11
.... "'
0
I
I
"'
III! ! ~~ III
I c
l'= I q III DISPLAY PANEL
I

\ RESET PUSH BUTTON

OUTLI NE DRAW I NG

I
~ 200 1
I, 4003
---+--f- 0 0
6005
: B007
I. 35~O. 5 .1
PANEL CUT TERMINAL BLOCK

In,
1- I T -
F~;--J L
-1

I:
---0- - --0-- - --0-
SR1 --.J I I I;--J

: !
'
1
----1----1 '
SR2

BLACK~~
--.J I I r;--J
I
!
L_ t t __o-J ! DISPLAY ORANGE --.J I
I;--J I
STRIPES I ~r I L
(BLACK AND DRANGE)~
N
RESET P. B. / n
SR1 SR2

CI RCU IT DIAGRAM WORKING PATTERN

SDK-Ma6Da (6/6)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• For heating, cooling and year-round air conditioning.
• U5ed for low or line voltage,
• Using bellows, accurate room temperature control is
assured.
• Type HRS", Horizontal model
Type VRS", Vertical model
• 2 Step model is also available, with step temp, 2·C.
• Ambient temperature: -10 to 50'C
TypeHRS

TypeVRS

TYPE NUMBER SELECTION (SPECIFICATIONS) Unit··C


Range
Catalog No. Control Function & Interrial Function
Differential Wt,
(In air) (kg)
Min. Max,

H~12D
-5 20
~120

HR.S-C1;34

VF<~134
'0 35
r?\ Standard SPDT
0.24

n'"
HR&-<:;120S$
-5 20
VRS-C120S5.
1,5
(FiXed)
HRS-C134S5
'0 35
VR$.C134S5 With Selector Switch
0.25
HRs;.C120SI1

'~~~~l"
-5 20
VRS-C120SI1

HR$-C134S11
(0 L H
10 35
VRS-C134S11 With Selector Switch

rt\ rt\
HRS-C234
Each step
'0 35 ',5
(Fixed)
0.26

VRS-C234
2 Step Model
. c: Common terminal L: Close on temperature Increase H: Close on temperature decrease

ELECTRICAL RATINGS DIMENSIONS


Power 1 Step Model 2 Step Model
~M
Rated Amps. (A) Fa~~~
(cos ) 125V.AC 250V.AC 125V. AC 250V.AC
Non~lnductlve Current 1 8,5 4.5
• 2
Inductive
CLirrent
I Full Load
I Locked Rotor
• MinImum contact capacity. SOmA
0.75
0.45
6.8
35
3.'
25 16 8
-
ij I
f---'--

I
i
71

Unltmm

SDK-N8467

Anda mungkin juga menyukai